i 


* 


/ 


* 


i . 


. 


f 


' 


I 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2018  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/heimskringlaorsa04snor 


THE  HEIMS KR IN GLA 


SAMUEL  LAING. 


VOLUME  THE  FOURTH. 


PUBLISHERS'  NOTE. 

Five  hundred  <md  twenty  copies  i?i  all  of  this  book  printed 
for  A  merica  and  England.  Each  copy  is  numbered  as  issued. 
Type  distributed. 


No.  /$.(,. 


THE  HEIMSKRINGLA 


OR 

THE  SAGAS  OF 

THE  NORSE  KINGS 

FROM  THE  ICELANDIC  OF  SNORRE  STURLASON 


SAMUEL  LAING,  Esq. 


SECOND  EDITION,  REVISED,  WITH  NOTES 

BY 

RASMUS  B.  ANDERSON,  LL.D. 

UNITED  STATES  MINISTER  TO  DENMARK 

AUTHOR  OF  <l  NORSE  MYTHOLOGY,”  “VIKING  TALES  OF  THE  NORTH,  AND  OTHER  WORKS 


mitb  Gwo  /Iftaps 


IN  FOUR  VOLUME  S 

VOLUME  THE  FOURTEI 


NEW  YORK 

SCRIBNER  &  WEE  E  O R D 

743  &  745  BROADWAY 


MDCCCLXXXIX 


Copyright ,  iSSg.  Scribner  Welford. 


CONTENTS 


HARALD  HARDRADE’S  SAGA. — Continued. 

CHAPTER  LXII. 

PAGE 

King  Harald’s  Challenge . i 

CHAPTER  LXIII. 

Of  King  Harald’s  Fleet . 3 

CHAPTER  LX IV. 


Of  King  Svein’s  Armament . 5 

CHAPTER  LXV. 

Beginning  of  the  Battle  of  Nis-river . 6 

CHAPTER  LXVI. 

King  Svein’s  Flight . 9 

CHAPTER  LXVII. 

Of  King  Harald . 1 1 

CHAPTER  LXVIII. 

Fin  Arnason  gets  Quarter . 12 

CHAPTER  LXIX. 

Of  King  Svein . 13 

CHAPTER  LXX. 

Of  the  Talk  of  the  Court-men  . . 14 

OL.  IV.  b 


VI 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  LXXI. 

PAGE 

Of  the  Attempt  to  take  Earl  Hakon . 15 

CHAPTER  LXXII. 

Of  Earl  Hakon . 16 

CHAPTER  LXXIII. 

Agreement  between  King  Harald  and  King  Svein  .  .  17 

CHAPTER  LXXIV. 

King  Harald’s  Battle  with  Earl  Hakon  ....  20 

CHAPTER  LXXV. 

Death  of  Hal,  the  Murderer  of  Kodran  ....  22 

CHAPTER  LXXYI. 

Of  King  Harald . 24 

CHAPTER  LXXVII. 

Of  the  Kings  of  England . 25 

CHAPTER  LXXVIII. 

Of  Harald  Godwinson . 26 

CHAPTER  LXXIX. 

King  Edward’s  Death . 27 

CHAPTER  LXXX. 

Harald  Godwinson  made  King  of  England  .  .  .28 

CHAPTER  LXXXI. 

Earl  Toste’s  Expedition  to  Denmark . 29 

CHAPTER  LXXXI  J. 

Earl  Toste’s  Expedition  to  Norway . 31 

CHAPTER  LXXXIII. 


Gyrd’s  Dream 


33 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  LXXXIV. 

Thord’s  Dream . 

CHAPTER  LXXXV. 

King  Harald’s  Dream  .... 

CHAPTER  LXXXYI. 

Battle  at  Scarborough  .... 

CHAPTER  LXXXVII. 

Of  Harald’s  Order  of  Battle 

CHAPTER  LXXXVII I. 

The  Battle  at  the  Humber  . 

CHAPTER  LXXXIX. 

Of  Earl  Toste . 

CHAPTER  XC. 

Of  King  Harald’s  Landing 

CHAPTER  XCI. 

Of  Earl  Toste’s  Counsel. 

CHAPTER  XCII. 

Of  King  Harald’s  Array 

CHAPTER  XCIII. 

Of  King  Harald  Godwinson  . 

CHAPTER  XCIV. 

Of  the  Troop  of  the  Nobility 

CHAPTER  XCV. 

Of  the  Beginning  of  the  Battle  . 

CHAPTER  XCVI. 


Fall  of  King  Harald 


Vlll 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XCYII. 

Skirmish  of  Orre . 

PAGE 

.  .  48 

CHAPTER  XCYIII. 

Of  Styrkar  the  Marshal . 

•  49 

CHAPTER  XCIX. 

Of  William  the  Bastard . 

50 

CHAPTER  C. 

Fall  of  King  Harald  Godwinson  . 

.  51 

CHAPTER  CL 

Earl  Yalthiof’s  Heath . 

52 

CHAPTERS  CII.  and  CIII. 

Of  Olaf  Haraldson’s  Expedition  to  Norway 

•  53 

CHAPTER  CIY. 

Of  King  Harald  Sigurdson . 

•  55 

CHAPTER  CY. 

King  Harald  and  King  Olaf  Compared 

•  57 

CHAPTER  CYI. 

King  Magnus’s  Heath . 

.  .  58 

X. 

SAGA  OF  OLAF  KYRRE. 

Preliminary  Remarks . 

60 

CHAPTER  I. 

Olaf’s  Personal  Appearance  .  .  .  . 

.  .  60 

CONTENTS. 


IX 


CHAPTER  II. 

Op  King  Olaf’s  Manner  op  Living . 

CHAPTER  III. 

Fashion  op  King  Olaf’s  Court . 

CHAPTER  IY. 

Arrangement  op  King  Olaf’s  Court . 

CHAPTER  V. 

King  Svein  Ulfson’s  Death . 

CHAPTER  YI. 

Miracles  of  King  Olap  the  Saint . 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Of  the  Shrine  op  King  Olaf  the  Saint  .... 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

King  Olap  was  Blessed  with  Peace . 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Meeting  op  Olaf  Kyrre  and  Canute  the  Saint,  and 
their  Preparations  against  England  . 

CHAPTER  X. 

Op  Olap  Kyrre  and  a  Bonde  who  understood  the  Lan¬ 
guage  or  Birds  . 


CHAPTER  XI. 


PAGE 

61 

62 

63 

64 

64 

65 

66 

67 

63 


Op  King  Olap  Kyrre’s  Death. 


72 


X 


CONTENTS. 


XI. 

MAGNUS  BAREFOOT’S  SAGA. 

PAGE 

Preliminary  Remarks . 73 


CHAPTER  I. 

Beginning  of  the  Reign  of  King  Magnus  and  his  Cousin 
Hakon . 


CHAPTER  II. 


Hakon’s  Death  . 


CHAPTER  III. 


Of  a  Foray  in  Halland  . 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Of  Thorer  of  Steig  .... 

CHAPTER  V. 


Of  Thorer’s  Adventures  ...... 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Death  of  Thorer  and  Egil  .  ... 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Of  the  Punishment  of  the  Throndhjem  people  . 


73 

74 

76 

77 

73 

79 

81 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

Of  the  Bonde  Sveinke,  and  Sigurd  Ulstreng  ...  82 

CHAPTER  IX. 

King  Magnus  makes  War  on  the  Southern  Hebudes  .  91 

CHAPTER  X. 

Of  Lagman,  King  Gudrod’s  Son . 92 


CONTENTS. 


xi 


CHAPTER  XI. 

rPAGE 

Of  the  Fall  of  Earl  Huge  the  Brave  93 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Death  of  the  Earls  of  Orkney . 95 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Quarrels  of  King  Magnus  and  King  Inge  .  .  .96 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Of  the  Northmen . 97 

CHAPTER  XY. 

King  Magnus  and  Giparde . 98 

CHAPTER  XYI. 

Battle  at  Foxerne . 101 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

Meeting  of  the  Kings  at  the  Gaut  River  .  .  .  .102 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

King  Magnus’s  Marriage . 103 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

Of  the  Quarrel  of  King  Magnus  and  Skopte  Ogmundson  105 

CHAPTER  XX.  ’ 

Fin  Skoptason’s  Proceedings . 106 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

Ogmund  Skoptason’s  Proceedings . 106 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

Skopte  Ogmundson’s  Voyage  Abroad . 107 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

Miracle  of  King  Olaf  the  Saint  at  a  Fire  .  .  •  107 


Xll 


.CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XXIY. 

Miracle  of  King  Olaf  the  Saint  on  a  Lame  Woman 


PAGE 

108 


CHAPTER  XXY. 

War  in  Ireland . 


108 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 

King  Magnus’s  Foray  on  the  Land 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Fall  of  King  Magnus  • 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Of  King  Magnus  and  Vidkun  Jonson . n3 


XII. 

SAGA  OF  SIGURD  THE  CRUSADER  AND  HIS  BROTHERS 

EYSTEIN  AND  OLAF. 

Preliminary  Remarks  .  •  •  •  •  •  *  1 1 


CHAPTER  I. 

Beginning  of  the  Reign  of  King  Magnus’s  Sons  .  .  1 1 5 

CHAPTER  II. 

Of  the  Earls  of  Orkney . 11 ^ 


CHAPTER  III. 

King  Sigurd’s  Journey  out  of  the  Country 


CHAPTER  IV. 

Of  King  Sigurd’s  Journey 


CONTENTS. 


xm 


CHAPTER  Y. 

Lisbon  taken . 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Battle  in  the  Island  Forminterra . 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Of  the  Battles  at  Iviza  and  Manork  (Minorca) 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Duke  Roger  made  a  King . 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Of  King  Roger . 

CHAPTER  X. 

King  Sigurd’s  Expedition  to  Palestine  . 

CHAPTER  XI. 

SlDON  TAKEN  . 

CHAPTER  XII. 

King  Sigurd’s  Expedition  to  Constantinople 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

King  Sigurd  makes  a  great  Feast  for  the  Emperor 
of  Constantinople . 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

King  Sigurd  the  Crusader’s  return  Home  . 

CHAPTER  XV. 

King  Eystein’s  Doings  at  Home  in  the  Meantime 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

Of  King  Eystein 

VOL.  IV. 


PAGE 

119 


120 


123 


124 


124 


125 


126 


128 


130 


131 


132 


c 


1 33 


XIV 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  NYII. 


PAGE 


Of  King  Eystein’s  Perfections  of  Body  and  Mind 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Of  Ivar  Ingimundson . 

CHAPTER  XIX. 


Of  King  Sigurd . 

CHAPTER  XX. 

Of  King  Sigurd’s  Dream  . 

CHAPTER  XXI. 


134 

135 

137 

138 


Of  King  Sigurd’s  Marriage  .  . . I4I 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

Here  begins  the  Account  of  the  Cases  before  the  Thing  141 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

Of  King  Olaf’s  Death  ..... 

CHAPTER  XXIY. 

Magnus  the  Blind  ;  his  Birth 

CHAPTER  XX Y. 

Comparison  between  the  Two  Kings 

CHAPTER  XXYI. 

Of  King  Sigurd’s  Sickness  .... 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Of  King  Eystein’s  Death  . 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Of  the  Baptizing  the  People  of  Smaland  . 


147 


148 


149 


•  153 


.  154 


i55 


CONTENTS. 


xv 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

Of  Thorarin  Stutfeld . 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

Of  Sigurd  and  Ottar  Birting  ....... 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 

Of  King  Sigurd’s  Dream . 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 

Of  Aslak  Hane . 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

Of  a  Woman  brought  one  night  in  Yule  to  the  King 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 

Harald  Gille  comes  to  Norway . 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 

Of  a  Race  between  Magnus  and  Harald  Gille  . 

CHAPTER  XXXVI. 

Of  Sigurd’s  Swimming . 

CHAPTER  XXXVII. 

Of  Harald  and  Svein  Rimhildson . 

CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 

Of  King  Olaf’s  Miracle  on  a  Man  whose  Tongue  had 
been  cut  out  . 

CHAPTER  XXXIX. 

Of  King  Olaf’s  Miracle  with  a  Prisoner 

CHAPTER  XL. 

King  Sigurd  Marries  Cecilia 


PAGE 

156 

159 

162 

163 

165 

166 

l67 

170 

171 

173 

174 


1 77 


XVI 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XLI. 

Improvement  of  the  Merchant  Town  of  Konungahella  . 

CHAPTER  XLII. 

King  Sigurd’s  Death . 


XIII. 

SAGA  OF  MAGNUS  THE  BLIND  AND  OF  HARALD 

GILLE. 


Preliminary  Remarks 


CHAPTER  I. 

Magnus  and  Harald  proclaimed  Kings 

CHAPTER  II. 

Of  the  Forces  of  Harald  and  Magnus 


CHAPTER  III. 


Battle  at  Fyrileif 


•  • 


CHAPTER  IY. 

Death  of  Asbiorn  and  of  Nereid  . 

CHAPTER  V. 

Of  the  Counsels  proposed 


CHAPTER  VI. 


Of  Harald’s  Force 


•  • 


CHAPTER  VII. 

King  Magnus  taken  Prisoner 


PAGE 

180 


1 8 1 


182 


182 


184 


186 


188 


189 


191 


192 


CONTENTS. 


xvn 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

PAGE 

King  Magnus  Mutilated . •  .  .193 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Extraordinary  Omens  in  Konungahella  ....  194 

CHAPTER  X. 

The  Rise  of  War  in  Konungahella . 196 


The  Second  Battle 

CHAPTER  XI. 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Of  Magnus  the  Blind . 204 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Of  King  Harald  Gille  and  Bishop  Magnus  .  .  .  205 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

The  Beginning  of  Sigurd  Slembidjakn  ....  207 


Sigurd  in  Iceland 

CHAPTER  XV. 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

Of  Sigurd  Slembe .  .210 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

Treachery  towards  King  Harald . 212 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 


Murder  of  King  Harald 


213 


xvm 


CONTENTS. 


XIV. 

SAGA  OF  SIGURD,  INGE,  AND  EYSTEIN,  THE  SONS  OF 

HARALD. 

PAGE 


Preliminary  Remarks . 215 

CHAPTER  I. 

Beginning  of  the  History  of  the  Kings  Sigurd  and  Inge.  215 

CHAPTER  II. 


Of  Sigurd  Slembidjakn  . 

CHAPTER  III. 

King  Eirik’s  Expedition  to  Norway 

CHAPTER  IY. 

The  Town  of  Oslo  Burnt 

CHAPTER  Y. 


216 


220 


221 


Of  Sigurd  Slembidjakn  .  .  .  . 

CHAPTER  VI. 

The  Murder  of  Beintein  . 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Of  Sigurd  Slembe’s  Campaign  . 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Of  King  Inge’s  Letter  to  King  Sigurd 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Ottar  Birting’s  Speech  . 

CHAPTER  X. 

Fall  of  Magnus  the  Blind 


223 


226 


228 


229 


230 


CONTENTS. 


xix 


CHAPTER  XI. 

Sigurd  Slembe  taken  Prisoner  . 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Torture  of  Sigurd  Slembe  . 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Eystein  Haraldson  comes  to  Norway  ;  and  the  Beginning 
of  Magnus  Haraldson . 

CHAPTER  XIY. 

Murder  of  Ottar  Birting . 

CHAPTER  XV. 

Beginning  of  King  Eystein  Haraldson . 

CHAPTER  XYI. 

Beginning  of  Orm  the  King-Brother  . 

CHAPTER  XYII. 

Journey  of  Erling  Skakke  and  Earl  Ragnvald  to  Foreign 
Parts  . 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Birth  of  Hakon  Herdibreid  .... 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

Of  Eystein  and  the  Peasants  of  Hising  Isle 


CHAPTER  XX. 

The  War  Expedition  of  King  Eystein  Haraldson 

CHAPTER  XXI. 


PAGE 

233 


234 


236 


2  37 


238 


239 


239 


241 


242 


243 


Of  Harald’s  Sons 


.  245 


XX 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

Of  the  Habits  and  Manners  of  Harald’s  Sons  . 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

Cardinal  Nikolas  comes  to  the  Country  .  .  .  . 

•  a  i  6 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 

Miracle  of  King  Olaf . 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

Miracles  of  King  Olaf  on  Richard . 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

The  Kings  Inge  and  Sigurd  hold  a  Thing  in  the  Holm  . 

CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Of  Gregorius  Dagson . 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Of  King  Sigurd’s  Fall . 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

Of  Gregorius  Dagson  .... 

•••••• 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

Reconciliation  of  the  Kings  Eystein  and  Inge  . 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 

Of  Eystein  and  Inge . 

CHAPTER  XXXII. 

King  Eystein’s  Death  ...  .  . 


PAGE 

246 

248 

249 

250 

253 

255 

257 

258 

259 

261 


CONTENTS. 


xxi 


XV. 

SAGA  OF  HAKON  HERDIBREID  (HAKON  THE  BROAD- 

SHOULDERED). 


Preliminary  Remarks 


PAGE 

.  265 


CHAPTER  I. 

Beginning  of  Hakon  Herdibreid  . 


.  265 


CHAPTER  II. 


Of  Gregorius  Dagson 


.  266 


CHAPTER  III. 


King  Hakon’s  Flight 


267 


CHAPTER  IV. 

Fall  of  Gyrd  and  Havard 


268 


CHAPTER  V. 

Of  the  Consultations  of  King  Inge 


.  269 


CHAPTER  VI. 


Erling’s  Speech 


271 


CHAPTER  VII. 


Of  Hakon’s  Fleet  . 


272 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

Sigurd  of  Reyr’s  Speech 


274 


CHAPTER  IX. 


Of  King  Inge’s  Men 


•  • 


•  • 


275 


CHAPTER  X. 


Beginning  of  the  Battle 


2  77 


XXII 


CONTENTS. 


King  Hakon’s  Flight 

CHAPTER  XI. 

PAGE 

. 279 

CHAPTER  XII. 

The  Conflict  upon  the  Piers 


Munan’s  Death 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

. 284 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Of  the  Fall  of  Gregorius  Dagson . 285 

CHAPTER  XV. 

King  Inge  hears  of  Gregorius’s  Fall  ....  287 


Of  King  Inge  . 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

. 288 

King  Inge’s  Speech  . 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

.  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  289 

King  Inge’s  Fall 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

•  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  2Q I 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

Of  King  Hakon  and  Queen  Kristin . 292 


Of  Olaf’s  Miracle  . 

CHAPTER  XX. 

.  .  .  *  •  •  •  •  293 

1 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

Of  King  Olaf’s  Miracle  in  Favour  of  the  Varings  of 

Constantinople . 295 


CONTENTS.  xxiii 

XVI. 

MAGNUS  ERLINGSON’S  SAGA. 

PAGE 

Preliminary  Remarks . 298 

CHAPTER  I. 

Of  Magnus  Erlingson’s  Beginning . 298 

CHAPTER  II. 

King  Magnus  goes  to  Denmark . 300 

CHAPTER  III. 

Battle  of  Tunsberg . 301 

CHAPTER  IV. 

Of  Erling  and  Hakon . 304 

CHAPTER  V. 

Of  Erling’s  People . 304 

CHAPTER  YI. 

Of  Erling  Skakke . 306 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Fall  of  King  Hakon . 308 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Flight  of  the  Chiefs  of  King  Hakon’ s  Men  .  .  .  310 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Of  King  Sigurd’s  Beginning . 31 1 

CHAPTER  X. 

Earl  Sigurd’s  Condemnation . 312 


XXIV 


CONTENTS. 


Of  Erling 


CHAPTER  XL 


CHAPTER  XII. 

Erling  gets  News  of  Earl  Sigurd 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Of  Earl  Sigurd’s  Battle  Array  . 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

Earl  Sigurd’s  Fall . 


CHAPTER  XY. 

Of  Markus  of  Skog,  and  King  Sigurd  Sigurdson 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

Beignning  of  Archbishop  Eystein  .... 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

Of  Markus  and  King  Sigurd  .  .  .  . 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Markus  and  King  Sigurd  Killed  . 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

Of  Erling  and  the  People  of  Hising  Isle  . 


CHAPTER  XX. 

Of  the  Death  of  Frirek  Keina  and  Biarne 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

Conference  between  Erling  Skakke  and  Archbishop 
Eystein . .  .  . 


PAGE 

313 

314 

316 

317 

318 

319 

320 

321 

322 

323 

324 


CONTENTS. 


XXV 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

King  Magnus’s  Consecration  . 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

King  Valdemar’s  Embassy 


CHAPTER  XXIY. 

Of  Erling  and  the  People  of  Viken  . 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

Of  the  Letters  of  the  Throndhjem  People 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 

Of  Erling  and  the  People  of  Throndhjem  . 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

Of  King  Valdemar’s  Expedition  to  Norway 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

Of  Erling’s  Expedition  to  Jutland 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

Of  Erling’s  Expedition  to  Denmark 


CHAPTER  XXX. 

Conversation  between  King  Valdemar  and  Erling  . 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 


Beginning  of  Olaf 


CHAPTER  XXXII. 


PAGE 

•  327 

.  328 

•  329 

•  330 

•  331 

•  33  2 

•  333 

•  334 

•  336 

•  337 


Of  Erling  . 


338 


XXVI 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

Battle  at  Rydiokul . 


CHAPTER  XXXIY. 

Battle  at  Stangar . 


Harald’s  Death 


CHAPTER  XXXV. 


CHAPTER  XXXVI. 

Of  Eystein  Eysteinson  and  the  Birkibeins  . 


CHAPTER  XXXVII. 

Of  the  Birkibeins,  King  Eystein,  and  Erling  Skakke 


Of  Nikolas. 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 


CHAPTER  XXXIX. 

Of  Eirik  and  Nikolas  .... 


CHAPTER  XL. 

The  Fall  of  Nikolas 


CHAPTER  XLI. 

Eystein  proclaimed  King. 


CHAPTER  XLII. 

The  Fall  of  King  Eystein 


CHAPTER  XLIII. 


PAGE 

339 


340 


•  340 


•  34i 


•  343 


344 


•  344 


•  345 


•  346 


•  347 


Of  the  Birkibeins 


•  349 


CONTENTS. 


XXVll 


CHAPTER  XLIV. 

PAGE 

Of  King  Magnus  Erlingson  ....  •  35° 


Additional  Notes . 353 

Chronological  Summary . 373 

Index  of  Persons . 3^7 

Geographical  Index . 4°5 


THE  HEIMSKRINGLA ; 

OR, 

CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


Chapter  LXII. — King  Harald' s  Challenge. 

King  Harald  during  this  winter  called  out  a 
general  levy  of  all  the  people  of  Norway,  and  as¬ 
sembled  a  great  force  towards  spring.  Then  Harald 
had  his  great  ship  drawn  down  and  put  into  the 
river  Nid,  and  set  up  the  dragon’s  head  on  her. 
Thiodolf  the  skald  sang  about  it  thus  : — 

“  My  lovely  girl !  the  sight  was  grand 
When  the  great  war-ship  down  the  strand 
Into  the  river  gently  slid, 

And  all  below  her  sides  was  hid. 

Come,  lovely  girl,  and  see  the  show  ! — 

Her  sides  that  on  the  water  glow, 

Her  serpent-head  with  golden  mane, 

All  shining  back  from  the  Nid  again.” 


Then  King  Harald  rigged  out  his  ship,  got  ready 
for  sea,  and  when  he  had  all  in  order  went  out  of  the 
river.  His  men  rowed  very  skilfully  and  beautifully. 
So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  It  was  upon  a  Saturday, 

Ship-tilts  were  struck  and  stowed  away, 

VOL.  IV.  A 


2 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


And  past  the  town  our  dragon  glides, 

That  girls  might  see  our  glancing  sides. 

Out  from  the  Nid  brave  Ilarald  steers  ; 

Westward  at  first  the  dragon  veers  ; 

Our  lads  together  down  with  oars, 

The  splash  is  echoed  round  the  shores. 

v 

“  Their  oars  our  king’s  men  handle  well, 

One  stroke  is  all  the  eye  can  tell : 

All  level  o’er  the  water  rise  ; 

The  girls  look  on  in  sweet  surprise. 

Such  things,  they  think,  can  ne’er  give  way  ; 

They  little  know  the  battle  day. 

The  Danish  girls,  who  dread  our  shout, 

Might  wish  our  ship-gear  not  so  stout. 

“  ’Tis  in  the  fight,  not  on  the  wave, 

That  oars  may  break  and  fail  the  brave. 

At  sea,  beneath  the  ice-cold  sky, 

Safely  our  oars  o’er  ocean  ply  ; 

And  when  at  Throndhjem’s  holy  stream 
Our  seventy  oars  in  distance  gleam, 

We  seem,  while  rowing  from  the  sea, 

An  erne  with  iron  wings  to  be.” 

King  Harald  sailed  south  along  the  land,  and 
called  out  the  levy  everywhere  of  men  and  ships. 
When  they  came  east  to  Viken  they  got  a  strong 
wind  against  them,  and  the  forces  lay  dispersed 
about  in  the  harbour ;  some  in  the  isles  outside,  and 
some  in  the  fiords.  So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  The  cutters’  sea-bleached  bows  scarce  find 
A  shelter  from  the  furious  wind 
Under  the  inland  forests’  side, 

Where  the  fiord  runs  its  farthest  tide. 

In  all  the  isles  and  creeks  around 
The  bondes’  ships  lie  on  the  ground, 

And  ships  with  gunwales  hung  with  shields 
Seek  the  lee-side  of  the  green  fields.” 

In  the  heavy  storm  that  raged  for  some  time  the 
great  ship  had  need  of  good  ground  tackle.  So  says 
Thiodolf 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY". 


3 


“  With  lofty  bow  above  the  seas, 

Which  curl  and  fly  before  the  breeze, 

The  gallant  vessel  rides  and  reels, 

And  every  plunge  her  cable  feels. 

The  storm  that  tries  the  spar  and  mast 
Tries  the  main-anchor  at  the  last : 

The  storm  above,  below  the  rock, 

Chafe  the  thick  cable  with  each  shock.” 

When  the  weather  became  favourable  King  Harald 
sailed  eastwards  to  the  Gaut  river  with  his  fleet,  and 
arrived  there  in  the  evening.  So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  The  gallant  Harald  now  has  come 
To  Gaut,  full  half  way  from  his  home, 

And  on  the  river  frontier  stands, 

To  fight  with  Svein  for  life  and  lands. 

The  night  passed  o’er,  the  gallant  king 
Next  day  at  Thumla  calls  a  Thing, 

Where  Svein  is  challenged  to  appear — 

A  day  which  ravens  wish  were  near.” 

Chapter  LXIII. — Of  King  Harold's  Fleet. 

When  the  Danes  heard  that  the  Northmen’s  army 
was  come  to  the  Gaut  river,*  they  all  fled  who  had 
opportunity  to  get  away.  The  Northmen  heard  that 
the  Danish  king  had  also  called  out  his  forces,  and 
lay  in  the  south,  partly  at  Fyen  and  partly  about 
Seeland.  When  King  Harald  found  that  King  Svein 
would  not  hold  a  meeting  with  him,  or  a  fight,  ac¬ 
cording  to  what  had  been  agreed  upon  between  them, 
he  took  the  same  course  as  before, — letting  the  bonde 
troops  return  home,  but  manning  150+  ships,  with 
which  he  sailed  southwards  along  Halland,  where  he 
berried  all  round,  and  then  brought  up  with  his  fleet 

The  country  round  the  river  Gaut,  as  well  as  Scania  on  the  north 
side  of  the  Sound,  was  part  of  the  kingdom  of  Denmark. — L. 
t  =180. 


4 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


in  Lofufiord,  and  laid  waste  the  country.  A  little 
afterwards  King  Svein  came  upon  them  with  all  the 
Danish  fleet,  consisting  of  300  *  ships.  W  hen  the 
Northmen  saw  them,  King  Harald  ordered  a  general 
meeting  of  the  fleet  to  be  called  by  sound  of  trumpet ; 
and  many  there  said  it  was  better  to  fly,  as  it  was  not 
now  advisable  to  fight.  The  king  replied,  “  Sooner 
shall  all  lie  dead  one  upon  another  than  fly.”  So 
says  Stein  Ilerdison 

“  With  falcon  eye,  and  courage  bright, 

Our  king  saw  glory  in  the  fight ; 

To  fly,  he  saw,  would  ruin  bring 
On  them  and  him — the  folk  and  king. 

‘  Hand  up  the  arms  to  one  and  all  !  ’ 

Cries  out  the  king  ;  *  we’ll  win  or  fall  ! 

Sooner  than  fly,  heaped  on  each  other 
Each  man  shall  fall  across  his  brother  !  ’  ” 

Then  King  Harald  drew  up  his  ships  to  attack, 
and  brought  forward  his  great  dragon  in  the  middle 
of  his  fleet.  So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  The  brave  king  through  his  vessels’  throng 
His  dragon  war- ship  moves  along  ; 

He  runs  her  gaily  to  the  front, 

To  meet  the  coming  battle’s  brunt.” 

The  ship  was  remarkably  well  equipt,  and  fully 
manned.  So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  The  king  had  got  a  chosen  crew — 

He  told  his  brave  lads  to  stand  true. 

The  ring  of  shields  seemed  to  enclose 
The  ship’s  deck  from  the  boarding  foes. 

The  dragon,  on  the  Nis-river  flood, 

Beset  with  men,  who  thickly  stood, 

Shield  touching  shield,  was  something  rare, 

That  seemed  all  force  of  man  to  dare.” 

*  =360. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


5 


Ulf  the  marshal  laid  his  ship  by  the  side  of  the 
king’s  and  ordered  his  men  to  bring  her  well  for¬ 
ward.  Stein  Herdison,  who  was  himself  in  Ulf’s  ship, 
sings  of  it  thus  : — 

“  Our  oars  were  stowed,  our  lances  high, 

As  the  ship  moved  swung  in  the  sky. 

The  marshal  Ulf  went  through  our  ranks, 

Drawn  up  beside  the  rowers’  banks  : 

The  brave  friend  of  our  gallant  king 
Told  us  our  ship  well  on  to  bring, 

And  fight  like  Norsemen  in  the  cause — 

Our  Norsemen  answered  with  huzzas.” 

Hakon  Ivarson  lay  outside  on  the  other  wing,  and 
had  many  ships  with  him,  all  well  equipped.  At  the 
extremity  of  the  other  side  lay  the  Throndhjem  chiefs, 
who  had  also  a  great  and  strong  force. 

Chapter  LX IV. — Of  King  Sve  in  s  Armament . 

Svein  the  Danish  king  also  drew  up  his  fleet,  and 
laid  his  ship  forward  in  the  centre  against  King 
Harald’s  ship,  and  Fin  Arnason  laid  his  ship  next ; 
and  then  the  Danes  laid  their  ships,  according  as 
they  were  bold  or  well  equipped.  Then,  on  both 
sides,  they  bound  the  ships  together  all  through  the 
middle  of  the  fleets ;  but  as  the  fleets  were  so  large, 
very  many  ships  remained  loose,  and  each  laid  his 
ship  forward  according  to  his  courage,  and  that  was 
very  unequal.  Although  the  difference  among  the 
men  was  great,  altogether  there  was  a  very  great 
force  on  both  sides.  King  Svein  had  six  earls  among 
the  people  following  him.  So  says  Stein  Herdison: — 

“  Danger  our  chief  would  never  shun, 

With  eight  score  ships  he  would  not  run  : 


6 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


The  Danish  fleet  he  would  abide, 

And  give  close  battle  side  by  side. 

From  Leire’s  coast  the  Danish  king 
Three  hundred  ocean  steeds  could  bring, 
And  o’er  the  sea-weed  plain  in  haste 
Thought  Harald’s  vessels  would  be  chased.” 


Chapter  LXY. — Beginning  of  the  Battle  of  Nis-river. 

As  soon  as  King  Harald  was  ready  with  his  fleet, 
he  orders  the  war-blast  to  sonnd,  and  the  men  to  row 
forward  to  the  attack.  So  says  Stein  Herdison  : — 

“  Harald  and  Svein  first  met  as  foes, 

Where  the  Nis  in  the  ocean  flows  ; 

For  Svein  would  not  for  peace  entreat, 

But,  strong  in  ships,  would  Harald  meet. 

The  Norsemen  prove,  with  sword  in  hand, 

That  numbers  cannot  skill  withstand. 

Off  Halland’s  coast  the  blood  of  Danes 
The  blue  sea’s  calm  smooth  surface  stains.” 

Soon  the  battle  began,  and  became  very  sharp  ; 
both  kings  urging  on  their  men.  So  says  Stein 
Herdison  : — 


“  Our  king,  his  broad  shield  disregarding, 

More  keen  for  striking  than  for  wardinsr. 

Now  tells  his  lads  their  spears  to  throw, — 

Now  shows  them  where  to  strike  a  blow. 

From  fleet  to  fleet  so  short  the  way, 

That  stones  and  arrows  have  full  play  ; 

And  from  the  keen  sword  dropped  the  blood 
Of  short-lived  seamen  in  the  flood.” 

It  was  late  in  the  day  when  the  battle  began,  and 
it  continued  the  whole  night.  King  Harald  shot  for 
a  long  time  with  his  bow.  So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  The  Upland  king  was  all  the  night 
Speeding  the  arrows’  deadly  flight. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


7 


All  in  the  dark  his  bow-string’s  twang 
Was  answered  ;  for  some  white  shield  rang, 

Or  yelling  shriek  gave  certain  note 

The  shaft  had  pierced  some  ring-mail  coat. 

The  foemen’s  shields  and  bulwarks  bore 
A  Lapland  arrow-scat  *  or  more.” 

Earl  Hakon,  and  the  people  who  followed  him, 
did  not  make  fast  their  ships  in  the  fleet,  but  rowed 
against  the  Danish  ships  that  were  loose,  and  slew 
the  men  of  all  the  ships  they  came  up  with.  When 
the  Danes  observed  this,  each  drew  his  ship  out  of 
the  way  of  the  earl ;  but  he  set  upon  those  who  were 
trying  to  escape,  and  they  were  nearly  driven  to 
flight.  Then  a  boat  came  rowing  to  the  earl’s  ship, 
and  hailed  him,  and  said  that  the  other  wing  of  King 
Harald’s  fleet  was  giving  way,  and  many  of  their 
people  had  fallen.  Then  the  earl  rowed  thither,  and 
gave  so  severe  an  assault  that  the  Danes  had  to 
retreat  before  him.  The  earl  went  on  in  this  way  all 
the  night,  coming  forward  where  he  was  most  wanted, 
and  wheresoever  he  came  none  could  stand  against 
him.  Hakon  rowed  outside  around  the  battle.  To¬ 
wards  the  end  of  the  night  the  greatest  part  of  the 
Danish  fleet  broke  into  flight,  for  then  King  Harald 
with  his  men  boarded  the  vessel  of  King  Svein  ;  and 
it  was  so  completely  cleared  that  all  the  crew  fell  in 
the  ship,  except  those  who  sprang  overboard.  So  says 
Arnor,  the  earls’  skald  : — 

11  Brave  Svein  did  not  his  vessel  leave 
Without  good  cause,  as  I  believe  : 


*  The  Laplanders  paid  their  scat,  or  yearly  tax,  in  bows  and  arrows  ; 
and  the  meaning  of  the  skald  appears  to  be,  that  as  many  as  were  paid 
in  a  year  were  shot  at  the  foe. — L. 


8 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Oft  on  his  casque  the  sword-blade  rang, 

Before  into  the  sea  he  sprang. 

Upon  the  wave  his  vessel  drives  ; 

All  his  brave  crew  had  lost  their  lives. 

O’er  dead  courtmen  into  the  sea 
The  Jutland  king  had  now  to  flee.” 

And  when  King  S vein’s  banner  was  cut  down, 
and  his  ship  cleared  of  its  crew,  all  his  forces  took 
to  flight,  and  some  were  killed.  The  ships  which 
were  bound  together  could  not  be  cast  loose,  so 
the  people  who  were  in  them  sprang  overboard,  and 
some  got  to  the  other  ships  that  were  loose ;  and 
all  King  S vein’s  men  who  could  get  off  rowed  away, 
but  a  great  many  of  them  were  slain.  Where  the 
king  himself  fought  the  ships  were  mostly  bound 
together,  and  there  were  more  than  seventy  left  be¬ 
hind  of  King  Svein’s  vessels.  So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  Svein’s  ships  rode  proudly  o’er  the  deep, 

When,  by  a  single  sudden  sweep, 

Full  seventy  sail,  as  we  are  told, 

Were  seized  by  Norway’s  monarch  bold.” 


King  Harald  rowed  after  the  Danes  and  pursued 
them ;  but  that  was  not  easy,  for  the  ships  lay  so 
thick  together  that  they  scarcely  could  move.  Earl 
Fin  Arnason  would  not  flee ;  and  being  also  short¬ 
sighted,  was  taken  prisoner.  So  says  Thiodolf: — 

“  To  the  six  Danish  earls  who  came 
To  aid  his  force,  and  raise  his  name, 

No  mighty  thanks  King  Svein  is  owing 
For  mighty  actions  of  their  doing. 

Fin  Arnason,  in  battle  known, 

With  a  stout  Norse  heart  of  his  own, 

Would  not  take  flight  his  life  to  gain, 

And  in  the  foremost  ranks  was  ta’en.” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


9 


Chapter  LXVI. — King  Sveins  Flight. 

Earl  Hakon  lay  behind  with  his  ships,  while  the 
king  and  the  rest  of  the  forces  were  pursuing  the 
fugitives  ;  for  the  earl’s  ships  could  not  get  forward 
on  account  of  the  ships  which  lay  in  the  way  before 
him.  Then  a  man  came  rowing  in  a  boat  to  the 
earl’s  ship,  and  lay  at  the  bulwarks.  The  man  was 
stout,  and  had  on  a  white  hat.  He  hailed  the  ship. 
“Where  is  the  earl?  ”  said  he. 

The  earl  was  in  the  fore-hold,  stopping  a  man’s 
blood.  The  earl  cast  a  look  at  the  man  in  the 
hat,  and  asked  what  his  name  was.  He  answered, 
“  Here  is  Vandrad  :  *  speak  to  me,  earl.” 

The  earl  leant  over  the  ship’s  side  to  him.  Then 
the  man  in  the  boat  said,  “  Earl,  I  will  accept  of  my 
life  from  thee,  if  thou  wilt  give  it.” 

Then  the  earl  raised  himself  up,  called  two  men 
who  where  friends  dear  to  him,  and  said  to  them, 
“Go  into  the  boat;  bring  Vandrad  to  the  land; 
attend  him  to  my  friend’s  Karl  the  bonde  ;  and  tell 
Karl,  as  a  token  that  these  words  come  from  me, 
that  he  let  Vandrad  have  the  horse  which  I  gave 
to  him  yesterday,  and  also  his  saddle,  and  his  son 
to  attend  him.” 

Thereupon  they  went  into  the  boat,  and  took  the 
oars  in  hand,  while  Vandrad  steered.  This  took 
place  just  about  daybreak,  while  the  vessels  were 
in  movement,  some  rowing  towards  the  land,  some 
towards  the  sea,  both  small  and  great.  Vandrad 


*  The  unlucky,  the  ill-fated. — L. 


IO 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


steered  where  he  thought  there  was  most  room  be¬ 
tween  the  vessels ;  and  when  they  came  near  to 
Norway  ships  the  earl’s  men  gave  their  names,  and 
then  they  all  allowed  them  to  go  where  they  pleased. 
Vandrad  steered  along  the  shore,  and  only  set  in 
towards  the  land  when  they  had  come  past  the 
crowd  of  ships.  They  then  went  up  to  Karl  the 
bonde’s  farm,  and  it  was  then  beginning  to  be  light. 
They  went  into  the  room  where  Karl  had  just  put 
on  his  clothes.  The  earl’s  men  told  him  their  mes¬ 
sage,  and  Karl  said  they  must  first  take  some  food ; 
and  he  set  a  table  before  them,  and  gave  them 
water  to  wash  with. 

Then  came  the  housewife  into  the  room,  and  said, 
“  I  wonder  why  we  could  get  no  peace  or  rest  all 
night  with  the  shouting  and  screaming.” 

Karl  replies,  “  Dost  thou  not  know  that  the  kings 
were  fighting  all  night?  ” 

She  asked  which  had  the  best  of  it. 

Karl  answered,  “The  Northmen  gained.” 

“Then,”  said  she,  “our  king  will  have  taken 
flight.” 

“Nobody  knows,”  says  Karl,  “whether  he  has 
fled  or  is  fallen.” 

She  says,  “What  a  useless  sort  of  king  we  have  ! 
He  is  both  slow  and  frightened.” 

Then  said  Vandrad,  “Frightened  he  is  not;  but 
he  is  not  lucky.” 

Then  Vandrad  washed  his  hands ;  but  he  took 
the  towel  and  dried  them  right  in  the  middle  of  the 
cloth.  The  housewife  snatched  the  towel  from  him, 


KINGS  OF  NOKWAY. 


1 1 

and  said,  “  Thou  hast  been  taught  little  good ;  it  is 
wasteful  to  wet  the  whole  cloth  at  one  time.” 

Vandrad  replies,  “I  may  yet  come  so  far  forward 
in  the  world  as  to  be  able  to  dry  myself  with  the 
middle  of  the  towel.” 

Thereupon  Karl  set  a  table  before  them,  and  Van¬ 
drad  sat  down  between  them.  They  ate  for  a  while, 
and  then  went  out.  The  horse  was  saddled,  and 
Karl’s  son  ready  to  follow  him  with  another  horse. 
They  rode  away  to  the  forest ;  and  the  earl’s  men 
returned  to  the  boat,  rowed  to  the  earl’s  ship,  and 
told  the  success  of  their  expedition. 


Chapter  LXVII. — Of  King  Harald. 

King  Harald  and  his  men  followed  the  fugitives 
only  a  short  way,  and  rowed  back  to  the  place  where 
the  deserted  ships  lay.  Then  the  battle-place  was 
ransacked,  and  in  King  Svein’s  ship  was  found  a 
heap  of  dead  men;  but  the  king’s  body  was  not 
found,  although  people  believed  for  certain  that  he 
had  fallen.  Then  King  Harald  had  the  greatest 
attention  paid  to  the  dead  of  his  men,  and  had  the 
wounds  of  the  living  bound  up.  The  dead  bodies 
of  Svein’s  men  were  brought  to  the  land,  and  he 
sent  a  message  to  the  peasants  to  come  and  bury 
them.  Then  he  let  the  booty  be  divided,  and  this 
took  up  some  time.  The  news  came  now  that  King 
Svein  had  come  to  Seeland,  and  that  all  who  had 
escaped  from  the  battle  had  joined  him,  along  with 
many  more,  and  that  he  had  a  great  force. 


12 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  LXVTIL — Fin  Arnason  gets  Quarter. 

Earl  Fin  Arnason  was  taken  prisoner  in  the  battle, 
as  before  related ;  and  when  he  was  led  before  King 
Harald,  the  king  was  very  merry,  and  said,  “  Fin,  we 
meet  here  now,  and  we  met  last  in  Norway.  The 
Danish  court  has  not  stood  very  firmly  by  thee  ;  and 
it  will  be  a  troublesome  business  for  Northmen  to 
drag  thee,  a  blind  old  man,  with  them,  and  preserve 
thy  life.” 

The  earl  replies,  “  The  Northmen  find  it  very  diffi¬ 
cult  now  to  conquer,  and  it  is  all  the  worse  that  thou 
hast  the  command  of  them.” 

Then  said  King  Harald,  “  Wilt  thou  accept  of 
life  and  safety,  although  thou  hast  not  deserved 
it?” 

The  earl  replies,  “Not  from  thee,  thou  dog.” 

The  king :  “  Wilt  thou,  then,  if  thy  relation  Mag¬ 
nus  gives  thee  quarter?” 

Magnus,  King  Harald’s  son,  was  then  steering  the 
ship. 

The  earl  replies,  “  Can  the  whelp  rule  over  life  and 
quarter  ?  ” 

The  king  laughed,  as  if  he  found  amusement  in 
vexing  him. — “Wilt  thou  accept  thy  life,  then,  from 
thy  she-relation  Thorer?” 

The  earl :  “Is  she  here ?/’ 

“  She  is  here,”  said  the  king. 

Then  Earl  Fin  broke  out  with  the  ugly  expressions 
which  since  have  been  preserved,  as  a  proof  that  he 
was  so  mad  with  rage  that  he  could  not  govern  his 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


13 


tongue: — “No  wonder  thou  hast  bit  so  strongly,  if 
the  mare  was  with  thee.” 

Earl  Fin  got  life  and  quarter,  and  the  king  kept 
him  a  while  about  him.  But  Fin  was  rather  melan¬ 
choly,  and  obstinate  in  conversation ;  and  King 
Harald  said,  “I  see,  Fin,  that  thou  dost  not  live  will¬ 
ingly  in  company  with  me  and  thy  relations ;  now  I 
will  give  thee  leave  to  go  to  thy  friend  King  Svein.” 

The  earl  said,  “  I  accept  of  the  offer  willingly, 
and  the  more  gratefully  the  sooner  I  get  away  from 
hence.” 

The  king  afterwards  let  Earl  Fin  be  landed,  and 
the  traders  going  to  Halland  received  him  well.  King 
Harald  sailed  from  thence  to  Norway  with  his  fleet ; 
and  went  first  to  Oslo,  where  he  gave  all  his  people 
leave  to  go  home  who  wished  to  do  so. 


Chapter  LXIX. — Of  King  Svein. 

King  Svein,  it  is  told,  sat  in  Denmark  all  that 
winter,  and  had  his  kingdom  as  formerly.  In  winter 
he  sent  men  north  to  Halland  for  Karl  the  bonde 
and  his  wife.  When  Karl  came  the  king  called 
him  to  him,  and  asked  him  if  he  knew  him,  or 
thought  he  had  ever  seen  him  before. 

Karl  replies,  “I  know  thee,  sire,  and  knew  thee 
before,  the  moment  I  saw  thee ;  and  God  be  praised 
if  the  small  help  I  could  give  was  of  any  use  to 
thee.” 

The  king  replies,  “  I  have  to  reward  thee  for  all 
the  days  I  have  to  live.  And  now,  in  the  first  place, 


14 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


I  will  give  thee  any  farm  in  Seeland  thou  wouldst 
desire  to  have ;  and,  in  the  next  place,  will  make 
thee  a  great  man,  if  thou  knowest  how  to  conduct 
thyself.” 

Karl  thanked  the  king  for  his  promise,  and  said 
he  had  now  but  one  thing  to  ask. 

The  king  asked  what  that  was. 

Karl  said  that  he  would  ask  to  take  his  wife  with 
him. 

The  king  said,  “  I  will  not  let  thee  do  that ;  but 
I  will  provide  thee  a  far  better  and  more  sensible 
wife.  But  thy  wife  can  keep  the  bonde-farm  ye  had 
before,  and  she  will  have  her  living  from  it.” 

The  king  gave  Karl  a  great  and  valuable  farm, 
and  provided  him  a  good  marriage ;  and  he  became 
a  considerable  man.  This  was  reported  far  and  wide, 

and  much  praised ;  and  thus  it  came  to  be  told  north 
in  Norway. 


Chapter  LXX.— Of  the  Talk  of  the  Court-men. 

King  Harald  stayed  in  Oslo  the  winter  after  the 
battle  at  Nis-river  [1063].  In  autumn,  when  the  men 
came  from  the  south,  there  was  much  talk  and  many 
stories  about  the  battle  which  they  had  fought  at 
Nis-river,  and  every  one  who  had  been  there  thought 
he  could  tell  something  about  it.  Once  some  of 
them  sat  in  a  cellar  and  drank,  and  were  very  merry 
and  talkative.  They  talked  about  the  Nis-river 
battle,  and  who  had  earned  the  greatest  praise  and 
renown.  They  all  agreed  that  no  man  there  had 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


15 


been  at  all  equal  to  Earl  Hakon.  He  was  the  boldest 
in  arms,  the  quickest,  and  the  most  lucky :  what  he 
did  was  of  the  greatest  help,  and  he  won  the  battle. 
King  Harald,  in  the  meantime,  was  out  in  the  yard, 
and  spoke  with  some  people.  He  wrent  then  to  the 
room-door,  and  said,  “Every  one  here  would  will¬ 
ingly  be  called  Hakon ;  ”  and  then  went  his  way. 


Chapter  LXXI. — Of  the  Attempt  to  take  Earl  Hakon. 

Earl  Hakon  went  in  winter  to  the  Uplands,  and 
wTas  all  winter  in  his  domains.  Ele  was  much 
beloved  by  all  the  Uplanders.  It  happened,  towards 
spring,  that  some  men  were  sitting  drinking  in  the 
town,  and  the  conversation  turned,  as  usual,  on  the 
Nis-river  battle  ;  and  some  praised  Earl  Hakon,  and 
some  thought  others  as  deserving  of  praise  as  he. 
When  they  had  thus  disputed  a  while,  one  of  them 
said,  “It  is  possible  that  others  fought  as  bravely 
as  the  earl  at  Nis-river ;  but  none,  I  think,  has  had 
such  luck  with  him  as  he.” 

The  others  replied,  that  his  best  luck  was  his  driv¬ 
ing  so  many  Hanes  to  flight  along  with  other  men. 

The  same  man  replied,  “  It  was  a  greater  luck  that 
he  gave  King  Svein  quarter.” 

One  of  the  company  said  to  him,  “  Thou  dost  not 
know  what  thou  art  saying.” 

He  replied,  “  I  know  it  for  certain,  for  the  man 
told  me  himself  who  brought  the  king  to  the  land.7' 

It  went  according  to  the  old  proverb,  that  the  king 
has  many  ears.  This  was  told  the  king,  and  he  im- 


16  CHRONICLE  OF  THE 

mediately  ordered  horses  to  be  gathered,  and  rode 
away  directly  with  200  *  men.  He  rode  all  that  night, 
and  the  following  day.  Then  some  men  met  them, 
who  were  riding  to  the  town  with  mead  and  malt. 
In  the  king’s  retinue  was  a  man  called  Gamal,  who 
rode  to  one  ot  these  bondes  who  was  an  acquaintance 
of  his,  and  spoke  to  him  privately.  “  I  will  pay 
thee,”  said  he,  “  to  ride  with  the  greatest  speed,  by 
the  shortest  private  paths  that  thou  knowest,  to  Earl 
Hakon,  and  tell  him  the  king  will  kill  him ;  for  the 
king  has  got  to  the  knowledge  that  Earl  Hakon  set 
King  Svein  on  shore  at  Nis-river.”  They  agreed  on 
the  payment.  The  bonde  rode,  and  came  to  the  earl 
just  as  he  was  sitting  drinking,  and  had  not  yet  gone 
to  bed.  When  the  bonde  told  his  errand,  the  earl 
immediately  stood  up  with  all  his  men,  had  all  his 
loose  property  removed  from  the  farm  to  the  forest, 
and  all  the  people  left  the  house  in  the  night.  When 
the  king  came  he  halted  there  all  night ;  but  Hakon 
rode  away,  and  came  east  to  Svithiod  to  King 
Steinkel,  and  stayed  with  him  all  summer.  King 
Harald  returned  to  the  town,  travelled  northwards 
to  rhrondhjem  district,  and  remained  there  all 

summer;  but  in  autumn  he  returned  eastwards 
to  Yiken. 


Chapter  LXXIL— Of  Earl  Hakon. 

As  soon  as  Earl  Hakon  heard  the  king  had  gone 
north,  he  returned  immediately  in  summer  to  the 


*  =240. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


1 7 


Uplands  [1063],  and  remained  there  until  the  king 
had  returned  from  the  north.  Then  the  earl  went 
east  into  Verm  aland,  where  he  remained  during  the 
winter,  and  where  the  king,  Steinkel,  gave  him  fiefs. 
For  a  short  time  in  winter  he  went  west  to  Kauma- 
rike  with  a  great  troop  of  men  from  Gautland  and 
Vermaland,  and  received  the  scat  and  duties  from 
the  Upland  people  which  belonged  to  him,  and  then 
returned  to  Gautland,  and  remained  there  till  spring. 
King  Harald  had  his  seat  in  Oslo  all  winter  [1064], 
and  sent  his  men  to  the  Uplands  to  demand  the 
scat,  together  with  the  king’s  land  dues,  and  the 
mulcts  of  court ;  but  the  Uplanders  said  they  would 
pay  all  the  scat  and  dues  which  they  had  to  pay,  to 
Earl  Hakon  as  long  as  he  was  in  life,  and  had  not 
forfeited  his  life  or  his  fief ;  and  the  king  got  no 
land  dues  that  winter. 


Chapter  LXXIII. — Agreement  between  King  Harald  and 

King  Svein. 

This  winter  messengers  and  ambassadors  went 
between  Norway  and  Denmark,  whose  errand  was 
that  both  Northmen  and  Danes  should  make  peace, 
and  a  league  with  each  other,  and  to  ask  the  kings 
to  agree  to  it.  These  messages  gave  favourable 
hopes  of  a  peace ;  and  the  matter  proceeded  so  far, 
that  a  meeting  for  peace  was  appointed  at  the  Gaut 
river  between  King  Harald  and  King  Svein.  When 
spring  approached,  both  kings  assembled  many 
ships  and  people  for  this  meeting.  So  says  a  skald 

VOL.  IV.  B 


i8 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


in  a  poem  on  this  expedition  of  the  kings,  which 
begins  thus  : — 


“  The  king,  who  from,  the  northern  sound 
His  land  with  war-ships  girds  around, 

The  raven-feeder,  filled  the  coast 
With  his  proud  ships,  a  gallant  host ! 

The  gold-tipped  stems  dash  through  the  foam 
That  shakes  the  seamen’s  planked  home  ; 

The  high  wave  breaks  up  to  the  mast, 

As  west  of  Halland  on  they  passed. 

“  Harald  whose  word  is  fixed  and  sure, 

Whose  ships  his  land  from  foes  secure, 

And  Svein,  whose  isles  maintain  his  fleet, 

Hasten  as  friends  again  to  meet  ; 

And  every  creek  with  vessels  teems, — 

All  Denmark  men  and  shipping  seems  ; 

And  all  rejoice  that  strife  will  cease, 

And  men  meet  now  but  to  make  peace.” 

Here  it  is  told  that  the  two  kings  held  the  meet¬ 
ing  that  was  agreed  upon  between  them,  and  both 
came  to  the  frontiers  of  their  kingdoms.  So  says 
the  skald  : — 


“  To  meet  (since  peace  the  Dane  now  craves) 
On  to  the  south  upon  the  waves 
Sailed  forth  our  gallant  northern  king, 
Peace  to  the  Danes  with  him  to  bring. 
Svein  northward  to  his  frontier  hies 
To  get  the  peace  his  people  prize, 

And  meet  King  Harald,  whom  he  finds 
On  land  hard  used  by  stormy  winds.” 


When  the  kings  found  each  other,  people  began 
at  once  to  talk  of  their  being  reconciled.  But  as 
soon  as  peace  was  proposed,  many  began  to  complain 
of  the  damage  they  had  sustained  by  harrying,  rob¬ 
bing,  and  killing  men ;  and  for  a  long  time  it  did 
not  look  very  like  peace.  It  is  here  related  : — 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


19 


“Before  this  meeting  of  the  kin 0-3 

0  O 

Each  bonde  his  own  losses  brings, 

And  loudly  claims  some  recompense 
From  his  king’s  foes,  at  their  expense. 

It  is  not  easy  to  make  peace, 

Where  noise  and  talking  never  cease  : 

The  bondes’  warmth  may  quickly  spread, 

And  kings  be  by  the  people  led. 

“  When  kings  are  moved,  no  peace  is  sure  ; 

For  that  peace  only  is  secure 

Which  they  who  make  it  fairly  make, — • 

To  each  side  give,  from  each  side  take. 

The  kings  will  often  rule  but  ill 
Who  listen  to  the  people’s  will  : 

The  people  often  have  no  view 
But  their  own  interests  to  pursue.” 

At  last  the  best  men,  and  those  who  were  the 
wisest,  came  between  the  kings,  and  settled  the  peace 
thus  : — that  Ilarald  should  have  Norway,  and  Svein 
Denmark,  according  to  the  boundaries  of  old  estab¬ 
lished  between  Denmark  and  Norway;  neither  of 
them  should  pay  to  the  other  for  any  damage  sus¬ 
tained  ;  the  war  should  cease  as  it  now  stood,  each 
retaining  what  he  had  got  ;  and  this  peace  should 
endure  as  long  as  they  were  kings.  This  peace  was 
confirmed  by  oath.  Then  the  kings  parted,  having 
given  each  other  hostages,  as  is  here  related  : — 

“  And  I  have  heard  that  to  set  fast 
The  peace  God  brought  about  at  last, 

Svein  and  stern  Ilarald  pledges  sent, 

Who  witnessed  to  their  sworn  intent  ; 

And  much  I  wish  that  they  and  all 

In  no  such  perjury  may  fall 

That  this  peace  ever  should  be  broken, 

And  oaths  should  fail  before  God  spoken.” 

King  Harald  with  his  people  sailed  northwards  to 
Norway,  and  King  Svein  southwards  to  Denmark. 


20 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  LXXIV. — King  Harold's  Battle  with  Karl  Hakon. 

King  Harald  was  in  Viken  in  the  summer  [1064], 
and  he  sent  his  men  to  the  Uplands  after  the  scat  and 
duty  which  belonged  to  him ;  but  the  bondes  paid 
no  attention  to  the  demand,  but  said  they  would  hold 
all  for  Earl  Hakon  until  he  came  for  it.  Earl  Hakon 
was  then  up  in  Gautland  wuth  a  large  armed  force. 
When  summer  was  past  King  Harald  went  south 
to  Konungahella.  Then  he  took  all  the  light- sailing 
vessels  he  could  get  hold  of,  and  steered  up  the  river. 
He  had  the  vessels  drawn  past  all  the  waterfalls,  and 
brought  them  thus  into  the  Wener  lake.  Then  he 
rowed  eastward  across  the  lake  to  where  he  heard 
Earl  Hakon  was ;  but  when  the  earl  got  news  of  the 
king’s  expedition  he  retreated  down  the  country,  and 
would  not  let  the  king  plunder  the  land.  Earl 
Hakon  had  a  large  armed  force  which  the  Gautland 
people  had  raised  for  him.  King  Harald  lay  with 
his  ships  up  in  a  river,  and  made  a  foray  on  land, 
but  left  some  of  his  men  behind  to  protect  the  ships. 
The  king  himself  rode  up  with  a  part  of  the  men, 
but  the  greater  part  were  on  foot.  They  had  to  cross 
a  forest,  where  they  found  a  mire  or  lake,  and  close 
to  it  a  wood ;  and  when  they  reached  the  wood  they 
saw  the  earl’s  men,  but  the  mire  was  between  them. 
They  drew  up  their  people  now  on  both  sides.  Then 
King  Harald  ordered  his  men  to  sit  down  on  the  hill¬ 
side.  “We  will  first  see  if  they  will  attack  us.  Earl 
Hakon  does  not  usually  wait  to  talk.”  It  was  frosty 
weather,  with  some  snow-drift,  and  Harald’s  men  sat 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


21 


down  under  their  shields  ;  but  it  was  cold  for  the 
Gautlanders,  who  had  but  little  clothing  with  them. 
The  earl  told  them  to  wait  until  King  Harald  came 
nearer,  so  that  all  would  stand  equally  high  on  the 
ground.  Earl  Hakon  had  the  same  banner  which 
had  belonged  to  King  Magnus  Olafson. 

The  lagman  of  the  Gautland  people,  Thorvid,  sat 
upon  a  horse,  and  the  bridle  was  fastened  to  a  stake 
that  stood  in  the  mire.  He  broke  out  with  these 
words  :  “  God  knows  we  have  many  brave  and  hand¬ 
some  fellows  here,  and  we  shall  let  King  Steinkel 
hear  that  we  stood  by  the  good  earl  bravely.  I  am 
sure  of  one  thing  :  we  shall  behave  gallantly  against 
these  Northmen,  if  they  attack  us  ;  but  if  our  young 
people  give  way,  and  should  not  stand  to  it,  let  us 
not  run  farther  than  to  that  stream  ;  but  if  they 
should  give  way  farther,  which  I  am  sure  they  will 
not  do,  let  it  not  be  farther  than  to  that  hill.”  At 
that  instant  the  Northmen  sprang  up,  raised  the  war- 
cry,  and  struck  on  their  shields  ;  and  the  Gautland 
army  began  also  to  shout.  The  lagman’s  horse  got 
shy  with  the  war-cry,  and  backed  so  hard  that  the 
stake  flew  up  and  struck  the  lagman  on  the  head. 
He  said,  “Ill  luck  to  thee,  Northman,  for  that  arrow!” 
and  away  fled  the  lagman.  King  Harald  had  told 
his  people,  “If  we  do  make  a  clash  with  the  weapons, 
we  shall  not,  however,  go  down  from  the  hill  until 
they  come  nearer  to  us  ;  ”  and  they  did  so.  When 
the  war-cry  was  raised  the  earl  let  his  banner 
advance  ;  but  when  they  came  under  the  hill  the 
king’s  army  rushed  down  upon  them,  and  killed  some 


22 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


of  the  earl’s  people,  and  the  rest  fled.  The  North¬ 
men  did  not  pursue  the  fugitives  long,  for  it  was  the 
fall  of  day ;  but  they  took  Earl  Hakon’s  banner,  and 
all  the  arms  and  clothes  they  could  get  hold  of.  King 
Harald  had  both  the  banners  carried  before  him  as 
they  marched  away.  They  spoke  among  themselves 
that  the  earl  had  probably  fallen.  As  they  were 
riding  through  the  forest  they  could  only  ride  singly, 
one  following  the  other.  Suddenly  a  man  came  full 
gallop  across  the  path,  struck  his  spear  through  him 
who  was  carrying  the  earl’s  banner,  seized  the  banner- 
staff,  and  rode  into  the  forest  on  the  other  side  with 
the  banner.  When  this  was  told  the  king  he  said, 
“  Bring  me  my  armour,  for  the  earl  is  alive.”  Then 
the  king  rode  to  his  ships  in  the  night ;  and  many 
said  that  the  earl  had  now  taken  his  revenge.  But 
Thiodolf  sang  thus  : — 

“  Steinkel’s  troops,  who  were  so  bold, 

Who  the  Earl  Hakon  would  uphold, 

Were  driven  by  our  horsemen’s  power 
To  Hel,  death  goddess,  in  an  hour  ; 

And  the  great  earl,  so  men  say 
Who  won’t  admit  he  ran  away, 

Because  his  men  fled  from  the  ground, 

Retired,  and  cannot  now  be  found.” 


Chapter  LXXY. — Death  of  Hal ,  the  Murderer  of  Kodran. 

The  rest  of  the  night  Harald  passed  in  his  ships ; 
but  in  the  morning,  when  it  was  daylight,  it  was 
found  that  so  thick  ice  had  gathered  about  the  vessels 
that  one  could  walk  around  them.  The  king  ordered 
his  men  to  cut  the  ice  from  the  ships  all  the  way  out 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


23 


to  the  clear  water ;  on  which  they  all  went  to  break 
the  ice.  King  Harald’s  son  Magnus  steered  the 
vessel  that  lay  lowest  down  the  river  and  nearest  the 
water.  When  the  people  had  cleared  the  ice  away 
almost  entirely,  a  man  ran  out  to  the  ice,  and  began 
hewing  away  at  it  like  a  madman.  Then  said  one  of 
the  men,  “It  is  going  now  as  usual,  that  none  can 
do  so  much  as  Hal  who  killed  Kodran,  when  once 
he  lays  himself  to  the  work.  See  how  he  is  hewing 
away  at  the  ice.”  There  was  a  man  in  the  crew  of 
Magnus  the  king’s  son  who  was  called  Thormod 
Eindridason  ;  and  when  he  heard  the  name  of  Kod- 
ran’s  murderer  he  ran  up  to  Hal,  and  gave  him  a  death- 
wound.  Kodran  was  a  son  of  Gudmund  Eyjolfson  ; 
and  Valgerd,  who  was  a  sister  of  Gudmund,  was  the 
mother  of  Jorun,  and  the  grandmother  by  the  m other  s 
side  of  this  Thormod.  Thormod  was  a  year  old  when 
Kodran  was  killed,  and  had  never  seen  Hal  Utrygson 
until  now.  When  the  ice  was  broken  all  the  way 
out  to  the  water,  Magnus  drew  his  ship  out,  set  sail 
directly,  and  sailed  westward  across  the  lake ;  but 
the  king’s  ship,  which  lay  farthest  up  the  river,  came 
out  the  last.  Hal  had  been  in  the  king’s  retinue, 
and  was  very  dear  to  him ;  so  that  the  king  was  en¬ 
raged  at  his  death.  The  king  came  the  last  into 
the  harbour,  and  Magnus  had  let  the  murderer  escape 
into  the  forest,  and  offered  to  pay  the  mulct  for  him; 
and  the  king  had  very  nearly  attacked  Magnus  and 
his  crew,  but  their  friends  came  up  and  reconciled 
them. 


24 


CHRONICLE  OF  TEE 


Chapter  LXXYI. — Of  King  Harald. 

That  winter  [1065]  King  Harald  went  up  to 
Raumarike,  and  had  many  people  with  him  ;  and 
he  accused  the  bondes  there  of  having  kept  from 
him  his  scat  and  duties,  and  of  having  aided  his 
enemies  to  raise  disturbance  against  him.  He  seized 
on  the  bondes,  and  maimed  some,  killed  others,  and 
robbed  many  of  all  their  property.  They  who  could 
do  it  tied  from  him.  He  burned  everything  in  the 
districts,  and  laid  them  altogether  waste.  So  says 
Thiodolf : — 

“  He  who  the  island-people  drove, 

When  they  against  his  power  strove, 

Now  bridles  Raumarike’s  men, 

Marching  his  forces  through  their  glen. 

To  punish  them  the  fire  he  lights 
That  shines  afar  off  in  dark  nights 
From  house  and  yard,  and,  as  he  says, 

Will  warn  the  man  who  disobeys.” 

Thereafter  the  king  went  up  to  Iledemark,  burnt 
the  dwellings,  and  made  no  less  waste  and  havoc 
there  than  in  Raumarike.  From  thence  he  went  to 
Hadeland  and  Ringerike,  burning  and  ravaging  all 
the  land.  So  says  Thiodolf 

u  The  bonde’s  household  goods  are  seen 
Before  his  door  upon  the  green, 

Smoking  and  singed  ;  and  sparks  red  hot 
Glow  in  the  thatched  roof  of  his  cot. 

In  Hedemark  the  bondes  pray 
The  king  his  crushing  hand  to  stay  ; 

In  Ringerike  and  Hadeland, 

None  ’gainst  his  fiery  wrath  can  stand.” 

Then  the  bondes  left  all  to  the  king’s  mercy. 
After  the  death  of  King  Magnus  fifteen  years  had 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


25 


passed  when  the  battle  at  Nis-river  took  place,  and 
afterwards  two  years  elapsed  before  Harald  and  Svein 
made  peace.  So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  The  Hordland  king  under  the  land 
At  anchor  lay  close  to  the  strand. 

At  last,  prepared  with  shield  and  spear, 

The  peace  was  settled  the  third  year.” 

After  this  peace  the  disturbances  with  the  people 
of  the  Upland  districts  lasted  a  year  and  a  half.  So 
says  Thiodolf : — 

‘‘No  easy  task  it  is  to  say 
How  the  king  brought  beneath  his  sway 
The  Upland  bondes,  and  would  give 
Nought  but  their  ploughs  from  which  to  live. 

The  king  in  eighteen  months  brought  down 
Their  bonde  power,  and  raised  his  own, 

And  the  great  honour  he  has  gained 
Will  still  in  memory  be  retained.” 


Chapter  LXXVIL— Of  the  Kings  of  England. 

Edward,  Ethelred’s  son,  was  king  of  England  after 
his  brother  Hardacanute.  He  was  called  Edward 
the  Good ;  and  so  he  was.  King  Edward’s  mother 
was  Queen  Emma,  daughter  of  Richard,  earl  of 
Rouen.  Her  brother  was  Earl  Robert,  whose  son 
was  William  the  Bastard,  who  at  that  time  was  earl 
at  Rouen  in  Normandy.  King  Edward’s  queen  was 
Gyda,*  a  daughter  of  Earl  Godwin,  the  son  of 
Ulfnad.t  Gyda’s  brothers  were,  Earl  Toste,}  the 

*  She  is  called  Githa  and  Editlia  by  English  writers.  See  Rapin,  vol. 
i.  p.  142.— L. 

t  Earl  Godwin  was  the  son  of  Ulfnoth  ;  the  same  name  as  Ulfnad. — L. 

+  Harald,  and  not  Toste,  was  the  eldest  son  of  Earl  Godwin,  accord¬ 
ing  to  our  English  historians  ;  but  the  enmity  of  Toste  and  others  at  his 
assuming  the  royal  title  is  better  accounted  for  by  supposing  he  was  the 
youngest,  and  the  foster-son  of  King  Edward. — L. 


26 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


eldest;  Earl  Morukare*  the  next;  Earl  Walter  +  the 
third ;  Earl  Svein  the  fourth ;  and  the  fifth  was 
Harald,  who  was  the  youngest,  and  he  was  brought 
up  at  King  Edward’s  court,  and  was  his  foster-son. 
The  king  loved  him  very  much,  and  kept  him  as 
his  own  son ;  t  for  he  had  no  children. 


Chapter  LXXYIII. — Of  Harald  Godwinson. 

One  summer  it  happened  that  Harald,  the  son  of 
Godwin,  made  an  expedition  to  Bretland  with  his 
ships  ;  but  when  they  got  to  sea  they  met  a  contrary 
wind,  and  were  driven  off  into  the  ocean.  They 
landed  west  in  Normandy,  after  suffering  from  a 
dangerous  storm.  §  They  brought  up  at  Rouen,  where 
they  met  Earl  William,  who  received  Harald  and 
his  company  gladly.  Harald  remained  there  late  in 
harvest,  and  was  hospitably  entertained ;  for  the 
stormy  weather  continued,  and  there  was  no  getting 
to  sea,  and  this  continued  until  winter  set  in ;  so 
the  earl  and  Harald  agreed  that  he  should  remain 
there  all  winter.  Harald  sat  on  the  high-seat  on 
one  side  of  the  earl ;  and  on  the  other  side  sat  the 

*  Earl  Morcar,  as  lie  is  called  in  English  history,  was  not  Harald’s 
brother,  but  the  brother  of  his  wife  only. — L. 

+  Earl  Walter  was  not  a  son  of  Earl  Godwin,  but  of  Siward,  earl  of 
Nor  th  u  mb  e  rl  an  d. — L . 

+  This  does  not  agree  with  the  account  of  our  historians,  who  say 
that  king  Edward  favoured  Edgar,  son  of  his  brother  Edmund,  who  was 
brought  up  in  Hungary. — L. 

§  He  is  said  to  have  been  shipwrecked  on  the  coast  of  Normandy, 
and  to  have  been  taken  prisoner  by  Count  Guido  of  Ponthieu,  who  was 
persuaded  by  Duke  William  to  give  up  his  prisoners.  According  to 
bieemans  Histovy  of  the  N ov oictn  Coiiyucst,  this  happened  in  the  year 
1064. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


2  7 


earl’s  wife,*  one  of  the  most  beautiful  women  that 
could  be  seen.  They  often  talked  together  for 
amusement  at  the  drinking-table ;  and  the  earl  went 
generally  to  bed,  but  Harald  and  the  earl’s  wife  sat 
long  in  the  evenings  talking  together,  and  so  it 
went  on  for  a  great  part  of  the  winter.  In  one  of 
their  conversations  she  said  to  Harald,  “The  earl 
has  asked  me  what  it  is  we  have  to  talk  about  so 
much,  for  he  is  angry  at  it.”  Harald  replies,  “We 
shall  then  at  once  let  him  know  all  our  conversa¬ 
tion.”  The  following  day,  Harald  asked  the  earl 
to  a  conference,  and  they  went  together  into  the 
conference-chamber;  where  also  the  queen  was, 
and  some  of  the  councillors.  Then  Harald  began 
thus  “  I  have  to  inform  you,  earl,  that  there  lies 
more  in  my  visit  here  than  I  have  let  you  know. 
I  would  ask  your  daughter  in  marriage,  and  have 
often  spoke  over  this  matter  with  her  mother,  and 
she  has  promised  to  support  my  suit  with  you.”  As 
soon  as  Harald  had  made  known  this  proposal  of 
his,  it  was  well  received  by  all  who  were  present. 
They  explained  the  case  to  the  earl ;  and  at  last  it 
came  so  far,  that  the  girl  was  contracted  to  Harald ; 
but  as  she  was  very  young,  it  was  resolved  that  the 
wedding  should  be  deferred  for  some  years. 

Chapter  LXXIX. — King  Edward’s  Death. 

When  spring  came  Harald  rigged  his  ships,  and 
set  off;  and  he  and  the  earl  parted  with  great 

*  William’s  wife  was  Mathilda,  a  daughter  of  Count  Baldwin  of 
Flanders. 


28 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


friendship.  Harald  sailed  over  to  England  to  King 
Edward,  but  did  not  return  to  Valland  to  fulfil  the 
marriage  agreement.  Edward  was  king  over  Eng¬ 
land  for  twenty-three  years,  and  died  *  on  a  bed 
of  sickness  in  London  on  the  5th  of  January,  and 
was  buried  in  Paul’s  church.  Englishmen  call  him 
a  saint. 

Chapter  LXXX. — Harald  Godwinson  made  King  of 

England. 

The  sons  of  Earl  Godwin  were  the  most  powerful 
men  in  England.  Toste  was  made  chief  of  the 
English  king’s  army,  and  was  his  land-defence  man 
when  the  king  began  to  grow  old ;  and  he  was  also 
placed  above  all  the  other  earls.  His  brother  Harald 
was  always  with  the  court  itself,  and  nearest  to  the 
king  in  all  service,  and  had  the  charge  of  the  king’s 
treasure-chamber.  It  is  said  that  when  the  kino; 
was  approaching  his  last  hour,  Harald  and  a  few 
others  were  with  him.  Harald  first  leant  down  over 
the  king,  and  then  said,  “  I  take  you  all  to  witness 
that  the  king  has  now  given  me  the  kingdom,  and 
all  the  realm  of  England  :  ”  and  then  the  king  was 
taken  dead  out  of  the  bed.  The  same  day  there  was 
a  meeting  of  the  chiefs,  at  which  there  was  some 
talk  of  choosing  a  king ;  and  then  Harald  brought 
forward  his  witnesses  that  King  Edward  had  given 
him  the  kingdom  on  his  dying  day.  The  meeting 
ended  by  choosing  Harald  as  king,  and  he  was 
consecrated  and  crowned  the  13th  day  of  Yule,  in 

*  In  the  year  1066,  according  to  the  Saxon  Chronicle.— h. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


29 


Paul’s  church.  Then  all  the  chiefs  and  all  the 
people  submitted  to  him.  Now  when  his  brother 
Earl  Toste  *  heard  of  this  he  took  it  very  ill,  as  he 
thought  himself  quite  as  well  entitled  to  be  king. 
“  I  want,”  said  he,  “  that  the  principal  men  of  the 
country  choose  him  whom  they  think  best  fitted  for 
it.”  And  sharp  words  passed  between  the  brothers. 
King  ITarald  says  he  will  not  give  up  his  kingly 
dignity,  for  he  is  seated  on  the  throne  which  kings 
sat  upon,  and  is  anointed  and  consecrated  a  king. 
On  his  side  also  was  the  strength  of  the  people,  for 
he  had  the  king’s  whole  treasure. 


Chapter  LXXXI. — Earl  Toste  s  Expedition  to  EenmarJc. 

Now  when  King  Harald  perceived  that  his  brother 
Toste  wanted  to  have  him  deprived  of  the  kingdom, 
he  did  not  trust  him  ;  for  Toste  was  a  clever  man, 
and  a  great  warrior,  and  was  in  friendship  with  the 
principal  men  of  the  country. f  He  therefore  took 
the  command  of  the  army  from  Toste,  and  also  all 
the  power  he  had  beyond  that  of  the  other  earls  of 
the  country.  Earl  Toste,  again,  would  not  submit 
to  be  his  own  brother’s  serving-man  ;  therefore  he 
went  with  his  people  over  the  sea  to  Flanders,  and 
stayed  there  a  while,  then  went  to  Friesland,  and 
from  thence  to  Denmark  to  his  relation  King  Svein. 

*  In  November  1065  Toste  had  been  deposed  from  his  Northumberland 
earldom,  and  exiled.  He  fled  to  the  country  of  his  wife,  that  is,  to 
Flanders,  and  thence  he  betook  himself  to  Rouen  and  participated  in 
William’s  plans  against  England.  Snorre’s  statements  in  the  beginning 
of  the  next  chapter  are  not  entirely  correct. 

t  On  the  contrary,  Toste  was  very  unpopular  in  England. 


30 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Earl  Ulf,  King  Svein’s  father,  and  Gyda,  Earl  Toste’s 
mother,  were  brother’s  and  sister’s  children.  The  earl 
now  asked  King  Svein  for  support  and  help  of  men  ; 
and  King  Svein  invited  him  to  stay  with  him,  with 
the  promise  that  he  should  get  so  large  an  earldom 
in  Denmark  that  he  would  be  an  important  chief. 

The  earl  replies,  “  My  inclination  is  to  go  back  to 
my  estate  in  England ;  but  if  I  cannot  get  help  from 
you  for  that  purpose,  I  will  agree  to  help  you  with 
all  the  power  I  can  command  in  England,  if  you  will 
go  there  with  the  Danish  army,  and  win  the  country, 
as  Canute  your  mother’s  brother  did.” 

The  king  replied,  “  So  much  smaller  a  man  am  I 
than  Canute  the  Great,  that  I  can  with  difficulty 
defend  my  own  Danish  dominions  against  the  North¬ 
men.  King  Canute,  on  the  other  hand,  got  the 
Danish  kingdom  in  heritage,  took  England  by  slash 
and  blow,  and  sometimes  was  near  losing  his  life  in 
the  contest ;  and  Norway  he  took  without  slash  or 
blow.  Now  it  suits  me  much  better  to  be  guided  by 
my  own  slender  ability,  than  to  imitate  my  relation 
King  Canute’s  lucky  hits.” 

Then  Earl  Toste  said,  “  The  result  of  my  errand 
here  is  less  fortunate  than  I  expected  of  thee  who  art 
so  gallant  a  man,  seeing  that  thy  relative  is  in  so 
great  need.  It  may  be  that  I  will  seek  friendly  help 
where  it  could  less  be  expected ;  and  that  I  may  find 
a  chief  who  is  less  afraid,  king,  than  thou  art  of  a 
great  enterprise.” 

Then  the  king  and  the  earl  parted,  not  just  the 
best  friends. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


3i 


Chapter  LNXXII. — Earl  Toste’s  Expedition  to  Norway. 

Earl  Toste  turned  away  then,  and  went  to  Norway, 
where  he  presented  himself  to  King  Harald,  who 
was  at  that  time  in  Viken.  When  they  met  the 
earl  explained  his  errand  to  the  king.  He  told  him 
all  his  proceedings  since  he  left  England,  and  asked 
his  aid  to  recover  his  dominions  in  England. 

The  king  replied,  that  the  Northmen  had  no  great 
desire  for  a  campaign  in  England,  and  to  have  English 
chiefs  over  them  there.  “People  say,”  added  he, 
“that  the  English  are  not  to  be  trusted.” 

The  earl  replied,  “  Is  it  true  what  I  have  heard 
people  tell  in  England,  that  thy  relative  King  Mag¬ 
nus  sent  men  to  King  Edward  with  the  message 
that  King  Magnus  had  right  to  England  as  well  as 
to  Denmark,  and  had  got  that  heritage  after  Harda- 
canute,  in  consequence  of  a  regular  agreement?” 

The  king  replied,  “How  came  it  that  he  did  not 
get  it,  if  he  had  a  right  to  it  ?  ” 

“  Why,”  replied  the  earl,  “  hast  thou  not  Denmark, 
as  King  Magnus  thy  predecessor  had  it?” 

The  king  replies,  “The  Danes  have  nothing  to 
brag  of  over  us  Northmen ;  for  many  a  place  have 
we  laid  in  ashes  to  thy  relations.” 

Then  said  the  earl,  “  If  thou  wilt  not  tell  me,  I 
will  tell  thee.  Magnus  subdued  Denmark,  because 
all  the  chiefs  of  the  country  helped  him ;  and 
thou  hast  not  done  it,  because  all  the  people  of  the 
country  were  against  thee.  Therefore,  also,  King 
Magnus  did  not  strive  for  England,  because  all 


32 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


the  nation  would  have  Edward  for  king.  Wilt  thou 
take  England  now  ?  I  will  bring  the  matter  so  far 
that  most  of  the  principal  men  in  England  shall 
be  thy  friends,  and  assist  thee  ;  for  nothing  is  want¬ 
ing  to  place  me  at  the  side  of  my  brother  Harald  but 
the  king’s  name.  All  men  allow  that  there  never 
was  such  a  warrior  in  the  northern  lands  as  thou 
art ;  and  it  appears  to  me  extraordinary  that  thou 
hast  been  fighting  for  fifteen  years  for  Denmark,  and 
wilt  not  take  England  that  lies  open  to  thee.” 

King  Harald  weighed  carefully  the  earl’s  words, 
and  perceived  at  once  that  there  was  truth  in  much 
of  what  he  said  ;  and  he  himself  had  also  a  great 
desire  to  acquire  dominions.  Then  King  Harald 
and  the  earl  talked  long  and  frequently  together  ; 
and  at  last  he  took  the  resolution  to  proceed  in 
summer  to  England,  and  conquer  the  country.  King 
Harald  sent  a  message-token  through  all  Norway 
and  ordered  out  a  levy  of  one  half  of  all  the  men 
in  Norway  able  to  carry  arms.  When  this  became 
generally  known,  there  were  many  guesses  about 
what  might  be  the  end  of  this  expedition.  Some 
reckoned  up  King  Harald’s  great  achievements, 
and  thought  he  was  also  the  man  who  could  accom¬ 
plish  this.  Others,  again,  said  that  England  was 
difficult  to  attack ;  that  it  was  very  full  of  people  ; 
and  the  men-at-arms,  who  were  called  Thing-men, 
were  so  brave,  that  one  of  them  was  better  than  two 
of  Harald’s  best  men.  Then  said  Ulf  the  marshal:  — 

“  I  am  still  ready  gold  to  gain  ; 

But  truly  it  would  be  in  vain, 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


33 


And  the  king’s  marshal  in  the  hall 
Might  leave  his  good  post  once  for  all, 

If  two  of  us  in  any  strife 

Must  from  one  Thingman  fly  for  life. 

My  lovely  Norse  maid,  in  my  youth 
We  thought  the  opposite  the  truth.” 

Ulf  the  marshal  died  that  spring  [1066].  King 
Harald  stood  over  his  grave,  and  said,  as  he  was 
leaving  it,  “  There  lies  now  the  truest  of  men,  and 
the  most  devoted  to  his  king.” 

Earl  Toste  sailed  in  spring  *  west  to  Flanders,  to 
meet  the  people  who  had  left  England  with  him,  and 
others  besides  who  had  gathered  to  him  both  out  of 
England  and  Flanders. 


Chapter  LXXXIII. — Gyrd’s  Dream. 

King  Harald’s  fleet  assembled  at  the  Solunds.t 
When  King  Harald  was  ready  to  leave  Nidaros  he 
went  to  King  Olaf  s  shrine,  unlocked  it,  clipped  his 
hair  and  nails,  and  locked  the  shrine  again,  and  threw 
the  keys  into  the  Nid.  Some  say  he  threw  them  over¬ 
board  outside  of  Agdanes ;  and  since  then  the  shrine 
of  Saint  Olaf  the  king  has  never  been  opened.  Thirty- 
five  years  had  passed  since  he  was  slain  ;  and  he  lived 
thirty-five  years  here  on  earth  [1030-1066.]  King 
ITarald  sailed  with  the  ships  he  had  about  him  to  the 
south  to  meet  his  people,  and  a  great  fleet  was  col¬ 
lected  ;  so  that,  according  to  the  people’s  reckoning, 

*  Evidently  a  mistake.  In  May  1066  Toste  made  an  attack  on  Eng¬ 
land,  and  he  must  have  gone  to  Harald  after  that. 

+  Solunds,  the  Sulen  Isles,  at  the  mouth  of  Sogn  fiord. — L. 

VOL.  IV. 


C 


34 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


King  Harald  had  nearly  200*  ships,  beside  provision- 
ships  and  small  craft. 

While  they  lay  at  the  Solunds  a  man  called  Gyrd, 
on  board  the  king’s  ship,  had  a  dream.  He  thought 
he  was  standing  in  the  king’s  ship  and  saw  a  great 
witch-wife  standing  on  the  island,  with  a  fork  in  one 
hand  and  a  trough  in  the  other.  He  thought  also  that 
he  saw  over  all  the  fleet,  and  that  a  fowl  was  sitting 
upon  every  ship’s  stern,  and  that  these  fowls  were  all 
ravens  or  ernes  ;  and  the  witch-wife  sang  this  song  : — 

“  From  the  east  I’ll  ’tice  the  king, 

To  the  west  the  king  I’ll  bring  ; 

Many  a  noble  bone  will  be 
In  battle  left  for  me. 

Ravens  o’er  Giuke’s  t  ship  are  flitting, 

Eyeing  the  prey  they  think  most  fitting. 

Upon  the  stem  I’ll  sail  with  them  ! 

Upon  the  stem  I’ll  sail  with  them  !  ” 


Chapter  LXXXIY. — Thord’s  Dream. 

There  was  also  a  man  called  Thord,  in  a  ship  which 
lay  not  far  from  the  king’s.  He  dreamt  one  night 
that  he  saw  King  Harald’ s  fleet  coming  to  land,  and 
he  knew  the  land  to  be  England.  He  saw  a  great 
battle-array  on  the  land ;  and  he  thought  both  sides 
began  to  fight,  and  had  many  banners  flapping  in  the 
air.  And  before  the  army  of  the  people  of  the  coun¬ 
try  was  riding  a  huge  witch-wife  upon  a  wolf ;  and 
the  wolf  had  a  man’s  carcass  in  his  mouth,  and  the 
blood  was  dropping  from  his  jaws  ;  and  when  he  had 

*  =240. 

t  Giuke,  a  celebrated  vikiug.  Here  Giuke’s  ship  means  Harald’s,  the 
leader  of  the  army.  — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


35 


eaten  up  one  body  she  threw  another  into  his  mouth, 
and  so  one  after  another,  and  he  swallowed  them  all. 
And  she  sang  thus  : — 

“  Skade’s  eagle  eyes 
The  king’s  ill  luck  espies  : 

Though  glancing  shields 
Hide  the  green  fields, 

The  king’s  ill  luck  she  spies. 

To  bode  the  doom  of  this  meat  kin" 

O  O  / 

The  flesh  of  bleeding  men  I  fling 
To  hairy  jaw  and  hungry  maw  ! 

To  hairy  jaw  and  hungry  maw  !  ” 


Chapter  LXXXY .—King  Hamid's  Dt  ' earn . 

King  Harald  also  dreamt  one  night  that  he  was 
in  Nidaros,  and  met  his  brother  King  Olaf,  who 
sang  to  him  these  verses  : — 

“  In  many  a  fight 
My  name  was  bright  ; 

Men  weep,  and  tell 
How  Olaf  fell. 

Thy  death  is  near  ; 

Thy  corpse,  I  fear, 

The  crow  will  feed, 

The  witch- wife’s  steed.” 

Many  other  dreams  and  forebodings  were  then  told 
of,  and  most  of  them  gloomy.  Before  King  Harald  left 
lhrondhjem,  he  let  his  son  Magnus  be  proclaimed 
king,  and  set  him  as  king  over  Norway  while  he  was 
absent.  Thora,  the  daughter  of  Thorberg,  also  re¬ 
mained  behind ;  but  he  took  with  him  Queen  Ellisif 
and  her  two  daughters,  Maria  and  Ingigerd.  Olaf, 

King  Harald’s  son,  also  accompanied  his  father 
abroad. 


36 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  LXXXYI. — Battle  at  Scarborough. 

When  King  Harald  was  clear  for  sea,  and  the 
wind  became  favourable,  he  sailed  out  into  the 
ocean ;  and  he  himself  landed  in  Shetland,  but  a 
part  of  his  fleet  in  the  Orkney  Islands.  King  Harald 
stopped  but  a  short  time  in  Shetland  before  sailing 
to  Orkney,  from  whence  he  took  with  him  a  great 
armed  force,  and  the  earls  Paul  and  Erlend,  the 
sons  of  Earl  Thorfin ;  but  he  left  behind  him  here 
the  Queen  Ellisif,  and  her  daughters  Maria  and 
Ingigerd.  Then  he  sailed,  leaving  Scotland  and 
England  westward  of  him,  and  landed  at  a  place 
called  Kliftand.*  There  he  went  on  shore  and 
plundered,  and  brought  the  country  in  subjection 
to  him  without  opposition.  Then  he  brought  up  at 
Skardaburg,t  and  fought  with  the  people  of  the 
place.  He  went  up  a  hill  which  is  there,  and  made 
a  great  pile  upon  it,  which  he  set  on  fire  ;  and  when 
the  pile  was  in  clear  flame,  his  men  took  large  forks 
and  pitched  the  burning  wood  down  into  the  town, 
so  that  one  house  caught  fire  after  the  other,  and 
the  town  surrendered.  The  Northmen  killed  many 
people  there,  and  took  all  the  booty  they  could  lay 
hold  of.  There  was  nothing  left  for  the  Englishmen 
now,  if  they  would  preserve  their  lives,  but  to  submit 
to  King  Harald ;  and  thus  he  subdued  the  country 
wherever  he  came.  Then  the  king  proceeded  south 
along  the  land,  and  brought  up  at  TIellornes,t  where 
there  came  a  force  that  had  been  assembled  to 

*  Cleveland.— L.  +  Scarborough. — L.  £  Holderness. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


37 


oppose  him,  with  which  he  had  a  battle,  and  gained 
the  victory. 


Chapter  LXXXYII. — Of  Harold's  Order  of  Battle. 

Thereafter  the  king  sailed  to  the  Humber,  and  up 
along  the  river,  and  then  he  landed.  Up  in  Jorvik  * 
were  two  earls,  Earl  Morukare,t  and  his  brother 
Earl  Valthiof,t  and  they  had  an  immense  army. 
While  the  army  of  the  earls  was  coming  down  from 
the  upper  part  of  the  country,  King  Harald  lay  in 
the  Usa.§  King  Harald  now  went  on  the  land,  and 
drew  up  his  men.||  The  one  arm  of  this  line  stood 
at  the  outer  edge  of  the  river,  the  other  turned 
up  towards  the  land  along  a  ditch ;  and  there  was 
also  a  morass,  deep,  broad,  and  full  of  water.  The 
earls  let  their  army  proceed  slowly  down  along  the 
river,  with  all  their  troops  in  line.  The  king’s 
banner  was  next  the  river,  where  the  line  was  thickest. 
It  was  thinnest  at  the  ditch,  where  also  the  weakest 
of  the  men  were.  When  the  earls  advanced  down¬ 
wards  along  the  ditch,  the  arm  of  the  Northmen’s 
line  which  was  at  the  ditch  gave  way;  and  the 
Englishmen  followed,  thinking  the  Northmen  would 
fly.  The  banner  of  Earl  Morukare  advanced  then 
bravely. 

*  York. — L.  f  Morcar,  or  Morcad,  In  onr  histories. — L. 

+  Mercar  and  Edwin  were  at  that  time  in  command  in  Northumber¬ 
land  ;  Valthiof  is  not  mentioned  by  English  writers. 

§  The  Ouse. — L. 

||  The  battle  was  fought  at  Fulford,  south-east  from  York. 


38 


[CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  LXXXVIII. — The  Battle  at  the  Humber. 

When  King  Harald  saw  that  the  English  array 
had  come  to  the  ditch  against  him,  he  ordered  the 

charge  to  be  sounded,  and  urged  on  his  men.  He 

■ 

ordered  the  banner  which  was  called  the  Land- 
ravager  to  be  carried  before  him,  and  made  so  severe 
an  assault  that  all  had  to  give  way  before  it ;  and 
there  was  a  great  loss  among  the  men  of  the 
earls,  and  they  soon  broke  into  flight,  some  running 
up  the  river,  some  down,  and  the  most  leaping  into 
the  ditch,  which  was  so  filled  with  dead  that  the 
Norsemen  could  go  dry-foot  over  the  fen.  There 
Earl  Morukare  fell.  So  says  Stein  Herdison  : — 

“  The  gallant  Harald  drove  along, 

Flying  but  fighting,  the  whole  throng. 

At  last,  confused,  they  could  not  fight, 

And  the  whole  body  took  to  flight. 

Up  from  the  river’s  silent  stream 
At  once  rose  desperate  splash  and  scream  ; 

But  they  who  stood  like  men  this  fray 
Round  Morukare’s  *  body  lay.” 

This  song  was  composed  by  Stein  Herdison  about 
Olaf,  son  of  King  Harald ;  and  he  speaks  of  Olaf 
being  in  this  battle  with  King  Harald  his  father. 
These  things  are  also  spoken  of  in  the  song  called 
“  Harald’s  Stave  :  ” — 

“Earl  Valthiof’s  men 
Lay  in  the  fen, 


*  This  appears  to  be  a  mistake  of  Snorre,  or  of  the  skald  Stein  Herdison. 
Morukare  was  not  slain  in  this  battle  of  Battlebridge.  (See  Torfams, 
Histor.  Now.  pt.  iii.  p.  308.)  Morukare,  or  Morcad  and  Valthiof,  were 
not  brothers,  as  stated  in  chap.  87.  Morcad’s  brother  was  Edwin,  earl 
of  Mercia. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


39 


By  sword  down  hewed, 

So  thickly  strewed, 

That  Norseman  say 
They  paved  a  wray 
Across  the  fen 
For  the  brave  Norsemen.” 

Earl  Valthiof,  and  the  people  who  escaped,  fled 
up  to  the  castle  in  York  ;  and  there  the  greatest  loss 
of  men  had  been.  This  battle  took  place  upon  the 
Wednesday  next  Mathias’  day  [io66].# 

Chapter  LXXXIX. — Of  Earl  Toste. 

Earl  Toste  had  come  from  Flanders  to  King  Harald 
as  soon  as  he  arrived  in  England,  and  the  earl  was 
present  at  all  these  battles.  It  happened,  as  he 
had  foretold  the  king  at  their  first  meeting,  that  in 
England  many  people  would  flock  to  them,  as  being 
friends  and  relations  of  Earl  Toste,  and  thus  the 
king’s  forces  were  much  strengthened.  After  the 
battle  now  told  of,  all  people  in  the  nearest  districts 
submitted  to  Harald,  but  some  fled.  Then  the  king 
advanced  to  take  the  castle,  and  laid  his  army  at 
Stanforda-bryggiur  ;t  and  as  King  Harald  had  gained 
so  great  a  victory  against  so  great  chiefs  and  so  great 
an  army,  the  people  were  dismayed,  and  doubted 
if  they  could  make  any  opposition.  The  men  of  the 
castle  therefore  determined,  in  a  council,  to  send  a 
message  to  King  Harald,  and  deliver  up  the  castle 
into  his  power.  All  this  was  soon  settled  ;  so  that 
on  Sunday  the  king  proceeded  with  the  whole  army 

*  Saint  Matthew’s  Day  is  the  20th  September.  — L. 
t  Stanford  Bridge. — L. 


40 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


to  the  castle,  and  appointed  a  Thing  of  the  people 
without  the  castle,  at  which  the  people  of  the  castle 
were  to  be  present.  At  this  Thing  all  the  people 
accepted  the  condition  of  submitting  to  Harald, 
and  gave  him,  as  hostages,  the  children  of  the  most 
considerable  persons  ;  for  Earl  Toste  was  well  ac¬ 
quainted  with  all  the  people  of  that  town.  In  the 
evening  the  king  returned  down  to  his  ships,  after 
this  victory  achieved  with  his  own  force,  and  was 
very  merry.  A  Thing  was  appointed  within  the 
castle  early  on  Monday  morning,  and  then  King 
Harald  was  to  name  officers  to  rule  over  the  town,  to 
give  out  laws,  and  bestow  fiefs.  The  same  evening, 
after  sunset,  King  Harald  Godwinson  came  from  the 
south  to  the  castle  with  a  numerous  army,  and  rode 
into  the  city  with  the  good-will  and  consent  of  the 
people  of  the  castle.  All  the  gates  and  walls  were 
beset  so  that  the  Northmen  could  receive  no  intelli¬ 
gence,  and  the  army  remained  all  night  in  the  town. 


Chapter  XC. — Of  King  Hamid’s  Landing. 

On  Monday,  when  King  Harald  Sigurd  son  had 
taken  breakfast,  he  ordered  the  trumpets  to  sound 
for  going  on  shore.  The  army  accordingly  got  ready, 
and  he  divided  the  men  into  the  parties  who  should 
go,  and  who  should  stay  behind.  In  every  division 
he  allowed  two  men  to  land,  and  one  to  remain 
behind.  Earl  Toste  and  his  retinue  prepared  to 
land  with  King  Harald ;  and,  for  watching,  the 
ships  remained  behind  the  king’s  son  Olaf ;  the  earls 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


4i 


of  Orkney,  Paul  and  Erlend ;  and  also  Eystein  Orre, 
a  son  of  Thorberg  Arnason,  who  was  the  most  able 
and  best  beloved  by  the  king  of  all  the  lendermen, 
and  to  whom  the  king  had  promised  his  daughter 
Maria.  The  weather  was  uncommonly  fine,  and  it 
was  hot  sunshine.  The  men  therefore  laid  aside 
their  armour,  and  went  on  the  land  only  with  their 
shields,  helmets,  and  spears,  and  girt  with  swords  ; 
and  many  had  also  arrows  and  bows,  and  all  were 
very  merry.  Now  as  they  came  near  the  castle  a 
great  army  seemed  coming  against  them,  and  they 
saw  a  cloud  of  dust  as  from  horses’  feet,  and  under 
it  shining  shields  and  bright  armour.  The  king 
halted  his  people,  and  called  to  him  Earl  Toste,  and 
asked  him  what  army  this  could  be.  The  earl  replied, 
that  he  thought  it  most  likely  to  be  a  hostile  army, 
but  possibly  it  might  be  some  of  his  relations  who 
were  seeking  for  mercy  and  friendship,  in  order  to 
obtain  certain  peace  and  safety  from  the  king.  Then 
the  king  said,  “  We  must  all  halt,  to  discover  what 
kind  of  a  force  this  is.”  They  did  so;  and  the 
nearer  this  force  came  the  greater  it  appeared,  and 
their  shining  arms  were  to  the  sight  like  glancing 
ice. 

Chapter  XCI.— 0/  Earl  Toste  s  Counsel 

Then  said  King  Harald,  “  Let  us  now  fall  upon 
some  good  sensible  counsel ;  for  it  is  not  to  be 
concealed  that  this  is  an  hostile  army,  and  the 
king  himself  without  doubt  is  here.” 

Then  said  the  earl,  “The  first  counsel  is  to  turn 


42 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


about  as  fast  as  we  can  to  our  ships  to  get  our  men 
and  our  weapons,  and  then  we  will  make  a  defence 
according  to  our  ability ;  or  otherwise  let  our  ships 
defend  us,  for  there  these  horsemen  have  no  power 
over  us.” 

Then  King  Harald  said,  “I  have  another  counsel. 
Put  three  of  our  best  horses  under  three  of  our 
briskest  lads,  and  let  them  ride  with  all  speed  to 
tell  our  people  to  come  quickly  to  our  relief.  The 
Englishmen  shall  have  a  hard  fray  of  it  before  we 
give  ourselves  up  for  lost.” 

The  earl  said  the  king  must  order  in  this,  as  in  all 
things,  as  he  thought  best ;  adding,  at  the  same  time, 
it  was  by  no  means  his  wish  to  fly.  Then  King 
Harald  ordered  his  banner  Land-ravager  to  be  set 
up ;  and  Frirek  was  the  name  of  him  who  bore  the 
banner. 


Chapter  XCII. — Of  King  Harold's  Array. 

Then  King  Harald  arranged  his  army,  and  made 
the  line  of  battle  long,  but  not  deep.  He  bent  both 
wings  of  it  back,  so  that  they  met  together ;  and 
formed  a  wide  ring  equally  thick  all  round,  shield  to 
shield,  both  in  the  front  and  rear  ranks.  The  king 
himself  and  his  retinue  were  within  the  circle ;  and 
there  was  the  banner,  and  a  body  of  chosen  men. 
Earl  Toste,  with  his  retinue,  was  at  another  place, 
and  had  a  different  banner.  The  army  wTas  arranged 
in  this  way,  because  the  king  knew  that  horsemen 
were  accustomed  to  ride  forwards  with  great  vigour, 
but  to  turn  back  immediately.  Now  the  king  ordered 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


43 


that  his  own  and  the  earl’s  attendants  should  ride 
forwards  where  it  was  most  required.  “And  our 
bowmen,”  said  he,  “  shall  be  near  to  us  ;  and  they 
who  stand  in  the  first  rank  shall  set  the  spear- shaft 
on  the  ground,  and  the  spear-point  against  the  horse¬ 
man’s  breast,  if  he  rides  at  them ;  and  those  who 
stand  in  the  second  rank  shall  set  the  spear-point 
against  the  horse’s  breast.” 


Chapter  XCIII. — Of  King  Harald  Godwinson. 

King  Harald  Godwinson  had  come  with  an  im¬ 
mense  army,  both  of  cavalry  and  infantry.  Now 
King  Harald  Sigurdson  rode  around  his  array,  to  see 
how  every  part  was  drawn  up.  He  was  upon  a  black 
horse,  and  the  horse  stumbled  under  him,  so  that  the 
king  fell  off.  He  got  up  in  haste,  and  said,  “  A  fall 
is  lucky  for  a  traveller.” 

The  English  king  Harald  said  to  the  Northmen 
who  were  wuth  him,  “  Ho  ye  know  the  stout  man 
who  fell  from  his  horse,  with  the  blue  kirtle  and  the 
beautiful  helmet?  ” 

“  That  is  the  king  himself,”  said  they. 

The  English  king  said,  “  A  great  man,  and  of 
stately  appearance  is  he ;  but  I  think  his  luck  has 
left  him.” 


Chapter  XCIV. — Of  the  Troop  of  the  Nobility. 

Twenty  horsemen  rode  forward  from  the  Tiling- 
men’s  troops  against  the  Northmen’s  array;  and  all 


44 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


of  them,  and  likewise  their  horses,  were  clothed  in 
armour. 

One  of  the  horsemen  said,  “  Is  Earl  Toste  in  this 
army?  ” 

The  earl  answered,  “It  is  not  to  be  denied  that 
ye  will  find  him  here.” 

The  horseman  says,  “Thy  brother  King  Harald 
sends  thee  salutation,  with  the  message  that  thou 
shalt  have  the  whole  of  Northumberland ;  and  rather 
than  thou  shouldst  not  submit  to  him,  he  will  give 
thee  the  third  part  ot  his  kingdom  to  rule  over  along 
with  himself.” 

The  earl  replies,  “  This  is  something  different 
from  the  enmity  and  scorn  he  offered  last  winter; 
and  if  this  had  been  offered  then  it  would  have 
saved  many  a  man  s  life  who  now  is  dead,  and  it 
would  have  been  better  for  the  kingdom  of  Eng- 
land.  But  if  I  accept  of  this  offer,  what  will  he 
give  King  Harald  Sigurdson  for  his  trouble  ?  ” 

The  horseman  replied,  “He  has  also  spoken  of 
this ;  and  will  give  him  seven  feet  of  English 

ground,  or  as  much  more  as  he  may  be  taller  than 
other  men.”  ! 

“Then,”  said  the  earl,  “go  now  and  tell  King 
Harald  to  get  ready  for  battle  ;  for  never  shall  the 
Northmen  say  with  truth  that  Earl  Toste  left  King 
Harald  Sigurdson  to  join  his  enemy’s  troops,  when 
he  came  to  fight  west  here  in  England.  We  shall 
rather  all  take  the  resolution  to  die  with  honour, 
or  to  gain  England  by  a  victory.” 

Then  the  horsemen  rode  back. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


45 


King  Harald  Sigurdson  said  to  the  earl,  “  Who 
was  the  man  who  spoke  so  well  ?  ” 

The  earl  replied,  “  That  was  King  Ilarald  God  win- 
son.” 

Then  said  King  Harald  Sigurdson,  “That  was 
by  far  too  long  concealed  from  me ;  for  they  had 
come  so  near  to  our  army,  that  this  Harald  should 
never  have  carried  back  the  tidings  of  our  men’s 
slaughter.” 

Then  said  the  earl,  “  It  was  certainly  imprudent 
for  such  chiefs,  and  it  may  be  as  you  say ;  but  I 
saw  he  was  going  to  offer  me  peace  and  a  great 
dominion,  and  that,  on  the  other  hand,  I  would  be 
his  murderer  if  I  betrayed  him ;  and  I  would  rather 
he  should  be  my  murderer  than  I  his,  if  one  of  two 
be  to  die.” 

King  Harald  Sigurdson  observed  to  his  men, 
“That  was  but  a  little  man,  yet  he  sat  firmly  in 
his  stirrups.” 

It  is  said  that  Harald  made  these  verses  at  this 
time  : — 

“  Advance  !  advance  ! 

No  helmets  glance, 

But  blue  swords  playi 
In  our  array. 

Advance !  advance ! 

No  mail-coats  glance, 

But  hearts  are  here 
That  ne’er  knew  fear.” 

His  coat  of  mail  was  called  Emma ;  and  it  was  so 
long  that  it  reached  almost  to  the  middle  of  his  leg, 
and  so  strong  that  no  weapon  ever  pierced  it.  Then 
said  King  Harald  Sigurdson,  “  These  verses  are  but 


46 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


ill  composed  ;  I  must  try  to  make  better ;  ”  and  he 
composed  the  following  : — 

“  In  battle  storm  we  seek  no  lee, 

With  skulking  head,  and  bending  knee, 

Behind  the  hollow  shield. 

With  eye  and  hand  we  fend  the  head  ; 

Courage  and  skill  stand  in  the  stead 
Of  panzer,  helm,  and  shield, 

In  Hild’s  bloody  field.” 

Thereupon  Thiodolf  sang  : — 

“  And  should  our  king  in  battle  fall, — 

A  fate  that  God  may  give  to  all, — 

His  sons  will  vengeance  take  ; 

And  never  shone  the  sun  upon 
Two  nobler  eaglets  in  his  run, 

And  them  we’ll  ne’er  forsake.” 


Chapter  XCV. — Of  the  Beginning  of  the  Battle. 

Now  the  battle  began.  The  Englishmen  made 
a  hot  assault  upon  the  Northmen,  who  sustained  it 
bravely.  It  was  no  easy  matter  for  the  English 
to  ride  against  the  Northmen  on  account  of  their 
spears  ;  therefore  they  rode  in  a  circle  around  them. 
And  the  fight  at  first  was  but  loose  and  light,  as 
long  as  the  Northmen  kept  their  order  of  battle ; 
for  although  the  English  rode  hard  against  the 
Northmen,  they  gave  way  again  immediately,  as 
they  could  do  nothing  against  them.  Now  when 
the  Northmen  thought  they  perceived  that  the  enemy 
were  making  but  weak  assaults,  they  set  after  them, 
and  would  drive  them  into  flight;  but  when  they 
had  broken  their  shield-rampart  the  Englishmen 
rode  up  from  all  sides,  and  threw  arrows  and  spears 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


47 


on  them.  Now  when  King  Harald  Sigurdson  saw 
this,  he  went  into  the  fray  where  the  greatest  crash 
of  weapons  was ;  and  there  was  a  sharp  conflict,  in 
which  many  people  fell  on  both  sides.  King  Iiarald 
then  was  in  a  rage,  and  ran  out  in  front  of  the  array, 
and  hewed  down  with  both  hands ;  so  that  neither 
helmet  nor  armour  could  withstand  him,  and  all  who 
were  nearest  gave  way  before  him.  It  was  then  very 
near  with  the  English  that  they  had  taken  to  flight. 
So  says  Arnor,  the  earls’  skald  : — 

“  Where  battle-storm  was  ringing, 

Where  arrow-cloud  was  singing, 

Harald  stood  there, 

Of  armour  bare, 

His  deadly  sword  still  swinging. 

The  foeman  feel  its  bite  ; 

His  Norsemen  rush  to  fight, 

Danger  to  share 
With  Harald  there, 

Where  steel  on  steel  was  ringing.” 


Chapter  XCVI. — Fall  of  King  Harold. 

King  Harald  Sigurdson  was  hit  by  an  arrow  in 
the  windpipe,  and  that  was  his  death-wound.  He 
fell,  and  all  who  had  advanced  with  him,  except 
those  who  retired  with  the  banner.  There  was 
afterwards  the  warmest  conflict,  and  Earl  Toste  had 
taken  charge  of  the  king’s  banner.  They  began  on 
both  sides  to  form  their  array  again,  and  for  a  long 
time  there  was  a  pause  in  fighting.  Then  Thiodolf 
sang  these  verses  : — 


“  The  army  stands  in  hushed  dismay  ; 
Stilled  is  the  clamour  of  the  fray. 


48 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Harald  is  dead,  and  with  him  goes 
The  spirit  to  withstand  our  foes. 

A  bloody  scat  the  folk  must  pay 
For  their  king’s  folly  on  this  day. 

He  fell ;  and  now,  without  disguise, 

We  say  this  business  was  not  wise.” 

But  before  the  battle  began  again  Harald  God- 
winson  offered  his  brother  Earl  Toste  peace,  and 
also  quarter  to  the  Northmen  who  were  still  alive ; 
but  the  Northmen  called  out  all  of  them  together 
that  they  would  rather  fall,  one  across  the  other, 
than  accept  of  quarter  from  the  Englishmen.  Then 
each  side  set  up  a  war-shout,  and  the  battle  began 
again.  So  says  Arnor,  the  earls’  skald  : — 

“  The  king,  whose  name  would  ill-doers  scare, 

The  gold-tipped  arrow  would  not  spare. 

Unhelmed,  unpanzered,  without  shield, 

He  fell  among  us  in  the  field. 

The  gallant  men  who  saw  him  fall 
Would  take  no  quarter  ;  one  and  all 
Resolved  to  die  with  their  loved  king, 

Around  his  corpse  in  a  corpse-ring.” 


Chapter  XCYII. — Skirmish  of  Orre. 

Eystein  Orre  came  up  at  this  moment  from  the 
ships  with  the  men  who  followed  him,  and  all  were 
clad  in  armour.  Then  Eystein  got  King  Harald’s 
banner  Land-ravager  ;  and  now  was,  for  the  third 
time,  one  of  the  sharpest  of  conflicts,  in  which  many 
Englishmen  fell,  and  they  were  near  to  taking  flight. 
This  conflict  is  called  Orre’s  storm.  Eystein  and 
his  men  had  hastened  so  fast  from  the  ships  that 
they  were  quite  exhausted,  and  scarcely  fit  to  fight 
before  they  came  into  the  battle ;  but  afterwards 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


49 


they  became  so  furious,  that  they  did  not  guard 
themselves  with  their  shields  as  long  as  they  could 
stand  upright.  At  last  they  threw  off  their  coats 
of  ring-mail,  and  then  the  Englishmen  could  easily 
lay  their  blows  at  them ;  and  many  fell  from  weari¬ 
ness,  and  died  without  a  wound.  Thus  almost  all 
the  chief  men  fell  among  the  Norway  people.  This 
happened  towards  evening ;  and  then  it  went,  as 
one  might  expect,  that  all  had  not  the  same  fate,  for 
many  fled,  and  were  lucky  enough  to  escape  in 
various  ways ;  and  darkness  fell  before  the  slaughter 
was  altogether  ended. 


Chapter  XCVIII. — Qf  Styrkar  the  Marshal. 

Styrkar,  King  Harald  Sigurdson’s  marshal,  a  gal¬ 
lant  man,  escaped  upon  a  horse,  on  which  he  rode 
away  in  the  evening.  It  was  blowing  a  cold  wind, 
and  Styrkar  had  not  much  other  clothing  upon  him 
but  his  shirt,  and  had  a  helmet  on  his  head,  and  a 
drawn  sword  in  his  hand.  As  soon  as  his  weariness 
was  over,  he  began  to  feel  cold.  A  waggoner  met 
him  in  a  lined  skin-coat.  Styrkar  asks  him,  “Wilt 
thou  sell  thy  coat,  friend  ?  ” 

“Not  to  thee,”  says  the  peasant;  “thou  art  a 
Northman  ;  that  I  can  hear  by  thy  tongue." 

Styrkar  replies,  “If  I  were  a  Northman,  what 
wouldst  thou  do  ?  ” 

“I  would  kill  thee,”  replied  the  peasant;  “but, 
as  ill  luck  would  have  it,  I  have  no  weapon  just 
now  by  me  that  would  do  it.” 

VOL.  IV. 


n 


5o 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Then  Styrkar  says,  “  As  you  can’t  kill  me,  friend, 
I  shall  try  if  I  can’t  kill  you.”  And  with  that  he 
swung  his  sword,  and  struck  him  on  the  neck,  so 
that  his  head  came  off.  He  then  took  the  skin-coat, 
sprang  on  his  horse,  and  rode  down  to  the  strand. 

Olaf  Haraldson  had  not  gone  on  land  with  the 
others,  and  when  he  heard  of  his  father’s  fall  he  made 
ready  to  sail  away  with  the  men  who  remained. 


Chapter  NCIX. — Of  William  the  Bastard. 

When  the  Earl  of  Rouen,  William  the  Bastard, 
heard  of  his  relation  King  Edward’s  death,  and  also 
that  Harald  Godwinson  was  chosen,  crowned,  and 
consecrated  king  of  England,  it  appeared  to  him  that 
he  had  a  better  right  to  the  kingdom  of  England 
than  Harald,  by  reason  of  the  relationship  between 
him  and  King  Edward.*  He  thought,  also,  that  he 
had  grounds  for  avenging  the  affront  that  Harald 
had  put  upon  him  with  respect  to  his  daughter. 
From  all  these  grounds  William  gathered  together 
a  great  army  in  Normandy,  and  had  many  men,  and 
sufficient  transport-shipping.  The  day  that  he  rode 
out  of  the  castle  to  his  ships,  and  had  mounted  his 
horse,  his-  wife  came  to  him,  and  wanted  to  speak 
with  him  ;  but  when  he  saw  her  he  struck  at  her 
with  his  heel,  and  set  his  spurs  so  deep  into  her 

*  The  relationship  here  alluded  to  is  that  Emma,  the  wife  of  Ethelred 
and  mother  of  Edward  the  Confessor,  was  a  sister  of  William,  and  that 
lie,  as  Uncle  of  Edward,  was  nearer  than  Harald  in  relationship  ;  hut 
this  is  evidently  an  error  of  Snorre.  William’s  father  was  Robert  Long- 
spear,  son  of  Richard  ;  and  Emma  was  Richard’s  daughter,  and  aunt,  not 
sister,  of  William.—  L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


Si 

breast  that  she  fell  clown  dead  ; #  and  the  earl  rode 
on  to  his  ships,  and  went  with  his  ships  over  to 
England.  His  brother,  Archbishop  Otto,  was  with 
him ;  and  when  the  earl  came  to  England  he  began 
to  plunder,  and  take  possession  of  the  land  as  he 
came  along.  Earl  William  was  stouter  and  stronger 
than  other  men ;  a  great  horseman  and  warrior,  but 
somewhat  stern ;  and  a  very  sensible  man,  but  not 
considered  a  man  to  be  relied  on. 

Chapter  C. — Fall  of  King  Harald  Godwinson. 

King  Harald  Godwinson  gave  King  Harald  Sigurd - 
son’s  son  Olaf  leave  to  go  away,  with  the  men  who 
had  followed  him  and  had  not  fallen  in  battle ;  but 
he  himself  turned  round  with  his  army  to  go  south, 
for  he  had  heard  that  William  the  Bastard  was  over¬ 
whelming  the  south  of  England  with  a  vast  army, 
and  was  subduing  the  country  for  himself.  With 
King  Harald  went  his  brothers  Svein  and  Gyrd, 
and  Earl  Valthiof.  King  Harald  and  Earl  William 
met  each  other  south  in  England  at  Ilelsingja-port.t 
There  was  a  great  battle,  in  which  King  Harald  and 
his  brother  Earl  Gyrd  and  a  great  part  of  his  men 
fell.  This  was  the  nineteenth  day  after  the  fall  of 
King  Harald  Sigurdson.J  Harald’s  brother,  Earl 
Valthiof,  escaped  by  flight,  and  towards  evening  fell 

*  This  story  is  false,  or  relates  to  some  concubine  ;  for  William’s 
queen,  Matilda,  was  crowned  in  London.  — L. 

+  Helsingja-port — Hastings. — L. 

X  The  battle  of  Hastings  was  fought  October  14,  1066.  Gyrd  took  an 
important  part  in  the  battle,  and  was  slain  by  William’s  sword.  The 
Norman  and  English  sources  do  not  speak  of  Valthiof’s  presence. 


52 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


in  with  a  division  of  William’s  people,  consisting  of 
ioo  men;  and  when  they  saw  Earl  Valthiofs  troop 
they  fled  to  a  wood.  Earl  Valthiof  set  fire  to  the 
wood,  and  they  were  all  burnt.  So  says  Thorkel 
Skallason  in  Valthiof’ s  ballad  : — 

“  Earl  Valthiof  the  brave 
His  foes  a  warming  gave  : 

Within  the  blazing  grove 
A  hundred  men  he  drove. 

The  wolf  will  soon  return, 

And  the  witch’s  horse  will  burn 
Her  sharp  claws  in  the  ash, 

To  taste  the  Frenchman’s  flesh.” 


Chapter  CT. — 'Earl  Valthiofs  Death. 

William  was  proclaimed  king  of  England.  He 
sent  a  message  to  Earl  Valthiof  that  they  should  be 
reconciled,  and  gave  him  assurance  of  safety  to  come 
to  the  place  of  meeting.  The  earl  set  out  with  a  few 
men  ;  but  when  he  came  to  a  heath  north  of  Ivastala- 
bryggia,*  there  met  him  two  officers  of  King  William, 
with  many  followers,  who  took  him  prisoner,  put  him 
in  fetters,  and  afterwards  he  was  beheaded ;  and  the 
English  call  him  a  saint.  Thorkel  tells  of  this  : — 

“  William  came  o’er  the  sea, 

With  bloody  sword  came  he  : 

Cold  heart  and  bloody  hand 
Now  rule  the  English  land. 


*  Kastala-bryggia  may  be  Borouglibridge.  According  to  the  Saxon 
Chronicle,  Earl  Valthiof  was  executed  at  Winchelsea  in  the  year  1076 
for  an  alleged  conspiracy,  and  his  body  was  interred  at  Croyland.  This 
is  ten  years  after  William’s  accession  to  the  crown  of  England.  He  had 
been  taken  into  favour  by  William,  and  sent  to  command  in  Northum¬ 
berland,  and  made  prisoner  for  a  conspiracy  in  which  he  was  accused 
of  taking  part.  The  Saxon  Chronicle  is  certainly  much  better  authority 
than  the  saga  for  the  dates  of  historical  events  in  England.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


53 


Earl  Valthiof  lie  slew, — 

Valthiof  the  brave  and  true. 

Cold  heart  and  bloody  hand 
Now  rule  the  English  land.” 

William  was  after  this  king  of  England  for  twenty- 
one  years,  and  his  descendants  have  been  so  ever 
since.* 

Chapters  CILf  and  CIII. — Of  Olaf  Haraldson’s  Expedition 

to  Nomuay. 

Olaf,  the  son  of  King  Harald  Sigurdson,  sailed 
with  his  fleet  from  England  from  Hrafnseyr,{  and 
came  in  autumn  to  the  Orkney  Isles,  where  the  event 
had  happened  that  Maria,  a  daughter  of  Harald 
Sigurdson,  died  a  sudden  death  the  very  day  and 
hour  her  father  King  Harald  fell.  Olaf  remained 
there  all  winter  ;  but  the  summer  after  he  proceeded 
east  to  Norway,  where  he  was  proclaimed  king  along 
with  his  brother  Magnus.  Queen  Ellisif  came  from 
the  West,  along  with  her  stepson  Olaf  and  her 
daughter  Ingigerd.  There  came  also  with  Olaf  over 
the  West  sea  Skule,  a  son  of  Earl  Toste,  and  who 
since  has  been  called  the  king’s  foster-son,  and  his 
brother  Ketil  Krok.  Both  were  gallant  men,  of  high 
family  in  England,  and  both  were  very  intelligent ; 
and  the  brothers  were  much  beloved  by  King  Olaf. 

*  William  the  Bastard  died  1087,  and  the  male  line  of  his  descendants 
ends  1135. 

■f  A  spurious  chapter  102  is  found  in  earlier  editions,  but  as  it  has  been 
clearly  demonstrated  that  it  does  not  belong  to  Snorre  s  Heimskringlct 
we  have  followed  the  example  of  Unger  and  Hildebrand,  and  omitted  it 
from  the  text. 

X  Hrafnseyr.  A  town  in  Holdernes,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Humber,  was 
called  Ravensere,  but  is  now  lost.  See  Camden,  Brit.,  p.  9°°* 


54 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Ivetil  Krok  went  north  to  Ilalogaland,  where  King 
Olaf  procured  him  a  good  marriage,  and  from  him 
are  descended  many  great  people.*  Sknle,  the 
king’s  foster-son,  was  a  very  clever  man,  and  the 
handsomest  man  that  could  be  seen.  He  was  the 
commander  of  King  Olaf’s  court-men,  spoke  at  the 
Things  t  and  took  part  in  all  the  country  affairs  with 
the  king.  The  king  offered  to  give  Skule  whatever 
district  in  Norway  he  liked,  with  all  the  income  and 
duties  that  belonged  to  the  king  in  it.  Skule  thanked 
him  very  much  for  the  offer,  but  said  he  would  rather 
have  something  else  from  him.  “  For  if  there  came 
a  shift  of  kings,”  said  he,  “  the  gift  might  come  to 
nothing.  I  would  rather  take  some  properties  lying 
near  to  the  merchant  towns,  where  you,  sire,  usually 
take  up  your  abode,  and  then  I  would  enjoy  your 
Yule-feasts.”  The  king  agreed  to  this,  and  conferred 
on  him  lands  eastward  at  Konungahella,  Oslo,  Tuns- 
berg,  Sarpsborg,  Bergen,  and  north  at  Nidaros.  These 
were  nearly  the  best  properties  at  each  place,  and 
have  since  descended  to  the  family  branches  which 
came  from  Skule.  King  Olaf  gave  Skule  his  female 
relative  Gudrun,  the  daughter  of  Nefstein,  in  mar¬ 
riage.  Her  mother  was  Ingirid,  a  daughter  of  Sigurd 
Syr  and  Asta,  King  Olaf  the  Saint’s  mother.  Ingirid 
was  a  sister  of  King  Olaf  the  Saint  and  of  King 
Harald.  Skule  and  Gudrun’ s  son  was  Asolf  of  Heine, 

*  Singular  enough  that  the  male  line  of  the  great  Earl  Godwin,  and 
of  his  son  King  Harald,  should  be  to  seek  among  the  peasantry  of  the 
north  of  Norway. — L. 

+  Another  instance  of  the  old  Norse  or  Icelandic  tongue  having  been 
generally  known  in  a  part  of  England. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


55 


who  married  Thora,  a  daughter  of  Skopte  Ogmund- 
son  ;  Asolf  s  and  Thora’ s  son  was  Guthorm  of  Reine, 
father  of  Bard,  and  grandfather  of  King  Inge  and  of 
Duke  Skule. 


Chapter  CIY. — Of  King  Harold  Sigurdson. 

One  year  after  King  Harald’s  fall  his  body  was 
transported  from  England  north  to  Nidaros,  and  was 
buried  in  Mary  church  which  he  had  built.  It  was 
a  common  observation,  that  King  Harald  distin¬ 
guished  himself  above  all  other  men  by  wisdom  and 
resources  of  mind ;  whether  he  had  to  take  a  resolu¬ 
tion  suddenly  for  himself  and  others,  or  after  long 
deliberation.  He  was  also,  above  all  other  men,  bold, 
brave,  and  lucky,  until  his  dying  day,  as  above 
related;  and  bravery  is  half  victory.  So  says 
Thiodolf : — 


“  Harald,  who  till  his  dying  day 
Came  off  the  best  in  many  a  fray, 

Had  one  good  rule  in  battle-plain, 

In  Seeland  and  elsewhere,  to  gain — 

That,  be  his  foes’  strength  more  or  less, 

Courage  is  always  half  success.” 

King  Harald  was  a  handsome  man,  of  noble  ap¬ 
pearance  ;  his  hair  and  beard  yellow.  He  had  a  short 
beard,  and  long  moustaches.  The  one  eyebrow  was 
somewhat  higher  than  the  other.  He  had  large 
hands  *  and  feet ;  but  these  were  well  made.  His 

*  It  is  a  singular  physical  circumstance,  that  in  almost  all  the  swords 
of  those  ages  to  be  found  in  the  collection  of  weapons  in  the  Antiquarian 
Museum  at  Copenhagen,  the  handles  indicate  a  size  of  hand  very  much 
smaller  than  the  hands  of  modern  people  of  any  class  or  rank.  No 


56 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


height  was  five  ells.*  He  was  stem  and  severe  to  his 
enemies,  and  avenged  cruelly  all  opposition  or  mis¬ 
deed.  So  says  Thiodolf : — 

“  Severe  alike  to  friends  or  foes, 

Who  dared  his  royal  will  oppose  ; 

Severe  in  discipline  to  hold 
His  men-at-arms  wild  and  bold  ; 

Severe  the  bondes  to  repress  ; 

Severe  to  punish  all  excess  ; 

Severe  was  Harald — but  we  call 
That  just  which  was  alike  to  all.” 

King  Harald  was  most  greedy  of  power,  and  of  all 
distinction  and  honour.  He  was  bountiful  to  the 
friends  who  suited  him.  So  says  Thiodolf: — 

“  I  got  from  him,  in  sea-fight  strong, 

A  mark  of  gold  for  my  ship-song. 

Merit  in  any  way 
He  generously  would  pay.” 

King  Harald  was  fifty  years  old  when  he  fell. 
We  have  no  particular  account  of  his  youth  before 
he  was  fifteen  years  old,  when  he  was  with  his 
brother  King  Olaf  at  the  battle  of  Stiklestad.  He 
lived  thirty-five  years  after  that,  and  in  all  that  time 
was  never  free  from  care  and  war.  King  Harald 
never  fled  from  battle,  but  often  tried  cunning  ways 
to  escape  when  he  had  to  do  with  great  superiority 
of  forces.  All  the  men  who  followed  King  Harald 

modern  dandy,  with  the  most  delicate  hands,  would  find  room  for  his 
hand  to  grasp  or  wield  with  ease  some  of  the  swords  of  these  North¬ 
men. — L. 

*  The  old  Norwegian  ell  was  less  than  the  present  ell ;  and  Thorlacius 
reckons,  in  a  note  on  this  chapter,  that  Harakl’s  stature  would  be  about 
four  Danish  ells,  viz.  about  eight  feet.  It  appears  that  he  exceeded  the 
ordinary  height  of  men  by  the  offer  made  him  of  seven  feet  of  English 
ground,  or  as  much  more  as  he  required  for  a  grave,  in  chapter  94.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


57 


in  battle  or  skirmish  said  that  when  he  stood  in 
great  danger,  or  anything  came  suddenly  upon  him, 
he  always  took  that  course  which  all  afterwards  saw 
gave  the  best  hope  of  a  fortunate  issue. 


Chapter  CV. — King  Harold  and  King  Olaf  Compared. 

When  Haldor,  a  son  of  Bryniolf  Ulfalde  the  Old, 
who  was  a  sensible  man  and  a  great  chief,  heard 
people  talk  of  how  unlike  the  brothers  Saint  Olaf 
and  King  Harald  were  in  disposition,  he  used  to  say, 
“  I  was  in  great  friendship  with  both  the  brothers, 
and  knew  intimately  the  dispositions  of  both,  and 
never  did  I  know  two  men  more  like  in  disposition. 
Both  were  of  the  highest  understanding,  and  bold 
in  arms,  and  greedy  of  power  and  property  ;  of  great 
courage,  but  not  acquainted  with  the  way  of  win¬ 
ning  the  favour  of  the  people  ;  zealous  in  governing, 
and  severe  in  their  revenge.  King  Olaf  forced 
the  people  into  Christianity  and  good  customs,  and 
punished  cruelly  those  who  disobeyed.  This  just 
and  rightful  severity  the  chiefs  of  the  country  could 
not  bear,  but  raised  an  army  against  him,  and  killed 
him  in  his  own  kingdom  ;  and  therefore  he  is  held  to 
be  a  saint.  King  Harald,  again,  marauded  to  obtain 
glory  and  power,  forced  all  the  people  he  could  under 
his  power,  and  died  in  another  king’s  dominions. 
Both  brothers,  in  daily  life,  were  of  a  worthy  and 
considerate  manner  of  living :  they  were  of  great 
experience,  and  very  laborious,  and  were  known 
and  celebrated  far  and  wide  for  these  qualities.” 


58 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  CYI. — King  Magnus's  Death. 

King  Magnus  Haralclson  ruled  over  Norway  the 
first  winter  after  King  Harald’s  death  [1067],  and 
afterwards  two  years  [1068-1069]  along  with  his 
brother  King  Olaf.  Thus  there  were  two  kings  of 
Norway  at  that  time ;  and  Magnus  had  the  northern 
and  Olaf  the  eastern  part  of  the  country.  King 
Magnus  had  a  son  called  Hakon,  who  was  fostered 
by  Thorer  of  Steig  in  Gudbrandsdal,  who  was  a 
brother  of  King  Magnus  by  the  mother’s  side ;  and 
Hakon  was  a  most  agreeable  man. 

After  King  Harald  Sigurdson’s  death  the  Danish 
king  Svein  let  it  be  known  that  the  peace  between 
the  Northmen  and  the  Danes  was  at  an  end,  and 
insisted  that  the  league  between  Harald  and  Svein 
wTas  not  for  longer  time  than  their  lives.  There  was 
a  levy  in  both  kingdoms.  Harald’s  sons  called  out 
the  whole  people  in  Norway  for  procuring  men  and 
ships,  and  Svein  set  out  from  the  south  with  the 
Danish  army.  Messengers  then  went  between  with 
proposals  for  a  peace ;  and  the  Northmen  said  they 
would  either  have  the  same  league  as  was  concluded 
between  King  Harald  and  Svein,  or  otherwise  give 
battle  instantly  on  the  spot.  Verses  were  made  on 
this  occasion,  viz. — 

“  Ready  for  war  or  peace, 

King  Olaf  will  not  cease 
From  foeman’s  hand 
To  guard  his  land.” 

So  says  also  Stein  Herdison  in  his  song  of  Olaf : — - 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


59 


“  From  Throndhjem  town,  where  in  repose 
The  holy  king  defies  his  foes, 

Another  Olaf  will  defend 

His  kingdom  from  the  greedy  Svein. 

King  Olaf  has  both  power  and  right, 

And  the  Saint's  favour  in  the  fight. 

The  Saint  will  ne’er  his  kin  forsake, 

And  let  Svein  Ulfson  Norway  take.” 

In  this  manner  friendship  was  concluded  between 
the  kings,  and  peace  between  the  countries.*  King 
Magnus  fell  ill,  and  died  of  the  ringworm  disease,! 
after  being  ill  for  some  time.  He  died  and  was 
buried  at  Nidaros.  He  was  an  amiable  king,  and 
bewailed  by  the  people. 

*  By  the  intervention  of  friends  a  meeting  was  agreed  upon  between 
the  kings  at  Ivonungahella.  The  agreement  there  made  was  confirmed 
by  Olaf  taking  King  Svein’s  daughter  Ingirid  in  marriage. 

t  The  disease  of  which  King  Magnus  died — reforma-sot — could  scarcely 
be  the  ring-worm  of  modern  pathology,  but  some  kind  of  scab,  scurvy, 
or  leprosy. — L. 


6o 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


X. 

SAGA  OF  OLAF  KYRRE. 

PRELIMINARY  REMARKS. 

Snorre's  account  of  Olaf  Kyrre  corresponds  with  the  state¬ 
ments  found  in  A  grip,  Fagrskinna ,  and  MorJcinsJcinna. 

There  are  but  few  events  in  Olaf’s  long  reign,  and  hence 
he  is  very  appropriately  called  the  Quiet  (Kyrre).  As 
Hildebrand  says,  this  saga  seems  to  be  written  simply  to 
fill  out  the  empty  space  between  Harald  Hardrade  and 
Magnus  Barefoot. 

Skalds  quoted  in  this  saga  are  :  Stein  Herdison  and  Stuf. 


Chapter  I. — Olaf’s  Personal  Appearance. 

Olaf  remained  sole  king  of  Norway  after  the  death 
[1069]  of  his  brother  King  Magnus.  Olaf  was  a  stout 
man,  well  grown  in  limbs ;  and  every  one  said  a 
handsomer  man  could  not  be  seen,  nor  of  a  nobler 
appearance.  His  hair  was  yellow  as  silk,  and  became 
him  well ;  his  skin  was  white  and  fine  over  all  his 
body ;  his  eyes  beautiful,  and  his  limbs  well  propor¬ 
tioned.  He  was  rather  silent  in  general,  and  did  not 
speak  much  even  at  Things ;  but  he  was  merry  in 
drinking  parties.  He  loved  drinking  much,  and  was 
talkative  enough  then ;  but  quite  peaceful.  He  was 
cheerful  in  conversation,  peacefully  inclined  during 
all  his  reign,  and  loving  gentleness  and  modera¬ 
tion  in  all  things.  Stein  Herdison  speaks  thus  of 
him  : — 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


61 


“  Our  Throndhjem  king  is  brave  and  wise, 
His  love  of  peace  our  bondes  prize  ; 

By  friendly  word  and  ready  hand 
He  holds  good  peace  through  every  land. 

H  e  is  for  all  a  lucky  star  ; 

England  he  frightens  from  a  war  ; 

The  stiff-necked  Danes  he  drives  to  peace  ; 
Troubles  by  his  good  influence  cease.” 


Chapter  II. — Of  King  Olaf  s  Manner  of  Living. 

It  was  the  fashion  in  Norway  in  old  times  for  the 
kings  high-seat  to  be  on  the  middle  of  a  long  bench, 
and  the  ale  was  handed  across  the  lire ;  *  but  King 
Olaf  had  his  high-seat  made  on  a  high  bench  across 
the  room  ;  he  also  first  had  chimney-places  in  the 
rooms,  and  the  floors  strewed  t  both  summer  and 
winter.  In  King  Olaf  s  time  many  merchant  towns 
arose  in  Norway,  and  many  new  ones  were  founded. 
Thus  King  Olaf  founded  a  merchant  town  at  Bergen, 
where  very  soon  many  wealthy  people  settled  them¬ 
selves,  and  it  was  regularly  frequented  by  merchants 
from  foreign  lands.  He  had  the  foundations  laid  for 

O 

the  large  Christ  church,  which  was  to  he  a  stone 
church;  but  in  his  time  there  was  little  done  to  it. 
Besides,  he  completed  the  old  Christ  church,  which 
was  of  wood.  King  Olaf  also  had  a  great  feasting- 
house  built  in  Nidaros,  and  in  many  other  merchant 

*  We  may  understand  the  arrangement  by  supposing  the  tire  in  the 
middle  of  the  room,  the  smoke  escaping  by  a  hole  in  the  roof,  and  a  long 
bench  on  each  side  of  the  lire ;  one  bench  occupied  by  the  high-seat  of 
the  king  and  great  guests,  the  other  by  the  rest  of  the  guests  ;  and  the 
cup  handed  across  the  fire,  which  appears  to  have  had  a  religious  mean¬ 
ing  previous  to  the  introduction  of  Christianity. — L. 

t  Strewing  the  floors  with  fresh  juniper-tops  is  still  the  universal  cus¬ 
tom  in  every  house  in  Norway.  It  answers  the  purpose  of  keeping  the 
dirt  brought  in  on  the  shoes  from  soiling  the  wood  of  the  floors  L. 


62 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


towns,  where  before  there  were  only  private  feasts ; 
and  in  his  time  no  one  could  drink  in  Norway  but  in 
these  houses,  adorned  for  the  purpose  with  branches 
and  leaves,  and  which  stood  under  the  king’s  protec¬ 
tion.  The  great  guild-bell  in  Throndhjem,  which  was 
called  the  pride  of  the  town,  tolled  to  call  together  to 
these  guilds.  The  guild-brethren  built  Margaret’s 
church  in  Nidaros  of  stone.  In  King  Olaf’ s  time  there 
were  general  entertainments  and  hand-in-hand  feasts.* 
At  this  time  also  much  unusual  splendour  and  foreign 
customs  and  fashions  in  the  cut  of  clothes  were  in¬ 
troduced  ;  as,  for  instance,  costly  hose  plaited  about 
the  legs.  Some  had  gold  rings  about  the  legs,  and 
also  used  coats  which  had  lists  down  the  sides,  and 
arms  five  ells  long,  and  so  narrow  that  they  must  be 
drawn  up  with  ties,  and  lay  in  folds  all  the  way  up 
to  the  shoulders.  The  shoes  were  high,  and  all  edged 
with  silk,  or  even  with  gold.  Many  other  kinds  of 
wonderful  ornaments  were  used  at  that  time. 


Chapter  III  .—Fashion  of  King  Olafs  Court. 

King  Olaf  used  the  fashion,  which  was  introduced 
from  the  courts  of  foreign  kings,  of  letting  his  grand- 
butler  stand  at  the  end  of  the  table,  and  fill  the 
table-cups  for  himself  and  the  other  distinguished 

*  The  feasts  here  mentioned  in  the  saga  appear  to  have  been  regular 
meetings  of  fraternities,  or  guilds,  of  which  the  members  gave  each 
other  mutual  protection  and  aid,  and  which  acted  as  corporate  bodies. 
Every  private  citizen  in  towns  belonged  to  some  guild  or  fraternity 
bound  to  avenge  his  death  or  injuries  as  brethren,  and  thus  affording 
him  protection.  At  the  guilds  or  feasts  of  these  fraternities  each  appears 
to  have  brought  his  own  liquor  :  they  were  pic-nic  feasts,  and  they  went 
hand-in-hand  through  the  streets  to  them  like  our  Freemasons.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


63 


guests  who  sat  at  the  table.  He  had  also  torch- 
bearers,  who  held  as  many  candles  at  the  table  as 
there  were  guests  of  distinction  present.  There  was 
also  a  marshal’s  bench  outside  of  the  table-circle,* 
where  the  marshal  and  other  persons  of  distinction 
sat  with  their  faces  towards  the  high-seat.  King 
Harald,  and  the  kings  before  him,  used  to  drink  out 
of  a  deer-horn ;  and  the  ale  was  handed  from  the 
high-seat  to  the  other  side  over  the  fire,  and  he 
drank  to  the  memory  of  any  one  he  thought  of.  So 
says  Stuf  the  skald  : — 

“  He  who  in  battle  is  the  first, 

And  now  in  peace  is  best  to  trust, 

A  welcome,  hearty  and  sincere, 

Gave  to  me  on  my  coming  here. 

He  whom  the  ravens  watch  with  care, 

He  who  the  gold  rings  does  not  spare, 

A  golden  horn  full  to  the  brink 
Gave  me  himself  at  Hang  to  drink.” 

O 


Chapter  IV. — Arrangement  of  King  Olaf's  Court. 

King  Olaf  had  120  courtmen-at-arms,  and  60 
pursuivants,  besides  60  house-servants,  who  pro¬ 
vided  what  was  wanted  for  the  king’s  house  wher¬ 
ever  it  might  be,  or  did  other  work  required  for 
the  king.  When  the  bondes  asked  why  he  kept 
a  greater  retinue  than  the  law  allowed,  or  former 
kings  kept  when  they  went  in  guest-quarters  or 
feasts  which  the  bondes  had  to  provide  for  them, 

*  Trapiza, — no  doubt  from  the  Greek  word, — is  used  here  by  the 
saga  writer,  and  seems  to  mean  the  space  around  the  king’s  table  in  the 
hall,  which  appears,  with  the  high-seat,  to  have  occupied  one  end  ;  and  by 
this  description  the  fire  lias  been  in  the  middle,  and  the  marshal’s  seat 
and  the  court  upon  the  other  side  of  the  fire,  facing  the  king’s  table. — L, 


64 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


the  king  answered,  “  It  does  not  happen  that  I  rule 
the  kingdom  better,  or  produce  greater  respect  for 
me  than  ye  had  for  my  father,  although  I  have  one 
half  more  people  than  he  had.  I  do  not  by  any 
means  do  it  merely  to  plague  you,  or  to  make  your 
condition  harder  than  formerly.” 

Chapter  Y. — King  Svein  Ulfsoris  Death. 

King  Svein  Ulfson  died  ten  years  after  the  fall 
of  both  the  Haralds  [1076]. #  After  him  his  son, 
Harald  Ilein,  was  king  for  three  years  [1077-1080]  ; 
then  Canute  the  Holy  for  seven  years  [1081-1087] ; 
afterwards  Olaf,  King  Svein’s  third  son,  for  eight 
years  [1088-1095].  Then  Eirik  the  Good,  Svein’s 
fourth  son,  for  eight  winters  [1096-1103].  Olaf  the 
king  of  Norway  was  married  to  Ingirid,  a  daughter 
of  Svein  the  Danish  king ;  and  Olaf,  the  Danish 
King  Svein’s  son,  married  Ingigerd,  a  daughter 
of  King  Harald,  and  sister  of  King  Olaf  of  Nor¬ 
way.  King  Olaf  Haraldson  who  was  called  by 
some  Olaf  Ivyrre,  but  by  many  Olaf  the  Bonde,  had 
a  son  by  Thora,  Joan’s  daughter,  who  was  called 
Magnus,  and  was  one  of  the  handsomest  lads  that 
could  be  seen,  and  was  promising  in  every  respect. 
He  was  brought  up  in  the  king’s  court. 


Chapter  YI .—Miracles  of  King  Olaf  the  Saint. 

King  Olaf  had  a  church  of  stone  built  in  Nidaros, 
on  the  spot  where  King  Olaf’s  body  had  first  been 

*  The  Norwegian  King  Harald,  and  the  English  King  Harald  God- 


winson. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


65 


buried ;  and  the  altar  was  placed  directly  over  the 
spot  where  the  king’s  grave  had  been.  This  church 
was  consecrated,  and  called  Christ  Church ;  and 
King  Olaf’s  shrine  was  removed  to  it,  and  was 
placed  before  the  altar,  and  many  miracles  took 
place  there.  The  following  summer,  on  the  same 
day  of  the  year  as  the  church  was  consecrated, 
which  was  the  day  before  Olafsmass,  there  was  a 
great  assemblage  of  people,  and  then  a  blind  man 
was  restored  to  sight.  And  on  the  mass-day  itself, 
when  the  shrine  and  the  holy  relics  were  taken 
out  and  carried,  and  the  shrine  itself,  according  to 
custom,  was  taken  and  set  down  in  the  churchyard, 
a  man  who  had  long  been  dumb  recovered  his  speech 
again,  and  sang  with  flowing  tongue  praise-hymns 
to  God,  and  to  the  honour  of  King  Olaf  the  Saint. 
The  third  miracle  was  of  a  woman  who  had  come 
from  Svithiod,  and  had  suffered  much  distress  on 
this  pilgrimage  from  her  blindness ;  but  trusting  in 
God’s  mercy,  had  come  travelling  to  this  solemnity. 
She  was  led  blind  into  the  church  to  hear  mass  this 
day ;  but  before  the  service  was  ended  she  saw  with 
both  eyes,  and  got  her  sight  fully  and  clearly, 
although  she  had  been  blind  fourteen  years.  She 
returned  with  great  joy,  praising  God  and  King 
Olaf  the  Saint. 


Chapter  VII. — Of  the  Shrine  of  King  Olaf  the  Saint . 

There  happened  a  circumstance  in  Nidaros,  when 

King  Olaf’s  coffin  was  being  carried  about  through 
VOL.  IV.  e 


66 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


the  streets,  that  it  became  so  heavy  that  people  could 
not  lift  it  from  the  spot.  Now  when  the  coffin  was 
set  down,  the  street  was  broken  up  to  see  what  was 
under  it  at  that  spot,  and  the  body  of  a  child  was 
found  which  had  been  murdered  and  concealed  there. 
The  body  was  carried  away,  the  street  put  in  order 
again  as  it  had  been  before,  and  the  shrine  carried 
on  according  to  custom. 


Chapter  YIIT. — King  Olaf  was  Blessed  with  Peace . 

In  the  days  of  King  Olaf  there  were  bountiful 
harvests  in  Norway  and  many  good  things.  In  no 
man’s  life  had  times  been  so  good  in  Norway  since 
the  days  of  Harald  Harfager.  King  Olaf  modified 
for  the  better  many  a  matter  that  his  father  had 
inaugurated  and  maintained  with  severity.  He  was 
generous,  but  a  strict  ruler,  for  he  was  a  wise  man, 
and  well  understood  what  was  of  advantage  to  the 
kingdom.  There  are  many  stories  of  his  good  works. 
How  much  he  loved  and  how  kind  he  was  to  the 
people  may  be  seen  from  the  following  words,  which 
he  once  spoke  at  a  large  banquet.  He  was  happy 
and  in  the  best  of  spirits,  when  one  of  his  men 
said,  “  It  pleases  us,  sire,  to  see  you  so  happy.”  He 
answered :  “I  have  reason  to  be  glad  when  I  see  my 
subjects  sitting  happy  and  free  in  a  guild  consecrated 
to  my  uncle,  the  sainted  King  Olaf.  In  the  days  of 
my  father  these  people  were  subjected  to  much  terror 
and  fear  ;  the  most  of  them  concealed  their  gold  and 
their  precious  things,  but  now  I  see  glittering  on  his 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


67 


person,  what  each  one  owns,  and  your  freedom  is  my 
gladness.”  In  his  reign  there  was  no  strife,  and  he 
protected  himself  and  his  realm  against  enemies 
abroad ;  and  his  nearest  neighbours  stood  in  great 
awe  of  him,  although  he  was  a  most  gentle  man,  as 
is  confirmed  by  the  skald. 


Chapter  IX. — Meeting  of  Olaf  Kyrre  and  Canute  the  Saint , 
and  their  Preparations  against  England. 

King  Olaf  Kyrre  was  a  great  friend  of  his  brother- 
in-law  the  Danish  king,  Canute  the  Holy.  They 
appointed  a  meeting,  and  met  at  the  Gaut  river  at 
Konungahella/*  where  the  kings  used  to  have  their 
meetings.  There  King  Canute  made  the  proposal 
that  they  should  send  an  army  westward  to  England 
on  account  of  the  revenge  they  had  to  take  there ; 
first  and  foremost  King  Olaf  himself,  and  also  the 
Danish  king.  “  Do  one  of  two  things/’  said  King 
Canute, — ‘‘either  take  sixty  ships,  which  I  will 
furnish  thee  with,  and  be  thou  the  leader ;  or  give 
me  sixty  ships,  and  I  shall  be  the  leader.”  Then 
said  King  Olaf,  “  This  speech  of  thine,  King  Canute, 
is  altogether  according  to  my  mind  ;  but  there  is  this 
great  difference  between  us  :  your  family  has  had 
more  luck  in  conquering  England  with  great  glory, 
and,  among  others,  King  Canute  the  Great ;  and  it 
is  likely  that  this  good  fortune  follows  your  race. 

*  The  estate  of  Konghelle  (Konungaliella)  was  lately  purchased  by 

an  English  gentleman,  -  Dan,  Esq.,  as  a  sporting  quarter.  It  was 

a  celebrated  place  of  meeting  for  the  Swedish,  Norwegian,  and  Danish 
kings,  and  rose  to  be  a  town  of  consequence ;  but  is  now  in  decay. — L. 


68 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


On  the  other  hand,  when  King  Harald  my  father 
went  westward  to  England,  he  got  his  death  there  ; 
and  at  that  time  the  best  men  in  Norway  followed 
him.  But  Norway  was  so  emptied  then  of  chosen 
men,  that  such  men  have  not  since  been  to  find  in 
the  country ;  for  that  expedition  there  was  the  most 
excellent  outfit,  and  you  know  what  was  the  end  of 
it.  Now  I  know  my  own  capacity,  and  how  little  I 
am  suited  to  be  the  leader ;  so  I  would  rather  you 
should  go,  with  my  help  and  assistance.” 

So  King  Olaf  gave  Canute  sixty  large  ships,  with 
excellent  equipment  and  faithful  men,  and  set  his 
lendermen  as  chiefs  over  them ;  and  all  must  allow 
that  this  armament  was  admirably  equipped.  It  is 
also  told  in  the  saga  about  Canute,  that  the  North¬ 
men  alone  did  not  break  the  levy  when  the  army 
was  assembled,  but  the  Danes  would  not  obey  their 
king’s  orders.  This  King  Canute  acknowledged, 
and  gave  them  leave  to  trade  in  merchandise  where 
they  pleased  through  his  country,  and  at  the  same 
time  sent  the  king  of  Norway  costly  presents  for  his 
assistance.  On  the  other  hand,  he  was  enraged 
against  the  Danes,  and  laid  heavy  fines  upon  them. 


Chapter  X. — Of  Olaf  Kyrre  and  a  Bondc  who  understood 

the  Language  of  Birds. 

One  summer,  when  King  Olafs  men  had  gone 
round  the  country  collecting  his  income  and  land 
dues,  it  happened  that  the  king,  on  their  return 
home  asked  them  where  on  their  expedition  they 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


69 


had  been  best  entertained.  They  said  it  was  in 
the  house  of  a  bonde  in  one  of  the  king’s  districts. 
“There  is  an  old  bonde  there  who  knows  many 
things  before  they  happen.  We  asked  him  about 
many  things,  which  he  explained  to  us  ;  nay,  we  even 
believe  that  he  understands  perfectly  the  language 
of  birds.”  The  king  replies,  “How  can  ye  believe 
such  nonsense  ?  ”  and  insisted  that  it  was  wrong  to 
put  confidence  in  such  things.  It  happened  soon 
after  that  the  king  was  sailing  along  the  coast ;  and 
as  they  sailed  through  a  Sound  the  king  said, 
“What  is  that  township  up  in  the  country?  ” 

They  replied,  “  That  is  the  district,  sire,  where  we 
told  you  we  were  best  entertained.” 

Then  said  the  king,  “  What  house  is  that  which 
stands  up  there,  not  far  from  the  Sound  ?  ” 

They  replied,  “  That  house  belongs  to  the  wise  old 
man  we  told  you  of,  sire.” 

They  saw  now  a  horse  standing  close  to  the  house. 
Then  said  the  king,  “  Go  there,  and  take  that  horse, 
and  kill  him.” 

They  replied,  “We  would  not  like  to  do  him  such 
harm.” 

The  king  :  “  I  will  command.  Cut  off  the  horse’s 
head  ;  but  take  care  of  yourselves  that  ye  let  no  blood 
come  to  the  ground,  and  bear  the  horse  out  to  my 
ship.  Go  then  and  bring  to  me  the  old  man ;  but 
tell  him  nothing  of  what  has  happened,  as  ye  shall 
answer  for  it  with  your  lives.” 

They  did  as  they  were  ordered,  and  then  came  to 
the  old  man,  and  told  him  the  king’s  message.  When 


7o 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


lie  came  before  the  king,  the  king  asked  him,  “  Who 
owns  the  house  thou  art  dwelling  in  ?  ” 

He  replies,  “  Sire,  you  own  i't,  and  take  rent  for 
it.” 

The  king :  “  Show  us  the  way  round  the  ness,  for 
here  thou  must  be  a  good  pilot.” 

The  old  man  went  into  his  boat,  and  rowed  before 
the  king's  ship  ;  and  when  he  had  rowed  a  little  way 
a  crow  came  flying  over  the  ship,  and  croaking 
hideously.  The  peasant  listens  to  the  crow.  The 
king  said,  “Do  you  think,  bonde,  that  betokens 
anything  ?  ” 

“  Sire,  that  is  certain,”  said  he. 

Then  another  crow  flies  over  the  ship,  and  screeches 
dreadfully.  The  bonde  was  so  ill  hearing  this  that 
he  could  not  row,  and  the  oars  hung  loose  in  his 
hands. 

Then  said  the  king,  “  Thy  mind  is  turned  much  to 
these  crows,  bonde,  and  to  what  they  say.” 

The  bonde  replies,  “  Now  I  suspect  it  is  true  what 
they  say.” 

The  third  time  the  crow  came  flying  screeching 
at  its  very  worst,  and  almost  settling  on  the  ship. 
Now  the  bonde  threw  down  his  oars,  regarded  them 
no  more,  and  stood  up  before  the  king. 

Then  the  king  said,  “  Thou  art  taking  this  much 
to  heart,  bonde ;  what  is  it  they  say  ?  ” 

The  peasant ;  “  It  is  likely  that  either  they  or  I 
have  misunderstood  ” - — 

“  Say  on,”  replied  the  king. 

The  bonde  replied  in  a  song — 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


7i 


“  The  £  one-year  old  ’ 

Mere  nonsense  told ; 

The  two-years’  chatter 
Seemed  senseless  matter  ; 

The  three -years’  croak 
Of  wonders  spoke. 

The  foul  bird  said 
My  old  mare’s  head 
I  row  along ; 

And,  in  her  song, 

She  said  the  thief 
Was  the  land’s  chief.” 

The  king  said,  “What  is  this,  bonde?  Wilt  thou 
call  me  a  thief?  ” 

Then  the  king  gave  him  good  presents,  and 
remitted  all  the  land-rent  of  the  place  he  lived  on. 
So  says  Stein  : — ■ 

“  The  pillar  of  our  royal  race 
Stands  forth  adorned  with  every  grace. 

What  king  before  e’er  took  such  pride 
To  scatter  bounty  far  and  wide  ? 

To  one  he  gives  the  ship  of  war, 

Hung  round  with  shields  that  gleam  afar  ; 

The  merchant  ship  on  one  bestows, 

With  painted  streaks  in  glowing  rows. 

“  The  man-at-arms  a  golden  ring 
Boasts  as  the  present  of  his  king  ; 

At  the  king’s  table  sits  the  guest, 

By  the  king’s  bounty  richly  drest. 

King  Olaf,  Norway’s  royal  son, 

Who  from  the  English  glory  won, 

Pours  out  with  ready-giving  hand 
His  wealth  on  children  of  the  land. 

“  Brave  clothes  to  servants  he  awards, 

Helms  and  ring-mail  coats  grace  his  guards  ; 

Or  axe  and  sword  Har’s  *  warriors  gain, 

And  heavy  armour  for  the  plain. 


*  Har— a  name  of  Odin,  as  wielder  of  the  axe  and  sword  in  battle.— L. 


7  2 


CHKONICLE  OF  THE 


Gold,  too,  for  service  duly  paid, 

Red  gold  all  pure,  and  duly  weighed, 

King  Olaf  gives — he  loves  to  pay 
All  service  in  a  royal  way.” 

Chapter  XI.— Of  King  Olaf  Kyrre's  Death. 

King  Olaf  lived  principally  in  his  domains  on  his 
large  farms.  Once  when  he  was  east  in  Kanrike,  on 
his  estate  of  Haukby,  he  took  the  disease  which  ended 
in  his  death.  He  had  then  been  king  of  Norway  for 
twenty-six  years  [1068-1093]  ;  for  he  was  made  king 
of  Norway  the  year  after  King  Harald’s  death.  King 
Olafs  body  was  taken  north  to  Nidaros,  and  buried 
in  Christ  church,  which  he  himself  had  built  there. 
He  was  the  most  amiable  king  of  his  time,  and  Nor¬ 
way  was  much  improved  in  riches  and  cultivation 
during  his  reign. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


73 


XL 

MAGNUS  BAREFOOT’S  SAGA. 

PRELIMINARY  REMARKS. 

The  greater  part  of  the  contents  of  this  saga  is  also  found  in 
Agrip ,  Fagrskinna,  and  MorTcinsTcinna. 

Magnus  and  his  cousin  Hakon  became  kings  in  1093,  but 
Hakon  ruled  only  two  years  and  died  in  1095*  King 
Magnus  fell  in  the  year  1103. 

Skalds  quoted  are :  Bjorn  Krephende,  Tkorkel  Hamar- 
skald,  and  Eldjarn. 


Chapter  I. — Beginning  of  the  Reign  of  King  Magnus 

and  his  Cousin  Hakon. 

Magnus,  King  Olaf’ s  son,  was,  immediately  after 
King  Olaf  s  death,  proclaimed  at  Viken  king  of  all 
Norway  ;  but  the  Upland  people,  on  hearing  of  King 
Olaf’s  death,  chose  Hakon,  Thorer’s  foster-son,  a 
cousin''"  of  King  Magnus,  as  king.  Thereupon  Hakon 
and  Thorer  went  north  to  the  Throndhjem  country, 
and  when  they  came  to  Nidaros  they  summoned  the 
Eyrathing  ;  and  at  that  Thing  Hakon  desired  the 
bondes  to  give  him  the  kingly  title,  which  was  agreed 
to,  and  the  Throndhjem  people  proclaimed  him  king 
of  half  of  Norway,  as  his  father  King  Magnus  had 
been  before.  Hakon  relieved  the  Throndhjem  people 
of  all  harbour  duties,  and  gave  them  many  other 

*  Hakon  was  a  son  of  Magnus,  Harald  Hardrade’s  son ;  and  Magnus 
was  a  son  of  Olaf  Kyrre,  Harald  Hardrade’s  son  also. — L. 


74 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


privileges.  He  did  away  with  Yule-gifts,  and  gained 
by  this  the  good-will  of  all  the  Throndhjem  people. 
Thereafter  Hakon  formed  a  court,  and  then  pro¬ 
ceeded  to  the  Uplands,  where  he  gave  the  Upland 
people  the  same  privileges  as  the  Throndhjem  people  ; 
so  that  they  also  were  perfectly  well  affected  to  him, 
and  were  his  friends.  The  people  in  Throndhjem 
sang  this  ballad  about  him  : — 

“  Young  Hakon  was  the  Norseman’s  pride, 

And  Steig-Thorer  was  on  Ills  side. 

Young  Hakon  from  the  Upland  came, 

With  royal  birth,  and  blood,  and  name. 

Young  Hakon  from  the  king  demands 
His  royal  birthright,  half  the  lands  ; 

Magnus  will  not  the  kingdom  break, — 

The  whole  or  nothing  he  will  take.” 


Chapter  II. — Hakon’ s  Death. 

King  Magnus  proceeded  north  to  the  merchant 
town  (Nidaros),  and  on  his  arrival  went  straight  to 
the  king’s  house,  and  there  took  up  his  abode.  He 
remained  here  the  first  part  of  the  winter  [1094],  and 
kept  seven  long-ships  in  the  open  water  of  the  river 
Kid,  abreast  of  the  king’s  house.  Now  when  King 
Hakon  heard  that  King  Magnus  was  come  to  Thrond¬ 
hjem,  he  came  from  the  East  over  the  Dovrefield,  and 
thence  down  from  Throndhjem  to  the  merchant  town, 
where  he  took  up  his  abode  in  the  house  of  Skule, 
opposite  to  Clement’s  church,  which  had  formerly 
been  the  king’s  house.  King  Magnus  was  ill  pleased 
with  the  great  gifts  which  Hakon  had  given  to  the 
bondes  to  gain  their  favour,  and  thought  it  was  so 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY". 


75 


much  given  out  of  his  own  property.  This  irritated 
his  mind ;  and  he  thought  he  had  suffered  injustice 
from  his  relative  in  this  respect,  that  he  must  now 
put  up  with  less  income  than  his  father  and  his 
predecessors  before  him  had  enjoyed;  and  he  gave 
Thorer  the  blame.  When  King  Hakon  and  Thorer 
observed  this,  they  were  alarmed  for  what  Magnus 
might  do ;  and  they  thought  it  suspicious  that 
Magnus  kept  long-ships  afloat  rigged  out,  and  with 
tents.  The  following  spring,  after  Candlemas,  King 
Magnus  left  the  town  in  the  night  with  his  ships  ; 
the  tents  up,  and  lights  burning  in  the  tents.  They 
brought  up  at  Hefring,*  remained  there  all  night, 
and  kindled  a  fire  on  the  land.  Then  Hakon  and 
the  men  in  the  town  thought  some  treachery  was  on 
foot,  and  he  let  the  trumpets  call  all  the  men  to¬ 
gether  out  on  the  Eyrar,  where  the  whole  people  of 
the  town  came  to  him,  and  the  people  were  gather¬ 
ing  together  the  whole  night.  When  it  wTas  light 
in  the  morning,  King  Magnus  saw  the  people  from 
all  districts  gathered  together  on  the  Eyrar ;  and  he 
sailed  out  of  the  fiord,  and  proceeded  south  to  where 
the  Gula-thing  is  held.  Hakon  thanked  the  people 
for  their  support  which  they  had  given  him,  and 
got  ready  to  travel  east  to  Viken.  But  he  first  held 
a  meeting  in  the  town,  where,  in  a  speech,  he  asked 
the  people  for  their  friendship,  promising  them  his ; 
and  added,  that  he  had  some  suspicions  of  his  rela¬ 
tion  King  Magnus’s  intentions.  Then  King  Hakon 
mounted  his  horse,  and  was  ready  to  travel.  All 

*  A  promontory  about  two  miles  north  of  the  town. — L. 


76 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


men  promised  him  their  good-will  and  support  when¬ 
ever  he  required  them,  and  the  people  followed  him 
out  to  the  foot  of  Steinbjorg.  From  thence  King 
Hakon  proceeded  up  the  Dovrefield ;  but  as  he  was 
going  over  the  mountains  he  rode  all  day  after  a 
ptarmigan,  which  flew  up  beside  him,  and  in  this 
chase  a  sickness  overfell  him,  which  ended  in  his 
death ;  and  he  died  on  the  mountains.  His  body 
was  carried  north,  and  came  to  the  merchant  town 
just  half  a  month  after  he  left  it.  The  whole  towns¬ 
people  went  to  meet  the  body,  sorrowing,  and  the 
most  of  them  weeping ;  for  all  people  loved  him  with 
sincere  affection.  King  Hakon’s  body  was  interred 
in  Christ  church,  and  Hakon  and  Magnus  had  ruled 
the  country  for  two  years.  Hakon  was  a  man  full 
twenty-five  years  old,  and  was  one  of  the  chiefs  the 
most  beloved  by  all  the  people.  He  had  made  a 
journey  to  Biarmaland,  where  he  had  given  battle 
and  gained  a  victory. 

Chapter  III— Of  a  Foray  in  Holland. 

King  Magnus  sailed  in  winter  [1095]  eastward  to 
Viken ;  but  when  spring  approached  he  went  south¬ 
wards  to  Halland,#  and  plundered  far  and  wide.  He 
laid  waste  Viskardal  and  many  other  districts,  and 
returned  with  a  great  booty  back  to  his  own  kingdom. 
So  says  Biorn  Krephende  in  his  song  on  Magnus  : _ 

“  Through  HallancI  wide  around 
The  clang  and  shriek  resound  ; 


Halland  was  the  district  about  the  Gaut  river  belon°'ino'  to  Sweden 
and  formerly  to  Denmark.-L.  °  * 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


77 


The  houses  burn, 

The  people  mourn, 

Through  Halland  wide  around. 

“  The  Norse  king  strides  in  flame, 

Through  Yiskardal  he  came  ; 

The  fire  sweeps, 

The  widow  weeps, 

The  Norse  king  strides  in  flame.” 

Here  it  is  told  that  King  Magnus  made  the  greatest 
devastation  through  Halland. 


Chapter  IY. — Of  Thorer  of  Steig. 

There  was  a  man  called  Svein,  a  son  of  Harald 
Fletter.  He  was  a  Danish  man  by  family,  a  great 
viking  and  champion,  and  a  very  clever  man,  and  of 
high  birth  in  his  own  country.  He  had  been  some 
time  with  King  Hakon  Magnuson,  and  was  very  dear 
to  him  ;  but  after  King  Hakon’ s  decease  Thorer  of 
Steig,  his  foster-father,  had  no  great  confidence  in 
any  treaty  or  friendship  with  King  Magnus,  if  the 
whole  country  came  into  his  power,  on  account  of  the 
position  in  which  Thorer  had  stood  to  King  Magnus, 
and  the  opposition  he  had  made  to  him.  Thereupon 
Thorer  and  Svein  took  counsel  with  each  other,  which 
they  afterwards  carried  into  effect, — to  raise,  with 
Thorer  s  assistance,  and  his  men,  a  troop  against 
Magnus.  But  as  Thorer  was  old  and  heavy,  Svein 
took  the  command  and  name  of  leader  of  the  troop. 
In  this  design  several  chiefs  took  part,  among  whom 
the  principal  was  Egil  Aslakson  of  Aurland.  Egil 
was  a  lenderman,  and  married  to  Ingibjorg,  a  daughter 
of  Ogmund  Thorbergson,  a  sister  of  Skopte  of  Giske. 


78 


OHKONICLE  OF  THE 


The  rich  and  powerful  man,  Skialg  Erlingson,  also 
joined  their  party.  Thorkel  Hamarskald  speaks 
of  this  in  his  ballad  of  Magnus  : — 

“  Tliorer  and  Egil  were  not  wise, — 

They  aimed  too  high  to  win  a  prize  : 

There  was  no  reason  in  their  plan, 

And  it  hurt  many  a  udalman. 

The  stone,  too  great  for  them  to  throw, 

Fell  back,  and  hurt  them  with  the  blow ; 

And  now  the  udalmen  must  rue 
That  to  their  friends  they  were  so  true.” 

Thorer  and  Svein  collected  a  troop  in  the  Uplands, 
and  went  down  through  Raumsdal  into  Sunmore,  and 
there  collected  vessels,  with  which  they  afterwards 
sailed  north  to  Throndhjem. 


Chapter  V.- — Of  Thorer  s  Adventures. 

The  lenderman  Sigurd  Ulstreng,  a  son  of  Lodin 
Viggiarskalle,  collected  men  by  sending  round  the 
war-token,  as  soon  as  he  heard  of  Thorer  and  the 
troop  which  followed  him,  and  had  a  rendezvous  with 
all  the  men  he  could  raise  at  Yiggia.  Svein  and 
Thorer  also  met  there  with  their  people,  fought  with 
Sigurd,  and  gained  the  victory  after  giving  him  a 
great  defeat ;  and  Sigurd  fled,  and  joined  King 
Magnus.  Thorer  and  his  followers  proceeded  to  the 
town  (Nidaros),  and  remained  there  some  time  in  the 
fiord,  where  many  people  joined  them.  King  Magnus 
hearing  this  news  immediately  collected  an  army,  and 
proceeded  north  to  Throndhjem.  And  when  he  came 
into  the  fiord  Thorer  and  his  party  heard  of  it  while 
they  lay  at  Iiefring,  and  they  were  ready  to  leave  the 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


79 


fiord ;  and  they  rowed  their  ships  to  the  strand  at 
Vagnvik,  and  left  them,  and  came  into  Theksdal  in 
Seliuhverfe,  and  Thorer  was  carried  in  a  litter  over  the 
mountains.  Then  they  got  hold  of  ships,  and  sailed 
north  to  ITalogaland.  As  soon  as  King  Magnus  was 
ready  for  sea,  he  sailed  from  Throndhjem  in  pursuit 
of  them.  Thorer  and  his  party  went  north  all  the 
way  to  Biarkey;  and  Jon,  with  his  son  Vidkun,  fled 
from  thence.  Thorer  and  his  men  robbed  all  the 

• 

moveable  goods,  and  burnt  the  house,  and  a  good 
long- ship  that  belonged  to  Vidkun.  While  the  hull 
was  burning  the  vessel  keeled  to  one  side,  and  Thorer 
called  out,  “  Hard  to  starboard,  Vidkun  !  ”  Some 
verses  were  made  about  this  burning  in  Biarkey  : — 

“  The  sweetest  farm  that  I  have  seen 
Stood  on  Biarkey’s  island  green  ; 

And  now,  where  once  this  farm-house  stood, 

Fire  crackles  through  a  pile  of  wood  ; 

And  the  clear  red  flame,  burning  high, 

Flashes  across  the  dark  night-sky. 

Jon  and  Vidkun,  this  dark  night, 

Will  not  be  wandering  without  light.” 


Chapter  VI. — Death  of  Thorer  and  Dgil. 

Jon  and  Vidkun  travelled  day  and  night  till  they 
met  King  Magnus.  Svein  and  Thorer  proceeded 
northwards  with  their  men,  and  plundered  far  and 
wide  in  Iialogaland.  But  while  they  lay  in  a  fiord 
called  Harm,  Thorer  and  his  party  saw  King  Magnus 
coming  under  sail  towards  them ;  and  thinking  they 
had  not  men  enough  to  fight  him,  they  rowed  away 
and  fled.  Thorer  and  Egil  brought  up  at  Hesjutun; 


8o 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


but  Svein  rowed  out  to  sea,  and  some  of  their  people 
rowed  into  the  fiords.  King  Magnus  pursued  Thorer, 
and  the  vessels  struck  together  while  they  were  land¬ 
ing.  Thorer  stood  in  the  forecastle  of  his  ship,  and 
Sigurd  Ulstreng  called  out  to  him,  and  asked,  “  Art 
thou  well,  Thorer?  ”  Thorer  replied,  “  I  am  well  in 
hands,  but  ill  on  my  feet.” 

Then  all  Thorer’ s  men  fled  up  the  country,  and 
Thorer  was  taken  prisoner.  Egil  was  also  taken 
prisoner,  for  he  would  not  leave  his  wife.  King 
Magnus  then  ordered  both  of  them  to  be  taken  out 
to  Vambarholm  ;  and  when  they  were  leading  Thorer 
from  the  ship  he  tottered  on  his  legs.  Then  Vidkun 
called  out,  “  More  to  larboard,  Thorer  !  ”  When  he 
was  being  led  to  the  gallows  he  sang — 

“  We  were  four  comrades  gay, — 

Let  one  by  tbe  helm  stay.” 

When  he  came  to  the  gallows  he  said,  “Bad  counsel 
comes  to  a  bad  end.”  Then  Thorer  was  hanged ; 
but  when  he  was  hoisted  up  the  gallows  tree  he  was 
so  heavy  that  his  neck  gave  way,  and  the  body  fell 
down  to  the  ground ;  for  Thorer  was  a  man  exceed¬ 
ingly  stout,  both  high  of  stature  and  thick.  Egil  was 
also  led  to  the  gallows  ;  and  when  the  king’s  thralls 
were  about  hanging  him  he  said,  “Ye  should  not  hang 
me,  for  in  truth  each  of  you  deserves  much  more  to 
be  hanged.”  People  sang  these  verses  about  it : — 

“  I  hear,  my  girl,  that  Egil  said, 

When  to  the  gallows  he  was  led, 

That  the  king’s  thralls  far  more  than  he 
Reserved  to  hang  on  gallows-tree.- 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


81 


It  might  be  so  ;  but,  death  in  view, 

A  man  should  to  himself  be  true, — 

End  a  stout  life  by  death  as  stout, 

Showing  no  fear,  or  care,  or  doubt.” 

King  Magnus  sat  near  while  they  were  being 
hanged,  and  was  in  such  a  rage  that  none  of  his 
men  was  so  bold  as  to  ask  mercy  for  them.  The 
king  said,  when  Egil  was  spinning  at  the  gallows, 
“  Thy  great  friends  help  thee  but  poorly  in  time  of 
need.”  From  this  people  supposed  that  the  king 
only  wanted  to  have  been  entreated  to  have  spared 
Egil’s  life.  Biorn  Krephende  speaks  of  these 
things  : — 

“  King  Magnus  in  the  robbers’  gore 
Dyed  red  his  sword  ;  and  round  the  shore 
The  wolves  howled  out  their  wild  delklit. 

At  corpses  swinging  in  their  sight. 

Have  ye  not  heard  how  the  king’s  sword 
Punished  the  traitors  to  their  lord  ? 

How  the  king’s  thralls  hung  on  the  gallows 
Old  Thorer  and  his  traitor-fellows  ?” 


Chapter  VII. — Of  the  Punishment  of  the  Tlirondhjem  People. 

After  this  King  Magnus  sailed  south  to  Thrond- 
hjem,  and  brought  up  in  the  fiord,  and  punished 
severely  all  who  had  been  guilty  of  treason  towards 
him  ;  killing  some,  and  burning  the  houses  of  others. 
So  says  Biorn  Krephende  : — 

“  He  who  despises  fence  of  shields 
Drove  terror  through  the  Tlirondhjem  fields, 

When  all  the  land  through  which  he  came 
Was  swimming  in  a  flood  of  flame. 

The  raven-feeder,  well  I  know, 

Cut  off  two  chieftains  at  a  blow  ; 

The  wolf  could  scarcely  ravenous  be, 

The  ernes  flew  round  the  gallows-tree.” 


VOL.  IV. 


F 


82 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Svein,  Harald  Fletter’s  son,  fled  out  to  sea  first,  and 
sailed  then  to  Denmark,  and  remained  there  ;  and  at 
last  came  into  great  favour  with  King  Ey stein,  the 
son  of  King  Magnus,  who  took  so  great  a  liking  to 
Svein  that  he  made  him  his  dish-bearer,*  and  held 
him  in  great  respect.  King  Magnus  had  now  alone 
the  whole  kingdom,  and  he  kept  good  peace  in  the 
land,  and  rooted  out  all  vikings  and  lawless  men. 
He  was  a  man  quick,  warlike,  and  able,  and  more 
like  in  all  things  to  his  grandfather  King  Harald 
in  disposition  and  talents  than  to  his  father. 


Chapter  YIII. —  Of  the  Bonde  Sveinke ,  and  Sigurd 

V 1st  r  eng. 

There  was  a  man  called  Sveinke  Steinarson,  who 
was  very  wealthy,  and  dwelt  in  Viken  at  the  Gaut 
river.  He  had  brought  up  Hakon  Magnuson  before 
Thorer  of  Steig  took  him.  Sveinke  had  not  yet 
submitted  to  King  Magnus.  King  Magnus  ordered 
Sigurd  Ulstreng  to  be  called,  and  told  him  he  would 
send  him  to  Sveinke  with  the  command  that  he 
should  quit  the  king’s  land  and  domain.  “He  has 
not  yet  submitted  to  us,  or  shown  us  due  honour.” 
He  added,  that  there  were  some  lendermen  east  in 
Viken,  namely,  Svein  Bryggjufot,  Dag  Eilifson,  and 
Kolbiorn  Klakke,  who  could  bring  this  matter  into 
right  bearing.  Then  Sigurd  said,  “  I  did  not  know 
there  was  the  man  in  Norway  against  whom  three 

*  The  dish-hearer,  not  cup-bearer,  was  an  office  of  dignity  equivalent 
to  the  chamberlain  in  modern  courts, — the  dapifer. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


83 


lendermen  besides  myself  were  needful.”  The  king 
replied,  “  Thou  needst  not  take  this  help,  unless  it 
be  necessary.”  Now  Sigurd  made  himself  ready  for 
the  journey  with  a  ship,  sailed  east  to  Viken,  and 
there  summoned  the  lendermen  to  him.  Then  a 
Thing  was  appointed  in  Viken,  to  which  the  people 
were  called  who  dwelt  on  the  Gaut  river,  besides 
others  ;  so  that  it  was  a  numerous  assembly.  When 
the  Thing  was  formed  they  had  to  wait  for  Sveinke. 
They  soon  after  saw  a  troop  of  men  coming  along, 
so  well  furnished  with  weapons  that  they  looked 
like  pieces  of  shining  ice  ;  and  now  came  Sveinke  and 
his  people  to  the  Thing,  and  set  themselves  down  in 
a  circle.  All  were  clad  in  iron,  with  glowing  arms, 
and  500*  in  number.  Then  Sigurd  stood  up,  and 
spoke.  “My  master,  King  Magnus,  sends  God’s 
salutation  and  his  own  to  all  friends,  lendermen  and 
others,  his  subjects  in  the  kingdom;  also  to  the 
powerful  bondes,  and  the  people  in  general,  with 
kind  words  and  offers  of  friendship  ;  and  to  all  who 
will  obey  him  he  offers  his  friendship  and  good-will. 
Now  the  king  will,  with  all  cheerfulness  and  peace, 
show  himself  a  gracious  master  to  all  who  will  sub¬ 
mit  to  him,  and  to  all  in  his  dominions.  He  will  be 
the  leader  and  defender  of  all  the  men  of  Norway; 
and  it  will  be  good  for  you  to  accept  his  gracious 
speech,  and  this  offer.” 

Then  stood  up  a  man  in  the  troop  of  the  Elfgrims, 
who  was  of  great  stature  and  grim  countenance,  clad 
in  a  leather  cloak,  with  a  halberd  on  his  shoulder, 


# 


=  600. 


84 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


and  a  great  steel  hat  upon  his  head.  He  looked 
sternly,  and  said,  “  Here  is  no  need  of  wheels,  says 
the  fox,  when  he  draws  the  trap  over  the  ice.”  He 
said  nothing  more,  but  sat  down  again. 

Soon  after  Sigurd  Ulstreng  stood  up  again,  and 
spoke  thus  :  “  But  little  concern  or  help  have  we  for 
the  king’s  affairs  from  you  Elfgrims,  and  but  little 
friendship  ;  yet  by  such  means  every  man  shows  how 
much  he  respects  himself.  But  now  I  shall  produce 
more  clearly  the  king’s  errand.”  Thereupon  he  de¬ 
manded  land-dues  and  levy-dues,  together  with  all 
other  rights  of  the  king,  from  the  great  bondes.  He 
bade  each  of  them  to  consider  with  himself  how  they 
had  conducted  themselves  in  these  matters  ;  and  that 
they  should  now  promote  their  own  honour,  and  do 
the  king  justice,  if  they  had  come  short  hitherto  in 
doing  so.  And  then  he  sat  down. 

Then  the  same  man  got  up  in  the  troop  of  the 
Elfgrims  who  had  spoken  before,  lifted  his  hat  a 
little  up,  and  said,  “  The  lads  run  well,  say  the  Lap¬ 
landers,  who  have  skates  for  nothing.”  Then  he  sat 
himself  down  again. 

Soon  after  Sigurd  arose,  after  speaking  with  the 
lendermen,  and  said  that  so  weighty  a  message  as  the 
king’s  ought  not  to  be  treated  lightly  as  a  jest.  He 
was  now  somewhat  angry ;  and  added,  that  they 
ought  not  to  receive  the  king’s  message  and  errand 
so  scornfully,  for  it  was  not  decent.  He  was  dressed 
in  a  red  or  scarlet  coat,  and  had  a  blue  coat  over  it. 
He  cast  off  his  upper  coat,  and  said,  “Now  it  is 
come  so  far  that  every  one  must  look  to  himself,  and 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


85 


not  loiter  and  jest  with  others  ;  for  by  so  doing  every 
man  will  show  what  he  is.  We  do  not  require  now 
to  be  taught  by  others  ;  for  now  we  can  see  ourselves 
how  much  we  are  regarded.  But  this  may  be  borne 
with ;  but  not  that  ye  treat  so  scornfully  the  king’s 
message.  Thereby  every  one  shows  how  highly  he 
considers  himself.  There  is  one  man  called  Sveinke 
Steinarson,  who  lives  east  at  the  Gaut  river ;  and 
from  him  the  king  will  have  his  just  land-dues,  to¬ 
gether  with  his  own  land,  or  will  banish  him  from 
the  country.  It  is  of  no  use  here  to  seek  excuses,  or 
to  answer  with  sharp  words ;  for  people  are  to  be 
found  who  are  his  equals  in  power,  although  he  now 
receives  our  speech  so  unworthily ;  and  it  is  better 
now  than  afterwards  to  return  to  the  right  way,  and 
do  himself  honour,  rather  than  await  disgrace  for 
his  obstinacy.”  He  then  sat  down. 

Sveinke  then  got  up,  threw  back  his  steel-hat,  and 
gave  Sigurd  many  scornful  words,  and  said,  “Tut! 
tut !  ’tis  a  shame  for  the  dogs,  says  the  proverb, 
when  the  fox  is  allowed  to  cast  their  excrements  in 
the  peasant’s  well.  Here  will  be  a  miracle  !  Thou 
useless  fellow !  with  a  coat  without  arms,  and  a 
kirtle  with  skirts,  wilt  thou  drive  me  out  of  the 
country?  Thy  relation  Sigurd  Woolsack  was  sent 
before  on  this  errand,  and  one  called  Gille  the  Back- 
thief,  and  one  who  had  still  a  worse  name.  They 
were  a  night  in  every  house,  and  stole  wherever  they 
came.  Wilt  thou  drive  me  out  of  the  country?  For¬ 
merly  thou  wast  not  so  mighty,  and  thy  pride  was 
less  when  King  Hakon,  my  foster-son,  was  in  life. 


86 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Then  thou  wert  as  frightened  for  him  when  he  met 
thee  on  the  road  as  a  mouse  in  a  mouse-trap,  and  hid 
thyself  under  a  heap  of  clothes,  like  a  dog  on  board 
a  ship.  Thou  wast  thrust  into  a  leather-bag  like 
corn  in  a  sack,  and  driven  from  house  and  farm  like 
a  year-old  colt  from  the  mares ;  and  dost  thou  dare 
to  drive  me  from  the  land?  dhou  shouldst  rather 
think  thyself  lucky  to  escape  from  hence  with  life. 
Let  us  stand  up  and  attack  him.” 

Then  all  his  men  stood  up,  and  made  a  great  clash 
with  their  weapons.  Then  Svein  Bryggjufot  and 
the  other  lendermen  saw  there  was  no  other  chance 
for  Sigurd  but  to  get  him  on  horseback,  which  was 
done,  and  he  rode  off  into  the  forest.  The  end  was 
that  Sveinke  returned  home  to  his  farm,  and  Sigurd 
Ulstreng  came,  with  great  difficulty,  by  land  north 
to  Throndhjeim  to  King  Magnus,  and  told  the  re¬ 
sult  of  his  errand.  “  Did  I  not  say,”  said  the  king, 
“  that  the  help  of  my  lendermen  would  be  needed?  ” 
Sigurd  was  ill  pleased  with  his  journey  ;  insisted 
that  he  would  be  revenged,  cost  what  it  will ;  and 
urged  the  king  much.  The  king  ordered  five  ships 
to  be  fitted  out ;  and  as  soon  as  they  were  ready  for 
sea  he  sailed  south  along  the  land,  and  then  east  to 
Viken,  where  he  was  entertained  in  excellent  guest- 
quarters  by  his  lendermen.  The  king  told  them  he 
would  seek  out  Sveinke.  “For  I  will  not  conceal 
my  suspicion  that  he  thinks  to  make  himself  king 
of  Norway.”  They  said  that  Sveinke  was  both  a 
powerful  and  an  ungovernable  man.  Now  the  king 
went  from  Viken  until  he  came  to  Sveinke’s  farm. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


87 


Then  the  lendermen  desired  that  they  might  be  put 
on  shore  to  see  how  matters  stood ;  and  when  they 
came  to  the  land  they  saw  that  Sveinke  had  already 
come  down  from  the  farm,  and  was  on  the  road  with 
a  number  of  well-armed  men.  The  lendermen  held 
up  a  white  shield  in  the  air,  as  a  peace-token ;  and 
when  Sveinke  saw  it  he  halted  his  men,  and  they 
approached  each  other.  Then  said  Ivolbiorn  Ivlakke, 
“  King  Magnus  sends  thee  God’s  salutation  and  his 
own,  and  bids  thee  consider  what  becomes  thee,  and 
do  him  obedience,  and  not  prepare  thyself  to  give 
him  battle.”  Ivolbiorn  offered  to  mediate  peace 
between  them,  if  he  could,  and  told  him  to  halt  his 
troops. 

Sveinke  said  he  would  wait  for  them  where  he 
was.  “We  came  out  to  meet  you,”  he  said,  “that 
ye  might  not  tread  down  our  corn-fields.” 

The  lendermen  returned  to  the  king,  and  told  him 
all  was  now  at  his  pleasure. 

The  king  said,  “  My  doom  is  soon  delivered.  He 
shall  fly  the  country,  and  never  come  back  to  Norway 
as  long  as  the  kingdom  is  mine  ;  and  he  shall  leave 
all  his  goods  behind.” 

“But  will  it  not  be  more  for  thy  honour,”  said 
Kolbiorn,  “and  give  thee  a  higher  reputation  among 
other  kings,  if,  in  banishing  him  from  the  country, 
thou  shouldst  allow  him  to  keep  his  property,  and 
show  himself  among  other  people  ?  And  we  shall 
take  care  that  he  never  come  back  while  we  live. 
Consider  of  this,  sire,  by  yourself,  and  have  respect 
for  our  assurance.” 


88 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


The  king  replied,  “  Let  him  then  go  forth  imme¬ 
diately.’’ 

They  went  back,  therefore,  to  Sveinke,  and  told 
him  the  king’s  words  ;  and  also  that  the  king  had 
ordered  him  out  of  the  country,  and  he  should  show 
his  obedience,  since  he  had  forgotten  himself  to¬ 
wards  the  king.  “  It  is  for  the  honour  of  both  that 
thou  shouldst  show  obedience  to  the  king.” 

Then  Sveinke  said,  “  There  must  be  some  great 
change  if  the  king  speaks  agreeably  to  me ;  but 
why  should  I  fly  the  country  and  my  properties  ? 
Listen  now  to  what  I  say.  It  appears  to  me  better 
to  die  upon  my  property  than  to  fly  from  my  udal 
estates.  Tell  the  king  that  I  will  not  stir  from 
them  even  an  arrow-flight.” 

Kolbiorn  replied,  “  This  is  scarcely  prudent,  or 
right ;  for  it  is  better  for  one’s  own  honour  to  give 
way  to  the  best  chief,  than  to  make  opposition  to 
one’s  own  loss.  A  gallant  man  succeeds  whereso¬ 
ever  he  goes ;  and  thou  wilt  be  the  more  respected 
wheresoever  thou  art,  with  men  of  power,  just  be¬ 
cause  thou  hast  made  head  so  boldly  against  so 
powerful  a  chief.  Hear  our  promises,  and  pay  some 
attention  to  our  errand.  We  offer  thee  to  manage 
thy  estates,  and  take  them  faithfully  under  our 
protection ;  and  also  never,  against  thy  will,  to  pay 
scat  for  thy  land  until  thou  comest  back.  We  will 
pledge  our  lives  and  properties  upon  this.  Do  not 
throw  away  good  counsel  from  thee,  and  avoid 
thus  the  ill  fortune  of  other  good  men.” 

Then  Sveinke  was  silent  for  a  short  time,  and  said 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


89 


at  last,  “  Your  endeavours  are  wise ;  but  I  have  my 
suspicions  that  ye  are  changing  a  little  the  king’s 
message.  In  consideration,  however,  of  the  great 
good-will  that  ye  show  me,  I  wbll  hold  your  advice 
in  such  respect  that  I  will  go  out  of  the  country  for 
the  whole  winter,  if,  according  to  your  promises,  I 
can  then  retain  my  estates  in  peace.  Tell  the  king, 
also,  these  my  words, — that  I  do  this  on  your 
account,  not  on  his.” 

Thereupon  they  returned  to  the  king,  and  said, 
that  Sveinke  left  all  in  the  king’s  hands.  “  But 
entreats  you  to  have  respect  to  his  honour.  He  will 
be  away  for  three  years,  and  then  come  back,  if  it  be 
the  king’s  pleasure.  Ho  this  ;  let  all  things  be  done 
according  to  what  is  suitable  for  the  royal  dignity 
and  according  to  our  entreaty,  now  that  the  matter 
is  entirely  in  thy  power,  and  we  shall  do  all  we  can 
to  prevent  his  returning  against  thy  will.” 

The  king  replied,  “Ye  treat  this  matter  like  men, 
and,  for  your  sakes,  shall  all  things  be  as  ye  desire. 
Tell  him  so.” 

They  thanked  the  king,  and  then  went  to  Sveinke, 
and  told  him  the  king’s  gracious  intentions.  “  We 
will  be  glad,”  said  they,  “if  ye  can  be  reconciled. 
The  king  requires,  indeed,  that  thy  absence  shall  be 
for  three  years  ;  but,  if  we  know  the  truth  rightly, 
we  expect  that  before  that  time  he  will  find  he  can¬ 
not  do  without  thee  in  this  part  of  the  country.  It 
will  be  to  thy  own  future  honour,  therefore,  to  agree 
to  this.” 

Sveinke  replies,  “  What  condition  is  better  than 


90 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


this  ?  Tell  the  king  that  I  shall  not  vex  him  longer 
with  my  presence  here,  and  accept  of  my  goods  and 
estates  on  this  condition.” 

Thereupon  he  went  home  with  his  men,  and  set 
off  directly  ;  for  he  had  prepared  everything  before¬ 
hand.  Ivolbiorn  remains  behind,  and  makes  ready 
a  feast  for  King  Magnus,  which  also  was  thought 
of  and  prepared.  Sveinke,  on  the  other  hand,  rides 
up  to  Gautland  with  all  the  men  he  thought  proper  to 
take  with  him.  The  king  let  himself  be  entertained 
in  guest-quarters  at  his  house,  returned  to  Viken, 
and  Sveinke’s  estates  were  nominally  the  king’s,  but 
Ivolbiorn  had  them  under  his  charge.  The  king 
received  guest-quarters  in  Viken,  proceeded  from 
thence  northwards,  and  there  was  peace  for  a  while  ; 
but  now  that  the  Elfgrims  were  without  a  chief, 
marauding  gangs  infested  them,  and  the  king  saw 
this  eastern  part  of  the  kingdom  would  be  laid  waste. 
It  appeared  to  him,  therefore,  most  suitable  and 
advisable  to  make  Sveinke  himself  oppose  the  stream, 
and  twice  he  sent  messages  to  him.  But  he  did  not 
stir  until  King  Magnus  himself  was  south  in  Den¬ 
mark,  when  Sveinke  and  the  king  met,  and  made  a 
full  reconciliation  ;  on  which  Sveinke  returned  home 
to  his  house  and  estates,  and  was  afterwards  King 
Magnus’s  best  and  trustiest  friend,  who  strengthened 
his  kingdom  on  the  eastern  border  ;  and  their  friend¬ 
ship  continued  as  long  as  they  lived. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


9i 


Chapter  IX. — King  Magnus  makes  War  on  the  Southern 

Hehudes. 

King  Magnus  undertook  an  expedition  out  of  the 
country,  with  many  tine  men  and  a  good  assortment 
of  shipping.  With  this  armament  he  sailed  out  into 
the  West  sea,  and  first  came  to  the  Orkney  Islands. 
There  he  took  the  two  earls,  Paul  and  Erlend,  prison¬ 
ers,  and  sent  them  east  to  Norway,  and  placed  his 
son  Sigurd  as  chief  over  the  islands,  leaving  some 
counsellors  to  assist  him.  From  thence  King  Magnus, 
with  his  followers,  proceeded  to  the  Southern  He- 
budes,*  and  when  he  came  there  began  to  burn  and 
lay  waste  the  inhabited  places,  killing  the  people,  and 
plundering  wherever  he  came  with  his  men  ;  and  the 
country  people  fled  in  all  directions,  some  into  Scot- 
land-fiord,!  others  south  to  Cantire,  or  out  to  Ireland  : 
some  obtained  life  and  safety  by  entering  into  his 
service.  So  says  Biorn  Ivrephende  : — 

“  In  Lewis  Isle  with  fearful  blaze 
The  house-destroying  fire  plays  ; 


*  Sudreyia,  or  the  South  Isles,  were  so  called  in  reference  to  their 
situation  from  the  Farey,  Orkney,  and  Shetland  Isles ;  and  the  name 
is  still  retained  in  the  title  of  the  bishopric  of  Sodor  and  Man.  The 
Sudreyia  are  the  Hebrides,  or,  as  Pinkerton  will  have  it,  the  Hebudes  : 
in  which  he  is  probably  right,  the  word  being  Eybodar — island  habita¬ 
tions  ;  reduced  to  Ebudse  in  Latin.  The  names  mentioned  in  the  saga 
are  Liodhus  (Lewis),  Ivist  (Uist,  north  and  south),  Skid  (Skye),  Rauneyar 
(Rasey  and  Rona),  Myl  (Mull),  Mylarkalfr  (Coll?  or  Calf  of  Mull), 
Tyrvist  (Tiree),  Eyin  Helga  (Iona),  II  (Islay),  Gudey  (Gigha),  Herey  or 
Hersey  (Arran),  Bot  (Bute),  Kumreyjar  (the  Cumbray  Isles,  Mon  (Man) 
Satiri  (the  peninsula  of  Cantire).  The  Hebudes  and  Man  were  sold  in 
1266  to  the  Scottish  crown  by  King  Magnus  the  Law  Improver,  for  4000 
marks  sterling,  and  100  marks  yearly  as  feu  duty. — L. 

t  Scotland-fiord  is  the  sea  between  the  northern  Hebudes  and  the 
mainland  of  Scotland. — L. 


92 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


To  hills  and  rocks  the  people  fly, 

Fearing  all  shelter  but  the  sky. 

In  Uist  the  king  deep  crimson  made 
The  lightning  of  his  glancing  blade  ; 

The  peasant  lost  his  land  and  life 
Who  dared  to  bide  the  Norseman’s  strife. 

“  The  hungry  battle-birds  were  filled 
In  Skye  with  blood  of  foemen  killed, 
And  wolves  on  Tyree’s  lonely  shore 
Dyed  red  their  hairy  jaws  in  gore. 

The  men  of  Mull  were  tired  of  flight  ; 
The  Scottish  foemen  would  not  fight, 
And  many  an  island-girl’s  wail 
Was  heard  as  through  the  isles  we  sail.” 


Chapter  X. — Of  Lagman ,  King  Gudrod's  Son. 

King  Magnus  came  with  his  forces  to  the  Holy 
Island  (Iona),  and  gave  peace  and  safety  to  all  men 
there.  It  is  told  that  the  king  opened  the  door  of 
the  little  Columb’s  Kirk  there,  but  did  not  go  in,  but 
instantly  locked  the  door  again,  and  said  that  no  man 
should  be  so  bold  as  to  go  into  that  church  hereafter ; 
which  has  been  the  case  ever  since.  From  thence 
King  Magnus  sailed  to  Islay,  where  he  plundered 
and  burnt :  and  when  he  had  taken  that  country  he 
proceeded  south  around  Cantire,  marauding  on  both 
sides  in  Scotland  and  Ireland,  and  advanced  with  his 
foray  to  Man,  where  he  plundered.  So  says  Biorn 
Krephende  : — 

“  On  Sandey’s*  plain  our  shield  they  spy  : 

From  Isla  smoke  rose  heaven-high, 

Whirling  up  from  the  flashing  blaze 
The  king’s  men  o’er  the  island  raise. 


*  Sandey  is  here  probably  the  small  isle  Sandera,  beyond  the  Mull  of 
Cantire. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


93 


South  of  Cantire  the  people  fled, 

Scared  by  our  swords  in  blood  dyed  red, 

And  our  brave  champion  onward  goes 
To  meet  in  Man  the  Norseman’s  foes.” 

Lagman  (Lawman)  was  the  name  of  the  son  of 
Gudrod,  king  of  the  Hebudes.  Lawman  was  sent 
to  defend  the  most  northerly  islands  ;  but  when  King 
Magnus  and  his  army  came  to  the  Hebudes,  Lawman 
fled  here  and  there  about  the  isles,  and  at  last  King 
Magnus’s  men  took  him  and  his  ship’s  crew  as  he 
was  flying  over  to  Ireland.  The  king  put  him  in 
irons  to  secure  him.  So  says  Biorn  Krephende  : — 

“To  Gudrod’s  son  no  rock  or  cave, 

Shore-side  or  hill,  a  refuge  gave  ; 

Hunted  around  from  isle  to  isle, 

This  Lawman  found  no  safe  asyle. 

From  isle  to  isle,  o’er  firth  and  sound, 

Close  on  his  track  his  foe  he  found. 

At  Ness  *  the  Agder  chief  at  length 

o  o 

Seized  him,  and  iron-chained  his  strength.” 


Chapter  XI. — Of  the  Fall  of  Earl  Huge  the  Brave . 

Afterwards  King  Magnus  sailed  to  Wales  ;  t  and 
when  he  came  to  the  sound  of  Anglesey  there  came 
against  him  an  army  from  Wales,  which  was  led  by 
two  earls, | — Huge  the  Brave,  and  Huge  the  Stout. 

*  This  Ness  is  supposed  to  be  in  Scalpa,  on  the  south-west  side  of 
Skye. — L. 

t  The  country  occupied  by  the  ancient  Britons,  or  Wales,  is  called 
Bretland  in  the  Icelandic  sagas,  and  the  inhabitants  Bretar ;  and  Saxland 
was  the  part  of  England  occupied  by  the  Anglo-Saxons. — L. 

+  Gibson,  in  his  edition  of  Cambden,  vol.  ii.  p.  80S.,  shows  that  there 
were  two  Hugos — an  earl  of  Cheshire,  and  an  earl  of  Shropshire — of 
Norman  descent,  who  had  ravaged  Anglesey,  and  built  a  castle  (Aber 
Lhienawg)  to  keep  down  the  people  ;  and  on  the  arrival  of  King  Magnus 
one  of  them,  the  Hugo  earl  of  Chester,  was  killed  by  an  arrow. — L. 


94 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


They  began  immediately  to  give  battle,  and  there 
was  a  severe  conflict.  King  Magnus  shot  with  the 
bow ;  but  Huge  the  Brave  was  all  over  in  armour, 
so  that  nothing  was  bare  about  him  excepting  one 
eye.  King  Magnus  let  fly  an  arrow  at  him,  as  also 
did  a  Halogaland  man  who  was  beside  the  king. 
They  both  shot  at  once.  The  one  shaft  hit  the 
nose-screen  of  the  helmet,  which  was  bent  by  it 
to  one  side,  and  the  other  arrow  hit  the  earl’s  eye, 
and  went  through  his  head  ;  and  that  was  found 
to  be  the  king’s.  Earl  Huge  fell,  and  the  Britons 
fled  with  the  loss  of  many  people.  So  says  Biorn 
Krephende  : — 

“  The  swinger  of  the  sword 
Stood  by  Anglesey’s  ford  ; 

His  quick  shaft  tiew, 

And  Huge  slew. 

His  sword  gleamed  a  while 
O’er  Anglesey  Isle, 

And  his  Norsemen’s  band 
Scoured  the  Anglesey  land.” 


There  was  also  sung  the  following  verse  about  it: — 

“  On  the  panzers  arrows  rattle, 

Where  our  Norse  king  stands  in  battle  ; 

From  the  helmets  blood-streams  flow, 

Where  our  Norse  king  draws  his  bow  : 

His  bowstring  twangs, — its  biting  hail 
Rattles  against  the  ring-linked  mail. 

Up  in  the  land  in  deadly  strife 
Our  Norse  king  took  Earl  Huge’s  life.” 


King  Magnus  gained  the  victory  in  this  battle,  and 
then  took  Anglesey  Isle,  which  was  the  farthest  south 
the  Norway  kings  of  former  days  had  ever  extended 
their  rule.  Anglesey  is  a  third  part  of  Wales.  After 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY". 


95 


this  battle  King  Magnus  turned  back  with  his  fleet, 
and  came  first  to  Scotland.  Then  men  went  between 
the  Scottish  king  Melkolm  *  and  King  Magnus,  and 
a  peace  was  made  between  them ;  so  that  all  the 
islands  lying  west  of  Scotland,  between  which  and 
the  mainland  he  could  pass  in  a  vessel  with  her 
rudder  shipped,  should  be  held  to  belong  to  the  king 
of  Norway.  Now  when  King  Magnus  came  north  to 
Can  tire,  he  had  a  skiff  drawn  over  the  strand  at  Can- 
tire,  and  shipped  the  rudder  of  it.  The  king  himself 
sat  in  the  stern-sheets,  and  held  the  tiller ;  and  thus 
he  appropriated  to  himself  the  land  that  lay  on  the 
larboard  side.  Cantire  is  a  great  district,  better  than 
the  best  of  the  southern  isles  of  the  Hebudes,  except¬ 
ing  Man  ;  and  there  is  a  small  neck  of  land  between 
it  and  the  mainland  of  Scotland,  over  which  long- 
ships  are  often  drawn. 


Chapter  XII. — Death  of  the  Earls  of  Orkney. 

King  Magnus  was  all  the  winter  in  the  southern 
isles,  and  his  men  went  over  all  the  fiords  of  Scotland, 
rowing  within  all  the  inhabited  and  uninhabited  isles, 
and  took  possession  for  the  king  of  Norway  of  all  the 
islands  west  of  Scotland.  King  Magnus  contracted 
in  marriage  his  son  Sigurd  to  Biadmynia,  King  Myr- 
kj  ar tan’s  daughter.  Myrkjartan  was  a  son  of  the  Irish 
king  Thialfe,  and  ruled  over  Connaught.  The  sum¬ 
mer  after,  King  Magnus,  with  his  fleet,  returned  east 

*  According  to  Buchanan  it  was  not  in  the  time  of  King  Malcolm  III., 
but  of  his  brother  Donald  Bane,  that  the  Hebudes  were  conquered  by 
King  Magnus  Barefoot.— L. 


96 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


to  Norway.  Earl  Erlend  *  died  of  sickness  at  Nidaros, 
and  is  buried  there  ;  and  Earl  Paul  *  died  in  Bergen. 

Skopte  Ogmundson,  a  grandson  of  Thorberg,  was  a 
gallant  lenderman,  who  dwelt  at  Giske  in  Sunmore, 
and  was  married  to  Gudrun,  a  daughter  of  Thord 
Eolason.  Their  children  were  Ogmund,  Fin,  Thord, 
and  Thora,  who  was  married  to  Asolf  Skulason. 
Skopte’s  and  Gudrun’ s  sons  were  the  most  promising 
and  popular  men  in  their  youth. 


Chapter  XIII. — Quarrels  of  King  Magnus  and 

King  Inge. 

Steinkel  the  Swedish  king  died  about  the  same  time 
[1066]  as  the  two  Haralds  t  fell,  and  the  king  who  came 
after  him  in  Svithiod  was  called  Hakon.  Afterwards 
Inge,  a  son  of  Steinkel,  was  king,  and  was  a  good 
and  powerful  king,  strong  and  stout  beyond  most 
men  ;  and  he  was  king  of  Svithiod  when  King  Mag¬ 
nus  was  king  of  Norway.  King  Magnus  insisted  that 
the  boundaries  of  the  countries  in  old  times  had  been 
so,  that  the  Gaut  river  divided  the  kingdoms  of  the 
Swedish  and  Norwegian  kings,  but  afterwards  the 
Vener  lake  up  to  Vermaland.  Thus  King  Magnus 
insisted  that  he  was  owner  of  all  the  places  lying  west 
of  the  Vener  lake  up  to  Vermaland,  which  are  the 
districts  of  Sundal,  Nordal,  Vear,  and  Vardyniar,  with 
all  the  woods  belonging  thereto.  But  these  had  for 
a  long  time  been  under  the  Swedish  dominion,  and 

*  The  two  earls  of  Orkney,  Erlend  and  Paul. — L. 
t  The  two  Haralds  meant  are  Harald  Hardrade  of  Norway,  and  the 
English  king  Harald  Godwinson,  who  fell  at  Hastings. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


97 


with  respect  to  scat  were  joined  to  West  Gautland  ; 
and,  besides,  the  forest-settlers  preferred  being  under 
the  Swedish  king.  King  Magnus  rode  from  Viken 
up  to  Gautland  with  a  great  and  line  army,  and  when 
he  came  to  the  forest- settlements  he  plundered  and 
burnt  all  round  ;  on  which  the  people  submitted,  and 
took  the  oath  of  fidelity  to  him.  When  he  came  to 
the  Vener  lake,  autumn  was  advanced  and  he  went 
out  to  the  island  Kvaldinsey,  and  made  a  strong¬ 
hold  of  turf  and  wood,  and  dug  a  ditch  around  it. 
When  the  work  was  finished,  provisions  and  other 
necessaries  that  might  be  required  were  brought 
to  it.  The  king  left  in  it  300*  men,  who  were  the 
chosen  of  his  forces,  and  Fin  Skoptason  and  Sigurd 
Ulstreng  as  their  commanders.  The  king  himself 
returned  to  Viken. 

Chapter  XIV. — Of  the  Northmen. 

When  the  Swedish  king  heard  this  he  drew  to¬ 
gether  people,  and  the  report  came  that  he  would 
ride  against  these  Northmen  ;  but  there  was  delay 
about  his  riding,  and  the  Northmen  made  these 
lines  : — 

“  The  fat-hipped  king,  with  heavy  sides, 

Finds  he  must  mount  before  he  rides.” 

But  when  the  ice  set  in  upon  the  Vener  lake  King 
Inge  rode  down,  and  had  near  300  #  men  with  him. 
He  sent  a  message  to  the  Northmen  who  sat  in  the 
burgh  that  they  might  retire  with  all  the  booty  they 
had  taken,  and  go  to  Norway.  When  the  messengers 

*  =360. 


VOL.  IV. 


G 


98 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


brought  this  message,  Sigurd  Ulstreng  replied  to  it ; 
saying  that  King  Inge  must  take  the  trouble  to  come, 
if  he  wished  to  drive  them  away  like  cattle  out  of  a 
grass  field,  and  said  he  must  come  nearer  if  he  wished 
them  to  remove.  The  messengers  returned  with  this 
answer  to  the  king,  who  then  rode  out  with  all  his 
army  to  the  island,  and  again  sent  a  message  to  the 
Northmen  that  they  might  go  away,  taking  with  them 
their  weapons,  clothes,  and  horses ;  but  must  leave 
behind  all  their  booty.  This  they  refused.  The  king 
made  an  assault  upon  them,  and  they  shot  at  each 
other.  Then  the  king  ordered  timber  and  stones  to 
be  collected,  and  he  filled  up  the  ditch ;  and  then  he 
fastened  anchors  to  long  spars  which  were  brought 
up  to  the  timber-walls,  and,  by  the  strength  of  many 
hands,  the  walls  were  broken  down.  Thereafter  a 
large  pile  of  wood  was  set  on  fire,  and  the  lighted 
brands  were  flung  in  among  them.  Then  the  North¬ 
men  asked  for  quarter.  The  king  ordered  them  to 
go  out  without  weapons  or  cloaks.  As  they  went  out 
each  of  them  received  a  stroke  with  a  whip,  and  then 
they  set  off  for  Norway,  and  all  the  forest-men  sub¬ 
mitted  again  to  King  Inge.  Sigurd  and  his  people 
went  to  King  Magnus,  and  told  him  their  misfortune. 


Chapter  XY. — King  Magnus  and  Giparde. 

When  King  Magnus  was  east  in  Viken,  there 
came  to  him  a  foreigner  called  Giparde.  He  gave 
himself  out  for  a  good  knight,  and  offered  his  ser¬ 
vices  to  King  Magnus ;  for  he  understood  that  in 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


99 


the  king’s  dominions  there  was  something  to  be  done. 
The  king  received  him  well.  At  that  time  the  king 
was  preparing  to  go  to  Gautland,  on  which  country 
the  king  had  pretensions  ;  and  besides  he  would  repay 
the  Gautland  people  the  disgrace  they  had  occasioned 
him  in  spring,  when  he  was  obliged  to  fly  from  them. 
He  had  then  a  great  force  in  arms,  and  the  West 
Gautlanders  in  the  northern  districts  submitted  to 
him.  He  set  up  his  camp  on  the  borders,  intending 
to  make  a  foray  from  thence.  When  King  Inge  heard 
of  this  he  collected  troops,  and  hastened  to  oppose 
King  Magnus  ;  and  when  King  Magnus  heard  of  this 
expedition,  many  of  the  chiefs  of  the  people  urged 
him  to  turn  back  :  but  this  the  king  would  not  listen 
to,  but  in  the  night-time  went  unsuspectedly  against 
the  Swedish  king.  They  met  at  Foxerne  ;  and  when 
he  was  drawing  up  his  men  in  battle  order  he  asked, 
“Where  is  Giparde?”  but  he  was  not  to  be  found. 
Then  the  king  made  these  verses  : — 

“  Cannot  the  foreign  knight  abide 
Our  rough  array  1 — where  does  he  hide  ?  ” 

Then  a  skald  who  followed  the  king  replied — 

“  The  king  asks  where  the  foreign  knight 
In  our  array  rides  to  the  fight : 

Giparde  the  knight  rode  quite  away 
When  our  men  joined  in  bloody  fray. 

When  swords  were  wet  the  knight  was  slow 
With  his  bay  horse  in  front  to  go  ; 

The  foreign  knight  could  not  abide 
Our  rough  array,  and  went  to  hide.” 

There  was  a  great  slaughter,  and  after  the  battle 
the  field  was  covered  with  the  Swedes  slain,  and 


IOO 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


King  Inge  escaped  by  flight.  King  Magnus  gained 
a  great  victory.  Then  came  Giparde  riding  down 
from  the  country,  and  people  did  not  speak  well  of 
him  for  not  being  in  the  fight.  He  went  away,  and 
proceeded  westward  to  England ;  and  the  voyage 
was  stormy,  and  Giparde  lay  in  bed.  There  was  an 
Iceland  man  called  Eldjarn,  who  went  to  bale  out 
the  water  in  the  ship’s  hold,  and  when  he  saw  where 
Giparde  was  lying  he  made  this  verse  : — 

“  Does  it  beseem  a  courtman  bold 
Here  to  be  dozing  in  the  hold  % 

The  bearded  knight  should  danger  face  : 

The  leak  gains  on  our  ship  apace. 

Here,  ply  this  bucket !  bale  who  can  ; 

We  need  the  work  of  every  man. 

Our  sea-horse  stands  full  to  the  breast,  — 

Sluggards  and  cowards  must  not  rest.” 


When  they  came  west  to  England,  Giparde  said 
the  Northmen  had  slandered  him.  A  meeting  was 
appointed,  and  a  count  came  to  it,  and  the  case  was 
brought  before  him  for  trial.  He  said  he  was  not 
much  acquainted  with  law  cases,  as  he  was  but 
young,  and  had  only  been  a  short  time  in  office  ; 
and  also,  of  all  things,  he  said  what  he  least  under¬ 
stood  to  judge  about  was  poetry.  “But  let  us  hear 
what  it  was.”  Then  Eldjarn  sang  : — 


“  I  heard  that  in  the  bloody  fight 
Giparde  drove  all  our  foes  to  flight ; 
Brave  Giparde  would  the  foe  abide, 
While  all  our  men  ran  off  to  hide. 

At  Foxerne  the  fight  was  won 
By  Giparde’s  valour  all  alone  : 

Where  Giparde  fought,  alone  was  he  ; 
Not  one  survived  to  fight  or  flee.” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


IOI 

Then  said  the  count,  “  Although  I  know  but  little 
about  skald-craft,  I  can  hear  that  this  is  no  slander, 
but  rather  the  highest  praise  and  honour.”  Giparde 
could  say  nothing  against  it,  yet  he  felt  it  was  a 
mockery. 


Chapter  XYI. — Battle  at  Foxerne. 

The  spring  after,  as  soon  as  the  ice  broke  up, 
King  Magnus,  with  a  great  army,  sailed  eastwards 
to  the  Gaut  river,  and  went  up  the  eastern  arm  of 
it,  laying  waste  all  that  belonged  to  the  Swedish 
dominions.  When  they  came  to  Foxerne  they  landed 
from  their  vessels ;  but  as  they  came  over  a  river  on 
their  way  an  army  of  Gautland  people  came  against 
them,  and  there  was  immediately  a  great  battle,  in 
which  the  Northmen  were  overwhelmed  by  numbers, 
driven  to  flight,  and  many  of  them  killed  near  to  a 
waterfall.  King  Magnus  fled,  and  the  Gautlanders 
pursued,  and  killed  those  they  could  get  near.  King 
Magnus  was  easily  known.  He  was  a  very  stout 
man,  and  had  a  red  short  cloak  over  him,  and  bright 
yellow  hair  like  silk  that  fell  over  his  shoulders. 
Ogmund  Skoptason,  who  was  a  tall  and  handsome 
man,  rode  on  one  side  of  the  king.  He  said,  “  Sire, 
give  me  that  cloak.” 

The  king  said,  “  What  would  you  do  with  it?  ” 

“I  would  like  to  have  it,”  said  Ogmund;  “  and 
you  have  given  me  greater  gifts,  sire.” 

The  road  was  such  that  there  were  great  and  wide 
plains,  so  that  the  Gautlanders  and  Northmen  were 
always  in  sight  of  each  other,  unless  where  clumps 


102 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


of  wood  and  bushes  concealed  them  from  each  other 
now  and  then.  The  king  gave  Ogmund  the  cloak, 
and  he  put  it  on.  When  they  came  out  again  upon 
the  plain  ground,  Ogmund  and  his  people  rode  off 
right  across  the  road.  The  Gautlanders,  supposing 
this  must  be  the  king,  rode  all  after  him,  and  the 
king  proceeded  to  the  ships.  Ogmund  escaped  with 
great  difficulty ;  however  he  reached  the  ships  at 
last  in  safety.  King  Magnus  then  sailed  down  the 
river,  and  proceeded  north  to  Viken. 


Chapter  XYII. — Meeting  of  the  Kings  at  the  Gaut  River. 

The  following  summer  a  meeting  of  the  kings  was 
agreed  upon  at  Konghelle  on  the  Gaut  river ;  and 
King  Magnus,  the  Swedish  king  Inge,  and  the 
Danish  king  Eirik  Sveinson  all  met  there,  after  giving 
each  other  safe  conduct  to  the  meeting.  Now  when 
the  Thing  had  sat  down  the  kings  went  forward  upon 
the  plain,  apart  from  the  rest  of  the  people,  and  they 
talked  with  each  other  a  little  while.  Then  they 
returned  to  their  people,  and  a  treaty  was  brought 
about,  by  which  each  should  possess  the  dominions 
his  forefathers  had  held  before  him ;  but  each  should 
make  good  to  his  own  men  the  waste  and  man¬ 
slaughter  suffered  by  them,  and  then  they  should 
agree  between  themselves  about  settling  this  with 
each  other.  King  Magnus  should  marry  King  Inge’s 
daughter  Margaret,  who  afterwards  was  called  Peace¬ 
offering/  This  was  proclaimed  to  the  people ;  and 

*  Icelandic,  Fridkolla. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


103 


thus,  within  a  little  hour,  the  greatest  enemies  were 
made  the  best  of  friends. 

It  was  observed  by  the  people  that  none  had  ever 
seen  men  with  more  of  the  air  of  chiefs  than  these 
had.  King  Inge  was  the  largest  and  stoutest,  and, 
from  his  age,  of  the  most  dignified  appearance.  King 
Magnus  appeared  the  most  gallant  and  brisk,  and 
King  Eirik  the  most  handsome.  But  they  were  all 
handsome  men ;  stout,  gallant,  and  ready  in  speech. 
After  this  was  settled  they  parted. 


Chapter  XYIII. — King  Magnus  s  Marriage. 

King  Magnus  got  Margaret,  King  Inge’s  daughter, 
as  above  related ;  and  she  was  sent  from  Svithiod  to 
Norway  with  an  honourable  retinue.  King  Magnus 
had  some  children  before,  whose  names  shall  here  be 
given.  The  one  of  his  sons  who  was  of  a  mean 
mother  was  called  Eystein  ;  the  other,  who  was  a  year 
younger,  was  called  Sigurd,  and  his  mother’s  name 
was  Thora.  Olaf  was  the  name  of  a  third  son,  who 
was  much  younger  than  the  two  first  mentioned,  and 
whose  mother  was  Sigrid,  a  daughter  of  Saxe  of 
Vik,  who  was  a  respectable  man  in  the  Throndhjem 
country  ;  she  was  the  king’s  concubine.  People  say 
that  when  King  Magnus  came  home  from  his  viking 
cruise  to  the  Western  countries,  he  and  many  of  his 
people  brought  with  them  a  great  deal  of  the  habits 
and  fashion  of  clothing  of  those  western  parts.  They 
went  about  on  the  streets  with  bare  legs,  and  had 


1 04 


CHEONICLE  OF  THE 


short  kirtles  and  over-cloaks ;  *  and  therefore  his 
men  called  him  Magnus  Barefoot  or  Bareleg.  Some 
called  him  Magnus  the  Tall,  others  Magnus  the  Strife- 
lover.  He  was  distinguished  among  other  men  by 
his  tall  stature.  The  mark  of  his  height  is  put  down 
in  Mary  church,  in  the  merchant  town  of  Nidaros, 
which  King  Harald  built.  In  the  northern  door 
there  were  cut  into  the  wall  three  crosses, —  one  for 
Harald’s  stature,  one  for  Olaf’s,  and  one  for  Magnus’s; 
and  which  crosses  each  of  them  could  with  the  greatest 
ease  kiss.  The  upper  was  Harald’s  cross ;  the  lowest 
was  Magnus’s ;  and  Olaf’s  was  in  the  middle,  about 
equally  distant  from  both. 

It  is  said  that  Magnus  composed  the  following 
verses  about  the  emperor’s  daughter  : — 

“  Tlie  ring  of  arms  where  blue  swords  gleam, 

The  battle-shout,  the  eagle’s  scream, 

The  joy  of  war,  no  more  can  please  : 

Matilda  *  is  far  o’er  the  seas. 

My  sword  may  break,  my  shield  be  cleft, 

Of  land  or  life  I  may  be  reft ; 

Yet  I  could  sleep,  but  for  one  care, — 

One,  o’er  the  seas,  with  light-brown  hair.” 

He  also  composed  the  following  : — 

“  The  time  that  breeds  delay  feels  long, 

The  skald  feels  weary  of  his  song  ; 

What  sweetens,  brightens,  eases  life  ? 

’Tis  a  sweet-smiling  lovely  wife. 

My  time  feels  long  in  Thing  affairs, 

In  Things  my  loved  one  ne’er  appears. 

The  folk  full-dressed,  while  I  am  sad, 

Talk  and  oppose — can  I  be  glad  ?  ” 

This  pioves  that  the  kilt  or  philibeg  and  plaid  were  used  in  the 
Western  countries,  the  Hebudes,  in  1099. — L. 

+  This  Matilda  is  considered  by  Torfseus  {Hist.  Now.,  vol.  iii.  lib.  7. 
5.  c.  p.  439)  to  have  been  a  daughter  of  the  emperor  Henry  IV.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


105 


When  King  Magnus  heard  the  friendly  words  the 
emperors  daughter  had  spoken  about  him, — that 
she  had  said  such  a  man  as  King  Magnus  was 
appeared  to  her  an  excellent  man,  he  composed  the 
following : — 

“  The  lover  hears, — across  the  sea, 

A  favouring  word  was  breathed  to  me. 

The  lovely  one  with  light-brown  hair 
May  trust  her  thoughts  to  senseless  air ; 

Her  thoughts  will  find  like  thoughts  in  me  ; 

And  though  my  love  I  cannot  see, 

Affection’s  thoughts  fly  in  the  wind, 

And  meet  each  other,  true  and  kind.” 

Chapter  XIX. — Of  the  Quarrel  of  King  Magnus  and 

Skopte  Ogmundson. 

Skopte  Ogmundson  came  into  variance  with  King 
Magnus,  and  they  quarrelled  about  the  inheritance 
of  a  deceased  person  which  Skopte  retained  ;  but  the 
king  demanded  it  with  so  much  earnestness,  that  it 
had  a  dangerous  appearance.  Many  meetings  were 
held  about  the  affair,  and  Skopte  took  the  resolution 
that  he  and  his  son  should  never  put  themselves  into 
the  king’s  power  at  the  same  time  ;  and  besides  there 
was  no  necessity  to  do  so.  When  Skopte  was  with 
the  king  he  represented  to  him  that  there  was  rela¬ 
tionship  between  the  king  and  him  ;  and  also  that  he, 
Skopte,  had  always  been  the  king’s  friend,  and  his 
father’s  likewise,  and  that  their  friendship  had  never 
been  shaken.  He  added,  “  People  might  know  that 
I  have  sense  enough  not  to  hold  a  strife,  sire,  with 
you,  if  I  was  wrong  in  what  I  asked ;  but  it  is  in- 


io6 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


herited  from  my  ancestors  to  defend  my  rights  against 
any  man,  without  distinction  of  persons.”  The  king 
was  just  the  same  on  this  point,  and  his  resolution 
was  by  no  means  softened  by  such  a  speech.  Then 
Skopte  went  home. 

Chapter  XX. — Fin  Skoptason' s  Proceedings. 

Then  Fin  Skoptason  went  to  the  king,  spoke 
with  him,  and  entreated  him  to  render  justice  to  the 
father  and  son  in  this  business.  The  king  answers 
angrily  and  sharply.  Then  said  Fin,  “I  expected 
something  else,  sire,  from  you,  than  that  you  would 
use  the  law’s  vexations  against  me  when  I  took  my 
seat  in  Kvaldinsey  Island,  which  few  of  your  other 
friends  would  do ;  as  they  said,  what  was  true,  that 
those  who  were  left  there  were  deserted  and  doomed 
to  death,  if  King  Inge  had  not  shown  greater 
generosity  to  us  than  you  did ;  although  many  con¬ 
sider  that  wTe  brought  shame  and  disgrace  only 
from  thence.”  The  king  was  not  to  be  moved  by 
this  speech,  and  Fin  returned  home. 

Chapter  XXI. — Ogmund  Skoptason’ s  Proceedings. 

Then  came  Ogmund  Skoptason  to  the  king ;  and 
when  he  came  before  him  he  produced  his  errand, 
and  begged  the  king  to  do  what  was  right  and 
proper  towards  him  and  his  father.  The  king  in¬ 
sisted  that  the  right  was  on  his  side,  and  said  they 
were  “particularly  impudent.” 

Then  said  Ogmund,  “  It  is  a  very  easy  thing  for 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


107 


thee,  having  the  power,  to  do  me  and  my  father  in¬ 
justice  ;  and  I  must  say  the  old  proverb  is  true,  that 
one  whose  life  you  save  gives  none,  or  a  very  bad 
return.  This  I  shall  add,  that  never  again  shall  I 
come  into  thy  service  ;  nor  my  father,  if  I  can  help 
it.”  Then  Ogmund  went  home,  and  they  never  saw 
each  other  again. 


Chapter  XXII. — Skopte  Ogmundson s  Voyage  Abroach 

The  spring  after,  Skopte  Ogmundson  made  ready 
to  travel  out  of  the  country.  They  had  five  long- 
ships  all  well  equipped.  His  sons,  Ogmund,  Fin, 
and  Thord,  accompanied  him  on  this  journey.  It  was 
very  late  before  they  were  ready,  and  in  autumn 
they  went  over  to  Flanders,  and  wintered  there. 
Early  in  spring  they  sailed  westward  to  Valland,  and 
stayed  there  all  summer.  Then  they  sailed  further, 
and  through  Norvasund ; #  and  came  in  autumn  to 
Rome,  where  Skopte  died.  All,  both  father  and  sons, 
died  on  this  journey.  Thord,  who  died  in  Sicily, 
lived  the  longest.  It  is  a  common  saying  among 
the  people,  that  Skopte  was  the  first  Northman  who 
sailed  through  Norvasund  ;  and  this  voyage  was  much 
celebrated. 

Chapter  XXIII. — Miracle  of  King  Olaf  the  Saint  at  a  Fire. 

It  happened  once  in  the  merchant  town  (Nidaros), 
where  King  Olaf  reposes,  that  there  broke  out  a 
fire  in  the  town  which  spread  around.  Then  Olaf  s 

*  Norvasund,— the  Straits  of  Gibraltar. 


io8 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


shrine  was  taken  out  of  the  church,  and  set  up  oppo¬ 
site  the  fire.  Thereupon  came  a  crazy  foolish  man, 
struck  the  shrine,  threatened  the  holy  saint,  and  said 
all  must  be  consumed  by  the  flames,  both  churches 
and  other  houses,  if  he  did  not  save  them  by  his 
prayers.  Now  the  burning  of  the  church  did  cease, 
by  the  help  of  Almighty  God ;  but  the  insane  man 
got  sore  eyes  on  the  following  night,  and  he  lay 
there  until  King  Olaf  entreated  God  Almighty  to 
be  merciful  to  him ;  after  which  he  recovered  in 
the  same  church. 

Chapter  XXIV. — Miracle  of  King  Olaf  the  Saint  on  a 

Lame  Woman. 

It  happened  once  in  the  merchant  town  that  a 
woman  was  brought  to  the  place  where  the  holy 
King  Olaf  reposes.  She  was  so  miserably  shaped, 
that  she  was  altogether  crumpled  up  ;  so  that  both 
her  feet  lay  in  a  circle  against  her  loins.  But  as  she 
was  diligent  in  her  prayers,  often  weeping  and  making 
vows  to  King  Olaf,  he  cured  her  great  infirmities  ; 
so  that  feet,  legs,  and  other  limbs  straightened,  and 
every  limb  and  part  came  to  the  right  use  for  which 
they  were  made.  Before  she  could  not  creep  there, 
and  now  she  went  away  active  and  brisk  to  her 
family  and  home. 


Chapter  XXY. —  War  in  Ireland. 

When  King  Magnus  had  been  nine  years  king  of 
Norway  [1094-1102],  he  equipped  himself  to  go  out 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


109 


of  the  country  with  a  great  force.  He  sailed  out  into 
the  West  sea  with  the  finest  men  who  could  be  got  in 
Norway.  All  the  powerful  men  of  the  country  fol¬ 
lowed  him ;  such  as  Sigurd  Hranason,  Vidkun  Jon- 
son,  Dag  Eilifson,  Serk  of  Sogn,  Eyvind  Olboge  the 
king’s  marshal,  Ulf  Hranason,  brother  of  Sigurd,  and 
many  other  great  men.  With  all  this  armament  the 
king  sailed  west  to  the  Orkney  Islands,  from  whence 
he  took  with  him  Earl  Erlend’s  sons,  Magnus  and 
Erling,  and  then  sailed  to  the  southern  Hebudes. 
But  as  he  lay  under  the  Scotch  land,  Magnus  Erlend- 
son#  ran  away  in  the  night  from  the  king’s  ship, 
swam  to  the  shore,  escaped  into  the  woods,  and 
came  at  last  to  the  Scotch  king’s  court.  King 
Magnus  sailed  to  Ireland  with  his  fleet,  and  plun¬ 
dered  there.  King  Myrkjartan  came  to  his  assist¬ 
ance,  and  they  conquered  a  great  part  of  the  country, 
both  Dublin  and  Dyflinnarskire  (Dublin  shire). 
King  Magnus  was  in  winter  [1 103]  up  in  Connaught 
with  King  Myrkjartan,  but  set  men  to  defend  the 
country  he  had  taken.  Towards  spring  both  kings 
went  westward  with  their  army  all  the  way  to  Ulster, t 
where  they  had  many  battles,  subdued  the  country, 
and  had  conquered  the  greatest  part  of  Ulster  when 
Myrkjartan  J  returned  home  to  Connaught.  § 

*  This  was  Saint  Magnus,  earl  of  Orkney,  to  whom  the  cathedral  of 
Kirkwall  is  dedicated,  and  whose  miracles  are  equal  to  Saint  Olaf’s. — L. 

+  Uladstir  is  the  Icelandic  for  Ulster. 

t  The  Irish  for  Myrkjartan  is  Moriartak. 

§  Kunnaktir  is  the  Icelandic  for  Connaught. 


no 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  XXVI. — King  Magnus's  Foray  on  the  Land. 

King  Magnus  rigged  his  ships,  and  intended  return¬ 
ing  to  Norway,  but  set  his  men  to  defend  the  country 
of  Dublin.  He  lay  at  Ulster  ready  for  sea  with  his 
whole  fleet.  As  they  thought  they  needed  cattle  for 
ship-provision,  King  Magnus  sent  a  message  to  King 
Myrkjartan,  telling  him  to  send  some  cattle  for 
slaughter ;  and  appointed  the  day  before  Bartho¬ 
lomew’s  day  as  the  day  they  should  arrive,  if  the 
messengers  reached  him  in  safety  ;  but  the  cattle  had 
not  made  their  appearance  the  evening  before  Bar¬ 
tholomew’s  mass.  On  the  mass-day  itself,  when  the 
sun  rose  in  the  sky,  King  Magnus  went  on  shore 
himself  with  the  greater  part  of  his  men,  to  look  after 
his  people,  and  to  carry  off  cattle  from  the  coast. 
The  weather  was  calm,  the  sun  shone,  and  the  road 
lay  through  mires  and  mosses,  and  there  were  paths 
cut  through  ;  but  there  was  brushwood  on  each  side 
of  the  road.  When  they  came  somewhat  farther, 
they  reached  a  height  from  which  they  had  a  wide 
view.  They  saw  from  it  a  great  dust  rising  up  the 
country,  as  of  horsemen,  and  they  said  to  each  other 
“That  must  be  the  Irish  army;”  but  others  said, 
“  It  was  their  own  men  returning  with  the  cattle.” 
They  halted  there ;  and  Eyvind  Olboge  said,  “  How, 
sire,  do  you  intend  to  direct  the  march  ?  The  men 
think  we  are  advancing  imprudently.  You  know 
the  Irish  are  treacherous ;  think,  therefore,  of  a  good 
counsel  for  your  men.”  Then  the  king  said,  “  Let 
us  draw  up  our  men,  and  be  ready,  if  there  be 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


hi 


treachery.”  This  was  done,  and  the  king  and  Eyvind 
went  before  the  line.  King  Magnus  had  a  helmet 
on  his  head ;  a  red  shield,  in  which  was  inlaid  a 
gilded  lion ;  and  was  girt  with  the  sword  Legbit, 
of  which  the  hilt  was  of  tooth  (ivory),  and  the  hand¬ 
grip  wound  about  with  gold  thread ;  and  the  sword 
was  extremely  sharp.  In  his  hand  he  had  a  short 
spear,  and  a  red  silk  short  cloak  over  his  coat,  on 
which,  both  before  and  behind,  was  embroidered  a 
lion  in  yellow  silk ;  and  all  men  acknowledged  that 
they  never  had  seen  a  brisker,  statelier  man.  Eyvind 
had  also  a  red  silk  cloak  like  the  king’s ;  and  he  also 
was  a  stout,  handsome,  warlike  man. 


Chapter  XXYII. — Fall  of  King  Magnus. 

When  the  dust-cloud  approached  nearer  they  knew 
their  own  men,  who  were  driving  the  cattle.  The 
Irish  king  had  been  faithful  to  the  promises  he 
had  given  the  king,  and  had  sent  them.  There¬ 
upon  they  all  turned  towards  the  ships,  and  it  was 
mid-day.  When  they  came  to  the  mires  they 
went  but  slowly  over  the  boggy  places  ;  and  then 
the  Irish  started  up  on  every  side  against  them  from 
every  bushy  point  of  land,  and  the  battle  began 
instantly.  The  Northmen  were  going  divided  in 
various  heaps,  so  that  many  of  them  fell. 

Then  said  Eyvind  to  the  king,  “  Unfortunate  is 
this  march  to  our  people,  and  we  must  instantly 
hit  upon  some  good  plan.” 

The  king  answered,  “  Call  all  the  men  together 


1 12 


4  CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


with  the  war-horns  under  the  banner,  and  the  men 
who  are  here  shall  make  a  rampart  with  their  shields, 
and  thus  we  will  retreat  backwards  out  of  the  mires  ; 
and  we  will  clear  ourselves  fast  enough  when  we  get 
upon  firm  ground.” 

The  Irish  shot  boldly  ;  and  although  they  fell  in 
crowds,  there  came  always  two  in  the  place  of  one. 
Now  when  the  king  had  come  to  the  nearest  ditch 
there  was  a  very  difficult  crossing,  and  few  places 
were  passable ;  so  that  many  Northmen  fell  there. 
Then  the  king  called  to  his  lenderman  Thorgrim 
Skinhufa,  who  was  an  Upland  man,  and  ordered  him 
to  go  over  the  ditch  with  his  division.  “We  shall 
defend  you,”  said  he,  “in  the  meantime,  so  that 
no  harm  shall  come  to  you.  Go  out  then  to  those 
holms,  and  shoot  at  them  from  thence ;  for  ye  are 
good  bowmen.” 

When  Thorgrim  and  his  men  came  over  the  ditch 
they  cast  their  shields  behind  their  backs,  and  set 
off  to  the  ships. 

When  the  king  saw  this,  he  said,  “Thou  art  de¬ 
serting  thy  king  in  an  unmanly  way.  I  was  foolish 
in  making  thee  a  lenderman,  and  driving  Sigurd 
Hund  out  of  the  country ;  for  never  would  he  have 
behaved  so.” 

King  Magnus  received  a  wound,  being  pierced  by 
a  spear  through  both  thighs  above  the  knees.  The 
king  laid  hold  of  the  shaft  between  his  legs,  broke 
the  spear  in  two,  and  said,  “  Thus  we  break  spear- 
shafts,  my  lads;  let  us  go  briskly  on.  Nothing 
hurts  me.”  A  little  after  King  Magnus  was  struck 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


ii  3 

in  the  neck  with  an  Irish  axe,  and  this  was  his 
death-wound.  Then  those  who  were  behind  fled. 
Vidkun  Jonson  instantly  killed  the  man  who  had 
given  the  king  his  death-wound,  and  fled,  after 
having  received  three  wounds ;  but  brought  the 
kings  banner  and  the  sword  Legbit  to  the  ships. 
Vidkun  was  the  last  man  who  fled  ;  the  other  next 
to  him  was  Sigurd  Hranason,  and  the  third  before 
him  Dag  Eilifson.  There  fell  with  King  Magnus, 
Eyvind  Olboge,  Ulf  Hranason,  and  many  other  great 
people.  Many  of  the  Northmen  fell,  but  many  more 
of  the  Irish.  The  Northmen  who  escaped  sailed  away 
immediately  in  autumn.  Erling,  Earl  Erlend’s  *  son, 
fell  with  King  Magnus  in  Ireland  ;  but  the  men 
who  fled  from  Ireland  came  to  the  Orkney  Islands. 
Now  when  King  Sigurd  heard  that  his  father  had 
fallen,  he  set  off  immediately,  leaving  the  Irish 
king’s  daughter  behind,  and  proceeded  in  autumn 
with  the  whole  fleet  directly  to  Norway. 


Chapter  XXVIII.— Of  King  Magnus  and  Vidkun  Jonson. 


King  Magnus  was  ten  years  king  of  Norway  [1094- 
1103],  and  in  his  days  there  was  good  peace  kept 
within  the  country ;  but  the  people  were  sorely  op¬ 
pressed  with  levies.  King  Magnus  was  beloved  by 
his  men,  but  the  bondes  thought  him  harsh.  The 
words  have  been  transmitted  from  him  that  he  said 
when  his  friends  observed  that  he  proceeded  in- 


Erlend,  the  earl  of  Orkney,  who  was  taken  in  the  former  expedition, 
and  died  in  Throndhjem. — L. 


VOL.  IV. 


1. 


II 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


1 14 

cautiously  when  he  was  on  his  expeditions  abroad, — 
“That  kings  are  made  for  honour,  not  for  long  life.” 
King  Magnus  was  nearly  thirty  years  of  age  when 
he  fell.  Vidkun  did  not  fly  until  he  had  killed  the 
man  who  gave  the  king  his  mortal  wound,  and  for 
this  cause  King  Magnus’s  sons  had  him  in  the  most 
affectionate  regard. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


”5 


XII. 

SAGA  OF  SIGURD  THE  CRUSADER  AND  HIS 
BROTHERS  EYSTEIN  AND  OLAF. 

PRELIMINARY  REMARKS. 

$ 

Agrip,  Fagrslcinna,  and  Morhinskinna  more  or  less  com¬ 
plete  the  story  of  the  sons  of  Magnus.  They  contain  some 
things  omitted  by  Snorre,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  some  facts 
related  by  Snorre  are  not  found  in  the  above  sources. 

Thjodrek  the  Monk  tells  of  Sigurd  that  he  made  a 
journey  to  Jerusalem,  conquered  many  heathen  cities,  and 
among  them  Sidon ;  that  he  captured  a  cave  defended  by 
robbers,  received  presents  from  Baldwin,  returned  to  Nor¬ 
way  in  Eystein’s  lifetime,  and  became  insane,  as  a  result, 
as  some  say,  of  a  poisonous  drink. 

The  three  brothers  became  kings  in  the  year  1103.  Olaf 
died  1 1 15,  Eystein  1122  or  1123,  and  Sigurd  1130. 

Skalds  quoted  in  this  saga  are :  Thorarin  Stutfeld,  Einar 
Skulason,  Haldor  Skvaldre,  and  Arne  Fjoruskeif. 


Chapter  I. — Beginning  of  the  Reign  of  King  Magnus's  Sons. 

After  King  Magnus  Barefoot’s  fall,  his  sons,  Eystein, 
Sigurd,  and  Olaf,  took  the  kingdom  of  Norway. 
Eystein  got  the  northern,  and  Sigurd  the  southern 
part  of  the  country.  King  Olaf  was  then  four  or  five 
years  old,  and  the  third  part  of  the  country  which  he 
had  was  under  the  management  of  his  two  brothers. 
King  Sigurd  was  chosen  king  when  he  was  thirteen 
or  fourteen  years  old,  and  Eystein  was  a  year  older. 
King  Sigurd  left  west  of  the  sea  the  Irish  king’s 


1 1 6 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


daughter.  When  King  Magnus’s  sons  were  chosen 
kings,  the  men  who  had  followed  Skopte  Ogmundson 
returned  home.  Some  had  been  to  Jerusalem,  some 
to  Constantinople  ;  and  there  they  had  made  them¬ 
selves  renowned,  and  they  had  many  kinds  of  novel¬ 
ties  to  talk  about.  By  these  extraordinary  tidings 
many  men  in  Norway  were  incited  to  the  same  ex¬ 
pedition  ;  and  it  was  also  told  that  the  Northmen 
who  liked  to  go  into  the  military  service  at  Con¬ 
stantinople  found  many  opportunities  of  getting  pro¬ 
perty.  Then  these  Northmen  desired  much  that  one 
of  the  two  kings,  either  Eystein  or  Sigurd,  should  go 
as  commander  of  the  troop  which  was  preparing  for 
this  expedition.  The  kings  agreed  to  this,  and  carried 
on  the  equipment  at  their  common  expense.  Many 
great  men,  both  of  the  lendermen  and  bondes,  took 
part  in  this  enterprise ;  and  when  all  was  ready  for 
the  journey  it  was  determined  that  Sigurd  should 
go,  and  Eystein,  in  the  meantime,  should  rule  the 
kingdom  upon  their  joint  account. 


Chapter  II. —  Of  the  Earls  of  Orkney. 

A  year  or  two  after  King  Magnus  Barefoot’s  fall, 
Hakon,  a  son  of  Earl  Paul,  came  from  Orkney.  The 
kings  gave  him  the  earldom  and  government  of  the 
Orkney  Islands,  as  the  earls  before  him,  his  father 
Paul  or  his  uncle  Erlend,  had  possessed  it ;  and  Earl 
Hakon  then  sailed  back  immediately  to  Orkney. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


n  7 


Chapter  III. — King  Sigurd's  Journey  out  of  the  Country . 

Four  years  after  the  fall  of  King  Magnus  [1107], 
King  Sigurd  sailed  with  his  people  from  Norway. 
He  had  then  sixty  ships.  So  says  Thorarin  Stut- 
feld  :* — 

“A  young  king  just  and  kind, 

People  of  loyal  mind  : 

Such  brave  men  soon  agree,  — 

To  distant  lands  they  sail  with  glee. 

To  the  distant  Holy  Land 
A  brave  and  pious  band, 

Magnificent  and  gay, 

In  sixty  long-ships  glide  away.” 

King  Sigurd  sailed  in  autumn  to  England,  where 
Henry, t  son  of  William  the  Bastard,  was  then  king, 
and  Sigurd  remained  with  him  all  winter.  So  says 
Einar  Skulason  {  : — 

“  The  king  is  on  the  waves  ! 

The  storm  he  boldly  braves. 

His  ocean-steed, 

With  winged  speed, 

O’er  the  white-flashing  surges, 

To  England’s  coast  he  urges  ; 

And  there  he  stays  the  winter  o’er  : 

More  gallant  king  ne’er  trod  that  shore.” 


Chapter  IV. — Of  King  Sigurd's  Journey. 

In  spring  King  Sigurd  and  his  fleet  sailed  west¬ 
ward  to  Valland  [no8],§  and  in  autumn  came  to 

*  Of  Thorarin  Stutfeld  (Shortcoat)  see  chapter  29. 

+  Henry  I.  of  England,  1100-1134. 

X  Einar  Skulason  was  an  Icelander  of  Egil  Skallagrimson’s  family. 
He  is  the  author  of  many  celebrated  poems,  the  most  renowned  one 
being  Geisli  (the  Sunbeam),  written  in  1152  in  honour  of  Saint  Olaf. 

§  Valland, — the  west  of  France. — L. 


1 1 8 


CHKONICLE  OF  THE 


Galicia,*  where  he  stayed  the  second  winter  [1109]. 
So  says  Einar  Skulason  : — 

“  Our  king,  whose  land  so  wide 
No  kingdom  stands  beside, 

In  Jacob’s  land  +  next  winter  spent, 

On  holy  things  intent ; 

And  I  have  heard  the  royal  youth 
Cut  off  an  earl  who  swerved  from  truth. 

Our  brave  king  will  endure  no  ill, — 

The  hawks  with  him  will  get  their  fill.” 

It  went  thus  : — The  earl  who  ruled  over  the  land 
made  an  agreement  with  King  Sigurd,  that  he  should 
provide  King  Sigurd  and  his  men  a  market  at  which 
they  could  purchase  victuals  all  the  winter  ;  but  this 
he  did  not  fulfil  longer  than  to  about  Yule.  It  began 
then  to  be  difficult  to  get  food  and  necessaries,  for  it  is 
a  poor  barren  land.  Then  King  Sigurd  with  a  great 
body  of  men  went  against  a  castle  which  belonged  to 
the  earl ;  and  the  earl  fled  from  it,  having  but  few 
people.  King  Sigurd  took  there  a  great  deal  of 
victuals  and  of  other  booty,  which  he  put  on  board 
of  his  ships,  and  then  made  ready  and  proceeded 
westward  to  Spain.  It  so  fell  out,  as  the  king  was 
sailing  past  Spain,  that  some  vikings  who  were  cruis¬ 
ing  for  plunder  met  him  with  a  fleet  of  galleys,  and 
King  Sigurd  attacked  them.  This  was  his  first  battle 
with  heathen  men ;  and  he  won  it,  and  took  eight 
galleys  from  them.  So  says  Haldor  Skvaldre  J  : — 


*  Galizuland, — the  province  of  Galicia,  in  the  north-west  of  Spain. — L. 
t  Jacob’s  land.  Galicia  is  called  Jacob’s  land  by  the  skald,  from  Saint 
James  of  Compostella  :  the  apostle  James,  whose  relics  are  held  in  venera¬ 
tion  at  Compostella  in  Spain.  Portugal  appears  to  have  been  reckoned 
part  of  Spain,  and  Galicia  a  distinct  country. — L. 

i  Skvaldre  means  the  talkative  one,  the  chatterbox.  Nothing  is  known 
of  Haldor’s  life. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


1 19 


“  Bold  vikings,  not  slow 
To  tlie  death -fray  to  go, 

Meet  our  Norse  king  by  chance, 
And  their  galleys  advance. 

The  bold  vikings  lost 
Many  a  man  of  their  host, 

And  eight  galleys  too, 

With  cargo  and  crew.” 


Thereafter  King  Sigurd  sailed  against  a  castle 
called  Sintre,*  and  fought  another  battle.  This  castle 
is  in  Spain,  and  was  occupied  by  many  heathens,  who 
from  thence  plundered  Christian  people.  King 
Sigurd  took  the  castle,  and  killed  every  man  in  it, 
because  they  refused  to  be  baptized  ;  and  he  got 
there  an  immense  booty.  So  says  ITaldor  Skvaldre : — 

“  From  Spain  I  have  much  news  to  tell 
Of  what  our  generous  king  befell. 

And  first  he  routs  tlie  viking  crew, 

At  Cintra  next  the  heathens  slew  ; 

The  men  he  treated  as  God’s  foes, 

Who  dared  the  true  faith  to  oppose. 

No  man  he  spared  who  would  not  take 
The  Christian  faith  for  Jesus’  sake.” 


Chapter  V. — Lisbon  taken. 

After  this  King  Sigurd  sailed  with  his  fleet  to 
Lisbon,  which  is  a  great  city  in  Spain,  half  Christian 
and  half  heathen  ;  for  there  lies  the  division  between 
Christian  Spain  and  heathen  Spain, t  and  all  the 
districts  which  lie  west  of  the  city  are  occupied  by 
heathens.  There  King  Sigurd  had  his  third  battle 


*  Sintre,  now  Cintra,  in  Portugal ;  then  reckoned  part  of  Spain. — L. 
t  The  heathen  Spain  would  be  the  parts  of  the  Peninsula  occupied 
by  the  Moors. — L. 


120 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


with  the  heathens,  and  gained  the  victory,  and  with 
it  a  great  booty.  So  says  Haldor  Skvaldre  : — 

“  The  son  of  kings  on  Lisbon’s  plains 
A  third  and  bloody  battle  gains. 

He  and  his  Norsemen  boldly  land, 

Running  their  stout  ships  on  the  strand.” 


Then  King  Sigurd  sailed  westwards  along  heathen 
Spain,  and  brought  up  at  a  town  called  Alkasse  ;  * 
and  here  he  had  his  fourth  battle  with  the  heathens, 
and  took  the  town,  and  killed  so  many  people  that 
the  town  was  left  empty.  They  got  there  also  im¬ 
mense  booty.  So  says  Haldor  Skvaldre  : — 

“  A  fourth  great  battle,  I  am  told, 

Our  Norse  king  and  hi§  people  hold 
At  Alkasse  ;  and  here  again 
The  victory  fell  to  our  Norsemen.” 

And  also  this  verse  : — 

“  I  heard  that  through  the  town  he  went, 

And  heathen  widows’  wild  lament 
Resounded  in  the  empty  halls  ; 

For  every  townsman  flies  or  falls.” 


Chapter  VI. — Battle  in  the  Island  Forminterra. 

King  Sigurd  then  proceeded  on  his  voyage,  and 
came  to  Norfasund;  t  and  in  the  sound  he  was  met 

There  is  some  difficulty  in  finding  a  town  corresponding  to  this 
Alkasse.  It  cannot  be  Alkassir  in  Fez  in  Africa,  as  some  have  supposed, 
as  the  context  does  not  agree  with  it ;  nor  with  Algesiras,  which  is 
within  the  Straits  of  Gibraltar  (Norfasund),  and  it  would  have  been 
so  described.  Alcasser  de  Sal  lies  too  far  inland  to  have  been  the  place. 
Lady  Grosvenor,  in  her  Yacht  Voyage ,  1841,  speaks  of  a  Moorish  palace 
near  Seville,  called  Alcasir,  which  would  correspond  best  with  the  saga 
account.  Alcazar  is  a  common  appellation  in  Spanish  meaning  castle.— L. 

+  Norfasund,—  the  Straits  of  Gibraltar;  so  called  from°Norfe,  the 
first  Norse  viking  who  passed  through  it.—  L. 


KINGS  OF  NOKWAY. 


1 2  I 


by  a  large  viking  force,  and  the  king  gave  them  battle  : 
and  this  was  his  fifth  engagement  with  heathens 
since  the  time  he  left  Norway.  He  gained  the  vic¬ 
tory  here  also.  So  says  Haldor  Skvaldre  : — 

“  Ye  moistened  your  dry  swords  with  blood, 

As  through  Norfasund  ye  stood  ; 

The  screaming  raven  got  a  feast, 

As  ye  sailed  onward  to  the  East.” 

King  Sigurd  then  sailed  eastward  along  the  coast 
of  Serkland,*  and  came  to  an  island  there  called  For- 
minterra.  There  a  great  many  heathen  Moors  had 
taken  up  their  dwelling  in  a  cave,  and  had  built  a 
strong  stone  wall  before  its  mouth.  They  harried  the 
country  all  round,  and  carried  all  their  booty  to  their 
cave.  King  Sigurd  landed  on  this  island,  and  went 
to  the  cave  ;  but  it  lay  in  a  precipice,  and  there  was 
a  high  winding  path  to  the  stone  wall,  and  the  preci¬ 
pice  above  projected  over  it.  The  heathens  defended 
the  stone  wall,  and  were  not  afraid  of  the  North¬ 
men’s  arms  ;  for  they  could  throw  stones,  or  shoot 
down  upon  the  Northmen  under  their  feet :  neither 
did  the  Northmen,  under  such  circumstances,  dare  to 
mount  up.  The  heathens  took  their  clothes  and 
other  valuable  things,  carried  them  out  upon  the 
wall,  spread  them  out  before  the  Northmen,  shouted, 
and  defied  them,  and  upbraided  them  as  cowards. 
Then  Sigurd  fell  upon  this  plan.  He  had  two  ship’s 
boats,  such  as  we  call  barks,  drawn  up  the  precipice 
right  above  the  mouth  of  the  cave  ;  and  had  thick 

*  Serkland  is  the  Saracen’s  land,  the  North  of  Africa ;  and  the  inha¬ 
bitants  bluemen, — the  Moors. — L. 


122 


CHKONICLE  OF  THE 


ropes  fastened  around  the  stem,  stern,  and  hull  of 
each.  In  these  boats  as  many  men  went  as  could 
find  room,  and  then  the  boats  were  lowered  by  the 
ropes  down  in  front  of  the  mouth  of  the  cave ; 
and  the  men  in  the  boats  shot  with  stones  and 
missiles  into  the  cave,  and  the  heathens  were  thus 
driven  from  the  stone  wall.  Then  Sigurd  with  his 
troops  climbed  up  the  precipice  to  the  foot  of  the 
stone  wall,  which  they  succeeded  in  breaking  down, 
so  that  they  came  into  the  cave.  Now  the  heathens 
fled  within  the  stone  wall  that  was  built  across  the 
cave ;  on  wdiich  the  king  ordered  large  trees  to  be 
brought  to  the  cave,  made  a  great  pile  in  the  mouth 
of  it,  and  set  fire  to  the  wood.  When  the  fire  and 
smoke  got  the  upper  hand,  some  of  the  heathens 
lost  their  lives  in  it ;  some  fled ;  some  fell  by  the 
hands  of  the  Northmen ;  and  part  were  killed,  part 
burned;  and  the  Northmen  made  the  greatest  booty 
they  had  got  on  all  their  expeditions.  So  says  Hal- 
dor  Skvaldre  : — 

“  Forminterra  lay 
In  the  victor’s  way  ; 

His  ships’  stems  fly 
To  victory. 

The  bluemen  there 
Must  fire  bear, 

And  Norsemen’s  steel 
At  their  hearts  feel.” 


And  also  thus  : — 

“  ’Twas  a  feat  of  renown, — 
The  boat  lowered  down, 
With  a  boat’s  crew  brave, 
In  front  of  the  cave  : 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


123 


While  up  the  rock  scaling, 

And  comrades  up  trailing, 

The  Norsemen  gain, 

And  the  bluemen  are  slain.” 

And  also  Thorarin  Stutfeld  says  : — 

“  The  king's  men  up  the  mountain’s  side 
Drag  two  boats  from  the  ocean’s  tide  : 

The  two  boats  lay, 

Like  hill- wolves  grey. 

Now  o’er  the  rock  in  ropes  they’re  swinging 
Well  manned,  and  death  to  bluemen  bringing  : 
They  hang  before 
The  robbers’  door.” 


Chapter  VII. — Of  the  Battles  at  Iviza  and  Manorlc  ( Minorca ). 

Thereafter  King  Sigurd  proceeded  on  his  expedi¬ 
tion,  and  came  to  an  island  called  Iviza  (Ivica),  and 
had  there  his  seventh  battle,  and  gained  a  victory. 
So  says  Haldor  Skvaldre  : — 


“  His  ships  at  Ivica  now  ride, 

The  king’s,  whose  fame  spreads  far  and  wide  ; 

And  here  the  bearers  of  the  shield 
Their  arms  again  in  battle  wield.” 

Thereafter  King  Sigurd  came  to  an  island  called 
Manork  (Minorca),  and  held  there  his  eighth  battle 
with  heathen  men,  and  gained  the  victory.  So  says 
Haldor  Skvaldre : — 

“  On  green  Minorca’s  plains 
The  eighth  battle  now  he  gains  : 

Again  the  heathen  foe 

Falls  at  the  Norse  king’s  blow.” 


124 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  YIII. — Duke,  Roger  made  a  King. 

In  spring  King  Sigurd  came  to  Sicily  [1109],  and 
remained  a  long  time  there.  There  was  then  a  Duke 
Roger  in  Sicily,  who  received  the  king  kindly,  and 
invited  him  to  a  feast.  King  Sigurd  came  to  it  with  a 
great  retinue,  and  was  splendidly  entertained.  Every 
day  Duke  Roger  stood  at  the  company’s  table,  doing 
service  to  the  king ;  but  the  seventh  day  of  the 
feast,  when  the  people  had  come  to  table,  and  had 
wiped  their  hands,  King  Sigurd  took  the  duke  by 
the  hand,  led  him  up  to  the  high-seat,  and  saluted 
him  with  the  title  of  king ;  and  gave  the  right  that 
there  should  be  always  a  king  over  the  dominion 
of  Sicily,  although  before  there  had  only  been  earls 
or  dukes  over  that  country.* 


Chapter  IX. — Of  King  Roger . 

King  Roger  t  of  Sicily  was  a  very  great  king.  He 
won  and  subdued  all  Apulia,  and  many  large  islands 
besides  in  the  Greek  sea ;  and  therefore  he  was 
called  Roger  the  Great.  His  son  was  William  king 
of  Sicily,  who  for  a  long  time  had  great  hostility 
with  the  Emperor  of  Constantiople.  King  William 
had  three  daughters,  but  no  son.  One  of  his 

*  It  appears  to  have  been  the  feudal  idea  of  the  times  that  a  title,  or 
dignity,  must  he  conferred  by  a  superior  in  title  or  dignity  ;  and  thus  a 
wandering  king  from  the  north  could  raise  the  Duke  Roger  of  Sicily  to  the 
kingly  title. — L. 

+  Roger  II.  who  died  1 1 54,  is  here  confounded  with  his  uncle  Roger  of 
Apulia,  who  died  mi. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


125 


daughters  he  married  to  the  Emperor  Henry,  a  son 
of  the  Emperor  Frederik ;  and  their  son  was 
Frederik,  who  for  a  short  time  after  was  Emperor 
of  Rome.  His  second  daughter  was  married  to  the 
Duke  of  Kipr.* * * §  The  third  daughter,  Margaret, 
was  married  to  the  chief  of  the  corsairs ;  but  the 
Emperor  Henry  killed  both  these  brothers-in-law. 
The  daughter  of  Roger  the  Great,  king  of  Sicily, 
was  married  to  the  Emperor  Manuel  of  Constanti¬ 
nople  ;  and  their  son  was  the  Emperor  Ivirjalax.t 


Chapter  X. — King  Sigurd's  Expedition  to  Palestine. 

In  the  summer  [mo]  King  Sigurd  sailed  across 
the  Greek  sea  to  Palestine,  and  thereupon  went  up 
to  Jerusalem,  J  where  he  met  Bald  win, §  king  of 
Palestine.  King  Baldwin  received  him  particularly 
well,  and  rode  with  him  all  the  way  to  the  river 
Jordan,  and  then  back  to  the  city  of  Jerusalem. 
Einar  Skulason  speaks  thus  of  it : — 

“  Good  reason  has  the  skald  to  sing 
The  generous  temper  of  the  king, 

Whose  sea-cold  keel  from  northern  waves 
Ploughs  the  blue  sea  that  green  isles  laves. 

At  Acre  ||  scarce  were  we  made  fast, 

In  holy  ground  our  anchors  cast, 

When  the  king  made  a  joyful  morn 
To  all  who  toil  with  him  had  borne.” 


*  Kipr — Cyprus. — L. 

t  Kirialax.  Kuriou  Alexou — the  Emperor  Alexis  Comnenis. — L. 

X  Jerusalem,  Jorsalaborg. 

§  Baldwin  I.  1100-1118. 

II  According  to  other  authorities  Sigurd  did  not  land  at  Acre,  but  at 
Ascalon,  in  August  1110. 


126 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


And  again  he  made  these  lines  : — 

“  To  Jerusalem  lie  came, 

He  who  loves  war’s  noble  game, 

(The  skald  no  greater  monarch  finds 
Beneath  the  heaven’s  wide  hall  of  winds). 

All  sin  and  evil  from  him  flings 
In  Jordan’s  wave  :  for  all  his  sins 
(Which  all  must  praise)  he  pardon  wins.” 

King  Sigurd  stayed  a  long  time  in  the  land  of 
Jerusalem  (Jorsalaland)  in  autumn,  and  in  the  be¬ 
ginning  of  winter. 

Chapter  XI. — Sidon  taken. 

King  Baldwin  made  a  magnificent  feast  for  King 
Sigurd  and  many  of  his  people,  and  gave  him  many 
holy  relics.  By  the  orders  of  King  Baldwin  and 
the  patriarch,  there  was  taken  a  splinter  off  the  holy 
cross ;  and  on  this  holy  relic  both  made  oath,  that 
this  wood  was  of  the  holy  cross  upon  which  God 
Himself  had  been  tortured.  Then  this  holy  relic 
was  given  to  King  Sigurd ;  with  the  condition  that 
he,  and  twelve  other  men  with  him,  should  swear  to 
promote  Christianity  with  all  his  power,  and  erect 
an  archbishop’s  seat  in  Norway  if  he  could  ;  and  also 
that  the  cross  should  be  kept  where  the  holy  King 
Olaf  reposed,  and  that  he  should  introduce  tithes, 
and  also  pay  them  himself.  After  this  King  Sigurd 
returned  to  his  ships  at  Acre;*  and  then  King 
Baldwin  prepared  to  go  to  Syria,  to  a  heathen  town 
called  Saet.t  On  this  expedition  King  Sigurd  ac- 

*  Acre,  Akrsborg. 

t  Saet,  that  is,  Sidon  or  Saida.  The  city  fell  into  the  hands  of  the 
Christians,  December  19,  mo. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


127 


companied  him,  and  after  the  kings  had  besieged  the 
town  some  time  it  surrendered,  and  they  took  posses¬ 
sion  of  it,  and  of  a  great  treasure  of  money ;  and 
their  men  found  other  booty.  King  Sigurd  made  a 
present  of  his  share  to  King  Baldwin.  So  says 
Haldor  Skvaldre : — 

“  He  who  for  wolves  provides  the  feast 
Seized  on  the  city  in  the  East, 

The  heathen  nest ;  and  honour  drew, 

And  gold  to  give,  from  those  he  slew.” 


Einar  Skulason  also  tells  of  it : — 

“  The  Norsemen’s  king,  the  skalds  relate, 
Has  ta’en  the  heathen  town  of  Saet : 

The  slinging  engine  with  dread  noise 
Gables  and  roofs  with  stones  destroys. 

The  town  wall  totters  too, — it  falls  ; 

The  Norsemen  mount  the  blackened  walls. 
He  who  stains  red  the  raven’s  bill 
Has  won, — the  town  lies  at  his  will.” 


Thereafter  King  Sigurd  went  to  his  ships,  and 
made  ready  to  leave  Palestine.  They  sailed  north  to 
the  island  Cyprus ;  and  King  Sigurd  stayed  there 
a  while,  and  then  went  to  the  Greek  country,  and 
came  to  the  land  with  all  his  fleet  at  Engilsnes.# 
Here  he  lay  still  for  a  fortnight,  although  every  day 
it  blew  a  breeze  for  going  before  the  wind  to  the 
north ;  but  Sigurd  would  wait  a  side  wind,  so  that 
the  sails  might  stretch  fore  and  aft  in  the  ship  :  for 
in  all  his  sails  there  was  silk  joined  in,  before  and 
behind  in  the  sail,  and  neither  those  before  nor 

*  Engilsnes, — supposed  to  be  the  ness  at  the  river  iEgos,  called 
zEgisnes  in  the  Orkneyinga  Saga,  within  the  Dardanelles  ;  not  Cape 
Saint  Angelo  in  the  Morea. — L. 


128 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


those  behind  the  ships  could  see  the  slightest  ap¬ 
pearance  of  this,  if  the  vessel  was  before  the  wind  ; 
so  they  would  rather  wait  a  side  wind. 


Chapter  XII. — King  Sigurd’s  Expedition  to  Constantinople. 

When  King  Sigurd  sailed  into  Constantinople,  he 
steered  near  the  land.  Over  all  the  land  there  are 
burghs,  castles,  country  towns,  the  one  upon  the 
other  without  interval.  There  from  the  land  one 
could  see  into  the  bights  of  the  sails ;  and  the  sails 
stood  so  close  beside  each  other,  that  they  seemed 
to  form  one  enclosure.  All  the  people  turned  out  to 
see  King  Sigurd  sailing  past.  The  Emperor  Kirjalax 
had  also  heard  of  King  Sigurd’s  expedition,  and 
ordered  the  city  port  of  Constantinople  to  be  opened, 
which  is  called  the  Gold  Tower,  through  which  the 
emperor  rides  when  he  has  been  long  absent  from 
Constantinople,  or  has  made  a  campaign  in  which 
he  has  been  victorious.  The  emperor  had  precious 
cloths  spread  out  from  the  Gold  Tower  to  Laktjarna,* 
which  is  the  name  of  the  emperor’s  most  splendid 
hall.  King  Sigurd  ordered  his  men  to  ride  in  great 
state  into  the  city,  and  not  to  regard  all  the  new 
things  they  might  see;  and  this  they  did.  King 
Sigurd  and  his  followers  rode  with  this  great  splen- 
doui  into  Constantinople,  and  then  came  to  the  mag¬ 
nificent  hall,  where  everything  was  in  the  grandest 
style. 


*  The  palace  Blacliernse. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


129 


King  Sigurd  remained  here  some  time.  The 
Emperor  Kirjalax  sent  his  men  to  him  to  ask  if  he 
would  rather  accept  from  the  emperor  six  lispund 
of  gold,  or  would  have  the  emperor  give  the  games 
in  his  honour  which  the  emperor  was  used  to  have 
played  at  the  Padreim.*  King  Sigurd  preferred  the 
games,  and  the  messengers  said  the  spectacle  would 
not  cost  the  emperor  less  than  the  money  offered. 
Then  the  emperor  prepared  for  the  games,  which 
were  held  in  the  usual  way :  but  this  day  everything 
went  on  better  for  the  king  than  for  the  queen ;  for 
the  queen  has  always  the  half  part  in  the  games, 
and  their  men,  therefore,  always  strive  against  each 
other  in  all  games.  The  Greeks  accordingly  think 
that  when  the  king’s  men  win  more  games  at  the 
Padreim  than  the  queen’s,  the  king  will  gain  the 
victory  when  he  goes  into  battle.  People  who  have 
been  in  Constantinople  tell  that  the  Padreim  is  thus 
constructed  : — A  high  wall  surrounds  a  flat  plain, 
which  may  be  compared  to  a  round  bare  Tiling- 
place,  with  earthen  banks  all  around  at  the  stone 
wall,  on  which  banks  the  spectators  sit;  but  the 
games  themselves  are  in  the  flat  plain.  There  are 
many  sorts  of  old  events  represented  concerning 
the  Asas,  Volsungs,  and  Giukungs,  in  these  games  ;t 
and  all  the  figures  are  cast  in  copper,  or  metal,  with 

*  Padreimr,  —  tlie  Hippodrome  where  the  great  spectacles  were 
given.— L. 

+  It  is  not  likely  that  the  feats  of  the  Asas,  Volsungs,  and  Giukungs 
were  represented  in  the  games  of  the  Hippodrome  at  Constantinople  ;  but 
very  likely  that  the  Varings,  and  other  Northmen  there,  would  apply 
the  names  of  their  own  mythology  to  the  representations  taken  from  the 
Greek  mythology. — L. 

VOL.  IV. 


I 


r3o  CHEONICLE  OF  THE 

so  great  art  that  they  appear  to  be  living  things  ; 
and  to  the  people  it  appears  as  if  they  were  really 
present  in  the  games.  The  games  themselves  are 
so  artfully  and  cleverly  managed,  that  people  appear 
to  be  riding  in  the  air ;  and  at  them  also  are  used 
shot-fire,'*  and  all  kinds  of  harp-playing,  singing, 
and  music  instruments. 


Chapter  XIII. — King  Sigurd  makes  a  great  Feast  for 
the  Emperor  of  Constantinople. 

It  is  related  that  King  Sigurd  one  day  was  to 
give  the  emperor  a  feast,  and  he  ordered  his  men  to 
provide  sumptuously  all  that  was  necessary  for  the 
entertainment ;  and  when  all  things  were  provided 
which  are  suitable  for  an  entertainment  given  by  a 
great  personage  to  persons  of  high  dignity,  King 
Sigurd  ordered  his  men  to  go  to  the  street  in  the 
city  where  firewood  was  sold,  as  they  would  require 
a  great  quantity  to  prepare  the  feast.  They  said 
the  king  need  not  be  afraid  of  wanting  firewood, 
for  every  day  many  loads  were  brought  into  the 
town.  When  it  was  necessary,  however,  to  have 
firewood,  it  was  found  that  it  was  all  sold,  which 
they  told  the  king.  He  replied,  “  Go  and  try  if  you 
can  get  walnuts.  They  will  answer  as  well  as  wood 
for  fuel.”  They  went  and  got  as  many  as  they 
needed.  Now  came  the  emperor,  and  his  grandees 
and  court,  and  sat  down  to  table.  All  was  very 
splendid ;  and  King  Sigurd  received  the  emperor 

*  Fireworks,  or  the  Greek  lire,  probably  were  used.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


13 1 

with  great  state,  and  entertained  him  magnificently. 
W  hen  the  queen  and  the  emperor  found  that  nothing 
was  awanting,  she  sent  some  persons  to  inquire 
what  they  had  used  for  firewood;  and  they  came 
to  a  house  filled  with  walnuts,  and  they  came  back 
and  told  the  queen.  “Truly,”  said  she,  “this  is  a 
magnificent  king,  who  spares  no  expense  where  his 
honour  is  concerned.”  She  had  contrived  this  to 
try  what  they  would  do  when  they  could  get  no 
firewood  to  dress  their  feast  with. 

Chapter  XIV.  King  Siguvd  tlic  CvusccdeT’s  vetuvn  Home. 

King  Sigurd  soon  after  prepared  for  his  return 
home.  He  gave  the  emperor  all  his  ships  ;  and  the 
valuable  figuiedieads  which  were  on  the  king’s  ships 
were  set  up  in  Peter’s  church,*  where  they  have  since 
been  to  be  seen.  The  emperor  gave  the  king  many 
horses  and  guides  to  conduct  him  through  all  his 
dominions.  Then  King  Sigurd  left  Constantinople  ; 
but  a  great  many  Northmen  remained,  and  went 
into  the  emperor  s  pay.  Then  King  Sigurd  travelled 
from  Bulgaria,  and  through  Hungary,  Pannonia, 
Suabia,  and  Bavaria,  where  he  met  the  Eoman 
emperor  Lotharius,f  who  received  him  in  the  most 
friendly  way,  gave  him  guides  through  his  dominions, 
and  had  markets  established  for  him  at  which  he 
could  purchase  all  he  required.  When  King  Sigurd 

*  William  of  Malmesbury  says  that  Sigurd  set  his  ship  up  in  the 
Sophia  church. 

t  Lothar  did  not  become  emperor  before  the  year  1125.  At  this  time 
he  was  Duke  of  Saxony. 


I32 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


came  to  Slesvik  in  Denmark,  Earl  Eilif  made  a  sump¬ 
tuous  feast  for  him;  and  it  was  then  midsummer. 
In  Heidahy  *  he  met  the  Danish  king  Nikolas, 
who  received  him  in  the  most  friendly  way,  made 
a  great  entertainment  for  him,  accompanied  him 
north  to  Jutland,  and  gave  him  a  ship  provided 
with  everything  needful.  From  thence  the  king 
returned  to  Norway,  and  was  joyfully  welcomed 
on  his  return  to  his  kingdom  [mo].  It  was  the 
common  talk  among  the  people,  that  none  had 
ever  made  so  honourable  a  journey  from  Norway 
as  this  of  King  Sigurd.  He  was  twenty  years  of 
age,  and  had  been  three  years  on  these  travels. 
Iiis  brother  Olaf  was  then  twelve  years  old. 


Chapter  XV. — King  Ey  stein’s  Doings  at  Home  in  the 

Meantime. 

King  Eystein  had  also  effected  much  in  the  country 
that  was  useful  while  King  Sigurd  was  on  his  journey, 
He  established  a  monastery  at  Nordnes  in  Bergen, 
and  endowed  it  with  much  property.  He  also  built 
Michael’s  church,  which  is  a  very  splendid  stone 
temple.  In  the  king’s  house  there  he  also  built  the 
Church  of  the  Apostles,  and  the  great  hall,  which 
is  the  most  magnificent  wooden  structure  that  was 
ever  built  in  Norway.  He  also  built  a  church  at 
Agdanes  with  a  parapet ;  and  a  harbour,  where 
formerly  there  had  been  a  barren  spot  only.  In 
Nidaros  he  built  in  the  king’s  street  the  church  of 

*  The  town  opposite  to  Slesvik,  on  the  river  Slie.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


133 


Saint  Nikolas,  which  was  particularly  ornamented 
with  carved  work,  and  all  in  wood.  He  also  built 
a  church  north  in  Yagar  in  Halogaland,  and  en¬ 
dowed  it  with  property  and  revenues. 


Chapter  XYI. — Of  King  Eystein. 

King  Eystein  sent  a  verbal  message  to  the  most 
intelligent  and  powerful  of  the  men  of  Jamtaland, 
and  invited  them  to  him  ;  received  them  all  as  they 
came  with  great  kindness  ;  accompanied  them  part 
of  the  way  home,  and  gave  them  presents,  and  thus 
enticed  them  into  a  friendship  with  him.  Now  as 
many  of  them  became  accustomed  to  visit  him  and 
receive  gifts  from  him,  and  he  also  sent  gifts  to  some 
who  did  not  come  themselves,  he  soon  gained  the 
favour  of  all  the  people  who  had  most  influence  in 
the  country.  Then  he  spoke  to  the  Jamtaland 
people,  and  told  them  they  had  done  ill  in  turning 
away  from  the  kings  of  Norway,  and  withdrawing 
from  them  their  taxes  and  allegiance.  He  began 
by  saying  how  the  Jamtaland  people  had  submitted 
to  the  reign  of  ITakon,  the  foster-son  of  Athelstane, 
and  had  long  afterwards  been  subjected  to  the  kings 
of  Norway,  and  he  represented  to  them  how  many 
useful  things  they  could  get  from  Norway,  and  how 
inconvenient  it  wTas  for  them  to  apply  to  the  Swedish 
king  for  what  they  needed.*  By  these  speeches  he 
brought  matters  so  far,  that  the  Jamtaland  people 

*  The  dried  fish  of  Norway  are  a  necessary  article  of  food  to  the 
people  of  this  district,  which  they  cannot  get  from  the  Baltic  coast  of 
Sweden. — L. 


1 34 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


of  their  own  accord  offered  to  be  subject  to  him,  which 
they  said  was  useful  and  necessary  for  them ;  and 
thus,  on  both  sides,  it  was  agreed  that  the  Jamta- 
landers  should  put  their  whole  country  under  King 
Eystein.  The  first  beginning  was  with  the  men 
of  consequence,  who  persuaded  the  people  to  take 
an  oath  of  fidelity  to  King  Eystein ;  and  then  they 
went  to  King  Eystein  and  confirmed  the  country 
to  him  by  oath ;  and  this  arrangement  has  since 
continued  for  a  long  time.  King  Eystein  thus 
conquered  Jamtaland  by  his  wisdom,  and  not  by 
hostile  inroads,  as  some  of  his  forefathers  had  done. 


Chapter  XVII. —  Of  King  Eystein  s  Perfections  of  Body 

and  Mind. 

King  Eystein  was  the  handsomest  man  that  could 
be  seen.  He  had  blue  open  eyes ;  his  hair  yellow 
and  curling ;  his  stature  not  tall,  but  of  the  middle 
size.  He  was  wise,  intelligent,  and  acquainted  with 
the  laws  and  history.  He  had  much  knowledge  of 
mankind,  was  quick  in  counsel,  prudent  in  words, 
and  very  eloquent  and  very  generous.  He  was  very 
merry,  yet  modest ;  and  was  liked  and  beloved, 
indeed,  by  all  the  people.  He  was  married  to 
Ingibjorg,  a  daughter  of  Guthorm,  son  of  Thorer 
of  Steig ;  and  their  daughter  was  Maria,  who  after¬ 
wards  married  Gudbrand  Skafhogson. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


i3S 


Chapter  XYIII. — Of  Ivar  Ingimundson. 

King  Eystein  had  in  many  ways  improved  the 
laws  and  privileges  of  the  country  people,  and  kept 
strictly  to  the  laws  ;  and  he  made  himself  acquainted 
with  all  the  laws  of  Norway,  and  showed  in  every¬ 
thing  great  prudence  and  understanding.  What 
a  valuable  man  King  Eystein  was,  how  full  of 
friendship,  and  how  much  he  turned  his  mind  to 
examining  and  avoiding  everything  that  could  be 
of  disadvantage  to  his  friends,  may  be  seen  from  his 
friendship  to  an  Iceland  man  called  Ivar  Ingimund¬ 
son.  The  man  was  witty,  of  great  family,  and  also 
a  poet.  The  king  saw  that  Ivar  was  out  of  spirits, 
and  asked  him  why  he  was  so  melancholy.  “  Before, 
when  thou  wast  with  us,  we  had  much  amusement 
with  thy  conversation.  I  know  thou  art  a  man  of 
too  good  an  understanding  to  believe  that  I  would 
do  anything  against  thee.  Tell  me  then  what 

it  IS. 

He  replied,  “  I  cannot  tell  thee  what  it  is.” 

Then  said  the  king,  “  I  will  try  to  guess  what  it 
is.  Are  there  any  men  who  displease  thee  ?  ” 

To  this  he  replied,  “No.” 

“Dost  thou  think  thou  art  held  in  less  esteem  by 
me  than  thou  wouldst  like  to  be  ?  ” 

To  this  he  also  replied,  “No.” 

“  Hast  thou  observed  anything  whatever  that  has 
made  an  impression  on  thee  at  which  thou  art  ill 
pleased  ?  ” 

He  replied,  it  was  not  this  either. 


136 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


The  king  :  ‘‘Would  you  like  to  go  to  other  chiefs 
or  to  other  men  ?  ” 

To  this  he  answered,  “No.” 

The  king  :  “  It  is  difficult  now  to  guess.  Is  there 
any  girl  here,  or  in  any  other  country,  to  whom  thy 
affections  are  engaged?  ” 

He  said  it  was  so. 

Ihe  king  said,  “Ho  not  be  melancholy  on  that 
account.  Go  to  Iceland  when  spring  sets  in,  and  I 
shall  give  thee  money,  and  presents,  and  with  these 
my  letters  and  seal  to  the  men  who  have  the  principal 
sway  there  ;  and  I  know  no  man  there  who  will  not 
obey  my  persuasions  or  threats.” 

Ivar  replied,  “  My  fate  is  heavier,  sire  ;  for  my 
own  brother  has  the  girl.” 

Then  said  the  king,  “  Throw  it  out  of  thy  mind  ; 
and  I  know  a  counsel  against  this.  After  Yule  I 
will  travel  in  guest-quarters.  Thou  shalt  come  along 
with  me,  and  thou  wilt  have  an  opportunity  of  seeing 
many  beautiful  girls;  and,  provided  they  are  not  of  the 
royal  stock,  I  will  get  thee  one  of  them  in  marriage.” 

Ivai  leplies,  “Sire,  my  fate  is  still  the  heavier; 
for  as  olt  as  I  see  beautiful  and  excellent  girls  I  only 

remember  the  more  that  girl,  and  they  increase  my 
misery.” 

The  king:  “  Ihen  I  will  give  thee  property  to 
manage,  and  estates  for  thy  amusement.” 

lie  leplied,  lor  that  I  have  no  desire.” 

The  king.  Ihen  I  will  give  thee  money,  that 
thou  mayest  travel  in  other  countries.” 

He  said  he  did  not  wish  this. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


137 


Then  said  the  king,  “  It  is  difficult  for  me  to  seek 
farther,  for  I  have  proposed  everything  that  occurs 
to  me.  There  is  but  one  thing  else  ;  and  that  is  but 
little  compared  to  what  I  have  offered  thee.  Come 
to  me  every  day  after  the  tables  are  removed,  and, 
if  I  am  not  sitting  upon  important  business,  I  shall 
talk  with  thee  about  the  girl  in  every  way  that  I  can 
think  of ;  and  I  shall  do  so  at  leisure.  It  sometimes 
happens  that  sorrow  is  lightened  by  being  brought 
out  openly ;  and  thou  shalt  never  go  away  without 
some  gift.5’ 

He  replied,  “  This  I  will  do,  sire,  and  return 
thanks  for  this  inquiry.” 

And  now  they  did  so  constantly ;  and  when  the 
king  was  not  occupied  with  weightier  affairs  he  talked 
with  him,  and  his  sorrow  by  degrees  wore  away,  and 
he  was  again  in  good  spirits. 


Chapter  XIX. —  Of  King  Sigurd. 

King  Sigurd  was  a  stout  and  strong  man,  with 
brown  hair;  of  a  manly  appearance,  but  not  hand¬ 
some  ;  well  grown ;  of  little  speech,  and  often  not 
friendly,  but  good  to  his  friends,  and  faithful;  not 
very  eloquent,  but  moral  and  polite.  King  Sigurd 
was  self-willed,  and  severe  in  his  revenge ;  strict  in 
observing  the  law ;  was  generous ;  and  withal  an 
able,  powerful  king.  His  brother  Olaf  was  a  tall, 
thin  man ;  handsome  in  countenance  ;  lively,  modest, 
and  popular.  When  all  these  brothers,  Eystein, 
Sigurd,  and  Olaf,  were  kings  of  Norway,  they  did 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


138 

away  with  many  burthens  which  the  Danes  had  laid 
upon  the  people  in  the  time  that  Svein  Alfifuson 
ruled  Norway ;  and  on  this  account  they  were  much 
beloved,  both  by  the  people  and  the  great  men  of  the 
country. 


Chapter  XX. — Of  King  Sigurd's  Bream. 

Once  King  Sigurd  fell  into  low  spirits,  so  that  few 
could  get  him  to  converse,  and  he  sat  but  a  short 
time  at  the  drinking  table.  This  was  heavy  on  his 
counsellors,  friends,  and  court ;  and  they  begged 
King  Eystein  to  consider  how  they  could  discover 
the  cause  why  the  people  who  came  to  the  king 
could  get  no  reply  to  what  they  laid  before  him. 
King  Eystein  answered  them,  that  it  was  difficult  to 
speak  with  the  king  about  this ;  but  at  last,  on  the 
entreaty  of  many,  he  promised  to  do  it.  Once,  when 
they  were  both  together,  King  Eystein  brought  the 
matter  before  his  brother,  and  asked  the  cause  of  his 
melancholy.  “It  is  a  great  grief,  sire,  to  many  to 
see  thee  so  melancholy  ;  and  we  would  like  to  know 
what  has  occasioned  it,  or  if  perchance  thou  hast 
heard  any  news  of  great  weight  %  ” 

King  Sigurd  replies,  that  it  was  not  so. 

‘‘Is  it  then,  brother,”  says  King  Eystein,  “that 
you  would  like  to  travel  out  of  the  country,  and 
augment  your  dominions  as  our  father  did  ?  ” 

He  answered,  that  it  was  not  that  either. 

Is  it,  then,  that  any  man  here  in  the  country 
has  offended  ?  ” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


139 


To  this  also  the  king  said  “  No.” 

‘‘Then  I  would  like  to  know  if  you  have  dreamt 
anything  that  has  occasioned  this  depression  of 
mind?” 

The  king  answered  that  it  was  so. 

“  Tell  me  then,  brother,  thy  dream.” 

King  Sigurd  said,  “  I  will  not  tell  it,  unless  thou 
interpret  it  as  it  may  turn  out ;  and  I  shall  be  quick 
at  perceiving  if  thy  interpretation  be  right  or  not.” 

King  Eystein  replies,  “  This  is  a  very  difficult 
matter,  sire,  on  both  sides  ;  as  I  am  exposed  to  thy 
anger  if  I  cannot  interpret  it,  and  to  the  blame  of 
the  public  if  I  can  do  nothing  in  the  matter;  but 
I  will  rather  fall  under  your  displeasure,  even  if 
my  interpretation  should  not  be  agreeable.” 

King  Sigurd  replies,  “It  appeared  to  me,  in  a 
dream,  as  if  we  brothers  were  all  sitting  on  a  bench 
in  front  of  Christ  church  in  Throndhjem ;  and  it 
appeared  to  me  as  if  our  relative  King  Olaf  the  Saint 
came  out  of  the  church  adorned  with  the  royal 
raiment  glancing  and  splendid,  and  with  the  most 
delightful  and  joyful  countenance.  He  went  to  our 
brother  King  Olaf,  took  him  by  the  hand,  and  said 
cheerfully  to  him,  ‘  Come  with  me,  friend.’  On 
which  he  appeared  to  stand  up  and  go  into  the 
church.  Soon  after  King  Olaf  the  Saint  came  out 
of  the  church,  but  not  so  gay  and  brilliant  as  before. 
Now  he  went  to  thee,  brother,  and  said  to  thee 
that  thou  shouldst  go  with  him  ;  on  which  he  led 
thee  with  him,  and  ye  went  into  the  church.  Then 
I  thought,  and  waited  for  it,  that  he  would  come  to 


140 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


me,  ancl  meet  me  ;  but  it  was  not  so.  Then  I  was 
seized  with  great  sorrow,  and  great  dread  and  anxiety 
fell  upon  me,  so  that  I  was  altogether  without 
strength ;  and  then  I  awoke.” 

King  Ey stein  replies,  “  Thus  I  interpret  your 
dream,  sire, — That  the  bench  betokens  the  kingdom 
we  brothers  have  ;  and  as  you  thought  King  Olaf 
came  with  so  glad  a  countenance  to  our  brother 
King  Olaf,  he  will  likely  live  the  shortest  time  of  us 
brothers,  and  have  all  good  to  expect  hereafter ;  for 
he  is  amiable,  young  in  years,  and  has  gone  but  little 
into  excess,  and  King  Olaf  the  Saint  must  help  him. 
But  as  you  thought  he  came  towards  me,  but  not 
with  so  much  joy,  I  may  possibly  live  a  few  years 
longer,  but  not  become  old,  and  I  trust  his  providence 
will  stand  over  me  ;  but  that  he  did  not  come  to  me 
with  the  same  splendour  and  glory  as  to  our  brother 
Olaf,  that  will  be  because,  in  many  ways,  I  have 
sinned  and  transgressed  his  command.  If  he  delayed 
coming  to  thee,  I  think  that  in  no  way  betokens  thy 
death,  but  rather  a  long  life  :  but  it  may  be  that 
some  heavy  accident  may  occur  to  thee,  as  there  was 
an  unaccountable  dread  overpowering  thee  ;  but  I 
foretell  that  thou  wilt  be  the  oldest  of  us,  and  wilt 
rule  the  kingdom  longest.” 

Then  said  Sigurd,  “This  is  well  and  intelligibly 
interpreted,  and  it  is  likely  it  will  be  so.”  And  now 
the  king  began  to  be  cheerful  again. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


141 


Chapter  XXI. — Of  King  Sigurd's  Marriage. 

King  Sigurd  married  Malmfrid,  a  daughter  of 
King  Harald  Valdemarson  eastward  in  Novgorod. 
King  Harald  Valdemarson’s  mother  was  Queen  Gyda 
the  Old,  a  daughter  of  the  English  king  Harald 
Godwinson.  Queen  Malmfrid’s  mother  was  Queen 
Christina,  a  daughter  of  the  Swedish  king  Inge 
Steinkelson.  Harald  Valdemarson’s  other  daughter, 
sister  to  Malmfrid,  was  Ingibjorg,  who  was  married 
to  Canute  Lavard,  a  son  of  the  Danish  king  Eirik 
the  Good,  and  grandson  of  King  Svein  Ulfson. 
Canute’s  and  Ingibjorg’s  children  were,  the  Danish 
king  Valdemar,*  who  came  to  the  Danish  kingdom 
after  Svein  Eirikson  ;  and  daughters  Margaret, 
Christina,  and  Catherine.  Margaret  was  married 
to  Stig  Hvitaled ;  and  their  daughter  was  Christina, 
married  to  the  Swedish  king  Karl  Sorkvison,  and 
their  son  was  King  Sorkver. 


Chapter  XXII. — Here  begins  the  Account  of  the  Cases 

before  the  Thing. 

The  king’s  relative,  Sigurd  Hranason,  came  into 
strife  with  King  Sigurd.  He  had  had  the  Lapland 
collectorship  t  on  the  king’s  account,  because  of  their 
relationship  and  long  friendship,  and  also  of  the  many 


*  Valdemar  I.,  who  died  1182. 

+  The  journey  to  Lapland  to  collect  the  taxes,  with  which  a  profit¬ 
able  trade  in  furs  was  connected,  was,  even  in  the  earliest  times,  one  of 
the  greatest  offices  the  king  had  to  confer  in  respect  of  gain.  Furs  were 
always  at  a  high  value  in  the  Middle  Ages  for  ornamental  purposes.— L. 


142 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


services  Sigurd  Hranason  had  done  to  the  kings  ; 
for  he  was  a  very  distinguished,  popular  man.  But  it 
happened  to  him,  as  it  often  does  to  others,  that  per¬ 
sons  more  wicked  and  jealous  than  upright  slandered 
him  to  King  Sigurd,  and  whispered  in  the  king’s 
ear  that  he  took  more  of  the  Laplanders’  tribute  to 
himself  than  was  proper.  They  spoke  so  long  about 
this,  that  King  Sigurd  conceived  a  dislike  and  anger 
to  him,  and  sent  a  message  to  him.  When  he  ap¬ 
peared  before  the  king,  the  king  carried  these  feel¬ 
ings  with  him,  and  said,  “  I  did  not  expect  that  thou 
shouldst  have  repaid  me  for  thy  great  fiefs  and  other 
dignities  by  taking  the  king’s  property,  and  abstract¬ 
ing  a  greater  portion  of  it  than  is  allowable.” 

Sigurd  Hranason  replies,  “  It  is  not  true  that  has 
been  told  you  ;  for  I  have  only  taken  such  portion 
as  I  had  your  permission  to  take.” 

King  Sigurd  replies,  “Thou  shalt  not  slip  away 
with  this ;  but  the  matter  shall  be  seriously  treated 
before  it  comes  to  an  end.”  With  that  they  parted. 

Soon  after,  by  the  advice  of  his  friends,  the  king- 
laid  an  action  against  Sigurd  Hranason  at  the  Tiling- 
meeting  in  Bergen,  and  would  have  him  made  an 
outlaw.  Now  when  the  business  took  this  turn,  and 
appeared  so  dangerous,  Sigurd  Hranason  went  to  King 
Eystein,  and  told  him  what  mischief  King  Sigurd 
intended  to  do  him,  and  entreated  his  assistance. 
King  Eystein  replied,  “This  is  a  difficult  matter 
that  you  propose  to  me,  to  speak  against  my  brother ; 
and  there  is  a  great  difference  between  defending  a 
cause  and  pursuing  it  in  law  ;  ”  and  added,  that  this 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


143 


was  a  matter  which  concerned  him  and  Sigurd 
equally.  “But  for  thy  distress,  and  our  relation¬ 
ship,  I  shall  bring  in  a  word  for  thee/’ 

Soon  after  Eystein  visited  King  Sigurd,  and  en¬ 
treated  him  to  spare  the  man,  reminding  him  of  the 
relationship  between  them  and  Sigurd  Hranason, 
who  was  married  to  their  aunt  Skialdvor ;  and  said 
he  would  pay  the  penalty  for  the  crime  committed 
against  the  king,  although  he  could  not  with  truth 
impute  any  blame  to  him  in  the  matter.  Besides,  he 
reminded  the  king  of  the  long  friendship  with  Sigurd 
Hranason.  King  Sigurd  replied,  that  it  was  better 
government  to  punish  such  acts.  Then  King  Eystein 
replied,  “  If  thou,  brother,  wilt  follow  the  law,  and 
punish  such  acts  according  to  the  country’s  privileges, 
then  it  would  be  most  correct  that  Sigurd  Hranason 
produce  his  witnesses,  and  that  the  case  be  judged 
at  the  Thing,  but  not  at  a  meeting ;  for  the  case 
comes  under  the  law  of  the  land,  not  under  Biarkey 
law.”*  Then  said  Sigurd,  “It  may  possibly  be  so 
that  the  case  belongs  to  it,  as  thou  sayest,  King 
Eystein  ;  and  if  it  be  against  law  what  has  hitherto 
been  done  in  this  case,  then  we  shall  bring  it  before 
the  Thing.”  Then  the  kings  parted,  and  each  seemed 
determined  to  take  his  own  way.  King  Sigurd 
summoned  the  parties  in  the  case  before  the  Arnarnes 
Thing,  and  intended  to  pursue  it  there.  King 

*  The  meaning  here  is  not  clear.  It  may  be  that  higher  up  in  the 
north  than  Biarkey,  the  Thing  circle  and  jurisdiction  were  not  so  well 
established  ;  and  that  there  meetings  and  summary  proceedings  pre¬ 
vailed,  and  not  regular  Tiling-law.  Biarkey-ret  was  a  particular  and 
old  code. — L. 


144 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Eystein  came  also  to  the  Thing-place  ;  and  when 
the  case  was  brought  forward  for  judgment,  King 
Eystein  went  to  the  Thing  before  judgment  was 
given  upon  Sigurd  Hranason.  Now  King  Sigurd 
told  the  lagmen  to  pronounce  the  judgment;  but 
King  Eystein  replied  thus  :  “  I  trust  there  are  here 
men  acquainted  sufficiently  with  the  laws  of  Norway, 
to  know  that  they  cannot  condemn  a  lenderman  to 
be  outlawed  at  this  Thing.”  *  And  he  then  explained 
how  the  law  was,  so  that  every  man  clearly  under¬ 
stood  it.  Then  said  King  Sigurd,  “Thou  art  taking 
up  this  matter  very  warmly,  King  Eystein,  and  it  is 
likely  the  case  will  cost  more  trouble  before  it  comes 
to  an  end  than  we  intended  ;  but  nevertheless  we 
shall  follow  it  out.  I  will  have  him  condemned  to 
be  outlawed  in  his  native  place.”  Then  said  King 
Eystein,  “  There  are  certainly  not  many  things  which 
do  not  succeed  with  thee,  and  especially  when  there 
are  but  few  and  small  folks  to  oppose  one  who  has 
carried  through  such  great  things.”  And  thus  they 
parted,  without  anything  being  concluded  in  the 
case.  Thereafter  King  Sigurd  called  together  a 
Gula  Thing,  went  himself  there,  and  summoned  to 
him  many  high  chiefs.  King  Eystein  came  there 
also  with  his  suite  ;  t  and  many  meetings  and  con¬ 
ferences  were  held  among  people  of  understanding 
concerning  this  case,  and  it  was  tried  and  examined 

*  This  Arnarnes  Thing  was  probably  not  the  competent  court ;  for  it 
appears  by  the  Grey  Goose  that  all  forms  and  jurisdictions  were  settled 
and  highly  important  points  in  the  administration  of  law. — L. 

t  The  French  word  suite  seems  connected  with  the  Old  Norman  or 
Icelandic  word  sveitir  of  the  same  meaning. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


145 


before  the  legmen.  Now  King  Eystein  objected 
that  all  the  parties  summoned  in  any  cases  tried 
here  belonged  to  the  Thing-district ;  but  in  this  case 
the  deed  and  the  parties  belonged  to  Ilalogaland. 
The  Thing  accordingly  ended  in  doing  nothing,  as 
King  Eystein  had  thus  made  it  incompetent.  The 
kings  parted  in  great  wrath ;  and  King  Eystein  went 
north  to  Throndhjem.  King  Sigurd,  on  the  other 
hand,  summoned  to  him  all  lendermen,  and  also 
the  house-servants  of  the  lendermen,  and  named  out 
of  every  district  a  number  of  the  bondes  from  the 
south  parts  of  the  country,  so  that  he  had  collected 
a  large  army  about  him  ;  and  proceeded  with  all  this 
crowd  northwards  along  the  coast  to  Ilalogaland, 
and  intended  to  use  all  his  power  to  make  Sigurd 
Hranason  an  outlaw  among  his  own  relations.  For 
this  purpose  he  summoned  to  him  the  Ilalogaland 
and  Naumudal  people,  and  appointed  a  Thing  at 
Hrafnista.  King  Eystein  prepared  himself  also,  and 
proceeded  with  many  people  from  the  town  of  Nidaros 
to  the  Thing,  where  he  made  Sigurd  Hranason,  by 
hand-shake  before  witnesses,  deliver  over  to  him  the 
following  and  defending  this  case.  At  this  Thing 
both  the  kings  spoke,  each  for  his  own  side.  Then 
King  Eystein  asks  the  lagmen  where  that  law  was 
made  in  Norway  which  gave  the  bondes  the  right 
to  judge  between  the  kings  of  the  country,  when 
they  had  pleas  with  each  other.  “  I  shall  bring 
witnesses  to  prove  that  Sigurd  has  given  the  case 
into  my  hands ;  and  it  is  with  me,  not  with  Sigurd 
Hranason,  that  King  Sigurd  has  to  do  in  this  case.” 

VOL.  IV.  Iv 


146 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


The  lagmen  said  that  disputes  between  kings  must 
be  judged  only  at  the  Eyra  Thing  in  Nidaros. 

King  Eystein  said,  “  So  I  thought  that  it  should 
he  there,  and  the  case  must  be  removed  there.” 

Then  King  Sigurd  said,  “  The  more  difficulties  and 
inconvenience  thou  bringest  upon  me  in  this  matter, 
the  more  I  will  persevere  in  it.”  And  with  that  they 
parted. 

Both  kings  then  went  south  to  Nidaros  town,  where 
they  summoned  a  Thing  from  eight  districts.  King 
Eystein  was  in  the  town  with  a  great  many  people, 
but  Sigurd  was  on  board  his  ships.  When  the  Thing 
was  opened,  peace  and  safe  conduct  were  given  to 
all ;  and  when  the  people  were  all  collected,  and  the 
case  should  he  gone  into,  Bergthor,  a  son  of  Svein 
Bryggjufot,  stood  up,  and  gave  his  evidence  that 
Sigurd  ITranason  had  concealed  a  part  of  the  Lap¬ 
landers’  taxes. 

Then  King  Eystein  stood  up  and  said,  “  If  thy 
accusation  were  true,  although  we  do  not  know  what 
truth  there  may  be  in  thy  testimony,  yet  this  case 
has  already  been  dismissed  from  three  Things,  and  a 
fourth  time  from  a  town  meeting ;  and  therefore  I 
require  that  the  lagmen  acquit  Sigurd  in  this  case 
according  to  law.”  And  they  did  so. 

Then  said  King  Sigurd,  “  I  see  sufficiently,  King 
Eystein,  that  thou  hast  carried  this  case  by  law- 
quirks,*  which  I  do  not  understand.  But  now  there 
remains,  King  Eystein,  a  way  of  determining  the 

*  These  law-quirks  show  a  singularly  advanced  state  of  law,  and 
deference  to  the  Law  Things,  amidst  such  social  disorder  and  mis¬ 
deeds. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


147 


case  which  I  am  more  used  to,  and  which  I  shall 
now  apply.” 

He  then  retired  to  his  ships,  had  the  tents  taken 
down,  laid  his  whole  fleet  out  at  the  holm,  and  held 
a  Thing  of  his  people  ;  and  told  them  that  early  in  the 
morning  they  should  land  at  Iluvellir,  and  give  battle 
to  King  Eystein.  But  in  the  evening,  as  King  Sigurd 
sat  at  his  table  in  his  ship  taking  his  repast,  before  he 
was  aware  of  it  a  man  cast  himself  on  the  floor  of 
the  forehold,  and  at  the  king’s  feet.  This  was  Sigurd 
Hranason,  who  begged  the  king  to  take  what  course 
with  regard  to  him  the  king  himself  thought  proper. 
Then  came  Bishop  Magne  and  Queen  Malmfrid,  and 
many  other  great  personages,  and  entreated  forgive¬ 
ness  for  Sigurd  Hranason ;  and  at  their  entreaty  the 
king  raised  him  up,  took  him  by  the  hand,  and  placed 
him  among  his  men,  and  took  him  along  with  him¬ 
self  to  the  south  part  of  the  country.  In  autumn  the 
king  gave  Sigurd  Hranason  leave  to  go  north  to  his 
farm,  gave  him  an  employment,  and  was  always 
afterwards  his  friend.  After  this  day,  however,  the 
brothers  were  never  much  together,  and  there  was 
no  cordiality  or  cheerfulness  among  them. 


Chapter  XXIII.— Of  King  Olafs  Death. 

King  Olaf  Magnuson  fell  into  a  sickness  which 
ended  in  his  death.  He  was  buried  in  Christ  church 
in  Nidaros,  and  many  were  in  great  grief  at  his 
death.  After  Olaf’s  death,  Eystein  and  Sigurd  ruled 
the  country,  the  three  brothers  together  having  been 


148 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


kings  of  Norway  for  twelve  years  [1104-1115]; 
namely,  five  years  after  King  Sigurd  returned  home, 
and  seven  years  before.  King  Olaf  was  seventeen 
years  old  when  he  died,  and  it  happened  on  the 
24th  of  December. 


Chapter  XXIV. — Magnus  the  Blind  ;  his  Birth. 

King  Eystein  had  been  about  a  year  in  the  east 
part  of  the  country  at  that  time,  and  King  Sigurd 
was  then  in  the  north.  King  Eystein  remained  a 
long  time  that  winter  in  Sarpsborg.  There  was  once 
a  powerful  and  rich  bonde  called  Olaf  of  Dal,  who 
dwelt  in  Great  Dal  in  Aumord,#  and  had  two  children, 
— a  son  called  Hakon  Fauk,  and  a  daughter  called 
Borghild,  who  was  a  very  beautiful  girl,  and  prudent, 
and  well  skilled  in  many  things.  Olaf  and  his 
children  were  a  long  time  in  winter  in  Sarpsborg,  and 
Borghild  conversed  very  often  with  King  Eystein  ; 
so  that  many  reports  were  spread  about  their  friend¬ 
ship.  The  following  summer  King  Eystein  went 
north,  and  King  Sigurd  came  eastward,  where  he  re¬ 
mained  all  winter,  and  was  long  in  Konungahella, 
which  town  he  greatly  enlarged  and  improved.  He 
built  there  a  great  castle  of  turf  and  stone,  dug  a  great 
ditch  around  it,  and  built  a  church  and  several  houses 
within  the  castle.  The  holy  cross  he  allowed  to 
remain  at  Konungahella,  and  therein  did  not  fulfil  the 
oath  he  had  taken  in  Palestine ;  but,  on  the  other 
hand,  he  established  tithe,  and  most  of  the  other 

*  Somewhere  about  Fredrikstad. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


149 


things  to  which  he  had  bound  himself  by  oath.  The 
reason  of  his  keeping  the  cross  east  at  the  frontier  of 
the  country  was,  that  he  thought  it  would  be  a  pro¬ 
tection  to  all  the  land ;  but  it  proved  the  greatest 
misfortune  to  place  this  relic  within  the  power  of  the 
heathens,  as  it  afterwards  turned  out. 

When  Borghild,  Olaf’s  daughter,  heard  it  whis¬ 
pered  that  people  talked  ill  of  her  conversations  and 
intimacy  with  King  Eystein,  she  went  to  Sarpsborg ; 
and  after  suitable  fasts  she  carried  the  iron  as  a  proof 
of  her  innocence,  and  cleared  herself  thereby  fully 
from  all  offence.  When  King  Sigurd  heard  this,  he 
rode  one  day  as  far  as  usually  was  two  days’  travel¬ 
ling,  and  came  to  Dal  to  Olaf,  where  he  remained  all 
night,  made  Borghild  his  concubine,  and  took  her 
away  with  him.  They  had  a  son,  who  was  called 
Magnus,  and  he  was  sent  immediately  to  Halogaland, 
to  be  fostered  at  Biarkey  by  Vidkun  Jonson  ;  and  he 
was  brought  up  there.  Magnus  grew  up  to  be  the 
handsomest  man  that  could  be  seen,  and  was  very 
soon  stout  and  strong. 

Chapter  XXV. — Comparison  between  the  two  Kings. 

King  Eystein  and  King  Sigurd  went  both  in  spring 
to  guest-quarters  in  the  Uplands ;  and  each  was  en¬ 
tertained  in  a  separate  house,  and  the  houses  were 
not  very  distant  from  each  other.  The  bondes,  how¬ 
ever,  thought  it  more  convenient  that  both  should  be 
entertained  together  by  turns  in  each  house ;  and 
thus  they  were  both  at  first  in  the  house  of  King 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


150 

Eystein.  But  in  the  evening,  when  the  people  began 
to  drink,  the  ale  was  not  good ;  so  that  the  guests 
were  very  quiet  and’  still.  Then  said  King  Eystein, 
“  Why  are  the  people  so  silent  ?  It  is  more  usual 
in  drinking  parties  that  people  are  merry,  so  let  us 
fall  upon  some  jest  over  our  ale  that  will  amuse 
people ;  for  surely,  brother  Sigurd,  all  people  are 
well  pleased  when  we  talk  cheerfully.” 

Sigurd  replies,  bluntly,  4 4  Do  you  talk  as  much  as 
you  please,  but  give  me  leave  to  be  silent.” 

Eystein  says,  44  It  is  a  common  custom  over  the 
ale-table  to  compare  one  person  with  another,  and 
now  let  us  do  so.”  Then  Sigurd  was  silent. 

44  I  see,”  says  King  Eystein,  44  that  I  must  begin  this 
amusement.  Now  I  will  take  thee,  brother,  to  com¬ 
pare  myself  with,  and  will  make  it  appear  so  as  if  we 
had  both  equal  reputation  and  property,  and  that 
there  is  no  difference  in  our  birth  and  education.” 

Then  King  Sigurd  replies,  44  Do  you  remember  that 
I  was  always  able  to  throw  you  when  we  wrestled, 
although  you  are  a  year  older  ?  ” 

Then  King  Eystein  replied,  44  But  I  remember  that 
you  was  not  so  good  at  the  games  which  require 
agility.” 

Sigurd  :  44  Do  you  remember  that  I  could  drag  you 
under  water,  when  we  swam  together,  as  often  as  I 
pleased  ?  ” 

Eystein  :  44  But  I  could  swim  as  far  as  you,  and 
could  dive  as  well  as  you  ;  and  I  could  run  upon 
snow-skates  so  well  that  nobody  could  beat  me,  and 
you  could  no  more  do  it  than  an  ox.” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


I5I 

Sigurd  :  “  Methinks  it  is  a  more  useful  and  suit¬ 
able  accomplishment  for  a  chief  to  be  expert  at  his 
how  ;  and  I  think  you  could  scarcely  draw  my  how, 
even  if  you  took  your  foot  to  help.” 

Ey stein  :  “I  am  not  strong  at  the  how  as  you  are, 
but  there  is  less  difference  between  our  shooting 
near ;  and  I  can  use  the  skees  #  much  better  than  you, 
and  in  former  times  that  was  held  a  great  accom¬ 
plishment.” 

Sigurd  :  “  It  appears  to  me  much  better  for  a  chief 
who  is  to  he  the  superior  of  other  men,  that  he  is 
conspicuous  in  a  crowd,  and  strong  and  powerful  in 
weapons  above  other  men ;  easily  seen,  and  easily 
known,  where  there  are  many  together.” 

Ey  stein  :  “  It  is  not  less  a  distinction  and  an  orna¬ 
ment  that  a  man  is  of  a  handsome  appearance,  so  as 
to  be  easily  known  from  others  on  that  account ;  and 
this  appears  to  me  to  suit  a  chief  best,  because  the 
best  ornament  is  allied  to  beauty.  I  am  moreover 
more  knowing  in  the  law  than  you,  and  on  every 
subject  my  words  flow  more  easily  than  yours.” 

Sigurd :  “It  may  be  that  you  know  more  law- 
quirks,  for  I  have  had  something  else  to  do  ;  neither 
will  any  deny  you  a  smooth  tongue.  But  there  are 
many  who  say  that  your  words  are  not  to  be  trusted ; 
that  what  you  promise  is  little  to  be  regarded  ;  and 
that  you  talk  just  according  to  what  those  who  are 
about  you  say,  which  is  not  kingly.” 

Eystein  :  “  This  is  because,  when  people  bring  their 
cases  before  me,  I  wish  first  to  give  every  man  that 

*  Skees  are  a  kind  of  snow-skates  used  in  the  North. 


152 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


satisfaction  in  his  affair  which  he  desires  ;  but  after¬ 
wards  comes  the  opposite  party,  and  then  there  is 
something  to  he  given  or  taken  away  very  often,  in 
order  to  mediate  between  them,  so  that  both  may  be 
satisfied.  It  often  happens  too  that  I  promise  what¬ 
ever  is  desired  of  me,  that  all  may  be  joyful  about 
me.  It  would  be  an  easy  matter  for  me  to  do  as  you 
do, — to  promise  evil  to  all;  and  I  never  hear  any  com¬ 
plain  of  your  not  keeping  this  promise  to  them.” 

Sigurd  :  “  It  is  the  conversation  of  all  that  the 
expedition  I  made  out  of  the  country  was  a  princely 
expedition,  while  you  in  the  meantime  sat  at  home 
like  your  father’s  daughter.” 

Eystein:  “Now  you  touched  the  tender  spot.  I 
would  not  have  brought  up  this  conversation  if  I 
had  not  known  what  to  reply  on  this  point.  I 
can  truly  say  that  I  equipped  you  from  home  like 
a  sister,  before  you  went  upon  this  expedition.” 

Sigurd  :  “You  must  have  heard  that  on  this  expe¬ 
dition  I  was  in  many  a  battle  in  the  Saracen’s  land, 
and  gained  the  victory  in  all ;  and  you  must  have 
heard  of  the  many  valuable  articles  I  acquired,  the 
like  of  which  were  never  seen  before  in  this  country, 
and  I  was  the  most  respected  wherever  the  most 
gallant  men  were  ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  you 
cannot  conceal  that  you  have  only  a  home-bred 
reputation.” 

Eystein :  “  I  have  heard  that  you  had  several 
battles  abroad,  but  it  was  more  useful  for  the  country 
what  I  was  doing  in  the  meantime  here  at  home. 
I  built  five  churches  from  the  foundations,  and  a 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


153 


harbour  out  at  Agdanes,  where  it  before  was  impos¬ 
sible  to  land,  and  where  vessels  ply  north  and  south 
along  the  coast.  I  set  a  warping  post  and  iron  ring 
in  the  sound  of  Sinholm,  and  in  Bergen  I  built  a 
royal  hall,  while  you  were  killing  bluemen  for  the 
devil  in  Serkland.  This,  I  think,  was  of  but  little 
advantage  to  our  kingdom.” 

King  Sigurd  said  :  “  On  this  expedition  I  went  all 
the  way  to  Jordan  and  swam  across  the  river.  On 
the  edge  of  the  river  there  is  a  bush  of  willows,  and 
there  I  twisted  a  knot  of  willows,  and  said  this 
knot  thou  shouldst  untie,  brother,  or  take  the  curse 
thereto  attached.” 

King  Eystein  said  :  “I  shall  not  go  and  untie  the 
knot  which  you  tied  for  me  ;  but  if  I  had  been  inclined 
to  tie  a  knot  for  thee,  thou  wouldst  not  have  been 
king  of  Norway  at  thy  return  to  this  country,  when 
with  a  single  ship  you  came  sailing  into  my  fleet.” 

Thereupon  both  were  silent,  and  there  was  anger 
on  both  sides.  More  things  passed  between  the 
brothers,  from  which  it  appeared  that  each  of  them 
would  be  greater  than  the  other  ;  however,  peace  was 
preserved  between  them  as  long  as  they  lived. 


Chapter  XXYI. — Of  King  SigurcCs  Sickness. 

King  Sigurd  was  at  a  feast  in  the  Upland,  and 
a  bath  was  made  ready  for  him.  When  the  king 
came  to  the  bath  and  the  tent  was  raised  over  the 
bathing-tub,  the  king  thought  there  was  a  fish  in 
the  tub  beside  him  ;  and  a  great  laughter  came  upon 


154 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


him,  so  that  he  was  beside  himself,  and  was  out  of 
his  mind,  and  often  afterwards  these  fits  returned. 

Magnus  Barefoot’s  daughter,  Kagnhild,  was  mar¬ 
ried  by  her  brothers  to  Harald  Kesia,  a  son  of  the 
Danish  king  Eirik  the  Good ;  and  their  sons  were 
Magnus,  Olaf,  Knut,  and  Harald.* 

Chapter  XXVII. — Of  King  Ky steins  Death. 

King  Eystein  built  a  large  ship  at  Nidaros,  which, 
in  size  and  shape,  was  like  the  Long  Serpent  which 
King  Olaf  Trygveson  had  built.  At  the  head  there 
was  a  dragon’s  head,  and  at  the  stern  a  crooked  tail, 
and  both  were  gilded  over.  The  ship  was  high¬ 
sided  ;  but  the  fore  and  aft  parts  appeared  less  than 
they  should  be.  He  also  made  in  Nidaros  many 
and  large  dry-docks  of  the  best  material,  and  well 
timbered. 

Six  years  after  King  Olaf’s  death,  it  happened 
that  King  Eystein,  at  a  feast  at  Hustadir  in  Stim, 
was  seized  with  an  illness  which  soon  carried  him  off. 
He  died  the  29th  of  August  1123,  and  his  body 
was  carried  north  to  Nidaros,  and  buried  in  Christ 
church  ;  and  it  is  generally  said  that  so  many 
mourners  never  stood  over  any  man’s  grave  in  Nor¬ 
way  as  over  King  Ey stein’s,  at  least  since  the  time 
Magnus  the  Good,  Saint  Olaf’s  son,  died.  Eystein 
had  been  twenty  years  [1104-1123]  king  of  Nor¬ 
way  :  and  after  his  decease  his  brother  King  Sigurd 
was  the  sole  king  of  Norway  as  long  as  he  lived. 

*  Harald  died  1135.  Nine  of  his  sons  were  killed  by  his  brother  Eirik 
Eiinune,  the  tenth  son,  Olaf,  escaped  and  died  1141. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


155 


Chapter  XXYIII. — Of  the  Baptizing  the  People 

of  Smaland. 

The  Danish  king  Nikolas,  a  son  of  Svein  Ulfson, 
married  afterwards  the  Queen  Margaret,  a  daughter 
of  King  Inge,  who  had  before  been  married  to 
King  Magnus  Barefoot ;  and  their  sons  were  Nikolas 
and  Magnus  the  Strong.  King  Nikolas  sent  a  mes¬ 
sage  to  King  Sigurd  the  Crusader,  and  asked  him 
if  he  would  go  with  him  with  all  his  might  and 
help  him  to  the  east  of  the  Swedish  dominion,  to 
Smaland,  to  baptize  the  inhabitants  ;  for  the  people 
who  dwelt  there  had  no  regard  for  Christianity, 
although  some  of  them  had  allowed  themselves  to 
be  baptized.  At  that  time  there  were  many  people 
all  around  in  the  Swedish  dominions  who  were 

1 

heathens,  and  many  were  bad  Christians  ;  for  there 
were  some  of  the  kings  who  renounced  Christianity, 
and  continued  heathen  sacrifices,  as  Blotsvein,  and 
afterwards  Eirik  Arsale,  had  done.  King  Sigurd 
promised  to  undertake  this  journey,  and  the  kings 
appointed  their  meeting  at  Eyrarsund.*  King 
Sigurd  then  summoned  all  people  in  Norway  to  a 
levy,  both  of  men  and  ships ;  and  when  the  fleet 
was  assembled  he  had  about  300!  ships.  King 
Nikolas  came  very  early  to  the  meeting-place,  and 
stayed  there  a  long  time ;  and  the  bondes  murmured 
much,  and  said  the  Northmen  did  not  intend  to 
come.  Thereupon  the  Danish  army  dispersed,  and 

*  Eyrarsund  was  the  sound  at  the  entrance  into  the  Baltic. — L. 

t  =360. 


156 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


the  king  went  away  with  all  his  fleet.  King  Sigurd 
came  there  soon  afterwards,  and  was  ill  pleased  ; 
but  sailed  east  to  Svimraros,  and  held  a  House-tiling, 
at  which  Sigurd  spoke  about  King  Nikolas’s  breach 
of  faith ;  and  the  Northmen,  on  this  account,  deter¬ 
mined  to  go  marauding  in  his  country.  They  first 
plundered  a  village  called  Tumathorp,  which  is  not  far 
from  Lund ;  *  and  then  sailed  east  to  the  merchant- 
town  of  Calmar,  where  they  plundered,  as  well  as 
in  Smaland,  and  imposed  on  the  country  a  tribute 
of  1 500 1  cattle  for  ship  provision ;  and  the  people 
of  Smaland  received  Christianity.  After  this  King 
Sigurd  turned  about  with  his  fleet,  and  came  back 
to  his  kingdom  with  many  valuable  articles  and  great 
booty,  which  he  had  gathered  on  this  expedition  ; 
and  this  levy  was  called  the  Calmar  levy.  This  was 
the  summer  before  the  eclipse. t  This  was  the  only 
levy  King  Sigurd  carried  out  as  long  as  he  was  king. 


Chapter  XXIX. — Of  Thomrin  Stutfeld. 

It  happened  once  when  King  Sigurd  was  going 
from  the  drinking-table  to  vespers,  that  his  men  were 
very  drunk  and  merry ;  and  many  of  them  sat  outside 
the  church  singing  the  evening  song,  but  their  sing¬ 
ing  was  very  irregular.  Then  the  king  said,  “  Who 
is  that  fellow  I  see  standing  at  the  church  with  a 
skin  jacket  on?  ”  They  answered,  that  they  did  not 
know.  Then  the  king  said — 


*  This  statement  is  incorrect ;  Tumathorp  lies  near  Simrishamn. 

+  =1800.  t  The  eclipse  of  the  sun  occurred  August  11,  1124. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


157 


“  This  skin-clad  man,  in  sorry  plight, 

Puts  all  our  wisdom  here  to  flight.” 

Then  the  fellow  came  forward  and  said — 

u  I  thought  that  here  I  might  be  known, 

Although  my  dress  is  scanty  grown. 

’Tis  poor,  but  I  must  be  content : 

Unless,  great  king,  it’s  thy  intent 
To  give  me  better  ;  for  I  have  seen 
When  I  and  rags  had  strangers  been.” 

The  king  answered,  “  Come  to  me  to-morrow  when 
I  am  at  the  drink-table.”  The  night  passed  away ; 
and  the  morning  after  the  Icelander,  who  was  after¬ 
wards  called  Thorarin  Stutfeld,  went  into  the  drink¬ 
ing-room.  A  man  stood  outside  of  the  door  of  the 
room  with  a  horn  in  his  hand,  and  said,  “  Icelander ! 
the  king  says  that  if  thou  wilt  deserve  any  gift  from 
him  thou  shalt  compose  a  song  before  going  in,  and 
make  it  about  a  man  whose  name  is  Hakon  Serkson, 
and  who  is  called  Morstrut ;  *  and  speak  about  that 
surname  in  thy  song.”  The  man  who  spoke  to  him 
was  called  Arne  Fioruskeif.  Then  they  went  into 
the  room  ;  and  when  Thorarin  came  before  the  kind’s 
seat  he  recited  these  verses  : — 

“  Throndhjem’s  warrior-king  has  said 
The  skald  should  be  by  gifts  repaid, 

If  he  before  this  meeting  gave 

The  king’s  friend  Serk  a  passing  stave. 

The  generous  king  has  let  me  know 
My  stave,  to  please,  must  be  framed  so 
That  my  poor  verse  extol  the  fame 
Of  one  called  Hakon  Lump  by  name.” 

Then  said  the  king,  “  I  never  said  so,  and  some¬ 
body  has  been  making  a  mock  of  thee.  Hakon  him- 

*  Morstrut  is  a  short,  fat,  punchy  fellow. — L, 


158 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


self  shall  determine  what  punishment  thou  shalt 
have.  Go  into  his  suite.”  Hakon  said,  “  He  shall 
be  welcome  among  us,  for  I  can  see  where  the  joke 
came  from  ;  ”  and  he  placed  the  Icelander  at  his  side 
next  to  himself,  and  they  were  very  merry.  The  day 
was  drawing  to  a  close,  and  the  liquor  began  to  get 
into  their  heads,  when  Hakon  said,  “  Dost  thou  not 
think,  Icelander,  that  thou  owest  me  some  penalty  ? 
and  dost  thou  not  see  that  some  trick  has  been 
played  upon  thee  ?  ” 

Thorarin  replies,  “It  is  true,  indeed,  that  I  owe 
thee  some  compensation.” 

Hakon  says,  “  Then  we  shall  he  quits,  if  thou  wilt 
make  me  another  stave  about  Arne.” 

He  said  he  was  ready  to  do  so  ;  and  they  crossed 
over  to  the  side  of  the  room  where  Arne  was  sitting, 
and  Thorarin  gave  these  verses  : — 

“  Fioruskeif  has  often  spread, 

With  evil  heart  and  idle  head, 

The  eagle’s  voidings*  round  the  land, 

Lampoons  and  lies,  with  ready  hand. 

Yet  this  landlouper  t  we  all  know, 

In  Africa  scarce  fed  a  crow. 

Of  all  his  arms  used  in  the  field, 

Those  in  most  use  were  helm  and  shield.” 

Arne  sprang  up  instantly,  drew  his  sword,  and  was 
going  to  fall  upon  him  ;  but  Hakon  told  him  to  let 
it  alone  and  be  quiet,  and  bade  him  remember  that 

*  The  eagle’s  voidings  is  an  allusion  to  the  story  in  the  Edda.  When 
Odin,  in  the  shape  of  an  eagle,  stole  the  poet’s  drink  from  its  owner 
Suttung,  he  voided  it  in  his  flight  when  he  was  pursued ;  and  this  ex¬ 
crement  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  bad  poets,  and  is  their  inspiration,  or 
poet’s-drink. — L. 

t  Fioruskeif  is  a  landlouper,  as  well  as  Arne’s  surname. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


159 


if  it  came  to  a  quarrel  he  would  come  off  the  worst 
himself. 

Thorarin  afterwards  went  up  to  the  king,  and  said 
he  had  composed  a  poem  which  he  wished  the  king 
to  hear.  The  king  consented,  and  the  song  is  known 
by  the  name  of  the  Stutfeld  Poem.  The  king  asked 
Thorarin  what  he  intended  to  do.  He  replied,  it 
was  his  intention  to  go  to  Rome.  Then  the  king 
gave  him  much  money  for  his  pilgrimage,  and  told 
him  to  visit  him  on  his  return,  and  promised  to 
provide  for  him. 


Chapter  XXX. — Of  Sigurd  and  Ottar  Birting. 

It  is  told  that  King  Sigurd,  one  Whitsunday,  sat 
at  table  with  many  people,  among  whom  were  many 
of  his  friends  ;  and  when  he  came  to  his  high-seat, 
people  saw  that  his  countenance  saw  very  wild,  and 
as  if  he  had  been  weeping,  so  that  people  were  afraid 
of  what  might  follow.  The  king  rolled  his  eyes,  and 
looked  at  those  who  were  seated  on  the  benches. 
Then  he  seized  the  holy  book  which  he  had  brought 
with  him  from  abroad,  and  which  was  written  all 
over  with  gilded  letters ;  so  that  never  had  such  a 
costly  book  come  to  Norway.  His  queen  sat  by  his 
side.  Then  said  King  Sigurd,  “  Many  are  the 
changes  which  may  take  place  during  a  man’s  life¬ 
time.  I  had  two  things  which  were  dear  to  me 
above  all  when  I  came  from  abroad,  and  these  were 
this  book  and  the  queen  ;  and  now  I  think  the  one 
is  only  worse  and  more  loathsome  than  the  other,  and 


i6o 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


nothing  I  have  belonging  to  me  that  I  more  detest. 
The  queen  does  not  know  herself  how  hideous  she 
is;  for  a  goat’s  horn  is  standing  out  on  her  head, 
and  the  better  I  liked  her  before  the  worse  I  like 
her  now.  Thereupon  he  cast  the  book  on  the  fire 
which  was  burning  on  the  hall-floor,  and  gave  the 
queen  a  blow  with  his  fist  between  the  eyes.  The 
queen  wept ;  but  more  at  the  king’s  illness  than  at 
the  blow,  or  the  affront  she  had  suffered. 

Then  a  man  stood  up  before  the  king :  his  name 
was  Ottar  Birting ;  and  he  was  one  of  the  torch- 
bearers,  although  a  bonde’s  son,  and  was  on  service 
that  day.  He  was  of  small  stature,  but  of  agreeable 
appearance ;  lively,  bold,  and  full  of  fun ;  black 
haired,  and  of  a  dark  skin.  He  ran  and  snatched  the 
book  which  the  king  had  cast  into  the  fire,  held  it 
out,  and  said,  “  Different  were  the  days,1  sire,  when 
you  came  with  great  state  and  splendour  to  Norway, 
and  with  great  fame  and  honour ;  for  then  all  your 
friends  came  to  meet  you  with  joy,  and  were  glad  at 
your  coming.  All  as  one  man  would  have  you  for 
king,  and  have  you  in  the  highest  regard  and  honour. 
But  now  days  of  sorrow  are  come  over  us  ;  for  on 
this  holy  festival  many  of  your  friends  have  come 
to  you,  and  cannot  be  cheerful  on  account  of  your 
melancholy  and  ill-health.  It  is  much  to  be  desired 
that  you  would  be  merry  with  them ;  and  do,  good  king, 
take  this  saving  advice, — make  peace  first  with  the 
queen,  and  make  her  joyful  whom  you  have  so  highly 
affronted,  with  a  friendly  word  ;  and  then  all  your 
chiefs,  friends,  and  servants  :  that  is  my  advice.” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY.  l6l 

Then  said  King  Sigurd,  “  Dost  thou  dare  to  give 
me  advice,  thou  great  lump  of  a  houseman’s  lad  !  ” 
And  he  sprang  up,  drew  his  sword,  and  swung  it 
with  both  hands,  as  if  going  to  cut  him  down. 

But  Ottar  stood  quiet  and  upright ;  did  not  stir 
from  the  spot,  nor  show  the  slightest  sign  of  fear ; 
and  the  king  turned  round  the  sword-blade  which 
he  had  waved  over  Ottar’s  head,  and  gently  touched 
him  on  the  shoulder  with  it.  Then  he  sat  down  in 
silence  on  his  high-seat. 

All  were  silent  who  were  in  the  hall,  for  nobody 
dared  to  say  a  word.  Now  the  king  looked  around 
him,  milder  than  before,  and  said,  “It  is  difficult  to 
know  what  there  is  in  people.  Here  sat  my  friends, 
and  lendermen,  marshals,  and  shield-bearers,  and 
all  the  best  men  in  the  land ;  but  none  did  so  well 
against  me  as  this  man,  who  appears  to  you  of  little 
worth  compared  to  any  of  you,  although  now  he 
loves  me  most.  I  came  here  like  a  madman,  and 
would  have  destroyed  my  precious  property ;  but  he 
turned  aside  my  deed,  and  was  not  afraid  of  death 
lor  it.  Then  he  made  an  able  speech,  ordering  his 
words  so  that  they  were  honourable  to  me,  and  not 
saying  a  single  word  about  things  which  could  in¬ 
crease  my  vexation ;  but  even  avoiding  what  might, 
with  truth,  have  been  said.  So  excellent  was  his 
speech,  that  no  man  here,  however  great  his  under¬ 
standing,  could  have  spoken  better.  Then  I  sprang 
up  in  a  pretended  rage,  and  made  as  if  I  would  have 
cut  him  down ;  but  he  was  as  courageous  as  if  he 
had  nothing  to  fear :  and  seeing  that,  I  let  go  my 

VOL.  IV.  T, 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


162 

purpose ;  for  he  was  altogether  innocent.  Now  ye 
shall  know,  my  friends,  how  I  intend  to  reward 
him  :  he  was  before  my  torch-bearer,  and  shall  now 
be  my  lenderman ;  and  there  shall  follow  what  is 
still  more,  that  he  shall  be  the  most  distinguished 
of  my  lendermen.”  Go  thou  now  and  sit  among 
the  lendermen,  and  be  a  servant  no  longer. 

Ottar  became  one  of  the  most  celebrated  men  in 
Norway  for  various  good  and  praiseworthy  deeds. 


Chapter  XXXI. — Of  King  Sigurd's  Dream. 

In  King  Sigurd’s  latter  days  he  was  once  at  an 
entertainment  at  one  of  his  farms  ;  and  in  the  morn¬ 
ing  when  he  was  dressed  he  was  silent  and  still,  so 
that  his  friends  were  afraid  he  was  not  able  to  govern 
himself.  Now  the  farm-bailiff,  who  was  a  man  of 
good  sense  and  courage,  brought  him  into  conversa¬ 
tion,  and  asked  if  he  had  heard  any  news  of  such 
importance  that  it  disturbed  his  mirth ;  or  if  the 
entertainment  had  not  satisfied  him ;  or  il  there 
was  anything  else  that  people  could  remedy. 

King  Sigurd  said,  that  none  of  the  things  he  had 
mentioned  was  the  cause.  “But  it  is  that  I  think 
upon  the  dream  I  had  in  the  night.” 

“  Sire,”  replied  he,  “  may  it  prove  a  lucky  dream  ! 
I  would  gladly  hear  it.” 

The  king :  “I  thought  that  I  was  in  Jadar,  and 
looked  out  towards  the  sea ;  and  that  I  saw  some¬ 
thing  very  black  moving  itself ;  and  when  it  came 
near  it  appeared  to  be  a  large  tree,  of  which  the 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


163 

blanches  stietched  far  above  the  water,  and  the  roots 
weie  down  in  the  sea.  Now  when  the  tree  came  to 
the  shore  it  broke  into  pieces,  and  drove  all  about  the 
land,  both  the  mainland  and  the  out-islands,  rocks, 
and  strands ;  and  it  appeared  to  me  as  if  I  saw  over 
all  Norway  along  the  sea-coast,  and  saw  pieces  of 

that  tiee,  some  small  and  some  large,  driven  into 
every  bight.” 

Then  said  the  bailiff,  “It  is  likely  that  you  can 
best  interpret  this  dream  yourself;  and  I  would 
willingly  hear  your  interpretation  of  it.” 

Then  said  the  king,  “This  dream  appears  to  me  to 
denote  the  arrival  in  this  country  of  some  man  who 
will  fix  his  seat  here,  and  whose  posterity  will  spread 

itself  ovei  the  land  ;  but  with  unequal  power,  as  the 
dream  shows.” 

Chapter  XXXII.— Of  Aslah  Heine. 

It  so  happened  once,  that  King  Sigurd  sat  in  a 
gloomy  mood  among  many  worthy  men.  It  was  a 
Fiiday  evening,  and  the  kitchen-master  asked  what 
meat  should  be  made  ready. 

The  king  replies,  “What  else  but  flesh-meat?” 
And  so  harsh  were  his  words  that  nobody  dared  to 
contradict  him,  and  all  were  ill  at  ease.  Now  when 
people  prepared  to  go  to  table,  dishes  of  warm 
flesh-meat  were  carried  in ;  but  all  were  silent,  and 
grieved  at  the  king’s  illness.  Before  the  blessing 
was  pronounced  *  over  the  meat,  a  man  called  Aslak 

*  Or  rather  signed  over  the  meat ;  viz.,  the  sign  of  the  cross  made 
over  it.— L. 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


164 

Hane  spoke.  He  had  been  a  long  time  with  King 
Sigurd  on  his  journey  abroad,  and  was  not  a  man  of 
any  great  family ;  and  was  small  of  stature,  but  fiery. 
When  he  perceived  how  it  was,  and  that  none  dared 
to  accost  the  king,  he  asked,  “What  is  it,  sire,  that 
is  smoking  on  the  dish  before  you  ?  ” 

The  king  replies,  “What  do  you  mean,  Aslak? 
what  do  you  think  it  is  ?  ” 

Aslak  :  “  I  think  it  is  flesh-meat ;  and  I  would  it 

were  not  so.” 

The  king  :  “  But  if  it  be  so,  Aslak  ?  ” 

He  replied,  “  It  would  be  vexatious  to  know  that 
a  gallant  king,  who  has  gained  so  much  honour  in 
the  world,  should  so  forget  himself.  When  you  rose 
up  out  of  Jordan,  after  bathing  in  the  same  waters 
as  God  himself,  with  palm-leaves  in  your  hands,  and 
the  cross  upon  your  breast,  it  was  something  else  you 
promised,  sire,  than  to  eat  flesh-meat  on  a  Friday. 
If  a  meaner  man  were  to  do  so,  he  would  merit  a 
heavy  punishment.  This  royal  hall  is  not  so  beset 
as  it  should  be,  when  it  falls  upon  me,  a  mean  man, 
to  challenge  such  an  act.” 

The  king  sat  silent,  and  did  not  partake  of  the 
meat ;  and  when  the  time  for  eating  was  drawing  to 
an  end,  the  king  ordered  the  flesh  dishes  to  be  re¬ 
moved,  and  other  food  was  brought  in,  such  as  it  is 
permitted  to  use.  When  the  meal-time  was  almost 
past,  the  king  began  to  be  cheerful,  and  to  drink. 
People  advised  Aslak  to  fly,  but  he  said  he  would 
not  do  so.  “I  do  not  see  how  it  could  help  me  ; 
and,  to  tell  the  truth,  it  is  as  good  to  die  now  that  I 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


165 


have  got  my  will,  and  have  prevented  the  king  from 
committing  a  sin.  It  is  for  him  to  kill  me  if  he 
likes.” 

Towards  evening  the  king  called  him,  and  said, 
“  Who  set  thee  on,  Aslak  Hane,  to  speak  such  free 
words  to  me  in  the  hearing  of  so  many  people  ?  ” 

“No  one,  sire,  but  myself.” 

The  king  :  “  Thou  wouldst  like,  no  doubt,  to  know 
what  thou  art  to  have  for  such  boldness :  what 
thinkest  thou  it  deserves  ?  ” 

He  replies,  “If  it  be  well  rewarded,  sire,  I  shall 
be  glad ;  but  should  it  be  otherwise,  then  it  is  your 
concern.” 

Then  the  king  said,  “  Smaller  is  thy  reward  than 
thou  hast  deserved.  I  give  thee  three  farms.  It  has 
turned  out,  what  could  not  have  been  expected,  that 
thou  hast  prevented  me  from  a  great  crime,— thou, 
and  not  the  lendermen,  who  are  indebted  to  me  for 
so  much  good.”  And  so  it  ended. 


Chapter  XXXIII. — Of  a  Woman  brought  one  night  in 

Yule  to  the  King. 

One  Yule  eve  the  king  sat  in  the  hall,  and  the 
tables  were  laid  out ;  and  the  king  said,  “  Get  me 
flesh-meat.” 

They  answered,  “  Sire,  it  is  not  the  custom  to  eat 
flesh-meat  on  Yule  eve.” 

The  king  said,  “  If  it  be  not  the  custom  I  will 
make  it  the  custom.” 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


1 66 

They  went  out,  and  brought  him  a  dolphin.*  The 
king  stuck  his  knife  into  it,  but  did  not  eat  of  it. 
Then  the  king  said,  “  Bring  me  a  girl  here  into  the 
hall.”  They  brought  him  a  woman  whose  head-dress 
went  far  down  her  brows.  The  king  took  her  hand 
in  his  hands,  looked  at  her,  and  said,  “An  ill 
looking  girl !  ”  t 


Chapter  XXXI Y. — Harold  Gille  comes  to  Norway. 

Halkel  Huk,  a  son  of  Jon  Smiorbalte,  who  was 
lenderman  in  More,  made  a  voyage  in  the  West  sea, 
all  the  way  to  the  South  Hebudes.  A  man  came  to 
him  out  of  Ireland  called  Gillikrist,  J  and  gave  him¬ 
self  out  for  a  son  of  King  Magnus  Barefoot.  His 
mother  came  with  him,  and  said  his  other  name  was 
Harald.  Halkel  received  the  man,  brought  him  to 
Norway  with  him,  and  went  immediately  to  King 
Sigurd  with  Harald  and  his  mother.  When  they 
had  told  their  story  to  the  king,  he  talked  over 
the  matter  with  his  principal  men,  and  bade  them 
give  their  opinions  upon  it.  They  were  of  different 
opinions,  and  all  left  it  to  the  king  himself,  although 
there  were  several  who  opposed  this ;  and  the  king 
followed  his  own  counsel.  King  Sigurd  ordered 

*  The  flesh  of  dolphins  and  porpoises  appears  to  have  been  in  common 
use  in  that  age,  and  probably  was  not  reckoned  altogether  flesh-meat  not 
to  be  used  on  Fridays  or  fish-days.— L. 

f  What  follows  in  this  chapter  is  rather  too  coarse  and  indecent  to 
be  translated,  and  is  not  necesssary,  nor  relevant,  unless  as  showing  the 
king’s  insanity. — L 

+  Query,  Gilchrist  ? 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


167 


Harald  to  be  called  before  him,  and  told  him  that 
he  would  not  deny  him  the  proof,  by  ordeal,  of  who 
his  father  was ;  but  on  condition  that  if  he  should 
prove  his  descent  according  to  his  claim,  he  should 
not  desire  the  kingdom  in  the  lifetime  of  King 
Sigurd,  or  of  King  Magnus  :  and  to  this  he  bound 
himself  by  oath.  King  Sigurd  said  he  must  tread 
over  hot  iron  to  prove  his  birth ;  but  this  ordeal  was 
thought  by  many  too  severe,  as  he  was  to  undergo  it 
merely  to  prove  his  father,  and  without  getting  the 
kingdom ;  but  Harald  agreed  to  it,  and  fixed  on  the 
trial  by  iron :  and  this  ordeal  was  the  greatest  ever 
made  in  Norway ;  for  nine  glowing  ploughshares 
were  laid  down,  and  Harald  went  over  them  with 
bare  feet,  attended  by  two  bishops. 

Three  days  after  the  iron  trial  the  ordeal  was 
taken  to  proof,  and  the  feet  were  found  unburnt. 
Thereafter  King  Sigurd  acknowledged  Harald’ s  rela¬ 
tionship  ;  but  his  son  Magnus  conceived  a  great 
hatred  of  him,  and  in  this  many  chiefs  followed 
Magnus.  King  Sigurd  trusted  so  much  to  his  favour 
with  the  whole  people  of  the  country,  that  he  desired 
all  men,  under  oath,  to  promise  to  accept  King 
Magnus  after  him  as  their  king ;  and  all  the  people 
took  this  oath. 


Chapter  XXXY. — Of  a  Race  between  Magnus  and  Harald 

Gille. 


Harald  Gille  was  a  tall,  slender-grown  man,  of  a 
long  neck  and  face,  black  eyes,  and  dark  hair,  brisk 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


1 68 

and  quick ;  and  wore  generally  the  Irish  dress  of 
short  light  clothes.  The  Norse  language  was  difficult 
for  Harald,  and  he  brought  out  words  which  many 
laughed  at.  Harald  sat  late  drinking  one  evening. 
He  spoke  with  another  man  about  different  things  in 
the  west  in  Ireland ;  and  among  other  things,  said 
that  there  were  men  in  Ireland  so  swift  of  foot  that 
no  horse  could  overtake  them  in  running.  Magnus 
the  king’s  son  heard  this,  and  said,  “Now  he  is 
lying,  as  he  usually  does.” 

Harald  replies,  “It  is  true  that  there  are  men  in 
Ireland  whom  no  horse  in  Norway  could  overtake.” 
They  exchanged  some  words  about  this,  and  both 
were  drunk.  Then  said  Magnus,  “  Thou  shalt  make 
a  wager  with  me,  and  stake  thy  head  if  thou  canst 
not  run  so  fast  as  I  ride  upon  my  horse,  and  I  shall 
stake  my  gold  ring.” 

Harald  replies,  “  I  did  not  say  that  I  could  run  so 
swiftly ;  but  I  said  that  men  are  to  be  found  in 
Ireland  who  will  run  as  fast ;  and  on  that  I  would 
wager.” 

The  king’s  son  Magnus  replies,  “  I  will  not  go  to 
Ireland  about  it :  we  are  wagering  here,  and  not 
there.” 

Harald  on  this  went  to  bed,  and  would  not  speak 
to  him  more  about  it.  This  was  in  Oslo.  The  fol¬ 
lowing  morning,  when  the  early  mass  was  over, 
Magnus  rode  up  the  street,  and  sent  a  message  to 
Harald  to  come  to  him.  When  Harald  came  he  was 
dressed  thus.  He  had  on  a  shirt  and  trousers  which 
were  bound  with  ribands  under  his  foot-soles,  a 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


169 


short  cloak,  an  Irish  hat  on  his  head,  and  a  spear- 
shaft  in  his  hand.  Magnus  set  up  a  mark  for  the 
race.  Harald  said,  “  Thou  hast  made  the  course  too 
long ;  ”  but  Magnus  made  it  at  once  even  much 
longer,  and  said  it  was  still  too  short.  There  were 
many  spectators.  They  began  the  race,  and  Harald 
followed  always  the  horse’s  pace;  and  when  they 
came  to  the  end  of  the  race-course,  Magnus  said, 
“  Thou  hadst  hold  of  the  saddle-girths,  and  the  horse 
dragged  thee  along.”  Magnus  had  his  swift  runner, 
the  Gautland  horse.  They  began  the  race  again,  and 
Harald  ran  the  whole  race-course  before  the  horse. 
When  they  came  to  the  end  Harald  asked,  “  Had  I 
hold  of  the  saddle-girths  now  ?  ” 

Magnus  replied,  “Thou  hadst  the  start  at  first.” 

Then  Magnus  let  his  horse  breathe  a  while,  and 
when  he  was  ready  he  put  spurs  to  him,  and  set  off 
in  full  gallop.  Harald  stood  still,  and  Magnus  looked 
back,  and  called,  “  Set  off  now.” 

Then  Harald  ran  quickly  past  the  horse,  and  came 
to  the  end  of  the  course  so  long  before  him  that  he 
lay  down,  and  got  up  and  saluted  Magnus  as  he  came 
in. 

Then  they  went  home  to  the  town.  In  the  mean¬ 
time  King  Sigurd  had  been  at  high  mass,  and  knew 
nothing  of  this  until  after  he  had  dined  that  day. 
Then  he  said  to  Magnus  angrily,  “  Thou  callest 
Harald  useless ;  but  I  think  thou  art  a  great  fool, 
and  knowest  nothing  of  the  customs  of  foreign  people. 
Host  thou  not  know  that  men  in  other  countries 
exercise  themselves  in  other  feats  than  in  filling 


170 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


themselves  with  ale,  and  making  themselves  mad, 
and  so  unfit  for  everything  that  they  scarcely  know 
each  other?  Give  Harald  his  ring,  and  do  not  try 
to  make  a  fool  of  him  again,  as  long  as  I  am  above 
ground.” 


Chapter  XXX YI. — Of  Sigurd’s  swimming. 

It  happened  once  that  Sigurd  was  out  in  his  ship, 
which  lay  in  the  harbour ;  and  there  lay  a  merchant 
ship,  which  was  an  Iceland  trader,  at  the  side  of 
it.  Harald  Gille  was  in  the  forecastle  of  the  king’s 
ship,  and  Svein  Kimhildson,  a  son  of  Knut  Svein- 
son  of  Jadar,  had  his  berth  the  next  before  him. 
There  was  also  Sigurd  Sigurdson,  a  gallant  lender- 
man,  who  himself  commanded  a  ship.  It  was  a  day 
of  beautiful  weather  and  warm  sunshine,  and  many 
went  out  to  swim,  both  from  the  long-ship  and  the 
merchant  vessel.  An  Iceland  man,  who  was  among 
the  swimmers,  amused  himself  by  drawing  those 
under  water  who  could  not  swim  so  well  as  himself ; 
and  at  that  the  spectators  laughed.  When  King 
Sigurd  saw  and  heard  this,  he  cast  off  his  clothes, 
sprang  into  the  water,  and  swam  to  the  Icelander, 
seized  him,  and  pressed  him  under  the  water,  and 
held  him  there ;  and  as  soon  as  the  Icelander  came 
up  the  king  pressed  him  down  again,  and  thus  the 
one  time  after  the  other. 

Then  said  Sigurd  Sigurdson,  “Shall  we  let  the 
king  kill  this  man  ?  ” 

Somebody  said,  “  No  one  has  any  wish  to  interfere.” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


171 


Sigurd  replies,  that  “if  Dag  Eilifson  were  here, 
we  should  not  be  without  one  who  dared.” 

Then  Sigurd  sprang  overboard,  swam  to  the  king, 
took  hold  of  him,  and  said,  “  Sire,  do  not  kill  the 
man.  Everybody  sees  that  you  are  a  much  better 
swimmer.” 

The  king  replies,  “Let  me  loose,  Sigurd;  I  shall 
be  his  death,  for  he  will  destroy  our  people  under 
water.” 

Sigurd  says,  “  Let  us  first  amuse  ourselves  ;  and, 
Icelander,  do  thou  set  off  to  the  land,”  which  he  did. 
The  king  now  got  loose  from  Sigurd,  and  swam  to 
his  ship,  and  Sigurd  went  his  way  :  but  the  king 
ordered  that  Sigurd  should  not  presume  to  come 
into  his  presence ;  this  was  reported  to  Sigurd,  and 
so  he  went  up  into  the  country. 


Chapter  XXXVII. — Of  Harold  and  Svein  Rimhildson. 

In  the  evening,  when  people  were  going  to  bed, 
some  of  the  ship’s  men  were  still  at  their  games  up  in 
the  country.  Harald  was  with  those  who  played  on 
the  land,  and  told  his  footboy  to  go  out  to  the  ship, 
make  his  bed,  and  wait  for  him  there.  The  lad  did 
as  he  was  ordered.  The  king  had  gone  to  sleep ; 
and  as  the  boy  thought  Harald  late,  he  laid  himself 
in  Harald’ s  berth.  Svein  Rimhildson  said,  “It  is  a 
shame  for  brave  men  to  be  brought  from  their  farms 
at  home,  and  to  have  here  serving  boys  to  sleep  be¬ 
side  them.”  The  lad  said  that  Harald  had  ordered 
him  to  come  there.  Svein  Rimhildson  said,  “  We  do 


172 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


not  so  much  care  for  Harald  himself  lying  here,  if 
he  do  not  bring  here  his  slaves  and  beggars ;  ”  and 
seized  a  riding-whip,  and  struck  the  hoy  on  the  head 
until  the  blood  flowed  from  him.  The  boy  ran  im¬ 
mediately  up  the  country,  and  told  Harald  what  had 
happened,  who  went  immediately  out  to  the  ship,  to 
the  aft  part  of  the  forecastle,  and  with  a  pole-axe 
struck  Svein  so  that  he  received  a  severe  wound  on 
his  hands  ;  and  then  Harald  went  on  shore.  Svein  ran 
to  the  land  after  him,  and,  gathering  his  friends,  took 
Harald  prisoner,  and  they  were  about  hanging  him. 
But  while  they  were  busy  about  this,  Sigurd  Sigurd- 
son  went  out  to  the  king’s  ship  and  awoke  him. 
When  the  king  opened  his  eyes  and  recognised 
Sigurd,  he  said,  “For  this  reason  thou  slialt  die, 
that  thou  hast  intruded  into  my  presence  ;  for  thou 
knowest  that  I  forbade  thee  :  ”  and  with  these  words 
the  king  sprang  up. 

Sigurd  replied,  “  That  is  in  your  power  as  soon  as 
you  please  ;  but  other  business  is  more  urgent.  Go 
to  the  land  as  quickly  as  possible  to  help  thy  brother ; 
for  the  Itogaland  people  are  going  to  hang  him.” 

Then  said  the  king,  “  God  give  us  luck,  Sigurd  ! 
Call  my  trumpeter,  and  let  him  call  the  people  all 
to  land,  and  to  meet  me.” 

The  king  sprang  on  the  land,  and  all  who  knew 
him  followed  him  to  where  the  gallows  was  being 
erected.  The  king  instantly  took  Harald  to  him ; 
and  all  the  people  gathered  to  the  king  in  full 
armour,  as  they  heard  the  trumpet.  Then  the  king- 
ordered  that  Svein  and  all  his  comrades  should 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


173 


depart  from  the  country  as  outlaws  ;  but  by  the  in¬ 
tercession  of  good  men  the  king  was  prevailed  on  to 
let  them  remain  and  hold  their  properties,  but  no 
mulct  should  be  paid  for  Svein’s  wound. 

Then  Sigurd  Sigurdson  asked  if  the  king  wished 
that  he  should  go  forth  out  of  the  country. 

“  That  will  I  not,”  said  the  king  ;  “  for  I  can  never 
be  without  thee.” 


Chapter  XXXYIII. — Of  King  Olafs  Miracle  on  a  Man 
whose  Tongue  had  been  cut  out. 

There  was  a  young  and  poor  man  called  Kolbein ; 
and  Thora,  King  Sigurd  the  Crusader’s  mother,  had 
ordered  his  tongue  to  be  cut  out  of  his  mouth,  and 
for  no  other  cause  than  that  this  young  man  had 
taken  a  piece  of  meat  out  of  the  king-mother’s  tub 
which  he  said  the  cook  had  given  him,  and  which 
the  cook  had  not  ventured  to  serve  up  to  her.  The 
man  had  long  gone  about  speechless.  So  says  Einar 
Skulason  in  Olafs  ballad  : — 

“  The  proud  rich  dame,  for  little  cause, 

Had  the  lad’s  tongue  cut  from  his  jaws  : 

The  helpless  man,  of  speech  deprived, 

His  dreadful  sore  wound  scarce  survived. 

A  few  weeks  since  at  Hlid  was  seen, 

As  well  as  ever  he  had  been, 

The  same  poor  lad — to  speech  restored 
By  Olaf’s  power,  whom  he  adored.” 

Afterwards  the  young  man  came  to  Nidaros,  and 
watched  in  the  Christ  church  ;  but  at  the  second 
mass  for  Olaf  before  matins  he  fell  asleep,  and 
thought  he  saw  King  Olaf  the  Saint  coming  to  him  ; 


174 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


and  that  Olaf  talked  to  him,  and  took  hold  with 
his  hands  of  the  stump  of  his  tongue  and  pulled  it. 
Now  when  he  awoke  he  found  himself  restored,  and 
joyfully  did  he  thank  our  Lord  and  the  holy  Saint 
Olaf,  who  had  pitied  and  helped  him  ;  for  he  had 
come  there  speechless,  and  had  gone  to  the  holy 
shrine,  and  went  away  cured,  and  with  his  speech 
clear  and  distinct. 


Chapter  XXXIX. — Of  King  Olaf  s  Miracle  with  a  Prisoner. 

The  heathens  took  prisoner  a  young  man  of 
Danish  family  and  carried  him  to  Vindland,  where 
he  was  in  fetters  along  with  other  prisoners.  In  the 
day-time  he  was  alone  in  irons,  without  a  guard ; 
but  at  night  a  peasant’s  son  was  beside  him  in  the 
chain,  that  he  might  not  escape  from  them.  This 
poor  man  never  got  sleep  or  rest  from  vexation  and 
sorrow,  and  considered  in  many  ways  what  could 
help  him ;  for  he  had  a  great  dread  of  slavery,  and 
was  pining  with  hunger  and  torture.  He  could 
not  again  expect  to  be  ransomed  by  his  friends,  as 
they  had  already  restored  him  twice  from  heathen 
lands  with  their  own  money ;  and  he  well  knew 
that  it  would  be  difficult  and  expensive  for  them  to 
submit  a  third  time  to  this  burden.  It  is  well  with 
the  man  who  does  not  undergo  so  much  in  the  world 
as  this  man  knew  he  had  suffered.  He  saw  but  one 
way ;  and  that  was  to  get  off  and  escape  if  he  could. 
He  resolved  upon  this  in  the  night-time,  killed  the 
peasant,  and  cut  his  foot  off  after  killing  him  :  and 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


175 


set  off  to  the  forest  with  the  chain  upon  his  leg. 
Now  when  the  people  knew  this,  soon  after  daylight 
in  the  morning,  they  pursued  him  with  two  dogs 
accustomed  to  trace  any  one  who  escaped,  and  to 
find  him  in  the  forest  however  carefully  he  might  be 
concealed.  They  got  him  into  their  hands,  and  beat 
him,  and  did  him  all  kinds  of  mischief ;  and,  dragging 
him  home,  left  him  barely  alive,  and  showed  him  no 
mercy.  They  tortured  him  severely ;  put  him  in  a 
dark  room,  in  which  there  lay  already  sixteen 
Christian  men  ;  and  bound  him  both  with  iron  and 
other  tyings,  as  fast  as  they  could.  Then  he  began 
to  think  that  the  misery  and  pain  he  had  endured 
before  were  but  shadows  to  his  present  sufferings. 
He  saw  no  man  before  his  eyes  in  this  prison  who 
would  beg  for  mercy  for  him  ;  no  one  had  compassion 
on  his  wretchedness,  except  the  Christian  men  who 
lay  bound  with  him,  who  sorrowed  with  him,  and 
bemoaned  his  fate  together  with  their  own  misfortunes 
and  helplessness.  One  day  they  advised  him  to  make 
a  vow  to  the  holy  King  Olaf,  to  devote  himself  to 
some  office  in  his  sacred  house,  if  he,  by  God’s  com¬ 
passion  and  Saint  Olaf’s  prayers  could  get  away  from 
this  prison.  He  gladly  agreed  to  this,  and  made  a 
vow  and  prepared  himself  for  the  situation  they  men¬ 
tioned  to  him.  The  night  after  he  thought  in  his 
sleep  that  he  saw  a  man,  not  tall,  standing  at  his 
side,  who  spoke  to  him  thus  :  “Hear,  thou  wretched 
man,  why  dost  thou  not  get  up  ?  ” 

He  replied,  “  Sir,  who  are  you  ?” 

“  I  am  King  Olaf,  on  whom  thou  hast  called.” 


176 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


“  Oh,  my  good  lord  !  gladly  would  I  raise  myself ; 
but  I  lie  bound  with  iron  and  with  chains  on  my 
legs,  and  also  the  other  men  who  lie  here.” 

Thereupon  the  king  accosts  him  with  the  words, 
“  Stand  up  at  once,  and  be  not  afraid  ;  for  thou  art 
loose.” 

He  awoke  immediately,  and  told  his  comrades 
what  had  appeared  to  him  in  this  dream.  They  told 
him  to  stand  up,  and  try  if  it  was  true.  He  stood 
up,  and  observed  that  he  was  loose.  Now  said  his 
fellow-prisoners,  this  would  help  him  but  little,  for 
the  door  was  locked  both  on  the  inside  and  on  the 
outside.  Then  an  old  man  who  sat  there  in  a 
deplorable  condition  put  in  his  word,  and  told  him 
not  to  doubt  the  mercy  of  the  man  who  had  loosened 
his  chains  :  “  For  he  has  wrought  this  miracle  on  thee 
that  thou  shouldst  enjoy  his  mercy,  and  hereafter 
be  free,  without  suffering  more  misery  and  torture. 
Make  haste,  then,  and  seek  the  door;  and  if  thou 
are  able  to  slip  out,  thou  art  saved.” 

He  did  so,  found  the  door  open,  slipped  out,  and 
away  to  the  forest.  As  soon  as  the  Vindland  people 
were  aware  of  this  they  set  loose  the  dogs,  and  pur¬ 
sued  him  in  great  haste ;  and  the  poor  man  lay  hid, 
and  saw  well  where  they  were  following  him.  But 
now  the  hounds  lost  the  trace  when  they  came 
nearer,  and  all  the  eyes  that  sought  him  were  struck 
with  a  blindness,  so  that  nobody  could  find  him, 
although  he  lay  before  their  feet ;  and  they  all  re¬ 
turned  home,  vexed  that  they  could  not  find  him. 
King  Olaf  did  not  permit  this  man  s  destruction  after 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


1 77 

lie  had  reached  the  forest,  and  restored  him  also  to 
his  health  and  hearing;  for  they  had  so  long  tortured 
and  beaten  him  that  he  had  become  deaf.  At  last 
he  came  on  board  of  a  ship,  with  two  other  Christian 
men  who  had  been  long  afflicted  in  that  country. 
All  of  them  worked  zealously  in  this  vessel,  and  so 
had  a  successful  flight.  Then  he  repaired  to  the 
holy  man’s  house,  strong  and  fit  to  bear  arms.  Now 
he  was  vexed  at  his  vow,  went  from  his  promise  to 
the  holy  king,  ran  away  one  day,  and  came  in  the 
evening  to  a  bonde  wTho  gave  him  lodging  for  God’s 
sake.  I  hen  in  the  night  he  saw  three  girls  coming 
to  him  ;  and  handsome  and  nobly  dressed  were  they. 
Ihey  spoke  to  him  directly,  and  sharply  reprimanded 
him  for  having  been  so  bold  as  to  run  from  the  good 
king  who  had  shown  so  much  compassion  to  him, 
first  in  freeing  him  from  his  irons,  and  then  from 
the  pi i son  ,  and  yet  he  had  deserted  the  mild  master 
into  whose  service  he  had  entered.  Then  he  awoke 
full  of  terror,  got  up  early,  and  told  the  house-father 
his  dream.  I  he  good  man  had  nothing  so  earnest 
in  life  as  to  send  him  back  to  the  holy  place.  This 
miracle  was  first  written  down  by  a  man  who  him¬ 
self  saw  the  man,  and  the  marks  of  the  chains 
upon  his  body. 


Chapter  XL. — King  Sigurd  Marries  Cecilia. 

In  the  last  period  of  King  Sigurd’s  life,  his  new 
and  extraordinary  resolution  was  whispered  about, — 
that  he  would  be  divorced  from  his  queen,  and  would 

VOL.  1W 


i78 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


take  Cecilia,  who  was  a  great  mans  daughter,  to 
wife.  He  ordered  accordingly  a  great  feast  to  be 
prepared,  and  intended  to  hold  his  wedding  with  her 
in  Bergen.  Now  when  Bishop  Magne  heard  this,  he 
was  very  sorry ;  and  one  day  the  bishop  goes  to  the 
king’s  hall,  and  with  him  a  priest  called  Sigurd,  who 
was  afterwards  bishop  of  Bergen.  When  they  came 
to  the  king’s  hall,  the  bishop  sent  the  king  a  message 
that  he  would  like  to  meet  him  ;  and  asked  the  king 
to  come  out  to  him.  He  did  so,  and  came  out  with 
a  drawn  sword  in  his  hand.  He  received  the  bishop 
kindly,  and  asked  him  to  go  in  and  sit  down  to  table 
with  him. 

The  bishop  replies,  “  I  have  other  business  now. 
Is  it  true,  sire,  what  is  told  me,  that  thou  hast  the 
intention  of  marrying,  and  of  driving  away  thy  queen, 
and  taking  another  wife  ?  ” 

The  king  said  it  was  true. 

Then  the  bishop  changed  countenance,  and  angrily 
replied,  “  How  can  it  come  into  your  mind,  sire,  to 
do  such  an  act  in  our  bishopric  as  to  betray  God’s 
word  and  law,  and  the  holy  Church  ?  It  surprises 
me  that  you  treat  with  such  contempt  our  episcopal 
office,  and  your  own  royal  office.  I  will  now  do 
what  is  my  duty;  and  in  the  name  of  God,  of  the 
holy  King  Olaf,  of  Peter  the  apostle,  and  of  the 
other  saints,  forbid  thee  this  wickedness.” 

While  he  thus  spoke  he  stood  straight  up,  as  if 
stretching  out  his  neck  to  the  blow,  and  as  if  ready 
if  the  king  chose  to  let  the  sword  fall ;  and  the  priest 
Sigurd,  who  afterwards  was  bishop,  has  declared  that 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


179 


the  sky  appeared  to  him  no  bigger  than  a  calf’s  skin, 
so  frightful  did  the  appearance  of  the  king  present 
itself  to  him.  The  king  returned  to  the  hall,  how¬ 
ever,  without  saying  a  word  ;  and  the  bishop  went 
to  his  house  and  home  so  cheerful  and  gay  that  he 
laughed,  and  saluted  every  child  on  his  way,  and 
was  playing  with  his  fingers.  Then  the  priest  Sigurd 
asked  him  the  reason,  saying,  “  Why  are  you  so 
cheerful,  sir  ?  Do  you  not  consider  that  the  king 
may  be  exasperated  against  you?  and  would  it  not 
be  better  to  get  out  of  the  way  ?  ” 

Then  said  the  bishop,  “  It  appears  to  me  more 
likely  that  he  will  not  act  so ;  and  besides,  what 
death  could  be  better,  or  more  desirable,  than  to 
leave  life  for  the  honour  of  God  ?  or  to  die  for  the 
holy  cause  of  Christianity  and  our  own  office,  by  pre¬ 
venting  that  which  is  not  right  ?  I  am  so  cheerful 
because  I  have  done  what  I  ought  to  do.” 

There  was  much  noise  in  the  town  about  this. 
The  king  got  ready  for  a  journey,  and  took  with  him 
corn,  malt,  and  honey.  He  went  south  to  Stavanger, 
and  prepared  a  feast  there  for  his  marriage  with 
Cecilia.  When  the  bishop  who  ruled  there  *  heard 
of  this  he  went  to  the  king,  and  asked  if  it  were 
true  that  he  intended  to  marry  in  the  lifetime  of 
the  queen. 

The  king  said  it  was  so. 

The  bishop  answers,  “  If  it  be  so,  sire,  you  must 
know  how  much  such  a  thing  is  forbidden  to  inferior 
persons.  Now  it  appears  as  if  you  thought  it  was 

*  His  name  was  Reinald,  and  he  was  by  birth  an  Englishman. 


i8o 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


allowable  for  you,  because  you  have  great  power,  and 
that  it  is  proper  for  you,  although  it  is  against  right 
and  propriety  ;  but  I  do  not  know  how  you  will  do 
it  in  our  bishopric,  dishonouring  thereby  God’s  com¬ 
mand,  the  holy  Church,  and  our  episcopal  authority. 
But  you  must  bestow  a  great  amount  of  gifts  and 
estates  on  this  foundation,  and  thereby  pay  the  mulct 
due  to  God  and  to  us  for  such  transgression.” 

Then  said  the  king,  “  Take  what  thou  wilt  of  our 
possessions.  Thou  art  far  more  reasonable  than 
Bishop  Magne.” 

Then  the  king  went  away,  as  well  pleased  with 
this  bishop  as  ill  pleased  with  him  who  had  laid  a 
prohibition  on  him.  Thereafter  the  king  married  the 
girl,  and  loved  her  tenderly. 


Chapter  XLI. — Improvement  of  the  Merchant  Town  of 

Konuncfahella. 

King  Sigurd  improved  the  town  of  Konungahella 
so  much,  that  there  was  not  a  greater  town  in  Norway 
at  the  time,  and  he  remained  there  long  for  the  de¬ 
fence  of  the  frontiers.  He  built  a  king’s  house  in 
the  castle,  and  imposed  a  duty  on  all  the  districts  in 
the  neighbourhood  of  the  town,  as  well  as  on  the 
townspeople, — that  every  person  of  nine  years  of  age 
and  upwards  should  bring  to  the  castle  five  missile 
stones  for  weapons,  or  as  many  large  stakes  sharp  at 
one  end  and  five  ells  long.  In  the  castle  the  king 
built  a  cross-church  of  timber,  and  carefully  put  to¬ 
gether,  as  far  as  regards  the  wood  and  other  materials. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


1 8 1 

The  cross-church  was  consecrated  in  the  24th  year 
of  King  Sigurd’s  reign  [1127].  Here  the  king 
deposited  the  piece  of  the  holy  cross,  and  many  other 
holy  relics.  It  was  called  the  Castle  church  ;  and 
before  the  high  altar  he  placed  the  tables  he  had  got 
made  in  the  Greek  country,  which  were  of  copper  and 
silver,  all  gilt,  and  beautifully  adorned  with  jewels. 
Here  was  also  the  shrine  which  the  Danish  kins: 
Eirik  Eimune  had  sent  to  King  Sigurd ;  and  the 
altar  book,  written  with  gold  letters,  which  the 
patriarch  had  presented  to  King  Sigurd. 


Chapter  XLll—King  Sigurd’s  Death. 

Three  years  after  the  consecration  of  the  cross¬ 
church,  when  King  Sigurd  was  stopping  at  Viken, 
he  fell  sick  [  1 1 30].  He  died  the  night  before  Mary’s- 
mass  (August  1 5),  and  was  buried  in  Halyard’s  church, 
where  he  was  laid  in  the  stone  wall  without  the  choir 
on  the  south  side.  His  son  Magnus  was  in  the  town 
at  the  time,  and  took  possession  of  the  whole  of  the 
king’s  treasury  when  King  Sigurd  died.  Sigurd  had 
been  king  of  Norway  twenty-seven  years  [1 104-1  130], 
and  was  forty  years  of  age  when  he  died.  The  time 
of  his  reign  was  good  for  the  country :  for  there  was 
peace,  and  crops  were  good. 


182 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


XIII. 

SAGA  OF  MAGNUS  THE  BLIND  AND  OF 

HARALD  GILLE. 

PRELIMINARY  REMARKS. 

An  age  of  conflict  now  begins  in  Norway.  On  his  death,  in 
1130,  Sigurd  left  his  son  Magnus  and  his  brother  Harald. 
They  soon  divided  the  government,  and  then  entered  upon  a 
five-years’  conflict,  until  Magnus,  in  1135,  with  eyes  picked 
out,  went  into  a  convent. 

The  next  year,  1136,  a  new  pretender  appeared  in  the 
person  of  Sigurd  Slembe,  who  took  King  Harald’s  life  in 
1137.  Magnus  died  in  1139. 

Other  literature  in  regard  to  this  epoch  is  Fagrskinna  and 
Morkinskinna.  The  corresponding  part  of  Agrip  is  lost. 

Skalds  quoted  are  :  Haldor  Skvaldre,  Einar  Skulason,  and 
Ivar  Ingimundson. 


Chapter  I. — Magnus  and  Harald  Proclaimed  Kings. 

King  Sigurd’s  son  Magnus  was  proclaimed  in  Oslo 
king  of  all  the  country  immediately  after  his  father’s 
death,  according  to  the  oath  which  the  whole  nation 
had  sworn  to  King  Sigurd  ;  and  many  went  into  his 
service,  and  many  became  his  lendermen.  Magnus 
was  the  handsomest  man  then  in  Norway;  of  a  pas¬ 
sionate  temper,  and  cruel,  but  distinguished  in  bodily 
exercises.  The  favour  of  the  people  he  owed  most  to 
the  respect  for  his  father.  He  was  a  great  drinker, 
greedy  of  money,  hard,  and  obstinate. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


183 


Harald  Gille,  on  the  other  hand,  was  very  pleasing 
in  intercourse,  gay,  and  full  of  mirth ;  and  so  gener¬ 
ous  that  he  spared  in  nothing  for  the  sake  of  his 
friends.  He  willingly  listened  to  good  advice,  so 
that  he  allowed  others  to  consult  with  him  and  give 
counsel.  With  all  this  he  obtained  favour  and  a 
good  repute,  and  many  men  attached  themselves  as 
much  to  him  as  to  King  Magnus.  Harald  was  in 
Tunsberg  when  he  heard  of  his  brother  King  Sigurd’s 
death.  He  called  together  his  friends  to  a  meet¬ 
ing,  and  it  was  resolved  to  hold  the  Hauga  Thing  * 
there  in  the  town.  At  this  Thing,  Harald  was 
chosen  king  of  half  the  country,  and  it  was  called 
a  forced  oath  which  had  been  taken  from  him  to 
renounce  his  paternal  heritage.  Then  Harald  formed 
a  court,  and  appointed  lendermen  ;  and  very  soon 
he  had  as  many  people  about  him  as  King  Magnus. 
Then  men  went  between  them,  and  matters  stood 
in  this  way  for  seven  days ;  but  King  Magnus,  find¬ 
ing  he  had  fewer  people,  was  obliged  to  give  way, 
and  to  divide  the  kingdom  with  Harald  into  two  parts. 
The  kingdom  accordingly  was  so  divided  [October  3, 
1 1 30]  that  each  of  them  should  have  the  half  part  of 
the  kingdom  which  King  Sigurd  had  possessed  ;  but 
that  King  Magnus  alone  should  inherit  the  fleet  of 
ships,  the  table  service,  the  valuable  articles,  and  the 
moveable  effects  which  had  belonged  to  his  father 
King  Sigurd.  He  was  notwithstanding  the  least 

*  Hauga-thing  means  a  Thing  held  at  the  tumuli  or  burial  mounds ; 
but  whether  this  was  a  local  name  at  Tunsberg,  or  the  name  of  a  Thing 
held  for  a  solemn  purpose  at  the  burial  mounds  of  their  ancestors  for 
proclaiming  a  king,  seems  uncertain. — L. 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


184 

satisfied  with  his  share.  Although  they  were  of  such 
different  dispositions,  they  ruled  the  country  for  some 
time  in  peace.  King  Harald  had  a  son  called  Sigurd, 
by  Thora,  a  daughter  of  Guthorm  Grabarde.  King 
Harald  afterwards  married  Ingirid,  a  daughter  of 
Ragnvald,  who  was  a  son  of  the  Swedish  King  Inge 
Steinkelson.  King  Magnus  was  married  to  a  daughter 
of  Ivnut  Lavard,*  and  she  was  sister  of  the  Danish 
king  Valdemar  ;  but  King  Magnus  having  no  affec¬ 
tion  for  her,  sent  her  back  to  Denmark ;  and  from 
that  day  everything  went  ill  with  him,  and  he  brought 
upon  himself  the  enmity  of  her  family. 


Chapter  II. — Of  the  Forces  of  Harald  and  Magnus. 

When  the  two  relations,  Harald  and  Magnus,  had 
been  about  three  years  kings  of  Norway  [1 1 3 1 — 1 133], 
they  both  passed  the  fourth  winter  [1134]  in  the 
town  of  Nidaros,  and  invited  each  other  as  guests  ; 
but  their  people  were  always  ready  for  a  fight.  I11 
spring  King  Magnus  sailed  southwards  along  the 
land  with  his  fleet,  and  drew  all  the  men  he  could 
obtain  out  of  each  district,  and  sounded  his  friends 
if  they  would  strengthen  him  with  their  power  to 
take  the  kingly  dignity  from  Harald,  and  give  him 
such  a  portion  of  the  kingdom  as  might  be  suitable ; 
representing  to  them  that  King  Harald  had  already 
renounced  the  kingdom  by  oath.  King  Magnus 
obtained  the  consent  of  many  powerful  men.  The 
same  spring  Harald  went  to  the  Uplands,  and  by  the 

*  Ktiut  Lavard  was  murdered  near  Ringsted,  January  7,  1131. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


1  sc¬ 


upper  road  eastward  to  Yiken  ;  and  when  he  heard 
what  King  Magnus  was  doing,  he  also  drew  together 
men  on  his  side.  Wheresoever  the  two  parties  went 
they  killed  the  cattle,  or  even  the  people,  upon  the 
farms  of  the  adverse  party.  King  Magnus  had  by 
far  most  people,  for  the  main  strength  of  the  country 
lay  open  to  him  for  collecting  men  from  it.  King 
Harald  was  in  Yiken  on  the  east  side  of  the  fiord, 
and  collected  men,  while  they  were  doing  each  other 
damage  in  property  and  life.  King  Harald  had  with 
him  Ivristrod,  his  brother  by  the  mother’s  side,  and 
many  other  lendermen  ;  but  King  Magnus  had  many 
more.  King  Harald  was  with  his  forces  at  a  place 
called  Fors  in  Eanrike,  and  went  from  thence  towards 
the  sea.  The  evening  before  Saint  LawTence  day 
[August  io],  they  had  their  supper  at  a  place  called 
Fyrileif,  while  the  guard  kept  a  watch  on  horseback 
all  around  the  house.  The  watchmen  observed  Ivins: 
Magnus’s  army  hastening  towards  the  house,  and 
consisting  of  full  6000  *  men,  while  King  Harald  had 
but  1500.1  Now  come  the  watchmen  who  had  to 
bring  the  news  to  King  Harald  of  what  was  going 
on,  and  say  that  King  Magnus’s  army  was  now  very 
near  the  town. 

The  king  says,  “  AYhat  will  my  relation  King 
Magnus  Sigurdson  have  ?  He  wants  not  surely  to 
fight  us.” 

Thiostolf  xALason  replies,  “  You  must  certainly, 
sire,  make  preparation  for  that,  both  for  yourself  and 
vour  men.  King  Magnus  has  been  drawing  together 

J  OO  OO 

=  7200.  t  =1800. 


* 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


1 86 

an  army  all  the  summer  for  the  purpose  of  giving 
you  battle  when  he  meets  you.” 

Then  King  Harald  stood  up,  and  ordered  his  men 
to  take  their  arms.  “  We  shall  fight,  if  our  relative 
King  Magnus  wants  to  fight  us.” 

Then  the  war-horns  sounded,  and  all  Harald’s  men 
went  out  from  the  house  to  an  enclosed  field,  and  set 
up  their  banners.  King  Harald  had  on  two  shirts  of 
ring-mail,  but  his  brother  Kristrod  had  no  armour 
on  ;  and  a  gallant  man  he  was.  When  King  Magnus 
and  his  men  saw  King  Harald’s  troop  they  drew  up 
and  made  their  array,  and  made  their  line  so  long 
that  they  could  surround  the  whole  of  King  Harald’s 
troop.  So  says  Haldor  Skvaldre  : — 

“  King  Magnus  on  the  battle-plain 
From  his  long  troop-line  had  great  gain  ; 

The  plain  was  drenched  with  warm  blood, 

Which  lay  a  red  and  reeking  flood.” 


Chapter  III. — Battle  at  Fyrileif. 

King  Magnus  had  the  holy  cross  *  carried  before 
him  in  this  battle,  and  the  battle  was  great  and 
severe.  The  king’s  brother  Kristrod  had  penetrated 
with  his  troop  into  the  middle  of  King  Magnus’s 
array,  and  cut  down  on  each  side  of  him,  so  that 
people  gave  way  before  him  everywhere.  But  a 
powerful  bonde  who  was  in  King  Harald’s  array 
raised  his  spear  with  both  hands,  and  drove  it  through 
between  Kristrod’ s  shoulders,  so  that  it  came  out  at 

*  The  relic  brought  home  from  Jerusalem  by  Sigurd  the  Crusader 
seems  here  to  be  meant. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


187 

his  breast ;  and  thus  fell  Kristrod.  Many  who  were 
near  asked  the  bonde  why  he  had  done  so  foul  a 
deed. 

The  bonde  replies,  “  He  knows  the  consequences 
now  of  slaughtering  my  cattle  in  summer,  and  taking 
all  that  was  in  my  house,  and  forcing  me  to  follow 
him  here.  I  determined  to  give  him  some  return 
when  the  opportunity  came.” 

After  this  King  Harald’s  army  took  to  flight,  and 
he  fled  himself,  with  all  his  men.  Many  fell ;  and 
Ingimar  Sveinson  of  Ask,  a  great  chief  and  lenderman, 
got  there  his  death- wound,  and  nearly  sixty  of  King 
Harald’s  courtmen  also  fell.  ITarald  himself  fled  east¬ 
ward  to  Viken  to  his  ships,  and  went  out  of  the  country 
to  King  Eirik  Eimune  *  in  Denmark,  and  found  him 
in  Seeland,  and  sought  aid  from  him.  King  Eirik 
received  him  well,  and  principally  because  they  had 
sworn  to  each  other  to  be  as  brothers  ;  t  and  gave  him 
Halland  as  a  fief  to  rule  over,  and  gave  him  seven 
long-ships,  but  without  equipment.  Thereafter  King 
Harald  went  northwards  through  Halland,  and  many 
Northmen  came  to  meet  him.  After  this  battle  Kins: 
Magnus  subdued  the  whole  country,  giving  life  and 
safety  to  all  who  were  wounded,  and  had  them  taken 
care  of  equally  with  his  own  men.  He  then  called 
the  whole  country  his  own,  and  had  a  choice  of 
the  best  men  who  were  in  the  country.  When  they 
held  a  council  among  themselves  afterwards,  Sigurd 

*  Eirik  Eimune,  Knut  Lavard’s  brother,  reigned  1131-1137. 

t  These  brotherhoods,  by  which  one  man  was  bound  by  oath  to  aid 
or  avenge  another,  were  common  in  the  Middle  Ages  among  all  ranks. 
“  Sworn  brothers  ”  is  still  a  common  expression  with  ns. — L. 


1 88 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Sigurdson,  Thorer  Ingiridson,  and  all  the  men  of 
most  understanding,  advised  that  they  should  keep 
their  forces  together  in  Viken,  and  remain  there,  in 
case  Harald  should  return  from  the  south  ;  but  King 
Magnus  would  take  his  own  way,  and  went  north  to 
Bergen.  There  he  sat  all  winter  [1135],  and  allowed 
his  men  to  leave  him  ;  on  which  the  lendermen  re¬ 
turned  home  to  their  own  houses. 


Chapter  IV. — Death  of  Asbiorn  and  of  Nereid. 

King  Harald  came  to  Konungahella  with  the  men 
who  had  followed  him  from  Denmark.  The  lendermen 
and  town’s  burgesses  collected  a  force  against  him, 

1 

which  they  drew  up  in  a  thick  array  above  the  town. 
King  Harald  landed  from  his  ships,  and  sent  a  message 
to  the  bondes,  desiring  that  they  would  not  deny  him 
his  land,  as  he  wanted  no  more  than  what  of  right 
belonged  to  him.  Then  mediators  went  between 
them  ;  and  it  came  to  this,  that  the  bondes  dismissed 
their  troops,  and  submitted  to  him.  Thereupon  he 
bestowed  fiefs  and  property  on  the  lendermen,  that 
they  might  stand  by  him,  and  paid  the  bondes  who 
joined  him  the  lawful  mulcts  for  what  they  had  lost. 
A  great  body  of  men  attached  themselves,  therefore, 
to  King  Harald ;  and  he  proceeded  westwards  to 
Viken,  where  he  gave  peace  to  all  men,  except  to 
King  Magnus’s  people,  whom  he  plundered  and  killed 
wherever  he  found  them.  And  when  he  came  west 
to  Sarpsborg  he  took  prisoners  two  of  King  Magnus’s 
lendermen,  Asbiorn  and  his  brother  Nereid  ;  and  gave 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


189 


them  the  choice  that  one  should  be  hanged,  and  the 
other  thrown  into  the  Sarpsborg  waterfall,  and  they 
might  choose  as  they  pleased.  Asbiorn  chose  to  be 
thrown  into  the  cataract,  for  he  was  the  elder  of  the 
two,  and  this  death  appeared  the  most  dreadful ;  and 
so  it  was  done.  Haldor  Skvaldre  tells  of  this  : — 

“  Asbiorn,  who  opposed  the  king, 

O’er  the  wild  cataract  they  fling  : 

Nereid,  who  opposed  the  king, 

Must  on  Hagbard’s  high  tree  swing. 

The  king  gives  food  in  many  a  way 
To  foul-mouthed  beasts  and  birds  of  prey  : 

The  generous  men  who  dare  oppose 
Are  treated  as  the  worst  of  foes.” 


Thereafter  King  Harald  proceeded  north  to  Tuns- 
berg,  where  he  was  well  received,  and  a  large  force 
gathered  to  him. 


Chapter  V. — Of  the  Counsels  proposed. 

When  King  Magnus,  who  was  in  Bergen,  heard 
these  tidings,  he  called  together  all  the  chiefs  who 
were  in  the  town,  and  asked  them  their  counsel,  and 
what  they  should  now  do.  Then  Sigurd  Sigurdson 
said,  “  Here  I  can  give  a  good  advice.  Let  a  ship  be 
manned  with  good  men,  and  put  me,  or  any  other 
lenderman,  to  command  it ;  send  it  to  thy  relation 
King  Harald,  and  offer  him  peace  according  to  the 
conditions  upright  men  may  determine  upon,  and 
offer  him  the  half  of  the  kingdom.  It  appears  to  me 
probable  that  King  Harald,  by  the  words  and  counsel 
of  good  men,  may  accept  this  offer,  and  thus  there 
may  be  a  peace  established  between  you.” 


190 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Then  King  Magnus  replied,  “This  proposal  I  will 
not  accept  of;  for  of  what  advantage  would  it  be, 
after  we  have  gained  the  whole  kingdom  in  summer, 
to  give  away  the  half  of  it  now  ?  Give  us  some  other 
counsel.” 

Then  Sigurd  Sigurdson  answered,  “  It  appears  to 
me,  sire,  that  your  lendermen  who  in  autumn  asked 
your  leave  to  return  home  will  now  sit  at  home  and 
will  not  come  to  you.  At  that  time  it  was  much 
against  my  advice  that  you  dispersed  so  entirely  the 
people  we  had  collected  ;  for  I  could  well  suppose 
that  Harald  would  come  back  to  Viken  as  soon  as  he 
heard  that  it  was  without  a  chief.  Now  there  is  still 
another  counsel,  and  it  is  but  a  poor  one  ;  but  it  may 
turn  out  useful  to  us.  Send  out  your  pursuivants,* 
and  send  other  people  with  them,  and  let  them  go 
against  the  lendermen  who  will  not  join  you  in  your 
necessity,  and  kill  them  ;  and  bestow  their  property 
on  others  who  will  give  you  help  although  they  may 
have  been  of  small  importance  before.  Let  them 
drive  together  the  people,  the  bad  as  well  as  the 
good  ;  and  go  with  the  men  you  can  thus  assemble 
against  King  Harald,  and  give  him  battle.” 

The  king  replies,  “  It  would  be  unpopular  to  put 
to  death  people  of  distinction,  and  raise  up  inferior 
people  who  often  break  faith  and  law,  and  the  country 
would  be  still  worse  off.  I  would  like  to  hear  some 
other  counsel  still.” 

Sigurd  replies,  “It  is  difficult  for  me  now  to  give 

*  The  Giester,  or  pursuivants,  were  a  lower  class  of  men-at-arms  than 
the  hirdmen,  or  courtmen. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


191 

advice,  as  you  will  neither  make  peace  nor  give  battle. 
Let  us  go  north  to  Throndhjem,  where  the  main 
strength  of  the  country  is  most  inclined  to  our  side  ; 
and  on  the  way  let  us  gather  all  the  men  we  can. 
It  may  be  that  these  Elfgrims  will  be  tired  of  such 
a  long  stride  after  us.” 

The  king  replies,  “We  must  not  fly  from  those 
whom  we  beat  in  summer.  Give  some  better  counsel 
still.” 

Then  Sigurd  stood  up,  and  said,  while  he  was  pre¬ 
paring  to  go  out,  “  I  will  now  give  you  the  counsel 
which  I  see  you  will  take,  and  which  must  have  its 
course.  Sit  here  in  Bergen  until  Harald  comes  with 
his  troops,  and  then  you  will  either  suffer  death  or 
disgrace.” 

And  Sigurd  remained  no  longer  at  that  meeting. 


Chapter  VI. — Of  Hamid's  Force. 

King  Harald  came  from  the  East  along  the  coast 
with  a  great  army,  and  this  winter  [1 135]  is  called  on 
that  account  the  Crowd-winter.  King  Harald  came 
to  Bergen  on  Christmas  eve,  and  landed  with  his  fleet 
at  Floruvagar  ;  but  would  not  fight  on  account  of  the 
sacred  time.  But  King  Magnus  prepared  for  defence 
in  the  town.  He  erected  a  stone-slinging  machine 
out  on  the  holm,  and  had  iron  chains  and  wooden 
booms  laid  across  over  the  passage  from  the  king’s 
house  to  Nordnes,  and  to  the  Monks’  bridge.  He 
had  foot-traps  made,  and  thrown  into  Saint  John’s 
field,  and  did  not  suspend  these  works  except  during 


192 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


the  three  sacred  days  of  Christmas.  The  last  liolyday 
of  Yule,  King  ITarald  ordered  his  war-horns  to  sound 
the  gathering  of  his  men  for  going  to  the  town  ;  and, 
during  the  Yule  holydays,  his  army  had  been  in¬ 
creased  by  about  900  #  men. 


Chapter  VII. — King  Magnus  taken  Prisoner. 

King  ITarald  made  a  promise  to  King  Olaf  the 
Saint  for  victory,  that  he  would  build  an  Olafs 
church  in  the  town  at  his  own  expense.  King 
Magnus  drew  up  his  men  in  the  Christ  church 
yard ;  but  King  ITarald  laid  his  vessels  first  at 
Nordnes.  Now  when  King  Magnus  and  his  people 
saw  that,  they  turned  round  towards  the  town,  and 
to  the  end  of  the  shore ;  but  as  they  passed  through 
the  streets  many  of  the  burgesses  ran  into  their 
houses  and  homes,  and  those  who  went  across  the 
fields  fell  into  the  foot-traps.  Then  King  Magnus 
and  his  men  perceived  that  King  ITarald  had  rowed 
with  all  his  men  across  to  Hegravik,  and  landed 
there,  and  had  gone  from  thence  the  upper  road  up 
the  hill  opposite  to  the  town.  Now  Magnus  re¬ 
turned  back  again  through  the  streets,  and  then  his 
men  fled  from  him  in  all  directions  ;  some  up  to  the 
mountains,  some  up  to  the  neighbourhood  of  the 
convent  of  nuns,  some  to  churches,  or  hid  themselves 
as  they  best  could.  King  Magnus  fled  to  his  ship  ; 
but  there  was  no  possibility  of  getting  away,  for  the 
iron  chains  outside  prevented  the  passage  of  vessels. 


=  1 0S0. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


J9  3 


He  had  also  but  few  men  with  him,  and  therefore 
could  do  nothing.  Einar  Skulason  tells  of  this  in 
the  song  of  Harald  : — 

“  For  a  whole  week  an  iron  chain 
Cut  off  all  sailing  to  the  main  : 

Bergen’s  blue  stable  was  locked  fast, — 

Her  floating  wains  could  not  get  past.” 

Soon  after  Harald’s  people  came  out  to  the  ships, 
and  then  King  Magnus  was  made  prisoner.  He 
was  sitting  behind  in  the  forecastle  upon  the  chests 
of  the  high-seat,  and  at  his  side  Hakon  Fauk,  his 
mother’s  brother,  who  was  very  popular  but  was  not 
considered  very  wise,  and  Ivar  Ozurson.  They,  and 
many  others  of  King  Magnus’s  friends,  were  taken, 
and  some  of  them  killed  on  the  spot. 


Chapter  YIII. — King  Magnus  Mutilated. 

Thereafter  King  Harald  had  a  meeting  of  his 
counsellors,  and  desired  their  counsel ;  and  in  this 
meeting  the  judgment  was  given  that  Magnus 
should  be  deposed  from  his  dominions,  and  should 
no  longer  be  called  king.  Then  he  was  delivered 
to  the  king’s  slaves,  who  mutilated  him,  picked  out 
both  his  eyes,  cut  off  one  foot,  and  at  last  castrated 
him.  Ivar  Ozurson  was  blinded,  and  Hakon  Fauk 
killed.  The  whole  country  then  was  reduced  to 
obedience  under  King  Harald.  Afterwards  it  was 
diligently  examined  who  were  King  Magnus’s  best 
friends,  or  who  knew  most  of  his  concealments  of 
treasure  or  valuables.  The  holy  cross  King  Megnus 

VOL.  IV.  N 


194 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


had  kept  beside  him  since  the  battle  of  Fyrisleif, 
but  would  not  tell  where  it  was  deposited  for  preser¬ 
vation.  Bishop  Reinald  of  Stavanger,  who  was  an 
Englishman,  was  considered  very  greedy  of  money. 
He  was  a  great  friend  of  King  Magnus,  and  it  was 
thought  likely  that  great  treasure  and  valuables  had 
been  given  into  his  keeping.  Men  were  sent  for 
him  accordingly,  and  he  came  to  Bergen,  where  it 
was  insisted  against  him  that  he  had  some  know¬ 
ledge  of  such  treasure  ;  but  he  denied  it  altogether, 
would  not  admit  it,  and  offered  to  clear  himself  by 
ordeal.  King  Harald  would  not  have  this,  but  laid 
on  the  bishop  a  money  fine  of  fifteen  marks  of  gold, 
which  he  should  pay  to  the  king.  The  bishop 
declared  he  would  not  thus  impoverish  his  bishop’s 
see,  but  would  rather  offer  his  life.  On  this  they 
hanged  the  bishop  out  on  the  holm,  beside  the  sling 
machine.  As  he  was  going  to  the  gallows  he  threw 
the  sock  from  his  foot,  and  said  with  an  oath,  “  I 
know  no  more  about  King  Magnus’s  treasure  than 
what  is  in  this  sock ;  ”  and  in  it  there  was  a  gold 
ring.  Bishop  Reinald  was  buried  at  Nordnes  in 
Michael’s  church,  and  this  deed  was  much  blamed. 
After  this  Ilarald  Gille  was  sole  king  of  Norway 
as  long  as  he  lived. 

Chapter  IX. — Extraordinary  Omens  in  Konungahella . 

Five  years  after  King  Sigurd’s  death  remarkable 
occurrences  took  place  in  Konungahella  [1135].  Gut- 
horm,  a  son  of  Harald  Fletter,  and  Ssemund  Husfreyja, 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


195 


were  at  that  time  the  king’s  officers  there.  Seemund 
was  married  to  Ingibjorg,  a  daughter  of  the  priest 
Andres  Brunson.  Their  sons  were  Paul  Flip  and 
Gunne  T  is.  Ssemund’s  natural  son  was  called 
Asmund.  Andres  Brunson  was  a  very  remarkable 
man,  who  carried  on  divine  service  in  the  Cross 
church.  His  wife  *  was  called  Solveig.  Jon  Lopt- 
son,  who  was  then  eleven  years  old,  was  in  their 
house  to  be  fostered  and  educated.  The  priest  Lopt 
Ssemundson,  Jon’s  father,  was  also  in  the  town  at 
that  time.  Ihe  priest  Andres  and  Solveig  had  a 
daughter  by  name  Helga,  who  was  Einar’s  wife.  It 
happened  now  in  Konungahella,  the  next  Sunday 
night  after  Easter  week,  that  there  was  a  great  noise 
in  the  stieets  through  the  whole  town  as  if  the  kins* 

o 

was  going  through  with  all  his  court-men.  The 
dogs  were  so  aflected  that  nobody  could  hold  them, 
but  they  slipped  loose  ;  and  when  they  came  out  they 
ran  mad,  biting  all  that  came  in  their  way,  people 
and  cattle.  All  who  were  bitten  by  them  till  the 
blood  came  turned  raging  mad;  and  pregnant  women 
were  taken  in  labour  prematurely,  and  became  mad. 
From  Easter  to  Ascension-day,  these  portentous  cir¬ 
cumstances  took  place  almost  every  night.  People 
were  dreadfully  alarmed  at  these  wonders ;  and 
many  made  themselves  ready  to  remove,  sold  their 
houses,  and  went  out  to  the  country  districts,  or  to 
other  towns.  The  most  intelligent  men  looked  upon 
it  as  something  extremely  remarkable;  were  in  dread 

I  lie  Catholic  priests  appear  to  have  had  wives  at  that  time  in  Nor- 
way,  and  celibacy  to  have  been  confined  to  the  monks. — L. 


196 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


of  it ;  and  said,  as  it  proved  to  be,  that  it  was  an 
omen  of  important  events  which  had  not  yet  taken 
place.  And  the  priest  Andres,  on  Whit  Sunday, 
made  a  long  and  excellent  speech,  and  turned  the 
conclusion  of  it  to  the  distressing  situation  of  the 
townspeople ;  telling  them  to  muster  courage,  and 
not  lay  waste  their  excellent  town  by  deserting  it, 
but  rather  to  take  the  utmost  care  in  all  things, 
and  use  the  greatest  foresight  against  all  dangers,  as 
of  fire  or  the  enemy,  and  to  pray  to  God  to  have 
mercy  on  them. 


Chapter  X. — The  Rise  of  War  in  Konungahella . 

Thirteen  loaded  merchant  ships  made  ready  to 
leave  the  town,  intending  to  proceed  to  Bergen  ;  but 
eleven  of  them  were  lost,  men  and  goods,  and  all 
that  was  in  them ;  the  twelfth  was  lost  also,  but  the 
people  were  saved,  although  the  cargo  went  to  the 
bottom.  At  that  time  the  priest  Lopt  went  north  to 
Bergen,  with  all  that  belonged  to  him,  and  arrived 
safely.  The  merchant  vessels  were  lost  on  Saint  Law¬ 
rence  eve  [August  10].  The  Danish  king  Eirik  and 
the  Archbishop  Ozur,*  both  sent  notice  to  Konunga¬ 
hella  to  keep  watch  on  their  town;  and  said  the  Vind- 
land  people  had  a  great  force  on  foot  with  which  they 
made  war  far  around  on  Christian  people,  and  usually 
gained  the  victory.  But  the  townspeople  attended 
very  little  to  this  warning,  were  indifferent,  and 

*  This  Ozur, — or  Asserus,  Asgerus,  or  Atscherus, — was  the  first  arch¬ 
bishop  of  Lund  in  Scania,  and  died  anno  1138. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


197 


forgot  more  and  more  the  dreadful  omens  the  longer 
it  was  since  they  happened.  On  the  holy  Saint 
Lawrence  day,  while  the  words  of  high  mass  were 
spoken,  came  to  the  Yindland  king  Rettibur  to 
Konungahella  with  550*  Yindland  cutters,  and  in 
each  cutter  were  forty-four  men  and  two  horses.  The 
king’s  sister’s  son  Dunimiz,  and  Unibur,  a  chief  who 
ruled  over  many  people,  were  with  him.  These  two 
chiefs  rowed  at  once,  with  a  part  of  their  troops,  up 
the  east  arm  of  the  Gaut  river  past  Hising  Isle,  and 
thus  came  down  to  the  town  ;  but  a  part  of  the  fleet 
lay  in  the  western  arm,  and  came  so  to  the  town. 
They  made  fast  their  ships  at  the  piles,  and  landed 
their  horses,  and  rode  over  the  height  of  Bratsas, 
and  from  thence  up  around  the  town.  Einar,  a 
relation  of  priest  Andres,  brought  these  tidings  up 
to  the  Castle  church ;  for  there  the  whole  inhabitants 
of  the  town  were  gathered  to  hear  high  mass.  Einar 
came  just  as  the  priest  Andres  was  holding  his  dis¬ 
course  ;  and  he  told  the  people  that  an  army  was 
sailing  up  against  the  town  with  a  great  number 
of  ships  of  war,  and  that  some  people  were  riding- 
over  Bratsas.  Many  said  it  must  be  the  Danish  king 
Eirik,  and  from  him  they  might  expect  peace.  The 
people  ran  down  into  the  town  to  their  properties, 
armed  themselves,  and  went  down  upon  the  piers, 
whence  they  immediately  saw  there  was  an  enemy 
and  an  immense  army.  Nine  East-country  trading 
vessels  belonging  to  the  merchants  were  afloat  in  the 
river  at  the  piers.  The  Yindland  people  first  directed 


=  660. 


i98  CHLIONICLE  OF  THE 

their  course  toward  these  and  fought  with  the 
merchants,  who  armed  themselves,  and  defended 
themselves  long,  well,  and  manfully.  There  was  a 
hard  battle,  and  resistance,  before  the  merchant 
vessels  were  cleared  of  their  men  ;  and  in  this  con¬ 
flict  the  Vindland  people  lost  150*  of  their  ships, 
with  all  the  men  on  board.  When  the  battle  was 
sharpest  the  townsmen  stood  upon  the  piers, t  and 
shot  at  the  heathens.  But  when  the  fight  slackened 
the  burgesses  fled  up  to  the  town,  and  from  thence 
into  the  castle  ;  and  the  men  took  with  them  all  their 
valuable  articles,  and  such  goods  as  they  could  carry. 
Solveig  and  her  daughters,  with  two  other  women, 
went  on  shore,  when  the  Vindlanders  took  posses¬ 
sion  of  the  merchant  vessels.  Now  the  Vindlanders 
landed,  and  mustered  their  men,  and  discovered  their 
loss.  Some  of  them  went  up  into  the  town,  some  011 
board  the  merchant  ships,  and  took  all  the  goods 
they  pleased ;  and  then  they  set  fire  to  the  town, 
and  burnt  it  and  the  ships.  They  hastened  then 
with  all  their  army  to  assault  the  castle. 


Chapter  XI. — The  Second  Battle. 

King  Rettibur  made  an  offer  to  those  who  were  in 
the  castle  that  they  should  go  out,  and  he  would  give 
them  their  lives,  weapons,  clothes,  silver,  and  gold  ; 
but  all  exclaimed  against  it,  and  went  out  on  the  for- 

*  =  1S0. 

t  The  piers  here  spoken  of  are  merely  wooden  gangways  or  stages  on 
piles  from  the  shore  to  the  ship  ;  and  every  warehouse  or  dwelling  on  the 
side  of  a  river  or  harbour  has  such  a  pier  for  itself  in  Norway.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


199 


tification  :  some  shot,  some  threw  stones,  some  sharp 
stakes.  It  was  a  great  battle,  in  which  many  fell  on 
both  sides,  but  by  far  the  most  of  the  Vindlanders. 
Solveig  came  up  to  a  large  farm  called  Solbjorg,  and 
brought  the  news.  A  message  war-token  was  there 
split,  and  sent  out  to  Skurbagar,  where  there  happened 
to  be  a  joint  ale-drinking  feast,  and  many  men  were 
assembled.  A  bonde  called  Olver  Miklimun  (Mickle 
Mouth)  was  there,  who  immediately  sprang  up,  took 
helmet  and  shield,  and  a  great  axe  in  his  hand,  and 
said,  “  Stand  up,  brave  lads,  and  take  your  weapons. 
Let  us  go  help  the  townspeople  ;  for  it  would  appear 
shameful  to  every  man  who  heard  of  it,  if  we  sit 
here  sipping  our  ale,  while  good  men  in  the  town 
are  losing  their  lives  by  our  neglect.” 

Many  made  an  objection,  and  said  they  would  only 
be  losing  their  own  lives,  without  being  of  any  assist¬ 
ance  to  the  townspeople. 

Then  said  Olver,  “  Although  all  of  you  should  hold 
back,  I  will  go  alone  ;  and  one  or  two  heathens,  at 
any  rate,  shall  fall  before  I  fall.” 

He  ran  down  to  the  town,  and  a  few  men  after 
him  to  see  what  he  would  do,  and  also  whether  they 
could  assist  him  in  any  way.  When  he  came  near 
the  castle,  and  the  heathens  saw  him,  they  sent  out 
eight  men  fully  armed  against  him ;  and  when  they 
met,  the  heathen  men  ran  and  surrounded  him  on  all 
sides.  Olver  lifted  his  axe,  and  struck  behind  him 
with  the  extreme  point  of  it,  hitting  the  neck  of  the 
man  who  was  coming  up  behind  him,  so  that  his 
throat  and  jawbone  were  cut  through,  and  he  fell  dead 


200 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


backwards.  Then  he  heaved  his  axe  forwards,  and 
struck  the  next  man  in  the  head,  and  clove  him  down 
to  the  shoulders.  He  then  fought  with  the  others, 
and  killed  two  of  them  ;  but  was  much  wounded 
himself.  The  four  who  remained  took  to  flight,  but 
Olver  ran  after  them.  There  was  a  ditch  before  them, 
and  two  of  the  heathens  jumped  into  it,  and  Olver 
killed  them  both  ;  but  he  stuck  fast  himself  in  the 
ditch,  so  that  two  of  the  eight  heathens  escaped. 
The  men  who  had  followed  Olver  took  him  up,  and 
brought  him  back  to  Skurbagar,  where  his  wounds 
were  bound  and  healed;  and  it  was  the  talk  of  the 
people,  that  no  single  man  had  ever  made  such 
a  bloody  onset.  Two  lendermen,  Sigurd  Gyrdson,  a 
brother  of  Philip,  and  Sigard,  came  with  600  *  men 
to  Skurbagar ;  on  which  Sigurd  turned  back  with 
400 1  men.  He  was  but  little  respected  afterwards, 
and  soon  died.  Sigard,  on  the  other  hand,  proceeded 
with  200  J  men  towards  the  town  ;  and  they  gave  battle 
to  the  heathens,  and  were  all  slain.  While  the  Vind- 
landers  were  storming  the  castle,  their  king  and  his 
chiefs  were  out  of  the  battle.  At  one  place  there 
was  a  man  among  the  Vindlanders  shooting  with  a 
bow,  and  killing  a  man  for  every  arrow ;  and  two 
men  stood  before  him,  and  covered  him  with  their 
shields.  Then  Ssemund  Husfreyja  said  to  his  son 
Asmund,  that  they  should  both  shoot  together  at  this 
bowman.  “  But  I  will  shoot  at  the  man  who  holds 
the  shield  before  him.”  He  did  so,  and  he  knocked 
the  shield  down  a  little  before  the  man ;  and  in  the 


=  720. 


t  =  480. 


+  =  240. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


201 


same  instant  Asmund  shot  between  the  shields,  and 
the  arrow  hit  the  bowman  in  the  forehead,  so  that  it 
came  out  at  his  neck,  and  he  fell  down  dead.  When 
the  Vindlanders  saw  it  they  howled  like  dogs,  or  like 
wolves.  Then  King  Rettibur  called  to  them  that  he 
would  give  them  safety  and  life,  but  they  refused 
terms.  The  heathens  again  made  a  hard  assault. 
One  of  the  heathens  in  particular  fought  so  bravely, 
and  ventured  so  near,  that  he  came  quite  up  to  the 
castle-gate,  and  pierced  the  man  who  stood  outside 
the  gate  with  his  sword  ;  and  although  they  used 
both  arrows  and  stones  against  him,  and  he  had 
neither  shield  nor  helmet,  nothing  could  touch  him, 
for  he  was  so  skilled  in  witchcraft  that  weapon  could 
not  wound  him.  Then  priest  Andres  took  conse¬ 
crated  fire  ;  blew  upon  it ;  cut  tinder  in  pieces,  and 
laid  it  on  the  fire  ;  and  then  laid  the  tinder  on  the 
arrow-point,  and  gave  it  to  Asmund.  He  shot  this 
arrow  at  the  warlock  ;  and  the  shaft  hit  so  well 
that  it  did  its  business,  and  the  man  of  witchcraft 
fell  dead.  Then  the  heathens  crowded  together  as 
before,  howling  and  whining  dreadfully  ;  and  all 
gathered  about  their  king,  on  which  the  Christians 
believed  that  they  were  holding  a  council  about 
retreating.  The  interpreters,  who  understood  the 
Vindland  tongue,  heard  the  chief  Unibur  make  the 
following  speech :  “  These  people  are  brave,  and  it 
is  difficult  to  make  anything  of  them ;  and  even 
if  we  took  all  the  goods  in  their  town,  we  might 
willingly  give  as  much  more  that  we  had  never 
come  here,  so  great  has  been  our  loss  of  men  and 


202 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


chiefs.  Early  in  the  day,  when  we  began  to  assault 
the  castle,  they  defended  themselves  first  with  arrows 
and  spears  ;  then  they  fought  against  us  with  stones  ; 
and  now  with  sticks  and  staves,  as  against  dogs.  I 
see  from  this  that  they  are  in  want  of  weapons  and 
means  of  defence  ;  so  we  shall  make  one  more  hard 
assault,  and  try  their  strength.”  It  was  as  he  said, 
that  they  now  fought  with  stakes ;  because,  in  the 
first  assault,  they  had  imprudently  used  up  all  their 
missile  weapons  and  stones ;  and  now  when  the 
Christians  saw  the  number  of  their  stakes  diminish¬ 
ing,  they  clave  each  stake  in  two.  The  heathens  now 
made  a  very  hot  attack,  and  rested  themselves  be¬ 
tween  whiles,  and  on  both  sides  they  were  exhausted. 
During  a  rest  the  Vindland  king  Rettibur  again 
offered  terms,  and  that  they  should  retain  the  weapons, 
clothes,  and  silver  they  could  carry  out  of  the  castle. 
Ssemund  Husfreyja  had  fallen,  and  the  men  who 
remained  gave  the  counsel  to  deliver  up  the  castle 
and  themselves  into  the  power  of  the  heathens  :  but 
it  was  a  foolish  counsel ;  for  the  heathens  did  not 
keep  their  promises,  but  took  all  people,  men,  women, 
and  children,  and  killed  all  of  them  who  were  wounded 
or  young,  or  could  not  easily  be  carried  with  them. 
They  took  all  the  goods  that  were  in  the  castle  ; 
went  into  the  Cross  church,  and  plundered  it  of  all 
its  ornaments.  The  priest  Andres  gave  King  Retti- 
bur  a  silver-mounted  gilt  sceptre,  and  to  his  sisters 
son  Dunimiz  he  gave  a  gold  ring.  They  supposed 
from  this  that  he  was  a  man  of  great  importance  in 
the  town,  and  held  him  in  higher  respect  than  the 


KINGS  OF  NOE  WAY. 


203 


others.  They  took  away  with  them  the  holy  cross, 
and  also  the  tables  which  stood  before  the  altar, 
which  Sigurd  had  got  made  in  the  Greek  country, 
and  had  brought  home  himself.  These  they  took, 
and  laid  flat  down  on  the  steps  before  the  altar. 
Then  the  heathens  went  out  of  the  church.  Rettibur 
said,  “This  house  has  been  adorned  with  great  zeal 
for  the  God  to  whom  it  is  dedicated  ;  but,  methinks, 
He  has  shown  little  regard  for  the  town  or  house  :  so 
I  see  their  God  has  been  angry  at  those  who  defended 
them.”  King  Rettibur  gave  the  priest  Andres  the 
church,  the  shrine,  the  holy  cross,  the  Bible,  the 
altar-book,  and  four  clerks  (prisoners) ;  but  the 
heathens  burnt  the  Castle  church,  and  all  the  houses 
that  were  in  the  castle.  As  the  fire  they  had  set  to 
the  church  went  out  twice,  they  hewed  the  church 
down,  and  then  it  burnt  like  other  houses.  Then  the 
heathens  went  to  their  ships  with  the  booty;  but 
when  they  mustered  their  people  and  saw  their  loss, 
they  made  prisoners  of  all  the  people,  and  divided 
them  among  the  vessels.  Now  priest  Andres  went 
on  board  the  king’s  ship  with  the  holy  cross,  and 
there  came  a  great  terror  over  the  heathens  on  account 
of  the  portentous  circumstance  which  took  place  in 
the  king’s  ship  ;  namely,  it  became  so  hot  that  all 
thought  they  were  going  to  be  burnt  up.  The  king 
ordered  the  interpreter  to  ask  the  priest  why  this 
happened.  He  replied,  that  the  Almighty  God  on 
whom  the  Christians  believed,  sent  them  a  proof  of 
His  anger,  that  they  who  would  not  believe  in  their 
Creator  presumed  to  lay  hands  on  the  emblem  of  His 


204 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


suffering ;  and  that  there  lay  so  much  power  in  the 
cross,  that  such,  and  even  clearer  miracles,  happened 
to  heathen  men  who  had  taken  the  cross  in  their  hands. 
The  king  had  the  priest  put  into  the  ship’s  boat,  and 
the  priest  Andres  carried  the  holy  cross  in  his  grasp. 
They  led  the  boat  along  past  the  ship’s  bow,  and  then 
along  the  side  of  the  next  ship,  and  then  shoved  it 
with  a  boat-hook  in  beside  the  pier.  Then  Andres 
went  with  the  cross  by  night  to  Solbjorg,  in  rain  and 
dreadful  weather ;  but  brought  it  in  good  preserva¬ 
tion.  King  Rettibur,  and  the  men  he  had  remain¬ 
ing,  went  home  to  Vindland,  and  many  of  the  people 
who  were  taken  at  Konungahella  were  long  after¬ 
wards  in  slavery  in  Vindland  ;  and  those  who  were 
ransomed,  and  came  back  to  Norway  to  their  udal 
lands  and  properties,  throve  worse  than  before  their 
capture.  The  merchant  town  of  Konungahella  has 
never  since  risen  to  the  importance  it  was  of  before 
this  event. 


Chapter  XII. — Of  Magnus  the  Blind. 

King  Magnus,  after  he  was  deprived  of  sight,  went 
north  to  Nidaros,  where  he  went  into  the  cloister  on 
the  holm,  and  assumed  the  monk’s  dress.  The  cloister 
received  the  farm  of  Great  Hernes  in  Frosta  for  his 
support.  King  Harald  alone  ruled  the  country  the 
following  winter,  gave  all  men  peace  and  pardon  who 
desired  it,  and  took  many  of  the  men  into  his  court- 
service  who  had  been  with  King  Magnus.  Einar 
Skulason  says  that  King  Harald  had  two  battles  in 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


205 


Denmark  ;  the  one  at  Ilvedn  Isle,  and  the  other  at 
Hlesey  Isle  : — 

“  Unwearied  champion  !  who  wast  bred 
To  stain  thy  blue-edged  weapons  red  ! 

Beneath  high  Hvedn’s  rocky  shore, 

The  faithless  felt  thy  steel  once  more.” 

And  again,  thus  : — 

“  On  Hlesey’s  plain  the  foe  must  quail 
’Fore  him  who  dyes  their  shirts  of  mail. 

His  storm -stretched  banner  o’er  his  head 
Flies  straight,  and  fills  the  foe  with  dread.” 


Chapter  XIII. — Of  King  Harald  Grille  and  Bishop  Magnus. 

King  Harald  Gille  was  a  very  generous  man.  It  is 
told  that  in  his  time  Magnus  Einarson  *  came  from 
Iceland  to  be  consecrated  a  bishop,  and  the  king 
received  him  well,  and  showed  him  much  respect. 
When  the  bishop  was  ready  to  sail  for  Iceland  again, 
and  the  ship  was  rigged  out  for  sea,  he  went  to  the 
hall  where  the  king  was  drinking,  saluted  him  politely 
and  warmly,  and  the  king  received  him  joyfully. 
The  queen  was  sitting  beside  the  king. 

Then  said  the  king,  “  Are  you  ready,  bishop,  for 
your  voyage  ?  ” 

He  replied  that  he  was. 

The  king  said,  “You  come  to  us  just  now  at  a  bad 
time  ;  for  the  tables  are  just  removed,  and  there  is 
nothing  at  hand  suitable  to  present  to  you.  What  is 
there  to  give  the  bishop?  ” 

The  treasurer  replies,  “  Sire,  as  far  as  I  know,  all 
articles  of  any  value  are  given  away.” 

*  Bishop  1133-1148. 


206 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


The  king :  “  Here  is  a  drinking  goblet  remaining  ; 
take  this,  bishop,  it  is  not  without  value.” 

The  bishop  expressed  his  thanks  for  the  honour 
shown  him. 

Then  said  the  queen,  “Farewell,  bishop!  and  a 
happy  voyage.” 

The  king  said  to  her,  “When  did  you  ever  hear 
a  noble  lady  say  so  to  a  bishop  without  giving  him 
something  ?  ” 

She  replies,  “  Sire,  what  have  I  to  give  him  ?  ” 

The  king  :  “  Thou  hast  the  cushion  under  thee.” 

Thereupon  this,  which  was  covered  with  costly 
cloth,  and  was  a  valuable  article,  was  given  to  the 
bishop.  When  the  bishop  was  going  away  the  king 
took  the  cushion  from  under  himself  and  gave  it  him, 
saying,  “  They  have  long  been  together.”  When  the 
bishop  arrived  in  Iceland  to  his  bishop’s  see,  it 
was  talked  over  what  should  be  done  with  the  goblet 
that  would  be  serviceable  for  the  king ;  and  when 
the  bishop  asked  the  opinion  of  other  people,  many 
thought  it  should  be  sold,  and  the  value  bestowed  on 
the  poor.  Then  said  the  bishop,  “  I  will  take  another 
plan.  I  will  have  a  chalice  made  of  it  for  this  church, 
and  consecrate  it,  so  that  all  the  saints  of  whom  there 
are  relics  in  this  church  shall  let  the  king  have  some 
good  for  his  gift  every  time  a  mass  is  sung  over  it.” 
This  chalice  has  since  belonged  to  the  bishopric  of 
Skalholt  ;  and  of  the  costly  cloth  with  which  the 
cushions  given  him  by  the  king  were  covered,  were 
made  the  choristers’  cloaks  which  are  now  in  Skalholt. 
From  this  the  generous  spirit  of  King  Iiarald  may 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


20  7 


be  seen,  as  well  as  from  many  other  things,  of  which 
but  a  few  are  set  down  here. 


Chapter  XIV. — The  Beginning  of  Sigurd  Slembidjalcn. 

There  was  a  man,  by  name  Sigurd,  who  was 
brought  up  in  Norway,  and  was  called  priest  Adal- 
brikt’s  son.  Sigurd’s  mother  was  Thora,  a  daughter 
of  Saxe  of  Vik,  a  sister  of  Sigrid,  who  was  mother 
of  King  Olaf  Magnuson,  and  of  Kare  the  king’s 
brother  who  married  Borghild,  a  daughter  of  Dag 
Eilifson.  Their  sons  were  Sigurd  of  Austrat  and 
Dag.  Sigurd  of  Austrat’ s  sons  were  Jon  of  Austrat, 
Thorstein,  and  Andres  the  Deaf.  Jon  was  married 
to  Sigrid,  a  sister  of  King  Inge  and  of  Duke  Skule. 
This  Sigurd,  in  his  childhood,  was  kept  at  his  book, 
became  a  clerk,  and  was  consecrated  a  deacon ;  but 
as  he  ripened  in  years  and  strength  he  became  a  very 
clever  man,  stout,  strong,  distinguished  for  all  perfec¬ 
tions  and  exercises  beyond  any  of  his  years, — indeed, 
beyond  any  man  in  Norway.  Sigurd  showed  early 
traces  of  a  haughty  ungovernable  spirit,  and  was 
therefore  called  Slembidjakn.#  He  was  as  handsome 
a  man  as  could  be  seen,  with  rather  thin  but  beautiful 
hair.  When  it  came  to  Sigurd’s  ears  that  his  mother 
said  King  Magnus  was  his  father,  he  laid  aside  all 
clerkship ;  and  as  soon  as  he  was  old  enough  to 
be  his  own  master,  he  left  the  country.  He  was  a 
long  time  on  his  travels,  went  to  Palestine ;  was  at 
the  Jordan  river ;  and  visited  many  holy  places,  as 


*  Slembidjakn — the  bad  deacon. — L. 


208 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


pilgrims  usually  do.  When  he  came  back,  he  applied 
himself  to  trading  expeditions.  One  winter  he  was 
in  Orkney  with  Earl  Ilarald,  and  was  with  him  when 
Thorkel  Fostre  Summarlidason  was  killed.  Sigurd 
was  also  in  Scotland  with  the  Scottish  king  David  * 
and  was  held  in  great  esteem  by  him.  Thereafter 
Sigurd  went  to  Denmark ;  and  according  to  the 
account  of  himself  and  his  men,  he  there  submitted 
to  the  iron  ordeal  to  confirm  his  paternal  descent, 
and  proved  by  it,  in  the  presence  of  five  bishops, 
that  he  was  a  son  of  King  Magnus  Barefoot.  So 
says  Ivar  Ingimundson,+  in  Sigurd’s  song  : — 

“  The  holiest  five 
Of  men  alive, — 

Bishops  were  they, — 

Solemnly  say, 

The  iron  glowing 
Bed  hot,  yet  showing 
No  scaith  on  skin, 

Proves  cause  and  kin.” 

King  Harald  Gille’s  friends,  however,  said  this 
was  only  a  lie,  and  deceit  of  the  Danes. 


Chapter  XV.—  Sigurd  in  Iceland . 

It  is  told  before  of  Sigurd  that  he  passed  some  years 
in  merchant  voyages,  and  he  came  thus  to  Iceland 
one  winter,  and  took  up  his  lodging  with  Thorgils 
Odson  in  Saurby  ;  but  very  few  knew  where  he  was. 

*  David  ruled  from  1124  to  1153. 

t  Every  pretender  to  the  throne  appears  to  have  had  some  skald,  who 
took  his  chance  with  his  patron.  This  Ivar  does  not.  appear  unless  as 
bigui  d  s  skald,  and  as  attached  to  his  fortunes.  In  these  scraps  of  the 
poetry  of  the  skalds  it  is  necessary  to  recollect  by  whom  each  is  composed, 
and  to  which  personage  he  is  attached. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


209 


In  autumn,  when  the  sheep  were  being  driven  into  a 
fold  to  be  slaughtered,  a  sheep  that  was  to  be  caught 
ran  to  Sigurd  ;  and  as  Sigurd  thought  the  sheep  ran  to 
him  for  protection,  he  stretched  out  his  hands  to  it  and 
lifted  it  over  the  fold  dyke,  and  let  it  run  to  the  hills, 
saying,  “There  are  not  many  who  seek  help  from  me, 
so  I  may  well  help  this  one/’  It  happened  the  same 
winter  that  a  woman  had  committed  a  theft,  and  Thor- 
gils,  who  was  angry  at  her  for  it,  was  going  to  punish 
her ;  but  she  ran  to  Sigurd  to  ask  his  help,  and  he 
set  her  upon  the  bench  by  his  side.  Thorgils  told 
him  to  give  her  up,  and  told  him  what  she  had  com¬ 
mitted  ;  but  Sigurd  begged  forgiveness  for  her,  since 
she  had  come  to  him  for  protection,  and  that  Thor¬ 
gils  would  dismiss  the  complaint  against  her,  but 
Thorgils  insisted  that  she  should  receive  her  punish¬ 
ment.  When  Sigurd  saw  that  Thorgils  would  not 
listen  to  his  entreaty,  he  started  up,  drew  his  sword, 
and  bade  him  take  her  if  he  dared  ;  and  Thorgils  see¬ 
ing  that  Sigurd  would  defend  the  woman  by  force  of 
arms,  and  observing  his  commanding  mien,  guessed 
who  he  must  be,  desisted  from  pursuing  the  woman, 
and  pardoned  her.  There  were  many  foreign  men 
there,  and  Sigurd  made  the  least  appearance  among 
them.  One  day  Sigurd  came  into  the  sitting-room, 
and  a  Northman  who  was  splendidly  clothed  was 
playing  chess  with  one  of  Thorgils’s  house-servants. 
The  Northman  called  Sigurd,  and  asked  him  his 
advice  how  to  play  ;  but  when  Sigurd  looked  at  the 
board,  he  saw  the  game  was  lost.  The  man  who  was 

playing  against  the  Northman  had  a  sore  foot,  so  that 
VOL.  iv.  0 


2  TO 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


one  toe  was  bruised,  and  matter  was  coming  out  of  it. 
Sigurd,  who  was  sitting  on  the  bench,  takes  a  straw, 
and  draws  it  along  the  floor,  so  that  some  young 
kittens  ran  after  it.  He  drew  the  straw  always  before 
them,  until  they  came  near  the  house- servant’s  foot, 
who  jumping  up  with  a  scream,  threw  the  chessmen 
in  disorder  on  the  board  ;  and  thus  it  was  a  dispute 
how  the  game  had  stood.  This  is  given  as  a  proof 
of  Sigurd’s  cunning.  People  did  not  know  that  he 
was  a  learned  clerk  until  the  Saturday  before  Easter, 
when  he  consecrated  the  holy  water  with  chant ;  and 
the  longer  he  stayed  there  the  more  he  was  esteemed. 
The  summer  after,  Sigurd  told  Thorgils  before  they 
parted,  that  he  might  with  all  confidence  address  his 
friends  to  Sigurd  Slembidjakn.  Thorgils  asked  how 
nearly  he  was  related  to  him ;  on  which  he  replies, 
“  f  Sigurd  Slembidjakn,  a  son  of  King  Magnus 
Barefoot.”  He  then  left  Iceland. 


Chapter  XVI. — Of  Sigurd  Slembe. 

When  Harald  Gille  had  been  six  years  [1136], 
King  of  Norway,  Sigurd  came  to  the  country,  and 
went  to  his  brother  King  Harald,  and  found  him  in 
Bergen.  He  placed  himself  entirely  in  the  king’s 
hands,  disclosed  who  his  father  was,  and  asked  him  to 
acknowledge  their  relationship.  The  king  gave  him 
no  hasty  or  distinct  reply;  but  laid  the  matter  before 
his  friends  in  a  conference  at  a  specially  appointed 
meeting.  After  this  conference  it  became  known 
that  the  king  laid  an  accusation  against  Sigurd,  be- 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


21  I 

cause  he  had  been  at  the  killing  of  Thorkel  Fostre 
in  the  West.  Thorkel  had  accompanied  Harald  to 
Norway  when  he  first  came  to  the  country,  and  had 
been  one  of  Harald’s  best  friends.  This  case  was 
followed  up  so  severely,  that  a  capital  accusation 
against  Sigurd  was  made,  and,  by  the  advice  of  the 
lendermen,  was  carried  so  far,  that  some  of  the 
king’s  pursuivants  went  one  evening  late  to  Sigurd, 
and  called  him  to  them.  They  then  took  a  boat 
and  rowed  away  with  Sigurd  from  the  town  south  to 
Nordnes.  Sigurd  sat  on  a  chest  in  the  stern  of  the 
boat,  and  had  his  suspicions  that  foul  play  was  in¬ 
tended.  He  was  clothed  in  blue  trousers,  and  over 
his  shirt  he  had  a  hood  tied  with  ribands,  which 
served  him  for  a  cloak.  He  sat  looking  down,  and 
holding  his  hood-strings  ;  and  sometimes  moved  them 
over  his  head,  sometimes  let  them  fall  again  before 
him.  Now  when  they  had  passed  the  ness,  they 
were  drunk,  and  merry,  were  rowing  so  eagerly  that 
they  were  not  taking  notice  of  anything.  Sigurd 
stood  up,  and  went  on  the  boat’s  deck  ;  but  the  tw7o 
men  who  were  placed  to  guard  him  stood  up  also,  and 
followed  him  to  the  side  of  the  vessel,  holding  by  his 
cloak,  as  is  the  custom  in  guarding  people  of  dis¬ 
tinction.  As  he  was  afraid  that  they  would  catch 
hold  of  more  of  his  clothes,  he  seized  them  both,  and 
leaped  overboard  with  them.  The  boat,  in  the  mean¬ 
time,  had  gone  on  a  long  way,  and  it  was  a  long  time 
before  those  on  board  could  turn  the  vessel,  and  long 
before  they  could  get  their  own  men  taken  on  board 
again ;  and  Sigurd  dived  under  water,  and  swam  so 


212 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


far  away  that  he  reached  the  land  before  they  could 
get  the  boat  turned  to  pursue  him.  Sigurd,  who 
was  very  swift  of  foot,  hied  up  to  the  mountains, 
and  the  king’s  men  travelled  about  the  whole  night 
seeking  him  without  finding  him.  He  lay  down  in 
a  cleft  of  the  rocks  ;  and  as  he  was  very  cold  he  took 
off  his  trousers,  cut  a  hole  in  the  seat  of  them,  and 
stuck  his  head  through  it,  and  put  his  arms  in  the 
legs  of  them.  He  escaped  with  life  this  time ;  and 
the  king’s  men  returned,  and  could  not  conceal 
their  unsuccessful  adventure. 


Chapter  XVII. —  Treachery  toivards  King  Harald. 

Sigurd  thought  now  that  it  would  be  of  no  use  to 
seek  any  help  from  King  Harald  again  ;  and  he  kept 
himself  concealed  all  the  autumn  and  the  beginning 
of  winter.  He  lay  hid  in  Bergen,  in  the  house  of  a 
priest.  King  Harald  was  also  in  the  town,  and 
many  great  people  with  him.  Now  Sigurd  con¬ 
sidered  how,  with  his  friends’  help,  he  might  take 
the  king  by  surprise,  and  make  an  end  of  him. 
Many  men  took  part  in  this  design  ;  and  among 
them  some  who  were  King  Harald’s  court-men  and 
chamberlains,  but  who  had  formerly  been  King  Mag¬ 
nus  s  court-men.  They  stood  in  great  favour  with 
the  king,  and  some  of  them  sat  constantly  at  the 
kings  table.  On  Saint  Lucia’s  day  [December  13], 
in  the  evening  when  they  proposed  to  execute  this 
treason,  two  men  sat  at  the  king’s  table  talking- 
together;  and  one  of  them  said  to  the  king,  “Sire 

O"  J 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


213 


we  two  table-companions  submit  our  dispute  to  your 
judgment,  having  made  a  wager  of  a  basket  of  honey 
to  him  who  guesses  right.  I  say  that  you  will  sleep 
this  night  with  your  Queen  Ingirid  ;  and  he  says  that 
you  will  sleep  with  Thora,  Guthorm’s  daughter.” 

The  king  answered  laughing,  and  without  suspect¬ 
ing  in  the  least  that  there  lay  treachery  under  the 
question, — that  he  who  asked  had  lost  his  bet. 

They  knew  thus  where  he  was  to  be  found  that 
night ;  but  the  main  guard  was  without  the  house 
in  which  most  people  thought  the  king  would  sleep, 
viz.,  that  which  the  queen  was  in. 

Chapter  XVIII. — Murder  of  King  Harold, 

Sigurd  Slembe,  and  some  men  wTho  were  in  his 
design,  came  in  the  night  to  the  lodging  in  which 
King  Harald  was  sleeping;  killed  the  watchman  first ; 
then  broke  open  the  door,  and  went  in  with  drawn 
swords.  Ivar  Kolbeinson  made  the  first  attack  on 
King  Harald  ;  and  as  the  king  had  been  drunk  when 
he  went  to  bed  he  slept  sound,  and  awoke  only  when 
the  men  were  striking  at  him.  Then  he  said  in  his 
sleep,  “Thou  art  treating  me  hardly,  Thora.”  She 
sprang  up,  saying,  “  They  are  treating  thee  hardly 
who  love  thee  less  than  I  do.”  ITarald  was  deprived 
of  life.#  Then  Sigurd  went  out  with  his  helpers,  and 
ordered  the  men  to  be  called  to  him  who  had  pro¬ 
mised  him  their  support  if  he  should  get  King  Harald 
taken  out  of  the  way.  Sigurd  and  his  men  then 
went  on,  and  took  a  boat,  set  themselves  to  the  oars, 

*  The  night  after  December  13,  1136. 


214 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


and  rowed  out  in  front  of  the  king’s  house  ;  and  then 
it  was  just  beginning  to  be  daylight.  Then  Sigurd 
stood  up,  spoke  to  those  who  were  standing  on  the 
king’s  pier,  made  known  to  them  the  murder  of  King 
Harald  by  his  hand,  and  desired  that  they  would  take 
him,  and  choose  him  as  chief  according  to  his  birth. 
Now  came  many  swarming  down  to  the  pier  from 
the  king’s  house  ;  and  all  with  one  voice  replied,  that 
they  would  never  give  obedience  or  service  to  a  man 
who  had  murdered  his  own  brother.  “And  if  thou 
art  not  his  brother,  thou  hast  no  claim  from  descent 
to  be  king.”  I  hey  clashed  their  weapons  together, 
and  adjudged  all  murderers  to  be  banished  and  out¬ 
lawed  men.  Now  the  king’s  horn  sounded,  and  all 
lendermen  and  courtmen  were  called  together.  Sigurd 
and  his  comrades  saw  it  was  best  for  them  to  get 
away ;  and  he  went  northward  to  North  Hordaland, 
where  he  held  a  Thing  with  the  bondes,  who  sub¬ 
mitted  to  him,  and  gave  him  the  title  of  king.  From 
thence  he  went  to  Sogn,  and  held  a  Thing  there  with 
the  bondes  and  was  proclaimed  king.  Then  he  went 
11 01  th  across  the  fiords,  and  most  people  supported  his 
cause.  So  says  Ivar  Ingimundson  : — • 

“  On  Harald’s  fall 
The  bondes  all, 

In  Hord  and  Sogn, 

Took  Magnus’  son. 

The  Things  swore  too 
They  would  be  true 
To  this  new  head, 

In  Harald’s  stead.” 

King  Harald  was  buried  in  the  old  Christ  church. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


215 


XIV. 

SAGA  OF  SIGURD,  INGE,  AND  EYSTEIN, 
THE  SONS  OF  HARALD  * 

PRELIMINARY  REMARKS. 

Sigurd  died  1155,  Eystein  1157,  and  Inge  1  1 6 1 . 

Other  literature  is  Morkinskinna  and  Fagrskinna. 

Sigurd  Slembe  is  the  subject  of  a  drama  by  Bjornstjerne 
Bjornson,  translated  into  English  by  William  Morton  Payne, 
and  published  by  Houghton,  Mifflin  &  Co.,  Boston,  1888. 

Skalds  quoted  are  :  Kolle,  Einar  Skulason,  and  Thorbjorn 
Skakkaskald. 


Chapter  I. — Beginning  of  the  History  of  the  Kings 

Sigurd  and  luge. 

Queen  Ingirid,  and  with  her  the  lendermen  and 
the  court  which  had  been  with  King  Idarald,  resolved 
to  send  a  fast-sailing  vessel  to  Throndhjem  to  make 
known  King  Idarald’ s  death,  and  also  to  desire  the 
Throndhjem  people  to  take  King  Harald’s  son  Sigurd 
for.  king.  He  was  then  in  the  north,  and  was  fos¬ 
tered  by  Sadagyrd  Bardson.  Queen  Ingirid  herself 
proceeded  eastward  immediately  to  \  iken.  Inge 
was  the  name  of  her  son  by  King  Idarald,  and  he  was 
then  fostered  by  Amunde  Gyrdson,  a  grandson  of 
Logberse.  When  they  came  to  Viken  a  Borgar- 

*  The  period  is  from  about  1136  to  1161. — L. 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


216 

thing*  was  immediately  called  together,  at  which 
Inge,  who  was  in  the  second  year  of  his  age,  was 
chosen  king.  This  resolution  was  supported  by 
Amunde  and  Thiostolf  Alason,  together  with  many 
other  great  chiefs.  Now  when  the  tidings  came 
north  to  Throndhjem  that  King  Harald  was  murdered, 
the  Throndhjem  people  took  Sigurd,  King  Ilarald’s 
son,  to  be  the  king  ;  and  this  resolution  was  sup¬ 
ported  by  Ottar  Billing,  Peter  Saudaulfson,  the 
brothers  Guthorm  of  Heine,  and  Ottar  Balle,  sons  of 
Asolf,  and  many  other  great  chiefs.  Afterwards  the 
whole  nation  almost  submitted  to  the  brothers,  and 
principally  because  their  father  was  considered  holy ; 
and  the  country  took  the  oath  to  them,  that  the 
kingly  power  should  not  go  to  any  other  man  as 
long  as  any  of  King  Harald’s  sons  were  alive. 


Chapter  II. — Of  Sigurd  Slembidjakn. 

Sigurd  Slembe  sailed  north  around  Stad  ;  and  when 
he  came  to  North  More,  he  found  that  letters  and  full 
powers  had  arrived  before  him  from  the  leaders  who 
had  given  in  their  allegiance  to  Harald’s  sons  ;  so 
that  there  he  got  no  welcome  or  help.  As  Sigurd 
himself  had  but  few  people  with  him,  he  resolved  to 
go  with  them  to  Throndhjem,  and  seek  out  Magnus 
the  Blind  ;  for  he  had  already  sent  a  message  before 
him  to  Magnus’s  friends.  Now  when  they  came  to 
the  town,  they  rowed  up  the  river  Nid  to  meet  King 

*  The  Borgar-thing — a  Thing  at  the  Borg  of  Sarp  or  Sarpshorg  ;  one  of 
the  regular  great  Things  of  the  country.  — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


217 


Magnus,  and  fastened  their  land-ropes  on  the  shore  at 
the  king’s  house  ;  but  were  obliged  to  set  off  immedi¬ 
ately,  for  all  the  people  rose  against  them.  They  then 
landed  at  Monkholm,  and  took  Magnus  the  Blind 
out  of  the  cloister  against  the  wTill  of  the  monks  ;  for 
he  had  been  consecrated  a  monk.  It  is  said  by  some 
that  Magnus  willingly  went  with  them ;  although  it  was 
differently  reported,  in  order  to  make  his  cause  appear 
better.  Sigurd,  immediately  after  Yule  [January, 

1 1 3 7],  went  forth  with  his  suite,  expecting  aid  from 
his  relations  and  Magnus’s  friends,  and  which  they 
also  got.  Sigurd  sailed  w7ith  his  men  out  of  the  fiord, 
and  was  joined  afterwards  by  Biorn  Egilson,  Gunnar 
of  Gimsar,  ITaldor  Sigurdson,  Aslak  Hakonson,  the 
brothers  Bendikt  and  Eirik,  and  also  the  court  which 
had  before  been  with  King  Magnus,  and  many  others. 
With  this  troop  they  went  south  to  More,  and  down 
to  the  mouth  of  Raumsdal  fiord.  Here  Sigurd  and 
Magnus  divided  their  forces,  and  Sigurd  went  imme¬ 
diately  westwards  across  the  sea.  King  Magnus  again 
proceeded  to  the  Uplands,  where  he  expected  much 
help  and  strength,  and  which  he  obtained.  He  re¬ 
mained  there  the  winter  and  all  the  summer  [1 1 3  7],  and 
had  many  people  with  him  ;  but  King  Inge  proceeded 
against  him  with  all  his  forces,  and  they  met  at  a 
place  called  Mynne.  There  was  a  great  battle,  at 
which  King  Magnus  had  the  most  people.  It  is 
related  that  Thiostolf  Alason  carried  King  Inge  in 
his  belt  as  long  as  the  battle  lasted,  and  stood  under 
the  banner  ;  but  Thiostolf  was  hard  pressed  by  fatigue 
and  fighting :  and  it  is  commonly  said  that  King 


2  I  8 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Inge  got  his  ill  health  there,  and  which  he  retained 
as  long  as  he  lived,  so  that  his  back  was  knotted  into 
a  hump,  and  the  one  foot  was  shorter  than  the  other ; 
and  he  was  besides  so  infirm  that  he  could  scarcely 
walk  as  long  as  he  lived.  The  defeat  began  to  turn 
upon  Magnus  and  his  men  ;  and  in  the  front  rank 
of  his  array  fell  Haldor  Sigurdson,  Biorn  Egilson, 
Gunnar  of  Gimsar,  and  a  great  number  of  his  men, 
before  he  himself  would  take  to  his  horse  and  fly. 
So  says  Ivolle  : — 

“  Thy  arrow-storm  on  Mynne’s  banks 
Fast  tliinn’d  the  foenien’s  strongest  ranks  ; 

Thy  good  sword  hewed  the  raven’s  feast 
On  Mynne’s  banks  up  in  the  East. 

Shield  clashed  on  shield,  and  bucklers  broke 
Under  tliy  battle-axe’s  stroke  ; 

While  thou,  uncovered,  urged  the  fray, 

Thy  shield  and  mail-coat  thrown  away.” 


And  also  this  : — 

“  The  king  to  heaven  belonging*  fled, 

When  tlioUjt  in  war’s  quick  death-game  bred, 
Unpanzered,  shieldless  on  the  plain 
His  heavy  steel-clad  guards  hadst  slain. 

The  painted  shield,  and  steel-plate  mail, 
Before  thy  fierce  attack  soon  fail. 

To  Magnus  who  belongs  to  heaven, 

Was  no  such  fame  in  battle  given.” 


Magnus  fled  eastward  to  Gautland,  and  then  to 
Denmark.  At  that  time  there  was  in  Gautland  an 
earl,  Karl  Sonason,  who  was  a  great  and  ambitious 
man.  Magnus  the  Blind  and  his  men  said,  wherever 

*  Magnus,  having  assumed  the  monk’s  garb,  was  considered  as  belong¬ 
ing  to  heaven. — L. 

t  This  appeal  s  to  be  addressed  to  Tliiostolf  Alason,  who  commanded 
in  the  battle ;  not  to  King  Inge,  an  infant. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


219 


they  happened  to  meet  with  chiefs,  that  Norway  lay 
quite  open  to  any  great  chieftain  who  would  attack 
it ;  for  it  might  well  be  said  there  was  no  king  in 
the  country,  and  the  kingdom  was  only  ruled  by 
lendermen,  and,  among  those  who  had  most  sway, 
there  was,  from  mutual  jealousy,  most  discord.  Now 
Karl,  being  ambitious  of  power,  listens  willingly 
to  such  speeches  ;  collects  men,  and  rides  west  to 
Viken,  where  many  people,  out  of  fear,  submit  to 
him.  When  Thiostolf  Alason  and  Amunde  heard  of 
this,  they  went  with  the  men  they  could  get  together, 
and  took  King  Inge  with  them.  They  met  Earl 
Karl  and  the  Gautland  army  eastward  in  Ivrokaskog, 
where  there  was  a  great  battle  and  a  great  defeat, 
King  Inge  gaining  the  victory.  Munan  Ogmundson, 
Earl  Karl’s  mother’s  brother,  fell  there.  Ogmund 
the  father  of  Munan  was  a  son  of  Earl  Orm  Eilifson, 
and  Sigrid  a  daughter  of  Earl  Fin  Arnason.  Astrid, 
Ogmund’s  daughter,  was  the  mother  of  Earl  Karl. 
Many  others  of  the  Gautland  people  fell  at  Kroka- 
skog ;  and  the  earl  fled  eastward  through  the  forest. 
King  Inge  pursued  them  all  the  way  out  of  the 
kingdom  ;  and  this  expedition  turned  out  a  great 
disgrace  to  them.  So  say  Kolle  : — 

“  I  must  proclaim  how  our  great  lord 
Coloured  deep  red  his  ice-cold  sword  ; 

And  ravens  played  with  Gautland  bones, 

And  wolves  heard  Gautlanders’  last  groans. 

Their  silly  jests  were  well  repaid, — 

In  Krokaskog  their  laugh  was  laid  : 

Thy  battle  power  was  then  well  tried, 

And  they  who  won  may  now  deride.” 


220 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  III. — King  Eirik's  Expedition  to  Norway. 

Magnus  the  Blind  then  went  to  Denmark  to  King 
Eirik  Eimune,  where  he  was  well  received.  He 
offered  the  king  to  follow  him  if  he  would  invade 
Norway  with  a  Danish  army,  and  subdue  the  coun¬ 
try  ;  saying,  that  if  he  came  to  Norway  with  his  army, 
no  man  in  Norway  would  venture  to  throw  a  spear 
against  him.  The  king  allowed  himself  to  be  moved 
by  Magnus’s  persuasions,  ordered  a  levy,  and  went 
north  to  Norway  with  200  *  ships;  and  Magnus  and 
his  men  were  with  him  on  this  expedition.  When 
they  came  to  Viken,  they  proceeded  peacefully  and 
gently  on  the  east  side  of  the  fiord ;  but  when  the 
fleet  came  westward  to  Tunsberg,  a  great  number  of 
King  Inge’s  lendermen  came  against  them.  Their 
leader  was  Vatnorm  Dagson,  a  brother  of  Grego¬ 
rius.  The  Danes  could  not  land  to  get  water  with¬ 
out  many  of  them  being  killed  ;  and  therefore  they 
went  in  through  the  fiord  to  Oslo,  where  Thiostolf 
Aleson  opposed  them.  It  is  told  that  some  people 
wanted  to  carry  the  holy  Halvard’s  coffin  out  of  the 
town  in  the  evening  when  the  fleet  was  first  observed, 
and  as  many  as  could  took  hold  of  it ;  but  the  coffin 
became  so  heavy  that  they  could  not  carry  it  over 
the  church  floor.  The  morning  after,  however,  when 
they  saw  the  fleet  sailing  in  past  the  Hofud  Isle, 
four  men  carried  the  coffin  out  of  the  town,  and 
Thiostolf  and  all  the  townspeople  followed  it. 


*  =  240. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


22  I 


Chapter  IV. — The  Town  of  Oslo  Burnt. 

King  Eirik  and  his  army  advanced  against  the 
town  ;  and  some  of  his  men  hastened  after  Thiostolf 
and  his  troop.  Thiostolf  threw  a  spear  at  a  man 
named  Askel,  which  hit  him  under  the  thioat,  so  that 
the  spear  point  went  through  his  neck  ;  and  Thiostolf 
thought  he  had  never  made  a  better  speai-cast,  foi, 
except  the  place  he  hit,  there  was  nothing  bare  to 
be  seen.  The  shrine  of  St.  Halvard  was  taken  up 
to  Kaumarike,  where  it  remained  for  three  months. 
Thiostolf  went  up  to  Kaumarike,  and  collected  men 
during  the  night,  with  whom  he  returned  towards 
the  town  in  the  morning.  In  the  meantime  King 
Eirik  set  fire  to  Halvard’s  church,  and  to  the  town, 
which  was  entirely  burnt.  Thiostolf  came  soon  after 
to  the  town  with  the  men  he  had  assembled,  and 
Eirik  sailed  off  with  his  fleet ;  but  could  not  land 
anywhere  on  that  side  of  the  fiord,  on  account  of 
the  troops  of  the  lendermen  who  came  down  against 
them  \  and  wherever  they  attempted  a  landing,  they 
left  five  or  six  men  or  more  upon  the  stiand.  King 
Inge  lay  with  a  great  number  of  people  into  Ilorn- 
borusund,  but  when  he  learned  this,  he  turned  about 
southwards  to  Denmark  again.  King  Inge  pursued 
him,  and  took  from  him  all  the  ships  he  could  get 
hold  of ;  and  it  was  a  common  observation  among 
people,  that  never  was  so  poor  an  expedition 
made  with  so  great  an  armament  in  another  king  s 
dominions.  King  Eirik  was  ill  pleased  at  it,  and 
thought  King  Magnus  and  his  men  had  been  making 


222 


CHRONICLE  OF  TIIE 


a  fool  of  him  by  encouraging  him  to  undertake  this 
expedition,  and  he  declared  he  would  never  again 
be  such  friends  with  them  as  before. 


Chapter  Y. — Of  Sigurd  Slcmbidjakn. 

Sigurd  Slembidjakn  came  that  summer  from  the 
West  sea  to  Norway,  where  he  heard  of  his  relation 
King  Magnus’s  unlucky  expedition ;  so  he  expected 
no  welcome  in  Norway,  but  sailed  south,  outside  the 
rocks,  past  the  land,  and  set  over  to  Denmark,  and 
went  into  the  Sound.  He  fell  in  with  some  Vind- 
land  cutters  south  of  the  islands,  gave  them  battle, 
and  gained  the  victory.  He  cleared  eight  ships, 
killing  many  of  the  men,  and  he  hanged  the  others. 

He  also  had  a  battle  off  the  island  Mon  with 
the  A  indland  men,  and  gained  a  victory.  He  then 
sailed  from  the  south,  and  came  to  the  eastern  arm 
.  of  the  Gaut  river,  and  took  three  ships  of  the  fleet 
of  Thorer  Hvinantorde,  and  Olaf  the  son  of  Harald 
Ivesia,  who  was  Sigurd’s  own  sister’s  son  ;  for  Ragn- 
hild,  the  mother  of  Olaf,  was  a  daughter  of  King 
Magnus  Barefoot.  He  drove  Olaf  up  the  country. 

Thiostolf  was  at  this  time  in  Konungahella,  and  had 
collected  people  to  defend  the  country,  and  Sigurd 
steered  thither  with  his  fleet.  They  shot  at  each 
other,  but  he  could  not  effect  a  landing ;  and,  on 
both  sides,  many  were  killed  and  many  wounded. 
Ulfhedin  Soxolfson,  Sigurd’s  forecastle  man,  fell 
there.  He  was  an  Icelander,  from  the  north  quarter. 
Sigurd  continued  his  course  northwards  to  Viken, 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


and  plundered  far  and  wide  around.  Now  when 
Sigurd  lay  in  a  harbour  called  Portyrja  on  Limgard’s 
coast,*  and  watched  the  ships  going  to  or  coming 
from  Viken  to  plunder  them,  the  Tunsberg  men 
collected  an  armed  force  against  him,  and  came 
unexpectedly  upon  them  while  Sigurd  and  his  men 
were  on  shore  dividing  their  booty.  Some  of  the 
men  came  down  from  the  land,  but  some  of  the 
other  party  laid  themselves  with  their  ships  right 
across  the  harbour  outside  of  them.  Sigurd  ran  up 
into  his  ship,  and  rowed  out  against  them.  Vatn- 
orm’s  ship  wTas  the  nearest,  and  he  let  his  ship  fall 
behind  the  line,  and  Sigurd  rowed  clear  past,  and 
thus  escaped  with  one  ship  and  the  loss  of  many 
men.  This  verse  was  made  upon  Yatnorm  :  t — 

“The  water  serpent,  people  say, 

From  Portyrja  slipped  away.” 


Chapter  YJ. — The  Murder  of  Beintein. 

Sigurd  Slembidjakn  sailed  from  thence  to  Den¬ 
mark  ;  and  at  that  time  a  man  was  lost  in  his  ship, 
whose  name  was  Kolbein  Thorliotson  of  Batald.J 
He  was  sitting  in  a  boat  which  was  made  fast  to  the 
vessel,  and  upset  because  she  was  sailing  quickly. 
When  they  came  south  to  Denmark,  Sigurd’s  ship 
itself  was  cast  away  ;  but  he  got  to  Alaborg,  and  was 
there  in  winter.  The  summer  after  [1138]  Magnus 

*  Now  Portor,  near  Kragerd. — L. 

t  Vatnonn,  the  name  of  this  man,  means  the  water-serpent,  and 
appears  to  have  been  a  favourite  name  for  war-ships  also  :  hence  the  pun 
in  the  lines  upon  Vatnorm. — L. 

£  One  of  those  who  murdered  King  Harald  Gille.  —  L. 


224 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


and  Sigurd  sailed  together  from  the  south  with  seven 
ships,  and  came  unexpectedly  in  the  night  to  Lister, 
where  they  laid  their  ships  on  the  land.  Beintein 
Kolbeinson,  a  court-man  of  King  Inge,  and  a  very 
brave  man,  was  there.  Sigurd  and  his  men  jumped 
on  shore  at  daylight,  came  unexpectedly  on  the 
people,  surrounded  the  house,  and  were  setting  fire 
to  the  buildings  ;  but  Beintein  came  out  of  a  store¬ 
house  with  his  weapons,  well  armed,  and  stood 
within  the  door  with  drawn  sword,  his  shield  before 
him,  helmet  on,  and  ready  to  defend  himself.  The 
door  was  somewhat  low.  Sigurd  asked  which  of  his 
lads  had  most  desire  to  go  in  against  Beintein,  which 
he  called  brave  man’s  work ;  but  'iione  was  very 
hurried  to  make  ready  for  it.  While  they  were 
discussing  this  matter  Sigurd  rushed  into  the  house, 
past  Beintein.  Beintein  struck  at  him,  but  missed 
him.  Sigurd  turned  instantly  on  Beintein ;  and 
after  exchanging  blows  Sigurd  gave  him  his  death- 
stroke,  and  came  out  presently  bearing  his  head  in 
his  hands. 

They  took  all  the  goods  that  were  in  the  farm¬ 
house,  carried  the  booty  to  their  ships,  and  sailed 
away.  When  King  Inge  and  his  friends,  and  also 
Ivolbein’s  sons  Sigurd  and  Gyrd,  the  brothers  of 
Beintein,  heard  of  Beintein’ s  murder,  the  king  sent  a 
great  force  against  Sigurd  Slembe  and  his  followers  ; 
and  also  travelled  himself,  and  took  a  ship  from 
Hakon  Paulson  Pungelta,  who  was  a  daughter’s  son 
of  Aslak,  a  son  of  Erling  Skialgson  of  Sole,  and 
cousin  of  Ilakon  Mage.  King  Inge  drove  Hakon 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


225 


and  his  followers  up  the  country,  and  took  all  their 
gear.  Sigurd  Stork,  a  son  of  Eindride  of  Gautdal, 
and  his  brother  Eirik  Hsel,  and  Andres  Kelduskit, 
son  of  Grim  of  Vist,  all  fled  away  into  the  fiords. 
But  Sigurd  Slembe,  Magnus  the  Blind,  and  Thorleif 
Skiappa,  sailed  outside  the  isles  with  three  ships 
north  to  Halogaland ;  and  Magnus  was  in  winter 
[1139]  north  in  Biarkey  Isle  with  Vidkun  Jonson. 
But  Sigurd  had  the  stem  and  stern-post  of  his  ship 
cut  out,  made  a  hole  in  her,  and  sank  her  in  the 
inner  part  of  Egisfiord,  and  thereafter  he  passed  the 
winter  at  Tialdasund  by  Gljufrafiord  in  Hin.  Far 
up  the  fiord  there  is  a  cave  in  the  rock  :  in  that 
place  Sigurd  sat  with  his  followers,  who  were  above 
twenty  men,  secretly,  and  hung  a  grey  cloth  before 
the  mouth  of  the  hole,  so  that  no  person  could  see 
them  from  the  strand.  Thorleif  Skiappa,  and  Einar 
son  of  Ogmund  of  Sand,  and  of  Gudrun  daughter  of 
Einar  Arason  of  Reikiaholar,  procured  food  for  Sigurd 
during  the  winter.  It  is  said  that  Sigurd  made  the 
Laplanders  construct  two  boats  for  him  during  the 
winter  up  in  the  fiord ;  and  they  were  fastened  to¬ 
gether  with  deer  sinews,  without  nails,  and  with 
twigs  of  willow  instead  of  knees,  and  each  boat  could 
carry  twelve  men.  Sigurd  was  with  the  Laplanders 
while  they  were  making  the  boats ;  and  the  Lap¬ 
landers  had  good  ale,  with  which  they  entek  lined 
Sigurd.  Sigurd  made  these  lines  on  it : — 

“  In  the  Lapland  tent 
Brave  days  we  spent, 

Under  the  grey  birch  tree  ; 


VOL.  IV. 


P 


226 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


In  bed  or  on  bank 
We  knew  no  rank, 

And  a  merry  crew  were  we. 

“  Good  ale  went  round 
As  we  sat  on  the  ground, 
Under  the  grey  birch  tree  ; 
And  up  with  the  smoke 
Flew  laugh  and  joke, 

And  a  merry  crew  were  we.” 


These  boats  were  so  light  that  no  ship  could  over¬ 
take  them  in  the  water,  according  to  what  was  sung 
at  the  time  : — 

“Our  skin-sewed  Fin -boats  lightly  swim, 

Over  the  sea  like  wind  they  skim. 

Our  ships  are  built  without  a  nail  ; 

Few  ships  like  ours  can  row  or  sail.” 

In  spring  Sigurd  and  Magnus  went  south  along 
the  coast  with  the  two  boats  which  the  Laplanders 
had  made  ;  and  when  they  came  to  Vagar  they  killed 
Svein  the  priest  and  his  two  sons. 


Chapter  VII. — Of  Sigurd  Slembes  Campaign. 

Thereafter  Sigurd  came  south  to  Vikar,  and  seized 
King  Sigurd’s  lendermen,  William  Skinnare  and 
Thorald  Kept,  and  killed  them  both.  Then  Sigurd 
turned  southwards  along  the  coast,  and  met  Styrkar 
Glsesirofa  south  of  Byrda,  as  he  was  coming  from 
the  south  from  the  town  of  Nidaros,  and  killed  him. 
Now  when  Sigurd  came  south  to  Valsnes,  he  met 
Svinagrim  outside  of  the  ness,  and  cut  off  his  right 
hand.  From  thence  he  went  south  to  More,  past 
the  mouth  of  the  Throndhjem  fiord,  where  they  took 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


227 


Hedin  Hirdmage  and  Kalf  Kringluauge.  They  let 
ITedin  escape,  but  killed  Kalf.  When  King  Sigurd, 
and  his  foster-father  Sadagyrd,  heard  of  Sigurd 
Slembidjakn’s  proceedings,  and  what  he  was  doing, 
they  sent  people  to  search  for  him  ;  and  their  leader 
was  Jon  Kauda,  a  son  of  Kalf  Range,  Bishop  Ivar’s 
brother,  and  besides  the  priest  Jon  Smyril.  They 
went  on  board  the  ship  the  Reindeer,  which  had 
twenty-two  rowing  benches,  and  was  one  of  the 
swiftest  sailing  vessels,  to  seek  Sigurd ;  but  as  they 
could  not  find  him,  they  returned  northwards  with 
little  glory  :  for  people  said  that  they  had  got  sight 
of  Sigurd  and  his  people,  and  durst  not  attack  them. 
Afterwards  Sigurd  proceeded  southwards  to  ITorda- 
land,  and  came  to  IJerdla,  where  Einar  a  son  of  Laxa- 
paul  had  a  farm  ;  and  went  into  Hamar’s  fiord,  to  the 
Gangdaga- thing.' *  They  took  all  the  goods  that  were 
at  the  farm,  and  a  long-ship  of  twenty-two  benches 
which  belonged  to  Einar ;  and  also  his  son,  four 
years  old,  who  was  living  with  one  of  his  labouring 
people.  Some  wanted  to  kill  the  boy,  but  others 
took  him  and  carried  him  with  them.  The  labouring 
man  said,  “  It  will  not  be  lucky  for  you  to  kill  the 
child ;  and  it  will  be  of  no  use  to  you  to  carry  him 
away,  for  it  is  my  son,  and  not  Einar’s.”  And  on 
his  word  they  let  the  boy  remain,  and  went  away. 
When  Einar  came  home  he  gave  the  labourer  money 
to  the  value  of  two  ore  of  gold,  thanked  him  for 
his  clever  invention,  and  promised  him  his  constant 

*  Gangdaga-thing — a  Thing  held  in  the  procession  days  of  the  Ascen¬ 
sion  Week,  two  weeks  before  Whitsuntide. 


228 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


friendship.  So  says  Eirik  Odson,  who  first  wrote 
down  this  relation ;  and  he  heard  himself  Einar 
Paulson  telling  these  circumstances  in  Bergen. 
Sigurd  then  went  southward  along  the  coast  all  the 
way  east  to  Viken,  and  met  Fin  Saudaulfson  east 
at  Kvildar,  as  he  was  engaged  in  drawing  in  King 
Inge’s  rents  and  duties,  and  hanged  him.  Then 
they  sailed  south  to  Denmark. 


Chapter  VIII — Of  King  Inge's  Letter  to  King  Sigurd. 

The  people  of  Viken  and  of  Bergen  complained  that 
it  was  wrong  for  King  Sigurd  and  his  friends  to  be 
sitting  quietly  north  in  the  town  of  Nidaros,  while  his 
father’s  murderer  was  cruising  about  in  the  ordinary 
passage  at  the  mouth  of  the  Throndhjem  fiord ;  and 
King  Inge  and  his  people,  on  the  other  hand,  were 
in  Viken  in  the  midst  of  the  danger,  defending  the 
country  and  holding  many  battles.  Then  King  Inge 
sent  a  letter  north  to  the  merchant-town  Nidaros,  in 
which  were  these  words  :  “  King  Inge  Haraldson 
sends  his  brother  King  Sigurd,  as  also  Sadagyrd, 
Ogmund  Svipte,  Ottar  Birting,  and  all  lendermen, 
court-men,  house-people,  and  all  the  public,  rich  and 
poor,  young  and  old,  his  own  and  God’s  salutation. 
The  misfortune  is  known  to  all  men  that  on  account 
of  our  childhood — thou  being  but  five,  and  I  but 
three  years  of  age — we  can  undertake  nothing  with¬ 
out  the  counsel  of  our  friends  and  other  good  men. 
Now  I  and  my  men  think  that  we  stand  nearer  to 
the  danger  and  necessity  common  to  us  both,  than 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


229 


thou  and  thy  friends  ;  therefore  make  it  so  that  thou, 
as  soon  as  possible,  come  to  me,  and  as  strong  in 
troops  as  possible,  that  we  may  be  assembled  to  meet 
whatever  may  come.  He  will  be  our  best  friend 
who  does  all  he  can  that  we  may  be  united,  and  may 
take  an  equal  part  in  all  things.  But  if  thou  refuse, 
and  wilt  not  come  after  this  message  which  I  send 
thee  in  need,  as  thou  hast  done  before,  then  thou 
must  expect  that  I  will  come  against  thee  with  an 
armament :  and  let  God  decide  between  us ;  for  we 
are  not  in  a  condition  to  sit  here  at  so  great  an  ex¬ 
pense,  and  with  so  numerous  a  body  of  troops  as 
are  necessary  here  on  account  of  the  enemy,  and 
besides  many  other  pressing  charges,  whilst  thou 
hast  half  of  all  the  land-tax  and  other  revenues  of 
Norway.  Live  in  the  peace  of  God  !  ” 


Chapter  IX. — Ottar  Birtings  Speech. 

Then  Ottar  Birting  stood  up  in  the  Thing,  and 
first  of  all  answered  thus  :  “  This  is  King  Sigurd’s 
reply  to  his  brother  King  Inge — that  God  will  reward 
him  for  his  good  salutation,  and  likewise  for  the 
trouble  and  burden  which  he  and  his  friends  have  in 
this  kingdom,  and  in  matters  of  necessity  which  effect 
them  both.  Although  now  some  think  there  is  some¬ 
thing  sharp  in  King  Inge’s  message  to  his  brother 
Sigurd,  yet  he  has  in  many  respects  sufficient  cause 
for  it.  Now  I  will  make  known  to  you  my  opinion, 
and  we  will  hear  if  King  Sigurd  and  the  other  people 
of  power  will  agree  to  it ;  and  it  is,  that  thou,  King 


230 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Sigurd,  make  thyself  ready,  with  all  the  people  who 
will  follow  thee,  to  defend  thy  country  ;  and  go  as 
strong  in  men  as  possible  to  thy  brother  King  Inge 
as  soon  as  thou  art  prepared,  in  order  to  assist  each 
other  in  all  things  that  are  for  the  common  good  ; 
and  may  God  Almighty  strengthen  and  assist  you 
both !  Now,  king,  we  will  have  thy  words.” 

Peter,  a  son  of  Saudaulf,  who  was  afterwards 
called  Peter  Byrdarsvein,  bore  King  Sigurd  to  the 
Thing.  Then  the  king  said,  “Ye  must  know  that, 
if  I  am  to  advise,  I  will  go  as  soon  as  possible  to  my 
brother  King  Inge.”  Then  others  spoke,  one  after 
the  other ;  but  although  each  began  his  speech  in 
his  own  way,  he  ended  with  agreeing  to  what  Ottar 
Billing  had  proposed ;  and  it  was  determined  to  call 
together  the  war- forces,  and  go  to  the  east  part  of 
the  country.  King  Sigurd  accordingly  went  with  a 
great  armament  east  to  Viken,  and  there  he  met  his 
brother  King  Inge. 


Chapter  X. — Fall  of  Magnus  the  Blind. 

The  same  autumn  [i  139]  Sigurd  Slembe  andMagnus 
the  Blind  came  from  Denmark  with  thirty  ships, 
manned  both  with  Danes  and  Northmen.  It  was  near 
to  winter.  When  the  kings  heard  of  this,  they  set 
out  with  their  people  eastwards  to  meet  them.  They 
met  at  Hvalar,  near  Holm  the  Grey,*  the  day  after 
Martinmas,  which  was  a  Sunday.  King  Inge  and 
King  Sigurd  had  twenty  ships,  which  were  all  large. 


*  Supposed  to  be  two  small  isles  near  Arendal. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


231 


There  was  a  great  battle ;  but,  after  the  first  assault, 
the  Danes  fled  home  to  Denmark  with  eighteen  ships. 
On  this  Sigurd’s  and  Magnus’s  ships  were  cleared  ; 
and  as  the  last  was  almost  entirely  bare  of  men,  and 
Magnus  was  lying  in  his  bed,  Hreidar  Griotgardson, 
who  had  long  followed  him,  and  been  his  court-man, 
took  King  Magnus  in  his  arms,  and  tried  to  run  with 
him  on  board  some  other  ship.  But  Ilreidar  was 
struck  by  a  spear,  which  went  between  his  shoulders  ; 
and  people  say  King  Magnus  was  killed  by  the  same 
spear.  Hreidar  fell  backwards  upon  the  deck,  and 
Magnus  upon  him ;  and  every  man  spoke  of  how 
honourably  he  had  followed  his  master  and  rightful 
sovereign.  Happy  are  they  who  have  such  praise  ! 
There  fell,  on  King  Magnus’s  ship,  Lodin  Saupprud 
of  Linustadar,  Bruse  Thormodson  ;  and  the  forecastle- 
men  to  Sigurd  Slembidjakn,  Ivar  Ivolbeinson  and 
Ilalvard  Fseger,  who  had  been  in  Sigurd  Slembe’s 
fore-hold.  This  Ivar  had  been  the  first  who  had 
gone  in,  in  the  night,  to  King  ITarald,  and  had  laid 
hands  on  him.  There  fell  a  great  number  of  the  men 
of  King  Magnus  and  Sigurd  Slembe,  for  Inge’s  men 
let  not  a  single  one  escape  if  they  got  hold  of  him  ; 
but  only  a  few  are  named  here.  They  killed  upon  a 
holm  more  than  forty  men,  among  whom  were  two 
Icelanders, — the  priest  Sigurd  Bergthorson,  a  grand¬ 
son  of  Mas  ;  the  other  Clemet,  a  son  of  Are  Einarson, 
But  three  Icelanders  obtained  their  lives:  namely, 
Ivar  Skrauthanke/'  a  son  of  Kalf  Kange,  and  who 
afterwards  was  bishop  of  Throndhjem,  and  was  fatliei 

*  He  was  bishop  about  the  year  1 142. 


232 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


of  the  archbishop  Eirik.  Ivar  had  always  followed 
King  Magnus,  and  he  escaped  into  his  brother  Jon 
Kauda’s  ship.  Jon  was  married  to  Cecilia,  a  daughter 
of  Gyrd  Bardson,  and  was  then  in  King  Inge’s  and 
Sigurd’s  armament.  There  were  three  in  all  who 
escaped  on  board  of  Jon’s  ship.  The  second  was 
Arnbiorn  Ambe,  who  afterwards  married  Thorstein’s 
daughter  in  Audsholt :  the  third  was  Ivar  Dynta,  a 
son  of  Stare,  but  on  the  mother’s  side  of  a  Throndhjem 
family, — a  very  agreeable  man.  When  the  troops 
came  to  know  that  these  three  were  on  board  his 
ship,  they  took  their  weapons  and  assaulted  the  vessel, 
and  some  blows  were  exchanged,  and  the  whole  fleet 
had  nearly  come  to  a  fight  among  themselves ;  but 
it  came  to  an  agreement,  so  that  Jon  ransomed  his 
brothers  Ivar  and  Arnbiorn  for  a  fixed  sum  in  ran¬ 
som,  which,  however,  was  afterwards  remitted.  But 
Ivar  Dynta  was  taken  to  the  shore,  and  beheaded  ;  for 
Sigurd  and  Gyrd,  the  sons  of  Kolbein,  would  not 
take  any  mulct  for  him,  as  they  knew  he  had  been 
at  their  brother  Beintein’s  murder.  Ivar  the  bishop 
said,  that  never  was  there  anything  that  touched  him 
so  nearly,  as  Ivar’s  going  to  the  shore  under  the 
axe,  and  turning  to  the  others  with  the  wish  that 
they  might  meet  in  joy  hereafter.  Gudrid  Birger’s 
daughter,  a  sister  of  Archbishop  Jon*  told  Eirik 
Odson  that  she  heard  Bishop  Ivar  say  this. 

*  The  first  Archbishop  of  Norway,  1152-1157. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


233 


Chaptek  XI. — Sigurd  Slembe  taken  Prisoner. 

A  man  called  Thrand  Gialdkere  was  the  steersman 
of  King  Inge’s  ship.  It  was  come  so  far,  that  Inge’s 
men  were  rowing  in  small  boats  between  the  ships 
after  those  who  were  swimming  in  the  water,  and 
killed  those  they  could  get  hold  of.  Sigurd  Slembe 
threw  himself  overboard  after  his  ship  had  lost  her 
crew,  stripped  off  his  armour  under  the  water,  and 
then  swam  with  his  shield  over  him.  Some  men 
from  Thrand’ s  vessel  took  prisoner  a  man  who  was 
swimming,  and  were  about  to  kill  him  ;  but  he  begged 
his  life,  and  offered  to  tell  them  where  Sigurd  Slembe 
was,  and  they  agreed  to  it.  Shields  and  spears,  dead 
men,  weapons,  and  clothes,  were  floating  all  round 
on  the  sea  about  the  ships,  “Ye  can  see,”  said  he, 
“  a  red  shield  floating  on  the  water :  he  is  under  it.” 
They  rowed  to  it  immediately,  took  him,  and  brought 
him  on  board  of  Thrand’ s  ship.  Thrand  then  sent  a 
message  to  Thiostolf,  Ottar,  and  Amunde.  Sigurd 
Slembe  had  a  tinder-box  on  him,  and  the  tinder  was 
in  a  walnut-shell,  around  which  there  was  wax.  This 
is  related,  because  it  seems  an  ingenious  way  of  pre¬ 
serving  it  from  ever  getting  wet.  He  swam  with  a 
shield  over  him,  because  nobody  could  know  one 
shield  from  another  where  so  many  were  floating 
about ;  and  they  would  never  have  hit  upon  him,  if 
they  had  not  been  told  where  he  was.  When  Thrand 
came  to  the  land  with  Sigurd,  and  it  was  told  to  the 
troops  that  he  was  taken,  the  army  set  up  a  shout  of 
joy.  When  Sigurd  heard  it  he  said,  “Many  a  bad 


234 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


man  will  rejoice  over  my  head  this  day.”  Then  Thios- 
tolf  Alason  went  to  where  Sigurd  was  sitting,  struck 
from  his  head  a  silk  hat  edged  with  silver  fringes, 
and  said,  “Why  wert  thou  so  impudent,  thou  son 
of  a  slave  !  to  dare  to  call  thyself  King  Magnus 
Barefoot’s  son  ?  ” 

Sigurd  replied,  “  Presume  not  to  compare  my 
father  to  a  slave  ;  for  thy  father  was  of  little  worth 
compared  to  mine.” 

Hal,  a  son  of  the  doctor  Thorgeir  Steinson,  King 
Inge’s  court-man,  was  present  at  this  circumstance, 
and  told  it  to  Eirik  Odson,  who  afterwards  wrote  these 
relations  in  a  book,  which  he  called  Hryggjarstykke. 
In  this  book  is  told  all  concerning  Harald  Gille  and 
his  sons,  and  Magnus  the  Blind,  and  Sigurd  Slembi- 
djakn,  until  their  deaths.  Eirik  was  a  sensible  man, 
who  was  long  in  Nonvay  about  that  time.  Some  of 
his  narratives  he  wrote  down  from  Hakon  Mage’s 
account ;  some  were  from  the  lendermen  of  Harald’s 
sons,  who  along  with  his  sons  were  in  all  this  feud, 
and  in  all  the  councils.  Eirik  names,  moreover,  several 
men  of  understanding  and  veracity,  who  told  him 
these  accounts,  and  were  so  near  that  they  saw  or 
heard  all  that  happened.  Something  he  wrote  from 
what  he  himself  had  heard  or  seen. 


Chapter  XII. — Torture  of  Sigurcl  JSlembe. 

Hal  says  that  the  chiefs  wished  to  have  Sigurd 
killed  instantly ;  but  the  men  who  were  the  most 
cruel,  and  thought  they  had  injuries  to  avenge,  ad- 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


235 


vised  torturing  him ;  and  for  this  they  named  Bein- 
tein’s  brothers,  Sigurd  and  Gyrd  the  sons  of  Kolbein. 
Peter  Byrdarsvein  would  also  avenge  his  brother 
Fin.  But  the  chiefs  and  the  greater  part  of  the 
people  went  away.  They  broke  his  shin-bones  and 
arms  with  an  axe-hammer.  Then  they  stripped  him, 
and  would  flay  him  alive ;  but  when  they  tried  to 
take  off  the  skin,  they  could  not  do  it  for  the  gush 
of  blood.  They  took  leather  whips  and  flogged  him 
so  long,  that  the  skin  was  as  much  taken  off  as  if  he 
had  been  flayed.  Then  they  stuck  a  piece  of  wood 
in  his  back  until  it  broke,  dragged  him  to  a  tree  and 
hanged  him ;  and  then  cut  off  his  head,  and  brought 
the  body  and  head  to  a  heap  of  stones  and  buried 
them  there.  All  acknowledge,  both  enemies  and 
friends,  that  no  man  in  Norway,  within  memory  of 
the  living,  was  more  gifted  with  all  perfections,  or 
more  experienced,  than  Sigurd  ;  but  in  some  respects 
he  was  an  unlucky  man.  Hal  says  that  he  spoke 
little,  and  answered  only  a  few,  and  in  single  words, 
under  his  tortures,  although  they  spoke  to  him.  Hal 
says  further,  that  he  never  moved  when  they  tortured 
him,  more  than  if  they  were  striking  a  stock  or  a 
stone.  This  Hal  alleged  as  proof  that  he  was  a 
brave  hero,  who  had  courage  to  endure  tortures ;  for 
he  still  held  his  tongue,  and  never  moved  from  the 
spot.  And  farther  he  says  that  he  never  altered  his 
voice  in  the  least,  but  spoke  with  as  much  ease  as 
if  he  was  sitting  at  the  ale-table ;  neither  speaking 
higher  nor  lower,  nor  in  a  more  tremulous  voice 
than  he  was  used  to  do.  He  spoke  until  he  gave 


236 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


up  the  ghost,  and  sang  between  whiles  parts  of  the 
Psalm-book,  and  which  Hal  considered  beyond  the 
powers  and  strength  of  ordinary  men.  And  the 
priest  who  had  the  church  in  the  neighbourhood  let 
Sigurd’s  body  be  transported  thither  to  the  church. 
This  priest  was  a  friend  of  Harald’s  sons  :  but  when 
they  heard  it  they  were  angry  at  him,  had  the  body 
carried  back  to  where  it  had  been,  and  made  the 
priest  pay  a  fine.  Sigurd’s  friends  afterwards  came 
from  Denmark  with  a  ship  for  his  body,  carried  it 
to  Alaborg,*  and  interred  it  in  Mary  church  in  that 
town.  So  said  Dean  Ketil,  who  officiated  as  priest 
at  Mary  church,  to  Eirik  ;  and  that  Sigurd  was  buried 
there.  Thiostolf  Alason  transported  Magnus  the 
Blind’s  body  to  Oslo,  and  buried  it  in  Halvard’s 
church,  beside  King  Sigurd  his  father.  Lodin  Saup- 
prud  was  transported  to  Tunsberg ;  but  the  others  of 
the  slain  were  buried  on  the  spot. 


Chapter  XIII. — Ey  stein  Haraldson  comes  to  Norway  ;  and 
the  Beginning  of  Magnus  Haraldson . 

When  the  kings  Sigurd  and  Inge  had  ruled  over 
Norway  about  six  years,  Ey  stein,  who  was  a  son  of 
Harald  Gille,  came  in  spring  from  Scotland  [1142]. 
Arne  Sturla,  Thorleif  Brynjolfson,  and  Kolbein 
Ilruga  had  sailed  westward  over  the  sea  after  Ey  stein, 
accompanied  him  to  Norway,  and  sailed  immediately 
with  him  to  Throndhjem.  The  Throndhjem  people 
received  him  well ;  and  at  the  Eyra-thing  of  Ascen- 

*  Now  Aalborg. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


2  37 


sion-day  he  was  chosen  king,  so  that  he  should  have 
the  third  part  of  Norway  with  his  brothers  Sigurd 
and  Inge.  They  were  at  this  time  in  the  east  part 
of  the  country ;  and  men  went  between  the  kings 
who  brought  about  a  peace,  and  that  Eystein  should 
have  a  third  part  of  the  kingdom.  People  believed 
what  he  said  of  his  paternal  descent,  because  King 
Harald  himself  had  testified  to  it,  and  he  did  not 
resort  to  the  ordeal  of  iron.  King  Eystein’s  mother 
was  called  Biadok,  and  she  followed  him  to  Norway. 
Magnus  was  the  name  of  King  Harald  Gille’s  fourth 
son,  who  was  fostered  by  Ivyrpingaorm.  Pie  also  was 
chosen  king,  and  got  a  fourth  part  of  the  country ; 
but  Magnus  was  deformed  in  his  feet,  lived  but  a 
short  time,  and  died  in  his  bed.  Einar  Skulason 
speaks  of  them  : — 

“  The  generous  Eystein  money  gave  ; 

Sigurd  in  fight  was  quick  and  brave  ; 

Inge  loved  well  the  war-alarm  ; 

Magnus  to  save  his  land  from  harm. 

No  country  boasts  a  nobler  race 
The  battle-field,  or  Thing,  to  grace. 

Four  brothers  of  such  high  pretence 
The  sun  ne’er  shone  upon  at  once.” 


Chapter  XI Y. — Murder  of  Ottar  Birtivg. 

After  King  Harald  Gille’s  death  Queen  Ingirid 
married  Ottar  Birting,  who  was  a  lenderman  and 
a  great  chief,  and  of  a  Throndhjem  family,  who 
strengthened  King  Inge’s  government  much  while 
he  was  in  his  childhood.  King  Sigurd  was  not 
very  friendly  to  Ottar  ;  because,  as  he  thought,  Ottar 


233 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


always  took  King  Inge’s  side.  Ottar  Birting  was 
killed  north  in  the  merchant  town  (Nidaros),  in  an 
assault  upon  him  in  the  twilight  as  he  was  going 
to  the  evening  song.  When  he  heard  the  whistling 
of  the  blow  he  held  up  his  cloak  with  his  hands 
against  it ;  thinking,  no  doubt,  it  was  a  snowball 
thrown  at  him,  as  young  boys  do  in  the  streets. 
Ottar  fell  by  the  stroke  ;  but  his  son,  Alf  Hrode, 
who  just  at  the  same  moment  was  coming  into  the 
churchyard,  saw  his  father’s  fall,  and  saw  that  the 
man  who  had  killed  him  ran  east  about  the  church. 
Alf  ran  after  him,  and  killed  him  at  the  corner  of 
the  choir ;  and  people  said  that  he  had  good  luck  in 
avenging  his  father,  and  afterwards  was  much  more 
respected  than  he  had  been  before. 


Chapter  XV. — Beginning  of  King  Eg  stein  Hciraldson. 

King  Eystein  Haraldson  was  in  the  interior  of  the 
Throndhjem  district  when  he  heard  of  Ottar’ s  murder, 
and  summoned  to  him  the  bonde-army,  with  which 
he  proceeded  to  the  town ;  and  he  had  many  men. 
Ottar’s  relations  and  other  friends  accused  King 
Sigurd,  who  was  in  the  town,  of  having  instigated 
this  deed  ;  and  the  hondes  were  much  enraged 
against  him.  But  the  king  offered  to  clear  himself 
by  the  ordeal  of  iron,  and  thereby  to  establish  the 
truth  of  his  denial ;  and  accordingly  a  peace  was 
made.  King  Sigurd  went  to  the  south  end  of  the 
country,  and  the  ordeal  was  never  afterwards  heard  of. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


239 


Chapter  XVI. — Beginning  of  Orm  the  King -brother . 

Queen  Ingirid  had  a  son  to  Ivar  Sneis,  and  he 
was  called  Orm,  and  got  the  surname  of  King-brother. 
He  was  a  handsome  man  in  appearance,  and  became 
a  great  chief,  as  shall  be  told  hereafter.  Ingirid 
afterwards  married  Arne  of  Stodreim,  who  was  from 
this  called  King’s-mate  ;  and  their  children  were 
Inge,  Nikolas,  Philip  of  Herdla,  and  Margaret,  who 
was  first  married  to  Biorn  Buk,  and  afterwards  to 
Simon  Karason. 

Chapter  XVII. — Journey  of  Erling  Skakke  and  Earl 
Bagnvald  to  Foreign  Parts. 

Kyrpingaorm  and  Ragnhild,  a  daughter  of  Sveinke 
Steinarson,  had  a  son  called  Erling.  Kyrpingaorm 
was  a  son  of  Svein  Sveinson,  who  was  a  son  of  Erling 
of  Gerd.  Orm’s  mother  was  Ragna,  a  daughter  of 
Earl  Orm  Eilifson  and  Sigrid,  a  daughter  of  Earl  Fin 
Arnason.  The  mother  of  Earl  Orm  was  Ragnhild, 
a  daughter  of  Earl  Hakon  the  Great.  Erling  was  a 
man  of  understanding,  and  a  great  friend  of  King 
Inge,  by  whose  assistance  and  counsel  Erling  obtained 
in  marriage  Christina,  a  daughter  of  King  Sigurd  the 
Crusader  and  Queen  Malmfrid.  Erling  possessed  a 
farm  at  Studla  in  South  Hordaland.  Erling  left  the 
country  ;  and  with  him  went  Eindride  Unge  and 
several  lendermen,  who  had  chosen  men  with  them. 
They  intended  to  make  a  pilgrimage  to  Jerusalem, 
and  went  across  the  West  sea  to  Orkney.  There  Earl 


240 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Ragnvald  and  Bishop  William  “  joined  them  ;  and 
they  had  in  all  fifteen  ships  from  Orkney,  with  which 
they  first  sailed  to  the  South  Hebrides,  from  thence 
west  to  Valland,  and  then  the  same  way  King  Sigurd 
the  Crusader  had  sailed  to  Norvasund;t  and  they 
plundered  all  around  in  the  heathen  part  of  Spain. 
Soon  after  they  had  sailed  through  the  Norvasund, 
Eindride  Unge  and  his  followers,  with  six  ships,  sepa¬ 
rated  from  them;  and  then  each  was  for  himself.  Earl 
Ragnvald  and  Erling  Skakke  fell  in  with  a  large 
ship  of  burden  at  sea  called  a  dromund, f  and  gave 
battle  to  it  with  nine  ships.  At  last  they  laid  their 
cutters  close  under  the  dromund  ;  but  the  heathens 
threw  both  weapons  and  stones,  and  pots  full  of  pitch 
and  boiling  oil.  Erling  laid  his  ship  so  close  under 
the  dromund,  that  the  missiles  of  the  heathens  fell 
without  his  ship.  Then  Erling  and  his  men  cut  a  hole 
in  the  dromund,  some  working  below  and  some  above 
the  water-mark ;  and  so  they  boarded  the  vessel 
through  it.  So  says  Thorbiorn  Skakkaskald,  in 
his  poem  on  Erling  : — 

“  The  axes  of  the  Northmen  bold 
A  door  into  the  huge  ship’s  hold 
Hewed  through  her  high  and  curved  side, 

As  snug  beneath  her  bulge  they  ride. 

Their  spears  bring  down  the  astonished  foe, 

Who  cannot  see  from  whence  the  blow. 

The  eagle’s  prey,  they,  man  by  man, 

Fall  by  the  Northmen’s  daring  plan.” 

*  Bishop  of  Orkney,  1102-1168.  t  The  Straits  of  Gibraltar. — L. 

X  Dromund  was  the  name  of  a  large  class  of  merchant  vessels  in  the 
Mediterranean  in  the  Middle  Ages.  The  dromund  appears  to  have  been 
a  ship  with  three  masts.  The  name  is  derived  from  the  Greek,  and  is 
of  the  same  root  as  Hippodromos,  and  refers  to  its  swiftness,  or  its  long 
course — dromos.  Vide  Spelman,  Glos. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


241 


Audunraude,  Erling’s  forecastle-man,  was  the 
first  man  who  got  into  the  dromund.  Then  they 
carried  her,  killing  an  immense  number  of  people  ; 
making  an  extraordinarily  valuable  booty,  and  gain¬ 
ing  a  famous  victory.  Earl  Ragnvald  and  Erling 
Skakke  came  to  Palestine  in  the  course  of  their  ex¬ 
pedition,  and  all  the  way  to  the  river  Jordan.  From 
thence  they  went  first  to  Constantinople,  where  they 
left  their  ships,  travelled  northwards  by  land,  and 
arrived  in  safety  in  Norway,  where  their  journey 
was  highly  praised.  Erling  Skakke  appeared  now  a 
much  greater  man  than  before,  both  on  account  of 
his  journey  and  of  his  marriage  ;  besides  he  was  a 
prudent  sensible  man,  rich,  of  great  family,  elo¬ 
quent,  and  devoted  to  King  Inge  by  the  strictest 
friendship  more  than  to  the  other  royal  brothers. 


Chapter  XYIII. — Birth  of  Hakon  Herdibreid. 

King  Sigurd  went  to  a  feast  east  in  Viken  along 
with  his  court,  and  rode  past  a  house  belonging  to 
a  great  bonde  called  Simon.  While  the  king  was 
riding  past  the  house,  he  heard  within  such  beautiful 
singing  that  he  was  quite  enchanted  with  it,  and 
rode  up  to  the  house,  and  saw  a  lovely  girl  standing 
at  the  handmill  and  grinding.  The  king  got  off  his 
horse,  and  went  to  the  girl  and  courted  her.  When 
the  king  went  away,  the  bonde  Simon  came  to  know 
what  the  object  of  the  king’s  visit  had  been.  The 
girl  was  called  Thora,  and  she  was  Simon  the  bonde’s 
servant-girl.  Simon  took  good  care  of  her  after- 

VOL.  IV.  Q 


242 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


wards,  and  tlie  girl  brought  forth  a  male  child  [1047], 
who  was  called  Hakon,  and  was  considered  King 
Sigurd’s  son.  Hakon  was  brought  up  by  Simon 
Thorbergson  and  his  wife  Gunhild.  Their  own 
sons  also,  Onund  and  Andreas,  were  brought  up 
with  Hakon,  and  were  so  dear  to  him  that  death  only 
could  have  parted  them. 


Chapter  XIX. — Of  Eystein  and  the  Peasants  of  Hising  Isle. 

While  King  Eystein  Haraldson  was  in  Viken,  he 
fell  into  disputes  with  the  bondes  of  Heine  and  the 
inhabitants  of  Hising  Isle,  who  assembled  to  oppose 
him  ;  but  he  gave  them  battle  at  a  place  called  Leik- 
berg,  and  afterwards  burnt  and  destroyed  all  around 
in  Hising ;  so  that  the  bondes  submitted  to  his  will, 
paid  great  fines  to  the  king,  and  he  took  hostages 
from  them.  So  says  Einar  Skulason  : — 

“  The  Viken  men 
Won’t  strive  again, 

With  words  or  blows, 

The  king  to  oppose. 

None  safety  found 
On  Vi  ken’s  ground, 

Till  all,  afraid, 

Pledge  and  scat  paid.” 


And  further : — 

“  The  king  came  near  ; 
He  who  is  dear 
To  all  good  men 
Came  down  the  glen, 
By  Leikberg  hill. 
They  who  do  ill, 

The  Reine  folk,  fly, 
Or  quarter  cry.” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


243 


Chapter  XX. —  The  War  Expedition  of  King  Ey stein 

Haraldson. 

Soon  after  King  Ey  stein  began  his  journey  out  of 
the  country  over  sea  to  the  West  [1153],  and  sailed 
first  to  Caithness.  Here  he  heard  that  Earl  Harald 
Maddad’s  son  was  in  Thursa,  to  which  he  sailed 
directly  in  three  small  boats.  The  earl  had  a  ship  of 
thirty  banks  of  oars,  and  nearly  eighty  men  in  her. 
But  they  were  not  prepared  to  make  resistance,  so 
that  King  Eystein  was  able  to  board  the  ship  with 
his  men  ;  and  he  took  the  earl  prisoner,  and  carried 
him  to  his  own  ship,  but  the  earl  ransomed  himself 
with  three  marks  of  gold  :  and  thus  they  parted. 
Einar  Skulason  tells  of  it  thus  : — 

“  Earl  Harald  in  liis  stout  ship  lay 
On  the  bright  sand  in  Thursa  bay  ; 

With  fourscore  men  he  had  no  fear, 

Nor  thought  the  Norse  king  was  so  near, 

He  who  provides  the  eagle’s  meals 
In  three  small  boats  along-shore  steals  ; 

And  Maddad’s  son  must  ransom  pay 
For  his  bad  outlook  that  fair  day.” 

Erom  thence  King  Eystein  sailed  south  along  the 
east  side  of  Scotland,  and  brought  up  at  a  merchant- 
town  in  Scotland  called  Aberdeen, #  where  he  killed 
many  people,  and  plundered  the  town.  So  says  Einar 
Skulason  : — 


“  At  Aberdeen,  too,  I  am  told, 

Fell  many  by  our  Norsemen  bold  ; 

Peace  was  disturbed,  and  blue  swords  broke 
With  many  a  hard  and  bloody  stroke.” 


*  Apardion  is  Aberdeen. — L. 


244 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


The  next  battle  was  at  Hartlepool  #  in  the  south, 
with  a  party  of  horsemen.  The  king  put  them  to 
flight,  and  seized  some  ships  there.  So  says  Einar: 

“  At  Hartlepool,  in  rank  ancl  row, 

The  king’s  court-men  attack  the  foe. 

The  king’s  sharp  sword  in  blood  was  red, 

Blood  dropped  from  every  Norse  spear-head. 

Ravens  rejoice  o’er  the  warm  food 
Of  English  slain,  each  where  he  stood  ; 

And  in  the  ships  their  thirst  was  quenched  : 

The  decks  were  in  the  foe’s  blood  drenched.” 

Then  he  went  southwards  to  England,  and  had 
his  third  battle  at  Whitby, +  and  gained  the  victory, 
and  burned  the  town.  So  says  Einar  : — 

“  The  ring  of  swords,  the  clash  ol  shields, 

Were  loud  in  Whitby’s  peaceful  fields  ; 

For  here  the  king  stirred  up  the  strife,  — 

Man  against  man,  for  death  or  life. 

O’er  roof  and  tower,  rose  on  high 
The  red  wrath-fire  in  the  sky  : 

House  after  house  the  red  fiend  burns  ; 

By  blackened  walls  the  poor  man  mourns.” 

Thereafter  he  plundered  wide  around  in  England, 
where  Stephen  J  was  then  the  king.  After  this  King 
Eystein  fought  with  some  cavalry  at  Skarpasker.  § 
So  says  Einar  : — 

“  At  Skarpasker  the  English  horse 
Retire  before  the  Norse  king’s  force  : 


*  Hiartapoll — Hartlepool. — L. 

t  Hvitabyr — Whitby.  The  king  is  stated  to  have  gone  south  to  England 
from  Hartlepool.  The  Saxonland  appears  to  be  distinguished  from  the 
kingdom  of  Northumberland,  occupied  by  people  of  Danish  descent  under 
Danish  law,  and  to  be  England  proper  in  the  saga. — L. 

X  Stephen  reigned  from  1133  to  October  1153.  Torfseus,  in  Hist.  Norv. 
pt.  iii.  lib.  9.  c.  10.,  places  this,  the  last  of  the  predatory  expeditions  of  the 
kings  of  the  Northmen  on  the  English  coast,  in  1153. — L. 

§  Skarpasker — the  steep  rock — is  apparently  Scarborough  castle,  which 
answers  to  the  name  by  its  site. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


245 


The  arrow-shower  like  snow-drift  flew, 

And  the  shield-covered  foemen  slew.” 

He  fought  next  at  Pilavik,*  and  gained  the  victory. 
So  says  Einar  : — 

“  At  Pilavik  the  wild  wolf  feeds, 

Well  furnished  by  the  king’s  brave  deeds  : 

He  poured  upon  the  grass-green  plain 
A  red  shower  from  the  Perthmen  +  slain. 

On  westwards  to  the  sea  lie  urges, 

With  fire  and  sword  the  country  purges  : 

Langtown  t  he  burns  ;  the  country  rang, 

For  sword  on  shield  incessant  clang.” 

Here  they  burnt  Langatun,  a  large  village  ;  and 
people  say  that  the  town  has  never  since  risen  to  its 
former  condition.  After  this  King  Eystein  left  Eng¬ 
land  in  autumn,  and  returned  to  Norway.  People 
spoke  in  various  ways  about  this  expedition. 


Chapter  XXI. — Of  Hamid's  Sons. 

There  was  good  peace  maintained  in  Norway  in  the 
first  years  of  the  government  of  Harald’s  sons ;  and 
as  long  as  their  old  counsellors  were  alive,  there  was 
some  kind  of  unanimity  among  them.  While  Inge 
and  Sigurd  were  in  their  childhood,  they  had  a 
court  together;  but  Eystein,  who  was  come  to  age 
of  discretion,  had  a  court  for  himself.  But  when 
Inge’s  and  Sigurd’s  counsellors  were  dead, — namely, 

*  Pilavik  is  not  known,  unless  it  be  Welwick  or  Balivick,  two  places 
of  which  names  are  situated  near  the  Spurn  Head ;  or  it  may  be  Filey 
Bay,  south  of  Scarborough. — L. 

t  How  men  from  Perth  came  to  fight  at  Pilavik  is  not  at  all  clear. — L. 

X  Langatun  seems,  from  the  skald’s  allusion  to  the  Western  sea,  to  be 
Langtown,  near  Carlisle;  not  a  place  in  Lincolnshire  near  Boston,  as 
Schoning  supposes. — L. 


246 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Sadagyrd  Bardson,  Ottar  Birting,  Amunde  Gyrd- 
son,  Thiostolf  Alason,  Ogmund  Svipter,  and  Ogmund 
Denger,  a  brother  of  Erling  Skakke  (Erling  was  not 
much  looked  up  to  while  Ogmund  lived), — the  two 
kings  Inge  and  Sigurd  divided  their  courts.  Iving 
Inge  then  got  great  assistance  from  Gregorius  Bag- 
son,  a  son  of  Dag  Eilifson  by  Eagnhild  a  daughter  of 
Skopte  Ogmundson.  Gregorius  had  much  property, 
and  was  himself  a  thriving,  sagacious  man.  He  pre¬ 
sided  in  the  governing  the  country  under  King  Inge, 
and  the  king  allowed  him  to  manage  his  property 
for  him  according  to  his  own  judgment. 


Chapter  XXII. — Of  the  Habits  and  Manners  of  HarakVs 

Sons. 

When  King  Sigurd  grew  up  he  was  a  very  un¬ 
governable,  restless  man  in  every  way  ;  and  so  was 
King  Ey stein,  but  Ey stein  was  the  more  reasonable 
of  the  two.  King  Sigurd  was  a  stout  and  strong 
man,  of  a  brisk  appearance ;  he  had  light  brown 
hair,  an  ugly  mouth ;  but  otherwise  a  well- shaped 
countenance.  He  was  polite  in  his  conversation 
beyond  any  man,  and  was  expert  in  all  exercises. 
Einar  Skulason  speaks  of  this  : — 

“  Sigurcl,  expert  in  every  way 
To  wield  the  sword  in  bloody  fray, 

Showed  well  that  to  the  bold  and  brave 
God  always  luck  and  vict’ry  gave. 

In  speech,  as  well  as  bloody  deeds, 

The  king  all  other  men  exceeds  ; 

And  when  he  speaks  we  think  that  none 
Has  said  a  word  but  he  alone.” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


247 


King  Eystein  was  dark  and  dingy  in  complexion, 
of  middle  height,  and  a  prudent  able  man  ;  but  what 
deprived  him  of  consideration  and  popularity  with 
those  under  him  were  his  avarice  and  narrowness. 
He  was  married  to  Ragna,  a  daughter  of  Nicolas 
Mase.  King  Inge  was  the  handsomest  among 
them  in  countenance.  He  had  yellow  but  rather  thin 
hair,  which  was  much  curled.  His  stature  was 
small ;  and  he  had  difficulty  in  walking  alone,  because 
he  had  one  foot  withered,  and  he  had  a  hump  both 
on  his  back  and  his  breast.  He  was  of  cheerful 
conversation,  and  friendly  towards  his  friends  ;  was 
generous,  and  allowed  other  chiefs  to  give  him  counsel 
in  governing  the  country.  He  was  popular,  therefore, 
with  the  public ;  and  all  this  brought  the  kingdom 
and  the  mass  of  the  people  on  his  side.  King  Harald 
Gille’s  daughter  Brigida  was  first  married  to  the 
Swedish  king  Inge  Halsteinson,  and  afterwards  to 
Earl  Karl  Sonason,  and  then  to  the  Swedish  king 
Magnus.  She  and  King  Inge  Haraldson  were  cousins 
by  the  mother’s  side.  At  last  Brigida  married  Earl 
Birger  Brose,  and  they  had  four  sons  ;  namely,  Earl 
Philip,  Earl  Knut,  Eolke,  and  Magnus.  Their 
daughters  were  Ingigerd,  who  was  married  to  the 
Swedish  king  Sorkver,  and  their  son  was  King  Jon; 
a  second  daughter  was  called  Kristin,  and  a  third 
Margaret.  Harald  Gille’s  second  daughter  was  called 
Maria,  who  was  married  to  Simon  Skalp,  a  son  of 
Halkel  Huk;  and  their  son  was  called  Nikolas. 
King  Harald  Gille’s  third  daughter  was  called 
Margaret,  who  was  married  to  Jon  Halkelson,  a 


248 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


brother  of  Simon.  Now  many  things  occurred  be¬ 
tween  the  brothers  which  occasioned  differences  and 
disputes ;  but  I  will  only  relate  what  appears  to  me 
to  have  produced  the  more  important  events. 


Chapter  XXIII. — Cardinal  Nikolas  comes  to  the  Country. 

In  the  days  of  Harald’s  sons  Cardinal  Nikolas  came 
from  Home  to  Norway,  being  sent  there  by  the  pope. 
The  cardinal  had  taken  offence  at  the  brothers  Sigurd 
and  Eystein,  and  they  were  obliged  to  come  to  a  re¬ 
conciliation  with  him  ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  he 
stood  on  the  most  affectionate  terms  with  King  Inge, 
whom  he  called  his  son.  Now  when  they  were  all 
reconciled  with  him,  he  moved  them  to  let  Jon 
Birgerson  be  consecrated  archbishop  of  Throndhjem 
and  gave  him  a  vestment  which  is  called  a  pallium  ; 
and  settled  moreover  that  the  archbishop’s  seat  should 
be  in  Nidaros,  in  Christ  church,  where  King  Olaf  the 
Saint  reposes.  Before  that  time  there  had  only  been 
common  bishops  in  Norway.  The  cardinal  introduced 
also  the  law,  that  no  man  should  go  unpunished  who 
appeared  with  arms  in  the  merchant-town,  excepting 
the  twelve  men  who  were  in  attendance  on  the  kina*. 
He  improved  many  of  the  customs  of  the  Northmen 
while  he  was  in  the  country.  There  never  came  a 
foreigner  to  Norway  whom  all  men  respected  so 
highly,  or  who  could  govern  the  people  so  well  as 
he  did.  After  some  time  he  returned  to  the  South 
with  many  friendly  presents,  and  declared  ever  after¬ 
wards  that  he  was  the  greatest  friend  of  the  people 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


249 


of  Norway.  When  he  came  south  to  Rome  the  former 
pope  died  suddenly,  and  all  the  people  of  Rome 
would  have  Cardinal  Nikolas  for  pope,  and  he  was 
consecrated  under  the  name  of  Adrian  ;  and  according 
to  the  report  of  men  who  went  to  Rome  in  his  days, 
he  had  never  any  business,  however  important,  to 
settle  with  other  people,  but  he  would  break  it  oft 
to  speak  with  the  Northmen  who  desired  to  see 
him.  He  was  not  long  pope,  and  is  now  considered 
a  saint.# 


Chapter  XXIY. — Miracle  of  King  Olaf. 

In  the  time  of  Harald  Gille’s  sons,  it  happened 
that  a  man  called  Haldor  fell  into  the  hands  of  the 
Vindland  people,  who  took  him  and  mutilated  him, 
cut  open  his  neck,  took  out  the  tongue  through  the 
opening,  and  cut  out  his  tongue  root.  He  afterwards 
sought  out  the  holy  King  Olaf,  fixed  his  mind  entirely 
on  the  holy  man,  and  weeping  besought  King  Olaf 
to  restore  his  speech  and  health.  Thereupon  he  im¬ 
mediately  recovered  his  speech  by  the  good  king’s 
compassion,  went  immediately  into  his  service  for  all 
his  life,  and  became  an  excellent  trustworthy  man. 
This  miracle  took  place  a  fortnight  before  the  last 
Olafsmas,  upon  the  day  that  Cardinal  Nikolas  set 
foot  on  the  land  of  Norway. 

*  This  cardinal  was  Nicholas  Breakspear,  an  Englishman,  from  St. 
Alban’s  monastery;  afterwards  Pope  Adrian  IV.,  1154-1158. — L. 


250 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  XXV. — Miracles  of  King  Olaf  on  Richard. 

In  the  Uplands  were  two  brothers,  men  of  great 
family,  and  men  of  fortune,  Einar  and  Andres,  sons 
of  Guthorm  Grabard,  and  brothers  of  King  Sigurd 
Haraldson’s  mother  ;  and  they  had  great  properties 
and  udal  estates  in  that  quarter.  They  had  a  sister 
who  was  very  handsome,  but  did  not  pay  sufficient 
regard  to  the  scandal  of  evil  persons,  as  it  afterwards 
appeared.  She  was  on  a  friendly  footing  with  an 
English  priest  called  Richard,  who  had  a  welcome  to 
the  house  of  her  brothers,  and  on  account  of  their 
friendship  for  him  she  did  many  things  to  please  him, 
and  often  to  his  advantage ;  but  the  end  of  all  this 
was,  that  an  ugly  report  flew  about  concerning  this 
girl.  When  this  came  into  the  mouth  of  the  public 
all  men  threw  the  blame  on  the  priest.  Her  brothers 
did  the  same,  and  expressed  publicly,  as  soon  as  they 
observed  it,  that  they  laid  the  blame  most  on  him. 
The  great  friendship  that  was  between  the  girl  and 
the  priest  proved  a  great  misfortune  to  both,  which 
might  have  been  expected,  as  the  brothers  were  silent 
about  their  secret  determination,  and  let  nothing  be 
observed.  But  one  day  they  called  the  priest  to  them, 
who  went,  expecting  nothing  but  good  from  them ; 
enticed  him  from  home  with  them,  saying  that  they 
intended  to  go  to  another  district,  where  they  had 
some  needful  business,  and  inviting  him  to  go  with 
them.  They  had  with  them  a  farm-servant  who  knew 
their  purpose.  They  went  in  a  boat  along  the  shore 
of  a  lake  which  is  called  Rands  lake,  and  landed  at  a 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


251 


ness  called  Skiptisand,  where  they  went  011  shore,  and 
amused  themselves  a  while.  Then  they  went  to  a 
retired  place,  and  commanded  their  servant-man  to 
strike  the  priest  with  an  axe-hammer.  He  struck  the 
priest  so  hard  that  he  swooned ;  but  when  he  re¬ 
covered  he  said,  “  Why  are  ye  playing  so  roughly 
with  me  ?  ”  They  replied,  “  Although  nobody  has 
told  thee  of  it  before,  thou  shalt  now  find  the  con¬ 
sequence  of  what  thou  hast  done.”  They  then  up¬ 
braided  him ;  but  he  denied  their  accusations,  and 
besought  God  and  the  holy  King  Olaf  to  judge 
between  them.  Then  they  broke  his  leg-bones,  and 
dragged  him  bound  to  the  forest  with  them  ;  and 
then  they  put  a  string  around  his  head,  and  put  a 
board  under  his  head  and  shoulders,  and  made  a 
knot  on  the  string,  and  bound  his  head  fast  to  the 
board.  Then  the  elder  brother,  Einar,  took  a  wedge, 
and  put  it  on  the  priest’s  eye,  and  the  servant  who 
stood  beside  him  struck  upon  it  with  an  axe,  so  that 
the  eye  flew  out,  and  fell  upon  the  board.  Then  he 
set  the  pin  upon  the  other  eye,  and  said  to  the 
servant,  “  Strike  now  more  softly.”  He  did  so,  and 
the  wedge  sprang  from  the  eye-stone,  and  tore  the 
eyelid  loose.  Then  Einar  took  up  the  eyelid  in  his 
hand,  and  saw  that  the  eye-stone  was  still  in  its 
place  ;  and  he  set  the  wedge  on  the  cheek,  and  when 
the  servant  struck  it  the  eye-stone  sprang  out  upon 
the  cheek-bone.  Thereafter  they  opened  his  mouth, 
took  his  tongue  and  cut  it  off,  and  then  untied  his 
hands  and  his  head.  As  soon  as  he  came  to  himself, 
he  thought  of  laying  the  eye-stones  in  their  place 


252 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


under  the  eyelids,  and  pressing  them  with  both  hands 
as  much  as  he  could.  Then  they  carried  him  on 
board,  and  went  to  a  farm  callled  Sseheimrud,  where 
they  landed.  They  sent  up  to  the  farm  to  say  that 
a  priest  was  lying  in  the  boat  at  the  shore.  While 
the  message  was  going  to  the  farm,  they  asked  the 
priest  if  he  could  talk  ;  and  he  made  a  noise,  and 
attempted  to  speak.  Then  said  Einar  to  his  brother, 
“  If  he  recover  and  the  stump  of  his  tongue  grow,  I 
am  afraid  he  will  get  his  speech  again.”  Thereupon 
they  seized  the  stump  with  a  pair  of  tongs,  drew  it 
out,  cut  it  twice,  and  the  third  time  to  the  very  roots, 
and  left  him  lying  half  dead.  The  housewife  in  the 
farm  was  poor;  but  she  hastened  to  the  place  with  her 
daughter,  and  they  carried  the  priest  home  to  their 
farm  in  their  cloaks.  They  then  brought  a  priest,  and 
when  he  arrived  he  bound  all  his  wounds ;  and  they 
attended  to  his  comfort  as  much  as  they  were  able. 
And  thus  lay  the  wounded  priest  grievously  handled, 
but  trusting  alway  to  God’s  grace,  and  never  doubt¬ 
ing  ;  and  although  he  was  speechless,  he  prayed  to 
God  in  thought  with  a  sorrowful  mind,  but  with  the 
more  confidence  the  worse  he  was.  He  turned  his 
thoughts  also  to  the  mild  King  Olaf  the  Saint,  God’s 
dear  favourite,  of  whose  excellent  deeds  he  had  heard 
so  much  told,  and  trusted  so  much  more  zealously  on 
him  with  all  his  heart  for  help  in  his  necessity.  As 
he  lay  there  lame,  and  deprived  of  all  strength,  he 
wept  bitterly,  moaned,  and  prayed  with  a  sore  heart 
that  the  dear  King  Olaf  would  help  him.  Now  when 
this  wounded  priest  was  sleeping  after  midnight,  he 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


253 


thought  he  saw  a  gallant  man  coming  to  him,  who 
spoke  these  words,  “  Thon  art  ill  off,  friend  Richard, 
and  thy  strength  is  little.”  He  thought  he  replied  to 
this  assentingly.  Then  the  man  accosted  him  again, 
“  Thou  requirest  compassion  ?  ”  The  priest  replies, 
“  I  need  the  compassion  of  Almighty  God  and  the 
holy  King  Olaf.”  He  answered,  “  Thou  shalt  get  it.” 
Thereupon  he  pulled  the  tongue-stump  so  hard  that 
it  gave  the  priest  pain  ;  then  he  stroked  with  his 
hands  his  eyes,  and  legs,  and  other  wounded  mem¬ 
bers.  Then  the  priest  asked  who  he  was.  He  looked 
at  him,  and  said,  “  Olaf,  come  here  from  Thrond- 
lijem  ;  ”  and  then  disappeared.  But  the  priest  awoke 
altogether  sound,  and  thus  he  spoke  :  “  Happy  am 
I,  and  thanks  be  to  the  Almighty  God  and  the  holy 
King  Olaf,  who  have  restored  me  !  ”  Dreadfully  mis¬ 
handled  as  he  had  been,  yet  so  quickly  was  he  restored 
from  his  misfortune  that  he  scarcely  thought  he  had 
been  wounded  or  sick.  His  tongue  was  entire ;  both 
his  eyes  were  in  their  places,  and  were  clear-sighted  ; 
his  broken  legs  and  every  other  wound  were  healed,  or 
were  free  from  pain  ;  and,  in  short,  he  had  got  perfect 
health.  But  as  a  proof  that  his  eyes  had  been  punched 
out,  there  remained  a  white  scar  on  each  eyelid,  in 
order  that  this  dear  king’s  excellence  might  be  mani¬ 
fest  on  the  man  who  had  been  so  dreadfully  misused. 

Chapter  XXYI. — The  Kings  Inge  and  Sigurd  hold  a  Thing 

in  the  Holm. 

King  Ey stein  and  King  Sigurd  had  quarrelled, 
because  King  Sigurd  had  killed  King  Eystein’s  court- 


254 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


man  Harald,  the  Viken  man,  who  owned  a  house  in 
Bergen,  and  also  the  priest  Jon  Tapard,  a  son  of  Biarne 
Sigurdson.  On  account  of  this  affair,  a  conference 
to  settle  it  was  appointed  in  winter  in  the  Uplands. 
The  two  sat  together  in  the  conference  for  a  long 
time,  and  so  much  was  known  of  their  conference 
that  all  the  three  brothers  were  to  meet  the  following 
summer  in  Bergen.  It  was  added,  that  their  confer¬ 
ence  was  to  the  effect  that  King  Inge  should  have 
two  or  three  farms,  and  as  much  income  as  would 
keep  thirty  men  beside  him,  as  he  had  not  health  to 
be  a  king.  When  King  Inge  and  Gregorius  heard 
this  report,  they  came  to  Bergen  with  many  followers. 
King  Sigurd  arrived  there  a  little  later,  and  was  not 
nearly  so  strong  in  men.  Sigurd  and  Inge  had  then 
been  nineteen  years  kings  of  Norway  [i  155].  King 
Ey stein  came  later  still  from  the  south  than  the  other 
two  from  the  north.  Then  King  Inge  ordered  the 
Thing  to  be  called  together  on  the  holm  by  sound  of 
trumpet ;  and  Sigurd  and  Inge  came  to  it  with  a  great 
many  people.  Gregorius  had  two  long-ships,  and  at 
the  least  ninety  men,  whom  he  kept  in  provisions. 
He  kept  his  house-men  better  than  other  lender- 
men  ;  for  he  never  took  part  in  any  entertainment 
where  each  guest  brings  his  liquor,  without  having 
all  his  house-men  to  drink  with  him.  He  went  now 
to  the  Thing  in  a  gold-mounted  helmet,  and  all 
his  men  had  helmets  on.  Then  King  Inge  stood 
up,  and  told  the  assembly  what  he  had  heard  ;  how 
his  brothers  were  going  to  use  him,  and  depose  him 
from  his  kingdom ;  and  asked  for  their  assistance. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


255 


The  assembled  people  made  a  good  return  to  his 
speech,  and  declared  they  would  follow  him. 


Chapter  XXVII. — Of  Gregorius  Dagson. 

Then  King  Sigurd  stood  up  and  said  it  was  a  false 
accusation  that  King  Inge  had  made  against  him  and 
his  brother,' and  insisted  that  Gregorius  had  invented 
it ;  and  insinuated  that  it  would  not  be  long,  if  he 
had  his  will,  before  they  should  meet  so  that  the 
golden  helmet  should  he  doffed  ;  and  ended  his  speech 
by  hinting  that  they  could  not  both  live.  Gregorius 
replied,  that  Sigurd  need  not  long  so  much  for  this,  as 
he  was  ready  now,  if  it  must  be  so.  A  few  days  after, 
one  of  Gregorius’s  house-men  was  killed  out  upon  the 
street,  and  it  was  Sigurd’s  house-men  who  killed  him. 
Gregorius  would  then  have  fallen  upon  King  Sigurd 
and  his  people ;  but  King  Inge,  and  many  others, 
kept  him  back.  But  one  evening,  just  as  Queen 
Ingirid,  King  Inge’s  mother,  was  coming  from  vespers, 
she  came  past  where  Sigurd  Skrudhyrna,  a  court-man 
of  King  Inge,  lay  murdered.  He  was  then  an  old  man, 
and  had  served  many  kings.  King  Sigurd’s  court- 
men,  Halvard  Gunnarson,  and  Sigurd  a  son  of  Eystein 
Trafale,  had  killed  him  ;  and  people,  suspected  it  was 
done  by  order  of  King  Sigurd.  She  went  immediately 
to  King  Inge,  and  told  him  he  would  be  a  little  king 
if  he  took  no  concern,  but  allowed  his  court-men  to 
be  killed,  the  one  after  the  other,  like  swine.  The 
king  was  angry  at  her  speech ;  and  while  they  were 
scolding  about  it,  came  Gregorius  in  helmet  and 


256 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


armour,  and  told  the  king  not  to  be  angry,  for  she 
was  only  saying  the  truth.  “  And  I  am  now,”  says 
he,  “  come  to  thy  assistance,  if  thou  wilt  attack  King 
Sigurd  ;  and  here  we  are,  above  100  men  in  helmets 
and  armour,  and  with  them  we  will  attack  where 
others  think  the  attack  may  be  worst.”  But  the  most 
dissuaded  from  this  course,  thinking  that  Sigurd 
would  pay  the  mulct  for  the  slaughter  done.  Now 
when  Gregorius  saw  that  there  would  be  no  assault, 
he  accosted  King  Inge  thus  :  “  Thou  wilt  frighten 
thy  men  from  thee  in  this  way  ;  for  first  they  lately 
killed  my  house-man,  and  now  thy  court-man,  and 
afterwards  they  will  chase  me,  or  some  other  of  thy 
lendermen  whom  thou  wouldst  feel  the  loss  of,  when 
they  see  that  thou  art  indifferent  about  such  things  ; 
and  at  last,  after  thy  friends  are  killed,  they  will  take 
the  royal  dignity  from  thee.  Whatever  thy  other 
lendermen  may  do,  I  will  not  stay  here  longer  to  be 
slaughtered  like  an  ox ;  but  Sigurd  the  king  and  I 
have  a  business  to  settle  with  each  other  to-night, 
in  whatever  way  it  may  turn  out.  It  is  true  that 
there  is  but  little  help  in  thee  on  account  of  thy 
ill  health,  but  I  should  think  thy  will  should  not  be 
less  to  hold  thy  hand  over  thy  friends,  and  I  am  now 
quite  ready  to  go  from  hence  to  meet  Sigurd,  and 
my  banner  is  Hying  in  the  yard.” 

Then  King  Inge  stood  up,  and  called  for  his  arms, 
and  ordered  every  man  who  wished  to  follow  him  to 
get  ready,  declaring  it  was  of  no  use  to  try  to  dissuade 
him ;  for  he  had  long  enough  avoided  this,  but  now 
steel  must  determine  between  them. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


2  57 


Chapter  XXVIII. — Of  King  Sigurd's  Fall. 

King  Sigurd  sat  and  drank  in  Sigrid  Sseta’  s  house 
ready  for  battle,  although  people  thought  it  would 
not  come  to  an  assault  at  all.  Then  came  King  Inge 
with  his  men  down  the  road  from  the  smithy  shops, 
against  the  house.  Arne,  the  king’s  brother-in-law, 
came  out  from  the  Sand-bridge,  Aslak  Erlendson 
from  his  own  house,  and  Gregorius  from  the  street 
where  all  thought  the  assault  would  be  worst.  King 
Sigurd  and  his  men  made  many  shots  from  the 
holes  in  the  loft,  broke  down  the  fireplaces,  and  threw 
stones  on  them.  Gregorius  and  his  men  cut  down 
the  gates  of  the  yard ;  and  there  in  the  port  fell 
Einar,  a  son  of  Laxapaul,  who  was  of  Sigurd’s  people, 
together  with  Halyard  Gunnarson,  who  was  shot  in 
a  loft,  and  nobody  lamented  his  death.  They  hewed 
down  the  houses,  and  many  of  King  Sigurd’s  men 
left  him,  and  surrendered  for  quarter.  Then  King 
Sigurd  went  up  into  a  loft,  and  desired  to  be  heard. 
He  had  a  gilt  shield,  by  which  they  knew  him ;  but 
they  would  not  listen  to  him,  and  shot  arrows  at  him 
as  thick  as  snow  in  a  snow-shower,  so  that  he  could 
not  stay  there.  As  his  men  had  now  left  him,  and 
the  houses  were  being  hewn  down,  he  went  out  from 
thence,  and  with  him  his  court-man  Thord  Husfreyja 
from  Viken.  They  wanted  to  come  where  King  Inge 
wTas  to  be  found ;  and  Sigurd  called  to  his  brother 
King  Inge,  and  begged  him  to  grant  him  life  and 
safety ;  but  both  Thord  and  Sigurd  were  instantly 
killed,  and  Thord  fell  with  great  glory.  King  Sigurd 

VOL.  IV.  R 


258 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


was  interred  in  the  old  Christ  church  out  on  the 
holm.  King  Inge  gave  Gregorius  the  ship  King 
Sigurd  had  owned.  There  fell  many  of  King  Sigurd  s 
and  King  Inge’s  men,  although  I  only  name  a  few ; 
but  of  Gregorius’s  men  there  fell  four ;  and  also 
some  who  belonged  to  no  party,  but  were  shot  on  the 
piers,  or  out  in  the  ships.  It  was  fought  on  a  Friday, 
and  fourteen  days  before  Saint  John  the  Baptists 
day  [June  10,  1155].  Two  or  three  days  after  King 
Eystein  came  from  the  eastward  with  thirty  ships, 
and  had  along  with  him  his  brother’s  son  Ilakon, 
a  son  of  King  Sigurd.  Eystein  did  not  come  up  to 
the  town,  but  lay  in  Floruvagar,  and  good  men  went 
between  to  get  a  reconciliation  made.  But  Gregorius 
wanted  that  they  should  go  out  against  him,  think¬ 
ing  there  never  would  be  a  better  opportunity  ;  and 
offered  to  be  himself  the  leader.  “For  thou,  king, 
shalt  not  go,  for  we  have  no  want  of  men.”  But 
many  dissuaded  from  this  course,  and  it  came  to 
nothing.  King  Eystein  returned  back  to  Yiken,  and 
King  Inge  to  Throndhjem,  and  they  were  in  a  sort 
reconciled  ;  but  they  did  not  meet  each  other. 


Chapter  XXIX. —  Of  Gregorius  Dagson. 

Somewhat  later  than  King  Eystein,  Gregorius 
Dagson  also  set  out  to  the  eastward  and  came  to  his 
farm  Bratsberg  in  Hofund ;  but  King  Eystein  was  up 
in  the  fiord  at  Oslo,  and  had  his  ships  drawn  above 
two  miles  over  the  frozen  sea,  for  there  was  much 
ice  at  that  time  in  Yiken.  King  Eystein  went  up  to 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY.  259 

Hofund  to  take  Gregorius ;  but  he  got  news  of  what 
was  on  foot,  and  escaped  to  Thelemark  with  ninety 
men,  from  thence  over  the  mountains,  and  came  down 
in  Hardanger;  and  at  last  to  Studla  in  Edne,  to 
Erling  Skakke’s  farm.  Erling  himself  had  gone 
north  to  Bergen  ;  but  his  wife  Kristin,  a  daughter 
of  King  Sigurd,  was  at  home,  and  offered  Gregorius 
all  the  assistance  he  wanted ;  and  he  was  hospitably 
received.  He  got  a  long-ship  there  which  belonged 
to  Erling,  and  everything  else  he  required.  Gregorius 
thanked  her  kindly,  and  allowed  that  she  had  behaved 
nobly,  and  as  might  have  been  expected  of  her. 
Gregorius  then  proceeded  to  Bergen,  where  he  met 
Erling,  who  thought  also  that  his  wife  had  done  well. 


Chapter  XXX. — Reconciliation  of  the  Kings  Egstein  and 

Inge. 

Then  Gregorius  went  north  to  Throndhjem,  and 
came  there  before  Yule.  King  Inge  was  rejoiced  at 
his  safety,  and  told  him  to  use  his  property  as  freely 
as  his  own,  King  Eystein  having  burnt  Gregorius’s 
house,  and  slaughtered  his  stock  of  cattle.  The  ship- 
docks  which  King  Eystein  the  Elder  had  constructed 
in  the  merchant  town  of  Nidaros,  and  which  had  been 
exceedingly  expensive,  were  also  burnt  this  winter, 
together  with  some  good  vessels  belonging  to  King 
Inge.  This  deed  was  ascribed  to  King  Eystein  and 
Philip  Gyrdson,  King  Sigurd’s  foster-brother,  and 
occasioned  much  displeasure  and  hatred.  The  fol¬ 
lowing  summer  King  Inge  went  south  with  a  very 


26o 


CHRONICLE  OE  THE 


numerous  body  of  men  ;  and  King  Eystein  came 
northwards,  gathering  men  also.  They  met  in  the 
east  [i  15b]  at  the  Seleys,  near  to  the  Naze  ;  but  King 
Inge  was  by  far  the  strongest  in  men.  It  vas  neaily 
coming  to  a  battle  ;  but  at  last  they  were  reconciled 
on  these  conditions, — that  King  Eystein  should  be 
bound  to  pay  forty-live  marks  of  gold,  of  which  King 
Inge  should  have  thirty  marks,  because  King  E}  stein 
had  occasioned  the  burning  of  the  docks  and  ships  ; 
and,  besides,  that  Philip,  and  all  who  had  been 
accomplices  in  the  deed,  should  be  outlawed.  Also 
that  the  men  should  be  banished  the  countiy,  against 
whom  it  could  be  proved  that  they  gave  blow  or 
wound  to  King  Sigurd ;  for  King  Eystein  accused 
King  Inge  of  protecting  these  men :  and  that 
Gregorius  should  have  fifteen  marks  of  gold  for  the 
value  of  his  property  burnt  by  King  Eystein.  King 
Eystein  was  ill  pleased  with  these  terms,  and  looked 
upon  the  treaty  as  one  forced  upon  him.  Irom  that 
meeting  King  Inge  went  eastward  to  A  iken,  and 
King  Eystein  north  to  Throndhjem ;  and  they  had 
no  intercourse  with  each  other,  nor  were  the  mes¬ 
sages  which  passed  between  them  very  friendly,  and 
on  both  sides  they  killed  each  other’s  friends.  King 
Eystein,  besides,  did  not  pay  the  money ;  and  the 
one  accused  the  other  of  not  fulfilling  what  was 
promised.  King  Inge  and  Gregorius  enticed  many 
people  from  King  Eystein ;  among  others,  Bard 
Standale  Bryniolfson,  Simon  Skalp,  a  son  ot  Halkel 
Huk,  Haldor  Bryniolfson,  Jon  Halkelson,  and  many 
other  lendermen. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


261 


Chapter  XXXI. —  Of  Eystein  and  Inge. 

Two  years  after  King  Sigurd’s  fall  [1157]  both  kings 
assembled  armaments ;  namely,  King  Inge  in  the 
east  of  the  country,  where  he  collected  eighty  ships  ; 
and  King  Eystein  in  the  north,  where  he  had  forty- 
five,  and  among  these  the  Great  Dragon,  which  King 
Eystein  Magnuson  had  built  after  the  Long  Serpent ; 
and  they  had  on  both  sides  many  and  excellent 
troops.  King  Inge  lay  with  his  ships  south  at  Moster 
Isle,  and  King  Eystein  a  little  to  the  north  in  Grrn- 
ningasund.  King  Eystein  sent  the  young  Aslak 
Jonson,  and  Arne  Sturla,  a  son  of  Snsebiorn,  with 
one  ship  to  meet  King  Inge  ;  but  when  the  king’s 
men  knew  them  they  assaulted  them,  killed  many 
of  their  people,  and  took  all  that  was  in  the  ship 
belonging  to  them.  Aslak  and  Arne  and  a  few 
more  escaped  to  the  land,  went  to  King  Eystein,  and 
told  him  how  King  Inge  had  received  them.  There¬ 
upon  King  Eystein  held  a  House-thing,  and  told  his 
followers  how  ill  King  Inge  had  treated  his  men,  and 
desired  the  troops  to  follow  him.  “I  have,”  said  he, 
“  so  many,  and  such  excellent  men,  that  I  have  no 
intention  to  fly,  if  ye  will  follow  me.”  But  this 
speech  was  not  received  with  much  favour.  Halkel 
Huk  was  there ;  but  both  his  sons,  Simon  and  Jon, 
were  with  King  Inge.  Halkel  replied,  so  loud  that 
many  heard  him,  “  Let  thy  chests  of  gold  follow  thee, 
and  let  them  defend  thy  land.” 


262 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  XXXII. — King  Eg steins  Death. 

In  tlie  night  many  of  King  Eystein’s  ships  rowed 
secretly  away,  some  of  them  joining  King  Inge,  some 
o*oing  to  Bergen,  or  up  into  the  fiords ;  so  that  when 
it  was  daylight  in  the  morning  the  king  was  lying 
behind  with  only  ten  ships.  Then  he  left  the  Gieat 
Dragon,  which  was  heavy  to  row,  and  several  other 
vessels  behind ;  and  cut  and  destroyed  the  Diagon, 
started  out  the  ale,  and  destroyed  all  that  they  could 
not  take  with  them.  King  Eystein  went  on  board 
of  the  ship  of  Eindride,  a  son  of  Jon  Mornef,  sailed 
north  into  Sogn,  and  then  took  the  land-road  east¬ 
wards  to  Viken.  King  Inge  took  the  vessels,  and 
sailed  with  them  outside  of  the  isles  to  Viken.  King 
Eystein  had  then  got  east  as  far  as  Fold,  and  had 
with  him  1200*  men;  but  when  they  saw  King 
Inge’s  force,  they  did  not  think  themselves  suffi¬ 
ciently  strong  to  oppose  him,  and  they  retired  to 
the  forest.  Every  one  fled  his  own  way,  so  that 
the  king  was  left  with  but  one  man.  King  Inge 
and  his  men  observed  King  Eystein  s  flight,  and 
also  that  he  had  but  few  people  with  him,  and  they 
went  immediately  to  search  for  him.  Simon  Skalp 
met  the  king  just  as  he  was  coming  out  of  a  willow 
bush.  Simon  saluted  him.  “  God  save  you,  sire,” 
said  he. 

The  king  replied,  “I  do  not  know  if  thou  art 
not  sire  here.” 

Simon  replied,  “That  is  as  it  may  happen.” 

*  =  1440. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


253 

The  king  begged  him  to  conceal  him,  and  said 
it  was  proper  to  do  so.  “For  there  was  long 
friendship  between  us,  although  it  has  now  gone 
differently.” 

Simon  replied,  it  could  not  be. 

Then  the  king  begged  that  he  might  hear  mass 
before  he  died,  which  accordingly  took  place.  Then 
Eystein  laid  himself  down  on  his  face  on  the  grass, 
stretched  out  his  hands  on  each  side,  and  told  them 
to  cut  the  sign  of  the  cross  between  his  shoulders, 
and  see  whether  he  could  not  bear  steel  as  King 
Inge’s  followers  had  asserted  of  him.  Simon  told 
the  man  who  had  to  put  the  king  to  death  to  do  so 
immediately,  for  the  king  had  been  creeping  about 
upon  the  grass  long  enough.  He  was  accordingly 
slain,  and  he  appears  to  have  suffered  manfully.  His 
body  was  carried  to  Fors,  and  lay  all  night  under  the 
hill  at  the  south  side  of  the  church.  King  Eystein 
was  buried  in  Fors  church,  and  his  grave  is  in  the 
middle  of  the  church-floor,  where  a  fringed  canopy  is 
spread  over  it,  and  he  is  considered  a  saint.  Where 
he  was  executed,  and  his  blood  ran  upon  the  ground, 
sprang  up  a  fountain,  and  another  under  the  hill 
where  his  body  lay  all  night.  From  both  these  waters 
many  think  they  have  received  a  cure  of  sickness  and 
pain.  It  is  reported  by  the  Viken  people  that  many 
miracles  were  wrought  at  King  Eystein’s  grave,  until 
his  enemies  poured  upon  it  soup  made  of  boiled 
dogs’  flesh.  Simon  Skalp  was  much  hated  for  this 
deed,  which  was  generally  ascribed  to  him  ;  but  some 
said  that  when  King  Eystein  was  taken  Simon  sent 


264 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


a  message  to  King  Inge,  and  the  king  commanded 
that  King  Eystein  should  not  come  before  his  face. 
So  King  Sverre  has  caused  it  to  be  written  ;  but 
Einar  Skulason  tells  of  it  thus  : — 

“  Simon  Skalp,  the  traitor  bold, 

For  deeds  of  murder  known  of  old, 

His  king  betrayed  ;  and  ne’er  will  he 
Cod’s  blessed  face  hereafter  see.” 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


265 


XY. 

SAGA  OF  IiAKON  HERDIBREID  (HAKON 
THE  BROAD-SHOULDERED).* 

PRELIMINARY  REMARKS. 

This  saga  describes  the  feud  between  Hakon  Sigurdson  and 
his  uncle  Inge. 

The  only  skald  quoted  is  Einar  Skulason. 


Chapter  I. — Beginning  of  Hakon  Herclibrcid. 

ITakon,  King  Sigurd’s  son,  was  chosen  chief  ot 
the  troop  which  had  followed  King  Eystein,  and  his 
adherents  gave  him  the  title  king.  He  was  ten  years 
old.  At  that  time  he  had  with  him  Sigurd,  a  son 
of  Halyard  Hauld  of  Reyr,  and  Andreas  and  Onund, 
the  sons  of  Simon,  his  foster-brothers,  and  many 
chiefs,  friends  of  King  Sigurd  and  King  Eystein ; 
and  they  went  first  up  to  Gautland.  King  Inge 
took  possession  of  all  the  estates  they  had  left  behind, 
and  declared  them  banished.  Thereafter  King  Inge 
went  to  Viken,  and  was  sometimes  also  in  the  north 
of  the  country.  Gregorius  Dagson  was  in  Konunga- 
hella,  where  the  danger  was  greatest,  and  had  beside 
him  a  strong  and  handsome  body  of  men,  with  which 
he  defended  the  country. 


*  The  period  is  from  1157  to  1161. — L. 


266 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  II. —  Of  Gregorius  Dagson. 

The  summer  after  [1158]  Hakon  came  with  his 
men,  and  proceeded  to  Konungahella  with  a  numerous 
and  handsome  troop.  Gregorius  was  then  in  the  town, 
and  summoned  the  bondes  and  townspeople  to  a  great 
Thing,  at  which  he  desired  their  aid ;  but  he  thought 
the  people  did  not  hear  him  with  much  favour,  so  he 
did  not  much  trust  them.  Then  Gregorius  set  off 
with  two  ships  to  Viken,  and  was  very  much  cast 
down.  He  expected  to  meet  King  Inge  there,  having 
heard  he  was  coming  with  a  great  army  to  Viken. 
Now  when  Gregorius  had  come  hut  a  short  way 
north  he  met  Simon  Skalp,  Iialdor  Brynjolfson,  and 
Gyrd  Amundason,  King  Inge’s  foster-brothers. 
Gregorius  was  much  delighted  at  this  meeting,  and 
turned  back  with  them,  being  all  in  one  body,  with 
eleven  ships.  As  they  were  rowing  up  to  Konunga¬ 
hella,  Hakon,  with  his  followers,  was  holding  a  Thing 
without  the  town,  and  saw  their  approach ;  and 
Sigurd  of  Keyr  said,  “  Gregorius  must  be  fey  to  be 
throwing  himself  with  so  few  men  into  our  hands.” 
Gregorius  landed  opposite  the  town  to  wait  for  King 
Inge,  for  he  was  expected,  but  he  did  not  come. 
King  Hakon  put  himself  in  order  in  the  town,  and 
appointed  Thorliot  Skaufuskalle,  who  was  a  viking 
and  a  robber,  to  be  captain  of  the  men  in  the  mer¬ 
chant  ships  that  were  afloat  in  the  river ;  and  King 
Hakon  and  Sigurd  were  within  the  town,  and  drew 
up  the  men  on  the  piers,  for  all  the  townspeople 
had  submitted  to  King  Hakon. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


267 


Chapter  III. — King  Hakoris  Flight. 

Gregorius  rowed  up  the  river,  and  let  the  ship 
drive  down  with  the  stream  against  Thorliot.  They 
shot  at  each  other  a  while,  until  Thorliot  and  his 
comrades  jumped  overboard  ;  and  some  of  them  were 
killed,  some  escaped  to  the  land.  Then  Gregorius 
rowed  to  the  piers,  and  let  a  gangway  be  cast  on 
shore  at  the  very  feet  of  ITakon’s  men.  There  the 
man  who  carried  his  banner  was  slain  just  as  he  was 
going  to  step  on  shore.  Gregorius  ordered  Hal, 
a  son  of  Audun  Halson,  to  take  up  the  banner, 
which  he  did,  and  bore  the  banner  up  to  the  piei. 
Gregorius  followed  close  after  him,  held  his  shield 
over  his  head,  and  protected  him  as  well  as  himself. 
As  soon  as  Gregorius  came  upon  the  pier,  and 
Hakon’s  men  knew  him,  they  gave  way,  and  made 
room  for  him  on  every  side.  Afterwards  more  people 
landed  from  the  ships,  and  then  Gregorius  made  a 
severe  assault  with  his  men  ;  and  llakon  s  men  hist 
moved  back,  and  then  ran  up  into  the  town.  Gie- 
gorius  pursued  them  eagerly,  drove  them  twice  fiom 
the  town,  and  killed  many  of  then.  By  the  lepoit 
of  all  men,  never  was  there  so  glorious  an  aflair  as 
this  of  Gregorius  ;  lor  Hakon  had  more  than  4000 
men,  and  Gregorius  not  full  4°°*^  After  the  battle, 
Gregorius  said  to  Hal  Audunson,  “  Many  men,  in 
my  opinion,  are  more  agile  in  battle  than  ye  Ice¬ 
landers  are,  for  ye  are  not  so  exercised  as  we 
Norwegians ;  but  none,  I  think,  are  so  bold  under 


*  =  4800. 


t  —  480. 


268 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


arms  as  ye  are.”  King  Inge  came  np  soon  after,  and 
killed  many  of  the  men  who  had  taken  part  with 
Hakon  ;  made  some  pay  heavy  fines,  burnt  the  houses 
of  some,  and  some  he  drove  out  of  the  country,  or 
treated  otherwise  very  ill.  Hakon  fled  at  first  up 
to  Gautland  with  all  his  men ;  but  the  winter  after 
[1159],  he  proceeded  by  the  upper  road  to  Thrond- 
hjem,  and  came  there  before  Easter.  The  Throndhjem 
people  received  him  well,  for  they  had  always  served 
under  that  shield.  It  is  said  that  the  Throndhjem 
people  took  Hakon  as  king,  on  the  terms  that  he 
should  have  from  Inge  the  third  part  of  Norway 
as  his  paternal  heritage.  King  Inge  and  Gregorius 
were  in  Viken,  and  Gregorius  wanted  to  make  an 
expedition  against  the  party  in  the  north  ;  but  it 
came  to  nothing  that  winter,  as  many  dissuaded 
from  it. 


Chapter  IV. — Fall  of  Gyrd  and  Havard. 

King  Hakon  left  Throndhjem  in  spring  with  thirty 
ships  nearly ;  and  some  of  his  men  sailed  before  the 
rest  with  seven  ships,  and  plundered  in  North  and 
South  More.  No  man  could  remember  that  there 
ever  before  had  been  plundering  between  the  two 
towns  (Bergen  and  Nidaros).  Jon  the  son  of  Halkel 
ITuk  collected  the  bondes  in  arms,  and  proceeded 
against  them  ;  took  Kolbein  Ode  prisoner,  and  killed 
every  womans  son  of  them  in  his  ship.  Then  they 
searched  for  the  others,  found  them  all  assembled 
in  seven  ships,  and  fought  with  them  ;  but  his  father 


KINGS  OF  NOKWAY. 


269 


Halkel  not  coming  to  his  assistance  as  he  had  pro¬ 
mised,  many  good  hondes  were  killed,  and  Jon 
himself  was  wounded.  Hakon  proceeded  south  to 
Bergen  with  his  forces  ;  but  when  he  came  to  Stiorn- 
velta,  he  heard  that  King  Inge  and  Gregorius  had 
arrived  a  few  nights  before  fiom  the  east  at  Beigen, 
and  therefore  he  did  not  venture  to  steei  thithei. 
They  sailed  the  outer  course  southwards  past  Bergen, 
and  met  three  ships  of  King  s  Inge  s  fleet,  which 
had  been  outsailed  on  the  voyage  from  the  east. 
On  board  of  them  were  Gyrd  Amundason,  King 
Inge’s  foster-brother,  who  was  married  to  Gyrid 
a  sister  of  Gregorius,  and  also  lagman  Gyrd  Gun- 
hildson,  and  Havard  Ivlining.  King  Hakon  had 
Gyrd  Amundason  and  Havard  Ivlining  put  to  death  ; 
but  took  lagman  Gyrd  southwards,  and  then  pro¬ 
ceeded  east  to  \  iken. 


Chapter  Y. — Of  the  Consultations  of  King  Inge. 

When  King  Inge  heard  of  this  he  sailed  east  after 
them,  and  they  met  east  in  the  Gaut  river.  King 
Inge  went  up  the  north  arm  of  the  river,  and  sent 
out  spies  to  get  news  of  Hakon  and  his  fleet  ;  but 
he  himself  landed  at  Hising,  and  waited  for  his  spies. 
Now  when  the  spies  came  back  they  went  to  the 
king,  and  said  that  they  had  seen  King  Hakon’s 
forces,  and  all  his  ships  which  lay  at  the  stakes  in  the 
river,  and  Hakon’s  men  had  bound  the  stems  of  their 
vessels  to  them.  They  had  two  great  East-country 
trading  vessels,  which  they  had  laid  outside  of  the 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


270 

fleet,  and  on  both  these  were  built  high  wooden  stages 
(castles).  When  King  Inge  heard  the  preparations 
they  had  made,  he  ordered  a  trumpet  to  call  a  House- 
thing  of  all  the  men  ;  and  when  the  Thing  was  seated 
he  asked  his  men  for  counsel,  and  applied  particu¬ 
larly  to  Gregorius  Dagson,  his  brother-in-law  Erling 
Skakke,  and  other  lendermen  and  ship-commanders, 
to  whom  he  related  the  preparations  of  Hakon  and 
his  men. 

Then  Gregorius  Dagson  replied  first,  and  made 
known  hi&  mind  in  the  following  words : — “  Some¬ 
times  we  and  Hakon  have  met,  and  generally  they 
had  the  most  people  ;  but,  notwithstanding,  they  fell 
short  in  battle  against  us.  Now,  on  the  other  hand, 
we  have  by  far  the  greatest  force ;  and  it  will  appear 
probable  to  the  men  who  a  short  time  ago  lost  gallant 
relations  by  them,  that  this  will  be  a  good  occasion 
to  get  vengeance,  for  they  have  fled  before  us  the 
greater  part  of  the  summer ;  and  we  have  often  said 
that  if  they  waited  for  us,  as  appears  now  to  be  the 
case,  we  would  have  a  brush  with  them.  Now  I  will 
tell  my  opinion,  which  is,  that  I  will  engage  them, 
if  it  be  agreeable  to  the  king’s  pleasure ;  for  I  think 
it  will  go  now  as  formerly,  that  they  must  give  way 
before  us  if  we  attack  them  bravely ;  and  I  shall  al¬ 
ways  attack  where  others  may  think  it  most  difficult.” 

The  speech  was  received  with  much  applause,  and 
all  declared  they  were  ready  to  engage  in  battle 
against  Hakon.  Then  they  rowed  with  all  the  ships 
up  the  river  until  they  came  in  sight  of  each  other, 
and  then  King  Inge  turned  off  from  the  river  current 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


271 


under  the  island.  Now  the  king  addressed  the  lender- 
men  again,  and  told  them  to  get  ready  for  battle. 
He  turned  himself  especially  to  Erling  Skakke,  and 
said,  what  was  true,  that  no  man  in  the  army  had 
more  understanding  and  knowledge  in  fighting  battles, 
although  some  were  more  hot.  The  king  then  ad¬ 
dressed  himself  to  several  of  the  lendermen,  speaking 
to  them  by  name  ;  and  ended  by  desiring  that  each  man 
should  make  his  attack  where  he  thought  it  would  be 
of  advantage,  and  thereafter  all  would  act  together. 


Chapter  VI. — Erling s  Sj^eech. 

Erling  Skakke  replied  thus  to  the  king’s  speech  : 
“  It  is  my  duty,  sire,  not  to  be  silent ;  and  I  shall 
give  my  advice,  since  it  is  desired.  The  resolution 
now  adopted  is  contrary  to  my  judgment ;  for  I 
call  it  foolhardy  to  fight  under  these  circumstances, 
although  we  have  so  many  and  such  fine  men.  Sup¬ 
posing  we  make  an  attack  on  them,  and  row  up 
against  this  river-current ;  then  one  of  the  three  men 
who  are  in  each  half  room  *  must  he  employed  in 
rowing  only,  and  another  must  be  covering  with  the 
shield  the  man  who  rows  ;  and  what  have  we  then  to 
fight  with  but  one  third  of  our  men  1  It  appears  to 
me  that  they  can  be  of  little  use  in  the  battle  who 
are  sitting  at  their  oars  with  their  backs  turned  to  the 
enemy.  Give  me  now  some  time  for  consideration, 

*  The  whole  room  was  apparently  the  space  between  two  benches  of 
rowers  in  which  the  men  lived  ;  and  these  were  divided  into  half  rooms, 
viz.,  on  the  starboard  and  larboard  sides,  and  the  men  belonged  to  the 
starboard  and  larboard  oars  of  the  bench. — L. 


272 


•  CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


and  I  promise  you  that  before  three  days  are  over  I 
shall  fall  upon  some  plan  by  which  we  can  come  into 
battle  with  advantage.” 

It  was  evident  from  Erling’s  speech  that  he  dis¬ 
suaded  from  an  attack ;  but,  notwithstanding,  it  was 
urged  by  many,  who  thought  that  Hakon  would  now, 
as  before,  take  to  the  land.  “  And  then,”  said  they, 
“  we  cannot  get  hold  of  him  ;  but  now  they  have  but 
few  men,  and  we  have  their  fate  in  our  own  hands.” 

Gregorius  said  hut  little ;  but  thought  that  Erling 
rather  dissuaded  from  an  attack  that  Gregorius’s 
advice  should  have  no  effect,  than  that  he  had  any 
better  advice  to  give. 


Chapter  YII. — Of  Hakon' s  Fleet. 

Then  said  King  Inge  to  Erling,  “Now  we  will 
follow  thy  advice,  brother,  with  regard  to  the  manner 
of  attacking ;  but  seeing  how  eager  our  counsellors 
are  for  it,  we  shall  make  the  attack  this  day.” 

Erling  replied,  “All  the  boats  and  light  vessels  we 
have  should  row  outside  the  island,  and  up  the  east 
arm  of  the  river,  and  then  down  with  the  stream 
upon  them,  and  try  if  they  cannot  cut  them  loose 
from  the  piles.  Then  we,  with  the  large  ships,  shall 
row  from  below  here  against  them  ;  and  I  cannot  tell 
until  it  be  tried,  if  those  who  are  now  so  furiously 
warm  will  be  much  brisker  at  the  attack  than  I  am.” 

This  counsel  was  approved  by  all.  There  was  a 
ness  stretched  out  between  their  fleet  and  Hakon’s, 
so  that  they  could  not  see  each  other.  Now  when 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


273 


Hakon  and  his  men,  who  had  taken  counsel  with 
each  other  in  a  meeting,  saw  the  boat-squadron  row¬ 
ing  down  the  river,  some  thought  King  Inge  intended 
to  give  them  battle ;  but  many  believed  they  did  not 
dare,  for  it  looked  as  if  the  attack  was  given  up  ; 
and  they,  besides,  were  very  confident,  both  in  their 
preparations  and  men.  There  were  many  great  people 
with  Hakon  :  there  were  Sigurd  of  Reyr,  and  Simon’s 
sons ;  Nikolas  Skialdvarson  ;  Eindride,  a  son  of  Jon 
Mornef,  who  was  the  most  gallant  and  popular  man 
in  the  Throndhjem  country  ;  and  many  other  lender- 
men  and  warriors.  Now  when  they  saw  that  King 
Inge’s  men  with  many  ships  were  rowing  out  of  the 
river,  Hakon  and  his  men  believed  they  were  going  to 
fly ;  and  therefore  they  cut  their  land-ropes  with  which 
they  lay  fast  at  the  piles,  seized  their  oars,  and  rowed 
after  them  in  pursuit.  The  ships  ran  fast  down  with 
the  stream  ;  but  when  they  came  further  down  the 
river,  abreast  of  the  ness,  they  saw  King  Inge’s  main 
strength  lying  quiet  at  the  island  Hising.  King 
Inge’s  people  saw  Hakon’s  ships  under  way,  and 
believed  they  were  coming  to  attack  them ;  and  now 
there  was  great  bustle  and  clash  of  arms,  and  they 
encouraged  each  other  by  a  great  war-shout.  Hakon 
with  his  fleet  turned  northwards  a  little  to  the  land, 
where  there  was  a  turn  in  the  bight  of  the  river,  and 
where  there  was  no  current.  They  made  ready  for 
battle,  carried  land-ropes  to  the  shore,  turned  the 
stems  of  their  ships  outwards,  and  bound  them  all 
together.  They  laid  the  large  East-country  traders 
without  the  other  vessels,  the  one  above,  the  other 

VOL.  IV.  S 


274 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


below,  and  bound  them  to  the  long-ships.  In  the 
middle  of  the  fleet  lay  the  king’s  ship,  and  next  to  it 
Sigurd’s ;  and  on  the  other  side  of  the  king’s  ship 
lay  Nikolas,  and  next  to  him  Eindride  Jonson.  All 
the  smaller  ships  lay  farther  off,  and  they  were  all 
nearly  loaded  with  weapons  and  stones. # 


Chapter  VIII. — Sigurd  of  Reyfs  Speech. 

Then  Sigurd  of  Eeyr  made  the  following  speech  : 
“Now  there  is  hope  that  the  time  is  come  which  has 
been  promised  us  all  the  summer,  that  we  shall  meet 
King  Inge  in  battle.  We  have  long  prepared  our¬ 
selves  for  this ;  and  many  of  our  comrades  have 
boasted  that  they  would  never  fly  from  or  submit  to 
King  Inge  and  Gregorius,  and  now  let  them  remem¬ 
ber  their  words.  But  we  who  have  sometimes  got 
the  toothache  in  our  conflicts  with  them,  speak  less 
confidently ;  for  it  has  happened,  as  all  have  heard, 
that  we  very  often  have  come  off  without  glory.  But, 
nevertheless,  it  is  now  necessary  to  fight  manfully, 
and  stand  to  it  with  steadiness  ;  for  the  only  escape 
for  us  is  in  victory.  Although  we  have  somewhat 
fewer  men  than  they,  yet  luck  determines  which  side 
shall  have  the  advantage,  and  God  knows  that  the 
right  is  on  our  side.  Inge  has  killed  two  of  his 
brothers  ;  and  it  is  obvious  to  all  men  that  the  mulct 
he  intends  to  pay  King  Hakon  for  his  father’s  murder 

*  The  importance  of  stones,  and  the  enormous  quantity  required  in  the 
battles  of  those  ages,  form  an  element  in  the  military  movements  of  great 
bodies  of  men  in  the  countries  in  which  stones  are  scarce,  not  sufficiently 
considered  by  historians. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


275 


is  to  murder  him  also,  as  well  as  his  other  relations, 
which  will  be  seen  this  day  to  be  his  intent.  King 
Hakon  desired  from  the  beginning  no  more  of  Norway 
than  the  third  part,  which  his  father  had  possessed, 
and  which  was  denied  him  ;  and  yet,  in  my  opinion, 
King  Hakon  has  a  better  right  to  inherit  after  his 
father’s  brother  King  Eystein,  than  Inge  or  Simon 
Skalp,  or  the  other  men  who  killed  King  Eystein. 
Many  of  them  wdio  would  save  their  souls,  and  yet 
have  defiled  their  hands  with  such  bloody  deeds  as 
Inge  has  done,  must  think  it  a  presumption  before 
God  that  he  takes  the  name  of  king ;  and  I  wonder 
God  suffers  such  monstrous  wickedness  as  his ;  but 
it  may  be  God’s  will  that  we  shall  now  put  him 
down.  Let  us  fight  then  manfully,  and  God  will 
give  us  victory ;  and,  if  we  fall,  will  repay  us  with 
joys  unspeakable  for  now  allowing  the  might  of  the 
wicked  to  prevail  over  us.  Go  forth  then  in  confi¬ 
dence,  and  be  not  afraid  when  the  battle  begins.  Let 
each  watch  over  his  own  and  his  comrade’s  safety, 
and  God  protect  us  all.”  There  went  a  good  report 
abroad  of  this  speech  of  Sigurd,  and  all  promised 
fairly,  and  to  do  their  duty.  King  Hakon  went  on 
hoard  of  the  great  East-country  ship,  and  a  shield- 
bulwark  was  made  around  him ;  but  his  standard 
remained  on  the  long-ship  in  which  it  had  been 
before. 


Chapter  IX. — Of  King  Inge’s  Men. 

Now  must  we  tell  about  King  Inge  and  his  men. 
When  they  saw  that  King  Hakon  and  his  people 


276 


CHKONICLE  OF  THE 


were  ready  for  battle,  and  the  river  only  was  between 
them,  they  sent  a  light  vessel  to  recall  the  rest  of  the 
fleet  which  had  rowed  away ;  and  in  the  meantime 
the  king  waited  for  them,  and  arranged  the  tioops 
for  the  attack.  Then  the  chiefs  consulted  in  presence 
of  the  army,  and  told  their  opinions  :  first,  which 
ships  should  lie  nearest  to  the  enemy :  and  then 
where  each  should  attack. 

Gregorius  spoke  thus:  “We  have  many  and  fine 
men  ;  and  it  is  my  advice,  King  Inge,  that  you  do 
not  go  to  the  assault  with  us,  for  everything  is  pre¬ 
served  if  you  are  safe.  And  no  man  knows  where 
an  arrow  may  hit,  even  from  the  hands  of  a  had  bow¬ 
man  :  and  they  have  prepared  themselves  so,  that 
missiles  and  stones  can  be  thrown  from  the  high 
stages  upon  the  merchant  ships  ;  so  that  there  is  less 
danger  for  those  who  are  farthest  from  them.  They 
have  not  more  men  than  we  lendermen  can  very  well 
engage  with.  I  shall  lay  my  ship  alongside  their 
largest  ship,  and  I  expect  the  conflict  between  us 
will  be  but  short;  for  it  has  often  been  so  in  our 
former  meetings,  although  there  has  been  a  much 
greater  want  of  men  with  us  than  now.”  All  thought 
well  of  the  advice  that  the  king  himself  should  not 
take  part  in  the  battle. 

Then  Erling  Skakke  said,  “I  agree  also  to  the 
counsel  that  you,  sire,  should  not  go  into  the  battle. 
It  appears  to  me  that  their  preparations  are  such,  that 
we  require  all  our  precaution  not  to  suffer  a  great 
defeat  from  them ;  and  whole  limbs  are  the  easiest 
cured.  In  the  council  we  held  before  to-day  many 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


2  77 


opposed  what  I  said,  and  ye  said  then  that  I  did  not 
want  to  tight ;  but  now  I  think  the  business  has 
altered  its  appearance,  and  greatly  to  our  advantage, 
since  they  have  hauled  off  from  the  piles,  and  now  it 
stands  so  that  I  do  not  dissuade  from  giving  battle ; 
for  I  see,  what  all  are  sensible  of,  how  necessary  it  is 
to  put  an  end  to  this  robber  band  who  have  gone 
over  the  whole  country  with  pillage  and  destruction, 
in  order  that  people  may  cultivate  the  land  in  peace, 
and  serve  a  king  so  good  and  just  as  King  Inge  who 
has  long  had  trouble  and  anxiety  from  the  haughty 
unquiet  spirit  of  his  relations,  although  he  has  been 
a  shield  of  defence  for  the  whole  people,  and  has 
been  exposed  to  manifold  perils  for  the  peace  of  the 
country.”  Erling  spoke  well  and  long,  and  many 
other  chiefs  also  ;  and  all  to  the  same  purpose — all 
urging  to  battle.  In  the  meantime  they  waited  until 
all  the  fleet  should  be  assembled.  King  Inge  had  the 
ship  Bsekisudin  ;  *  and,  at  the  entreaty  of  his  friends, 
he  did  not  join  the  battle,  but  lay  still  at  the  island. 

Chapter  X. — Beginning  of  the  Battle. 

When  the  army  was  ready  they  rowed  briskly 
against  the  enemy,  and  both  sides  raised  a  war-shout. 
Inge’s  men  did  not  bind  their  ships  together,  but  let 
them  be  loose;  for  they  rowed  right  across  the  current, 
by  which  the  large  ships  were  much  swayed.  Erling 
Skakke  laid  his  ship  beside  King  Hakon’s  ship,  and 

*  The  name  of  this  vessel  occurs  frequently.  It  seems  to  he  the 
“  Beech-sides,”  or  may  perhaps  be  a  local  name  given  to  the  ship.  It  is  not 
explained  by  any  commentator,  and  its  derivation  is  not  very  clear. — L. 


278 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


ran  the  stem  between  his  and  Sigurd  s  ship,  by  which 
the  battle  began.  But  Gregorius’s  ship  swung  upon 
the  ground,  and  heeled  very  much  over,  so  that  at 
first  she  could  not  come  into  the  battle  ;  and  when 
Hakon’s  men  saw  this  they  laid  themselves  against 
her,  and  attacked  Gregorius’s  ship  on  all  sides.  Ivar, 
Ilakon  Mage’s  son,  laid  his  ship  so  that  the  stems 
struck  together ;  and  he  got  a  boat-hook  fastened  on 
Gregorius,  on  that  part  of  his  body  where  the  waist 
is  smallest,  and  dragged  him  to  him,  by  which  Grego¬ 
rius  stumbled  against  the  ship’s  rails ;  but  the  hook 
slipped  to  one  side,  or  Gregorius  would  have  been 
dragged  overboard.  Gregorius,  however,  was  but  little 
wounded,  for  he  had  on  a  plate  coat  of  armour.  Ivar 
called  out  to  him,  that  he  had  a  “  thick  bark.”  Grego¬ 
rius  replied,  that  if  Ivar  went  on  so  he  would  “  require 
it  all,  and  not  have  too  much.”  It  was  very  near  then 
that  Gregorius  and  his  men  had  sprung  overboard  ; 
but  Aslak  Unge  threw  an  anchor  into  their  ship, 
and  dragged  them  off  the  ground.  Then  Gregorius 
laid  himself  against  Ivar’s  ship,  and  they  fought  a 
long  while ;  but  Gregorius’s  ship  being  both  higher 
sided  and  more  strongly  manned,  many  people  fell  in 
Ivar’s  ship,  and  some  jumped  overboard.  Ivar  was 
so  severely  wounded  that  he  could  not  take  part  in 
the  fight.  When  his  ship  was  cleared  of  the  men, 
Gregorius  let  Ivar  be  carried  to  the  shore,  so  that  he 
might  escape  ;  and  from  that  time  they  were  constant 
friends. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


2/ 9 


Chapter  XI. — King  Hctkons  Flight. 

When  King  Inge  and  his  men  saw  that  Gregorius 
was  aground,  he  encouraged  his  crew  to  row  to  his 
assistance.  “It  was,”  he  said,  “the  most  imprudent 
advice  that  we  should  remain  lying  here,  while  our 
friends  are  in  battle  ;  for  we  have  the  largest  and  best 
ship  in  all  the  fleet.  But  now  I  see  that  Gregorius, 
the  man  to  whom  I  owe  the  most,  is  in  need  of  help  ; 
so  we  must  hasten  to  the  fight  where  it  is  sharpest. 
It  is  also  most  proper  that  I  should  be  in  the  battle ; 
for  the  victory,  if  we  win  it,  will  belong  to  me.  And 
if  I  even  knew  beforehand  that  our  men  were  not  to 
gain  the  battle,  yet  our  place  is  where  our  friends 
are  ;  for  I  can  do  nothing  if  I  lose  the  men  who  are 
justly  called  the  defence  of  the  country,  who  are  the 
bravest,  and  have  long  ruled  for  me  and  my  king¬ 
dom.”  Thereupon  he  ordered  his  banner  to  be  set 
up,  which  was  done  ;  and  they  rowed  across  the 
river.  Then  the  battle  raged,  and  the  king  could  not 
get  room  to  attack,  so  close  lay  the  ships  before  him. 
First  he  lay  under  the  East-country  trading  ship,  and 
from  it  they  threw  down  upon  his  vessel  spears,  iron- 
shod  stakes,  and  such  large  stones  that  it  was  impos¬ 
sible  to  hold  out  longer  there,  and  he  had  to  haul  off. 
Now  when  the  kings  people  saw  that  he  was  come 
they  made  place  for  him,  and  then  he  laid  alongside 
of  Eindride  Jonson’s  ship.  Now  King  Hakorfs  men 
abandoned  the  small  ships,  and  went  on  board  the 
large  merchant  vessels ;  but  some  of  them  sprang  on 
shore.  Erling  Skakke  and  his  men  had  a  severe  con- 


28o 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


fiict.  Erling  himself  was  on  the  forecastle,  and  called 
his  forecastle-men,  and  ordered  them  to  board  the 
king’s  ship  ;  but  they  answered,  this  was  no  easy 
matter,  for  there  were  beams  above  with  an  iron 
comb  on  them.  Then  Erling  himself  went  to  the 
how,  and  stayed  there  a  while,  until  they  succeeded 
in  getting  on  board  the  king’s  ship ;  and  then  the 
ship  was  cleared  of  men  on  the  bows,  and  the  whole 
army  gave  way.  Many  sprang  into  the  water,  many 
fell,  but  the  greater  number  got  to  the  land.  So  says 
Einar  Skulason  : — 

“  Men  fall  upon  the  slippery  deck — 

Men  roll  off  from  the  blood-drenched  wreck  ; 

Dead  bodies  float  down  with  the  stream, 

And  from  the  shores  witch-ravens  scream. 

The  cold  blue  river  now  runs  red 
With  the  warm  blood  of  warriors  dead, 

And  stains  the  waves  in  Karmt  Sound 
With  the  last  drops  of  the  death- wound. 

“  All  down  the  stream,  with  unmann’d  prow, 

Floats  many  an  empty  long-ship  now. 

Ship  after  ship,  shout  after  shout, 

Tell  that  King  Hakon  can’t  hold  out. 

The  bowmen  ply  their  bows  of  elm, 

The  red  swords  flash  o’er  broken  helm  : 

King  Hakon’s  men  rush  to  the  strand, 

Out  of  their  ships,  up  through  the  land.” 


Einar  composed  a  song  about  Gregorius  Dagson, 
which  is  called  the  River-song.  King  Inge  granted 
life  and  peace  to  Nikolas  Skialdvarson  when  his 
ship  was  deserted,  and  thereupon  he  went  into  King 
Inge’s  service,  and  remained  in  it  as  long  as  the  king 
lived.  Eindride  Jonson  leaped  on  board  of  King 
Inge’s  ship  when  his  own  was  cleared  of  men,  and 
begged  for  his  life.  King  Inge  wished  to  grant  it ; 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


281 


but  Havard  Klining’s  son  ran  up,  and  gave  him  a 
mortal  wound,  which  was  much  blamed  ;  but  he  said 
Eindride  had  been  the  cause  of  his  father’s  death. 
There  was  much  lamentation  at  Eindride’s  death, 
but  principally  in  the  Throndhjem  district.  Many  of 
Hakon’s  people  fell  here,  but  not  many  chiefs.  Few 
of  King  Inge’s  people  fell,  but  many  were  wounded. 
King  Hakon  fled  up  the  country,  and  King  Inge 
went  north  to  Viken  with  his  troops ;  and  he,  as 
well  as  Gregorius,  remained  in  Viken  all  winter 
[1160].  When  King  Inge’s  men,  Bergliot  and  his 
brothers,  sons  of  Ivar  of  Elda,  came  from  the  battle 
to  Bergen,  they  slew  Nicholas  Skeg,  who  had  been 
Hakon  s  treasurer,  and  then  went  north  to  Thrond¬ 
hjem. 

King  Hakon  came  north  before  Yule,  and  Sigurd 
was  sometimes  home  at  Reyr  ;  for  Gregorius,  who  was 
nearly  related  to  Sigurd,  had  obtained  for  him  life 
and  safety  from  King  Inge,  so  that  he  retained  all  his 
estates.  King  Hakon  was  in  the  merchant-town  of 
Nidaros  in  Yule  ;  and  one  evening  in  the  beginning 
of  Yule  his  men  fought  in  the  room  of  the  court, 
and  in  this  affray  eight  men  were  killed,  and  many 
were  wounded.  The  eighth  day  of  Yule,  King 
Hakon’s  man  Alf  Rode,  son  of  Ottar  Birting,  with 
about  eighty  men,  went  to  Elda,  and  came  in  the 
night  unexpectedly  on  the  people,  who  were  very 
drunk,  and  set  fire  to  the  room  ;  but  they  went  out, 
and  defended  themselves  bravely.  There  fell  Berg¬ 
liot,  Ivar  s  son,  and  Ogmund  his  brother,  and  many 

4 

more.  They  had  been  nearly  thirty  altogether  in 


282 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


number.  In  winter  died,  north  in  the  merchant- 
town,  Andres  Simonson,  King  Hakon’s  foster- 
brother  ;  and  his  death  was  much  deplored.  Erling 
Skakke  and  Inge’s  men,  who  were  in  Bergen,  threat¬ 
ened  that  in  winter  they  would  proceed  against 
Hakon  and  his  men  ;  but  it  came  to  nothing.  Gre¬ 
gorius  sent  word  from  the  east,  from  Ivonungahella, 
that  if  he  were  so  near  as  Erling  and  his  men,  he 
would  not  sit  quietly  in  Bergen  while  Hakon  was 
killing:  Ivins:  Inge’s  friends  and  their  comrades  in 

O  OO 

war  north  in  the  Throndhjem  country. 


Chapter  XII. — The  Conflict  upon  the  Piers. 

King  Inge  and  Gregorius  left  the  east  in  spring, 
and  came  to  Bergen ;  but  as  soon  as  Hakon  and 
Sigurd  heard  that  Inge  had  left  Yiken,  they  went 
there  by  land.  When  King  Inge  and  his  people 
came  to  Bergen,  a  quarrel  arose  between  Ilaldor 
Brynjolfson  and  Biorn  Nikolason.  Biorn’s  house¬ 
man  asked  Haldor’s  when  they  met  at  the  pier, 
why  he  looked  so  pale. 

He  replied,  because  he  had  been  bled. 

“  I  could  not  look  so  pale  if  I  tried,  at  merely  being 
bled.” 

“  I  again  think,”  retorted  the  other,  “  that  thou 
wouldst  have  borne  it  worse,  and  less  manfully.” 
And  no  other  beginning  was  there  for  their  quarrel 
than  this.  Afterwards  one  word  followed  another, 
till  from  bawling  they  came  to  fighting.  It  was  told 
to  Haldor  Brynjolfson,  who  was  in  the  house  drink- 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


283 

ing,  that  his  house-man  was  wounded  down  on  the 
pier,  and  he  went  there  immediately.  But  Biorn’s 
house-men  had  come  there  before,  and  as  Iialdor 
thought  his  house-man  had  been  badly  treated,  he 
went  up  to  them  and  beat  them ;  and  it  was  told  to 
Biorn  Buk  that  the  people  of  Viken  were  heating  his 
house-men  on  the  pier.  Then  Biorn  and  his  house¬ 
men  took  their  weapons,  hurried  down  to  the  pier, 
and  would  avenge  their  men ;  and  a  bloody  strife 
began.  It  was  told  Gregorius  that  his  relation  Hal- 
dor  required  assistance,  and  that  his  house-men  were 
being  cut  down  in  the  street ;  on  which  Gregorius  and 
his  men  ran  to  the  place  in  their  armour.  Now  it 
was  told  Erling  Skakke  that  his  sisters  son  Biorn  was 
fighting  with  Gregorius  and  Iialdor  down  on  the 
piers,  and  that  he  needed  help.  Then  he  proceeded 
thither  with  a  great  force,  and  exhorted  the  people  to 
stand  by  him  ;  saying  it  would  be  a  great  disgrace, 
never  to  be  wiped  out,  if  the  Viken  people  should 
trample  upon  them  in  their  own  native  place.  There 
fell  thirteen  men,  of  whom  nine  were  killed  on  the 
spot,  and  four  died  of  their  wounds,  and  many  were 
wounded.  When  the  word  came  to  King  Inge  that 
Gregorius  and  Erling  were  fighting  down  on  the 
piers,  he  hastened  there,  and  tried  to  separate  them  ; 
but  could  do  nothing,  so  mad  were  they  on  both 
sides.  Then  Gregorius  called  to  Inge,  and  told  him 
to  go  away  ;  for  it  was  in  vain  to  attempt  coming  be¬ 
tween  them,  as  matters  now  stood.  He  said  it  would 
be  the  greatest  misfortune  if  the  king  mixed  himself 
up  with  it  ;  for  he  could  not  be  certain  that  there  were 


284 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


not  people  in  the  fray  who  wonld  commit  some  great 
misdeed  if  they  had  opportunity.  Then  King  Inge 
retired ;  and  when  the  greatest  tumult  was  over, 
Gregorius  and  his  men  went  to  Nikolas  church,  and 
Erling  behind  them,  calling  to  each  other.  Ihen 
King  Inge  came  a  second  time,  and  pacified  them  ; 
and  both  agreed  that  he  should  mediate  between 
them. 

When  King  Inge  and  Gregorius  heard  that  King 
ITakon  was  in  Viken,  they  went  east  with  many 
ships  ;  but  when  they  came  King  Hakon  fied  from 
them,  and  there  was  no  battle.  Then  King  Inge 
went  to  Oslo,  and  Gregorius  was  in  Konungahella. 


Chapter  XIII. — Hunan's  Death. 

Soon  after  Gregorius  heard  that  Hakon  and  his 
men  were  at  a  farm  called  Saurby,  which  lies  up  be¬ 
side  the  forest.  Gregorius  hastened  there  ;  came  in 
the  night ;  and  supposing  that  King  Hakon  and 
Sigurd  would  be  in  the  largest  of  the  houses,  set  fire 
to  the  buildings  there.  But  Hakon  and  his  men 
were  in  the  smaller  house,  and  came  forth,  seeing 
the  fire,  to  help  their  people.  There  Munan  fell,  a 
son  of  Ale  Uskeynd,  a  brother  of  King  Sigurd  Hakon’s 
father.  Gregorius  and  his  men  killed  him,  because 
he  was  helping  those  whom  they  were  burning  within 
the  house.  Some  escaped,  but  many  were  killed. 
Asbiorn  Jalda,  who  had  been  a  very  great  viking, 
escaped  from  the  house,  but  was  grievously  wounded. 
A  bonde  met  him,  and  he  offered  the  man  money  to 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


285 


let  him  get  away ;  but  the  boncle  replied,  he  would 
do  what  he  liked  best ;  and,  adding  that  he  had  often 
been  in  fear  of  his  life  for  him,  he  slew  him.  King 
Hakon  and  Sigurd  escaped,  but  many  of  their  people 
were  killed.  Thereafter  Gregorius  returned  home  to 
Konungahella.  Soon  after  King  Hakon  and  Sigurd 
went  to  Haldor  Brynjolfson’s  farm  of  Yettaland,  set 
fire  to  the  house,  and  burnt  it.  Haldor  went  out, 
and  was  cut  down  instantly  with  his  house-men  ;  and 
in  all  there  were  about  twenty  men  killed.  Sigrid, 
Haldor’ s  wife,  was  a  sister  of  Gregorius,  and  they 
allowed  her  to  escape  into  the  forest  in  her  night- 
shift  only ;  but  they  took  with  them  Amunde,  who 
was  a  son  of  Gyrd  Amundason  and  of  Gyrid  Dag’s 
daughter,  and  a  sister’s  son  of  Gregorius,  and  who 
was  then  a  boy  about  five  years  old. 


Chapter  XIY. —  Of  the  Fall  of  Gregorius  Dagson. 

When  Gregorius  heard  the  news  he  took  it  much 
to  heart,  and  inquired  carefully  where  they  were. 
Gregorius  set  out  from  Konungahella  late  in  Yule, 
and  came  to  Fors  the  thirteenth  day  of  Yule,*  where 
he  remained  a  night,  and  heard  vespers  the  last  day 
of  Yule,  which  was  a  Saturday,  and  the  holy  Evangel 
was  read  before  him.  When  Gregorius  and  his  fol¬ 
lowers  saw  the  men  of  King  Hakon  and  Sigurd,  the 
king’s  force  appeared  to  them  smaller  than  their  own. 
There  was  a  river  called  Befia  between  them,  where 
they  met ;  and  there  was  unsound  ice  on  the  river, 

*  January  6,  1 161. 


286 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


for  there  went  a  stream  under  the  ice  from  it.  King 
Hakon  and  his  men  had  cut  a  rent  in  the  ice, 
and  laid  snow  over  it,  so  that  nobody  could  see  it. 
When  Gregorius  came  to  the  ice  on  the  river  the 
ice  appeared  to  him  unsound,  he  said ;  and  he 
advised  the  people  to  go  to  the  bridge,  which  was 
close  by,  to  cross  the  river.  The  bonde-troops  re¬ 
plied,  that  they  did  not  know  why  he  should  be 
afraid  to  go  across  the  ice  to  attack  so  few  people 
as  Hakon  had,  and  the  ice  was  good  enough.  Gre¬ 
gorius  said  it  was  seldom  necessary  to  encourage 
him  to  show  bravery,  and  it  should  mot  be  so  now. 
Then  he  ordered  them  to  follow  him,  and  not  to  be 
standing  on  the  land  while  he  was  on  the  ice  ;  and 
he  said  it  wTas  their  counsel  to  go  out  upon  the 
dangerous  ice,  but  he  had  no  wish  to  do  so,  or  to 
be  led  by  them.  Then  he  ordered  the  banner  to  be 
advanced,  and  immediately  went  out  on  the  ice  with 
the  men.  As  soon  as  the  bondes  found  that  the 
ice  was  unsound,  they  turned  back.  Gregorius  fell 
through  the  ice,  but  not  very  deep,  and  he  told 
his  men  to  take  care.  There  were  not  more  than 
twenty  men  with  him,  the  others  having  turned 
back.  A  man  of  King  Hakon’s  troop  shot  an  arrow 
at  Gregorius,  which  hit  him  under  the  throat,  and 
thus  ended  his  life.  Gregorius  fell,  and  ten  men 
with  him.  It  is  the  talk  of  all  men  that  he  had 
been  the  most  gallant  lenderman  in  Norway  that 
any  man  then  living  could  remember ;  and  also  he 
behaved  the  best  towards  us  Icelanders  of  any  chief 
since  King  Eystein  the  Elder’s  death.  Gregorius’s 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


287 


body  was  carried  to  TIofund,  and  interred  at  Gimsey 
Isle,  in  a  nunnery  which  is  there,  of  which  Grego¬ 
rius’s  sister  Baugeid  was  then  the  abbess. 


Chapter  XV. — King  Inge  hears  of  Gregorius's  Fall. 

Two  bailiffs  went  to  Oslo  to  bring  the  tidings  to 
King  Inge.  When  they  arrived  they  desired  to 
speak  to  the  king :  and  he  asked,  what  news  they 
brought. 

“  Gregorius  Dagson’s  death,”  said  they. 

“  How  came  that  misfortune  ?  ”  asked  the  king. 

o 

When  they  had  told  him  how  it  happened,  he  said, 
“  They  gave  advice  who  understood  the  least.” 

It  is  said  he  took  it  so  much  to  heart  that  he  cried 
like  a  child.  When  he  recovered  himself  he  said, 
“  I  wanted  to  go  to  Gregorius  as  soon  as  I  heard 
of  Haldor’s  murder ;  for  I  thought  that  Gregorius 
would  not  sit  long  before  thinking  of  revenge.  But 
the  people  here  would  think  nothing  so  important 
as  their  Yule  feasts,  and  nothing  £ould  move  them 
away ;  and  I  am  confident  that  if  I  had  been  there, 
he  would  either  have  proceeded  more  cautiously,  or 
I  and  Gregorius  would  now  have  shared  one  lodging. 
Now  he  is  gone, — the  man  who  has  been  my  best 
friend,  and  more  than  any  other  has  kept  the  king¬ 
dom  in  my  hands  ;  and  I  think  it  will  be  but  a  short 
space  between  us.  Now  I  make  an  oath  to  go  forth 
against  Hakon,  and  one  of  two  things  shall  happen  : 
I  shall  either  come  to  my  death,  or  shall  walk  over 
Hakon  and  his  people  ;  and  such  a  man  as  Gregorius 


288 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


is  not  avenged,  even  if  all  were  to  pay  the  penalty 
of  their  lives  for  him.” 

There  was  a  man  present  who  replied,  “Ye  need 
not  seek  after  them,  for  they  intend  to  seek  you.” 

Kristin,  King  Sigurd’s  daughter  and  King  Inge’s 
cousin,  was  then  in  Oslo.  The  king  heard  that  she 
intended  going  away.  He  sent  a  message  to  her  to 
inquire  why  she  wished  to  leave  the  town. 

She  thought  it  was  dangerous  and  unsafe  for  a 
female  to  be  there. 

The  king  would  not  let  her  go.  “For  if  it  go 
well  with  me,  as  I  hope,  you  will  he  well  here  ;  and 
if  I  fall,  my  friends  may  not  get  leave  to  dress  my 
body ;  but  you  can  ask  permission,  and  it  will  not 
be  denied  you,  and  you  will  thereby  best  requite 
what  I  have  done  for  you.” 


Chapter  XYI. — Of  King  Inge. 

On  Saint  Blasius  day  [February  3,  1161],  in  the 
evening,  King  Inge’s  spies  brought  him  the  news 
that  King  Hakon  was  coming  towards  the  town. 
Then  King  Inge  ordered  the  war-horns  to  call  to¬ 
gether  all  the  troops  up  from  the  town  ;  and  when 
he  drew  them  up  he  could  reckon  them  to  be  nearly 
4000  *  men.  The  king  let  the  array  be  long,  but 
not  more  than  five  men  deep.  Then  some  said  that 
the  king  should  not  be  himself  in  the  battle,  as  they 
thought  the  risk  too  great ;  but  that  his  brother 
Orm  should  be  the  leader  of  the  army.  The  king 

*  =  4S00. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


,  289 


replied,  “I  think  if  Gregorius  were  alive  and  here 
now,  and  I  had  fallen  and  was  to  be  avenged,  he 
would  not  lie  concealed,  but  would  be  in  the  battle. 
Now,  although  I,  on  account  of  my  ill  health,  am 
not  fit  for  the  combat  as  he  was,  yet  will  I  show  as 
good  will  as  he  would  have  had ;  and  it  is  not  to  be 
thought  of  that  I  should  not  be  in  the  battle.”* 

People  say  that  Gunhild,  who  was  married  to 
Simon,  King  Hakon’s  foster-brother,  had  a  witch 
employed  to  sit  out  all  night  and  procure  the  vic¬ 
tory  for  Hakon ;  and  that  the  answer  was  obtained, 
that  they  should  fight  King  Inge  by  night,  and  never 
by  day,  and  then  the  result  would  be  favourable. 
The  witch  who,  as  people  say,  sat  out  was  called 
Thordis  Skeggia ;  but  what  truth  there  may  be  in 
the  report  I  know  not. 

Simon  Skalp  had  gone  to  the  town,  and  was  gone 
to  sleep,  when  the  war-shouts  awoke  him.  When 
the  night  was  well  advanced,  King  Inge’s  spies  came 
to  him,  and  told  him  that  King  Hakon  and  his 
army  were  coming  over  the  ice  ;  for  the  ice  lay  the 
whole  way  from  the  town  to  Hofud  Isle. 


Chapter  XVII. — King  Inge's  Speech. 

Thereupon  King  Inge  went  with  his  army  out  on 
the  ice,  and  he  drew  it  up  in  order  of  battle  in  front 
of  the  town.  Simon  Skalp  was  in  that  wing  of  the 
array  which  was  towards  Threelaberg ;  and  on  the 

*  At  sitja  uti— to  sit  out— was  a  form  of  expression  for  exercising 
witchcraft. — L. 

VOL.  IV. 


T 


290 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


other  wing,  which  was  towards  the  Nunnery,  was 
Gudrod,*  the  king  of  the  South  Hebudes,  a  son  of 
Olaf  Klining,f  and  Jon,  a  son  of  Svein  Bergthor  Buk. 
When  King  Hakon  and  his  army  came  near  to  King 
Inge’s  array,  both  sides  raised  a  war-shout.  Gudrod 
and  Jon  gave  King  Hakon  and  his  men  a  sign,  and 
let  them  know  where  they  were  in  the  line  ;  and  as 
soon  as  Hakon’s  men  in  consequence  turned  thither, 
Gudrod  immediately  fled  with  1500  J  men  ;  and  Jon, 
and  a  great  body  of  men  with  him,  ran  over  to  King 
Hakon’s  army,  and  assisted  them  in  the  fight.  When 
this  news  was  told  to  King  Inge,  he  said,  “  Such  is 
the  difference  between  my  friends.  Never  would 
Gregorius  have  done  so  in  his  life  !  ”  There  were 
some  who  advised  King  Inge  to  get  on  horseback, 
and  ride  from  the  battle  up  to  Kaumarike  ;  “  where,” 
said  they,  “  you  would  get  help  enough,  even  this 
very  day.”  The  king  replied,  he  had  no  inclination 
to  do  so.  “I  have  heard  you  often  say,  and  I  think 


*  He  became  king  of  the  Hebrides  1153. 

t  The  Chronicle,  of  the  Kings  of  Man  coincides  with  the  saga. 
Godredus,  son  of  Olaf  king  of  the  South  Hebudes,  went  in  1142,  in  the 
lifetime  of  his  father  to  Inge  (called  Hinge  in  the  Manx  Chronicle),  king 
of  Norway  to  do  homage  for  Man.  His  father  was  slain  in  his  absence, 
and  he  returned  from  Norway  in  1 143,  and  was  proclaimed  king  of  Man. 
As  he  treated  the  chiefs  of  the  island  harshly,  they  joined  Sumarlid,  with 
whom,  after  a  sea-fight  in  1156,  he  was  obliged  to  share  his  kingdom  ; 
and  in  1158  he  was  obliged  to  fly  from  Man,  and  seek  assistance  from 
Norway.  Sumarlid  fell  in  war  with  the  Scottish  king,  and  in  1164 
Ragnvald  (Reginaldus),  a  brother  of  Gudrod,  seized  the  sovereignty ;  but 
Gudrod  returned  with  forces  from  Norway,  took  his  brother  prisoner, 
mutilated  him,  and  held  the  sovereignty  until  1187,  when  he  died.  Gudrod 
appears,  from  this  account  taken  from  the  Manx  Chronicle ,  to  have  been 
in  Norway  from  1158  to  1164  ;  and  this  battle  of  Oslo  took  place  about 
the  year  1161,  according  to  Torfseus.  See  note  of  Thorlacius  at  chap. 
17  of  this  saga  in  the  folio  edition  of  Snorre. — L. 

£  =  1800. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


291 


truly,  that  it  was  of  little  use  to  my  brother  King 
Eystein  that  he  took  to  flight ;  and  yet  he  was  a  man 
distinguished  for  many  qualities  which  adorn  a  king. 
Now  I,  who  labour  under  so  great  decrepitude,  can 
see  how  bad  my  fate  would  be,  if  I  betook  myself  to 
what  proved  so  unfortunate  for  him  ;  with  so  great 
a  difference  as  there  is  between  our  activity,  health, 
and  strength.  I  was  in  the  second  year  of  my  age 
when  I  was  chosen  king  of  Norway,  and  I  am  now 
twenty-five ;  and  I  think  I  have  had  misfortune  and 
sorrow  under  my  kingly  dignity,  rather  than  pleasure 
and  peaceful  days.  I  have  had  many  battles,  some¬ 
times  with  more,  sometimes  with  fewer  people  ;  and 
it  is  my  greatest  luck  that  I  have  never  fled.  God 
will  dispose  of  my  life,  and  of  how  long  it  shall  be  ; 
but  I  shall  never  betake  myself  to  flight.” 


Chapter  XYIII. — King  Inges  Fall. 

Now  as  Jon  and  his  troop  had  broken  the  one 
wing  of  King  Inge’s  array,  many  of  those  who  were 
nearest  to  him  fled,  by  which  the  whole  array  was 
dispersed,  and  fell  into  disorder.  But  Hakon  and  his 
men  went  briskly  forwards  ;  and  now  it  was  near  day¬ 
break.  An  assault  was  made  against  King  Inge’s 
banner,  and  in  this  conflict  King  Inge  fell ;  but  his 
brother  Orm  continued  the  battle,  while  many  of  the 
army  fled  up  into  the  town.  Twice  Orm  went  to  the 
town  after  the  king’s  fall  to  encourage  the  people,  and 
both  times  returned,  and  went  out  again  upon  the  ice 
to  continue  the  battle.  Hakon’s  men  attacked  the 


292 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


wing  of  the  array  which  Simon  Skalp  led  ;  and  in  that 
assault  fell  of  King  Inge’s  men  his  brother-in-law, 
Gudbrand  Skafhogson.  Simon  Skalp  and  Halvard 
Hikre  went  against  each  other  with  their  troops, 
and  fought  while  they  drew  aside  past  Thradaberg ; 
and  in  this  conflict  both  Simon  and  Halvard  fell. 
Orm,  the  king’s  brother,  gained  great  reputation  in 
this  battle;  but  he  at  last  fled.  Orm  the  winter 
before  had  been  contracted  with  Kagna,  a  daughter 
of  Nikolas  Mase,  who  had  been  married  before  to 
King  Eystein  Haraldson  ;  and  the  wedding  was  fixed 
for  the  Sunday  after  Saint  Blasius’  mass,  which  was 
on  a  Friday.  Orm  fled  east  to  Svithiod,  where  his 
brother  Magnus  *  was  then  king  ;  and  their  brother 
ilagnvald  was  an  earl  there  at  that  time.  They  were 
the  sons  of  Queen  Ingirid  and  Henrik  Halte,  who  was 
a  son  of  the  Danish  king  Svein  Sveinson.  The  prin¬ 
cess  Kristin  took  care  of  King  Inge’s  body,  which 
was  laid  on  the  stone  wall  of  Halyard’s  church,  on  the 
south  side  without  the  choir.  He  had  then  been  king 
for  twenty-three  years  [1137— 1161].  In  this  battle 
many  fell  on  both  sides,  but  principally  of  King  Inge’s 
men.  Of  King  Hakon’s  people  fell  Arne  Frirek- 
son.  Hakon’s  men  took  all  the  feast  and  victuals 
prepared  for  the  wedding,  and  a  great  booty  besides. 


Chapter  XIX. — Of  King  Hakon  and  Queen  Kristin . 

Then  King  Hakon  took  possession  of  the  whole 
country,  and  distributed  all  the  offices  among  his 


*  Ruled  1160-1161. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY.  293 

own  friends,  both  in  the  towns  and  in  the  country . 
King  Hakon  and  his  men  had  a  meeting  in  Halyard5 s 
church,  where  they  had  a  private  conference  concern¬ 
ing  the  management  of  the  country.  Kristin  the 
princess  gave  the  priest  who  kept  the  church  keys  a 
large  sum  of  money  to  conceal  one  of  her  men  in  the 
church,  so  that  she  might  know  what  Hakon  and  his 
counsellors  intended.  When  she  learnt  what  they 
had  said,  she  sent  a  man  to  Bergen  to  her  husband 
Erling  Skakke,  with  the  message  that  he  should 
never  trust  Hakon  or  his  men. 


Chapter  XX. — Of  Olctfs  Miracle. 

It  happened  at  the  battle  of  Stiklestad,  as  before 
related,  that  King  Olaf  threw  from  him  the  sword 
called  Hneiter  *  when  he  received  his  wound.  A 
Swedish  man,  who  had  broken  his  own  sword,  took 
it  up,  and  fought  with  it.  When  this  man  escaped 
with  the  other  fugitives  he  came  to  Svithiod,  and 
went  home  to  his  house.  From  that  time  he  kept 
the  sword  all  his  days,  and  afterwards  his  son,  and  so 
relation  after  relation ;  and  when  the  sword  shifted 
its  owner,  the  one  told  to  the  other  the  name  of  the 
sword,  and  where  it  came  from.  A  long  time  after, 
in  the  days  of  Kirjalax  the  emperor  of  Constantinople, 
when  there  was  a  great  body  of  Y arings  in  the  town,  it 
happened  in  the  summer  that  the  emperor  was  on  a 
campaign,  and  lay  in  the  camp  with  his  army.  The 

*  Giving  a  name  to  a  sword,  or  piece  of  ordnance,  or  to  a  horse,  appears 
to  have  continued  to  Elizabeth’s  days  in  England.  “  Have  we  not  Iliion 
here?”  says  Pistol. — L. 


294 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Varings  who  had  the  guard,  and  watched  over  the 
emperor,  lay  on  the  open  plain  without  the  camp. 
They  changed  the  watch  with  each  other  in  the 
night,  and  those  who  had  been  before  on  watch  lay 
down  and  slept ;  but  all  completely  armed.  It  was 
their  custom,  when  they  went  to  sleep,  that  each 
should  have  his  helmet  on  his  head,  his  shield  over 
him,  sword  under  the  head,  and  the  right  hand  on 
the  sword-handle.  One  of  these  comrades,  whose 
lot  it  was  to  watch  the  latter  part  of  the  night,  found, 
on  awaking  towards  morning,  that  his  sword  was 
gone.  He  looked  after  it,  and  saw  it  lying  on  the 
flat  plain  at  a  distance  from  him.  He  got  up  and 
took  the  sword,  thinking  that  his  comrades  who  had 
been  on  watch  had  taken  the  sword  from  him  in  a 
joke  ;  but  they  all  denied  it.  The  same  thing  hap¬ 
pened  three  nights.  Then  he  wondered  at  it,  as 
well  as  they  who  saw  or  heard  of  it ;  and  people 
began  to  ask  him  how  it  could  have  happened.  He 
said  that  his  sword  was  called  Hneiter,  and  had 
belonged  to  King  Olaf  the  Saint,  who  had  himself 
carried  it  in  the  battle  of  Stiklestad ;  and  he  also 
related  how  the  sword  since  that  time  had  gone  from 
one  to  another.  This  was  told  to  the  emperor,  who 
called  the  man  before  him  to  whom  the  sword  be¬ 
longed,  and  gave  him  three  times  as  much  gold  as 
the  sword  was  worth ;  and  the  sword  itself  he  had 
laid  in  Saint  Olaf  s  church,  which  the  Varings  sup¬ 
ported,  where  it  has  been  ever  since  over  the  altar. 
There  was  a  lenderman  of  Norway  while  Harald 
Gille’s  sons,  Eystein,  Inge,  and  Sigurd  lived,  who 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


295 


was  called  Eindride  Unge  ;  and  he  was  in  Constan¬ 
tinople  when  these  events  took  place.  He  told 
these  circumstances  in  Norway,  according  to  what 
Einar  Skulason  says  in  his  song  about  King  Olaf 
the  Saint,  in  which  these  events  are  sung. 


Chapter  XXI. — Of  King  Olaf’s  Miracle  in  Favour  of  the 

Varings  of  Constantinople. 

It  happened  once  in  the  Greek  country,  when 
Kirjalax  *  was  emperor  there,  that  he  made  an  ex¬ 
pedition  against  Blokumannaland.t  When  he  came 
to  the  Pezina  plains, t  a  heathen  king  came  against 
him  with  an  innumerable  host.  He  brought  with 
him  many  horsemen,  and  many  large  waggons,  in 
which  were  large  loop-holes  for  shooting  through. 
When  they  prepared  for  their  night  quarters  they 
drew  up  their  waggons,  one  by  the  side  of  the  other, 
without  their  tents,  and  dug  a  great  ditch  without  ; 
and  all  which  made  a  defence  as  strong  as  a  castle. 
The  heathen  king  was  blind.  Now  when  the  Greek 
king  came,  the  heathens  drew  up  their  array  on  the 
plains  before  their  waggon-fortification.  The  Greeks 
drew  up  their  array  opposite,  and  they  rode  on  both 
sides  to  fight  with  each  other  ;  but  it  went  on  so  ill 
and  so  unfortunately,  that  the  Greeks  were  compelled 

*  Kirjalax  is  the  contracted  pronunciation  of  the  Greek  Ivurios 
Alexios — the  lord  Alexius  ;  and  the  Emperior  Alexius  Commenus  I.  is 
the  Alexius  here  meant. 

t  Blokumannaland  is  not  Ethiopia,  with  which  Alexius  I.  had  no  Avars  : 
but  Blachars,  or  Vallachars,  was  the  name  of  the  people  of  Vallachia, 
contracted  by  the  northern  Varings  into  Bloku-menn. 

X  Pezina-volr — the  plains  on  the  river  Bezina. 


296 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


to  fly  after  suffering  a  great  defeat,  and  the  heathens 
gained  a  victory.  Then  the  king  drew  up  an  array 
of  Franks  and  Flemings,  who  rode  against  the 
heathens,  and  fought  with  them  ;  but  it  went  with 
them  as  with  the  others,  that  many  were  killed,  and 
all  who  escaped  took  to  flight.  Then  the  Greek  king 
was  greatly  incensed  at  his  men-at-arms  ;  and  they 
replied,  that  he  should  now  take  his  wine-bags,  the 
T  arings.*  The  king  says  that  he  would  not  throw 
away  his  jewels,  and  allow  so  few  men,  however 
bold  they  might  be,  to  attack  so  vast  an  army.  Then 
1  borer  Helsing,  who  at  that  time  was  leader  of  the 
Varings,  replied  to  the  king’s  words,  “  If  there  was 
burning  fire  in  the  way,  I  and  my  people  would  run 
into  it,  if  I  knew  the  king’s  advantage  required  it.” 
I  hen  the  king  replied,  “  Call  upon  your  holy  King 
Olaf  for  help  and  strength.”  The  Varings,  who  were 
450 1  men,  made  a  vow  with  hand  and  word  to  build 
a  church  in  Constantinople,  at  their  own  expense 
and  with  the  aid  of  other  good  men,  and  have  the 
church  consecrated  to  the  honour  and  glory  of  the 
holy  King  Olaf;  and  thereupon  the  Varings  rushed 
into  the  plain.  When  the  heathens  saw  them,  they 
told  their  king  that  there  was  another  troop  of  the 
Greek  king's  army  come  out  upon  the  plain ;  but 
they  weie  only  a  handful  of  people.  The  king  says, 
“Who  is  that  venerable  man  riding  on  a  white  horse 
at  the  head  of  the  troop?”  They  replied,  “We  do 

*  The  Frakkar  and  Flemingjar— Franks  and  Flemings— appear  not  to 
have  been  in  the  corps  of  Varings,  the  body  guard,  but  only  Northmen 
t  =540. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


297 


not  see  him.”  There  was  so  great  a  difference  of 
numbers,  that  there  were  sixty  heathens  for  every 
Christian  man ;  but  notwithstanding  the  Yarings 
went  boldly  to  the  attack.  As  soon  as  they  met  terror 
and  alarm  seized  the  army  of  the  heathens,  and  they 
instantly  began  to  fly;  but  the  Yarings  pursued, 
and  soon  killed  a  great  number  of  them.  When  the 
Greeks  and  Franks  who  before  had  fled  from  the 
heathens  saw  this,  they  hastened  to  take  part,  and 
pursue  the  enemy  with  the  others.  Then  the  Yarings 
had  reached  the  waggon-fortification,  where  the 
greatest  defeat  was  given  to  the  enemy.  The  heathen 
king  was  taken  in  the  flight  of  his  people,  and  the 
Yarings  brought  him  along  with  them  ;  after  which 
the  Christians  took  the  camp  of  the  heathens,  and 
their  waggon-fortification. 


298 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


XVI. 

MAGNUS  ERLINGSON’S  SAGA. 

PRELIMINARY  REMARKS. 

With  this  saga,  which  describes  a  series  of  conflicts,  Snorre’s 
Heimskringla  ends.  King  Ey stein  died  in  1  177,  but  Mag-, 
nus  Erlingson  continued  to  reign  until  his  death  in  1184. 
The  conflicts  continued  until  the  opposition  party  was  led  to 
victory  by  King  Sverre. 

The  only  skald  quoted  is  Thorbjorn  Skakkaskald. 


Chapter  I. — Of  Magnus  Erlingson  s  Beginning. 

When  Erling  got  certain  intelligence  of  the  deter¬ 
minations  of  Hakon  and  his  counsellors,  he  sent  a 
message  to  all  the  chiefs  who  he  knew  had  been 
steady  friends  of  King  Inge,  and  also  to  his  court- 
men  and  his  retinue,  who  had  saved  themselves  by 
flight,  and  also  to  all  Gregorius’s  house-men,  and 
called  them  together  to  a  meeting.  When  they  met, 
and  conversed  with  each  other,  they  resolved  to  keep 
their  men  together ;  and  which  resolution  they  con¬ 
firmed  by  oath  and  hand- shake  to  each  other.  Then 
they  considered  who  they  should  take  to  be  king. 
Erling  Skakke  first  spoke,  and  inquired  if  it  was  the 
opinion  of  the  chiefs  and  other  men  of  power  that 
Simon  Skalp’s  son,  the  son  of  the  daughter  of  King 
Harald  Gille,  should  be  chosen  king,  and  Jon  Hal- 
kelson  be  taken  to  lead  the  army ;  but  Jon  refused 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


299 


it.  Then  it  was  inquired  if  Nikolas  Skialdvarson,  a 
sister’s  son  of  King  Magnus  Barefoot,  would  place 
himself  at  the  head  of  the  army  ;  but  he  answered 
thus  : — It  was  his  opinion  that  some  one  should  be 
chosen  king  who  was  of  the  royal  race  ;  and,  for 
leader  of  the  troops,  some  one  from  whom  help  and 
understanding  were  to  be  looked  for  ;  and  then  it 
would  be  easier  to  gather  an  army.  It  was  now 
tried  whether  Arne  would  let  any  of  his  sons,  King 
Inge’s  brothers,  be  proclaimed  king.  Arne  replies, 
that  Kristin’s  son,  she  was  the  daughter  of  King 
Sigurd  the  Crusader,  was  nearest  by  propinquity  of 
descent  to  the  crown  of  Norway.  “  And  here  is  also 
a  man  to  be  his  adviser,  and  whose  duty  it  is  to  take 
care  of  him  and  of  the  kingdom  ;  and  that  man  is  his 
father  Erling,  who  is  both  prudent,  brave,  experienced 
in  war,  and  an  able  man  in  governing  the  kingdom  : 
he  wants  no  capability  of  bringing  this  counsel  into 
effect,  if  luck  be  with  him.”  Many  thought  well 
of  this  advice. 

Erling  replied  to  it,  “As  far  as  I  can  see  or  hear 
in  this  meeting,  the  most  will  rather  be  excused  from 
taking  upon  themselves  such  a  difficult  business. 
Now  it  appears  to  me  altogether  uncertain,  provided 
we  begin  this  work,  whether  he  who  puts  himself  at 
the  head  of  it  will  gain  any  honour ;  or  whether 
matters  will  go  as  they  have  done  before  when  any 
one  undertakes  such  great  things, — that  he  loses  all 
his  property,  and  possibly  his  life.  But  if  this  counsel 
be  adopted,  there  may  be  men  who  will  undertake  to 
carry  it  through ;  but  he  who  comes  under  such  an 


300 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


obligation  must  seek,  in  every  way,  to  prevent  any 
opposition  or  enmity  from  those  who  are  now  in  this 
council.  ” 

All  gave  assurance  that  they  would  enter  into  this 
confederacy  with  perfect  fidelity.  Then  said  Erling, 
“  I  can  say  for  myself  that  it  would  almost  be  my 
death  to  serve  King  Hakon  ;  and  however  dangerous 
it  may  be,  I  will  rather  venture  to  adopt  your  advice, 
and  take  upon  me  to  lead  this  force,  if  that  be  the 
will,  counsel,  and  desire  of  you  all,  and  if  you  will 
all  bind  yourselves  to  this  agreement  by  oath.” 

To  this  they  all  agreed  ;  and  in  this  meeting  it  was 
determined  to  take  Erling’s  son  Magnus  to  be  king. 
They  afterwards  held  a  Thing  in  the  town  ;  and  at 
this  Thing  Magnus  Erlingson,  then  five  years  old, 
was  elected  king  of  the  whole  country.  All  who  had 
been  servants  of  King  Inge  went  into  his  service,  and 
each  of  them  retained  the  office  and  dignity  he  had 
held  under  King  Inge  [i  1 6 1  ] . 


Chapter  II. — King  Magnus  goes  to  Denmark. 

Erling  Skakke  made  himself  ready  to  travel,  fitted 
out  ships,  and  had  with  him  King  Magnus,  together 
with  the  household-men  who  were  on  the  spot.  In 
this  expedition  were  the  king’s  relatives, — Arne  ; 
Ingirid,  King  Inge’s  mother,  with  her  two  sons ;  be¬ 
sides  Jon  Kutiza,  a  son  of  Sigurd  Stork,  and  Erling’s 
house-men,  as  well  as  those  who  had  been  Gregorius’s 
house-men  ;  and  they  had  in  all  ten  ships.  They 
went  south  to  Denmark  to  King  Valdemar  and  Buriz 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


301 


Heinrekson,  King  Inge’s  brother.  King  Valdemar 
was  King  Magnus's  blood-relation ;  for  Ingibjorg 
mother  of  King  Valdemar,  and  Malmfrid  mother  of 
Kristin,  King  Magnus’s  mother,  were  cousins.  The 
Danish  king  received  them  hospitably,  and  he  and 
Erling  had  private  meetings  and  consultations  ;  and 
so  much  was  known  of  their  counsels,  that  King 
Valdemar  was  to  aid  King  Magnus  with  such  help 
as  might  be  required  from  his  kingdom,  to  win  and 
retain  Norway.  On  the  other  hand,  King  Valdemar 
should  get  that  domain  in  Norway  which  his  an¬ 
cestors  Harald  Gormson  and  Svein  Forked-beard 
had  possessed ;  namely,  the  whole  of  Viken  as  far 
north  as  Rygiarbit.  This  agreement  was  confirmed 
by  oath  and  a  fixed  treaty.  Then  Erling  and  King 
Magnus  made  themselves  ready  to  leave  Denmark, 
and  they  sailed  out  of  Vendilskage.* 


Chapter  III. — Battle  of  Tunsberg. 

King  Hakon  went  in  spring,  after  the  Easter  week, 
north  to  Throndhjem,  and  had  with  him  the  whole 
fleet  that  had  belonged  to  King  Inge.  He  held  a 
Thing  there  in  the  merchant-town,  and  was  chosen 
king  of  the  whole  country.  Then  he  made  Sigurd 
of  Keyr  an  earl,  and  gave  him  an  earldom,  and  after¬ 
wards  proceeded  southwards  with  his  followers  all 
the  way  to  Viken.  The  king  went  to  Tunsberg  ;  but 
sent  Earl  Sigurd  east  to  Konungahella,  to  defend 
the  country  with  a  part  of  the  forces  in  case  Erling 

*  Vendilskage— the  Scaw. 


302 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


should  come  from  the  south.  Erling  and  his  fleet 
came  to  Agder,  and  went  straight  north  to  Bergen, 
where  they  killed  Arne  Brigdarskalle,  King  Hakon’s 
officer,  and  came  back  immediately  against  King 
Hakon.  Earl  Sigurd,  who  had  not  observed  the 
journey  of  Erling  and  his  followers  from  the  south, 
was  at  that  time  east  in  the  Gaut  river,  and  King 
Hakon  was  in  Tunsberg.  Erling  brought  up  at 
Hrossanes,  and  lay  there  some  nights.  In  the  mean¬ 
time  King  Hakon  made  preparations  in  the  town. 
When  Erling  and  his  fleet  were  coming  up  to  the 
town,  they  took  a  merchant  vessel,  filled  it  with 
wood  and  straw,  and  set  fire  to  it ;  and  the  wind 
blowing  right  towards  the  town,  drove  the  vessel 
against  the  piers.  Erling  had  two  cables  brought  on 
board  the  vessel,  and  made  fast  to  two  boats,  and 
made  them  row  along  as  the  vessel  drove.  Now 
when  the  fire  was  come  almost  abreast  of  the  town, 
those  who  were  in  the  boats  held  back  the  vessel  by 
the  ropes,  so  that  the  town  could  not  be  set  on  fire  ; 
but  so  thick  a  smoke  spread  from  it  over  the  town, 
that  one  could  not  see  from  the  piers  where  the 
king’s  array  was.  Then  Erling  drew  the  whole  fleet 
in  where  the  wind  carried  the  fire,  and  shot  at  the 
enemy.  When  the  townspeople  saw  that  the  fire  was 
approaching  their  houses,  and  many  were  wounded 
by  the  bowmen,  they  resolved  to  send  the  priest 
Hroald,  the  long-winded  speaker,  to  Erling,  to  beg 
him  to  spare  them  and  the  town ;  and  they  dis¬ 
solved  the  array  in  favour  of  Hakon,  as  soon  as 
Hroald  told  them  their  prayer  was  granted.  Now 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


303 


when  the  array  of  the  townspeople  had  dispersed, 
the  men  on  the  piers  were  much  thinned :  how¬ 
ever,  some  urged  Hakon’s  men  to  make  resistance  ; 
but  Onund  Simonson,  who  had  most  influence  over 
the  army,  said,  “I  will  not  fight  for  Earl  Sigurd’s 
earldom,  since  he  is  not  here  himself”  Then  Onund 
fled,  and  was  followed  by  all  the  people,  and  by 
the  king  himself;  and  they  hastened  up  the  coun¬ 
try.  King  Hakon  lost  many  men  here ;  and  these 
verses  were  made  about  it : — 

“  Onund  declares  lie  will  not  go 
In  battle  ’gainst  Earl  Sigurd’s  foe, 

If  Earl  Sigurd  does  not  come, 

But  with  his  house-men  sits  at  home. 

King  Magnus’  men  rush  up  the  street, 

Eager  with  Hakon’s  troop  to  meet ; 

But  Hakon’s  war-hawks,  somewhat  shy, 

Turn  quick  about,  and  off  they  fly.” 


Thorbiorn  Skakkaskald  also  said  : — 

“  The  Tunsberg  men  would  not  be  slow 
In  thy  good  cause  to  risk  a  blow  ; 

And  well  they  knew  the  chief  could  stain 
The  wolves’  mouths  on  a  battle-plain. 

But  the  town  champion  rather  fears 
The  sharp  bright  glance  of  levelled  spears  ; 

Their  steel-clad  warrior  loves  no  fight 
Where  bowstring  twangs,  or  fire  flies  bright.” 

King  Hakon  then  took  the  land-road  northwards 
to  Throndhjem.  When  Earl  Sigurd  heard  of  this, 
he  proceeded  with  all  the  ships  he  could  get  the 
seaway  northwards,  to  meet  King  Hakon  there. 


304 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  IV. —  Of  Erling  and  Hakon. 

Erling  Skakke  took  all  the  ships  in  Tunsberg  be¬ 
longing  to  King  Hakon,  and  there  he  also  took  the 
Bsekisudin  which  had  belonged  to  King  Inge.  Then 
Erling  proceeded,  and  reduced  the  whole  of  Viken 
in  obedience  to  King  Magnus,  and  also  the  whole 
country  north  wheresoever  he  appeared  up  to  Bergen, 
where  he  remained  all  winter.  There  Erling  killed 
Ingibiorn  Sipil,  King  Hakon’s  lenderman  of  the 
north  part  of  the  Fiord  district.  In  winter  [1162] 
King  Hakon  was  in  Throndhjem  ;  but  in  the  follow¬ 
ing  spring  he  ordered  a  levy,  and  prepared  to  go 
against  Erling.  He  had  with  him  Earl  Sigurd, 
Jon  Sveinson,  Eindride  Unge,  Onund  Simonson, 
Philip  Peterson,  Philip  Gyrdson,  Bagnvald  Kunta, 
Sigurd  Kapa,  Sigurd  Hiupa,  Frirek  Keina,  Asbiorn 
of  Forland,  Thorbiorn,  a  son  of  Gunnarthe  treasurer, 
and  Stradbjarne. 


Chapter  V. — Of  Erling  s  People. 

Erling  was  in  Bergen  with  a  great  armament,  and 
resolved  to  lay  a  sailing  prohibition  on  all  the  mer¬ 
chant  vessels  which  were  going  north  to  Nidaros  ; 
for  he  knew  that  King  Hakon  would  soon  get  tid¬ 
ings  of  him,  if  ships  were  sailing  between  the  towns. 
Besides,  he  gave  out  that  it  was  better  for  Bergen 
to  get  the  goods,  even  if  the  owners  were  obliged  to 
sell  them  cheaper  than  they  wished,  than  that  they 
should  fall  into  the  hands  of  enemies  and  thereby 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


30  5 


strengthen  them.  And  now  a  great  many  vessels 
were  assembled  at  Bergen,  for  many  arrived  every 
day,  and  none  were  allowed  to  go  away.  Then  Erling 
let  some  of  the  lightest  of  his  vessels  be  laid  ashore, 
and  spread  the  report  that  he  would  wait  for  Hakon, 
and,  with  the  help  of  his  friends  and  relations,  oppose 
the  enemy  there.  He  then  one  day  called  a  meeting 
of  the  ship-masters,  and  gave  them  and  all  the  mer¬ 
chant  ships  and  their  steersmen  leave  to  go  where 
they  pleased.  When  the  men  who  had  charge  of  the 
cargoes,  and  were  all  ready  to  sail  away  with  their 
goods,  some  for  trade,  others  on  various  business, 
had  got  leave  from  Erling  Skakke  to  depart,  there 
was  a  soft  and  favourable  wind  for  sailing  north  along 
the  coast.  Before  the  evening  all  who  were  ready 
had  set  sail,  and  hastened  on  as  fast  as  they  could, 
according  to  the  speed  of  their  vessels,  the  one  vying 
with  the  other.  When  this  fleet  came  north  to  More, 
Ilakon’s  fleet  had  arrived  there  before  them  ;  and  he 
himself  was  there  fully  engaged  in  collecting  people, 
and  summoning  to  him  the  lendermen,  and  all  liable 
to  serve  in  the  levy,  without  having  for  a  long  time 
heard  any  news  from  Bergen.  Now,  however,  they 
heard,  as  the  latest  news,  that  Erling  Skakke  had 
laid  his  ships  up  in  Bergen,  and  there  they  would 
find  him ;  and  also  that  he  had  a  large  force  with 
him.  King  Hakon  sailed  from  thence  to  Veey,*  and 
sent  away  Earl  Sigurd  and  Onund  Simonson  to  gather 
people,  and  sent  men  also  to  both  the  More  districts. 
After  King  Hakon  had  remained  a  few  days  at  the 

*  Veey— now  Yedo  in  Raumsdal. — L. 

VOL.  IV.  it 


3°  6 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


town  he  sailed  farther,  and  proceeded  to  the  South, 
thinking  that  it  would  both  promote  his  journey  and 
enable  new  levies  to  join  him  sooner. 

Erling  Skakke  had  given  leave  on  Sunday  to  all 
the  merchant  vessels  to  leave  Bergen ;  and  on  Tues¬ 
day,  as  soon  as  the  early  mass  was  over,  he  ordered 
the  war-horns  to  sound,  summoned  to  him  the  men- 
at-arms  and  the  townsmen,  and  let  the  ships  which 
were  laid  up  on  shore  be  drawn  down  into  the  water. 
Then  Erling  held  a  House-Tiling  with  his  men  and 
the  people  of  the  levy ;  told  them  his  intentions  ; 
named  ship  commanders ;  and  had  the  names  called 
over  of  the  men  who  were  to  be  on  board  of  the 
king’s  ship.  This  Thing  ended  with  Erling  s  order 
to  every  man  to  make  himself  ready  in  his  berth 
wherever  a  place  was  appointed  him ;  and  declared 
that  he  who  remained  in  the  town  after  the  Baeki- 
sudin  was  hauled  out,  should  be  punished  by  loss  of 
life  or  limb.  Orm,  the  king’s  brother,  laid  his  ships 
out  in  the  harbour  immediately  that  evening,  and 
many  others,  and  the  greater  number  were  afloat 
before. 


Chapter  YI. —  Of  Erling  Skakke. 

On  Wednesday,  before  mass  was  sung  in  the  town, 
Erling  sailed  from  Bergen  with  all  his  fleet,  consist¬ 
ing  of  twenty-one  ships  ;  and  there  was  a  fresh  breeze 
for  sailing  northwards  along  the  coast.  Erling  had 
his  son  King  Magnus  with  him,  and  there  were 
many  lendermen  accompanied  by  the  finest  men. 
When  Erling  came  north,  abreast  of  the  Fiord  district, 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


307 


he  sent  a  boat  on  shore  to  Jon  Halkelson’s  farm,  and 
took  Nikolas,  a  son  of  Simon  Skalp  and  of  Maria, 
Ilarald  Gille’s  daughter,  and  brought  him  out  to 
the  fleet,  and  put  him  on  board  the  king’s  ship. 
On  Friday,  immediately  after  matins,  they  sailed  to 
Steinavag ;  and  King  Hakon,  with  thirteen  ships, 
was  lying  in  a  harbour  in  the  neighbourhood.  He 
himself  and  his  men  were  up  at  play  upon  the  island, 
and  the  lendermen  were  sitting  on  the  hill,  when 
they  saw  a  boat  rowing  from  the  south  with  two  men 
in  it,  who  were  bending  back  deep  towards  the  keel, 
and  taking  hasty  strokes  with  their  oars.  When  they 
came  to  the  shore  they  did  not  belay  the  boat,  but 
both  ran  from  it.  The  great  men  seeing  this,  said 
to  each  other,  “  These  men  must  have  some  news  to 
tell ;  ”  and  got  up  to  meet  them.  When  they  met, 
Onund  Simonson  asked,  “  Have  ye  any  news  of 
Erling  Skakke,  that  ye  are  running  so  fast  ?  ” 

They  answered,  as  soon  as  they  could  get  out  the 
words,  for  they  had  lost  their  breath,  “  Here  comes 
Erling  against  you,  sailing  from  the  south,  with 
twenty-one  ships,  or  thereabouts,  of  which  many  are 
great  enough;  and  now  ye  will  soon  see  their  sails.” 

Then  said  Eindride  Unge,  “Too  near  to  the  nose, 
said  the  peasant,  when  his  eye  was  knocked  out.” 

They  went  in  haste  now  to  where  the  games  were 
playing,  and  immediately  the  war-horns  resounded, 
and  with  the  battle-call  all  the  people  were  gathered 
down  to  the  ships  in  the  greatest  haste.  It  was  just 
the  time  of  day  when  their  meat  was  nearly  cooked. 
All  the  men  rushed  to  the  ships,  and  each  ran  on 


3°S 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


board  the  vessel  that  was  nearest  to  him,  so  that  the 
ships  were  unequally  manned.  Some  took  to  the 
oars  ;  some  raised  the  masts,  turned  the  heads  of  the 
vessels  to  the  north,  and  steered  for  Veey,  where  they 
expected  much  assistance  from  the  townspeople. 


Chapter  VII.  —Fall  of  King  Hakon. 

Soon  after  they  saw  the  sails  of  Erling’s  fleet,  and 
both  fleets  came  in  sight  of  each  other.  Eindride 
Unge  had  a  ship  called  Draglaun,  which  was  a  large 
buss-like  long-ship,  but  which  had  but  a  small  crew ; 
for  those  who  belonged  to  her  had  run  on  board  of 
other  ships,  and  she  was  therefore  the  hindmost  of 
Hakon’s  fleet.  When  Eindride  came  abreast  of  the 
island  Sek,  the  Baekisudin,  which  Erling  Skakke 
himself  commanded,  came  up  with  her ;  and  these 
two  ships  were  bound  fast  together.  King  Hakon 
and  his  followers  had  arrived  close  to  Veey ;  but 
when  they  heard  the  war-horn  they  turned  again  to 
assist  Eindride.  Now  they  began  the  battle  on  both 
sides,  as  the  vessels  came  up.  Many  of  the  sails  lay 
midships  across  the  vessels  ;  and  the  ships  were  not 
made  fast  to  each  other,  but  they  lay  side  by  side. 
The  conflict  was  not  long  before  there  came  disorder 
in  Hakon’s  ship  ;  and  some  fell,  and  others  sprang 
overboard.  Hakon  threw  over  him  a  grey  cloak, 
and  jumped  on  board  another  ship  ;  but  when  he 
had  been  there  a  short  time  he  thought  he  had  got 
among  his  enemies  ;  and  when  he  looked  about  him 
he  saw  none  of  his  men  nor  of  his  ships  near  him. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


309 


Then  he  went  into  the  Bsekisudin  to  the  forecastle- 
men,  and  begged  his  life.  They  took  him  in  their 
keeping,  and  gave  him  quarter.  In  this  conflict 
there  was  a  great  loss  of  people,  but  principally  of 
Hakon’s  men.  In  the  Bsekisudin  fell  Nikolas, 
Simon  Skalp’s  son  ;  and  Erling’s  men  are  accused 
of  having  killed  him  themselves.  Then  there  was  a 
pause  in  the  battle,  and  the  vessels  separated.  It  was 
now  told  to  Erling  that  Hakon  was  on  board  of  his 
ship ;  that  the  forecastle-men  had  taken  him,  and 
threatened  that  they  would  defend  him  with  arms. 
Erling  sent  men  forwards  in  the  ship  to  bring  the 
forecastle-men  his  orders  to  guard  Hakon  well,  so 
that  he  should  not  get  away.  He  at  the  same  time 
let  it  be  understood  that  he  had  no  objection  to  giving 
the  king  life  and  safety,  if  the  other  chiefs  were  will¬ 
ing,  and  a  peace  could  be  established.  All  the  fore¬ 
castle-men  gave  their  chief  great  credit  and  honour 
for  these  words.  Then  Erling  ordered  anew  a  blast 
of  the  war-horns,  and  that  the  ships  should  be  at¬ 
tacked  which  had  not  lost  their  men  ;  saying  that 
they  would  never  have  such  another  opportunity  of 
avenging  King  Inge.  Thereupon  they  all  raised  a 
war-shout,  encouraged  each  other,  and  rushed  to  the 
assault.  In  this  tumult  King  Hakon  received  his 
death- wound.  When  his  men  knew  he  had  fallen 
they  rowed  with  all  their  might  against  the  enemy, 
threw  away  their  shields,  slashed  with  both  hands, 
and  cared  not  for  life.  This  heat  and  recklessness, 
however,  proved  soon  a  great  loss  to  them ;  for 
Erling’s  men  saw  the  unprotected  parts  of  their 


3io 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


bodies,  and  where  their  blows  would  have  effect. 
The  greater  part  of  Hakon’s  men  who  remained  fell 
here ;  and  it  was  principally  owing  to  the  want  of 
numbers,  as  they  were  not  enough  to  defend  them¬ 
selves.  They  could  not  get  quarter,  also,  excepting 
those  whom  the  chiefs  took  under  their  protection 
and  bound  themselves  to  pay  ransom  for.  The 
following  of  Hakon’s  people  fell :  Sigurd  Kapa,  Sigurd 
Hiupa,  and  Ragnvald  Kunta ;  but  some  ships’  crews 
got  way,  rowed  into  the  fiords,  and  thus  saved  their 
lives.  Hakon’s  body  was  carried  to  Raumsdal,  and 
buried  there  ;  but  afterwards  his  brother,  King  Sverre, 
had  the  body  transported  north  to  the  merchant 
town  Nidaros,  and  laid  in  the  stone  wall  of  Christ 
church  south  of  the  choir. 


Chatter  VIII.—  Flight  of  the  Chiefs  of  King  Hakon's  Men. 

Earl  Sigurd,  Eindride  Unge,  Onund  Simonson, 
Frirek  Keina,  and  other  chiefs  kept  the  troop  to¬ 
gether,  left  the  ships  in  ftaumsdal,  and  went  up  to 
the  Uplands.  King  Magnus  and  his  father  Erling 
sailed  with  their  troops  north  to  Nidaros  in  Thrond- 
hjem,  and  subdued  the  country  as  they  went  along. 
Erling  called  together  an  Eyra-thing,  at  which  King 
Magnus  was  proclaimed  king  of  all  Norway.  Erling, 
however,  remained  there  but  a  short  time;  for  he 
thought  the  Throndhjem  people  were  not  well  affected 
towards  him  and  his  son.  King  Magnus  was  then 
called  king  of  the  whole  country. 

King  Hakon  had  been  a  handsome  man  in  appear- 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


31 1 

ance,  well  grown,  tall  and  thin ;  but  rather  broad- 
shouldered,  on  which  account  his  men  called  him 
Herdibreid.  As  he  was  young  in  years,  his  lender- 
men  ruled  for  him.  He  was  cheerful  and  friendly 
in  conversation,  playful  and  youthful  in  his  ways, 
and  was  much  liked  by  the  people. 


Chapter  IX. — Of  King  Sigurd's  Beginning. 

There  was  an  Upland  man  called  Markus  of  Skog, 
who  was  a  relation  of  Earl  Sigurd.  Markus  brought 
up  a  son  of  King  Sigurd  Mun,  who  was  also 
called  Sigurd.  This  Sigurd  was  chosen  king  [1162] 
by  the  Upland  people,  by  the  advice  of  Earl  Sigurd 
and  the  other  chiefs  who  had  followed  King  Hakon. 
They  had  now  a  great  army,  and  the  troops  were 
divided  in  two  bodies ;  so  that  Markus  and  the  king 
were  less  exposed  where  there  was  anything  to  do, 
and  Earl  Sigurd  and  his  troop,  along  with  the  lender- 
men,  were  most  in  the  way  of  danger.  They  went 
with  their  troops  mostly  through  the  Uplands,  and 
sometimes  eastwards  to  Viken.  Erling  Skakke  had 
his  son  King  Magnus  always  with  him,  and  he  had 
also  the  whole  fleet  and  the  land  defence  under  him. 
He  was  a  while  in  Bergen  in  autumn  ;  but  went 

from  thence  eastward  to  Viken,  where  he  settled  in 

* 

Tunsberg  for  his  winter  quarters  [1163],  and  col¬ 
lected  in  Viken  all  the  taxes  and  revenues  that  be¬ 
longed  to  Magnus  as  king  ;  and  he  had  many  and 
very  fine  troops.  As  Earl  Sigurd  had  but  a  small 
part  of  the  country,  and  kept  many  men  on  foot,  he 


312 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


soon  was  in  want  of  money ;  and  where  there  was 
no  chief  in  the  neighbourhood  he  had  to  seek  money 
by  unlawful  ways, — sometimes  by  unfounded  accusa¬ 
tions  and  fines,  sometimes  by  open  robbery. 


Chapter  X. — Earl  Sigurd's  Condemnation. 

At  that  time  the  realm  of  Norway  was  in  great 
prosperity.  The  bondes  were  rich  and  powerful,  un¬ 
accustomed  to  hostilities  or  violence,  and  the  oppres¬ 
sion  of  roving  troops  ;  so  that  there  was  soon  a  great 
noise  and  scandal  when  they  were  despoiled  and 
robbed.  The  people  of  Viken  were  very  friendly  to 
Erling  and  King  Magnus,  principally  from  the  popu¬ 
larity  of  the  late  King  Inge  Haraldson  ;  for  the  Viken 
people  had  always  served  under  his  banner.  Erling 
kept  a  guard  in  the  town,  and  twelve  men  were  on 
watch  every  night.  Erling  had  Things  regularly  with 
the  bondes,  at  which  the  misdeeds  of  Sigurd’s  people 
were  often  talked  over ;  and  by  the  representations 
of  Erling  and  his  adherents,  the  bondes  were  brought 
unanimously  to  consider  that  it  would  be  a  great 
good  fortune  if  these  bands  should  be  rooted  out. 
Arne  the  king’s  relation  spoke  wTell  and  long  on  this 
subject,  and  at  last  severely;  and  required  that  all 
who  were  at  the  Thing, — men-at-arms,  bondes,  towns¬ 
men,  and  merchants, — should  come  to  the  resolu¬ 
tion  to  sentence  according  to  law  Earl  Sigurd  and 
all  his  troop,  and  deliver  them  to  Satan,  both  living 
and  dead.  From  the  animosity  and  hatred  of  the 
people,  this  was  agreed  to  by  all ;  and  thus  the  un- 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


3i3 


heard-of  deed  was  adopted  and  confirmed  by  oath,  as 
if  a  judgment  in  the  case  was  delivered  there  by  the 
Thing  according  to  law.  The  priest  Hroald  the 
Long-winded,  who  was  a  very  eloquent  man,  spoke 
in  the  case ;  but  his  speech  was  to  the  same  purpose 
as  that  of  others  who  had  spoken  before.  Erling 
gave  a  feast  at  Yule  in  Tunsberg,  and  paid  the  wages 
of  the  men-at-arms  at  Candlemas. 


Chapter  XI. — Of  Erling. 

Earl  Sigurd  went  with  his  best  troops  down  to 
Yiken,  where  many  people  were  obliged  to  submit  to 
his  superior  force,  and  many  had  to  pay  money.  He 
drove  about  thus  widely  higher  up  the  country,  pene¬ 
trating  into  different  districts.  But  there  were  some 
in  his  troop  who  desired  privately  to  make  peace  with 
Erling ;  but  they  got  back  the  answer,  that  all  who 
asked  for  their  lives  should  obtain  quarter,  but  they 
only  should  get  leave  to  remain  in  the  country  who 
had  not  been  guilty  of  any  great  offences  against 
Erling.  And  when  Sigurd’s  adherents  heard  that 
they  would  not  get  leave  to  remain  in  the  country, 
they  held  together  in  one  body ;  for  there  were  many 
among  them  who  knew  for  certain  that  Erling 
would  look  upon  them  as  guilty  of  offences  against 
him.  Philip  Gyrdson  made  terms  with  Erling,  got 
his  property  back,  and  went  home  to  his  farm ; 
but  soon  after  Sigurd’s  men  came  there,  and  killed 
him.  They  committed  many  crimes  against  each 
other,  and  many  men  were  slain  in  their  mutual 


314 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


persecution  ;  but  here  what  was  committed  by  the 
chiefs  only  is  written  down. 


Chapter  XII. — Erling  gets  News  of  Earl  Sigurd. 

It  was  in  the  beginning  of  Lent  that  news  came  to 
Erling  that  Earl  Sigurd  intended  to  come  upon  him  ; 
and  news  of  him  came  here  and  there,  sometimes 
nearer,  sometimes  farther  off.  Erling  sent  out  spies 
in  all  quarters  around  to  discover  where  they  were. 
Every  evening  he  assembled  all  the  men-at-arms  by 
the  war-horn  out  of  the  town  ;  and  for  a  long  time  in 
the  winter  they  lay  under  arms  all  night,  ready  to 
be  drawn  up  in  array.  At  last  Erling  got  intelligence 
that  Sigurd  and  his  followers  were  not  far  distant, 
up  at  the  farm  He.  Erling  then  began  his  expedition 
out  of  the  town,  and  took  with  him  all  the  towns¬ 
people  who  were  able  to  carry  arms  and  had  arms, 
and  likewise  all  the  merchants ;  and  left  only  twelve 
men  behind  to  keep  watch  in  the  town.  Erling  went 
out  of  the  town  on  Thursday  afternoon,  in  the  second 
week  of  Lent  [February  [9]  ;  and  every  man  had  two 
days’  provisions  with  him.  They  marched  by  night, 
and  it  was  late  before  they  got  out  of  the  town  with 
the  men.  Two  men  were  with  each  shield  and  each 
horse ;  and  the  people,  when  mustered,  were  about 
1300*  men.  When  they  met  their  spies,  they  were 
informed  that  Sigurd  was  at  He,  in  a  house  called 
Hafnnes,  and  had  500+  men.  Then  Erling  called 
together  his  people;  told  them  the  news  he  had 


* 


=  I56°- 


t  =  600. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


3i5 


received ;  and  all  were  eager  to  hasten  their  march, 
fall  on  them  in  the  houses,  or  engage  them  by 
night. 

Erling  replied  to  them  thus  :  “  It  is  probable  that 
we  and  Earl  Sigurd  shall  soon  meet.  There  are  also 
many  men  in  this  band  whose  handy-work  remains 
in  our  memories  ;  such  as  cutting  down  King  Inge, 
and  so  many  more  of  our  friends,  that  it  would  take 
long  to  reckon  them  up.  These  deeds  they  did  by 
the  power  of  Satan,  by  witchcraft,  and  by  villany ; 
for  it  stands  in  our  laws  and  country  rights,  that 
however  highly  a  man  may  have  been  guilty,  it  shall 
be  called  villany  and  cowardly  murder  to  kill  him 
in  the  night.  This  band  has  had  its  luck  hitherto 
by  following  the  counsel  of  men  acquainted  with 
witchcraft  and  fighting  by  night,  and  not  in  the 
light  of  day ;  and  by  this  proceeding  have  they 
been  victorious  hitherto  over  the  chiefs  whose  heads 
they  have  laid  low  on  the  earth.  Now  we  have  often 
seen,  and  proved,  how  unsuitable  and  improper  it  is 
to  go  into  battle  in  the  night-time ;  therefore  let  us 
rather  have  before  our  eyes  the  example  of  chiefs 
better  known  to  us,  and  who  deserve  better  to  be 
imitated,  and  fight  by  open  day  in  regular  battle 
array,  and  not  steal  upon  sleeping  men  in  the  night. 
We  have  people  enough  against  them,  so  few  as 
they  are.  Let  us,  therefore,  wait  for  day  and  day¬ 
light,  and  keep  together  in  our  array  in  case  they 
attack  us.” 

Thereafter  the  whole  army  sat  down.  Some 
opened  up  bundles  of  hay,  and  made  a  bed  of  it 


3 1 6 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


lor  themselves ;  some  sat  upon  their  shields,  and 
thus  waited  the  day-dawn.  The  weather  was  raw, 
and  there  was  a  wet  snow-drift. 


Chapter  XIII.— Of  Bari  Sigurd's  Battle  Array. 

Earl  Sigurd  got  the  first  intelligence  of  Erling’s 
army,  when  it  was  already  near  to  the  house.  His 
men  got  up,  and  armed  themselves  ;  but  not  know¬ 
ing  how  many  men  Erling  had  with  him,  some  were 
inclined  to  fly,  but  the  most  determined  to  stand. 
Earl  Sigurd  was  a  man  of  understanding,  and  could 
talk  well,  but  certainly  was  not  considered  brave 
enough  to  take  a  strong  resolution  ;  and  indeed  the 
earl  showed  a  great  inclination  to  fly,  for  which  he 
got  many  stinging  words  from  his  men-at-arms.  As 
day  dawned,  they  began  on  both  sides  to  draw  up 
their  battle  array.  Earl  Sigurd  placed  his  men  on 
the  edge  of  a  ridge  between  the  river  and  the  house, 
as  a  place  at  which  a  little  stream  runs  into  the 
river.  Erling  and  his  people  placed  their  array  on 
the  other  side  of  the  river ;  but  at  the  back  of  his 
array  were  men  on  horseback  well  armed,  who  had 
the  king  with  them.  When  Earl  Sigurd’s  men  saw 
that  there  was  so  great  a  want  of  men  on  their  side, 
they  held  a  council,  and  were  for  taking  to  the 
forest.  But  Earl  Sigurd  said,  “Ye  alleged  that  I 
had  no  courage,  but  it  will  now  be  proved ;  and  let 
each  of  you  take  care  not  to  fail,  or  fly,  before  I  do 
so.  We  have  a  good  battle-field.  Let  them  cross 
the  bridge ;  but  as  soon  as  the  banner  comes  over  it 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


3*7 


let  us  then  rush  down  the  hill  upon  them,  and  none 
desert  his  neighbour.” 

Earl  Sigurd  had  on  a  red-brown  kirtle,  and  a  red 
cloak,  of  which  the  corners  were  tied  and  turned 
back ;  shoes  on  his  feet ;  and  a  shield  and  sword 
called  Bastard.  The  earl  said,  “  God  knows  that  I 
would  rather  get  at  Erling  Skakke  with  a  stroke 
of  Bastard,  than  receive  much  gold.” 


Chapter  XIY. — Earl  Sigurd's  Fall . 

Erling  Skakke’s  army  wished  to  go  on  to  the  bridge ; 
but  Erling  told  them  to  go  up  along  the  river,  which 
was  small,  and  not  difficult  to  cross,  as  its  banks  were 
flat ;  and  they  did  so.  Earl  Sigurd’s  array  proceeded 
up  along  the  ridge  right  opposite  to  them  ;  but  as  the 
ridge  ended,  and  the  ground  was  good  and  level  over 
the  river,  Erling  told  his  men  to  sing  a  Paternoster, 
and  beg  God  to  give  them  the  victory  who  best  de¬ 
served  it.  Then  they  all  sang  aloud  “  Kyrie  Eleison,” 
and  struck  with  their  weapons  on  their  shields.  But 
with  this  singing  300*  men  of  Erling’s  people  slipped 
away  and  fled.  Then  Erling  and  his  people  went 
across  the  river,  and  the  earl's  men  raised  the  war- 
shout  ;  but  there  was  no  assault  from  the  ridge  down 
upon  Erling’s  array,  but  the  battle  began  upon  the 
hill  itself.  They  first  used  spears,  then  edge  weapons  ; 
and  the  earl’s  banner  soon  retired  so  far  back,  that 
Erling  and  his  men  scaled  the  ridge.  The  battle 
lasted  but  a  short  time  before  the  earl’s  men  fled  to 


*  =  360. 


3 1 8  CHRONICLE  OF  THE 

the  forest,  which  they  had  close  behind  them.  This 
was  told  Earl  Sigurd,  and  his  men  bade  him  fly  ;  but 
he  leplied,  Let  us  on  while  we  can."  And  his 
men  went  bravely  on,  and  cut  down  on  all  sides. 
In  this  tumult  fell  Earl  Sigurd  and  Jon  Sveinson, 
and  nearly  sixty  men.  Erling  lost  few  men,  and 
pursued  the  fugitives  to  the  forest.  There  Erling 
halted  his  troops,  and  turned  back.  lie  came  just 
as  the  king’s  slaves  were  about  stripping  the  clothes 
off  Earl  Sigurd,  who  was  not  quite  lifeless.  He  had 
put  his  sword  in  the  sheath,  and  it  lay  by  his  side. 
Erling  took  it,  struck  the  slaves  with  it,  and  drove 
them  away.  Then  Erling,  with  his  troops,  returned, 
and  sat  down  in  Tunsberg.  Seven  days  after  Earl 
Sigurd’s  fall  Erling’s  men  took  Eindride  tinge 
prisoner,  and  killed  him,  with  all  his  ship’s  crew. 

Chapter  XV.  Of  Markus  of  Skog,  and  King  Sigurd 

Sigurdson. 

Markus  of  Skog,  and  King  Sigurd  his  foster-son, 
rode  down  to  Viken  towards  spring,  and  there  got  a 
ship  ,  but  when  Eiling  heard  it  he  went  eastwards 
against  them,  and  they  met  at  Konungahella.  Markus 
fled  with  his  followers  to  the  island  Hising  ;  and  there 
the  countiy-people  of  Idising  came  down  in  swarms, 
and  placed  themselves  in  Markus’s  and  Sigurd’s  array. 
Erling  and  his  men  rowed  to  the  shore  ;  but  Markus’s 
men  shot  at  them.  Then  Erling  said  to  his  people, 
“Let  us  take  their  ships,  but  not  go  up  to  fight  with 
a  land  force.  The  Hisingers  are  a  bad  set  to  quarrel 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


3i9 


with, — hard,  and  without  understanding.  They  will 
keep  this  troop  but  a  little  while  among  them,  for 
Hising  is  but  a  small  spot.”  This  was  done  :  they 
took  the  ships,  and  brought  them  over  to  Konunga- 
hella.  Markus  and  his  men  went  up  to  the  forest 
districts,  from  which  they  intended  to  make  assaults, 
and  they  had  spies  out  on  both  sides.  Erling  had 
many  men-at-arms  with  him,  whom  he  brought  from 
other  districts,  and  they  made  attacks  on  each  other 
in  turn. 


Chapter  XYI. — Beginning  of  Archbishop  Bystem. 

Eystein,  a  son  of  Erlend  Himalde,  was  selected  to 
be  archbishop,  after  Archbishop  Jon’s  death  ;  and  he 
was  consecrated  the  same  year  King  Inge  was  killed. 
Now  when  Archbishop  Eystein  came  to  his  see,  he 
made  himself  beloved  by  all  the  country,  as  an  ex¬ 
cellent  active  man  of  high  birth.  The  Throndhjem 
people,  in  particular,  received  him  with  pleasure  ;  for 
most  of  the  great  people  in  the  Throndhjem  district 
were  connected  with  the  archbishop  by  relation¬ 
ship  or  other  connection,  and  all  were  bis  friends. 
The  archbishop  brought  forward  a  request  to  the 
bondes  in  a  speech,  in  which  he  set  forth  the  great 
want  of  money  for  the  see,  and  also  how  much 
greater  improvement  of  the  revenues  would  be  neces¬ 
sary  to  maintain  it  suitably,  as  it  was  now  of  much 
more  importance  than  formerly  when  the  bishop’s  see 
was  first  established.  He  requested  of  the  bondes 
that  they  should  give  him,  for  determining  law-suits, 


320 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


an  ore  of  silver  value,  instead  of  what  they  had  be- 
foie  paid,  which  was  an  ore  of  judgment  money,  of 
that  kind  which  was  paid  to  the  king  in  judging 
cases ;  and  the  difference  between  the  two  kinds  of 
ore  was,  that  the  ore  he  desired  was  a  half  greater 
than  the  other.  By  help  of  the  archbishop’s  relations 
and  friends,  and  his  own  activity,  this  was  carried  ; 
and  it  was  fixed  by  law  in  all  the  Throndhjem  dis¬ 
trict,  and  in  all  the  districts  belonging  to  his  arch¬ 
bishopric.* 


Chapter  XVII.— Of  Markus  and  King  Sigurd. 

When  Sigurd  and  Markus  lost  their  ships  in  the 
Gaut  river,  and  saw  they  could  get  no  hold  on  Erling, 
they  went  to  the  Uplands,  and  proceeded  by  land 
noith  to  Ihrondhjem.  Sigurd  was  received  there 
joyfully,  and  chosen  king  at  an  Eyra-thing;  and 
many  gallant  men,  with  their  sons,  attached  them¬ 
selves  to  his  party.  They  fitted  out  ships,  rigged 
them  for  a  voyage,  and  proceeded  when  summer  came 
southwards  to  More,  and  took  up  all  the  royal  revenues 
wheresoever  they  came.  At  this  time  the  following 
lendermen  were  appointed  in  Bergen  for  the  defence 
of  the  country  Nikolas  Sigurdson,  Nokve  Palson, 

*  The  penalties  on  offences  against  the  law,  and  the  fees  for  determining 
cases  m  the  Things,  appear  to  have  been  a  main  source  of  the  revenues  of 
the  kings.  On  the  establishment  of  bishops  there  appear  to  have  been 
bishops  courts  for  judging  of  cases  coming  within  clerical  jurisdiction,  of 
which  the  fees  and  penalties  belonged  to  the  bishopric  revenue.  It  does 
not  appear  that  the  king’s  court  ceased  in  those  districts,  as  in  Thrond- 
hjem,  which  had  bishops  ;  but  only  that  the  fees  and  penalties  in  certain 
cases  belonged  to  the  bishop,  not  to  the  king.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


321 


and  several  military  leaders  ;  as  Thorolf  Dryl,  Thor- 
biorn  Gjaldkere,  and  many  others.  As  Markus  and 
Sigurd  sailed  south,  they  heard  that  Erling’s  men 
were  numerous  in  Bergen  ;  and  therefore  they  sailed 
outside  the  coast-rocks,  and  southwards  past  Bergen. 
It  was  generally  remarked,  that  Markus’s  men  always 
got  a  fair  wind,  wherever  they  wished  to  sail  to. 


Chapter  XVIII. — Markus  and  King  Sigurd  Killed. 

As  soon  as  Erling  Skakke  heard  that  Sigurd  and 
Markus  had  sailed  southwards,  he  hastened  to  Viken, 
and  drew  together  an  armed  force  ;  and  he  soon  had 
a  great  many  men,  and  many  stout  ships.  But  when 
he  came  farther  in  Viken,  he  met  with  a  strong  con¬ 
trary  wind,  which  kept  him  there  in  port  the  whole 
summer.  Now  when  Sigurd  and  Markus  came  east 
to  Lister,  they  heard  that  Erling  had  a  great  force 
in  Viken  ;  so  they  turned  to  the  north  again.  But 
when  they  reached  Hordaland,  with  the  intention 
of  sailing  to  Bergen,  and  came  opposite  the  town, 
Nikolas  and  his  men  rowed  out  against  them,  with 
more  men  and  larger  ships  than  they  had.  Sigurd 
and  Markus  saw  no  other  way  of  escaping  but  to 
row  away  southwards.  Some  of  them  went  out  to  sea, 
others  got  south  to  the  sound,  and  some  got  into  the 
Fiords.  Markus,  and  some  people  with  him,  sprang 
upon  an  isle  called  Skarpa.  Nikolas  and  his  men 
took  their  ships,  gave  Jon  Halkelson  and  a  few 
others  quarter,  but  killed  the  most  of  them  they 
could  get  hold  of.  Some  days  after  Eindride 

VOL.  IV.  X 


322 


CHEONICLE  OF  THE 


Heidafylja  found  Sigurd  and  Markus,  and  they  were 
brought  to  Bergen.  Sigurd  was  beheaded  outside  of 
Grafdal,  and  Markus  and  another  man  were  hanged 
at  Hvarfsnes.  This  took  place  on  Michaelmas  day 
[September  29,  1163],  and  the  band  which  had  fol¬ 
lowed  them  was  dispersed. 


Chapter  XIX. — Of  Erling  and  the  People  of  Hising  Isle. 

Frirek  Iveina  and  Biarne  the  Bad,  Onund  Simon¬ 
son  and  Ornolf  Skorpa,  had  rowed  out  to  sea  with 
some  ships,  and  sailed  outside  along  the  land  to 
the  east.  Wheresoever  they  came  to  the  land  they 
plundered,  and  killed  Erling’s  friends.  Now  when 
Erling  heard  that  Sigurd  and  Markus  were  killed,  he 
gave  leave  to  the  lendermen  and  people  of  the  levy  to 
return  home  ;  but  he  himself,  with  his  men,  set  his 
course  eastward  across  the  Folden  fiord,*  for  he  heard 
of  Markus’s  men  there.  Erling  sailed  to  Konunga- 
hella,  where  he  remained  the  autumn  ;  and  in  the  first 
week  of  winter  Erling  went  out  to  the  island  Hising 
with  his  men,  and  called  the  bondes  to  a  Thing. 
When  the  Hising  people  came  to  the  Thing,  Erling 
laid  his  law- suit  against  them  for  having  joined  the 
bands  of  Sigurd  and  Markus,  and  having  raised  men 
against  him.  Ozur  was  the  name  of  one  of  the  greatest 
of  the  bondes  on  the  island,  and  he  answered  Erling 
on  account  of  the  others.  The  Thing  was  long  assem¬ 
bled  ;  but  at  the  close  the  bonds  gave  the  case  into 
Erling’s  own  power,  and  he  appointed  a  meeting  in 

Folden  fiord  was  the  mouth  of  Christiania  fiord. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


323 


the  town  within  one  week,  and  named  fifteen  bondes 
who  should  appear  there.  When  they  came,  he  con¬ 
demned  them  to  pay  a  penalty  of  300  head  of  cattle  ; 
and  the  bondes  returned  home  ill  pleased  at  this 
sentence.  Soon  after  the  Gaut  river  was  frozen,  and 
Erling’ s  ships  were  fast  in  the  ice  ;  and  the  bondes 
kept  back  the  mulct,  and  lay  assembled  for  some 
time.  Erling  made  a  Yule  feast  in  the  town  ;  but 
the  Hising  people  had  joint-feasts  with  each  other, 
and  kept  under  arms  during  Yule.  The  night  after 
the  fifth  day  of  Yule  Erling  went  up  to  Hising, 
surrounded  Ozur’s  house,  and  burnt  him  in  it.  He 
killed  one  hundred  men  in  all,  burnt  three  houses,  and 
then  returned  to  Konungaliella.  The  bondes  came 
then,  according  to  agreement,  to  pay  the  mulct. 


Chapter  XX. — Of  the  Death  of  Frirek  Keina  and  Biarne. 

Erling  Skakke  made  ready  to  sail  in  spring  as  soon 
as  he  could  get  his  ships  afloat  for  ice,  and  sailed 
from  Konungahella ;  for  he  heard  that  those  who 
had  formerly  been  Markus’s  friends  were  marauding 
in  the  north  of  Viken.  Erling  sent  out  spies  to 
learn  their  doings,  searched  for  them,  and  found 
them  lying  in  a  harbour.  Onund  Simonson  and 
Ornolf  Skarpa  escaped,  but  Frirek  Keina  and  Biarne 
the  Bad  were  taken,  and  many  of  their  followers 
were  killed.  Erling  had  Frirek  bound  to  an  anchor 
and  thrown  overboard  ;  and  for  that  deed  Erling  was 
much  detested  in  the  Throndhjem  country,  for  the 
most  powerful  men  there  were  relatives  of  Frirek. 


324 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Erling  ordered  Biarne  the  Bad  to  be  hanged  ;  and 
he  uttered,  according  to  his  custom,  many  dread¬ 
ful  imprecations  during  his  execution.  Thorbiorn 
Skakkaskald  tells  of  this  business  : — 

“  East  of  the  Fiord  beyond  the  land, 

Unnoticed  by  the  pirate  band, 

Erling  stole  on  them  ere  they  knew, 

And  seized  and  killed  all  Keina’s  crew. 

Keina,  fast  to  an  anchor  bound, 

Was  thrown  into  the  deep-blue  Sound  ; 

And  Biarne  swung  high  on  gallows-tree, 

A  sight  all  good  men  loved  to  see.” 

Onund  and  Ornolf,  with  the  band  that  had  escaped, 
fled  to  Denmark ;  but  were  sometimes  in  Gautland, 
or  in  Viken. 


Chapter  XXL — Conference  between  Erling  Skakke  and 

Archbishop  Ey stein. 

Erling  Skakke  sailed  after  this  to  Tunsberg,  and 
remained  there  very  long  in  spring  [i  164]  ;  but  when 
summer  came  he  proceeded  north  to  Bergen,  where 
at  that  time  a  great  many  people  were  assembled. 
There  was  the  legate  from  Rome,  Stephanus ;  the 
Archbishop  Ey  stein,  and  other  bishops  of  the  country. 
There  was  also  Bishop  Brand,  who  was  consecrated 
bishop  of  Iceland,  and  Jon  Loptson,  a  daughters 
son  of  King  Magnus  Barefoot ;  and  on  this  occasion 
King  Magnus  and  Jon’s  other  relations  acknow¬ 
ledged  the  relationship  with  him. 

Archbishop  Eystein  and  Erling  Skakke  often  con¬ 
versed  together  in  private  ;  and,  among  other  things, 
Erling  asked  one  day,  “Is  it  true,  sir,  what  people 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


3^5 


tell  me, — that  you  have  raised  the  value  of  the  ore 
upon  the  people  north  in  Throndhjem,  in  the  law 
cases  in  which  money-fees  are  paid  you  ?  ” 

“  It  is  so,”  said  the  archbishop,  “  that  the  bondes 
have  allowed  me  an  advance  on  the  ore  of  law  casual¬ 
ties  ;  but  they  did  it  willingly,  and  without  any  kind 
of  compulsion,  and  have  thereby  added  to  their 
honour  for  God  and  the  income  of  the  bishopric.” 

Erling  replies,  “  Is  this  according  to  the  law  of 
the  holy  Olaf?  or  have  you  gone  to  work  more 
arbitrarily  in  this  than  is  written  down  in  the  law¬ 
book  ?  ” 

The  archbishop  replies,  “  King  Olaf  the  Holy  fixed 
the  laws,  to  which  he  received  the  consent  and 
affirmative  of  the  people  ;  but  it  will  not  be  found  in 
his  laws  that  it  is  forbidden  to  increase  God’s  right.” 

Erling :  “If  you  augment  your  right,  you  must 
assist  us  to  augment  as  much  the  king’s  right.” 

The  archbishop  :  “  Thou  hast  already  augmented 
enough  thy  son’s  power  and  dominion  ;  and  if  I  have 
exceeded  the  law  in  taking  an  increase  of  the  ore 
from  the  Throndhjem  people,  it  is,  I  think,  a  much 
greater  breach  of  the  law  that  one  is  king  over  the 
country  who  is  not  a  king’s  son,  and  which  has 
neither  any  support  in  the  law,  nor  in  any  precedent 
here  in  the  country.” 

Erling :  “  When  Magnus  was  chosen  king,  it  was 
done  with  your  knowledge  and  consent,  and  also  of 
all  the  other  bishops  here  in  the  country.” 

Archbishop:  “You  promised  then,  Erling,  that 
provided  we  gave  you  our  consent  to  electing  Magnus 


326 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


king,  you  would,  on  all  occasions,  and  with  all  your 
power,  strengthen  God’s  rights.” 

Erling  :  “  I  may  well  admit  that  I  have  promised 
to  preserve  and  strengthen  God’s  commands  and  the 
laws  of  the  land  with  all  my  power,  and  with  the 
king’s  strength  ;  and  now  I  consider  it  to  be  much 
more  advisable,  instead  of  accusing  each  other  of  a 
breach  of  our  promises,  to  hold  firmly  by  the  agree¬ 
ment  entered  into  between  us.  Do  you  strengthen 
Magnus  in  his  dominion,  according  to  what  you  have 
promised ;  and  I  will,  on  my  part,  strengthen  your 
power  in  all  that  can  be  of  advantage  or  honour.” 

The  conversation  now  took  a  more  friendly  turn ; 
and  Erling  said,  “Although  Magnus  was  not  chosen 
king  according  to  what  has  been  the  old  custom  of 
this  country,  yet  can  you  with  your  power  give  him 
consecration  as  king,  as  God’s  law  prescribes,  by 
anointing  the  king  to  sovereignty ;  and  although  I 
be  neither  a  king,  nor  of  kingly  race,  yet  most  of  the 
kings,  within  my  recollection,  have  not  known  the 
laws  or  the  constitution  of  the  country  so  well  as  I 
do.  Besides,  the  mother  of  King  Magnus  is  the 
daughter  of  a  king  and  queen  born  in  lawful  wed¬ 
lock,  and  Magnus  is  son  of  a  queen  and  a  lawfully 
married  wife.  Now  if  you  will  give  him  royal  con¬ 
secration,  no  man  can  take  royalty  from  him.  William 
Bastard  was  not  a  king’s  son;  but  he  was  conse¬ 
crated  and  crowned  king  of  England,  and  the  royalty 
in  England  has  ever  since  remained  with  his  race, 
and  all  have  been  crowned.  Svein  Ulfson  was  not  a 
king’s  son  in  Denmark,  and  still  he  was  a  crowned 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


327 


king,  and  liis  sons  likewise,  and  <xl  1  liis  descendants, 
have  been  crowned  kings.  Now  we  have  here  in 
Norway  an  archiepiscopal  seat,  to  the  glory  and 
honour  of  the  country  ;  let  us  also  have  a  crowned 
king,  as  well  as  the  Danes  and  Englishmen. 

Erling  and  the  archbishop  afterwards  talked  olten 
of  this  matter,  and  they  were  quite  agreed.  Then 
the  archbishop  brought  the  business  before  the  legate, 
and  got  him  easily  persuaded  to  give  his  consent. 
Thereafter  the  archbishop  called  together  the  bishops, 
and  other  learned  men,  and  explained  the  subject  to 
them.  They  all  replied  in  the  same  terms,  that  they 
would  follow  the  counsels  of  the  archbishop,  and  all 
were  eager  to  promote  the  consecration  as  soon  as 
the  archbishop  pleased. 


Chapter  XXII. — King  Magnus's  Consecration. 

Erling  Skakke  then  had  a  great  feast  prepared  in 
the  kings  house.  The  large  hall  was  covered  with 
costly  cloth  and  tapestry,  and  adorned  with  great 
expense.  The  court-men  and  all  the  attendants  were 
there  entertained,  and  there  were  numerous  guests, 
and  many  chiefs.  Then  King  Magnus  received  the 
royal  consecration  from  the  Archbishop  Eystein  ;  and 
at  the  consecration  there  were  five  other  bishops  and 
the  legate,  besides  a  number  of  other  clergy.  Erling 
Skakke,  and  with  him  twelve  other  lendermen, 
administered  to  the  king  the  oath  of  the  law ;  and 
the  day  of  the  consecration  the  king  and  Erling  had 
the  legate,  the  archbishop,  and  all  the  other  bishops 


328 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


as  guests  ;  and  the  feast  was  exceedingly  magnificent, 
and  the  father  and  son  distributed  many  great  pre¬ 
sents.  King  Magnus  was  then  eight  years  of  age, 
and  had  been  king  for  three  years. 


Chapter  XXIII. — King  Voldemar s  Embassy. 

M  hen  the  Danish  king  Yaldemar  heard  the  news 
from  Norway  that  Magnus  was  become  king  of  the 
whole  country,  and  all  the  other  parties  in  the  country 
were  rooted  out,  he  sent  his  men  with  a  letter  to  King 
Magnus  and  Eiling,  and  reminded  them  of  the  agree¬ 
ment  which  Erling  had  entered  into,  under  oath,  with 
King  A  aldemai,  of  which  we  have  spoken  before  ; 
namely,  that  \  iken  from  the  east  to  Rygiarbit  should 
be  ceded  to  King  Yaldemar,  if  Magnus  became  the 
sole  king  of  Norway.  When  the  ambassadors  came 
forward  and  showed  Erling  the  letter  of  the  Danish 
king,  and  he  heard  the  Danish  king’s  demand  upon 
Noiway,  he  laid  it  before  the  other  chiefs  by  whose 
counsels  he  usually  covered  his  acts.  All,  as  one  man, 
leplied  that  the  Danes  should  never  hold  the  slightest 
portion  of  Norway ;  for  never  had  times  been  worse 
in  the  land  than  when  the  Danes  had  power  in  it. 
Ihe  ambassadors  of  the  Danish  king  were  urgent 
with  Erling  for  an  answer,  and  desired  to  have  it 
decidedly  ;  but  Erling  begged  them  to  proceed  with 
him  east  to  \  iken,  and  said  he  would  give  his  final 
answer  when  he  had  met  with  the  men  of  most 
understanding  and  influence  in  Yiken. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


329 


Chapter  XXIV. —  Of  Erling  and  the  People  of  Vikcn. 

Eiiing  Skakke  proceeded  in  autumn  to  Viken,  and 
stayed  in  Tunsberg,  from  whence  he  sent  people  to 
Sarpsborg  to  summon  a  Thing  *  of  four  districts  ;  and 
then  Erling  went  there  with  his  people. 

When  the  Thing  was  seated  Erling  made  a  speech 
in  which  he  explained  the  resolutions  which  had  been 
settled  upon  between  him  and  the  Danish  king,  the 
first  time  he  collected  troops  against  his  enemies.  “  I 
will,”  said  Eiiing,  “keep  faithfully  the  agreement 
which  we  then  entered  into  with  the  king,  if  it  be 
your  will  and  consent,  bondes,  rather  to  serve  the 
Danish  king  than  the  king  who  is  now  consecrated 
and  crowned  king  of  this  country.” 

The  bondes  replied  thus  to  Erling’s  speech  :  “  Never 
will  we  become  the  Danish  king’s  men,  as  long  as  one 
of  us  Viken  men  is  in  life.”  And  the  whole  assembly, 
with  shouts  and  cries,  called  on  Eiiing  to  keep  the 
oath  he  had  taken  to  defend  his  son’s  dominions, 
“  should  we  even  all  follow  thee  to  battle.”  And  so 
the  Thing  was  dissolved. 

The  ambassadors  of  the  Danish  king  then  returned 
home,  and  told  the  issue  of  their  errand.  The  Danes 
abused  Erling,  and  all  Northmen,  and  declared  that 
evil  only  proceeded  from  them  ;  and  the  report  was 
spread,  that  in  spring  the  Danish  king  would  send 
out  an  army  and  lay  waste  Norway.  Eiiing  returned 

*  This  reference  to  a  Thing  of  the  people  in  the  affairs  of  the  country  is 
a  striking  example  of  the  right  of  the  Things  being  recognised,  in  theory 
at  least,  as  fully  as  the  right  of  our  parliaments  in  later  times. — L. 


330 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


iii  autumn  north  to  Bergen,  stayed  there  all  winter, 
and  gave  their  pay  to  his  people. 


Chapter  XXAr. — Of  the  Letters  of  the  Throndhjem  People. 

The  same  winter  [i  165]  some  Danish  people  came 
hy  land  through  the  Uplands,  saying  they  were  to  go,  as 
was  then  the  general  practice,  to  the  holy  King  Olaf  s 
festival.  But  when  they  came  to  the  Throndhjem 
country,  they  went  to  many  men  of  influence,  and 
told  their  business  ;  which  was,  that  the  Danish  king 
had  sent  them  to  desire  their  friendship,  and  consent, 
if  he  came  to  the  country,  promising  them  both  power 
and  money.  With  this  verbal  message  came  also  the 
Danish  king’s  letter  and  seal,  and  a  message  to  the 
Throndhjem  people  that  they  should  send  back  their 
letters  and  seals  to  him.  f  hey  did  so,  and  the  most 
of  them  received  well  the  Danish  king’s  message  ; 
whereupon  the  messengers  returned  back  towards 
Lent.  Erling  was  in  Bergen  ;  and  towards  spring 
Erling  s  friends  told  him  the  loose  reports  they  had 
heard  by  some  merchant  vessels  that  had  arrived  from 
Ihiondhjem,  that  the  'Ihrondhjem  people  were  in 
hostility  openly  against  him  ;  and  had  declared  that 
if  Erling  came  to  Throndhjem,  he  should  never  pass 
Agdanes  in  life.  Erling  said  this  was  mere  folly  and 
idle  talk.  Erling  now  made  it  known  that  he  would 
go  to  Unarheim  to  the  Gangdag-thing  ;  *  and  ordered 
a  cutter  of  twenty  rowing  benches  to  be  fitted  out,  a 

Gangdag-thing— a  Thing  held  on  the  procession  days  in  Ascension 
week. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


33i 


boat  of  fifteen  benches,  and  a  provision-ship.  When 
the  vessels  were  ready,  there  came  a  strong  southerly 
gale.  On  the  Thursday  of  the  Ascension  week,  Erling 
called  his  people  by  sound  of  trumpet  to  their  depar¬ 
ture  ;  but  the  men  were  loath  to  leave  the  town,  and 
were  ill  inclined  to  row  against  the  wind.  Erling 
brought  his  vessels  to  Byskupshafn.  “Well,”  said 
Erling,  “  since  ye  are  so  unwilling  to  row  against  the 
wind,  raise  the  mast,  hoist  the  sails,  and  let  the  ship 
go  north.”  They  did  so,  and  sailed  northwards  both 
day  and  night.  On  Wednesday,  in  the  evening,  they 
sailed  in  past  Agdanes,  where  they  found  a  fleet  as¬ 
sembled  of  many  merchant  vessels,  rowing  craft,  and 
boats,  all  going  towards  the  town  to  the  celebration 
of  the  festival, — some  before  them,  some  behind 
them  ;  so  that  the  townspeople  paid  no  attention  to 
the  long-ships  coming. 


Chapter  XXVI. — Of  Erling  and  the  People  of  Throndhjem. 

Erling  came  to  the  town  just  as  vespers  was  being 
sung  in  Christ  church.  He  and  his  men  ran  into  the 
town,  to  where  it  was  told  them  that  the  lenderman 
Alf  Bode,  a  son  of  Ottar  Birting,  was  still  sitting  at 
table,  and  drinking  with  his  men.  Erling  fell  upon 
them  ;  and  Alf  was  killed,  with  almost  all  his  men. 
Few  other  men  were  killed ;  for  they  had  almost  all 
gone  to  church,  as  this  was  the  night  before  Christ’s 
Ascension-day.  In  the  morning  early,  Erling  called 
all  the  people  by  sound  of  trumpet  to  a  Thing  out 
upon  Eyrar.  At  the  Thing  Erling  laid  a  charge 


33  2 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


against  the  Ihrondhjem  people,  accusing  them  of 
intending  to  betray  the  country,  and  take  it  from  the 
king ;  and  named  Bard  Standale,  Pal  Andreason,  and 
Razabard,  who  then  presided  over  the  town’s  affairs, 
and  many  others.  They,  in  their  defence,  denied  the 
accusation  ;  but  Erling’s  writer  stood  up,  produced 
many  letteis  with  seals,  and  asked  if  they  acknow¬ 
ledged  their  seals  which  they  had  sent  to  the  Danish 
king ;  and  thereupon  the  letters  were  read.  There 
was  also  a  Danish  man  with  Erling  who  had  gone 
with  the  letters  in  winter,  and  whom  Erling  for  that 
purpose  had  taken  into  his  service.  He  told  to 
these  men  the  very  words  which  each  of  them  had 
used.  And  you,  Razabard,  spoke,  striking  your 
breast ;  and  the  very  words  you  used  were,  ‘  Out  of 
this  breast  are  all  these  counsels  produced.’  ”  Bard 
replied,  “  I  was  wrong  in  the  head,  sirs,  when  I  spoke 
so.  I  here  was  now  nothing  to  be  done  but  to 

submit  the  case  entirely  to  the  sentence  Erling  might 
give  upon  it.  lie  took  great  sums  of  money  from 
many  as  fines,  and  condemned  all  those  who  had 
been  killed  as  lawless,  and  their  deeds  as  lawless  ; 
making  their  deaths  thereby  not  subject  to  mulct. 
Then  Erling  returned  south  to  Bergen. 


Chapter  XXVII.— Of  King  Vccldemar’s  Expedition  to  Norway. 

The  Danish  king  Vaidemar  assembled  in  spring 
[i  165]  a  gieat  army,  and  proceeded  with  it  north  to 
Viken.  As  soon  as  he  reached  the  dominions  of  the 
king  of  Norway,  the  bondes  assembled  in  a  great 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


333 


multitude.  The  king  advanced  peacefully  ;  but  when 
they  came  to  the  mainland,  the  people  shot  at  them 
even  when  there  were  only  two  or  three  together, 
from  which  the  ill-will  of  the  country-people  towards 
them  was  evident.  When  they  came  to  Tunsberg, 
King  Valdemar  summoned  a  Hauga-thing  ;  but  no¬ 
body  attended  it  from  the  country  parts.  Then 
Valdemar  spoke  thus  to  his  troops  :  “  It  is  evident 
that  all  the  country-people  are  against  us  ;  and  now 
we  have  two  things  to  choose  :  the  one  to  go  through 
the  country,  sword  in  hand,  sparing  neither  man  nor 
beast  ;  the  other  is  to  go  back  without  effecting  our 
object.  And  it  is  more  my  inclination  to  go  with 
the  army  to  the  East  against  the  heathens,  of  whom 
we  have  enough  before  us  in  the  East  country,  than 
to  kill  Christian  people  here,  although  they  have 
well  deserved  it.”  All  the  others  had  a  greater 
desire  for  a  foray  ;  but  the  king  ruled,  and  they  all 
returned  back  to  Denmark  without  ejecting  their 
purpose.  They  pillaged,  however,  all  around  in  the 
distant  islands,  or  where  the  king  was  not  in  the 
neighbourhood.  They  then  returned  south  to  Den¬ 
mark  without  doing  anything. 


Chapter  XXVIII. — Of  Exlinfs  Expedition  to  Jutland. 

As  soon  as  Erling  heard  that  a  Danish  force  had 
come  to  Viken,  he  ordered  a  levy  through  all  the 
land,  both  of  men  and  ships,  so  that  there  was  a  great 
assemblage  of  men  in  arms  ;  and  with  this  force  he 
proceeded  eastward  along  the  coast.  But  when  he 


334 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


came  to  Lidandisnes,  he  heard  that  the  Danish  army 
had  returned  south  to  Denmark,  after  plundering  all 
around  them  in  Viken.  Then  Erling  gave  all  the 
people  of  the  levy  permission  to  return  home  ;  but  he 
himself  and  some  lendermen,  with  many  vessels,  sailed 
to  Jutland  after  the  Danes.  When  they  came  to  a 
place  called  Dyrsa,  the  Danes  who  had  returned  from 
the  expedition  lay  there  with  many  ships.  Erling 
gave  them  battle,  and  there  was  a  fight,  in  which  the 
Danes  soon  tied  with  the  loss  of  many  people  ;  and 
Erling  and  his  men  plundered  the  ships  and  the 
town,  and  made  a  great  booty,  with  which  they  re¬ 
turned  to  Norway.  Thereafter,  for  a  time,  there  was 
hostility  between  Norway  and  Denmark. 


Chapter  XXIX.— Of  Erling  s  Expedition  to  Denmark. 

file  princess  Kristin  went  south  in  autumn 
[1165]  to  Denmark,  to  visit  her  relation  King  Val- 
demar,  who  was  her  cousin.  The  king  received  her 
kindly,  and  gave  her  fiefs  in  his  kingdom,  so  that 
she  could  support  her  household  well.  She  often 
conversed  with  the  king,  who  was  remarkably  kind 
towards  her.  In  the  spring  following  [1166]  Kris¬ 
tin  sent  to  Erling,  and  begged  him  to  pay  a  visit  to 
the  Danish  king,  and  enter  into  a  peace  with  him. 
In  summer  Erling  was  in  Viken,  where  he  fitted  out 
a  long-ship,  manned  it  with  his  finest  lads,  and  sailed 
(a  single  ship)  over  to  Jutland.  When  he  heard 
that  the  Danish  king  Valdemar  was  in  Randaros,* 

Randaros — town  of  Randers  in  North  Jutland.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


335 


Erling  sailed  thither,  and  came  to  the  town  just  as 
the  king  sat  at  the  dinner-table,  and  most  of  the 
people  were  taking  their  meal.  When  his  people 
had  made  themselves  ready  according  to  Erling’s 
orders,  set  up  the  ship-tents,  and  made  fast  the  ship, 
Erling  landed  with  twelve  men,  all  in  armour,  with 
hats  over  their  helmets,  and  swords  under  their  cloaks. 
They  went  to  the  king’s  lodging,  where  the  doors 
stood  open,  and  the  dishes  were  being  carried  in. 
Erling  and  his  people  went  in  immediately,  and  drew 
up  in  front  of  the  high-seat.  Erling  said,  “  Peace 
and  safe  conduct  we  desire,  king,  both  here  and  to 
return  home.” 

The  king  looked  at  him,  and  said,  “  Art  thou 
here,  Erling  ?  ” 

He  replies,  “  Here  is  Erling  ;  and  tell  us,  at  once, 
if  we  shall  have  peace  and  safe  conduct.  ” 

There  were  eighty  of  the  king’s  men  in  the  room, 
but  all  unarmed.  The  king  replies,  “  Peace  ye  shall 
have,  Erling,  according  to  thy  desire  ;  for  I  will  not 
use  force  or  villany  against  a  man  who  comes  to 
visit  me.” 

Erling  then  kissed  the  king’s  hand,  went  out,  and 
down  to  his  ship.  Erling  stayed  at  Randaros  some 
time  with  the  king,  and  they  talked  about  terms  of 
peace  between  them  and  between  the  countries. 
They  agreed  that  Erling  should  remain  as  hostage 
with  the  Danish  king  ;  and  that  Asbiom  Snara, 
Bishop  Ab salon’s  brother,  should  go  to  Norway  as 
hostage  on  the  other  part. 


336 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


Chapter  XXX. — Conversation  between  King  Voldemar  and 

Erling. 

In  a  conference  which  King  Valdemar  and  Erling 
once  had  together,  Erling  said,  “  Sire,  it  appears  to 
me  likely  that  it  might  lead  to  a  peace  between  the 
countries  if  you  got  that  part  of  Norway  which  was 
promised  you  in  our  agreement ;  but  if  it  should  be 
so,  what  chief  would  you  place  over  it  ?  Would  he 
be  a  Dane  ?  ” 

No,  replied  the  king;  “no  Danish  chief  would 
go  to  Norway,  where  he  would  have  to  manage  an 
obstinate  hard  people,  when  he  has  it  so  easy  here 
with  me.” 

Erling  :  “  It  was  on  that  very  consideration  that  I 
came  here  ;  lor  I  would  not  on  any  account  in  the 
world  deprive  myself  of  the  advantage  of  your  friend¬ 
ship.  In  days  ol  old  other  men,  Hakon  Ivarson  and 
I  in  Arnason,  came  also  from  Norway  to  Denmark, 
and  your  predecessor  King  Svein  made  them  both 
earls.  Now  I  am  not  a  man  of  less  power  in  Norway 
than  they  were  then,  and  my  influence  is  not  less 
than  theiis  ;  and  the  king  gave  them  the  province 
ol  Iialland  to  rule  over,  which  he  himself  had  and 
owned  before.  Now  it  appears  to  me,  sire,  that  you, 
if  I  become  your  man  and  vassal,  can  allow  me  to 
hold  of  you  the  lief  which  my  son  Magnus  will  not 
deny  me,  by  which  I  will  be  bound  in  duty,  and  ready, 
to  undertake  all  the  service  belonging  to  that  title.” 

Erling  spoke  such  things,  and  much  more  in  the 
same  strain,  until  it  came  at  last  to  this,  that  Erling 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


337 


became  Valdemar’s  man  and  vassal  ;  and  the  king  led 
Erling  to  the  earl’s  seat  one  day,  and  gave  him  the 
title  of  earl,  and  Viken  as  a  fief  under  his  rule.  Earl 
Erling  went  thereafter  to  Norway,  and  was  earl  after¬ 
wards  as  long  as  he  lived  ;  and  also  the  peace  with 
the  Danish  king  was  afterwards  always  well  preserved. 
Earl  Erling  had  four  sons  by  his  concubines.  The 
one  was  called  Hreidar,  the  next  Ogmund  ;  and  these 
by  two  different  mothers  :  the  third  was  called  Fin  ; 
the  fourth  Sigurd  :  these  were  younger,  and  their 
mother  was  Asa  the  Fair.  The  princess  Kristin 
and  Earl  Erling  had  a  daughter  called  Ragnhild, 
who  was  married  to  Jon  Thorbergson  of  Randaberg. 
Kristin  went  away  from  the  country  with  a  man 
called  Grim  Rusle  ;  and  they  went  to  Constantinople, 
where  they  were  for  a  time,  and  had  some  children. 


Chapter  XXXI. — Beginning  of  Olcif. 

Olaf,  a  son  of  Gudbrand  Skafhaug,  and  Maria,  a 
daughter  of  King  Eystein  Magnuson,  were  brought 
up  in  the  house  of  Sigurd  Agnhot  in  the  Uplands. 
While  Earl  Erling  was  in  Denmark  [1166],  Olaf 
and  his  foster-father  gathered  a  troop  together,  and 
many  Upland  people  joined  them  ;  and  Olaf  was 
chosen  king  by  them.  They  went  with  their  bands 
through  the  Uplands,  and  sometimes  down  to  Viken, 
and  sometimes  east  to  the  forest  settlements  ;  but 
never  came  on  board  of  ships.  Now  when  Earl 
Erling  got  news  of  this  troop,  he  hastened  to  Viken 
with  his  forces ;  and  was  there  in  summer  in  his 

VOL.  IV.  Y 


338 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


ships,  and  in  Oslo  in  autumn  [1167]  and  kept  Yule 
there.  He  had  spies  up  the  country  after  this  troop, 
and  went  himself,  along  with  Orm  the  Iving-brother, 
up  the  country  to  follow  them.  Now  when  they 

came  to  a  lake  called . *  they  took  all  the 

vessels  that  were  upon  the  lake. 


Chapter  XXXII. — Of  Erling. 

The  priest  who  performed  divine  service  at  a  place 
called  Rydiokul,  close  by  the  lake,  invited  the  earl  to 
a  feast  at  Candlemas.  The  earl  promised  to  come  ; 
and  thinking  it  would  be  good  to  hear  mass  there,  he 
rowed  with  his  attendants  over  the  lake  the  night 
before  Candlemas  day.  But  the  priest  had  another 
plan  on  hand.  He  sent  men  to  bring  Olaf  news  of 
Earl  Erling  s  arrival.  The  priest  gave  Erling  strong 
diink  in  the  evening,  and  let  him  have  an  excessive 
quantity  of  it.  When  the  earl  wished  to  lie  down 
and  sleep,  the  beds  were  made  ready  in  the  drinking- 
room  ;  but  when  they  had  slept  a  short  time  the  earl 
aw  oke,  and  asked  if  it  was  not  the  hour  for  matins. 
The  priest  replied,  that  only  a  small  part  of  the  night 
was  gone,  and  told  him  to  sleep  in  peace.  The  earl 
replied,  “  I  dream  of  many  things  to-night,  and  I 
sleep  ill.”  He  slumbered  again,  but  awoke  soon,  and 
told  the  priest  to  get  up  and  sing  mass.  The  priest 
told  the  earl  to  sleep,  and  said  it  was  but  midnight. 
Then  the  earl  again  lay  down,  slept  a  little  while, 
and,  springing  out  of  bed,  ordered  his  men  to  put 
on  their  clothes.  They  did  so  ;  took  their  weapons, 

The  name  of  the  lake  not  given. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


339 


went  to  the  church,  and  laid  their  arms  outside  while 
the  priest  was  singing  matins. 


Chapter  XXXIII. — Battle  at  Rydiokul. 

As  Olaf  got  the  message  in  the  evening,  they 
travelled  in  the  night  six  miles/'  which  people  con¬ 
sidered  an  extraordinarily  long  march.  They  arrived 
at  Rydiokul  while  the  priest  was  still  singing  mass, 
and  it  was  pitch-dark.  Olaf  and  his  men  went  into 
the  room,  raised  a  war-shout,  and  killed  some  of  the 
earl’s  men  who  had  not  gone  to  the  early  mass.  Now 
when  Erling  and  his  men  heard  the  war-shout,  they 
ran  to  their  weapons,  and  hastened  down  to  their 
ships.  Olaf  and  his  men  met  them  at  a  fence,  at 
which  there  was  a  sharp  conflict.  Erling  and  his 
men  retreated  along  the  fence,  which  protected  them. 
Erling  had  far  fewer  men,  and  many  of  them  had 
fallen,  and  still  more  were  wounded.  What  helped 
Earl  Erling  and  his  men  the  most  was,  that  Olaf’s 
men  could  not  distinguish  them,  it  was  so  dark  ;  and 
the  earl’s  men  were  always  drawing  down  to  their 
ships.  Are  Thorgeirson,  father  of  Bishop  Gudmund, 
fell  there,  and  many  other  of  Erling’s  court-men. 
Erling  himself  was  wounded  in  the  left  side  ;  but  some 
say  he  did  it  himself  in  drawing  his  sword.  Orm  the 
King-brother  was  also  severely  wounded  ;  and  with 
great  difficulty  they  escaped  to  their  ships,  and  in¬ 
stantly  pushed  off  from  land.  It  was  generally  con¬ 
sidered  as  a  most  unlucky  meeting  for  Olaf’s  people, 

*  About  forty-three  English  miles. — L. 


340 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


as  Earl  Erling  was  in  a  manner  sold  into  their  hands, 
if  they  had  proceeded  with  common  prudence.  He 
was  afterwards  called  Olaf  the  Unlucky ;  but  others 
called  his  people  Hat-lads.  They  went  with  their 
bands  through  the  Uplands  as  before.  Erling  again 
went  down  to  Viken  to  his  ships,  and  remained  there 
all  summer.  Olaf  was  in  the  Uplands,  and  some¬ 
times  east  in  the  forest  districts,  where  he  and  his 
troop  remained  all  the  next  winter  [i  168]. 


Chapter  XXXIV. —  Battle  at  Stangar. 

The  following  spring  the  Hat-lads  went  down  to 
^  iken,  and  raised  the  king’s  taxes  all  around,  and 
remained  there  long  in  summer.  When  Earl  Erling 
he  aid  this,  he  hastened  with  his  troops  to  meet  them 
in  \  iken,  and  fell  in  with  them  east  of  the  Fiord, 
at  a  place  called  Stangar  ;  where  they  had  a  great 
battle,  in  which  Erling  was  victorious.  Sigurd 
Agnhot,  and  many  others  of  Olaf  s  men,  fell  there  ; 
but  Olaf  escaped  by  flight,  went  south  to  Denmark, 
and  was  all  winter  [1169]  in  Alaborg  in  Jutland. 
The  following  spring  Olaf  fell  into  an  illness  which 
ended  in  death,  and  he  was  buried  in  the  Maria 
church  ;  and  the  Danes  call  him  a  saint. 


Chapter  XXXV. — Harold's  Death. 

King  Magnus  had  a  lenderman  called  Nikolas 
Kufung,  who  was  a  son  of  Pal  Skoptason.  He 
took  Harald  prisoner,  who  called  himself  a  son  of 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


34i 


King  Sigurd  Haraldson  and  the  princess  Kristin, 
and  a  brother  of  King  Magnus  by  the  mother’s  side. 
Nikolas  brought  Harald  to  Bergen,  and  delivered 
him  into  Earl  Erling’s  hands.  It  was  Erling’s 
custom  when  his  enemies  came  before  him,  that  he 
either  said  nothing  to  them,  or  very  little,  and  that 
in  all  gentleness,  when  he  had  determined  to  put 
them  to  death  ;  or  rose  with  furious  words  against 
them,  when  he  intended  to  spare  their  lives.  Erling 
spoke  but  little  to  Harald,  and  many,  therefore, 
suspected  his  intentions  ;  and  some  begged  King 
Magnus  to  put  in  a  good  word  for  Harald  with  the 
earl  :  and  the  king  did  so.  The  earl  replies,  “  Thy 
friends  advise  thee  badly.  Thou  wouldst  govern 
this  kingdom  but  a  short  time  in  peace  and  safety, 
if  thou  wert  to  follow  the  counsels  of  the  heart 
only.”  Earl  Erling  ordered  Harald  to  he  taken  to 
Nordnes,  where  he  was  beheaded. 


Chapter  XXX YI. — Of  Eystein  Eysteinson  and  the  Birkibeins. 

There  was  a  man  called  Eystein,  who  gave  himselt 
out  for  a  son  of  King  Eystein  Haraldson.  He  was 
at  this  time  young,  and  not  full  grown.  It  is  told  of 
him  that  he  one  summer  appeared  in  Svithiod,  and 
went  to  Earl  Birger  Brosa,  who  was  then  married  to 
Brigida,  Eystein  s  aunt,  a  daughter  of  King  Harald 
Gille.  Eystein  explained  his  business  to  them,  and 
asked  their  assistance.  Both  Earl  Birger  and  his  wife 
listened  to  him  in  a  friendly  way,  and  promised  him 
their  confidence,  and  he  stayed  with  them  a  while. 


342 


CHKONICLE  OF  THE 


Lari  Birger  gave  him  some  assistance  of  men,  and  a 
good  sum  for  travelling  expenses  ;  and  both  promised 
him  their  friendship  on  his  taking  leave.  Thereafter 
Eystein  proceeded  north  into  Norway  [1174],  and 
when  he  came  down  to  Viken  people  flocked  to  him 
in  crowds ;  and  Eystein  was  there  proclaimed  king, 
and  he  lemained  in  \  iken  in  winter.  As  they  were 
very  poor  in  money,  they  robbed  all  around,  where- 
toie  the  lendermen  and  bondes  raised  men  against 
them  ,  and  being  thus  overpowered  by  numbers,  they 
fled  away  to  the  forests  and  deserted  hill  grounds, 
where  they  lived  for  a  long  time.  Their  clothes  being 
worn  out,  they  wound  the  bark  of  the  birch-tree  about 
their  legs,  and  thus  were  called  by  the  bondes  Birki- 
beins.*  I  hey  often  rushed  down  upon  the  settled 
distiicts,  pushed  on  here  or  there,  and  made  an  assault 
where  they  did  not  find  many  people  to  oppose  them. 
Ihey  had  se\eral  battles  with  the  bondes  with  various 
success ;  and  the  Birkibeins  held  three  battles  in 
legulai  array,  and  gained  the  victory  in  them  all. 
At  Ivrokaskog  they  had  nearly  made  an  unlucky 
expedition,  for  a  great  number  of  bondes  and  men- 
at-arms  were  assembled  there  against  them  ;  but  the 
Birkibeins  felled  brushwood  across  the  roads,  and 
letired  into  the  forest.  They  were  two  years  [1175- 

1 1 76]  m  Viken  before  they  showed  themselves  in  the 
northern  parts  of  the  country. 

*  Birkibeinar— Bircli-legs.— L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


343 


Chapter  XXXVII. — Of  the  Birkibeins,  King  Ey stein,  and 

Erling  Skakke. 

Magnus  had  been  king  for  thirteen  years  when  the 
Birkibeins  first  made  their  appearance.  They  got 
themselves  ships  in  the  third  summer  [1176],  with 
which  they  sailed  along  the  coast  gathering  goods  and 
men.  They  were  first  in  Viken  ;  but  when  summer 
advanced  they  proceeded  northwards,  and  so  rapidly 
that  no  news  preceded  them  until  they  came  to 
Throndhjem.  The  Birkibeins  troop  consisted  piin- 
cipally  of  hill-men  and  Elfgrims,  and  many  were  from 
Thelemark  ;  and  all  were  well  armed.  Their  king, 
Eystein,  was  a  handsome  man,  with  a  little  but  good 
countenance ;  and  he  was  not  of  great  statuie,  foi 
his  men  called  him  Eystein  Meyla.  King  Magnus 
and  Earl  Erling  were  in  Bergen  when  the  Birkibeins 
sailed  past  it  to  the  north ;  but  they  did  not  hear  of 
them. 

Earl  Erling  was  a  man  of  great  understanding  and 
power,  an  excellent  leader  in  war,  and  an  able  and 
prudent  ruler  of  the  country ;  but  he  had  the  chai- 
acter  of  being  cruel  and  severe.  The  cause  of  this 
was  principally  that  he  never  allowed  his  enemies  to 
remain  in  the  country,  even  when  they  prayed  to  him 
for  mercy ;  and  therefore  many  joined  the  bands 
which  were  collected  against  him.  Erling  was  a  tall 
strong-made  man,  somewhat  short-necked  and  high¬ 
shouldered  ;  had  a  long  and  sharp  countenance  of 
a  light  complexion,  and  his  hair  became  very  giey. 
He  bore  his  head  a  little  on  one  side  ;  was  fiee  and 


344 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


agreeable  in  his  manners.  He  wore  the  old  fashion 
of  clothes,  long  body-pieces  and  long  arms  to  his 
coats,  foreign  cloak,  and  high  shoes.  He  made  the 
king  wear  the  same  kind  of  dress  in  his  youth ;  but 

when  he  grew  up,  and  acted  for  himself,  he  dressed 
very  sumptuously. 

King  Magnus  was  of  a  light  turn  of  mind,  full 

of  jokes ;  a  great  lover  of  mirth,  and  not  less  of 
women. 


Chapter  XXXVIII.— Of  Nikolas. 

Nikolas  was  a  son  of  Sigurd  Hranason  and  of 
Skialdvor  a  daughter  of  Brynjolf  Ulfalde,  and  a  sister 
of  Haldor  Bryniolfson  by  the  father’s  side,  and  of 
King  Magnus  Barefoot  by  the  mother’s  side.  Nikolas 
was  a  distinguished  chief,  who  had  a  farm  at  Ongul 
in  Halogaland,  which  was  called  Steig.  Nikolas  had 
also  a  house  in  Nidaros,  below  Saint  Jon’s  church, 
where  Thorgeir  the  scribe  lately  dwelt.  Nikolas  was 
often  in  the  town,  and  was  the  president  of  the  towns¬ 
people.  Skialdvor,  Nikolas’s  daughter,  was  married 
to  Eink  Arnason,  who  was  also  a  lenderman. 


Chapter  XXXIX. —  Of  Eirik  and  Nikolas. 

As  the  people  of  the  town  were  coming  from 
matins  the  last  day  of  Marymas  [September  8thl, 
Emk  came  up  to  Nikolas,  and  said,  “  Here  are  some 
shermen  come  from  the  sea,  who  report  that  some 
ong-ships  are  sailing  into  the  fiord ;  and  people 
conjecture  that  these  may  be  the  Birkibeins.  It 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


345 


would  be  advisable  to  call  the  townspeople  together 
with  the  war-horns,  to  meet  under  arms  out  on 
Eyrar.” 

Nikolas  replies,  “  I  don’t  go  after  fishermen’s 
reports ;  but  I  shall  send  out  spies  to  the  fiord,  and 
in  the  meantime  hold  a  Thing  to-day.” 

Eirik  went  home  ;  but  when  they  were  ringing  to 
high  mass,  and  Nikolas  was  going  to  church,  Eirik 
came  to  him  again,  and  said,  “  I  believe  the  news 
to  be  true  ;  for  here  are  men  who  say  they  saw  them 
under  sail :  and  I  think  it  would  be  most  advisable 
to  ride  out  of  town,  and  gather  men  with  arms  ;  for 
it  appears  to  me  the  townspeople  will  be  too  few.” 

Nikolas  replies,  “Thou  art  mixing  everything 
together :  let  us  first  hear  mass,  and  then  take  our 
resolution.” 

Nikolas  then  w^ent  into  the  church.  When  the 
mass  was  over  Eirik  went  to  Nikolas,  and  said,  “My 
horses  are  saddled ;  I  will  ride  awray.” 

Nikolas  replies,  “Farewell,  then  :  wre  will  hold  a 
Thing  to-day  on  Eyrar,  and  examine  what  force  of 
men  there  may  be  in  the  towm.” 

Eirik  rode  aw^ay,  and  Nikolas  w^ent  to  his  house, 
and  then  to  dinner. 


Chapter  XL. — The  Fall  of  Nikolas. 

The  meat  was  scarcely  put  on  the  table,  when  a 
man  came  into  the  house  to  tell  Nikolas  that  the 
Birkibeins  were  rowing  up  the  river.  I  hen  Nikolas 
called  to  his  men  to  take  their  weapons.  When  they 


346 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


were  armed  Nikolas  ordered  them  to  go  up  into  the 
loft.  But  that  was  a  most  imprudent  step ;  for  if 
they  had  remained  in  the  yard,  the  townspeople 
might  have  come  to  their  assistance  ;  but  now  the 
Birkibeins  filled  the  whole  yard,  and  from  thence 
scrambled  from  all  sides  up  to  the  loft.  They  called 
to  Nikolas,  and  offered  him  quarter,  but  he  refused 
it.  Then  they  attacked  the  loft.  Nikolas  and  his 
men  defended  themselves  with  bow-shot,  hand-shot, 
and  stones  of  the  chimney  ;  but  the  Birkibeins  hewed 
down  the  houses,  broke  np  the  loft,  and  returned 
shot  for  shot  from  bow  or  hand.  Nikolas  had  a  red 
shield  in  which  were  gilt  nails,  and  about  it  was  a 
border  of  stars.  The  Birkibeins  shot  so  that  the 
arrows  went  in  up  to  the  arrow  feather.  Then  said 
Nikolas,  “  My  shield  deceives  me.”  Nikolas  and  a 
numher  of  his  people  fell,  and  his  death  was  greatly 

lamented.  The  Birkibeins  gave  all  the  townspeople 
their  lives. 


Chapter  NLI.  Eystein  proclaimed  King. 

Eystein  was  then  proclaimed  king,  and  all  the 
people  submitted  to  him.  He  stayed  a  while  in  the 
t°wn>  an,l  then  went  into  the  interior  of  the  Thrond- 
hjem  land,  where  many  joined  him,  and  among  them 
Thorfin  Svarte  of  Snos  with  a  troop  of  people.  When 
the  Birkibeins,  in  the  beginning  of  winter  [1177], 
came  again  into  the  town,  the  sons  of  Gudrun  from 
Saltnes,  Jon  Ketling,  Sigurd,  and  William,  joined 
them;  and  when  they  proceeded  afterwards  from 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


347 


Nidaros  up  Orkadal,  they  could  number  nearly  2000  * 
men.  They  afterwards  went  to  the  Uplands,  and 
on  to  Thoten  and  Hadaland,  and  from  thence  to 
Ringerike,  and  subdued  the  country  wheresoever 
they  came. 


Chapter  XLII. — The  Fall  of  King  E y stein. 

King  Magnus  went  eastward  to  Viken  in  autumn 
with  a  part  of  his  men,  and  with  him  Orm  the  king’s 
brother  ;  but  Earl  Erling  remained  behind  in  Bergen 
to  meet  the  Birkibeins  in  case  they  took  the  sea 
route.  King  Magnus  went  to  Tunsberg,  where  he 
and  Orm  held  their  Yule  [n  77].  When  King 
Magnus  heard  that  the  Birkibeins  were  up  in  Be, 
the  king  and  Orm  proceeded  thither  with  their  men. 
There  was  much  snow,  and  it  was  dreadfully  cold. 
When  they  came  to  the  farm  they  left  the  beaten 
track  on  the  road,  drew  up  their  array  outside  of  the 
fence,  and  trod  a  path  through  the  snow  with  their 
men,  who  were  not  quite  1500+  in  number.  The 
Birkibeins  were  dispersed  here  and  there  in  other 
farms,  a  few  men  in  each  house.  When  they  per¬ 
ceived  King  Magnus’s  army  they  assembled,  and 
drew  up  in  regular  order  ;  and  as  they  thought  their 
force  was  larger  than  his,  which  it  actually  was,  they 
resolved  to  fight ;  but  when  they  hurried  forward  to 
the  road  only  a  few  could  advance  at  a  time,  which 
broke  their  array,  and  the  men  fell  who  first  ad¬ 
vanced  upon  the  beaten  way.  Then  the  Birkibeins’ 


*  =2400. 


t  =  1 800. 


348 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


banner  was  cut  down  ;  those  who  were  nearest  gave 
way,  and  some  took  to  flight.  King  Magnus’s  men 
pursued  them,  and  killed  one  after  the  other  as  they 
came  up  with  them.  Thus  the  Birkibeins  could 
never  form  themselves  in  array  ;  and  being  exposed 
to  the  weapons  of  the  enemy  singly,  many  of  them 
fell,  and  many  fled.  It  happened  here,  as  it  often 
does,  that  although  men  be  brave  and  gallant,  if 
they  have  once  been  defeated  and  driven  to  flight, 
they  will  not  easily  be  brought  to  turn  round.  Now 
the  main  body  of  the  Birkibeins  began  to  fly,  and 
many  fell ;  because  Magnus’s  men  killed  all  they 
could  lay  hold  of,  and  not  one  of  them  got  quarter. 
The  whole  body  became  scattered  far  and  wide. 
Eystein  in  his  flight  ran  into  a  house,  and  begged 
for  his  life,  and  that  the  bonde  would  conceal  him  ; 
but  the  bonde  killed  him,  and  then  went  to  Kins: 
Magnus,  whom  he  found  at  Rafnnes,  where  the  king 
was  in  a  room  warming  himself  by  the  fire  along 
with  many  people.  Some  went  for  the  corpse,  and 
bore  it  into  the  room,  where  the  king  told  the 
people  to  come  and  inspect  the  body.  A  man  was 
sitting  on  a  bench  in  the  corner,  and  he  was  a  Birki- 
bein,  but  nobody  had  observed  him  ;  and  when  he 
saw  and  recognised  his  chiefs  body  he  sprang  up 
suddenly  and  actively,  rushed  out  upon  the  floor, 
and  with  an  axe  he  had  in  his  hands  made  a  blow 
at  King  Magnus’s  neck  between  the  shoulders.  A 
man  saw  the  axe  swinging,  and  pulled  the  king  to  a 
side,  by  which  the  axe  struck  lower  in  the  shoulder, 
and  made  a  large  wound.  He  then  raised  the  axe 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


349 


again,  and  made  a  blow  at  Oral  the  King-brother, 
who  was  lying  on  a  bench,  and  the  blow  was  directed 
at  both  his  legs  ;  but  Orm,  seeing  the  man  about  to 
kill  him,  drew  in  his  feet  instantly,  threw  them  over 
his  head,  and  the  blow  fell  on  the  bench,  in  which 
the  axe  stuck  fast ;  and  then  the  blows  at  the  Birki- 
bein  came  so  thick  that  he  could  scarcely  fall  to  the 
ground.  It  was  discovered  that  he  had  dragged  his 
entrails  after  him  over  the  floor  ;  and  this  man’s 
bravery  was  highly  praised.  King  Magnus’s  men 
followed  the  fugitives,  and  killed  so  many  that  they 
were  tired  of  it.  Thorfin  of  Snos,  and  a  very  great 
number  of  Throndhjem  people,  fell  there. 


Chapter  XLIII. —  Of  the  Birkibeins. 

The  faction  which  called  itself  the  Birkibeins  had 
gathered  together  in  great  numbers.  They  were  a 
hardy  people,  and  the  boldest  of  men  under  arms  ; 
but  wild,  and  going  forward  madly  when  they  had  a 
strong  force.  They  had  few  men  in  their  faction  who 
were  good  counsellors,  or  accustomed  to  rule  a  country 
by  law,  or  to  head  an  army ;  and  if  there  were  such 
men  among  them  who  had  more  knowledge,  yet  the 
many  would  only  allow  of  those  measures  which  they 
liked,  trusting  always  to  their  numbers  and  courage.* 

*  This  faction  of  the  Birkibeins,  of  which  the  origin  is  here  related  by 
Snorre,  became  very  celebrated  under  another  leader,  Sverre,  whom  they 
raised  to  the  throne  upon  a  very  doubtful  title  ;  and  it  was  predominant 
for  about  ninety  years,  or  until  the  death  of  Hakon  Hakonson,  in  the 
affairs  of  Norway.  Their  opponents  were  called  the  Cowl-men  at  first, 
afterwards  the  Baglers  ;  and  the  conflicts  between  these  two  factions 
occupy  much  of  the  interesting  sagas  of  King  Sverre  and  his  successors 


350  CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 

Of  the  men  who  escaped  many  were  wounded,  and 
had  lost  both  their  clothes  and  their  arms,  and  were 
altogether  destitute  of  money.  Some  went  east  to 
the  borders,  some  all  the  way  east  to  Svithiod  ;  but 
the  most  of  them  went  to  Thelemark,  where  they  had 
their  families.  All  took  flight,  as  they  had  no  hope 
of  getting  their  lives  from  King  Magnus  or  Earl 
Erling. 

Chapter  NLIY. — Of  King  Magnus  Erlingson. 

King  Magnus  then  returned  to  Tunsberg,  and  got 
great  renown  by  this  victory ;  for  it  had  been  an  ex¬ 
pression  in  the  mouths  of  all,  that  Earl  Erling  was 
the  shield  and  support  of  his  son  and  himself.  But 
after  gaining  a  victory  over  so  strong  and  numerous 
a  force  with  fewer  troops,  King  Magnus  was  con¬ 
sidered  by  all  as  surpassing  other  leaders,  and  that 
he  would  become  a  warrior  as  much  greater  than  his 
father  Earl  Erling  as  he  was  younger. 

for  a  century  after  the  period  at  which  Snorre’s  chronicle  ends.  They 
well  deserve  a  translation,  especially  Sverre’s  saga.  The  two  factions,  the 
Birkibeins,  and  Baglers,  appear  to  have  become  at  last  the  king’s  party 
and  the  Church’s  party,  in  the  contention  for  power  between  the  state 
and  the  Church  which  was  carried  on  in  every  country  of  Europe  in  the 
twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries.  The  Birkibeins  enabled  King  Sverre  to 
oppose  the  churchmen  much  more  successfully  than  any  contemporary 
sovereigns.  These  Birkibeins,  the  vikings  of  the  forest,  were  bred  under 
him,  and  attached  to  him  and  his  race  alone. — L. 


END  OF  THE  HEIMSKRINGLA. 


ADDITIONAL  NOTES. 


ADDITIONAL  NOTES. 


i. 

The  most  learned  Scandinavian  antiquaries  of  our  times 
have  ascertained  to  their  own  satisfaction  that  three  distinct 
populations  have  inhabited  the  North: — a  Mongolian  race, 
of  which  the  type  is  to  be  found  in  the  Laplander,  the 
Samoeid,  the  Esquimaux ;  a  Celtic  race  ;  and  a  Caucasian 
race  which,  almost  within  the  limits  of  northern  history, 
came  from  Asia,  drove  out  or  extirpated  the  Celtic  and  Lap- 
landic  races,  and  are  the  present  inhabitants.  It  appears 
that  Professors  Rask  and  Peterson  come  to  this  conclusion  on 
philological  and'  mythological  grounds ;  Professors  Molbech, 
Nilsson,  and  Finn  Magnusen  come  to  the  same  conclusion  on 
archaeological  grounds,  from  the  relics  of  the  former  inhabit¬ 
ants,  their  arms,  utensils,  and  ornaments,  discovered  from 
time  to  time,  and  collected  in  museums.*  The  mythological 
grounds, — that  is,  the  similarity  of  worship  and  belief  in 
religion, — are  the  least  conclusive,  perhaps;  because  in  all 
natural  religions,  and  in  all  superstitions,  there  is  a  common 
principle — an  attempt  to  express  a  sentiment  common  to  all 
races  of  rational  men,  it  being  part  and  parcel  of  mind  itself : 
viz.,  a  sentiment  of  divine  power.  This  innate  movement  of 
mind  common  to  all  creatures  endowed  with  mind,  however 
imperfectly  developed,  must  produce  very  striking  analogies 
between  the  religious  ideas  and  worship  of  men  living  in 
the  most  widely-separated  corners  of  the  earth ;  but  these 
analogies  do  not  prove  that  these  populations  have  had  any 

*  See  Runamo  og  Runerne  ved  Finn  Magnuson.  Kiobenhavn, 
1841. — L. 

VOL.  IV. 


Z 


354 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


connection  or  communication  with  each  other  in  some  distant 
age,  but  only  that  the  human  mind  everywhere,  and  in  all 
ages,  is  labouring  to  express  a  sentiment  common  to  all  men ; 
and,  excepting  where  the  revealed  religion  of  the  Gospel  has 
penetrated,  with  only  the  same  means  to  express  it.  It  is 
thus  that  Buddha  or  Arudha,  and  Wodin  or  Odin,  appear  to 
have  invthological  analogies  and  connection  of  some  obscure 
kind;  but  it  is  not  the  connection  of  the  one  mythology 
being  derived  from  the  other,  but  that  of  both  springing  from 
a  common  root  in  the  mind  of  man,  and  which  makes  them 
therefore  necessarily  alike.  The  philological  researches  give 
more  distinct  results.  When  we  find  wTords  significant  in 
the  Laponic  or  Celtic  languages  used  as  names  of  places,  or 
of  natural  objects,  in  situations  far  removed  from  the  known 
seats  of  those  races,  we  mav  reasonablv  infer  that  at  some 
unknown  period  those  races  have  been  the  original  occupants 
of  the  country.  Thus  the  word  “  trask  ”  is  used  in  the  island 
of  Gotland  in  the  Baltic,  as  well  as  in  Lapland  itself,  to 
denote  a  small  lake  ;  and  the  word  belongs  to  the  Laponic, 
not  to  the  Gothic  or  Celtic  languages.  The  words  “  Ben,” 
“  Tind,”  and  others,  applied  to  mountains  of  peculiar  size  or 
shape  in  the  district  of  Bergen,  as  well  as  in  Wales  or  in  the 
Highlands  of  Scotland,  where  the  words  are  significant  of  the 
peculiar  feature  of  country,  are  of  some  weight  in  proving  a 
former  occupancy  by  a  Celtic  race,  who  have  given  names  to 
localities  adopted  by  their  successors.  The  word  “  tarn,” 
used  for  a  small  mountain  lake  in  Cumberland  and  Northum¬ 
berland,  is  used  in  the  same  sense  in  Norway ;  and  would 
have  some  weight,  if  historical  proof  were  wanting,  in  show¬ 
ing  that,  at  some  period,  people  speaking  the  Norwegian 
tongue  occupied  the  land.  The  archaeological  antiquaries, 
without  reference  to  any  theory  derived  from  mythology  or 
from  languages,  have  found  that  their  subjects  of  study,  the 
relics  of  antiquity,  naturally  fall  into  three  divisions  : — that 
of  an  age  prior  to  the  use  of  metals  in  arms  or  utensils,  when 
bone  and  stone  were  the  materials  used  ;  and  in  that  aoe 
burning  appears  to  have  been  the  way  of  disposing  of  the 
dead,  less  perhaps  from  any  observance  connected  with  re¬ 
ligion,  than  from  the  want  of  metal  tools  to  dig  the  soil  with 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


355 


so  as  to  inter  the  dead; — that  of  an  age  when  bronze  was 
used  in  arms  and  utensils,  that  is,  a  mixture  of  metals  to  give 
hardness  to  copper  or  other  soft  metals  ;  and  in  which  age 
the  use  of  stone  for  hammers,  arrow-points,  or  spear-heads, 
was  still  mixed  with  the  use  of  metals; — and  lastly,  an  age 
when  iron  was  applied  to  these  purposes,  although  bronze, 
and  even  stone  and  bone,  were  still  in  use,  from  the  want,  no 
doubt,  of  a  sufficient  supply  of  iron,  and  from  the  great  con- 
sumpt  of  it  in  missile  weapons.  Although  dates  cannot  be 
assigned  to  these  three  ages,  and  they  run  into  each  other, 
yet  the  mass  of  relics  of  ancient  times  so  clearly  falls  into 
these  three  divisions,  that  the  Museum  of  Northern  Antiquities 
at  Copenhagen  is  divided  and  arranged  upon  this  principle, 
and  with  the  fullest  approbation  of  the  learned  antiquaries 
of  the  North.  The  division  coincides  with  and  confirms  the 
results  of  the  mythological  and  philological  researches.  These 
epochs,  however,  are  beyond  the  pale  of  chronology.  The 
successions  only,  as  in  those  of  geological  science,  can  be 
made  out  with  considerable  probability.  The  date  cannot  be 
affixed  even  to  the  beginning  of  the  last  inhabitation  by  the 
iron-using  Caucasian  race — the  followers  of  Odin  from  Asia. 
Phrenological  science,  perhaps,  or  that  branch  of  it  called 
craniology,  might  be  applied  with  advantage  to  discover  if 
the  skulls,  or  other  human  remains,  found  in  the  oldest  de¬ 
positaries,  in  which  articles  of  stone  or  bone  only  have  been 
found,  belong  to  the  Mongolian,  viz.,  the  Laponic  or  Celtic,  or 
to  the  Caucasian,  viz.,  the  Gothic  type.  The  difference  would 
be  as  evident  as  between  the  skulls  of  the  African  and 
American  races.  But  as  burning  must  of  necessity  have 
been  the  general  mode  of  disposing  of  the  dead  when  iron 
tools  for  digging  were  rare,  undoubted  specimens  of  human 
skeletons  of  the  times  when  stone,  bone,  or  even  bronze  were 
only  used,  must  be  scarce.  The  Jettestuer  (jette  or  giant 
rooms)  found  in  Jutland,  and  all  over  the  North,  are  by  many 
ascribed  to  an  age  prior  to  the  general  use  of  metals,  or  at 
least  of  iron,  the  articles  found  in  them  being  of  stone,  bone, 
or  of  bronze, — rarely,  if  ever,  of  iron  ;  and  burnt  bones  or 
ashes  indicating  that  they  belong  to  an  age  when  the  dead 
were  burnt  before  interment.  These  Jettestuer  appear  to  be 


356 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


identical  with  what  are  called  Piets’  houses  in  the  north  of 
Scotland ;  viz.,  small  chambers  constructed  of  stones  laid 
rudely  together,  so  as  to  contain  a  small  round  space  covered 
with  a  single  flag-stone,  and  sufficient  to  hold  the  ashes,  but 
not  the  entire  bodies  of  the  dead.  They  are  numerous  in  the 
three  northern  counties  of  Scotland  ;  and,  from  ashes  and 
burnt  earth  being  found  in  them,  are  supposed  by  the  com¬ 
mon  people  to  have  been  the  dwellings  of  a  pigmy  race  called 
Pechts  or  Piets.  They  deserve  the  investigation  of  the  an¬ 
tiquary,  and  a  comparison  with  the  Jettestuer  of  Jutland. 
The  antiquary  might  thereby  throw  some  light  upon  the 
disputed  question,  whether  the  Piets  were  a  Celtic  or  Gothic 
people ;  and  whether  the  Piets  were  not  a  race  who  had 
expelled  a  still  older  race,  the  Laponic,  and  had  themselves 
been  extirpated  by  a  Caucasian  or  Gothic  race,  the  followers 
of  Odin.  This  last  succession  of  inhabitants  in  Scandinavia 
is  evidently  an  historical  event,  although  wanting  an  historical 
date,  and  to  us  only  mythological.  Manners,  customs,  laws, 
and  religious  and  social  institutions,  existing  in  Iceland,  though 
evidently  derived  from  and  more  adapted  to  a  people  in  the 
plains  of  Asia,  and  by  tradition  and  religious  belief  received 
through  their  Scandinavian  ancestors  from  Asia,  must  surely 
be  of  Asiatic  origin,  although  the  date  of  the  migration  from 
the  original  seat  of  those  manners,  customs,  and  institutions 
cannot  be  assigned.  How  could  the  symbolical  use  of  horse¬ 
flesh  at  religious  festivals  be  an  observance  in  Iceland  or 
Norway,  where  the  horse  is,  from  the  climate,  not  in  such 
numbers  as  to  have  ever  been  slaughtered  for  food,  if  not  a 
religious  ordinance  in  commemoration  of  an  original  country 
in  which  the  horse  was  generally  used  for  food  ?  How  could 
the  great  and  connected  mass  of  tradition  and  mythology, 
all  referring  to  an  Asiatic  origin  and  home,  have  arisen  in 
Norway,  Sweden,  and  Iceland,  if  not  founded  upon  some 
real  event  and  connection  ?  The  event  itself  is  probably  not 
so  far  distant  from  historical  times  as  antiquaries  imagine. 
The  account  which  Snorre  gives  in  the  fifth  chapter  of  the 
Ynglinga  Saga,  and  also  in  the  Edda  attributed  to  him,  of 
Odin  having  been  driven  northwards  by  the  increasing  power 
of  the  Komans  in  the  countries  in  which  he  originallv  lived, 

O  v  ' 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


357 


may  not  be  so  wide  of  the  true  date,  nor  so  much  too  near 
times  of  well-ascertained  historical  truth,  as  many  antiquaries 
suppose.  Torfseus,  reckoning  upon  extravagant  assumptions 
of  longevity  in  the  genealogies  given  in  the  Saga,  supposes 
in  his  history  of  Norway  that  Odin  came  to  Scandinavia 
in  the  time  of  Darius  Hydaspes,  about  5 20  years  before 
the  Christian  era.  But  in  his  “Series  Regum  et  Dynas- 
tarum  Danias,”  lib.  iii.  cap.  2,  he  reckons  back  from  Harald 
Harfager,  who  wTas  born  853,  to  Odin,  twenty-six  genera¬ 
tions,  son  succeeding  father,  and  allows  thirty-five  years  to 
each  generation,  which  brings  Odin  to  about  fifty-seven  years 
before  the  Christian  era.  He  is  obliged,  therefore,  to  sup¬ 
pose  another  Odin  or  two  to  have  flourished  500  or  1000 
years  earlier ;  and  by  assuming  that  King  Aun  or  Ane,  of 
whom  the  Ynglinga  Saga  makes  mention  in  the  twenty-ninth 
chapter,  reached  the  age  of  210  years,  he  stretches  his  genea¬ 
logical  chronology  far  enough.  But  twenty-six  reigns,  son 
succeeding  father, — and  the  reigns  are  all  we  know  of  these 
mythological  personages,  or  rather  the  names  only, — never  did 
follow  each  other  in  this  unquiet  world;  and  an  average  of 
thirty-five  years  for  human  life,  during  twenty-six  generations, 
would  not  accord  with  any  experience  or  calculation  of  human 
life.  The  Odin  of  Snorre  lived,  as  he  tells  us  distinctly  in 
the  Edda,  about  the  time  when  the  Romans  under  Pompey 
ravaged  Asia.  In  Florus,  lib.  iii.  cap.  4,  we  find  that  Lucul- 
lus  in  this  war  with  Mithridates,  came  “  ad  terminum  gentium 
Tanaim  lacumque  Maeotim.”  This  was  about  70  years  before 
Christ.  None  of  the  genealogical  deductions  admit  even  of 
so  ancient  a  date.  If  we  take  the  Saxon  genealogies,  we  find 
Cerdic  called  the  ninth  in  descent  from  Woden,  and  he  lived 
about  the  year  495  ;  Ida  was  called  the  tenth  in  descent,  and 
he  lived  about  547 ;  and  Ella  was  called  the  eleventh,  and 
he  lived  about  560.  If  we  even  adopt  the  extravagant  sup¬ 
position  that  these  descents  were  not  of  reign  succeeding 
reign  in  turbulent,  unsettled  times,  but  of  son  succeeding 
father  uninterruptedly,  and  each  living  thirty-five  years  on 
an  average,  we  bring  Odin  down  to  between  175  and  197 
years  after  our  era.  If  we  value  these  mythological  genea- 


353 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


logies  in  years  according  to  any  rational  principle,  we  must 
take  some  fixed  point  in  chronology,  and  from  it  upwards 
to  the  end  of  the  doubtful  mythological,  and  to  the  be- 
ginning  of  the  certain  historical  reigns,  take  the  average 
duration  of  reigns,  and  from  the  same  point  downwards  take 
the  average  of  a  similar  number  of  reigns.  We  would  thus  get 
a  measure  to  apply  to  the  mythological  period,  formed  upon 
the  duration  of  reigns  in  times  similar  in  unsettled  govern- 

o  o 

ment  to  the  more  ancient  mythological.  The  battle  of  Stikle- 

v 

stad,  at  which  King  Olaf  the  Saint  fell,  appears  to  be  such 
a  fixed  chronological  point.  It  is  stated  by  Snorre,  that  the 
battle  took  place  on  Wednesday  the  I  V.  of  the  Calends  of 
August,  viz.,  the  29th  July.  Now  the  IV.  Calends  of  August 
did  fall  on  a  Wednesday  in  the  year  1030.  In  the  Saga  of 
Harald  Hardrade,  King  Olaf’s  half-brother,  who  wras  killed 
at  the  battle  of  Stanford  Bridge  near  York,  Snorre  tells  us 
that  this  event  took  place  thirty-five  years  after  the  battle  of 
Stiklestad,  at  which  this  King  ITarald,  then  a  youth,  was 
present.  Now  the  battle  of  Stanford  or  Battle  Bridge  was 
fought  011  Monday  the  25th  September,  nineteen  days  before 
the  battle  of  Hastings,  which  took  place  on  Saturday  the  14th 
October,  in  the  year  1066,  which  brings  the  battle  of  Stikle¬ 
stad,  fought  thirty-five  completed  years  before,  to  1030.  The 
Saga-reckoning  of  years  is  so  many  winters ;  and  thirty-five 
winters  had  passed  between  the  battle  of  Stiklestad  in  autumn 
1030,  and  the  battle  of  Stanford  Bridge  in  autumn  1066. 
The  Saxon  Chronicle  also  gives  the  year  1030  as  the  date  of 
the  battle  in  which  King  Olaf  fell ;  and  this  Chronicle,  giviim 
nothing  but  the  dates  and  events,  without  any  relation  of 
causes  or  results,  or  any  attempt  at  giving  anything  more 
than  the  event  and  date,  is  unquestionably  the  best  histori¬ 
cal  authority  for  the  time  and  fact.  During  the  battle  of 
Stiklestad  a  total  solar  eclipse  is  understood  by  antiquaries, 
from  the  text  of  Snorre,  to  have  taken  place ;  and  this  would 
have  fixed  the  day  and  year  beyond  all  question.  But  on 
the  IV.  Calends  of  August,  1030,  there  was  no  full  moon, 
and  consequently  there  could  be  no  total  solar  eclipse;  and 
there  is  no  getting  rid  of  Snorre’s  distinct  day,  Wednesday 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


359 


the  IV.  Calends  of  August,  and  of  that  IV.  Calends  of 
August  in  1030  actually  falling  upon  a  Wednesday  in  that 
-ear.  Professor  Hansten  of  Christiania  has,  it  is  said,  cal¬ 
culated  that  a  total  eclipse  of  the  sun  did  take  place  in  the 
latitude  of  Stiklestad,  63°  40' '  north,  011  the  31st  of  August, 
1030;  but  that  would  be  a  Monday,  not  a  Wednesday. 
The  only  other  near  eclipse  is  one  on  the  29th  June  1033? 
and  some  antiquaries  have  removed  the  battle  for  the  sake 
of  the  eclipse  to  the  year  1033;  but  the  eclipse  fell  on  a 
Friday  the  2.9th  June,  not  on  a  Wednesday  the  IV.  Calends 
of  August ;  and  Snorre  is  distinct  about  his  V  ednesday,  and 
that  it  was  Wednesday  the  IV.  Calends  of  August.  It  has 
been  suggested  to  the  translator  by  Professor  Kjelland,  that 
possibly  it  may  have  been  a  fog,  and  not  an  eclipse  at  all , 
and,  on  considering  Snorre’s  description  of  what  took  place, 
this  conjecture  appears  highly  probable.  The  duration  of 
the  obscurity,  viz.,  from  half-past  one  to  half-past  three,  as 
stated  in  the  Saga,  exceeds  greatly  the  duration  of  the  ob¬ 
scurity  produced  by  a  total  eclipse.  I  he  degree  of  obscuiity 
produced  by  a  total  eclipse  is  not  such  that  objects  at  the  dis¬ 
tance  of  40  or  50  yards  are  undistinguishable,  so  that  the  use 
of  the  bow  or  movements  in  the  field,  such  as  the  ad\ance  of 
Dag  Ringson,  as  stated  in  chapter  139,  could  be  impeded  or 
suspended  by  it ;  but  these  circumstances  would  apply  per¬ 
fectly  to  a  dense  fog.  The  redness  of  the  air  and  the  light, 
although  the  sky  was  without  a  cloud,  and  the  sun  shone 
clear,  applies  perfectly  to  the  land  being  enveloped  in  a 
dense  mist,  through  which  the  rays  of  the  sun  could  not 
penetrate ;  and  the  gradual  coming  on  of  this  obscurity, 
until  at  last  people  could  not  see  each  other  for  two  houis 
distinctly,  is  exactly  what  might  occur  in  a  very  thick  fog, 
although  the  sun  and  sky  were  not  obscured  by  clouds  , 
but  could  not  occur  from  the  obscurity  of  a  few  minutes’ 
duration  attending  a  total  eclipse,  and  which  is  not  a  dark¬ 
ness  sufficient  to  obstruct  any  work  or  movement  out  of 
doors  like  the  obscurity  of  a  thick  mist.  Whether  the  ob¬ 
scurity  was  caused  by  fog  or  by  an  eclipse,  and  whether 
the  day  was  the  29th  of  July  or  the  3IS^  August, 
the  year  is  fixed  as  well  as  any  chronological  point  can  be  to 


360 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


the  year  1030.  Now  going  upwards  from  this  point,  we 
find — 

Olaf  the  Saint  had  reigned  when  he  fell 

Earls  Svein  and  Hakon,  whom  he  expelled  . 

Earl  Eirik,  their  father  .  . 

Olaf  Trygveson  ...  .  . 

Earl  Hakon  the  Great  .  . 

Harald  Grafeld  and  Gunhild’s  sons 

Hakon  Athelstan’s  foster-sons 

Harald  Harfager,  who  lived  83  years,  reigned 

We  have  here  eight  reigns,  including  one  of  very  unusual 
duration,  averaging  2of  years.  Going  downwards  from  the 
same  point,  we  find — 


15  years. 

2  ,, 

T2  „ 

4  „ 

17  » 

14  „ 

26  „ 

73  „ 


Svein  Alfifuson,  for  his  father  Canute  the  Great  . 
Magnus  the  Good  and  his  uncle  Harald  Hardrade  . 
Harald  Hardrade,  after  the  death  of  Magnus  alone 
Magnus  his  son,  jointly  with  Olaf  Kyrre 
Olaf  Kyrre  alone  .... 

Magnus  Barefoot 

•  *  •  «  » 

Sigurd  the  Crusader,  with  Ey stein  and  Olaf,  his 
brothers  ...... 

Magnus  the  Blind  ..... 


7  years. 
12  „ 

19  » 

3  >> 

24  „ 


27  „ 
5  „ 


We  have  here  eight  reigns,  averaging  13!  years  each  ;  and 
in  the  272  years  between  the  accession  of  Harald  Harfager 
in  863,  and  the  mutilation  and  deposition  of  Magnus  the 
Blind  in  1135,  we  have  sixteen  reigns,  averaging  seventeen 
years.  Now  Harald  Harfager,  according  to  Torfieus  and 
Schoning,  was  born  853,  and  was  the  twenty-sixth  in 
descent  from  Odin.  If  we  apply  this  reasonable  measure 
of  seventeen  years  as  the  average  duration  of  reigns  in  the 
mythological  period  immediately  before,  as  it  is  in  the  his¬ 
torical  period  immediately  after  Harald  Harfager,  whose 
reign  began  in  863,  we  bring  Odin  to  442  years  "before  his 
reign,  that  is,  to  the  year  421  of  our  era.  If  we  apply  the 
same  measure  to  the  Saxon  genealogies  of  Cerdic,  Ida,  and 
Ella,  who  in  the  years  495,  547,  and  560,  were  reckoned 
the  ninth,  tenth,  and  eleventh  in  descent  respectively  from 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


361 

Woden,  we  bring  the  Saxon  Woden  to  the  year  342,  or  377, 
or  373  ;  that  is,  to  within  the  span  of  a  mans  life  of  from 
forty-four  to  seventy-nine  years  of  the  date  of  the  Scandi¬ 
navian  Odin.  It  appears  to  have  been  some  kind  of  anti¬ 
quarian  vanity  that  led  the  early  northern  antiquaries  to 
place  Odin  or  Wodin  as  far  back  as  possible  among  the  mists 
of  antiquity,  and  to  reject  every  reasonable  measure  of  the 
length  of  reigns,  or  of  human  life,  that  brought  him  within 
the  Christian  era. 

The  religion  of  Odin  itself  bears  strong  internal  evidence 
of  having  borrowed  doctrines,  institutions,  and  ceremonies 

1/ ,  of  ti a v  1  n ^  b e e n  impressed  by  some  rude 
notions  adopted  from  the  Christian  Church.  In  Har  the 
High,  Jafnhar  the  Equal  to  the  High,  and  Thride  the 
Third,  we  find  a  rude  idea  of  the  Trinity  in  the  Edda.  Adam 
of  Bremen,  who  lived  about  the  time  of  the  introduction  of 
Christianity  into  Sweden,  and  wrote  in  the  year  1075,  de¬ 
scribes  the  temple  at  Upsala  as  exhibiting  this  rude  idea  of  the 
Trinity.  It  had  three  idols,  he  says,  of  which  that  of  Thor 
was  in  the  middle  and  on  the  highest  throne,  and  those  of 
Odin  and  Frigg  on  either  side.  Odin  himself,  an  incarna¬ 
tion  of  divine  power,  and  one  of  this  trinity,  attended  by  his 
twelve  companions  or  godes,  and  establishing  a  religion  and 
religious  government,  is  a  coincidence  with  our  Saviour  and 
the  twelve  apostles  too  strong  to  be  merely  accidental.  Some 
imperfect  knowledge  and  rude  imitation  of  Christianity  are 
evidently  at  the  bottom  of  this  form  of  heathenism.  It  will 
also  be  observed  that  in  all  the  forms  of  heathenism  that 
existed  before  Christianity,  the  priesthood,  whether  hereditary 
or  dedicated  by  selection  to  their  vocation,  were  all  a  temple- 
priesthood.  They  belonged  to  particular  services,  gods,  and 
temples ;  and  not  to  any  territorial  district  like  a  parish, 
or  to  any  particular  group  of  people  like  a  congregation. 
Christianity,  however,  from  the  first  appears  to  have  been 
altogether  congregational.  The  bishops,  elders,  and  deacons 
belonged  to  particular  congregations  in  particular  localities, 
within  which  they  taught  and  governed  in  things  spiritual. 
If  the  Christian  Church  lost  this  original  and  characteristic 
formation  at  Rome,  it  was  by  imitating  and  adopting,  some 


362 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


centuries  after  its  first  establishment,  the  former  heathen 
establishment  of  a  temple-priesthood,  a  pontifical  college,  and 
a  pontifex  maximus.  Odinism  appears  to  have  been  formed, 
like  early  Christianity,  and  no  doubt  a.11  imitation  of  it,  upon 
the  congregational  principle.  The  gode  had  under  his  charge 
a  certain  portion  of  territory  called  a  godord,  similar  to  a 
Christian  parish.  The  inhabitants  of  this  locality  paid  him 
certain  dues  as  their  priest  and  local  judge.  Each  godord 
appears  to  have  had  its  own  Thing,  or  court,  for  administer¬ 
ing  the  laws  of  the  general  or  district  Thing,  for  apportioning 
dues  or  taxes,  and  the  levies  of  men  and  ships.  To  this  early 
and  complete  arrangement  of  the  country  and  population 
into  godords,  or  parishes,  may  be  ascribed  the  great  military 
and  naval  achievements  of  the  pagan  Northmen.  It  was  an 
effective  military  arrangement  of  the  whole  people.  As  an 
arrangement  connected  with  religion,  its  principle  is  evidently 
congregational,  and  derived  from  Christianity  in  the  early 
nges  when  it  had  no  hierarchy.  The  godord,  that  is,  the 
right  to  jurisdiction  and  certain  dues  for  civil  and  ecclesi¬ 
astical  function  within  a  locality,  appears  to  have  become  a 
saleable  transferable  property  at  last,  just  like  an  advowson 
to  the  cure  of  souls  in  an  English  parish  at  the  present  day. 
So  perfectly  similar  were  the  arrangements  of  Odinism  and 
Christianity,  that  a  century  after  the  establishment  of  Chris¬ 
tianity  and  Christian  Church  institutions  in  Iceland,  Bishop 
Isleif  held  a  godord  as  quite  compatible  with  his  functions. 
The  apostolic  succession  also,  if  it  may  be  so  termed,  from 
the  twelve  original  godes,  the  companions  of  Odin,  or  a  quali¬ 
fication  derived  from  them,  appears  to  have  been  considered, 
just  as  a  true  apostolic  succession  is  considered  in  England 
at  the  present  day,  necessary  for  holding  the  office  of  gode. 
These  are  coincidences  with  the  Christian  Church  which  can 
scarcely  be  accidental.  The  use  of  the  sign  of  the  cross  also 
as  a  religious  symbol  appears  to  have  prevailed  in  Odinism 
in  the  earliest  times,  and  must  have  been  borrowed  from 
Christianity.  Antiquaries  call  it  the  sign  of  Thor’s  hammer, 
not  of  the  cross ;  but  the  use  of  any  sign  as  a  religious 
symbol  by  which  people  of  the  same  faith  might  recognise 
each  other,  although  necessary  in  the  persecutions  of  the 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


363 


early  Christians,  could  only  arise  from  imitation  among  the 
followers  of  Odin- worship,  and  especially  of  the  same  sign. 
It  would  naturally  be  adopted,  however,  from  a  superstitious 
belief  that  there  was  some  virtue  in  the  sign  itself.  The  use 
of  water  also  in  giving  a  name — and  in  the  earliest  historical 
period  we  find  that  Harald  Harfager,  with  whom  history 
commences  in  Norway,  had  water  poured  over  him  and  a 
name  given  him  in  infancy — is  a  rite  evidently  borrowed  from 
Christianity.  It  has  110  meaning  in  Odinism.  It  is  a  remark¬ 
able  circumstance  in  the  mythology  of  the  Odin  religion,  that 
there  was  no  god  particularly  connected  with  water,  or  the 
sea,  or  the  winds  ;  and  the  circumstance  is  a  very  strong  proof 
that  the  Odin  religion  was  not  indigenous  in  Scandinavia,  in 
which  the  people  in  all  ages  must  necessarily  have  been  sea¬ 
faring,  and  dependent  on  the  elements,  and  that  this  religion 
had  its  origin,  as  the  tradition  states  it,  in  the  inland  parts  of 
Asia,  where  sea  and  wind,  and  the  interests  connected  with 
these  elements,  were  unknown  or  unimportant.  The  use  of 
water  at  the  ceremony  of  giving  a  name,  without  any  sacra¬ 
mental  meaning  or  symbolical  reference  to  their  own  mytho¬ 
logy,  seems  to  prove  a  mere  imitation  of  the  Christian 
ceremonial  by  a  later  religion.  It  is,  indeed,  possible  that  all 
the  passages  in  which  baptism  by  water  are  mentioned  may 
have  been  interpolated  by  the  skalds  or  saga-men,  in  compli¬ 
ment  to  the  kings  descended  from  those  pagans,  and  to  please 
their  family  pride  with  the  idea  that  their  remote  pagan 
ancestors  had  not  died  unbaptized,  and  consequently  out  of 
the  pale  of  Christian  salvation,  according  to  the  ideas  of  those 
times,  in  which  the  mere  ceremony  of  baptism  was  synony¬ 
mous  with  Christianity.  But  this  is  merely  conjecture,  not 
sanctioned  by  any  antiquarian  authority. 

These  are  not  analogies  common  to  all  forms  of  religion, 
because  arising  from  a  common  root — the  sense  of  religion  in 
the  mind  of  man ;  nor  are  they  coincidences  which  may  be 
common  to  two  religions  totally  unconnected  with  each  other, 
because  formed  among  two  bodies  of  mankind  living  under 
physical  and  social  circumstances  very  similar,  although  in 
very  different  times  and  totally  distinct  countries  ;  but  they 
are  palpable  imitations  of  ceremonial  and  arrangement,  prov- 


36  4 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


ing  that  the  one  religion  has  been  impressed  by  the  other— 
has  adopted  ceremonies,  observances,  institutions,  and  doc¬ 
trines,  from  some  obscure  knowledge  of  the  other.  Mahomet, 
some  centuries  after  Odin,  has  drawn  much  from  Christianity. 
The  true  historical  place  of  Odin,  or  rather  of  Odinism, — for 
Odin  may  not  have  been,  like  Mahomet,  an  historical  per¬ 
sonage,  but  merely  a  name  given  to  several  distinct  con¬ 
querors  known  only  by  tradition, — would  appear  to  be  after 
Christianity  and  before  Mahometanism ;  and  as  the  genea¬ 
logies  indicate,  if  fairly  measured,  about  the  fifth  century. 
Hengist  and  Horsa  are  stated  in  the  Saxon  Chronicle  to  have 
been  the  sons  of  Wihtgils,  who  was  the  son  of  Witta  ;  and 
Witta  was  the  son  of  Wecta,  a  son  of  Woden.  This  genea¬ 
logy  is  rejected,  because  it  brings  Woden  so  near  to  his¬ 
torical  times,  making  Hengist  and  Horsa  the  fourth  in 
descent  from  the  god  or  warrior  Woden.  Yet  if  we  apply 
the  same  measure  of  seventeen  years  to  each  of  these  descents 
from  the  time  of  Hengist  and  Horsa  (the  year  449)  upwards, 
we  find  a  wonderful  coincidence  with  the  other  Saxon  genea¬ 
logies  of  Cerdic,  Ida,  and  Ella,  and  come  within  eight  years 
of  the  two  latter.  One  man  of  79  years  of  age  might  have 
been  the  Odin  or  Woden  of  the  Scandinavian  genealogies,  and 
of  the  Saxon — the  ancestor  of  Hengist,  Cerdic,  Ella,  and  of 
Harald  Harfager,  Gorm,  Canute,  if  he  had  been  born  about 
the  year  342,  and  had  died  about  421.  But  were  the  numer¬ 
ous  followers  of  Odin  without  any  religion  before  the  fourth 
or  fifth  century  ?  By  no  means  ;  not  more  than  the  followers 
of  Mahomet  before  his  appearance  in  the  sixth  century. 
Odinism  is  a  new  patch  upon  an  old  garment.  There  has 
been  evidently  a  polytheism, — a  worship  of  Thor,  Loke,  of  a 
good  and  evil  principle;  and  a  more  ancient  mythology, 
upon  which  the  incarnation  of  Odin,  the  rude  idea  of  a 
trinity,  the  twelve  godes,  and  other  ideas  and  forms  of  belief 
and  observance  borrowed  from  the  Christian  Church  in  the 
early  ages  of  Christianity,  have  been  stitched  in  the  fourth 
or  fifth  century. — L. 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


365 


II. 

Iyar  Vidfadme  is  said,  in  the  forty-fifth  chapter  of  the 
Ynglinga  Saga,  to  have  conquered  a  fifth  part  of  England. 
This  is  the  first  mention  made  in  the  saga  of  expeditions  to 
England  ;  and  in  the  saga  the  fifth  part  of  England  is  gene¬ 
rally  applied  as  synonymous  with  the  kingdom  of  Northum¬ 
berland.  When  did  this  Ivar  live  ?  and  how  does  his  date 
correspond  with  that  given  by  the  Saxon  Chronicle,  and  all 
our  English  historians  on  its  authority,  as  that  of  the  first 
appearance  of  the  Danes  in  England,  viz.,  the  year  787  ? 

Harald  Harfager  was  born,  according  to  Torfaeus,  in  his 
“  Series  Regum  Daniae,”  anno  853.  Gorm  the  Old,  king  of 
Denmark,  Harald’s  contemporary,  was  born  830.  By  the 
genealogies  of  both  these  kings,  taken  by  Torfaeus  from  the 
Codex  Flateyensis,  the  Langfedgatal,  a  genealogical  table 
preserved  in  it,  and  from  Snorre’s  Ynglinga  Saga,  both  kings 
were  the  sixth  in  descent  from  Ivar  Vidfadme.  Allowing 
seventeen  years  to  each  reign  or  descent,  we  have  the  year 
728  or  75  1  as  the  time  of  Ivar  Vidfadme.  This  is  a  genera¬ 
tion  too  early  for  the  year  787.  The  king  who  was  reigning 
at  either  of  these  dates,  728  or  751,  could  scarcely  be  landing 
for  the  first  time  in  England  in  787 ;  and  793  appears  to  be 
the  next  date  of  the  appearance  of  these  heathen  men,  and  it 
was  not  before  the  next  quarter  of  a  century  that  they  had 
any  footing  in  England. 

If  we  turn  to  the  Saxon  Chronicle,  we  find  no  ground  at  all 
for  the  inference  drawn  by  all  our  historians  from  the  passage 
under  the  date  787,  viz.  that  the  first  invasion  or  piratical 
incursion  of  the  Danes  was  in  the  year  787.  The  passage  is 
this  : — 

“  An.  dcclxxxvii.  Her  nom  Beorhtric  cyning  Offan 
dohtor  Eadburhge.  And  on  his  dagum  cwomon  aerest  III 
scipu  Nord-manna  of  Heredalande.  And  tha  se  gerefa  thaer 
to  rad.  hi  wolde  dryfan  to  thaes  cyninges  tune,  thy  the  he 
niste  hwaet  hi  wgeron.  hine  inon  of-sloh  tha.  That  waeron 
tha  aerestan  scipu  Deniscra  monna  the  Angel-cynes  lond 
gesohton.” 


366 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


“Anno  787.  Here  took  (in  marriage)  Beorhtric  the  king 
Offa  s  daughter  Eadburhga.  And  in  his  days  came  first  three 
ships  of  Northmen  of  Heredaland.  And  then  the  sheriff  rode 
thereto :  he  would  drive  them  to  this  king’s  town,  because  he 
would  inquire  what  they  were.  This  man  they  slew.  These 
were  the  first  ships  of  Danish  men  who  sought  the  English 
king’s  land.” 

1  he  following  is  the  Latin  version  of  the  passage,  given  by 
Gibson : — 

“An.  787.  Hoc  anno  cepit  (in  uxorem)  Beorhtricus  Bex 
Offae  filiam  Ead bargain.  Ejns  autem  temporibus  venerunt 
primum  tres  naves  Norwegiorum  de  Herethorum  terra.  Turn 
eo  (regis)  prsepositus  equo  vectus  illos  molitus  est  compellere 
ad  regis  villam,  propterea  quod  nesciret  unde  essent :  ibi  autem 
is  occisus  est.  Istse  prim.se  fuerant  naves  Danorum  quae 
Anglorum  nationem  peterent.” 

How  this  passage  appears  not  to  allow  of  the  strict  inter¬ 
pretation  given  to  it  by  our  historians.  It  savs  that  in  the 
year  787  Beorhtric  married  Offa’s  daughter,  and  in  his  davs 
— not  specially  in  the  year  787 — came  the  three  ships ;  but 
Beorhtric  lived  to  the  year  800.  The  three  ships  are  stated 
first  to  be  of  Northmen  or  Norwegians  of  Heredaland.  Here¬ 
daland  is  either  Hordaland,  an  ancient  district  of  Norway  of 
great  note  in  the  sagas, — so  great  that,  in  the  poetry,  king 
of  Hordaland  is  frequently  used  for  king  of  Norway, — and 
situated  where  South  Bergen  province  now  is ;  or  it  may  be 
the  country  on  the  south  side  of  the  Throndhjem  fiord,  still 
called  the  Heredaland,  or  the  Inhered,  comprehending  several 
extensive  parishes,  and  where  formerly  the  main  power  of  the 
kings  of  Norway  lay ;  or  Heredaland  may  mean  the  king’s 
demesne  lands  to  which  the  men  belonged.  In  either  inter¬ 
pretation  these  Northmen  of  Hordaland  were  strangers  on  the 
coast;  and  the  king’s  officer  went  to  inquire  what  they  were. 
But  Danes  from  Jutland  or  Slesvik,  who  had  from  the  year 
450  to  the  year  585  or  600,  when  the  kingdom  of  Mercia  was 
established,  been  yearly  coming  over  the  sea  in  colonies  from 
those  coasts  (for  the  Anglo-Saxons  all  came  from  that  coast), 
could  not  suddenly  have  lost  the  art  of  navigating  vessels  so 
^ ,  c  1 1  n  1 8  o  years  afterwards  they  would  be  a  strange 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


367 


people  to  the  Saxon  inhabitants  of  England,  whose  great¬ 
grandfathers,  in  some  of  the  latest  settled  kingdoms  of  the 
Heptarchy,  must  have  been  born  in  that  very  country.  But 
Northmen  from  Hordaland,  who  had  to  cross  the  North  sea 
at  once  from  Norway  to  Northumberland,  instead  of  coasting 
along  from  the  mouth  of  the  Eider  or  of  the  Elbe  to  the  mouth 
of  the  Rhine  and  the  coast  of  Flanders,  from  whence  a  run 
across  to  the  south-east  coast  of  England  is  an  affair  of  a 
couple  of  days,  might  very  well  be  an  unknown  and  strange 
people,  before  the  year  787,  to  the  inhabitants  of  Northumber¬ 
land.  It  is  for  the  Anglo-Saxon  scholar  to  determine  whether 
there  may  not  be  a  mistake  in  transcribing  the  original  manu¬ 
scripts  of  the  Saxon  Chronicle,  with  respect  to  the  word 
Deniscra.  If  it  could  be  omitted,  so  as  to  read  that  these 
were  the  first  ships  of  these  men, — viz.,  of  Northmen  from 
Heredaland, — who  came  to  England,  it  would  make  sense  of 
the  passage.  As  it  stands,  the  specification  of  three  ships  of 
Northmen  or  Norwegians,  from  Heredaland  or  Hordaland, 
does  not  agree  with  the  term  Danish  men ;  as  the  Danish 
kingdom  or  name  did  not  in  those  ages,  in  the  eighth  or  in 
the  ninth  century,  either  as  a  whole  or  in  parts  under  tribu¬ 
tary  kings,  extend  to  the  north  of  the  Gaut  river  in  the 
Scandinavian  peninsula.  In  the  cognate  language,  the  old 
Norse,  the  difference  of  a  letter  or  two  would  change  the 
demonstrative  pronoun  expressing  that  kingdom,  viz.,  of 
Hordaland  or  Heredaland,  into  Danish  kingdom.  If  such  a 
reading  could  be  admitted,  of  which  the  Anglo-Saxon  scholar 
only  can  judge,  it  would  both  give  sense  to  the  passage,  and 
would  agree  with  what  must  have  been  the  natural  course  of 
events, — viz.,  that  at  all  times  after  the  establishment  of  the 
Heptarchy,  as  well  as  before,  there  were  piratical  expeditions 
or  commercial  communications  between  the  mother  country 
of  Holstein,  Slesvik,  and  Jutland,  viz.,  the  Danish  kingdom 
and  the  colonies  from  it  in  England,  to  the  extent  at  least 
that  Danes  could  not  be  an  unknown  people,  and  confounded 
with  Northmen  from  the  north  of  Norway,  or  from  Horda¬ 
land.  It  is  to  be  observed  also,  that  in  793,  794,  and  in 
all  the  notices  in  the  first  half  of  the  following  century  of 
piratical  invaders  in  the  Saxon  Chronicle,  they  are  called 


368 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


heathen, "not  Danish  men,  who  maraud  in  Northumberland 
or  east  of  the  Thames ;  while  those  who  apparently  coasted 
along  the  continent  before  crossing  over,  and  ravaged  in  the 
south  and  west  of  England,  in  Kent,  Dorsetshire,  and  even 
in  Cornwall,  are  generally  called  Danes.  If  this  reading  be 
admissible,  it  would  remove  the  difficulty  with  regard  to  the 
time  when  Ivar  Vidfadme  or  his  descendant  Ragnar  Lodbrok 
marauded  in  England.  They  were  Danes,  or  people  from 
the  same  coast  from  which  the  Anglo-Saxons  themselves 
originally  came  as  marauders  and  colonists  into  England ; 
and  the  limitation  in  the  passage  of  the  Saxon  Chronicle 
under  the  year  787  would  apply,  as  the  sense  of  the  passage 
seems  to  require,  only  to  the  Northmen  from  Hordaland  or 
Heredaland,  who  first  came  in  that  year  to  the  shores  of 
England;  not  to  the  Danes  from  Jutland,  Slesvik,  and  Hol¬ 
stein,  who,  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose,  must  from  the  days  of 
Hengist  have  been  in  the  habit  of  visiting  England  from  the 
same  coast  from  which  he  and  so  many  expeditions  after  his 
sailed,  either  to  trade  with  their  kinsmen  or  plunder  them. 
We  see  no  reasonable  ground  for  believing  that  after  so  many 
naval  expeditions  to  England  from  that  coast,  during  the 
centuries  subsequent  to  the  year  450,  the  art  of  navigating 
from  the  same  coast  to  England  was  so  entirely  lost  that  in 
the  year  787  the  Danes,— that  is,  the  inhabitants  of  the  coasts 
from  which  the  Anglo-Saxons  originally  embarked, — were  an 
unknown  people  to  their  own  posterity  in  England.  But  the 
Northmen  from  Heredaland  might  very  well  be  strangers; 
and  the  year  787  might  very  well  be  the  first  of  the  appear¬ 
ance  of  those  northern  marauders,  who  immediately  after¬ 
wards  laid  waste  the  country  by  their  expeditions. — L. 


III. 

The  32nd  chapter  of  the  Knytlinga  Saga,— that  is,  of  the 
saga  of  the  family  of  Knut  or  Canute  the  Great, — is  a  very 
curious  and  important  historical  document.  It  is  a  kind  of 
statistical  account  of  the  military  force  and  organisation  of 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


369 


Denmark  in  the  time  of  Saint  Canute.  He  was  the  son  and 
successor  of  King  Svein,  a  sister’s  son  of  Canute  the  Great. 
This  Svein  was  a  son  of  the  Earl  Ulf,  who,  after  the  battle  of 
Helga  River,  was  assassinated  in  the  church  of  Saint  Lucius 
in  Eoeskilde,  in  the  winter  of  1027,  by  order  of  Canute  the 
Great;  and  to  whom  Canute’s  sister  Astrid,  a  daughter  of 
King  Svein  the  first  Danish  conqueror  of  England,  was 
married.  On  the  death  of  Canute  the  Great  in  1035,  his  son 
Hardaknut  succeeded  to  the  Danish,  and  his  son  Harald  to 
the  English  crown.  In  1040  Hardaknut,  by  the  death  of 
his  brother  Harald,  succeeded  to  England  also;  and  on  his 
own  death  in  1042  King  Magnus  the  Good  of  Norway  claimed 
the  kingdom  of  Denmark,  in  virtue  of  an  agreement  made  in 
1036  between  him  and  Hardaknut,  and  ratified  by  the  chief 
people  of  each  country,  that  the  survivor  of  the  two  kings 
should  succeed  to  the  kingdom  of  the  other  in  default  of 
heirs  male.  Earl  Svein,  however,  the  son  of  Earl  Ulf,  nephew 
of  Canute  the  Great,  and  next  heir  of  that  line,  wrested  the 
kingdom  from  the  Norwegian  king,  and  died  in  1075,  or  forty 
years  after  Canute  the  Great,  and  was  succeeded  by  his  son 
Harald  Hein,  and  on  his  death  in  1080  by  his  next  son  Saint 
Canute.  During  the  forty-five  years  between  Canute  the 
Great  and  Saint  Canute,  the  kingdom  was  in  too  distracted 
a  state,  from  the  wars  relative  to  the  succession,  for  any  such 
general  organisation  of  its  military  force  into  districts,  and 
fixed  quota  of  vessels  to  be  furnished  by  each  in  a  levy.  We 
must  go  back  for  the  origin  and  establishment  of  this  regular 
organisation  to  the  pagan  times  preceding  King  Canute  and 
his  father  Svein  Eorked-beard,  the  conqueror  of  England, 
who  was  born  a  pagan  ;  and  it  enables  us  to  account  for  their 
military  power.  The  Godords  and  Thingsteads  at  which  the 
people  within  each  circle  or  godord  assembled,  were  evidently 
the  bishoprics,  parishes,  and  churches  of  the  Christian  organi¬ 
sation  of  the  country,  with  the  numbers  of  ships  each  terri¬ 
torial  division  had  to  furnish  to  a  levy,  remaining  as  in  the 
pagan  times,  and  described  as  belonging  to  each  church-circle 
or  godord.  This  chapter  tells  us  that  the  most  southerly 
bishopric  of  Denmark  was  Heidaby,  viz.,  Slesvik,  the  old 

town  of  Heidabv  having  been  on  the  bank  of  the  Slie, 
VOL.  IV.  2  A 


370 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE 


opposite  to  tlie  present  town  of  Slesvik ;  and  that  it  had  350 
churches,  that  is,  Thingsteads,  or  head  places  of  assembling 
the  community  of  the  godords,  and  furnished  1 30  ships  to 
the  king  on  a  levy.  Ribe,  a  bishopric  in  Jutland  next  to  it, 
had  324  churches,  and  furnished  no  ships.  Aros,  a  third 
bishopric  also  in  Jutland,  had  210  churches,  and  furnished 
90  ships.  The  fourth  bishopric  was  Yiborg,  also  in  Jut¬ 
land,  which  furnished  100  ships.  It  then  describes  Limfiord, 
an  inlet  from  the  Baltic  reaching  almost  to  the  North  sea, 
and  only  divided  from  it  by  a  narrow  neck  of  sand,  over 
which  Harald  of  Norway  drew  his  vessels  when  blockaded 
by  King  Svein  Ulfson’s  fleet  in  the  fiord,  and  thus  escaped 
into  the  North  Sea.  It  then  goes  on  to  describe  the  bishoprics 
north  of  this  inlet ;  viz.,  Hiorring,  with  160  churches,  furnish¬ 
ing  as  its  quota  in  a  levy  50  ships.  The  sixth  bishopric  is 
Odense,  in  the  island  of  Fyen,  with  300  churches,  furnish¬ 
ing  100  ships.  The  seventh  is  Roeskilde,  in  the  island  of 
Seeland,  with  41 1  churches,  furnishing  120  ships;  and  the 
eighth  is  the  bishopric  of  Lund  in  Scania,  across  the  Sound, 
with  353  churches,  and  furnishing  150  ships. 

We  have  here  2358  districts,  or  churches,  furnishing  850 
ships  to  the  king  on  a  general  levy,  which  appears  to  have 
been  called  out  almost  every  summer.  From  this  minute 
account  of  the  available  naval  force  of  Denmark  alone,  we 
see  that  there  is  probably  no  exaggeration  in  the  accounts  of 
the  immense  number  of  vessels  collected  on  the  naval  expedi¬ 
tions  of  those  times.  Canute,  we  are  told  in  the  saga,  had 
1200  vessels  in  his  fleet  at  the  Battle  of  Helga  River,  which 
startles  the  historical  reader;  but  when  we  find  850  of  these 
vessels  were  only  the  regular  levy  furnished  by  Denmark, 
and  that  he  had  all  the  shipping  of  England  also  at  his  com¬ 
mand,  the  number  is  quite  credible.  These  vessels  may 
have  been  very  small ;  but  the  smallest  could  scarcely  have 
had  less  than  ten  men  of  a  standing  crew  to  row  and  manage 
them,  besides  the  fighting  men.  This  would  make  a  greater 
sea  force  than  Denmark  possesses  at  the  present  day,  includ¬ 
ing  her  German  territories  of  Holstein  and  part  of  Slesvik,  and 
the  considerable  shipping  towns  of  Altoria,  Kiel,  Flensborg 
belonging  to  it.  The  registered  seamen  belonging  to  Den- 


KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


37i 


mark,  and  available  for  the  service  of  the  crown  if  called 
on,  amount  at  present  only  to  6650  men ;  and  the  sea- 
force,  it  is  stated  by  statistical  writers,  could  not  be  raised 
to  8000  men,  without  taking  all  the  men  from  the  commercial 
marine  of  the  country.  Denmark  has  been  positively,  as 
well  as  comparatively,  a  greater  naval  power  in  the  eleventh 
than  in  the  nineteenth  century.  She  has  larger  vessels  now, 
but  fewer  sea-going  men.  She  wants,  like  all  the  Continental 
countries,  the  basis  of  a  naval  power, — a  numerous  popula¬ 
tion  engaged  in  coasting  trade,  fishing,  and  employment  with 
small  vessels ;  and  the  very  improvement  of  agriculture, 
roads,  and  means  of  living  on  land  diminishes  the  employ¬ 
ment  of  a  seafaring  coasting  population  with  them;  while 
the  very  same  improvement,  from  the  shape  of  the  country, 
diversity  of  products  in  different  quarters  of  it,  and  the  nature 
of  our  staple  products, — coal,  metals,  and  other  heavy  or 
bulky  commodities, — increases  the  employment  and  numbers 
of  a  coasting  seafaring  population  with  us.  When  the  em¬ 
ployment  of  marauding  on  the  coasts  of  other  countries,  the 
viking-trade,  fell  into  disuse,  there  was  no  employment  for 
a  seafaring  population  in  Denmark,  in  which,  from  the  simi¬ 
larity  of  products  over  all,  there  is  no  constant  demand  in  one 
quarter  for  what  another  quarter  could  spare. 

The  vessels  employed  in  these  war  expeditions  must  have 
been  of  a  size  to  keep  the  sea,  and  stow  the  arms,  water,  and 
provisions  of  a  considerable  body  of  men.  Ships  of  twenty 
benches  of  oars, — and  we  read  of  such  belonging  to  bondes, — 
carried  sixty  men  when  in  fighting  equipment;  for  we  find 
from  Erling  Skakke’s  speech,  in  chapter  6  of  Hakon  Herdi- 
breid’s  Saga,  that  three  men  belonged  to  each  oar — one  to  row, 
one  to  shoot,  and  one  to  cover  those  two  with  a  shield.  If 
we  suppose  the  whole  of  the  vessels  of  a  levy  to  have  averaged 
this  size,  about  51,000  men  would  be  the  number  raised  by  a 
general  levy.  When  we  consider  that  this  was  a  beneficial 
and  favourite  summer  employment  for  the  whole  population 
between  seed-time  and  harvest,  interfering  in  no  way  with 
their  usual  occupations  and  habits,  this  number  does  not  ap¬ 
pear  extravagantly  great ;  but  it  is  probable  that  by  far  the 
greater  proportion  of  the  vessels  of  a  levy  were  not  of  a  size 


37  2 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 

to  convey  sixty  men,  with  their  bulky  arms,  missiles,  provi¬ 
sions,  and  water,  but  were  merely  transports,  or  large  half¬ 
decked  boats.  But  such  a  class  of  vessels  could  scarcely  have 
fewer  than  ten  men  to  row  them.  If  we  allow  half  of  the 
850  vessels  to  have  been  of  this  class,  and  the  other  half  fight¬ 
ing  vessels  with  an  average  complement  of  sixty  men,  we  find 
that  about  30,000  men  may  have  been  raised  by  a  general 
levy  in  the  dominions  of  Svein  or  Canute.  This  force  ap¬ 
pears  inconsiderable ;  but  it  is  probable  that  long  after  the 
kingdoms  of  the  Heptarchy  in  England  had  been  united,  the 
force  of  the  country  as  a  whole  remained  in  a  very  ineffec¬ 
tive  state,  and  not  so  fully  organised  that  any  considerable 
body  could  be  drawn  together  suddenly  to  any  locality ;  and 
the  Danes  having  the  command  of  the  sea,  and  their  ships 
to  retire  to,  could  always  invade,  with  superior  numbers 
and  superior  supply  of  missiles,  any  part  of  the  coast  they 
pleased. — L. 


CHRONOLOGICAL  SUMMARY. 


795.  Irish  monks  in  Iceland. 

Ragnvald  the  Mountain-high  ( — 821). 

820.  Birth  of  Half  dan  the  Black. 

821.  Death  of  Ragnvald  the  Mountain-high. 

Halfdan  the  Black  becomes  king. 

Half  dan  the  Black  (822-860). 

840.  First  Norman  kingdom  established  in  Ireland. 

850.  Birth  of  Harald  Harfager. 

860.  Death  of  Halfdan  the  Black. 

Harald  Harfager  becomes  king. 

Iceland  discovered  by  Nadod,  the  Norse  viking,  and 
called  by  him  Snowland. 


Harald  Harfager  (861-930). 

861-865.  Harald’s  conquests  in  Southern  Norway. 

864.  Iceland  re-discovered  by  the  Swede  Gardar,  after  whom 

it  was  called  Gardar’s  Holm. 

865.  Conquest  of  Throndhjem. 

866.  Harald  in  Throndhjem. 

Conquest  of  Naumudal. 

867.  Harald  in  Throndhjem. 

The  first  battle  of  Solskel. 

Conquest  of  More. 

Iceland  visited  by  Raven  Floke. 

868.  Harald  in  Throndhjem. 

The  second  battle  of  Solskel. 

Ragnvald  becomes  earl  in  More. 


374  CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY". 

Death  of  King  Vemuncl. 

869.  Harald  in  Throndhjem. 

Conquest  of  the  Fiord  district. 

Fall  of  the  earls  Hakon  Griotgardson  and  Atle. 

870.  Harald  makes  an  expedition  to  Vermaland. 

Harald  conquers  Vingulmark. 

Harald  harries  in  Eanrike. 

Harald  invades  Gautland. 

872.  The  battle  of  Hafersfiord. 

874.  First  settlement  of  Iceland  by  Ingolf  and  Leif. 

876.  Harald  in  Viken. 

Greenland  seen  by  Gunbiorn,  son  of  Ulf  Krage. 

878.  Harald’s  expedition  to  the  West. 

Kagnar,  earl  of  More,  obtains  the  Orkneys. 

Sigurd  becomes  earl  of  the  Orknevs. 

890.  Death  of  Bagnvald,  earl  of  More. 

Death  of  Halfdan  Highleg  in  the  Orkneys. 

Harald’s  sons  become  rebellious. 

Eolf  Ganger  leaves  Norwav. 
goo.  Harald  makes  his  sons  kings. 

Harald’s  second  expedition  to  the  West. 

901.  Birth  of  Eirik  Blood-axe. 

914-916.  Eirik  Blood-axe  a  viking  in  the  Baltic. 

917-920.  Eirik  Blood-axe  a  viking  in  the  Western  seas. 

919.  Birth  of  Hakon  the  Good. 

922.  Eirik  Blood-axe  marries  Gunhild,  the  king’s  mother. 
930.  Eirik  Blood-axe  becomes  chief  king. 

Eirik  Blood-ccxe  (931-935)  and  Hakon  the  Good  (935-960). 

932.  Death  of  Halfdan  the  Black,  son  of  Harald. 

933.  Death  of  Harald  Harfager. 

934.  Eirik  extends  his  domain  in  Norway. 

Hakon  the  Good  comes  from  England,  and  is  accepted 
as  king  by  the  Throndhjem  people. 

935.  Hakon  visits  the  Uplands  and  Viken. 

Hakon  returns  to  Throndhjem. 

Eirik  Blood-axe  leaves  Norwav,  and  gets  a  kingdom  in 
England. 

936.  Hakon  makes  an  expedition  to  the  West,  and  afterwards 

goes  to  Throndhjem. 

940.  Death  of  Athelstan,  king  of  England. 

941.  Death  of  Eirik  Blood-axe. 

945.  Hakon  the  Good  makes  depredations  in  Denmark  and 
Gautland. 


CHRONOLOGICAL  SUMMARY. 


375 


946.  Hakon  the  Good  in  Viken. 

Trygve  Olafson  returns  from  his  viking  expedition  in 
the  West. 

Hakon  the  Good  makes  an  expedition  to  the  North. 

950.  Eeligious  conflicts  with  the  Tlirondhjem  people. 

Hakon  the  Good  in  More. 

Hakon  conquers  the  sons  of  Eirik. 

951.  Birth  of  Harald  Grenske. 

954.  The  battle  at  Eastarkalf. 

960.  Death  of  Hakon  the  Good. 

Harald  Grayskin  and  his  brothers  become  kings  in 
Norway. 

Harald  Grayskin  (961-969)  and  his  brothers ,  together  with 
Earl  Hakon  Sigurdson  (963-995). 

961.  Gunhild’s  sons  in  the  interior  of  the  country. 

Harald  Grayskin  makes  depredations  in  Ireland. 

962.  Death  of  Sigurd,  earl  of  Lade. 

Meeting  of  Earl  Hakon,  Trygve,  and  Gudrod. 

962  or  963.  Birth  of  earl  Eirik. 

963-965.  War  between  Earl  Hakon  and  the  sons  of  Gunhild. 

963.  Death  of  Trygve. 

Death  of  Gudrod. 

Harald  Grenske  takes  flight. 

Astrid,  Eirik’s  daughter,  takes  flight. 

Birth  of  Olaf  Trygveson. 

964.  Olaf  Trygveson  with  his  grandfather. 

965.  Death  of  Sigurd  Sleva. 

Harald  Grayskin  makes  an  expedition  to  Biarmaland. 

965- 966.  Olaf  Trygveson  in  Svithiod. 

966- 968.  Peace  between  Earl  Hakon  and  Gunhild’s  sons. 

967- 972.  Olaf  Trygveson  in  Eistland  (Esthonia). 

968.  Earl  Hakon  takes  flight  from  Eirik’s  sons. 

Earl  Hakon  kills  his  uncle  Griotgard. 

969.  Earl  Hakon  in  Denmark. 

Death  of  Erling  Eirikson. 

Death  of  Harald  Grayskin. 

Death  of  Gold  Harald. 

Hakon  becomes  Harald  Gormson’s  earl  in  Norway. 
970-975.  Hakon  the  Great  is  Harald  Gormson’s  earl. 
970-977.  Valdemar  king  in  Holmgard  (Novgorod). 

970.  Earl  Hakon  in  Throndbjem. 

Earl  Hakon  fights  with  Eagnfred  Eirikson. 

971.  Earl  Hakon  in  Tlirondhjem. 


376  CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 

Eagnfred  spends  the  winter  south  of  Stad. 

Battle  of  Thinganes. 

Eagnfred  flies  from  Norway. 

972.  Earl  Hakon  makes  an  expedition  to  the  North. 

Conflict  between  Earl  Eirik  and  Skopte  (Tidenda- 

skopte. 

Olaf  Xrygveson  comes  to  his  uncle  in  Gardarike  (Bussia). 
973“9Si.  Olaf  Trygveson  in  Gardarike. 

973.  Death  of  Tidendaskopte. 

Earl  Eirik  takes  flight. 

974.  Eirik  in  Denmark. 

Eirik  becomes  Harald  Gormson’s  earl  in  a  part  of 
Norway. 

975.  Emperor  Otto  II.’s  expedition  to  Denmark. 

Harald  Gormson,  Svein  Fork-beard,  and  Earl  Hakon  are 
baptized. 

The  earl  makes  depredations  in  Scania  and  Gautland, 
and  kills  Ottar,  Gautland’s  earl. 

Harald  Gormson  harries  in  Norway. 

676-985.  Earl  Hakon  independent. 

982-984.  Olaf  Trygveson  in  Vindland. 

982.  Olaf  Trygveson  marries  Geira,  Burisleif’s  daughter. 

983.  Olaf  harries  in  Scania  and  Gotland. 

984.  Death  of  Queen  Geira. 

America  (Great  Ireland)  visited  by  the  Icelander  Are 
Marson. 

Greenland  visited  by  Eirik  the  Eed. 

985- 995*  Olaf  Trygveson  in  the  Western  Isles. 

985.  Death  of  Harald  Gormson. 

986- 1014.  Svein  Fork-beard  king  in  Denmark. 

986.  America  visited  by  Biarne  Heriulfson. 

988.  Olaf  Trygveson  is  baptized  in  the  Scilly  Isles. 

Olaf  Trygveson  marries  Queen  Gyda. 

994.  Harald  Grenske  goes  to  the  East  and  visits  Smrid  the 
Proud. 

995*  I  he  J omsborg  vikings  defeated  at  Hjorungava°‘. 

Thorer  Klakke  sent  to  Dublin. 

Death  of  Harald  Grenske. 

Death  of  King  Vissavald. 

Birth  of  Olaf  the  Saint. 

Death  of  Earl  Hakon. 

Olaf  Trygveson  becomes  king  in  Norway. 


CHRONOLOGICAL  SUMMARY. 


377 


Olaf  Trygveson  (995-1000). 

998-999.  Halfred  Vandredaskald  in  Sweden. 

999  (or  1000).  Birth  of  Earl  Hakon  Eirikson. 

1000.  The  battle  of  Svold. 

Norway  divided. 

Discovery  of  America  (Vinland)  by  Leif  Eirikson. 


The  Earls  Eirik  and  Svein ,  Olaf  the  Swede ,  and  the  kings  of 

Denmark  (1001- 10 14). 

1002.  Thorvald  Eirikson’s  expedition  to  Vinland,  and  his 
death  there. 

1007.  Olaf  the  Saint  makes  expeditions  to  Denmark  and 

Sweden. 

1 007-10 10.  Thorfin  Karlsefne’s  and  Gudrid’s  attempted 
colonisation  in  Vinland. 

1008.  Olaf  the  Saint  in  Gotland. . 

Olaf  the  Saint  makes  depredations  in  Finland. 

Birth  of  Anund  Jacob. 

1009.  Olaf  the  Saint  in  Denmark. 

Olaf  harries  in  Friesland. 

Olaf  comes  to  England. 

1010- 1012.  Olaf  the  Saint  in  England. 

1 010.  Siege  of  London. 

Battle  of  Hringmara  Heath, 
ion.  Canterbury  is  conquered. 

Birth  of  Ragnvald  Brusason. 

1012.  Olaf  the  Saint  leaves  England. 

1013.  Olaf  the  Saint  in  France. 

Svein  Eork-beard  comes  to  England. 

1014.  Ethelred  II.  takes  flight  to  Normandy. 

Earl  Sigurd  of  the  Orkneys  falls  in  Brian’s  Battle. 

Olaf  the  Saint  in  Normandy. 

Olaf  the  Saint  goes  to  England. 

Olaf  comes  to  Norway,  and  receives  homage  as  king  in 
the  Uplands. 

Olaf  the  Saint  (10 15-1030). 

1015.  Olaf  the  Saint  and  Earl  Svein  in  Throndhjem. 

The  battle  of  Nesiar. 

Earl  Svein  takes  flight  to  Svithiod  and  dies. 


378  CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 

The  Swedish  tax-collectors  come  to  Throndhjem. 
Birth  of  Eystein  Orre  (son  of  Thorbjorn  Arnason). 

1 01 6.  Death  of  Ethelred  II. 

Canute  the  Great’s  treaty  with  Edmund. 

Death  of  Edmund. 

Canute  sole  ruler  in  England. 

Olaf  the  Saint  in  Nidaros. 

Olaf  makes  an  expedition  to  the  South. 

Olaf  sends  a  message  to  Hialte. 

Olaf  becomes  reconciled  with  Erling  Skialgson. 

Olaf  in  Viken. 

Olaf  takes  Ranrike. 

Olaf  founds  Sarpsborg. 

1016-1022.  Einar  Tambaskelfer  in  Svithiod. 

1017.  Olaf  in  Sarpsborg. 

Thrond  the  White  is  slain  by  the  people  of  Jamtaland. 
Eyvind  Urarhorn  makes  an  expedition  to  the  East. 
Death  of  Hroe  the  White. 

Gudleik  Gerske  makes  an  expedition  to  the  East  and 
perishes. 

Olaf  treats  with  Earl  Ragnvald. 

Hialte  comes  to  Norway,  goes  with  Biorn  the  Marshal 
to  Ragnvald,  and  then  proceeds  to  King  Olaf  the 
Swede. 

1018.  Olaf  the  Saint  conquers  the  kings  of  the  Uplands. 
Death  of  Sigurd  Syr. 

Hialte  with  Olaf  the  Swede. 

Biorn  the  Marshal  and  Earl  Ragnvald  at  the  Thing. 
Olaf  the  Saint  in  Hordaland  and  Tunsberg. 

King  Hrorek’s  ambush. 

Hrorek  is  taken  to  Iceland. 

Hialte  returns  to  Iceland. 

Olaf  the  Saint  makes  an  expedition  in  vain  to  Ko- 
nungahella. 

Eyvind  Urarhorn  makes  a  viking  expedition  to  the 
West. 

Battle  of  Ulfrek’s  fiord. 

1019.  Hrorek  with  Thorgils  Arason. 

Olaf  the  Saint  in  Sarpsborg. 

Sigvat  the  skald  goes  to  Gautland. 

Olaf  the  Saint  marries  Astrid,  Olaf’s  daughter. 

Ingigerd  is  married  to  Jarisleif,  and  Earl  Ragnvald 
^  accompanies  her  to  Gardarike. 

Emund  the  lagman  visits  Olaf  the  Swede. 


CHRONOLOGICAL  SUMMARY. 


379 


Anund  Jacob  chosen  king. 

Olaf  the  Saint  and  Olaf  the  Swede  reconciled. 

Eyvind  Urarhorn  is  killed  by  Earl  Einar  of  the 
Orkneys. 

Olaf  the  Saint  goes  to  Throndhjem. 

1020.  Hrorek  visits  Gudmund  Eyjolfson. 

Olaf  the  Saint  in  Nidaros. 

Thorkel  is  fostered  by  Olaf. 

Earl  Thorfin  visits  Olaf. 

Death  of  Earl  Einar. 

Olaf  visits  Naumudal  and  Halogaland. 

Asmund  Grankelson  becomes  Olaf’s  hirdman. 

1021.  Hrorek  at  Kalfskin. 

Olaf  in  Nidaros,  and  Thorkel  with  him. 

Earl  Bruse  with  his  son  Kagnvald  and  Earl  Thorfin  in 
Norway. 

The  Orkneys  become  tributary  to  Norway. 
Disagreement  between  Olaf  and  the  Throndhjem  people. 
Death  of  Hrorek. 

Olaf  travels  through  More  and  Baumsdal  against  the 
Upland  people. 

Meeting  with  Dale-Gudbrand. 

The  Upland  people  are  baptized. 

1022.  Death  of  Olaf  the  Swede. 

Ottar  the  Black  visits  Olaf  the  Saint  in  Hedemark. 
Olaf  in  Tunsberg. 

Einar  Tambaskelfer  returns  from  Sweden. 

Asbiorn  Selsbane  makes  an  expedition  to  the  South  to 
buy  corn. 

1023.  Olaf  in  Sarpsborg. 

Meeting  with  Erling  Skialgson. 

o  OO 

Olaf  at  Augvaldsnes. 

Asbiorn  kills  Thorer  Sel. 

Olaf  in  Hordaland,  Yos,  and  Sogn. 

Einar  Tambaskelfer  goes  to  England. 

Olaf  goes  through  Yalders  and  the  Uplands,  and  comes 
to  Throndhjem. 

1024.  Olaf  in  Nidaros. 

Birth  of  Magnus  the  Good. 

Death  of  Asbiorn  Selsbane. 

Karle  from  Langey  becomes  a  hirdman. 

Thorarin  Nefiulfson  is  sent  to  Iceland. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  Farey  Isles  become  Olaf’s 
subjects. 


38o  CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 

Einar  Tambaskelfer  returns  to  Norway. 

Thorarin  returns  from  Iceland. 

1025.  Olaf  the  Saint  in  the  Uplands. 

Ketil  Kalf  marries  Olaf’s  sister  Gunhild. 

Thord  Guthormson  marries  Olaf’s  aunt  Isrid. 

Death  of  Gudmund  Eyjolfson. 

Canute  the  Great’s  messengers  come  to  Olaf  in  Tunsberg. 
The  Icelanders  come  to  Olaf. 

Erling’s  sons  Aslak  and  Skialg  proceed  to  Canute. 
Olaf’s  message  to  Anund. 

1026.  Olaf  in  Sarpsborg. 

Anund  in  West  Gautland. 

Canute  in  Denmark. 

Canute  sends  a  message  to  Anund. 

Karle,  Gunstein,  and  Thorer  Hund  go  to  Biarmaland. 
Death  of  Karle. 

Canute  goes  to  England. 

Hardaknut  and  Earl  Ulf  rule  in  Denmark. 

Olaf  the  Saint  summons  to  him  all  his  hirdmen  from 
the  Farey  Isles. 

Olaf  and  Anund  meet  at  Konungahella. 

Olaf  goes  to  the  North. 

Death  of  Thoralf  of  Dimun. 

Geller  Thorkilson  is  sent  to  Iceland. 

Sigvat  the  skald  goes  on  a  commercial  voyage  to 
Yalland. 

1027.  Olaf  in  Nidaros. 

Stein  Skoptason  takes  flight  to  Thorberg  Arnason,  and 
spends  the  winter  with  Erling  Skialgson. 

Thorod  Snorrason  goes  to  Jamtaland  and  meets  Arnliot 
Gelline. 

Dispute  between  Asmund  Grankelson  and  Harek  of 
Thiotta. 

The  sons  of  Arne  and  Erling  treat  with  Olaf. 

Stein  and  Thorer  Hund  go  to  Canute  in  England. 

The  ship  “  Visund  ”  is  built. 

Olaf  goes  to  the  south. 

Karl  of  More  is  sent  to  the  Farey  Isles. 

The  Althing  in  Iceland  refuses  Olaf’s  claims. 

Thorod  returns  to  Iceland. 

Erling  and  his  sons  go  to  England. 

Sigvat  comes  to  England. 

Olaf  harries  Seeland  and  Scania. 

Canute  conies  to  Denmark. 


CHRONOLOGICAL  SUMMARY. 


381 


Anund  and  Olaf  are  united. 

Canute’s  misfortune  in  Helga  River. 

(September.)  Canute  causes  the  murder  of  Earl  Ulf. 
Olaf  returns  through  Gautland. 

Erlin"  Skialsson  comes  with  Canute’s  messengers  to 

O  O 

Norway. 

1028.  Olaf  in  Sarpsborg,  later  in  the  Uplands. 

Thorer  and  Griotgard,  Olver’s  sons,  die. 

Sigvat  the  skald  returns  to  Olaf. 

Olaf  in  Tunsberg. 

Death  of  Karl  of  More. 

Grankel  burnt  in  his  house  in  Halogaland  by  Harek. 
Canute  subjugates  Norway,  and  appoints  Earl  Hakon 
regent. 

1029.  Olaf  sails  to  the  North. 

Death  of  Erling  Skialgson. 

Death  of  Aslak  Fitiaskalle. 

Olaf  goes  through  the  Uplands  to  Svithiod. 

Canute  goes  to  England,  where  he  is  visited  by  Kalf 
Arnason. 

Olaf  in  Nerike. 

Olaf  goes  to  Gardarike. 

Earl  Hakon  goes  to  England. 

Death  of  Earl  Hakon. 

America  visited  by  Gudleik  Gudlaugson. 

1030.  Biorn  the  Marshal  visits  Olaf  in  Gardarike. 

Olaf  goes  to  Gotland. 

Einar  Tambaskelfer  goes  to  England. 

Olaf  in  Svithiod. 

Olaf  goes  to  Norway. 

(July.)  Battle  of  Stiklestad. 

Death  of  Olaf. 

Svein  Knutson  becomes  king  in  Norway. 

Svein  Knutson  (1030—1034). 

1031.  Harald  Hardrade  in  Gardarike. 

The  people  begin  to  talk  about  Olaf  s  sanctity. 

Olaf’s  bones  are  removed. 

1034.  Einar  Tambaskelfer  and  Kalf  Arnason  visit  Magnus 

the  Good  in  Gardarike. 

1035.  Magnus  the  Good  comes  through  Svithiod  to  Norway. 
Svein  takes  flight. 

Death  of  Canute  the  Great. 

Harald  becomes  king  in  England. 


382 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


Magnus  the  Good  (1035-1047). 


1036.  Death  of  Svein  Knutson. 

Magnus  and  Hardaknut  meet. 

Death  of  Gunhild,  Canute  the  Great’s  daughter. 
1040.  Death  of  Harald  in  England. 

Hardaknut  becomes  Harald’s  successor. 

1042.  Death  of  Hardaknut. 


Hardaknut  succeeded  by  Edward  the  Confessor. 
Magnus  is  accepted  as  king  in  Denmark. 

Magnus  appoints  Svein,  son  of  Ulf  and  Astrid,  earl 

1043.  Magnus  in  Norway. 

Svein  in  Denmark. 

Svein  takes  the  name  of  “  king.” 

Magnus  in  Vindland. 

Svein  flies  to  Svithiod. 

(August.)  Battle  of  Lyrskogs  Heath. 

Battle  of  Be. 

1044.  Magnus  in  Jutland. 

Battle  of  Aros. 

I045-  Harald  Hardrade  in  Gardarike. 

Harald  marries  Ellisif. 

Harald  in  Svithiod. 


1046. 


1047. 


Battle  at  Helganes. 

Svein  takes  flight  to  Svithiod,  and  meets  Harald. 
Magnus  in  Norway. 

Harald  and  Svein  in  Svithiod. 

Harald  and  Svein  make  depredations  in  Denmark. 
Magnus  comes  to  Denmark. 

Aihanee  a,nd  division  of  the  kingdom  between  Magnus 
and  Harald.  0 

Harald  and  Magnus  in  Norway. 

Svein  in  Denmark. 


DeaathdofMagnusnUS  depredations  in  Den™rk. 
Svein  becomes  king  in  Denmark. 


Harold  Hardrade  (1047-1066). 

1048.  Svein  in  Denmark. 

Harald  marries  Thora,  Thorberg’s  daughter. 
Harald  harries  in  Denmark. 

1049.  Harald  in  Norway. 

Harald  goes  to  Denmark. 


CHRONOLOGICAL  SUMMARY. 


383 


1050.  Harald  harries  in  Denmark. 

Death  of  Einar  Tambaskelfer  and  of  his  son  Eindride. 

1062.  Harald  in  Nidaros. 

Harald  goes  to  the  Gant  River. 

Harald  defeats  Svein  at  Nis  River. 

1063.  Svein  in  Denmark. 

Harald  in  Oslo. 

.1064.  Harald  in  Oslo. 

Earl  Hakon  Ivarson  of  Vermaland  makes  an  expedi¬ 
tion  to  Norway. 

Earl  Hakon  in  Gautland. 

Harald  and  Svein  become  reconciled. 

Harald  goes  up  the  river  to  Lake  Vener  and  defeats 
the  Gauts. 

Harald  Godwinson  visits  Normandy. 

1065.  Harald  in  the  Uplands. 

Earl  Toste  takes  flight  to  Flanders. 

1066.  Death  of  Edward  the  Confessor. 

Death  of  Ulf  the  Marshal. 

Harald  goes  to  England. 

Battle  at  Stanford  Bridge. 

Death  of  Harald  and  of  his  daughter  Maria. 

Battle  of  Hastings. 

Death  of  King  Steinkel  in  Sweden. 

Magnus  (1067-1069)  and  Olaf  Kyrre  (1068-1093). 

Harald’ s  sons. 

1067.  Olaf  in  the  Orkneys. 

Magnus  in  Norwav. 

1068.  1069.  Magnus  and  Olaf  kings. 

1069.  Death  of  Magnus. 

1076.  Death  of  Svein  Astridson. 

1089.  Birth  of  Eystein  Maguuson. 

1090.  Birth  of  Sigurd  the  Crusader. 

1093.  Death  of  Olaf  Kyrre. 

Hakon  Magnuson  (1094)  and  Magnus  Barefoot  (1 094-1 103). 

1094.  Both  of  the  kings  in  Nidaros. 

Death  of  Hakon. 

1095.  Magnus  in  Viken. 

Magnus  harries  in  Denmark. 

Thorer  of  Steig  raises  troops  against  Magnus. 

1099.  Birth  of  Olaf  Magnuson. 

1 100.  Magnus’s  expedition  to  Gautland. 


384  CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 

1 10 1.  First  battle  at  Foxerne. 

Second  battle  at  Foxerne. 

Treaty  of  Peace. 

1102.  Skopte  Ogmundson  and  bis  sons  make  an  expedition 

to  the  Mediterranean  Sea. 

Magnus  makes  an  expedition  to  the  West. 

1 103.  Magnus  in  Ireland. 

Skopte,  the  first  of  all  the  Northmen  to  pass  Norvasund. 
Death  of  Magnus. 


Sigurd  the  Crusader  (1 1 04-1 130),  Ey stein  (1 104-1 123) 
and  Olaf  (1 104-1 1 15),  Magnus's  sons. 

1 107.  Sigurd  begins  his  expeditions  to  the  South. 

1 108.  Sigurd  in  England  and  in  Valland. 

1 109.  Sigurd  in  Galicia,  Spain,  Formeutera,  Iviza,  Minorca, 

and  Sicily. 

1 1 10.  Sigurd  comes  to  Jerusalem  and  returns  home. 

1 1 1 5.  Death  of  King  Olaf. 

1 123.  Death  of  King  Eystein. 

1 124.  Eclipse  of  the  sun. 

1 127.  The  Castle  church  built  in  Konungahella. 

1 1 30.  Death  of  Sigurd  the  Crusader. 

The  kingdom  is  divided  between  Magnus  and  Harald. 

Magnus  the  Blind ,  Sigurd's  son  (1131-1135)  and  Harald 
Gilley  Magnus's  son  (1 131-1136). 

1134.  Magnus  and  Harald  in  Nidaros. 

Battle  of  Fyrisleif. 

1135.  Magnus  and  Harald  in  Bergen. 

Magnus  is  made  blind. 

Death  of  Bishop  Beinald  in  Stavanger. 

The  Yinds  destroy  Konungahella. 

Birth  of  Inge  Haraldson. 

The  last  representative  of  the  male  line  of  the  descen¬ 
dants  of  William  the  Conqueror  dies  out. 

1 1 36.  Sigurd  Slembe  claims  the  crown. 

Sigurd  (1137-1155),  Inge  (1 137-1161),  Eystein  (1142-1157) 
and  Magnus  ( — 1 142),  Harold's  sons. 

1137.  Death  of  Harald  Gille. 

Sigurd  takes  Magnus  the  Blind  out  of  the  cloister. 


CHRONOLOGICAL  SUMMARY. 


385 


Magnus  in  the  Uplands. 

Battle  of  Mynne. 

Magnus  takes  flight. 

o  o 

Earl  Karl  Sunason  makes  an  unsuccessful  attack  on 
Norway. 

Magnus  the  Blind  and  Eirik  Eimune  attack  Norway 
unsuccessfully. 

Sigurd  Slembe  plunders  in  the  Danish  waters  and  on 
the  Gaut  river. 

1138.  Sigurd  Slembe  in  Alaborg. 

Sigurd  and  Magnus  in  Lister. 

1139.  Magnus  in  Biarkey  with  Vidkun  Jonson. 

Sigurd  in  the  cave  near  Tjaldasund. 

Inge  asks  his  brother  Sigurd  for  help. 

Death  of  Sigurd  Slembe. 

Death  of  Magnus  the  Blind. 

1142.  Eystein,  Harald  Gille’s  son,  comes  from  Scotland. 

1 147.  Birth  of  Hakon,  son  of  Sigurd  and  Thora. 

1148.  Birth  of  Hakon  Herdibreid  Sigurdson. 

1152.  Cardinal  Nikolas  comes  to  Norway. 

1 1 53-1  t 57.  Jon,  Norway’s  first  archbishop. 

1153.  Eystein  makes  an  expedition  to  the  West. 

1155.  The  kings  meet  in  Bergen. 

Death  of  Sigurd  Haraldson. 

1 156.  Eystein  and  Inge  meet  at  the  Seleys. 

Birth  of  Magnus  Erlingson. 

1157.  Death  of  Eystein. 

Hakon  goes  to  Gautland. 


Inge  Haraldson  ( — 1161)  and  Hakon  Herdibreid  Sigurdson 

(1157-1162). 

1158-1188.  Eystein  archbishop  in  Norway. 

1158.  Hakon  comes  to  Konungahella. 

Gregorius  Dagson  defeats  Hakon’s  people. 

1159.  Hakon  goes  to  Throndhjem. 

Hakon  sails  to  Bergen  and  Viken. 

Battle  at  the  Gaut  river. 

Hakon  takes  flight. 

1160.  Inge  in  Viken. 

1 16 1.  Battle  at  Eors. 

Death  of  Gregorius. 

Battle  of  Oslo. 

Death  of  Inge. 

VOL.  IV.  2  B 


386 


CHRONICLE  OF  THE  KINGS  OF  NORWAY. 


Magnus  Erlingson  becomes  king  and  goes  with  his 
father  to  Denmark. 

Hakon  is  defeated  at  Tunsberg. 

Hakon  Hcrdibreid  ( — 1162)  and  Magnus  Erlingson 

(1 162-1 184). 

1162.  Hakon  in  Throndhjem. 

Battle  of  Sek. 

Death  of  Hakon  Herdibreid. 

Magnus  becomes  king  of  all  Norway. 

Sigurd  Sigurdson  collects  an  army  in  the  Uplands. 

1 163.  Magnus  and  Erling  in  Tunsberg. 

Battle  of  Re. 

Deatli  of  Earl  Sigurd  of  Reyr. 

Erling  and  Sigurd,  the  foster-son  of  Markus,  at  Konun- 
gahella. 

Death  of  Sigurd. 

Death  of  Markus. 

1164.  Erling  inflicts  punishment  on  the  inhabitants  of  His- 

ing  Isle. 

Erling  in'  Tunsberg. 

O  O 

Magnus  crowned. 

Erling  resents  King  Valdemar’s  claims. 

O  O 

1165.  Erling  in  Bergen. 

Yaldemar  conies  to  Viken  with  an  army. 

Erling  harries  in  Denmark. 

o 

Kristin  the  king’s  daughter  visits  Yaldemar. 

o  o 

1166.  Kristin  summons  Erling  in  Denmark,  where  he  be¬ 

comes  reconciled  with  Yaldemar. 

Olaf  Gludbrandson  and  Sigurd  Agnhot  collect  a  force. 

1167.  Erling  in  Oslo. 

Battle  of  Rydjokul. 

1 168.  Olaf’s  army  in  the  Uplands  and  Yiken. 

Erling  conquers  Olaf  at  Stanger. 

1 169.  Olaf  in  Alaborg. 

1174.  Eystein  Eysteinson  collects  an  army  of  Birkibeins  in 
Yiken. 

1 1 7 5- 1 176.  Birkibeins  in  Yiken  and  Throndhjem. 

1177.  Birkibeins  in  Nidaros  and  the  Uplands. 

Magnus  in  Tunsberg. 

Battle  of  Re. 

Death  of  Eystein. 

1184  Death  of  Magnus  Erlingson. 


INDEX  OF 


PERSONS 


Aal,  Jacob,  i.  55,  251,  259,  325  ;  ii.  2 07 
Absalon,  Archbishop,  iv.  335 
Adalbert,  i.  37,  177 
Adalbrikt,  priest  (Aftalbrikt),  iv.  237 
Adam  of  Bremen,  i.  no,  114,  177,  224; 

ii.  217;  iii.  321  ;  iv.  361 
Adils,  king  in  Svithiod  (ASils),  i.  307- 
309 ;  ii.  16,  50  ;  iii.  237 
Adrian,  Pope  (Adrianus),  iv.  289 
ASgir,  i.  256 

Afrafaste  (Afrafasti),  iii.  223,  228,  245, 
257 

Age,  father  of  Ozur  (Agi),  ii.  197 
Agnar,  son  of  Hroar,  i.  31 
Agnar,  son  of  Sigtryg  (Agnarr),  i.  326 
Agnar,  son  of  Yngvar,  i.  313,  315 
Ague,  Dagson  (Agni),  i.  293,  294,  315 
Agricola,  i.  10  , 

Ake,  the  bonde  (Aki),  i.  358-360 
Ake,  son  of  Vagn,  a  Jomsborg  viking, 
ii.  1 19 

Ale  the  Bold  (Ali),  i.  301 
Ale  of  the  Uplands,  i.  308,  309 
Ale  Uskeynd  (Ali  uskeyndr),  iv.  284 
Alexander  the  Great,  i.  94 
Alf  Alrekson  (Alfr),  king  in  Sweden,  i. 
295-297 

Alf  Askmand  (AskmaSr),  ii.  38-42 
Alf  Hrode  or  Rode,  son  of  Ottar  Bir- 
ting  (Alfr  hroSi),  iv.  238,  281,  331 
Alf  Yngvarson,  i.  313,  316 
Alfarin  (Alfarin  n),  i.  328 
Alfgeir,  King  (Alfgeirr),  i.  329  f 
Alfhild,  a  daughter  of  Alfarin  (Alf- 
hildr),  i.  328 

Alfhild,  the  king’s  slave-woman,  iii. 
68,  69,  302,  306 

Alfifa,  daughter  of  Earl  Alfrun  and 
mother  of  King  Svein  (Alfifa),  iii. 
276-287 

Alfred  the  Great,  i.  15,  42,  65,  92,  130, 
l66>  325,  392 ;  iii.  92 
Alfrun,  Earl  (Alfrunn),  iii.  276 
Alfvine  (Alfvini),  ii.  113-115 
Algaute,  King  (Algauti),  i.  313,  314 
Allogia,  Queen,  ii.  79 

Alof  (Alof),  daughter  of  Harald  Har- 
fager,  i.  366,  378,  391 
Alof,  daughter  of  Asbjorn,  ii.  66 
Alof,  daughter  of  Bodvar,  ii.  181 


Alof,  wife  of  Geirthiof,  i.  307,  308 
Alof  (Olof),  daughter  of  Olaf  Skygne, 

i-  323 

Alrek  ( Alrekr),  Swedish  king,  i.  294-296 
Ainunde  (Amuudi)  Arnason,  iii.  32 
Amunde  Gyrdson,  iv.  215-219,  233, 
246,  285 

Amunde  of  Ilrossey,  iii.  7,  8 
Anderson,  Joseph,  i.  27 
Anderson,  R.  B.,  i.  23,  27,  46,  100,  118, 
270 

Andreas,  father  of  Pal,  iv.  332 
Andreas,  Simonson,  iv.  242,  265,  282 
Andres  the  Deaf,  iv.  207 
Andres  Brunson,  iv.  195-204 
Andres  Guthormson,  iv.  250 
Andres  Kelduskit  (kelduskitr),  iv.  225 
Andrew,  Saint,  ii.  273 
Ane  or  Aun  (Ani  or  Aun),  i.  300-303  ; 
iv.  357 

Angelo,  Michael,  i.  12 
Anglo-Saxons,  i.  vi.,  3-21,  30-46,  79, 
86,  92,  119,  121,  129-134,  142,  154, 
161,  164,  369,  382,  392;  ii.  7  ;  iv.  93, 
366-368  ^ 

An  Skyte  (Ann  skyti),  of  Jamtaland, 
ii.  200 

Anson,  Lord,  i.  200 
Arabs,  iii.  21 1 
Arctander,  i.  187 
Are  (Ari)  Einarson,  iv.  231 
Are  Marson,  ii.  381 
Are  Thorgeirson,  iv.  339 
Are  Thorgilson  Frode,  i.  v.,  29,  32,  36- 
40,  262,  265-267;  ii.  88  ;  iii.  198,  286 
Arinbjorn  (Arinbjorn),  ii.  86,  88 
Ariosto,  i.  12 

Arnbjorn  Ambe  (Arnbjorn  Ambi),  iv. 
232 

Arnbjorn  Arnason,  iii.  32,  176,  204 
Arne  Arnason  (Arni  Arnason),  iii.  32, 
114-117,  199,  280,  288 
Arne  Arumodson,  iii.  32,  33,  165,  191, 
260 

Arne  Brigdarskalle  (brigSarskalli),  iv. 
302 

Arne  Fjoruskeif  (fjoruskeifr),  iv.  115, 
157,  158 

Arne  Frirekson,  iv.  292 
Arne  Magnusen,  i.  216,  248 


383 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


Arne  of  Stodreim,  iv.  239,  257,  299, 
3°o,  312 

Arne  Sturla,  son  of  Snsebjorn,  iv.  236, 
261 

Arnfid  or  Arnfin  (Arnfidr  or  Arnfiunr) 
Thorfinson,  ii.  4,  13,  90 
Arnfin  Arnmodson,  iii.  260 
Arnfin  from  Sogn,  ii.  201 
Arnkel  ( Arukell)  Torfeinarson,  ii.  7,  8  ; 
iii.  4 

Arnliot  Gelline  ( Arnljotr  Gellini),  ii. 

200  ;  iii.  130-133,  244-257 
Arnmod  ( ArnmoSr,  iii.  32 
Arnor,  the  earls’  skald  (Arnorr  jarla- 
skald),  ii.  201,  249  ;  iii.  5,  23,  67,  294, 
297,  299,  318,  319,  324,  328,  330, 
338-342,  346,  409 ;  iv.  7,  47,  48 
Aruvid  (Arnvibr)  the  Blind,  ii.  404-409 
Arnvid,  King,  i.  353,  35+ 

Asa  (Asa),  Eystein’s  daughter,  i.  324 
Asa,  Ingjald’s  daughter,  i.  320,  321 
Asa,  Earl  Hakon’s  daughter,  i.  362 
Asa  the  Fair,  iv.  337 
Asa,  daughter  of  Harald,  i.  328,  329,  331 
Asas,  the  Asgard  gods,  i.  271-279  ;  iii. 
27 ;  iv.  129 

Asbjorn  (Asbjorn)  of  Forland,  iv.  304 
Asbjorn  Jalda,  iv.  284 
Asbjorn,  Earl,  i.  354 
Asbjorn,  lenderman,  iv.  188,  189 
Asbjorn  of  Medalhus,  ii.  22,  25 
Asbjorn  Sigurdson  Selsbane,  iii.  48-73, 
97,  249 

Asbjorn  Snara,  iv.  335 
Asbjorn  Thorbergson,  ii.  166,  200 
Asbjorn  oi  Yrjar,  ii.  66 
Asgaut  (Asgautr)  the  bailiff,  ii.  316- 
3i9 

Asgaut,  Earl,  i.  354 
Ashild  (Ashildr),  i.  367 
Askel  (Askell),  father  of  Aslak  Fitja- 
skalle,  ii.  151  ;  iii.  45 
Askel,  slain  by  Thiostolf,  iv.  221 
Aslak  (Aslakr)  of  Aurland,  iv.  77 
Aslak  Erlendson,  iv.  257 
Aslak  Erlingson,  ii.  271,  280;  iii.  88, 
i9°,  395  i  iv.  224 
Aslak  of  Finey,  iii.  220,  262 
Aslak  Fitjaskalle  (fitjaskalli),  ii.  152  ; 

iii.  45-47,  189-193 
Aslak  Hakonson,  iv.  217 
Aslak  Hane  (hani),  iv.  163-165 
Aslak  Holmskalle  (holmskalli),  ii.  129 
Aslak  Jonson  Unge  (ungi),  iv.  261,  278 
Aslaug  (Aslaug),  daughter  of  Sigurd 
Orm,  i.  ,335 

Asmund  (Asmundr)  Grankelson,  iii.  26, 
70-73,  123-125,  178,  308 
Asmund  Ssemundson,  iv.  195,  201 
Asmund,  son  of  King  Svein’s  sister,  iii. 
405,  406 

Asolf  (Asolfr)  Skulason,  iv.  54,  55,  96. 
Asta  (Asta),  daugliterof  Gudbrand,  ii. 
133-136,  158,  249,  251,  281-287,  355- 
3571  iih  81 


Astrid  (AstriSr),  daughter  of  Burisleif, 
ii.  100,  120,  209,  225 
Astrid,  daughter  of  Eirik  Bjodaskalle, 
ii.  72-78,  149,  181,  335 
Astrid,  daughter  of  the  Swedish  King 
Olaf,  ii.  384,  393,  395-397,  404  5  iii- 
169,  199,  200,  217,  220,  221,  295, 
296,  302,  305,  306 

Astrid,  Trygve’s  daughter,  ii.  149,  154, 

I55  >  iii-  3 67 

Astrid,  the  Danish  King  Svein’s 
daughter,  iii.  99,  319  ;  iv.  369 
Astrid,  daughter  of  Ogmund,  iv.  219 
Athelstan,  king  of  England  (ASal- 
steinn),  i.  65,  103-108,  392-394;  ii. 
3,  6,  7,  9,  36,  48,  88,  164,  166 ;  iii. 
3X5 

Atle  Mjove  (Atli  mjovi),  i.  334,  356 

Atle  the  Icelander,  iii.  329 

Atte  (Atti)  the  Dull,  of  Vermaland,  ii. 

400,  401,  405 ;  iii.  353 
Audbjorn  (AuSbjorn),  King,  i.  353-355 
Aud  (Auftr)  the  Wealthy,  i.  369 
Aude  (AuSi)  the  Rich,  i.  287 
Audun  (Au<5un),  i.  279 
Audun,  son  of  Hal,  iv.  267 
Audun  Raude  (rauSi),  iv.  241 
Augvald  (Ogvaldr),  ii.  162 
Aun  ( see  Ane) 

Avaldamon,  King,  i.  207 
Avang,  an  Icelander,  i.  208 

Baglers,  i.  244 ;  iv.  349,  350 
Balder  (Baldr),  the  god,  i.  275  ;  ii.  2 
Baldwin  (Baldvini),  iv.  27,  115,  125- 
127 

Bard  (BarSr)  White,  ii.  295 
Bard,  the  father  of  King  Inge,  iv.  55 
Bard  Jokulson,  iii.  203 
Bard  the  priest,  iii.  in 
Bard  Standale  (staudali)  son  of  Bryn- 
jolf,  iv.  260,  332 

Bard  Svarte  (svarti),  son  of  Atle,  iii. 

329 

Bard  Herjulfson,  ii.  230 
Bartholinus,  i.  81 
Baugeid  (BaugeiSr),  iv.  287 
Baxter,  Mrs.  Elizabeth,  i.  xiv. 

Baylie,  Dr.,  i.  221 

Bede,  the  Venerable,  i.  14,  15,  21,  32, 

33 »  42,  131 

Beintein  (Benteinn),  son  of  Kolbein,  iv. 

224,  232,  235 
Bendikt,  iv.  217 
Benzelius,  i.  84 
Beorhtric,  iv.  366 
Bera,  Queen,  i.  295,  296 
Berdlukare  (BerSlukari),  i.  355 
Berg  (Bergr),  iii.  144. 

Bergliot  (Bergljot),  daughter  of  Hakon 
the  Earl,  ii.  95,  269  ;  iii.  45,  395,  399 
Bergliot,  daughter  of  Halfdan,  iii.  399, 
402 

Bergliot,  daughter  of  Earl  Thorer,  i. 
39i  I  ii-  *5 

Bergliot  (Bergljotr)  Ivarson,  iv.  281 


INDEX  OF  PEKSONS. 


Bergthor  (Bergen  )  Bestil  (bestill),  ii. 
201 

Bergthor  of  Lundar,  ii.  141 
Bergthor,  sou  of  Mas,  iv.  231 
Bergthor  Sveinson,  iv.  146 
Bernhard,  Duke,  iii.  326 
Berse  (Bersi)  the  Strong,  ii.  200 
Berse  Skaldtorfuson,  i.  256 ;  ii.  249, 
308  ;  iii.  66 

Biadmynia  (BjaSmynja),  daughter  of 
Myrkjartan,  iv.  95 
Biadok  (Bjaftok),  iv.  237 
Biarne  (Bjarni)  Herjulfson,  i.  201,  202, 
205,  212;  ii.  230-233 
Biarne  Gullbrarskald  (gullbrarskald), 
ii.  71,  249;  iii.  191,  205,  261,  294, 

3°L  311.  343 

Biarne  the  Bad,  iv.  322-324 
Biarne,  son  of  Sigurd,  iv.  254 
Biorn  (Bjorn)  the  bailiff,  iii.  169-172 
Biorn  Buk  (bukkr),  iv.  239 
Biorn  the  marshal,  ii.  314-387 ;  iii. 

199,  207-21 1,  260,  261 
Biorn,  son  of  Egil,  iv.  217,  218 
Biorn,  son  of  Eirik,  i.  377 
Biorn  Eiterkveisa,  ii.  74,  75 
Biorn  the  chapman,  i.  367,  385,  387, 
388,  389,  395 

Biorn  Krephende  (Krepphendi),  iv.  73, 
76,  81,  91-94 

Biorn  Nikolason,  iv.  282,  283 
Biorn,  king  of  Sweden,  ii.  366,  368 
Biorn  of  Studla,  ii.  200 
Biorn er,  i.  84 

Birger  (Birgir)  Earl,  iv.  247,  341,  342 
Birkibeins  (birkibeinar),  i.  244;  iv.  342- 


35° 

Bjorn  son,  Bjornstjerue,  iv.  215 
Blotsvein  (Blotsveinn),  iv.  155 
Bodmod,  i.  31 

Bodvar  (BoSvarr),  ii.  181,  335  ;  iii.  236 
Bolle  (Bolli)  Tliorlaksou,  ii.  184 
Bolverk  (Bolverkr),  iii.  346,  348,  349, 
3 77,  384 

Borghild  (Borghildr),  daughter  of  Dag, 
iv.  148,  149 

Borghild,  daughter  of  Hakon,  iv.  207 
Bork  (Botkr),  from  the  Fjords,  ii.  200 
Botolf  (Botolf),  ii.  25 
Bove  (Bovi),  320 

Brage  (Bragi),  the  god,  i.  316  ;  ii.  2, 
45,  46,  67,  299 
Brage  the  Old,  i.  275 
Brand  (Brandr)  the  bishop,  iv.  324 
Brand  the  Generous,  ii.  181 
Brenne-Flose  (Brennuflosi),  ii.  181 
Brian  (Brjann),  king  of  Munster,  iii.  5 
Brigida  (BrigiSa),  daughter  of  Harald, 
iv.  247,  241 

Brigida,  daughter  of  Ulf,  iii.  393  . 
Brimilskiar  (Brimilskjarr),  Earl,  ii.  350 
Britons,  ii.  7  ;  iv.  93,  94 
Brod-Helge  (Broddhelgi),  ii.  118 
Bruse  (Brusi),  honde,  ii.  194-197 
Bruse  Sigurdson  of  Orkney,  iii.  5-23, 
343 


389 


Bruse  Thormodson,  iv.  231 
Brynjolf,  ii.  142 

Bryujolf  (Brynjolfr)  Ulfalde  (ulfaldi), 
ii.  249,  323,  324,  326 ;  iv.  344 
Brynjolf  Sveinson,  i.  196 
Brynjolfson,  Gisle,  i.  190,  262 
Buchanan,  iv.  95 
Buddha  or  Vudha,  iv.  354 
Budle  (BuSli),  iii.  351 
Bue  (Bui)  of  Borgundarholm,  ii.  119- 

121,  125-129,  13 1 
Bugge,  Sophus,  i.  85 
Buonaparte,  i.  12 
Burger,  i.  259 

Buriz  Heinrekson,  iv.  300 
Burisleif  (Burizleifr),  ii.  100,  104,  109, 
120,  195-198,  207,  209 
Buste  (Busti),  thrall,  ii.  76 
Byleist,  i.  327 

Cabot,  Sebastian,  i.  200 
Csesar,  i.  12 

Canute  Lavard  (Knutr  lavardr),  iv. 
141,  184,  187 

Canute  the  Great,  i.  4,  5,  8,  87,  108, 
120,  131,  159,  167;  ii.  195,  257,  262, 
267,  268,  272-275,  280,  287,  338  ;  in. 
3,  22,  68,  82,  83-90,  99,  116,  1 18, 

122,  123,  142-167,  173,  174-184,  190, 
201,  205-210,  218,  220,  246-249,  276- 
280,  287-292,  303,  304,  305,  315,  317, 
3l8,  320-323,  345;  iv.  30,  67,  360, 
364,  368-372 

Carl  Johan,  King,  i.  153 
Carl  Magnus  (Karlamagnus),  iii.  70 
Carlyle,  Thomas,  i.  vii.-ix.,  xvi.,  3 
Catherine  (Katrin),  iv.  141 
Cato,  i.  35 

Caucasians,  iv.  353-356 
Cecilia,  i.  127 ;  iv.  178,  179 
Cecelia,  daughter  of  Gyrd,  iv.  232 
Cederschiold,  Dr.  E.,  i.  29 
Celsius,  i.  84 

Celts,  i.  12,  13,  79 ;  iv.  353-356 
Cerdic,  iv.  357,  360,  364 
Cervantes,  i.  12,  44 

Charlemagne  (Karlamagnus),  i.  80,  165, 
373  ;  ii.  102,  303,  305 
Charles  I.,  iii.  214 
Charles  the  Simple,  ii.  268 
Christian  III.,  i.  184 
Christian  IV. ,  i.  250 
Christina,  Lady,  i.  240 
Christina  (Kristin),  daughter  of  King 
Inge,  iv.  141 

Christopher  of  Bavaria,  i.  183 
Cicero,  i.  12,  34 
Cimbri,  ii.  257 

Claussen,  Peter,  i.  249,  250,  257 
Cleasby,  It. ,  i.  x.,  21,  85,  158,  168, 

2  77 

Clemet  Arason,  iv.  231 
Cobbett,  i.  44 

Columbus,  Christopher,  i.  192,  193, 
198,  200,  230,  232,  233;  ii.  230 
Constantinus  Monomaclius,  iii.  263,  264 


39° 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


Cook,  Capt. ,  i.  225 
Cottle,  A.  T.,  i.  ix. 

Dag  (Dagr)  Dygvason,  i.  291-295 
Dag  of  Vestmarar,  i.  327 
Dag,  son  of  Harald,  i.  367,  385 
Dag,  son  of  Hring,  iii.  222,  223,  230, 
233,  238,  239,  254,  259,  262,  265, 
266 

Dag  Ivarason,  iv.  207 

Dag  Raudson,  iii.  170-T73 

Dag  Eilifson,  iv.  82,  109,  113,  207,  246 

Dageid  (Dageiftr),  i.  295 

•Daglings,  family  of  Doglingar),  i.  295 

Dale-Gudbrand  ( see  Gudbrand). 

Dan  Mikillate  (Danr  Mikillati),  i.  264, 
291,  301 

Danp  (Danpr),  i.  290 

Darius  Hydaspes,  iv.  357 

Dasent,  G.  W.,  i.  vi.,  ix.,  24,  27,  161 

David,  Scottish  king,  iv.  208 

De  Foe,  D.,  i.  44 

De  Fries,  i.  89 

Dicuil,  i.  50 

Dixin,  ii.  100,  101 

Domalde  (Dbmaldi),  i.  288,  289 

Domar,  i.  289,  290 

Donald  Bane,  iv.  95 

Don  Quixote,  !.  227 

Dotta,  iii.  385 

Drifa,  i.  286,  287 

Drot  (Drott),  i.  290,  291 

Du  Cange,  iii.  349 

Du  Chaillu,  P.  B. ,  i.  161,  175 

Du  Fresne,  iii.  416 

Dungad  (DungaSr),  earl  of  Caithness, 

iii.  4 

Dunimiz.  iv.  197,  202 
Durner  (Durnir),  i.  286 
Dygve  (Dyggvi),  i.  290,  291 

Eadburgha,  iv.  366 

Eadgils,  i.  305 

Eanmund,  i.  305 

Easton,  Peter,  i.  227,  229 

Edgar  (Eatgeirr),  i.  131  ;  ii.  268  ;  iv.  26 

Edla  (ESla),  ii.  383 

Edmund  (Eatmundr)  the  Saint,  ii.  238 
Edmund,  son  of  Ethelred,  ii.  264,  268 
Edmund  Ironside,  ii.  273.  274 
Edward  (EatvarSr),  ii.  264,  268  ;  iii. 
*57,  3T7,  344,  345 ;  iv.  25,  26,  28,  31, 
32,  5° 

Edward  the  Confessor,  i.  131  ;  ii.  268  ; 

iv.  50 

Edward  the  Elder,  i.  130 
Edwy  (Katvigr),  ii.  268 
Egede.  Hans,  i.  184,  187 
Egil  (Egill),  Aslakson,  iv.  77-81 
Egil  in  Gautland,  ii.  384 
Egil,  son  of  Hal  o’  Side,  iii.  82,  106, 
160 

Egil,  son  of  Skallagrim,  ii.  1,  6,  181  ; 
iv.  117 

Egil,  son  of  Aun  the  Old,  i.  302-303 
Egil  Ulserk  (ullserkr),  ii.  31-36 


Eilif  (Eilifr),  father  of  Earl  Orm,  iv. 
219 

Eilif  Gautske,  ii.  322-325 
Eilif,  Earl,  iv.  132 
Eilif  Ragnvaldson,  ii.  399 
Einar  (Einarr),  a  relation  of  priest 
Andres,  iv.  195,  197 
Einar  Arnason,  iv.  225 
Einar  of  Modruveller,  iii.  76-78 
Einar  Guthormson,  iv.  250-252 
Einar  from  Hordaland,  ii.  201 
Einar,  son  of  Laxapaul,  iv.  227,  228,  257 
Einar  Bangmud  (rangmuSr),  ii.  382  ; 
iii.  5-14,  19,  27 

Einar  Skalaglam,  ii.  47,  56,  57,  67,  71, 

9° 

Einar  Skulason,  iv.  115,  117,  118,  125, 
127,  173,  i82,  193,  204,  215,  237,  242- 
246,  264,  265,  280,  295 
Einar  Ogmundson,  iv.  225 
Einar  Tambaskelfer  ( |)ambaskelfir),  ii. 
66,  95,  1 16,  201,  220,  221,  269,  273, 
293-309;  iii-  45,  68,  141,  180,  181, 
211,  218,  219,  279-283,  288-292,  310, 
323,.  381.  382,  3?5-4po 
Eindride  (EindriSi)  Einarson,  iii,  180, 
218,  395,  398,  399,  402,  403 
Eindride  of  Gautdal,  iv.  225 
Eindride  of  Gimsar,  ii.  211 
Eindride  Jonson,  iv.  262,  273,  274,  279- 
281 

Eindride  Styrkarson,  ii.  66,  269 
Eindride  Unge  (ungi),  iv.  239,  240,  295, 
304-3 18 

Eindride  Heidafylja,  iv.  321 
Eirik  (Eirikr),  iv.  217 
Eirik,  son  of  Agne,  i.  294,  295 
Eirik  Agnarson,  i.  326 
Eirik  Arnason,  iv.  344,  345 
Eirik  Arsale  (arsseli),  iv.  155 
Eirik  Biodaskalle  (bjoSaskalli),  ii.  72- 
78,  149,  18 1,  335 

Eirik  the  Victorious,  i.  377  ;  ii.  63,  133. 
.196,  344,  366 

Eirik  Blood-axe,  i.  102,  366,  386-390 ; 
ii.  1-14,  27-47,  57,  62,  189,  190;  iii. 
4,  15 

Eirik  Eimune  (Eimuni),  iv.  154,  181, 
187,  196,  197,  220,  221 
Eirik,  Archbishop,  iv.  232,  236 
Eirik  the  Good,  son  of  Svein,  iv.  102, 
PP3,  I4G  154 

Eirik,  son  of  Eindride,  iv.  225 
Eirik,  Earl,  son  of  Hakon,  i.  201  ;  ii. 
96-98,  122-133,  *48,  182,  192-196, 
208-228,  232,  267,  269-273,  278,  299, 
301,  321  ;  iii.  83,  146  ;  iv.  360 
Eirik  Eymundson,  i.  357-360,  377;  ii. 
.196,  366 

Eirik,  king  of  Hordaland,  i.  345,  363 
Eirik,  king  of  Jutland,  i.  366 
Eirik,  king  of  Upsala,  i.  345,  357,  358, 
359,  360 

Eirik  Odson,  iv.  228,  232,  234 
Eirik  the  Red  (rauSi),  i.  179,  180,  197, 
201,  204,  207 ;  ii.  189,  230,  232-238 


INDEX  OF 


PERSONS. 


39* 


Eirik,  son  of  Yngve,  i.  298,  299 
Eirik  of  Pomerania,  i.  183,  198 
Eirik  Vidforle.  i.  196 
Eirik,  son  of  Harald  Harfager,  i.  372, 
381,  382-385,  395,  397,  398 
Eirik,  father  of  Leif,  ii.  202 
Eirik’s  sons,  ii.  13,  27-35,  39,  42,  43, 
47-70,  91,  190 
Eldjarn  (Eldjarn),  iv.  73,  99 
Elfgrims,  iv.  83,  84,  90,  191,  343 
Elgiva,  ii.  274 

Elizabeth,  daughter  of  King  Jarisleif, 

iii.  366 

Elizabeth,  queen  of  England,  i.  62  ;  iv. 
293 

Ella,  i.  95  ;  iv.  357,  360,  364 
Ellisif,  iii.  366-368  ;  iv.  35,  36,  53 
Emma,  Queen,  daughter  of  .Richard, 
earl  of  Rouen,  ii.  268,  273,  274  ;  iii. 
148,  149,  317,  318  ;  iv.  25,  50 
Emund  (Emundr),  lagman,  ii.  399-405, 
408,  409 

Emund  Ringson,  ii.  399 

Emund  Olafson,  ii.  384 ;  iii.  295,  305,  325 

Erich  son,  i.  84 

Erlend  (Erlendr)  of  Gerde,  iii.  220,  262 
Erlend,  son  of  Earl  Hakon,  ii.  142-144 
Erlend  Himalde  (lrimaldi),  iii.  393  ;  iv. 
3T9 

Erlend,  Torf-Einar’s  son,  11.  7,  8  ;  111.  4 
Erlend,  son  of  Earl  Thorfin,  iv.  36,  41, 
91,  96.  109,  113,  116 
Erling  (Erlingr)  Erlendson,  iv.  109.  113 
Erling  Gamle  (gandi),  son  of  Eirik,  i. 

398;  ii.  53,  55,  67,  68,  81  . 

Erling,  son  of  Earl  Hakon,  ii.  132 
Erling,  son  of  Sigurd,  iii.  307 
Erling  Skakke  (skakki),  Kyrpingaorm’s 
son,  i.  240 ;  iv.  239-241,  246,  259, 
270-272,  276-284,  293,  298-350,  372 
Erling  Skialgson  of  Sole,  i.  121-123, 
129  ;  ii.  152-156,  205,  206,  212,  269- 
271,  280,  302,  309,  311,  322  ;  iii.  35, 
45-64,  99,  iii,  113,  115,  118,  142 
166,  167,  179,  185-193,  211,  220,  290  ; 

iv.  224 

Erling  of  Tankernes,  i.  56 
Eskil  of  West  Gautland,  ii.  399 
Ethelred  (Aftalraftr),  English  king,  i. 
159  ;  ii.  121,  257-264,  268,  273,  274  ; 

iii.  146,  317,  344;  iv.  25,  50 
Eyjolf  (Eyjolfr),  ii.  380;  iii.  74 
Eyjolf  Dadaskald  (DaSaskald),  ii.  71, 

97,  98 

Eyjolf  Valgerdson,  ii.  118 
Eystein  (Eysteinn),  Adil’s  son,  i.  309- 
3H. 

Eystein,  Archbishop,  iii.  284,  393,  394; 

iv.  319,  324-327 

Eystein  Eysteinson,  iv.  341-347 
Eystein  Glumra,  i.  352,  iii.  3 
Eystein,  son  of  Halfdan,  i.  324,  325, 
327 

Eystein  the  Severe  (harSrafti),  i.  324 
Eystein  Haraldson,  iv.  215-265,  275, 
291,  292,  294 


Eystein  Magnuson,  iv.  103,  1 15-154, 
360 

Eystein  Orre  (orri),  Thorberg’s  son,  iii. 
112,  113  ;  iv.  41,  48 

Eystein  the  Great  (riki),  i.  329,  332, 

333,  343,  344  ;  io7,  108 
Eystein  Trafale  (trafali),  iv.  255 
Eystein  the  Elder  (hinn  ellri),  iv.  286 
Eyvind  (Eyvindr)  Finson  Skaldaspiller 
(skaldaspillir),  i.  264,  280,  298,  356  ; 

ii.  1.  35-41,  44,  47-51,  56,  69-71,  127  ; 

iii.  24 

Eyvind  Ivelda,  ii.  160-163 
Eyvind  Kinrifa  (kinnrifa),  ii.  157,  174, 
J75 

Eyvind  Skreyja,  ii.  38-42 
Eyvind  Snak  (snakr),  ii.  201 
Eyvind  Urarhorn  (urarhorn),  ii.  326- 
329,  382  ;  iii.  10,  19 
Eyvind  Olboge  (olbogi),  iv.  109-113 
Eyvind,  son  of  Berdlukare,  i.  355 

Faste  (Fasti),  Earl,  i.  306 
Fin  (Finnr)  Arnason,  Earl,  iii.  32,  23, 
1 14-123,  199,  231,  232,  243,  255,  261, 
263,  279,  280,  288,  343,  399-410 ;  iv. 

5,  8>  I2,  T3>  336 
Fin  Erlingson,  iv.  337 
Fin  the  Little  (litli),  ii.  371-3 75 
Fin  Saudaulfson,  iv.  228 
Fin  Skoptason,  iv.  96,  97,  106,  107 
Fin  from  Rogaland,  ii.  201 
Finboge,  i.  207 ;  ii.  244,  245 
Fiolner,  i.  282 

Fjolner  (Fjolnir),  son  of  Ingvefrey,  i. 
263,  284 

Fiske,  Willard,  i.  ix. 

Flemings  (Flaeminjar),  iv.  296 
Folke  (Folki)  Birgerson,  iv.  247 
Folkvid  (FolkviSr),  i.  316 
Forniot  (Fornjotr),  i.  288 
Franks  (Frakkar),  i.  6  ;  iv.  296,  297 
Frederik  (FriSrekr),  Emperor,  iv.  125 
Frederik,  son  of  Heinrek,  iv.  125 
Frederik  III.,  i.  196 
Frederik,  Bishop,  ii.  170 
Fredfrode  (FriSfroSi),  i.  284 
Freeman’s  “Norman  Conquest,  ii. 
257  ;  iv.  26 

Frey  (Freyr),  i.  264,  272,  273,  275,  277, 
282-284,  295,  309,  361  ;  ii.  181 
Freydis,  i.  199,  204,  207  ;  ii.  213,  230, 
244-246 

Freyja,  i.  115,  273,  283  ;  ii.  20,  24 
Frevvid  the  l)eaf  (FreyviSr  daufi),  11. 

305,  406-409  _  ,  . 

Fridleif  (FriSleifr),  son  of  Frode,  1.  301 
Frigg,  i.  16,  86,  93,  104,  no,  145,  272  ; 
ii.  50 ;  iv.  361 

Frirek  (Fririkr),  the  standard-bearer, 

iv.  42 

Frirek  Keina  (kcena),  iv.  304,  310,  322, 
323 

Frode  the  Bold  (FroSi  hinn  frsekni),  i. 

303-307 

Frode  Eysteinson,  i.  344 


392 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


Frotle  Haraldson,  i.  366,  385,  386 
Frode  Mikillate  (mikillati),  i.  284,  285 
3OI>  343 ;  ii-  5° 

Frosfce  (Frosti),  i.  293 

Gamal  (Gamall),  iv.  16 
Gamle  (Gamli),  son  of  Eirik,  i.  398 ; 
ii.  13,  33-38,  48 

Gandalf  (Gandalfr),  son  of  Alfgeir,  i. 
329-344  . 

Ganglere,  i.  100,  101 
Gauka-Tkorer  (GaukaJ)orir),  iii.  223- 
257 

Gaut  (Gautr),  i.  313 
Gant  the  Red  (hiun  rauSi),  iii.  101, 
^  139,  T40 

Gaute  (Gauti)  Tofason,  ii.  401,  402 
Gauthild  (Gauthildr),  i.  313,  320,  323 
Gautrek  the  Mild  (Gautrekr  hiun 
mildi),  i.  313 

Gautvid  (GautviSr),  i.  319 
Gefion,  i.  274,  275 
Geigad  (GeigaSr),  i.  297 
Geira,  ii.  100-109,  209 
Geirfin  (Geirfiffr),  ii.  266 
Geire  (Geiri),  father  of  Glum,  ii.  9 
Geirmuml  (Geirmundr),  ii.  123,  124 
Geirthiof  (Geirpjofr),  i.  307 
Geller  (Gellir),  son  of  Thorkel,  iii.  82, 
106,  107,  125,  165 
Gerd  (GerSr),  i.  282 
Gersime  (Gersimi),  i.  283 
Gibbon,  iii.  349 

Gille  (Gilli)  the  backthief  (bakrauf), 
iv.  85 

G  lie  the  lagman,  iii.  79,  80,  100,  135, 
136,  140 

Giparde  (GiparSi),  iv.  98-101. 

Gisl  (Gisl),  son  of  Visbur,  i.  288 
Gissur  (Gizurr)  Gulbraskald  (gullbra), 

ii.  7  r,  249  ;  iii.  234 ;  258 

Gissur  the  White,  son  of  Teit,  ii.  171, 
181,  187.  202,  335 
Gissur  the  Black,  ii.  338-347 
Gissur  from  Valders,  ii.  131,  132 
Gjukungs,  iv.  129 

Glum  (Glumr),  son  of  Geire,  ii.  1-91  ; 

iii.  361 

Godgest  (Goftgestr),  i.  309 
Godwin  (GuSini),  Earl,  son  of  Ulfnad, 
i.  240;  iii.  157;  iv.  25-28 
Goethe,  i.  43 

Gondul  (Gondul),  ii.  44,  45 
Gorm  (Gormr)  the  Old,  i.  337,  345, 
346  ;  ii.  81,  82,  196  ;  iii.  86,  145  ;  iv. 
364,  365 

Goths,  i.  6,  12,  30,  51,  53,  79,  82,  291, 
314;  iv.  35^,  356 

Grane  (Grani)  the  skald,  iii.  346,  385 
Grankel  (Grankell,  Granketill),  iii.  26, 
123,  125,  178,  248 
Granmar  (Granmarr),  i.  315-320 
Gregorius  Dagson,  iv.  220-300 
Grelad  (GreloS),  iii.  4 
Grette  the  Strong,  i.  31 
Grim  (Griinr)  the  Good,  iii.  239 


Grim  Rusle  (rusli),  iv.  337 
Grim  of  Yist,  iv.  225 
Grim  Thorgilson,  iii.  271-281 
Grimhild,  i.  287  ;  ii.  240 
Grimkel  (Grimkell),  ii.  314,  315  ;  iii. 
281,  282 

Grimm,  Jacob,  i.  93,  367 
Griotgard  (GrjotgarSr),  son  of  Ilakon, 
i.  354  ;  ii.  52-55 

Griotgard  the  Brisk  (roskvi),  ii.  201 
Griotgard  Olverson,  iii.  175,  176,  204, 
249 

Groa  (Groa),  daughter  of  Thorstein, 
iii.  4 

Grosvenor,  Lady,  iv.  120 
Grundtvig,  Bishop,  i.  xiv. ,  259 
Gryting  (Grftingr),  King,  i.  347 
Gudbrand,  Dale  (GuSbranSr  i  Dolum), 
i-  332»  333,  344 ;  ii.  60,  158  ;  iii.  34- 
43'  81 

Gudbrand  Hvite,  ii.  126 
Gudbrand  Kula,  ii.  133,  136 
Gudbrand,  son  of  Skafhog,  iv.  134,  292 
Gudlaug  (GuSlaugr),  i.  298,  300 
Gudleif,  son  of  Gudlaug,  i.  231,  232 
Gudleik  Gerske  (gerzki),  ii.  328-330 
Gudmund  (GuSmundr),  Bishop,  iv.  339 
Gudmund,  son  of  Eyjolf,  ii.  380,  381  ; 

iii.  78,  82  ;  iv.  23 

Gudmund  of  Modruveller,  ii.  181  ;  iii. 

76 

Gudny,  i.  233 

Gudrid  (GuSkiftr),  daughter  of  Birger, 

iv.  232 

Gudrid,  daughter  of  Guthorm,  iv.  376 
Gudrid,  wife  of  Tliorlin  Ivarlsefue,  i. 

199-213  ;  ii.  236-247 
Gudrod  (GuSroSr),  son  of  Bjorn,  i.  388, 
395,  397  ;  ii-  4,. 5,  48.  52-  60,  61,  64 
Gudrod,  son  of  Eirik,  i.  398  ;  ii.  67,  72, 
89,  91,  189,  190 

Gudrod  of  Gudbrandsdal,  ii.  288,  349, 
35L  354 

Gudrod,  son  of  Halfdan,  i.  324,  327- 
33 1 

Gudrod,  king  of  Scania,  i.  320,  321 
Gudrod  Liome  (ljomi),  i.  373-378,  387 
Gudrod  Skiria,  son  of  Harald,  i.  367 
Gudrod,  son  of  Olaf  Klining,  iv.  93, 
290 

Gudrun  (Gudrun),  daughter  of  Einar, 
iv.  225 

Gudrun,  daughter  of  Jarnskegge,  ii. 
169 

Gudrun,  daughter  of  Nefstein,  iv.  54 
Gudrun  of  Saltnes,  iv.  346 
Gudrun,  daughter  of  Thord,  iv.  96 
Gudrun,  daughter  of  Bergthor,  ii.  141 
Gunbjorn,  i.  179 

Gunhild  (Gunnhildr),  wife  of  King 
Eirik,  i.  382-384,  395-398  ;  ii.  i,  8" 
13,  37,  42>  43-  47-ior,  152,  189,  190, 
s89-  344  5  iii-  87,  207  ;  iv.  360. 
Gunhild,  daughter  of  Burisleif,  ii.  100, 
120,  195,  196,  197 

Gunhild,  daughter  of  Halfdan,  iii.  24 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


393 


Gunhild,  daughter  of  Knut,  ii.  274 ; 
iii.  316 

Gunhild,  wife  of  Simon,  iv.  242,  289 
Gunhild,  daughter  of  Sigurd,  ii.  283  ; 
iii.  81 

Gunhild,  daughter  of  Earl  Svein,  ii. 
280 ;  iii.  396 

Gunhild,  niece  of  King  Harald,  iii. 
395,  410 

Gunnar  (Gunnarr),  of  Gelmin,  ii.  295 
Gunnar  of  Gimsar,  iv.  217,  218 
Gunnar  the  treasurer,  iv.  304 
Gunne  Fis  (Gunni  fiss),  iv.  195 
Gunstein  (Gunnsteinn),  i.  117;  iii.  71- 
120 

Guthorm  (Guthormr)  Grabarde  (gra- 
barSi),  iv.  184,  250 
Guthorm,  son  of  Gudbrand,  i.  333 
Guthorm,  son  of  Harald  Harfager,  i. 
362,  369,  381,^  385 

Guthorm,  son  of  Harald  Fletter,  iv.  194 
Guthorm,  son  of  Eirik,  i.  398  ;  ii.  27, 
28 ;  iii.  400,  410-412 
Guthorm,  uncle  of  Harald  Harfager, 
i-  343-346,  362,  367,  368,  377 
Guthorm  of  Heine,  iv.  216 
Guthorm,  son  of  Sigurd,  i.  335,  336 
Guthorm,  son  of  Sigurd  Syr,  ii.  283, 
356 

Guthorm  Sindre  (sindri),  i.  342,  389  ; 

ii.  1,  n-13,  27,  28,  34 
Guthorm  Thorerson,  iii.  376,  377 
Gyda  (Gyfta),  wife  of  Olaf  Trygveson, 

ii.  113-115  ;  iii.  157,  289 

Gyda,  daughter  of  Eirik,  i.  345,  362 
Gyda  the  Old,  iv.  141 
Gyda,  daughter  of  Godwin,  iii.  157 
Gyda,  daughter  of  Svein  Foi'k-beard, 

iii.  157 ;  iv.  25 

Gyda,  daughter  of  Thorgils  Sprakaleg, 
iii.  157  ;  iv.  30 
Gylaug  (G^laugr),  i.  300 
Gylfe  (Gylfi),  i.  100,  274,  275 
Gymer  (G^mir),  i.  282 
Gyrd  (Gyrdr)  Amundason,  iv.  266, 
269 

Gyrd  Bardson,  iv.  232 
Gyrd  Godwinson,  iv.  51 
Gyrd,  son  of  Gunhild,  iv.  269 
Gyrd,  son  of  Harald,  i.  328 
Gyrd,  son  of  Kolbein,  iv.  224,  235 
Gyrd,  on  the  king’s  ship,  iv.  34 
Gyrger  (Gyrgir),  iii.  350-352 
Gyrid  (GyriSr),  Dag’s  daughter,  iv.  269 

Had  (Haddr)  the  Hard,  i.  363 

Hadrian,  Pope,  i.  157 

Hafthor  (Hafjibrr),  i.  279 

Hagbard  (HagbarSr)  i.  297,  300 

Hagson,  K.  A.,  i.  249 

Hake  (Haki),  i.  277-299 

Hake  the  Berserk,  i.  336 

Hake,  brother  of  Hysing,  i.  335 

Hake,  son  of  Gandalf,  i.  343 

Hake  the  Scot,  i.  205 

Hakon  Fauk  (Hakon  faukr),  iv.  148, 193 


Hakon  the  Old,  ii.  74-77 
Hakon  the  Good,  i.  65,  103,  105,  108, 
258,  391-394 ;  ii-  1-58,  164,  166,  289, 
3T5»  344  I  id-  26,  108 ;  iv.  133,  360 
Hakon  Griotgardson,  i.  348,  350,  356, 
357,  390 

Hakon  Herdibreid  (HerSibreiftr),  iv. 

242,  258,  265-311,  371 
Hakon  Ivarson,  iii.  399-407  ;  iv.  5,  7, 
9,  I5"22,  336 

Hakon  Paulson  of  the  Orkneys,  iv. 
116 

Hakon  Paulson  Pungelta,  iv.  224 
Hakon  Mage  (magi),  iv.  224,  234 
Hakon  Serkson,  iv.  157,  158 
Hakon  the  Swedish  king.  iv.  96 
Hakon  Magnuson,  iv.  58,  73-77,  85 
Hakon  Hakonson,  i.  177,  242,  204,  266 ; 
iv-  349. 

Hakon  Sigurdson,  Earl  of  Lade,  i.  280, 
354,  39i  ;  ii-  I-I93,  289 ;  iii.  4,  83, 
84,  394.;  iv-  239 

Hakon  Eirikson,  the  Earl,  ii.  195,  196, 
226,  267,  272-286,  294,  295,  299,  321  ; 
iii.  68,  88,  144-146,  166,  168,  180, 
192-199,  202-218,  246,  247,  395,  396 
Hal  (Hallr)  Audunson,  iv.  267 
Hal  of  Sida,  i.  266 ;  ii.  170  ;  iii.  82 
Hal  Thorarinson,  i.  266,  267  ;  ii.  171 
Hal  Thorgeirson,  iv.  234-236 
Hal  Utrygson,  iv.  23 
Hal,  father  of  Thorstein,  iii.  78 
Hal,  father  of  Egil,  iii.  160 
Haldor  (Halldorr),  iv.  249 
Haldor,  son  of  Brvnjolf,  iii.  100 ;  iv. 

57,  260,  266,  282-287,  344 
Haldor,  son  of  Gudmund,  ii.  181,  202 
Haldor  Sigurdson,  iv.  217,  218 
Haldor  in  Skerdingsstedja,  ii.  142,  166 
Haldor  Skvaldre  (skvaldri),  iv.  115- 
127,  182,  186,  189 
Haldor,  son  of  Snorre,  iii.  357-393 
Haldor  the  Unchristian  (ukristui),  ii. 

208,  211,  218,  219,  223,  225 
Haldorson,  Bjorn,  i.  21 
Halfdan  (Halfdan)  brother  of  Gudrod, 
i.  321 

Halfdan  Eysteinson,  i.  327-330 
Halfdan,  son  of  Erode,  i.  301,  308 
Halfdan  the  Black,  son  of  Gudrod,  i. 

328-343,  359  ;  ii-  i5 
Halfdan  Gultan  (gulltonn),  i.  323 
Halfdan  Haleg  (haleggr),  i.  372-386  ; 
iii.  3 

Halfdan  Hvitbein  (hvitbeinn),  i.  324- 
326 

Halfdan  the  "White,  son  of  Harald,  i. 

362,  381,  385,  386 
Halfdan,  Earl,  ii.  49  ;  iii.  24 
Halfdan,  son  of  Sigurd  Syr,  ii.  283, 
356,  357  ;  iii-  399 

Halfdan  the  Black,  son  of  Harald,  i. 
362-395 

Halfdan,  son  of  Solve,  i.  323 
Halfred  Ottarson  Vandredasknld  (Hall- 
freSr  vandrsedaskald),  ii.  71,  101, 


394  ' 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


103,  109,  IIO,  182-186,  204,  217,  220- 
226  ;  iii.  241 

Halfrid,  daughter  of  Snorre,  ii.  247 
Ilallad  (HallaSr),  son  of  Ragnvald,  i. 
370,  375,  376 

Hallarstein  (Hallarsteinn),  ii.  71,  98 
Halkel  (Hallkell),  father  of  'l'iud,  ii.  127 
Halkel  Huk  (hukr),  iv.  166,  247,  260, 
261,  268,  269 
Halkel  of  Fjalar,  ii.  201 
Halstein  from  the  Fjord  District  (Hall- 
steinn),  ii.  201 

Halvard  (HallvarSr)  Fseger  (faegir),  iv. 
231 

Halvard  Gunnarson,  iv.  255.  257 
Halvard  Hareksblese  (hareksblesi),  ii. 
249  ;  iii.  184 

Halvard  Hauld  (hauldr)  of  Reyr,  iv.  265 
Halvard  the  Holy,  iv.  220,  221 
Halvard  Hikre  (hikri),  iv.  293 
Halvard  the  Icelander,  iii.  12 
Halvard  Skalk  (skalkr),  i.  333 
Hannoverians,  i.  45 
Hansten,  Prof.,  iii.  270  ;  iv.  359 
Harald  (Haraldr)  Fletter  (flettir),  iv. 
82,  194 

Harald  Gille  (gilli),  sou  of  Magnus,  i.  40, 
151  ;  iv.  166-172,  182-216,  223,  234, 
236,  2 37,  247,  249,  294,  298,  307,  341 
Harald  Godwinson,  iv.  26-29,  32,  40- 
51,  64,  96,  141 

Harald  Gorinson,  ii.  13,  14,  29,  38,  67, 
80-97,  T02>  to4>  x°6,  108,  1 16,  117- 
120,  150,  196,  199,  344;  iii.  83;  iv. 
301 

Harald  Grenske  (grenski),  son  of  Gud- 
rod,  ii.  62,  63,  89,  90,  133-136,  151, 
x58,  x59 

Harald  Grayskin  (grafeldr),  son  of 
Eirik,  i.  398;  ii.  9,  14,  38,  47-73,  82- 
88  ,  iii.  83  ;  iv.  360 

Harald,  father  of  Asa,  Halfdan  Black’s 
mother,  i.  331 

Harald  Goldbeard  (gullskegg),  i.  333, 
334 

Harald,  son  of  Harald  Ivesja,  iv.  154 
Harald  Sigurdson  Hardrade  (liarCraSi), 
i.  266  ;  ii.  257,  283,  399  ;  iii.  220,  222, 
239>  265,  2 94,  344-417 ;  iv.  1-73,  82, 
96,  103.  340,  341,  358,  360 
Harald  Harfager  (harfagri),  son  of 
Halfdan,  i.  3,  32,  37,  65,  70,  92,  102, 
103,  126,  127,  149,  157,  263,  265,  307, 

33L  332,  338-398  i  ii-  3-x7,  3D  39,  48, 
49,  72,  89,  136,  139,  147,  156,  160, 
196,  258,  263,  283-290,  299,  302,  344  ; 

2,  3,  x5,  24,  x°7,  108,  222,  244  ; 
iv-  66,  357,  360,  363-365 
Harald  Hein,  iv.  64 
Harald  Harefoot,  i.  131 
Harald,  Eystein’s  courtman,  iv.  254 
Harald  Maddadson,  Earl,  iii.  276;  iv. 
208,  243 

Harald  Kesja,  iv.  154,  369 
Harald,  king  of  England,  i.  5,  240  ;  ii. 
274,  289;  iii.  157,  300,  317;  iv.  369 


Harald,  Gold,  ii.  68-88 
Harald  Sveinson,  ii.  120 
Harald,  son  of  Yaldemar,  iv.  141 
Harald,  son  of  Thorkel,  iii.  205 
Harald  Klak  (Klakkharaldr),  i.  337 
Hardaknut  (HorSakmitr),  i.  5,  131, 
173  ;  ii.  81,  274  ;  iii.  99,  147-150,'  180, 
300,  301,  315,  317,  318,  345 ;  iv.  25, 
31,  269 

Harek  (Harekr)  Gand,  i.  336 
Harek,  son  of  Guthorm,  ii.  8 
Harek  Hvasse  (hvassi),  ii.  200 
Harek  of  Thiotta,  i.  123  ;  ii.  157,  172- 

175  ;  iii-  24,  25,  33,  70,  71,  I23_I25, 
162-164,  178,  179,  211,  217,  248,  251, 
253,  262,  264,  308 

Hauk  (Haukr)  Habrok  (habrok),  i.  393 
Hauk  froin  the  Fjords,  ii.  201 
Hauk  of  Halogaland,  ii.  171-173 
Havard  (Havar&Y)  Hogvande  (hogg- 
vandi),  ii.  129,  131,  132 
Havard  Klining  (kliningr),  iv.  269, 
281 

Havard,  son  of  Thorfin,  iii.  4 
Havard  from  Orkadal,  ii.  200 
Head,  Sir  Edm.,  i.  ix.,  28 
Hedin  (HeSinn)  Hardmage  (harSmagi), 
iv.  227 

Heimdal  (Heimdallr),  i.  275  ;  ii.  52 
Hekia,  i.  205 
Hel,  i.  290,  327 
Helga,  Einar’s  wife,  iv.  195 
Helge  (Helgi),  son  of  Halfdan,  i.  308 
Helge  Hvasse  (hvassi),  i.  335 
Helge,  brother  of  Finboge,  ii.  244,  245 
Helsing,  (Helsingr),  i.  334,  335 
Heming  (Hemingr),  son  of  Hakon,  ii. 
95,  226 

Heming,  brother  of  Sigvalde  the  Earl, 
ii.  1 19 

Hengist,  iv.  364,  368 
Henry  or  Henrik  (Heinrekr),  emperor 
of  Germany,  iii.  318  ;  iv.  125 
Henrik  Halte  (Haiti),  iv.  292 
Henry  I.  of  England,  iv.  117 
Henry  III.  of  England,  ii.  274 
Henry  Strion  (strjona),  ii.  273,  274 
Herdis,  i.  237,  238 
Herjulf,  i.  201  ;  ii.  230-232 
Herlaug  (Herlaugr),  i.  349,  354 
Hermod  (HermoSr),  ii.  45 
Hessians,  i.  45 

Hialte  (Hjalti),  Skeggjason,  ii.  171, 
187,  202,  320,  332-348,  360-362,  382 
Hild  (Hildr),  daughter  of  Hrolf,  i.  370, 
.37 1 

Hild,  wife  of  Granmar,  i.  318 
Hilder  (Hildir),  son  of  Hogne,  i.  319 
Hildebrand,  H.  O.,  i.  vii.-xvi.,  ii.  77, 
88,  207  ;  iii.  22,  256,  343 ;  iv.  53,  60 
Hildebrand  (Hildibrandr),  i.  335 
Hildigun  (Hildegunnr),  i.  317,  318 
Hiorvard  (HjorvarSr),  i.  317-320 
Hjaltalin,  Jon,  i.  27 
Hlif,  daughter  of  Dag,  i.  327 
Hlodver  (HloSvir)  Lange,  ii.  200 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


395 


Hlodver  Thorfinson,  ii.  90,  139;  iii.  4 
Hnos  (Hnoss),  i.  283 
Hofgardaref  (Hofgarftarefr),  ii.  249 ; 
iii.  234,  258 

Hogne  (Hogni),  in  Njardey,  i.  310,  319, 
32° 

Hogne,  Eysteinson,  i.  329,  343 
Hogne,  Karuson,  i.  343,  344 
Holmfrid  (Holmfriftr)  ii.  227,  309,  384 
Holte  (Holti),  ii.  398 
Homer,  ii.  203 
Horace,  ii.  203 

Hordakare  (HorSakari),  ii.  66,  132,  181 
Horn,  F.  W.,  i.  vi. 

Horsa,  iv.  364 

Hoskuld  (Hoskuldr),  ii.  181 

Hottentots,  i.  220 

Hrane  (Hrani)  Gauzke  (gauzki),  i.  357, 
362 

Hrane  the  Far-travelled  (ViSforli),  ii. 

62,  136,  249,  251,  275-285 
Hrane,  Thin-nose,  ii.  283 
Hreidar  (Hreiftarr),  ii.  66 
Hreidar  Erlingson,  iv.  337 
Hreidar  Griotgardson,  iv.  231 
Hring  (Hringr),  son  of  Dag,  i.  367  ;  iii. 
171,  222 

Hring,  son  of  Harald,  i.  367,  385 
Hring,  king  in  Hedemark  ( see  King) 
Hroald  (Hroaldr)  the  priest,  iv.  313 
Hroald  Hryg  (hryggr),  i.  363 
Hroe  (Hroi)  the  White,  ii.  62 
Hroe  Skjalge  (skjalgi),  ii.  322,  328 
Hrolf  ( see  Rolf) 

Hrollang  (Hrollaugr),  king  in  Naumu- 
dal,  i.  349,  350 

Hrollaug,  son  of  Ragnvald,  i.  370,  379 
Hi’orek  (Hrcerekr),  son  of  Harald,  i. 
366,  385 ;  ii.  288,  289,  349-354,  368- 
382 

Hrut  (Hrutr),  iii.  238,  31 1 
Hugleik  (Hugleikr),  i.  297,  298 
Huge  (Hugi)  the  Brave,  iv.  93,  94 
Huge  the  Stout,  iv.  93 
Huld  (Huldr),  a  vala,  i.  287 
Hulvid  (Hulviftr),  i.  316,  319 
Hume,  David,  i.  4,  16 
Hunde  (Hundi),  son  of  Sigurd,  iii.  4,  5 
Hunthiof  (Hunjjjofr),  i.  352 
Hyrning  (Hyrningr),  ii.  149,  150,  190, 
206,  222 

Hysing  (H^singr),  i.  334,  335 

Ida,  i.  93 ;  iv.  357,  360,  364 
Igor,  ii.  398 

Illuge  Bryndalaskald  (Illugi  Bryndce- 
laskald),  iii.  346,  353 
Indians,  i.  210,  220 
Ingsevones,  i.  291 
Inge  (Ingi)  Arnason,  iv.  239 
Inge  Halsteinson,  Swedish  king,  iv.  247 
Inge  Bardson,  iv.  55 
Inge  Haraldson,  king  of  Norway,  i.  40, 
151  ;  iv.  215-319 

Inge  Steinkelson,  Swedish  king,  iv.  96- 
106,  141,  155,  184,  207 


Ingibjorg  (Ingibjorg,  daughter  of  priest 
Andres,  iv.  195 

Ingibjorg,  daughter  of  Guthorm,iv.  134 
Ingibjorg,  daughter  of  Harald  Har- 
fager,  ii.  49  ;  iii.  24 
Ingibjorg,  daughter  of  Harald,  Valde- 
mar’s  son.  iv.  141,  301 
Ingibjorg,  wife  of  Ragnvald  the  earl,  ii. 
365. 

Ingibjorg,  daughter  of  King  Trygve,  ii. 

149,  203-206,  330-348.  360 
Ingibjorg,  daughter  of  Tliorkel  Leira, 

ii.  122,  133 

Ingibjorg,  daughter  of  Ogmund,  iv.  77 
Ingibjorn  Sipil  (Ingibjorn  sipill),  iv. 
304 

Ingigerd  (Ingigerftr),  daughter  of  Bir¬ 
ger,  iv.  247 

Ingigerd,  daughter  of  Harald  Hard- 
rade,  iii.  386 :  iv.  35,  36,  53,  64 
Ingigerd,  daughter  of  Harald  Har- 
fager,  i.  367 

Ingigerd,  daughter  of  Lodin  and  As- 
trid,  ii.  149 

Ingigerd,  daughter  of  Olaf  the  Swedish 
king,  ii.  338,  342,  343-404  ;  iii.  200- 
216 

Ingirid  (Ingiriftr),  wife  of  Heinrik 
Halte,  iv.  292 

Ingirid,  daughter  of  Lodin,  ii.  149 
Ingirid,  daughter  of  Ragnvald,  iv.  184, 
213*  215,  23 7,  239,  255,  300 
Ingirid,  daughter  of  Sigurd  Syr,  iv.  54 
Ingirid,  daughter  of  King  Svein,  iv. 
59,  64 

Ingimar  (Ingirnarr)  Sveinson,  iv.  187 
Ingjald  (Iugjaldr),  son  of  Onund,  i. 
312-322 

Ingjald,  son  of  King  Olaf,  i.  325 
Ingolf,  ii.  230 

Ingvefrey  (Yngvifreyr),  i.  263,  264, 
283,  284  (see  Yngve) 

Isleif  (Isleifr),  i.  37.  38,  267  ;  iv.  362 
Isrid  (  sriSr),  daughter  of  Gudbrand, 

iii.  81 

Ivar  (Ivarr),  Bishop,  iv.  227,  232 

Ivar  Dynta,  son  of  Stare,  iv.  232 

Ivar,  son  of  Guthorm,  ii.  8 

Ivar  of  Elda,  iv.  281 

Ivar,  son  of  Hakon,  iv.  278 

Ivar  White,  iii.  158,  159,  394 

Ivar  Ingimundson,  iv.  135,  182,  208,  214 

Ivar  Kolbeinson,  iv.  213,  231 

Ivar,  son  of  Ragnvald,  i.  369 

Ivar,  son  of  Sigtryg,  iii.  200 

Ivar  Skrauthanke  (skrauthanki),  iv.  231 

Ivar  Smetta,  ii.  201 

Ivar  Sneis,  iv.  239 

Ivar  Ozurson,  iv.  193 

Ivar  Vidfadme  (VidfaSmi),  i.  30,  321- 

323 ;  iv.  365,  368 

Jacob  (Jakob),  son  of  the  Swedish  king 
Olaf,  ii.  384,  407-410  (see  Onund) 
Jardthrud  (Jar0J)ru0r),  daughter  of 
Sigurd,  iii.  307 


396 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


Jarisleif  (Jarizleifr),  ii.  392,  397,  398; 
iii.  200,  211,  215,  216,  265,  292,  348, 
354,  366 

Jarnskegge  (Jarnskeggi),  of  Yrjar,  ii. 

66,  165-170 
Jews,  i.  96 

Jesus  Christ  (Jesus  Kristr),  ii.  376; 
iii.  245 

Joan  (Joan),  son  of  Arne,  iii.  307  ;  iv. 
64,  79 

Joau  the  Strong,  iii.  393 

Jokul  (Jokull),  sou  of  Bard,  ii.  249; 

iii.  203,  204 

Jomale  (Jomali),  iii.  93,  94,  96 
Jon  (Jon),  Arnason  (see  Joau) 

Jon,  sou  of  Birger,  iv.  248 
Jon,  Archbishop,  iv.  232,  319 
Jon,  son  of  Halkel,  iv.  247,  260,  268, 
269,  298,  307,  321 
Jon  Kauda,  iv.  227,  232 
Jon  Ketling  (Ketlingr),  iv.  346 
Jon,  son  of  Sorkver,  iv.  247 
Jon  Kutiza,  iv.  300 
Jon,  son  of  Lopt,  iv.  195,  324 
Jon  Mornef  (mdrnef),  iv.  261,  273 
Jon,  son  of  Sigurd,  iv.  207 
Jon  Sniiorbalte  (smjorbalti),  iv.  166 
Jon  Smyril  (smyrill),  iv.  227 
Jon,  son  of  Svein,  iv.  290,  291,  304, 
3l8 

Jon  Tapard  (taparSr),  iv.  254 
Jon,  son  of  Tliorberg,  iv.  337 
Jonaker  (Jonakr),  i.  314 
Jorun  (Jorunn),  the  skald-maid,  i.  342, 
39° 

Jorun,  daughter  of  Thorberg,  iii.  393  ; 

iv.  23 

Jorund  (Jorundr),  son  of  Yngve,  i. 
298-300 

Jostein  (Josteinn),  ii.  149,  201 
Julian  (Julianus),  ii.  258 
Jupiter,  i.  96,  97 

Kalf  (Kalfr)  Arnason,  i.  151  ;  iii.  32, 
33,  115,  JI7,  172-175,  192,  193,  203- 
206,  21 1,  248-263,  280,  288-293,  301, 
309-3 1 2,  343,  401,  407-409 
Kalf,  a  relation  of  Kalf  Arnason,  iii. 

259  ^  . 

Kalf  Kringluauga,  iv.  227 
Kalf  Range  (rangi),  iv.  227,  231 
Kalf  Skurfa,  i.  376 
Kare  (Kari),  iv.  207 
Kark  (Karkr),  ii.  142-146 
Karl  tlie  bonde,  iv.  9-14 
Karl  Morske  (moerski),  iii.  135-140 
Karl  Sonason,  iv.  218,  219,  247 
Karl  Sorkvison,  iv.  141 
Karle  (Karli),  iii.  71-73,  90-97,  119- 
122 

Karlshofud  (KarlshofuS),  ii.  149 
Kar  (Karr)  of  Gryting,  ii.  24,  25,  166 
Ketil  (Ketill)  the  High,  ii.  200 
Ketil  Kalf  (kalfr),  ii.  301,  311,  353, 
^354  ;  iii.  81,  395,  410 
Ketil  Jamte  (jamti)  ii.  17;  iii.  107,  ic8 


Ketil  Krok  (krokr),  iv.  53,  54 
Ketil  the  Dean,  iv.  236 
Ketil  from  Rogaland,  ii.  201 
Kimbe  (Kimbi),  iii.  266,  267 
Kiotvi  (Kjotvi)  the  Rich,  i.  363,  364 
Kirjalax,  iv.  125,  128,  129,  293,  295 
Kisping  (Kispingr),  ii.  42 
Kjartan,  son  of  Olaf,  ii.  181-204 
Kjelland,  Rrof.,  iv.  359 
Kleng  (Klcengr),  son  of  Bruse,  ii.  301 
Klerk  (Klerkr),  ii.  77 
Ivlerkon,  ii.  77,  79 
Klyp  (Klyppr),  ii.  66,  67,  152 
Knut  (Knutr),  son  of  Gorm,  ii.  67,  81 
Knut,  son  of  Birger,  iv.  247 
Knut,  son  of  Knut,  iii.  316 
Knut  Lavard  (lavar<5r)  (see  Canute) 
Knut,  son  of  Svein  of  Jadar,  iv.  170 
Knut,  son  of  Svein  Fork-beard  (see 
Canute  the  Great) 

Knut,  son  of  Harald,  iv.  154 
Kodran,  son  of  Gudmund,  iv.  23 
Kol  (Ivolr),  son  of  Hal,  i.  266 
Kolbein  (Kolbeinn),  iv.  173 
Kolbein  Hruga,  iv.  236 
Kolbein  Ode  (oSi),  iv.  268 
Kolbein  Sterke,  iii.  40-42 
Kolbein,  son  of  Thord,  ii.  181,  202 
Kolbein  Thorliotson,  iv.  223 
Kolbjorn  (Kolbjorn),  son  of  Arne,  iii. 

r  32  . 

Kolbjorn  Klakke  (klakki),  iv.  82-90 
Kolbjorn  the  marshal,  ii.  200,  223, 
224 

Kolle  (Kolli)  the  skald,  iv.  215-219 
Konofogor,  ii.  382 ;  iii.  10 
Kormak  (Kormakr),  son  of  Ogmund, 
ii.  1,  2i.  47 

Kristin  (Kristin),  daughter  of  Birger, 
iv.  141 

Kristin,  daughter  of  luge  (see  Chris¬ 
tina) 

Kristin,  daughter  of  Knut  Lavard,  iv. 

Kristin,  daughter  of  King  Sigurd,  iv. 

239>  259,  288,  292,  293,  299,  303.  334, 

„  337,  34i 

Kristin,  daughter  of  Stig,  iv.  141 
Ivristrod  (KristroSr),  iv.  185-187 
Kvaser  (Kvasir),  i.  272 
Kveldulf,  i.  277,  355 
Kyrpingaorm  (Kyrpingaormr),  iv.  237, 
239 

Lagman  (Logmaffr),  son  of  Gudrod,  iv. 

23 

Leif  (Leifr),  son  of  Eirik,  i.  180-215  ; 

ii.  189,  202,  230-246,  279 

Leif  Ossurson,  iii.  79,  80,  100,  135-141 

Lincoln,  Abraham,  i.  121 

Liot  (Ljotr),  son  of  Thorfin,  ii.  90 ; 

iii.  4 

Livy,  i.  34 

Lodin  (LoSinn),  stepfather  of  Olaf 
Trygveson,  ii.  150 
Lodin,  son  of  Erling,  ii.  271 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


39  7 


Lodin  Saupprud  (sauppruSr),  iv.  231, 
236 

Lodin  of  Viggjar,  ii.  295 ;  iv.  78 
Logberse  (Logbersi),  iv.  215 
Loge  (Logi),  i.  288,  293 
Longfellow,  H.  W.,  i.  ix. 

Lopt  (Loptr),  son  of  Ssemund,  iv.  195, 
196 

Lotharius  (Lozarius),  Emperor,  iv.  131 


Macaulay,  T.  B.,  i.  34 
Magne  (Magni),  Bishop,  iv.  147,  178,  180 
Magnus  Barefoot  (berfcettr),  iv.  60-117, 
154,  155,  i67,  208>  210,  234,  299,  344, 
36° 

Magnus,  son  of  Birger,  iv.  247 
Magnus  the  Blind,  iv.  149,  167-169, 
181-236,  360 
Magnus,  Bishop,  iv.  205 
Magnus,  son  of  Erlend,  iv.  109 
Magnus,  son  of  Erling,  iv.  298-350 
Magnus,  son  of  Harald  Gille,  iv.  237 
Magnus  the  Good,  i.  37,  127,  173  ;  iii. 
69,  73,  x99,  2°°,  2i6>  237-  292-346, 
362-408  ;  iv.  21,  24,  31,  154,  360,-369 
Magnus,  son  of  Harald  Hardrade,  iv. 

12,  23,  35,  53,  58-60,  360  _  _ 

Magnus,  son  of  Harald  Kesja,  iv.  154 
Magnus,  Swedish  king,  iv.  247,  292 
Magnus  the  Strong,  iv.  155 
Magnussen,  Arne,  i.  29 
Magnussen,  Finn,  i.  190,  199,  247  ;  iv. 


Mahomet,  i.  115,  116;  iv.  364 

Malcolm  (Melkolmr),  Scottish  king,  iii. 
5  5  iv.  95 

Malmfrid  (MalmfriSr),  daughter  of 
Harald,  iv.  141,  147,  301 

Manuel  (Manueli),  Emperor,  iv.  125 

Margad  (MargarSr),  Irish  king,  iii. 
410-412 

Margaret  (Margret),  daughter  of  Arne, 
iv.  239 

Margaret,  daughter  of  Birger,  iv.  247 

Margaret,  daughter  of  Harald  Gille, 
iv.  247 

Margaret,  daughter  of  Inge,  iv.  102, 
103,  141,  155 

Margaret,  daughter  of  Ivnut  Lavard, 
iv.  141 

Margaret  (Margrit),  daughter  of  Wil¬ 
liam,  iv.  135 

Maria,  daughter  of  Queen  Zoe’s  brother, 
iii.  362,  364 

Maria,  daughter  of  King  Eystein,  iv. 


134,  337 

Maria,  daughter 


of  Harald  Gille,  iv. 


247.  3°7 

Maria,  daughter  of  Harald  Hardrade, 

iv.  35,  36,  41,  53 
Markus  of  Skog,  iv.  31 1-323 
Marsh,  G.  P.,  i.,  ix. 

Mas  (Mar),  iv.  231 
Mathilda  (MathilSr),  iv.  27,  51,  104 
Maurer,  Dr.  K.,  i.  102,  367 
Mercurius,  ii.  258 


Michael  Catalactus,  iii.  349,  350,  353 
Michael  (Mikjall),  ii.  121  ;  iii.  350 
Mimer  (Munir),  i.  272,  273,  278 
Mithridates,  i.  91  ;  iv.  357 
Mobius,  Th.,  i.  xvii.,  21 
Molbech,  iv.  353 
Moliere,  i.  44 
Mongolians,  iv.  353,  355 
Moors,  iv.  1 19,  121 
Morris,  Wm.,  i.  24,  28 
Mortensen,  i.  249 

Morukare  (Moerukari),  Earl,  iii.  157  ; 
iv.  26,  37,  38 

Munan,  son  of  Ale,  iv.  284 
Munan,  son  of  Ogmund,  iv.  219 
Munch,  P.  A.,  i.  x.,  xiii.,  xiv.  ;  ii.  184, 
207  ;  iii.  106,  256,  287,  343 
Myrkjartan,  King,  iv.  95,  109,  no 

Narfe  (Narfi),  ii.  25 
Nefstein,  father  of  Gudrun,  iv.  54 
Nereid,  iv.  188,  189 
Nereid  the  Old,  ii.  283 
Newton,  Sir  Isaac,  i.  92 
Nikolas  (Nikolas),  son  of  Arne,  iv.  239 
Nikolas,  son  of  Svein,  iv.  132,  155,  156 
Nikolas,  Cardinal,  iv.  248,  249 
Nikolas  Kufung  (kufungr),  iv.  340,  341 
Nikolas  Mase  (masi),  iv.  247,  292 
Nikolas,  son  of  Nikolas,  iv.  155 
Nikolas,  son  of  Sigurd,  iv.  320,  321, 
344-346  # 

Nikolas,  son  of  Simon  Skalp,  iv.  247, 
307,  3°9 

Nikolas  Skeg  (skegg),  iv.  281 
Nikolas,  son  of  Skialdvar,  iv.  273,  274, 
280,  299 

Njord  (NjorSr),  i.  264,  272,  273,  275, 
280-282 ;  ii.  20 

Nokve  (Nokkvi),  son  of  Pal,  iv.  320 
Nokve  of  Raumsdal,  i.  352  ;  ii.  363 
Norfe,  iv.  120 

Od  (Oftr),  i.  283  ;  ii.  34 
Od  (Oddr)  Kikinaskald  (kikinaskald), 
iii.  294,  344,  346,  381 
Od  Kolson,  i.  266 
Od  the  Monk,  ii.  71,  73 
Odin  (OSiun),  i.  2,  16,  46,  47,  51,  57, 
82,  86,  91-118,  126,  127,  137,  145, 
150,  233,  248,  255,  256,  266,  270-287, 
290,  300-315,  323,  324,  327,  330,  331, 
339,  351 ;  d.  1,  2,  9,  18,  20,  24,  25, 
44-46,  48,  56-58,  63,  67,  69,  91,  107- 
109,  147,  163,  261,  308,  391  ;  111.  237, 
258  ;  iv.  71,  158,  354-364 
Odin  Ondskald,  i.  342 
Off  a,  i.  93  ;  iv.  366 

Ogmund  (Ogmundr),  father  of  Kor- 
mak,  ii.  21 

Ogmund  Denger  (dengir),  iv.  246 
Ogmund,  son  of  Erling,  iv.  337 
Ogmund,  son  of  Hordakare,  ii.  152 
Ogmund  Ivarson,  iv.  281 
Ogmund,  son  of  Orm,  iv.  219 
Ogmund  Sande  (sandi),  ii.  200 


393 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


Ogmund  Skoptason,  iv.  96,  101,  102, 
106,  107 

Ogmund  Svipte  (sviptir),  iv.  228,  246 
Ogmund  Thorbergson,  iv.  77 
Olaf  (Olafr),  sou  of  Biorn,  i.  377 
Olaf  of  Dal,  iv.  148,  149 
Olaf  Dreng  (drengr),  ii.  201 
Olaf,  a  relation  of  Kalf  Arnason,  iii.  259 
Olaf  the  Swede,  son  of  Eirik,  ii.  63, 
I33*  i48>  i82,  192,  193,  196,  204,  208, 
21 1,  213,  217,  218,  227,  228,  253,  254, 
269,  287,  312,  316-319,  325,  331,  336, 
3385  345-  3 83,  385-389,  392-409  ;  iii- 
23.  44,  35,  3i9,  367 

Olaf  Geirstada-Alf  (Geirstaftaalfr),  i. 

263,  328-331,  363 
Olaf  Gudbrandson,  iv.  337-340 
Olaf,  Harald  Harfager's  sou,  i.  385,  388, 
395,  397 

Olaf,  sou  of  Harald  Kesia,  iv.  154,  222 
Olaf  Kyrre  (kyrri),  son  of  Harald,  i. 

r58J  159  iv-  35,  38,  4°,  50-73,  360 
Olaf  the  Saint  (helgi),  Haraldson,  i.  3, 
47,  55,  56,  68,  73,  87,  101-109,  TI7, 
122,  127,  145,  146,  T50,  167,  172,  178, 
196,  231,  250,  256,  258,  267,  339,  381 ; 
11.  24,  90,  115,  135,  182,  248-410;  iii. 
I-3I5,  3i9,  326-328,  330,  338,  343, 
346-348,  363,  376,  377,  380,  382,  392- 
394,  401  4x1-413  ;  iv.  33,  35,  54,  56, 
57,  64,  65,  107,  108,  126,  139,  140, 
I73_I78,  T92,  248,  249,  251-253,  293- 
296,  325.  330,  358,  360 
Olaf  the  White  (hviti),  i.  369,  386 
Olaf  I\  lining  (kliningr),  iv.  290 
Olaf,  king  in  England,  ii.  8 
Olaf  K varan,  ii.  113,  138 
Olaf  Magnuson,  iv.  103,  1 15-147,  154, 
207,  360 

Olaf  Skygne  (skygni),  i.  323 

Olaf,  son  of  Svein,  iv.  64 

Olaf  the  Tree-feller  (tretelgja),  i.  320— 

324 

Olaf  Trygveson,  i.  3,  20,  40,  73,  87,  101, 
105,  108,  120,  121,  129,  152,  168,  180, 
186,  194-19 7,  205,  256,  266,  267,  316  ; 

ii.  16,  47,  71-248,  257,  267,  269,  270, 
272,  280,  285-297,  321,  330,  334,  335, 
344;  111.  4,  5,  26,  162,  211,  289,  290, 
312,  315;  iv.  154,  360 

Ole  (Oli)  =  Olaf  Try  gveson 
Olof,  daughter  of  Olaf  Skygne  ( see 
Alof) 

Olof,  daughter  of  Bodvar  ( see  Alof) 
Olmod  (OlmoSr),  ii.  152-155 

Olver  (Olvir),  the  bonde  Miklimun 
(miklimunnr),  iv.  199,  200 
Olver  the  Wise,  i.  334 
Olver  of  Eggja,  iii.  27  29,  32,  33,  172, 
204 

Olver,  three  bondes,  ii.  391 

Ondur  (Ondurr),  son  of  Visbur,  i.  288 

Onund  (Onundr),  son  of  Eystein,  ii.  16, 

1 7  ;  iii.  107 

Onund,  sou  of  Yngvar,  i.  311-315 


Onund,  son  of  Olaf  the  Swedish  king, 

iii.  44,  88-90,  99,  143,  144,  150-156, 
x59,  217,  221 

Onund,  sou  of  Simon,  iv.  242,  265, 
303-324 

Orm  from  Ljoxa  (Ormr),  ii.  25,  166 
Orm  Lyrgja,  ii.  14 1 
Orm  Lygra,  ii.  166 
Orm  from  Oprustad,  ii.  200 
Orm  Ivarson,  iv.  239,  291,  292,  306, 
338,  339,  347,  349 

Orm,  son  of  Eilif,  iii.  395,  402,  404,  407; 

iv.  219,  239 

Orm  Skogarnef,  ii.  201 
Ornulf  Skorpa,  iv.  322-324 
Osur  (Ozurr),  son  of  Age,  ii.  197 
Ottar,  the  father  of  the  skald  Halfred, 
ii.  182 

Ottar  Balle  (balli),  iv.  216 
Ottar  Birting  (birtingr),  iv.  160-162, 
216,  228,  229,  233,  237,  238,  246,  33 1 
Ottar,  son  of  Egil,  i.  305,  306,  307 
Ottar,  the  Earl,  ii.  107 
Ottar  Black  (svarti),  ii.  249-278,  338- 
354,  393  5  iii;  21,  44 
Otto  (Otta),  Bishop,  iv.  51 
Otto,  Duke,  iii.  324,  325 
Otto,  Emperor,  ii.  103-108,  150 
Otto,  son  of  Svein  Fork-beard,  ii.  108 
Ozur  (Ozurr),  bonde,  iv.  322,  323 
Ozur,  Archbishop,  iv.  196 
Ozur  Tote  (toti),  i.  382 

Pal  or  Paul  (Pall)  Flip  (flipr),  iv.  195 
Pal  Andreasou,  iv.  332 
Pal,  Earl,  son  of  Thorfin,  i.  56  ;  iv.  46 
41,  91,  96,  1 16 
Pal,  son  of  Skopte,  iv.  340 
Paley,  i.  97-99 

Palnatoke  (Palnatoki),  ii.  119 
Patriarch  (Patriarki),  iv.  181 
Payne,  W.  M.,  iv.  215 
Peringskiold,  i.  113,  194,  195,  247-251  ; 
ii.  203,  229 

Peter  (Petr)  Saudaulfson,  iii.  393  •  iv. 
216,  230,  235 

Philip  (Phillipus),  son  of  Arne,  iv.  239 
Philip,  son  of  Gyrd,  iv.  200,  259,  260, 
3°4,  3i3 

Philip,  son  of  Birger,  iv.  247 
Philip,  son  of  Peter,  iv.  304 
Phoenicians,  i.  85 
Piets,  i.  55  ;  iv.  356 
Pinkerton,  1.  12,  42,  55,  66,  93,  342 ;  ii. 
139  ;  iv.  91 

Poppo,  Bishop,  ii.  106 
PtAFN,  C.  C.,  i.  29 

Ragna,  daughter  of  Nikolas,  iv.  247 
292 

Ragna,  daughter  of  Orm,  iv.  239 
Ragnar  (Ragnarr)  Lodbrok  (loSbrok),  i. 

335)  357  J  ii-  68  ;  iv.  368 
Ragnar  Rykkil  (rykkill),  son  of  Harald 
Harfager,  i.  367,  385 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


399 


Ragnfred  or  Ragnfrod  (RagnfreSr  or 
RagnfroSr),  i.  398  ;  ii.  91-95 
Ragnhild  (Raguhildr),  daughter  of 
Arne,  iii.  33 

Ragnhild,  daughter  of  Eirik  and  Gun- 
hild,  i.  398  ;  ii.  13 

Ragnhild,  daughter  of  Eirik  of  Jut¬ 
land,  i.  366,  367,  372 
Ragnhild,  daughter  of  Erling,  ii.  271 ; 

iii.  m-115;  iv.  337 
Ragnhild,  daughter  of  Earl  Hakon,  ii. 
95  :  iii-  395 

Ragnhild,  daughter  of  Harald  Gold- 
beard,  i.  333 

Ragnhild,  wife  of  Raud,  iii.  170 
Raguhild,  daughter  of  King  Magnus, 
iii.  403,  404,  407  ;  iv.  155,  222 
Ragnhild,  daughter  of  Sigurd  Hjort, 

i-  335.  336,  337.  339 
Ragnhild,  daughter  of  Skopte,  iv.  246 
Ragnhild,  daughter  of  Sveinke,  iv.  239 
Ragnvald  (Rognvaldr),  sou  of  Bruse, 

iii.  21,  199,  265,  343,  347,  348 
Ragnvald,  Earl  of  More,  son  of  Eystein 

Glumra,  i.  352-355,  369,  37°.  37°- 
379  ;  ii.  268  ;  iii.  3 
Ragnvald,  son  of  Inge,  iv.  184 
Ragnvald,  Earl,  iv.  240,  241 
Ragnvald,  Earl,  son  of  Ulf,  ii.  204-206, 

330,  334,  335,  359-365,  369,  3^3-399 ; 

iv.  292 

Ragnvald  Kunta,  iv.  304,  310 
Ragnvald,  son  of  Olaf,  i.  263,  330 
Ragnvald  liettilbeine  (rettilbeini),  i. 

373,  386,  387  ;  ii.  8,  160 
Ragnvald  from  Arvik,  ii.  126 
Ragnvald,  son  of  Harald  Harfager,  i. 
375  . 

Ranveig  (Rannveig),  daughter  of 
Sigurd,  iii.  307 

Rask,  Rasmus,  i.  190,  253  ;  iv.  353 
Raud  (RauSr)  in  Osterdal,  iii.  170 -172 
Raud  the  Strong,  ii.  176-180 
Raume  (Raumi),  ii.  200 
Razabard  (RazabarSr),  iv.  332 
Reas,  ii.  77,  78 

Reinald  (Reinaldr),  Bishop,  iv.  79,  194 
Rekon,  ii.  78 
Rekoue  (Rekoni),  ii.  78 
Rettibur  (Rettiburr),  iv.  198-204 
Richard  (RikarSr),  priest,  iv.  250 
Richard,  Earl  of  Rouen,  i.  372  ;  ii.  268  ; 
iii.  317 ;  iv.  25,  50 

Richard,  son  of  William,  i.  372 ;  ii. 
268 

Rig  (Rigr)  King,  i.  290 
Rimhild  (Rimhildr),  iv.  170 
Ring  (Hringr),  king  in  Hedemark,  ii. 
288,  289,  350,  354 

Robert  (Roftbertr),  son  of  Richard,  i. 

372  ;  ii.  268  ;  iv.  25 
Roger  (Roftgeirr),  Duke,  iv.  124,  125 
Rolf  Ganger  (Gonguhrolfr),  i.  31,  59, 
7°,  75,  i38,  3°7,  370-372,  379  I  ii.  268 
Rolf  (Hrolfr)  Krake  (kraki),  i.  31, 
308,  309,  317  ;  ii.  50  ;  iii.  236,  237 


Rolf  Nefja,  i.  369 

Romans,  i.  6,  7,  8,  12,  17,  34,  52,  79, 
88,  92,  94,  102,  232,  274,  297,  350, 
369  ;  ii.  219 ;  iv.  356,  357 
Rudbeck,  i.  84,  113 
Runolf  (Runolfr),  ii.  18 r,  247 
Rurik,  ii.  398 

Rydberg,  Viktor,  i.  46,  118 

S.EMUND  (Sa?mundr)  Husfreyja,  iv. 
194,  195,  200,  202 

Sadagyrd  (SaSagyrSr),  son  of  Bard,  iv. 
215,  227,  228,  246 

Saining  (Ssemingr),  son  of  Njord,  i. 

264,  280  ;  ii.  21 
Sars,  Ernst,  i.,  xvii. 

Sauda  Ulf  (SauSaulfr),  iii.  393 
Sauer  (Saurr),  ii.  16 
Saxe  (Saxi),  son  of  Bove,  i.  320 
Saxe  of  Vik,  iv.  207 
Saxo  Grammaticus,  i.  39,  81,  218,  259, 
297  ;  ii.  1,  16 ;  iii.  236 
Saxons,  i.  7,  13,  16,  42-46,  86,  1x3-118, 
i3U  133,  140,  163,  372;  ii.  105;  iii. 
322 

Schlyter,  ii.  358 
Serk  (Serkr)  of  Sogn.  iv.  109 
Siarek  (Sjarekr),  father  of  Thord  the 
skald,  iii.  154 
Sigar  (Sigarr),  i.  300 
Sigard  (SigarSr),  iv.  200 
Sigfrod  (SigfroSr),  i.  362 
Sigrid  (Sigridr),  daughter  of  Saxe,  iv. 
103,  207 

Sigrid,  daughter  of  Fin,  iii.  402 ;  iv. 
219,  239 

Sigrid,  daughter  of  Ketil,  iii.  395 
Sigrid,  daughter  of  Skialg,  iii.  48,  49, 
72,  204,  205 

Sigrid,  daughter  of  Earl  Svein,  iii.  88, 
393 

Sigrid  Sseta,  iv.  257 
Sigrid  the  Haughty,  daughter  of  Toste, 
ii-  63,  I33~i36.  I57-I59>  196,  204,  207, 
208,  269  ;  iii.  319 
Sigrid,  daughter  of  Dag,  iv.  285 
Sigrod  (SigroSr),  son  of  Harald,  i.  385, 

39°,  397  . 

Sigmund,  ii.  2 
Sigtryg  (Sigtryggr),  iii.  200 
Sigtryg,  son  of  Harald,  i.  366,  385 
Sigtryg,  King,  i.  326 
Sigtryg,  son  of  Eystein,  i.  332 
Sigurd  (Sigurdr),  Agnhot  (agnhottr), 
iy-  337.  34° 

Sigurd  of  Austerat,  iv.  207 
Sigurd  Bild  (bildr),  ii.  201 
Sigurd  the  bishop,  ii.  178  ;  iii.  36,  43, 
59,  62,  246,  275,  286  _ 

Sigurd,  son  of  Hlodver,  i.  381 ;  ii.  139  ; 
iii.  4,  5,  6,  15 

Sigurd,  son  of  Eirik  Bjodaskalle,  ii. 
77,  78,  79.  T49 

Sigurd,  son  of  Eystein,  earl  of  Orkneys, 
i-  369,  375  ;  iii-  3 

Sigurd,  son  of  Eystein  Trafale,  iv.  255 


400 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


Sigurd,  son  of  Erling,  ii.  271  ;  iii.  1 15  ; 
.iv*  337 

Sigurd,  father  of  Eirik  Bjodaskalle,  ii. 
181 

Sigurd,  son  of  Gudrun,  iv.  346 
Sigurd,  son  of  Gyrd,  iv.  200 
Sigurd  from  Halogaland,  ii.  171-173 
Sigurd,  son  of  Halvard  of  Reyr,  iv.  265, 
266,  273-275,  278,  281,  282,  285,  301- 
318 

Sigurd  Hit  (hit),  ii.  273,  275 
Sigurd  Hjupa  (hjiipa),  iv.  304,  310 
Sigurd  Hjort  (hjortr),  i.  30,  335,  336 
Sigurd  Ring  (liringr),  i.  31.  357 
Sigurd,  son  of  Hrane,  iv.  109,  113,  141- 
147,  344 

Sigurd  Hrise  (hrisi),  i.  373,  375  ;  ii.  158 
Sigurd  Hund  (hundr),  iii.  307;  iv.  112 
Sigurd,  Earl,  son  of  Earl  Hakon,  i.  390, 
391 ;  ii.  3,  8,  10,  19-27,  48,  49,  53-58, 
80,  88 

Sigurd,  Bue’s  brother,  ii.  119,  126,  130 
Sigurd  Kapa  (kapa),  iv.  304,  308 
Sigurd,  son  of  Kolbein,  iv.  224,  232, 
235 

Sigurd  the  Crusader,  i.  19,  127,  171, 
240;  iv.  91,  95,  103,  113-186,  203, 
239,  240,  299,  360 

Sigurd  Mun  .(munnr),  iv.  184,  215-261, 
265,  294,  31 1 

Sigurd  Orm  (ormr),  i.  335  ;  ii.  81 
Sigurd,  priest,  son  of  Bergtlior,  iv.  179, 
231 

Sigurd,  sou  of  Raud,  iii.  170,  171 
Sigurd, son  of  Sigurd, iv.  170-173,  187- 
191 

Sigurd,  son  of  Sigurd,  fostered  by 
Markus,  iv.  311,  318,  320,  322 
Sigurd  Slembe  (slembidjakn),  i.  40  ;  iv. 
183,  207-236 

Sigurd  Sleva,  son  of  Eirik,  i.  398  ;  ii. 
64,  66,  152 

Sigurd  Stork  (storkr),  iv.  225,  300 
Sigurd  Syr,  son  of  Halfdan,  i.  122 ;  ii. 
159,  249,  281-292,  301,  309-311,  355; 
iii.  8 r,  220,  265,  346,  399 
Sigurd,  son  of  Thorer,  iii.  47,  48,  307 
Sigurd,  son  of  Thorlak,  iv.  101-105,  140 
Sigurd  Ulstreng  (ullstrengr),  iv.  78,  80, 
82-85,  97,  98 

Sigurd  Woolsack  (ullbelgr),  iv.  85,  86 
Sigurd  Skrudhyrua  (skruShyrna),  iv. 
255 

Si^valde  (Sigvaldi),  ii.  119-128,  182, 
196,  197,  208-225,  257,  298 
Si^vat  (Sighvatr),  king  of  Attunda- 
land,  i.  315 

Sigvat  (Sigvatr)  the  skald,  son  of 
Tliord,  i.  238,  258  ;  ii.  71,  249-391;  • 
iii-  35,  69,  7°,  86,  87,  141-201,  234- 
3I5 

Simon,  Bonde,  iv.  241,  242 
Simon,  sou  of  Halkel  Huk,  iv.  248 
Simon,  son  of  Rare,  iv.  239 
Simon  Skalp  (skalpr),  iv.  247,  260-298; 
Sinfjotle,  ii.  2 


|  Skade  (SkaSi),  i.  280 ;  ii.  21 
Skafhog  (Skafhoggr),  iv.  134 
Skafte  (see  Skopte) 

Skage  (Skagi).  son  of  Skopte,  ii.  95 
Skegge  of  Yrjar,  ii.  126  (see  Jarnskegge) 
Skialdvor  (Skjaldvor),  daughter  of 
Brvnjolf  Ulfalde,  iv.  143,  344 
Skialdvor,  daughter  of  Nikolas,  iv.  344 
Skialg,  father  of  Erling,  iii.  45,  48 
Skiold  (Skjoldr),  son  of  Odin,  i.  274 
Skiold,  King,  i.  326 
Skjalf,  i.  293,  294 

Skjalg  (Skjalgr),  the  rich  son  of  Erling, 

ii.  271  ;  iii.  56-60,  88;  iv.  78 
Skjoldungs  (Skjoldungar),  i.  308 
Skogul  (Skogui),  ii.  44,  45,  63 

Skolm  (Skolmr),  father  of  Thoralf,  ii.  40 
Skopte  (Skopti),  of  Giske,  iv.  77 
Skopte,  the  speaker  of  laws,  ii.  320 ; 

iii.  78 

Skopte,  son  of  Skage,  ii.  96,  97 
Skopte,  son  of  Thorod,  ii.  71,  316,  381  ; 

iii.  82,  109 

Skopte,  son  of  Ogmund,  iv.  55,  96, 105- 
107,  1 16,  246 

Sknelings,  i.  182,  184,  203,  206,  210, 
21 1  ;  ii.  238-243 

Skule  (Skuli),  Duke,  son  of  Bard,  iv. 
54,  55,  207 

Skule,  the  king’s  foster-son,  iv.  53-55, 
74 

Skule,  Thorfinson,  ii.  90 ;  iii.  4 
Skule,  Tliorsteinson,  ii.  217 
Smith,  Birket,  librarian,  i.  xvii. 

Snorre  (Snorri),  son  of  Thorfin,  i.  205, 
206,  208  ;  ii.  242,  243,  247 
Snorre  the  gode,  i.  231,  232,  267  ;  iii. 
78,  82 

Snorre  Sturlason,  i.  1-3,  13,  14,  30-42, 
64,  82,  83,  92,  100-104,  1 1 9,  143,  194- 
196,  233-262,  272,  277,  284,  31 1,  325, 
33B  356,  376,  386;  ii.  1,  85,  89,  95, 
102,  no,  177,  181,  182,  203,  207,  229, 
258,  268,  321,  399 ;  iii.  22,  100,  153, 
236,  256,  270,  318,  357,  392 ;  iv.  29, 
50,  53,  60.  1 15.  298,  349,  350,  356-365 
Snow  the  Old  (Snjar  liinn  gamli),  i. 
286 

Suowfrid  (SnsefrlSr),  i.  373,  385 
Sokmimer  (Sokkmimir),  i.  286 
Solve  (Solvi)  the  Old,  i.  323 
Solve  of  Jutland,  i.  310,  31 1 
Solve  Klofe  (klofi),  i.  352-354,  381,  385 
Solve,  son  of  Solve,  i.  323,  324 
Solveig,  daughter  of  Halfdan,  i.  323 
Solveig,  wife  of  Andres,  iv.  195,  199 
Sorkver  (Sorkvir),  iv.  141,  247 
Sote  (Soti),  Earl,  i.  363 
Sote  the  viking,  ii.  252 
Soxolf  (Soxolfr),  father  of  Ulfhedin, 

iv.  222 

Sporsnial  (Sporsnjallr)  ofNerike,  i.  315 
Stare  (Stari),  father  of  Ivar,  iv.  232 
Starkad  (StakatSr)  the  Old,  i.  301 
Steenstrup,  J.,  i.,  xvii. 

Steigarthorer  ( see  Thorer  of  Steig) 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


401 


Stein  (Steinn),  son  of  Herdis,  iii.  346, 

393  ;  iv-  4-6,  3s-  58,  60 
Stein,  son  of  Skopte,  iii.  82,  106-117 
Steinkel  (Steinkell),  King,  iv.  16,  17, 
21,  96 

Stephanus,  iv.  324 
Stephens,  Geo.,  i.  vi.,  ix.,  xvii.,  85 
Stig  Hvitaled  (Stigr  hvitaleSr),  iv.  141 
Storm,  G.,  i.  xvii. 

Stradbjarne  (StraSbjarni),  iv.  304 
Strut-Harald(Strfitharaldr),  ii.  119, 120 
Stuf  (Stufr)  the  skald,  iii.  346,  361, 
362,  3675  386,  387;  iv.  60,  63 
Styrbjorn  (Styrbjorn),  i.  377  ;  ii.  63, 
i96,  198,  344,  346 

Styrkar  (Styrkarr),  son  of  Asbjorn, 

ii.  66 

Styrkar  of  Gimsar,  ii.  126,  166 
Styrkar  Glsesirofa  (glaesirofa),  iv.  226 
Styrkar  the  marshal,  iv.  49,  50 
Sulke  (Sulki),  i.  363 
Sumarlide  (SumarliSi)  of  Orkney,  iii. 
5,6 

Svanhild,  i.  366 
Svase  (Svasi),  giant,  i.  372,  373 
Svegder  (SvegSir),  i.  285,  286 
Svein  (Sveinn)  Alfifuson,  iii.  276-304  ; 
iv.  138,  360 

Svein,  son  of  Bergthor,  iv.  290 
Svein  Bryggjufot(bryggjufotr),  iv. 82,86 
Svein,  son  of  Eirik,  ii.  267 ;  iv.  141 
Svein,  servant  of  Hrorek,  ii.  369,  370 
Svein,  Earl,  son  of  Godwin,  iv.  26,  51 
Svein,  son  of  Hakon  the  Earl,  i.  267  ; 
ii.  226-228,  269,  280,  286,  295-313, 
321,  35G  384  5  iii-  45,  83,  88,  157, 
198,  218,  286,  395,  396;  iv.  360 
Svein  Haraldson,  iv.  77-82 
Svein  Fork-beard  (tjuguskegg),  ii.  108, 
119-126,  no,  19^-219,  227,  2^8,  262, 
344 ;  iii.  83,  99,  321 ;  iv.  301,  369 
Svein  the  priest,  iv.  226 
Svein  ltimhildson,  iv.  170-173 
Svein  Sveinson,  iv.  239 
Svein  Ulfson,  iii.  321-417;  iv.  3-9,  n- 
19,  29,  30,  58,  59,  64,  141,  155,  326, 
336,  369,  370,  372 

Sveinke  (Sveinki)  Steinarson,  iv.  82-90 
Sverre  (Sverrir),  King,  i.  19,  30,  40,  55, 
I43,  J96 ;  iv.  264,  298,  310,  349,  350 
Sverting  (Svertingr),  son  of  Bunolf,  ii. 
181,  202 

Svinagrim  (Svinagrimr),  iv.  226 
Svipdag  (Svipdagr),  i.  297,  313,  316,  319 

Teit  (Teitr),  son  of  Isleif,  i.  267 
Teit,  Ketilbjorn’s  son,  ii.  181 
Templars,  i.  117 
Teutons,  i.  9,  13,  19,  42,  46,  367 
Thangbrand  (Jhingbraudr),  i.  266  ;  ii. 

170,  171,  181,  187 
Thialfe  (J^jalfi),  iv.  95 
Thictmar,  ii.  106 

Thiodolf  (J>j6361fr)  of  Hvin,  i.  263,  264, 
285-296,  302,  305,  306,  309,  311,  314, 
32 x,  323-33°,  342,  374,  375,  387 
VOL.  IV. 


Thiodolf  the  skald,  iii,  294,  296,  300, 
3x9,  323,  329,  332-348,  353,  361,  364, 

368,  372,  384,  396 ;  iv.  1-8,  22,  24, 
25,  46,  47,  55,  56 

Thiostolf  (pjostolfr),  Alason,  iv.  185, 
216-222,  233-236,  246 
Thjodrek  the  Monk,  i.  19,  39 ;  ii.  71, 
73,  171  ;  iii.  256  ;  iv.  115 
Thor  (j5orr),  i.  16,  80,  86,  93,  101,  108, 
no,  113,  115,  117,  145,  275,  279,  281  ; 
11.  24,  91 ;  iii.  35,  36,  39,  260;  iv.  361, 
362 

Tliora  (J>6ra),  a  daughter  of  Guthorm, 
iv.  184,  213 

Thora,  daughter  of  Hakon,  ii.  43 
Thora,  daughter  of  Joan,  iv.  64 
Thora,  mother  of  Sigurd  the  Crusader, 
iv.  103,  173 

Thora  Mosterstang  (Mostrstong)  i.  391 
Thora  of  Rimul,  ii.  141,  143,  145 
Thora,  daughter  of  Saxe,  iv.  207 
Thora,  daughter  of  Skage,  ii.  95,  96 
Thora,  daughter  of  Ogmund,  iv.  55,  96 
Thora,  daughter  of  Thorberg,  iii.  112, 
385,  393,  399 ;  iv.  12,  35 
Thora,  daughter  of  Thorstein,  iii.  32 
Thora,  the  bonde’s  servant-girl,  iv.  241 
Thoralde  (poraldi)  Kept  (keptr),  iv. 
226 

Thoralde,  iii.  30,  31 
Thorar  (J^drarr)  the  lagman,  iii.  126- 
128 

Thorarin  (]3orarinn)  Loftunga,  ii.  249  ; 

iii.  181,  183,  276,  284,  285 
Thorarin,  son  of  Nefjulf,  ii.  181,  377- 

382  ;  iii.  57-60,  75-79 
Thorarin  Skeggjason,  iii.  346,  364 
Thorarin  Stuttfeld  (stuttfeldr),  iv.  115, 

117,  123,  157-159 

Thorberg  (]3orbergr),  son  of  Arne,  ii. 
271  ;  iii.  32,  m-117,  199,  263,  280, 
288,  289,  31 1,  385,  ;  iv.  41 
Thorberg  Skafhog  (skafhogg),  ii.  191, 
192 

Thorberg  of  Varnes,  ii.  25 
Thorbjorn  (]3orbjorn)  Gjaldkere  (gjahl- 
keri),  iv.  321 

Thorbjorn,  son  of  Gunnar,  iv.  304 
Thorbjorn  Hornklofe  (hornkloti),  i. 
3d2,  35X-357,  361-364,  367,  369  ;  ”• 
2-63 

Thorbjorn  Skakkaskald  (skakkaskald), 

iv.  215,  270,  298,  303,  324 
Thorbjorn,  father  of  Gudrid,  ii.  239 
Thord  (j)6rSr),  iv.  34 

Thord  Freysgode  (FreysgocSi),  ii.  i8r 
Thord  Folason,  ii.  373-375  ;  iii.  241, 
257,  258  ;  iv.  96 

Thord  Geller  (gellir),  i.  31  ;  ii.  118 
Thord,  son  of  Guthorm,  iii.  81 
Thord  Husfreyja,  iv.  257 
Thord,  son  of  Hordakare,  ii.  66,  152 
Thord  Istrumage  (istrumagi),  iii.  38, 
4° 

Thord,  son  of  Kolbein,  ii.  71,  122,  148, 
193,  222,  227,  249,  272,  273  ;  iii.  5,  74 

2  C 


402 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


Thord,  son  of  Thorlak,  iii.  ioi,  103, 
139,  140 

Thonl,  from  Njardarlog,  ii.  201 
Thord  Sigvaldaskald,  ii.  298 
Thord,  son  of  Siarek,  ii.  40,  42,  249, 
301  ;  iii.  154 

Thord,  son  of  Skopte,  iv.  96,  107 
Thord  Skotakol  (skotakollr),  ii.  395,  396 
Thord,  Barkarson,  iii.  74 
Thord  of  Gata,  iii.  79 
Thord,  son  of  Erlmg,  iii.  115 
Thord  Hesthofde,  ii.  241 
Thordis  (pordis),  Skeggja,  iv.  289 
Thorer  (porir)  brother  of  King  Magnus, 
iii.  381,  383 

Thorer,  son  of  Erling,  ii.  271 
Thorer  Faxe  (faxi),  ii.  16 
Thorer,  son  of  Gudbrand,  ii.  294 
Thorer  Haklang  (haklaugr),  i.  363,  365 
Thorer  Helsing  (helsingr),  ii.  17  ;  iii. 
108  ;  iv.  296 

Thorer,  son  of  Hroald,  i.  372,  381 
Thorer  Hjort  (hjortr),  ii.  126,  157,  176, 

^  1 77 

Thorer  Hund  (hundr),  iii.  26,  47,  53, 
54,  63,  64,  72-74,  90-98,  1x9-123, 
167,  172,  179,  198,  204,  205,  211,  217, 
249-265,  273,  274,  307  _ 

Thorer  Hvinantorde  (hvinantorSi),  iv. 
222 

Thorer,  son  of  Ingirid,  iv.  188 
Thorer  Klakka,  ii.  138,  140 
Thorer  Lange  (langi),  ii.  324,  325,  375 
Thorer,  son  of  Ragnvald,  i.  370,  378, 
379 

ThorerSel  (sell-),  iii.  49-58,  63,  64,  71,  72 
Thorer  Skeg  (Skegg),  ii.  25 
Thorer  of  Steig,  iii.  376 ;  iv.  58,  73-82 
Thorer  Treskeg  (treskegg),  i.  376 
Thorer,  son  of  Olver,  iii.  172-175 
Thorfin  (Thorfinnr  or  Th.orfi.3r)  Eisle 
(eisli),  ii.  200 

Thorfin  Hausakliufer  (hausaklju.fr),  ii. 
9,  *3,  9° ;  iii-  4 

Thorfin  Mun  (muunr),  ii.  71,  249;  iii. 
234,  235,  258 

Thorfin,  son  of  Earl  Sigurd,  iii.  5-23, 
33*  343*  407  I  iv-  36 
Thorfin  Svarte  (svarti),  iv.  346,  349 
Thorfin  Karlsefne,  i.  194,  197,  199, 
204-206,  223,  231  ;  ii.  241-247 
Thorgaut  (porgautr)  Skarde  (skar3i), 
ii.  316-319,  329 

Thorgeir  (porgeirr)  Afradskol  (afr<i3s- 
kollr),  i.  266  ;  ii.  206. 

Thorgeir  the  king’s  farmer,  iii.  no 
Thorgeir  Flek  (fiekkr),  iii.  226,  227, 
294*  309 

Thorgeir,  son  of  Havar,  iii.  74 
Thorgeir  the  Scribe,  iv.  344 
Thorgeir  of  Kviststad,  iii.  255,  258,  31 1 
Thorgeir,  son  of  Stein,  iv.  234 
Thorgeir,  relation  of  Saint  Olaf,  ii. 
T49,  150*  191 

Thorgeir,  son  of  Snorre,  ii.  247 
Thorgerd,  ii.  230 


Thorgils  (porgils)  Arason,  ii.  381 
Thorgils,  son  of  Thoralf,  ii.  72,  77,  78 
Thorgils,  son  of  Geller,  i.  265 
Thorgils  Halmuson,  iii.  239,  271,  274, 
275,  281 

Thorgils,  son  of  Harald,  i.  366,  385, 
386 

Thorgils,  son  of  Od,  iv.  208-210 
Thorgils,  son  of  Snorre,  iii.  376,  377 
Thorgils  Sprakaleg  (sprakaleggr),  iii. 
99,  321 

Thorgny  (porgn?r),  i.  146 ;  ii-  359* 
362-367,  387 

Thorgnm  (porgrimr),  son  of  Thjodolf, 
ii.  200 

Thorgrim  Skinhufa  (skinnliufa),  iv.  112 
Thorgunna  (porgunna),  mother  of 
Vagn,  ii.  219 

Thorkell  (porkell),  son  of  Aniunde,  iii. 

7-13*  17*  19*  20,  23,  27 
Thorkell  Dydril  (dy3rill),  ii.  149,  201, 
214 

Thorkel  Eyjolfson,  iii.  74,  78,  82 
Thorkel  Geirason,  iii.  329 
Thorkel  Geysa,  iii.  384,  385 
Thorkel  the  Tall,  ii.  119,  121,  257,  298 
Thorkel  Hamarskald,  iv.  73,  78 
Thorkel  Leira,  ii.  122,  126,  130, 131,  133 
Thorkel  JNTefja,  ii.  149,  201,  214,  224 
Thorkel,  son  of  Skalle,  iii.  346  ;  iv.  52 
Thorkel,  son  of  Sumarlid,  iv.  208,  21 1 
Thorlak  (porlakr),  Bishop,  i.  215  ;  ii. 
247 

Thorleif  (porleifr),  son  of  Brynjolf,  iv. 
236  _ 

Thorleif,  son  of  Raudfeld,  ii.  147 
Thorleif  Skjappa,  iv.  225 
Thorleif  the  Wise,  i.  338,  373  ;  ii.  15, 
6°*  96*  97,  152 

Thorleik  (porleikr)  Bollason,  iii.  74 
Thorleik,  son  of  Brand,  ii.  182 
Thorleik  the  Fair,  iii.  346,  386-391 
Thorliot  (porljotr)  Skaufusltalle  (skau- 
fuskalli),  iv.  266,  277 
Thormod  (pormo3r),  son  of  Eindride, 
iv.  23 

Thormod  the  priest,  ii.  202 
Thormod  Kolbrunarskald,  ii.  249  ;  iii. 

74,  232,  234-238,  266-270. 

Thorny  (porn?),  i.  337 
Thorod  (poroddr),  gode,  ii.  118 
Thorod,  son  of  Snorre,  iii.  82,  106,  109, 

1 25- 1 33 

Thorolf  (porolfr),  ii.  201 
Thorolf  of  Dimun,  iii.  79,  80,  100-105 
Thorolf  Dryl  (dryllr),  iv.  321 
Thorolf  Lusarskeg  (lusarskegg),  ii.  72, 
77*  79 

Thorolf  Skjalg,  ii.  152 
Thorolf,  son  of  Skolm,  ii.  40,  41 
Thorpe,  B. ,  i.  ix.,  23 
Thorsen,  P.  G.,  i.  85 
Thorstein  (porsteinn)  of  Audsholt,  iv. 
232 

Thorstein  the  bonde,  ii.  74,  75 
Thorstein  Frode  (fro3i),  iii.  1 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


403 


Thorsteiu  Galge  (galgi),  iii.  32 
Tliorstein,  son  of  Hal.,  iii.  78,  82 
Thorstein  Hlifarson,  ii.  201 
Tliorstein  the  White,  ii.  201 
Thorsteiu  Knarrarsmid  (Knarrar- 
smiftr),  iii.  252,  261 
Thorstein  Midlang  (miSlangr),  ii.  129 
Thorstein  Raud,  or  the  Red,  i.  369; 

iii.  4 

Thorstein,  son  of  Sigurd,  iv.  207 
Thorstein  Uxafot  (uxafotr),  ii.  200 
Thorstein,  son  of  Eirik,  i.  213  ;  ii.  230 
^  239,  240 

Thorstein  the  Black,  ii.  239-241 
Thorun,  ii.  247 

Thorvald  (porvaldr),  son  of  Eirik,  i. 

203;  ii.  230,  236-239 
Thorvald  Veile  (veili),  ii.  171 
Thorvid  (porviSr)  the  lagman,  iv.  21 
Thorvid  the  Stammerer,  ii.  405-407 
Thrand  (prandr)  Gjalkere,  iv.  233 
Thrand  of  Gata,  iii.  101,  105,  136-141 
Thrand  of  Eggja,  ii.  25 
Thrand  the  White,  ii.  327;  iii.  126 
Thrand  the  Strong,  ii.  200 
Thrand  Skjalge  (skjalgi),  ii.  200 
Thurid  (puriSr),  i.  231,  232,  267 
'J’hyre  (pyri),  i.  337 
Thy  re,  daughter  of  Harald,  ii.  120, 
196-207 

Tind  (Tiudr),  son  of  Halkel,  ii.  71,  127, 
132 

Tofe  (Tofi),  son  of  Valgaut,  iii.  160 
Torf-Einar  (Torfeinarr),  i.  30,  342,  370, 
376-380;  ii.  7-9  ;  iii.  3,  4 
Toste  (Tosti)  Skoglar-Toste,  ii.  63 
Toste,  Earl,  ii.  133,  196;  iii.  157,  321  ; 

iv.  25-48 

Trygve  (Tryggvi),  called  son  of  Olaf 
Trygveson,  iii.  289,  290 
Trygve,  son  of  Olaf,  i.  395,  397 ;  ii.  4, 
5,  12,  14,  27,  48,  52,  60-62,  71-73,  78, 
II5,  I37,  148-15 B  203-205,  330  ;  iii. 
290,  291 

Tunne  (Tunni),  Egil’s  thrall,  i.  302-305 

Tyr  (Tyr),  ii.  56 

Tyrker,  i.  202,  209  ;  ii.  233-236 

IJBBE,(Ubbi),  son  of  Ake,  i.  359 
Ulf  (Ulfr)  Fly,  iii.  393 
Ulf,  son  of  Hrane,  iv.  109,  113 
Ulf,  Earl,  son  of  Ragnvald,  ii.  399  ; 

iii.  323 

Ulf,  Earl,  son  of  Sprakaleg,  iii.  99,  147- 
i59 

Ulf  the  Red,  ii.  200,  215,  216 
Ulf,  son  of  TJspak,  iii.  346,  357,  363, 
392,  393  >  Iv.  5,  32,  33 
Ulfhedin  (Ulfliedinu),  son  of  Soxolf, 

iv.  222 

Ulfhild  (Ulfhildr),  daughter  of  St. 
Olaf,  iii.  199,  208,  221,  226 

Ulfkel  (Ulfkell)  Snilliug  (Snillingr),  ii. 

262,  273 

Ulfuad  (UlfnaSr),  iv.  25 


Unger,  C.  R.,  i.  x.-xii.,  29,  249  ;  ii.  207, 
343 ;  iv.  53 

Unibur  (Uniburr),  iv.  197 
Urguthriot  (Urgujiriotr),  Earl,  ii.  150 
Uspalc  (Uspakr),  iii.  346 
Usvifer  Spake,  iii.  357 
Uthyrmer  (Upyrmir),  ii.  200 

Vagn,  son  of  Ake,  ii.  119,  121,  126, 

i28-i33 

Yak  (Vakr)  Raumason,  ii.  200 
Valdemar  (Valdimarr),  son  of  Jaris- 
leif,  ii.  398 

Yaldemar,  Danish  king,  iv.  141,  134, 
300,  301,  328,  333-337 
Yaldemar,  Russian  king,  ii.  77-80,  98, 
99,  137,  194 

Valgard  (ValgarSr)  of  Yal,  iii.  346,  367, 
368 

Yalgaut  (Valgautr),  iii.  160 
Valgerd  (ValgerSr),  iv.  23 
Valthiof  (Valjijofr),  son  of  Godwin,  iii. 

x57;  iv.  37-39,  5I-53 
Yana,  i.  285 

Vandrad  (Vandraftr),  iv.  9-1 1 
Vanlande  (Yanlandi),  i.  115,  285-287 
Vaus  (Vanir),  i.  272,  273 
Varin  (Varinn),  ii.  162 
Varings  (Vaeringjar),  i.  80,  114;  ii.  262  ; 
^  iii*  129,  293-297,  347-366 
Yatnorm  (Vatnormr),  sou  of  Dag,  iv. 
220,  223 

Ye  (Ye),  i.  271-274 
Vemund  (Vemundr),  king,  i.  355 
Vemund  Volubrjot  (volubrjotr),  ii. 
66 

Yesete  (Yeseti),  ii.  120 
Veterlide  (VetrliSi),  ii.  171 
Vidkun  (ViSkunnr),  son  of  Jon,  iii. 
307;  iv.  79,  80,  109,  1 13,  1 14,  149, 
225 

Yigaglum  (Vigaglumr),  ii.  129 
Vigfus  (Yigfuss),  ii.  71,  129 
Vigfusson,  Gudbr.,  i.  vi. ,  ix.-xi.,  xiv., 
21,  27,  85,  158,  168,  262,  264,  26s, 
276,  284,  333,  376,  386 ;  ii.  1,  2,  57, 
186,  234;  iii.  22,  107,  315 
Vigleik  ( Vigleikr),  son  of  Arne,  iii.  192, 
i93 

Yikar  (Yikarr),  ii.  200 
Vikingakare  (Yikingakari),  ii.  336 
Vilas,  W.  F.,  i.  xviii. 

Vilborg,  ii.  181,  335 
Yile  (Vili),  i.  271-274 
Visavald  (Visavaldr),  ii.  135,  398 
Visbur  (Visburr),  son  of  Vanlande,  i. 

287-289,  293 
Vitgeir  (Vitgeirr),  i.  386 
Volsungs,  iv.  129 
Yot  (Vottr),  i.  306 

William  (Vilhjalmr)  Bastard,  i.  372 ; 

iv.  25-29,  50-53,  326 
William,  Bishop,  iv.  240 
William,  son  of  Gudrun,  iv.  346 


404 


INDEX  OF  PERSONS. 


William,  Earl,  in  Valland,  ii.  368 
William,  King,  in  Sicily,  iv.  124 
William  Lougspear  (langaspjot),  ii. 
268 

William  Skinnare,  iv.  226 
William,  son  of  llolf  Ganger,  i.  372 
Wimmer,  Ludv.,  i.  85 
Worm,  Ole,  i.  22r,  222,  249 


Ynglings,  i.  2,  115,  263,  264,  283, 

291,  299,  33°,  33i. 

Yngvar  (Yngvarr),  i.  311-315 
Yngve  (Yngvi),  son  of  Alrek,  i. 
296,  298 

Yngvefrey  ( see  Ingvefrey) 

Yrsa,  Queen,  i.  307,  308 

Zoe  the  Great,  Queen,  iii.  349, 
362,  363,  365 


Ylfings,  i.  317,  318 


GEOGRAPHICAL 


INDEX. 


Aberdeen  (Apardjon),  in  Scotland,  iv. 
243 

Acre  (Akrsborg),  in  Palestine,  iv.  125, 
126 

Adalsysla  ( Aftals^sla),  a  part  of  Estlionia, 

i.  311  ;  ii.  194 

Africa  (Affrika),  i.  269  ;  111.  353  ;  iv. 
120,  121,  158 

Agdanes  (AgSanes),  at  the  entrance  of 
Throndhjem  fjord,  i.  398;  ii.  140; 
iii.  115,  118  ;  iv.  33,  132,  153,  330, 

33 1 

Agder  (AgSir),  south-western  part  of 
Norway,  i.  328,  331,  363,  378;  ii. 
27-29,  89,  151,  161,  227,  305,  31 1, 
326,  328 ;  iii.  44,  100,  154,  179,  182, 
191,  192,  219,  290,  319,  362;  iv.  93, 
302 

Agnafit,  a  neck  of  land  where  Stock¬ 
holm  is  now  situated,  i.  294 ;  ii.  253 
Alaborg  (Alaborg),  Aalborg  in  Den¬ 
mark,  iv.  223,  236,  340 
Alcasser  de  Sal,  iv.  120 
Aldeigiuborg  (or  Aldeigja),  Ladoga  in 
Russia,  ii.  194,  397,  399 ;  iii.  3 67 
Alfheim  ( Alfheimar),  Bohuslen  in  Swe¬ 
den,  and  a  part  of  Smaalenene  in 
Norway,  i.  328,  333  ;  ii.  200 
Algesiras,  iv.  120 

Alkasse,  a  citadel  in  Spain,  iv.  120 
Alkassir,  iv.  120 
Alleghany  river,  i.  220 
Alptafiord  (AlptafjorSr),  a  fiord  in 
Iceland,  ii.  170 
Alptanes,  i.  82 

Alrekstad  (AlreksstaSir),  Aarstad  in 
Norway,  i.  391  ;  ii.  43,  60 
Altona,  iv.  370 
Alv  Isle,  ii.  43 

America,  Americans,  i.  viii.-xii.,  ii,  12, 
17,  48,  125,  133,  182,  192,  193,  198- 
200,  210-214,220,  224,  227,231,  238; 

ii.  232,  381  ;  iii.  141  ;  iv.  355.  See 
also  Yinland 

Angelsey  (Ongulsey),  Angelsea  near 
England,  iv.  93,  94  _ 

Apavatn  in  Iceland,  ii.  298 
Apulia,  iv.  124 
Archangel,  i.  117,  382 
Arendal,  iv.  230 


Arnarnes  Thing  (Arnarnes)>ing),  in 
Norway,  iv.  143 

Aros  (Aross),  in  Sweden,  where  Upsala 
is  now  situated,  ii.  407  ;  iii.  217 
Aros  (Aross),  Aarhus  in  Denmark,  iii. 

217,  33i,  337-  34? ;  iv.  370 
Arvig  (iErvik),  Ervik  in  Norway,  ii.  126 
Asaheim  (Asalieimr)  or  Asaland  (Asa- 
land),  mythological  name,  i.  270,  279 
Asgard  (Asgarftr),  mythological  name, 

i.  100,  233,  270,  274,  289 
Ascalon,  iv.  125 
Ashdown,  ii.  262 

Asia  (Asia),  Asiatics  (Asiamenn),  i.  47, 

49- 53,  96,  101,  103,  104,  269,  270; 
ii.  24  ;  iv.  353,. 355-357,  363 

Asopli,  Sea  of,  iii.  365 
Asington,  ii.  262 
Assonet  Point,  i.  214,  220 
Assor,  i.  270 

Atley  Island,  Atle  Island  in  Sondfiord, 
Norway,  i.  356 

Attund aland  (Attundaland),  in  Swe¬ 
den,  i.  319 ;  ii.  358 

Audsholt  (AuSsliolt),  in  Iceland,  iv.  232 
Augvaldsnes  (Ogvaldsnes),  Agvaldsnes 
on  Ivarmt  Island,  Norway,  i.  391  ;  ii. 
27,  161-163  ;  iii.  49,  52,  ss,  58,  61, 

63,  64 

Aumord  (AumorS),  near  Fredrikstad, 
Norway,  iv.  148 

Aurland,  Urland  in  Sogn,  iv.  77 
Austrat  (Austratt),  Osteraad  near 
Throndhjem,  Norway,  ii.  170 ;  iii. 
399,  400 ;  iv.  207 

Austrey,  one  of  the  Fareys,  iii.  101 
Australia,  i.  220 

Baden-Badenians,  i.  45 
Baffin’s  Bay,  i.  189,  200 
Bahuus,  i.  361 

Balagard’s-side  (Balagarssiffa),  a  part 
of  the  coast  of  Finland,  ii.  256 
Balivick,  iv.  245 

Baltic  Sea  (Eystrasalt),  i.  20,  46,  48, 

50- 53,  57,  117,  X2i,  134,  166,  167,  171, 
275,  291,  305,  310,  322,  371,  382,  388  ; 

ii.  12,  29,  61,  64,  65,  77,  86,  100, 133, 
194,  209,  251,  312,  326,  328  ;  iii.  108, 
322 ;  iv.  133,  155,  354,  370 


406 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


Barvik  (Barvik),  in  Sweden,  iii.  154 
Batald  (Bataldr),  Batalden  in  Sond- 
fiord,  Norway,  iv.  223 
Bavaria  (Beiaraland),  i.  165  ;  iv.  13 1 
Bayeanx,  i.  75 

Befia,  Bafverd,  a  river  in  Sweden,  iv.  285 
Belgium,  i.  131  ;  ii.  109 
Berg,  i.  238,  239 

Bergen  (Biorgyn),  in  Norway,  i.  127, 
171,  172,  183,  236,  237  ;  ii.  43,  44,  66  ; 
iv.  54,  61,  96,  132,  142,  153,  178,  188- 
191,  196,  210,212,  228,  254,  259,  262, 
268,  269,  28l,  293,  304-306,  3II,  32O, 
32I-324,  33O,  332,  34I,  343,  347,  354, 
366 

Berkley,  i.  214,  220 
Bezina  River,  in  Yallachia,  iv.  295 
Biarkey,  Bjerko  in  Norway,  iii.  26,  47, 
72-  73,  97,  98,  J19,  121,  307 ;  iv.  79, 
149,  225 

Biannaland,  on  the  coast  of  the  White 
Sea,  i.  117,  118,  382;  ii.  63  :  iii.  90- 
95,  98,  1 19-  522;  iv.  76 
Biarnaurar,  Bjornor  in  Norway,  ii.  157 
Biarney,  Bjorno  in  Norway,  i.  204  ;  iii. 
.193 

Birkistrand  (Birkistrond),  in  Norway, 

ii.  30 

Black  Sea  (Svartahaf),  i.  269,  270  ;  iii. 

365 

Bleking,  i.  81,  217 

Blokumannaland  (Blokumannaland), 
Yallachia,  iv.  295 

Blueland(Blaland),  Ethiopia,  i.  269,  270 
Boar  (Bcear),  in  Norway,  iii.  34 
Boku  (Bokn),  Bukn,  an  island  and  a 
fiord  near  Stavanger  in  Norway,  iii. 
186,  188,  192,  290 
Borgund,  in  Norway,  iii.  192,  193 
Bornholm  (Borgundarholmr),  ii.  100, 
101,  119,  120 

Borro,  Borre  in  Norway,  i.  326,  327 
Boston,  iv.  245 
Bothnian  Gulf,  ii.  64 
Bratsberg  (Brattsberg),  in  Norway,  iv. 
258 

Bratsas  (Brattsass),  in  Sweden,  iv.  197 
Brattahlid  (BrattahliS),  in  Greenland, 
i.  201 ;  ii.  202,  230,  233,  236,  241 
Bravalla,  i.  30,  81 

Breida  (BreiSa),  Breden  in  Norway, 

iii.  36 

Breidablik  (BreiSablik),  a  mythological 
name,  i.  275 

Breidifiord  (BreiftifjbrSr),  in  Iceland, 
i.  196  ;  ii.  118,  381 
Breitstadfiord,  ii.  295,  296 
Bremanger,  ii.  188 

Bremen,  i.  37,  no,  114,  177,  20 7,  247 
Bretagne,  i.  372 

Bretland,  Wales,  i.  386;  ii.  7,  no; 

iii.  9,  411  ;  iv.  26,  93 
Bruns vik  (Brunsvik),  Braunschweig 
in  Germany,  iii.  326 
Bulgaria  (Bolgaraland  or  Yulgaria), 
iii.  211,  347;  iv.  131 


Bulghar.  iii.  211 

Bunes  (Bunes),  in  Norway,  ii.  141 
Byrda  (Byrfta),  in  Norway,  ii.  93,  175 ; 

iv.  226 

Byskupshafn  (Byskupshofn),  Bispe- 
havn  near  Bergen,  iv.  331 

Caithness  (Katanes),  in  Scotland,  i. 
78,  369,  380 ;  ii.  139 ;  iii.  5,  6,  8,  10, 
22,  207  ;  iv.  243 

Calmar  (Kalmaruir),  in  Sweden,  iii. 

163  ;  iv.  156 
Cambridge,  i.  257 
Cambridgeshire,  i.  131 
Canterbury  (Kantaraborg),  in  England, 
ii.  257,  263 

Cantire  (Satin),  in  Scotland,  iv.  gi-gc 

Carlisle,  iv.  245 

Carpathian  Mountains,  i.  53 

Casan,  iii.  21 1 

Chasgar,  i.  270 

Cheshire,  iv.  93 

Chester,  iv.  93 

Christiania,  i.  xi.,  114,  175;  iii.  270, 
350,  414  ;  iv.  359 

Christiania  fiord  (Foldin),  ii.  309 ;  iii. 
!79,.i83 

Chris tiansand,  ii.  28 
Clontarf,  iii.  5 
Cod,  Cape,  ii.  237 

Connaught  (Kunuaktir),  in  Ireland,  iv. 

95,  109 

Connecticut  River,  i.  220 
Constantinople  (MikligarSr),  i.  80,  114  ; 
ii.  262  ;  iii.  349,  353,  360,  362-366  ; 
iv.  116,  124,  125,  128,  129,  131,  241, 
293,  295,  296,  337 

Copenhagen,  i.  vii.,  1,  77,  114,  168,  174, 
188,  228,  229 ;  ii.  127 ;  iii.  350 ;  iv. 
55,  355 

Cornwall,  i.  132,  372,  382;  ii.  no;  iv. 
368 

Co  uriand  (Kurland),  Kurland  in 
Russia,  ii.  366 
Crossness,  i.  204  ;  ii.  238 
Croyland,  iv.  52 
Cumberland  River,  i.  220 
Cumberland  (Kumraland),  in  England, 
i.  87,  124,  130  ;  ii.  no;  iv.  354 
Cyprus  (Kipr),  iv.  125,  127 

Dal  (Dnlr),  Store-Dal,  in  Norway,  iv. 
148,  149 

Danavirke' (Danavirki),  ii.  102,  104 
Dardanalles,  i.  172 ;  iv.  127 
Davis’s  Straits,  i.  183,  184,  186,  187, 
192,  204 

Denmark,  Danes  (Danmork,  Danariki, 
Danaveldi,  Danir),  i.  2,  4,  6,  8-12, 
I7,  l8,  31,  33,  44,  66,  72,  74~76,  125, 
129-131,  139,  155,  159,  164,  173,  183, 
237,  240,  245,  248,  249,  262,  264,  26b, 
274,  275,  291,  298,  300-312,  322,  345, 
346,  367,  370,  382,  388  ;  ii.  6,  9-16, 
27-3°,  33,  35,  38,  64,  67,  8r-86,  90, 
97,  io4,  io9,  117-120,  123,  127,  133, 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


407 


150,  192,  195-197,204,  207-2 1 1,  217- 
219,  251,  253,  257,  259,  262-264, 275, 
287-289;  322,  327,  340,  344, 372,  401, 
402,  406  ;  iii.  3,  22,  82-89,  99?  M2~ 
144,  147,  155.  i57,  162,  t67,  177,  179, 
181,  183,  184,  205,  216,  218,  219,229, 
276-278,  300,  301,  317-326,  330,  331, 

337,  339-345,  362,  368-370,  373,  378- 
390,  404,  407-417  ;  xv.  3,  5-8,  13,  15, 
17-19,  29-32,  58,  61,  68,  76,  82,  90, 
132,  138,  184,  187,  188,  205,  208,  218, 
220-223,  228-231,  236,  300,  301,  324- 

328,  329,  333-337,  340,  365-372. 
Digliton  Rock,  i.  214,  217,  218,  220, 
225,  230 

Diimxn,  one  of  the  Fareys,  iii.  79,  106 
Dornoch,  Frith  of,  i.  369 
Dorsetshire,  iv.  368 
Dovre  (Dofrar),  in  Norway,  iii.  34 
Dovrefield  (Dofrafjall),  in  Norway,  i. 
325,  347,  362;  ii.  104,  292;  iii.  68, 
90,402 ;  iv.  74,  76 
Drafn,  Drammensfjord,  iii.  183 
Dragseid  (DragseiS),  a  neck  of  land 
across  Statland  in  Norway,  ii.  156 
Drepstok,  ii.  230 

Dublin  (Dyflinn),  in  Ireland,  i.  386  ; 

ii.  113,  138  ;  iii.  5,23,410  ;  iv.  109,110 
Durham,  i.  130,  163 

Dwina  (Vina),  Dvina,  river  in  Russia, 

i.  117,  382  ;  ii.  65,  66;  iii.  92 
Dyrsa  (Dyrsa),  a  river  in  Denmark,  iv. 

334 

Eari.  Isle  (Jarir, ey),  Jerso  in  Norway, 
East  Fiord  ( AustfirSir),  in  Iceland,  ii. 
244;  iii.  12 

Edne  (Effni),  Etne  in  Norway,  iv.  259. 
Egersund  (Eikundasund),  in  Norway, 

iii.  100,  179,  182 

Egg,  Egge  in  Norway,  i.  152,  209  ;  ii. 
25;  iii.  27,  33,  1 17,  172,  204,  279, 
289.  290,  31 1 

Eid  (EiS),  Askim  parish  in  Norway,  i. 

335 

Eid,  Manseid  (?)in  Norway,  i.  355  ;  ii.  30 
Eid,  Eda  parish  in  Norway,  ii.  390 
Eid,  Eidsvold  parish  in  Norway,  ii. 
353;  iii.  44 

Eider  (Eiffar),  Eda  parish  in  Norway, 

ii.  390 

Eider  River,  ii.  102 

Eid  Forest  (EiSaskogr),  Edskog  parish 
in  Norway,  i.  324,  358  ;  ii.  323,  355, 
391 ;  iii.  108,  199,  220 
Eikeys  Isles  (Eiki’eyar),  Okero  in 
Sweden,  ii.  328,  401,  402 
Einby  (Einbue),  Enebo  in  Norway, 

iii.  197 

Eirik’s  Fiord,  i.  201,  204,  207,  236,  239- 
241,  244,  246 
Eirik’s  Isle,  i.  180 

Ekkjalsbakke  (Ekkjalsbakki),  in  Scot¬ 
land,  i.  369 

Elbe,  i.  6,  9,  10,  49 ;  iv.  367 
Elda,  Eildeu  in  Throndhjem,  iv.  281 


Ellipalta,  Hellespont,  iii.  365 
Ely,  Isle  of,  i.  131 
Enea,  Europe,  i.  269 
Engilsnes,  Cape  St.  Angelo,  in  Gi’eece, 

iv.  127 

England,  English  (Englar),  i.  vi.,  viii., 
ix.,  xi.,  xii. ,  2,  4,  5,  7,  8,  10-17,  20, 
41,  42,  44-46,  50,  54,  57,  62,  65-67, 
70,  72,  74,  75,  79,  86,  87,  97,  105,  iii, 
113,  121,  131-134,  137,  I38,  T49,  I5G 
154,  157-159,  164,  165,  171,  173,  174, 
198,  226,  237,  260,  266,  322,  364,  382, 
392,  393  ;  3,  5,  6,  7,  8,  10,  19,  51, 

no,  113-115,  150,  171,  189,  248,  257, 
258,  262,  263,  272-275,  280,  287,  327  ; 
iii.  3,  68,  82,  83,  85,  86,  88,  99, 118, 122, 
123,  142,  144-148,  157,  165,  167,  177, 
184,  205-207,  218,  229,  270,  279,  280, 
289,  300,  317,  323,  344,  345  ;  iv.  25- 
55,  67,  68,  94,  99,  117,  179,  194,  244, 
245,  249,  293,  326,  327,  362,  365-372 
Erfurth,  i.  267 
Erie,  Lake,  i.  220 
Espihol,  in  Iceland,  i.  32 
Essex,  i.  132  ;  ii.  263 
Estland,  Estlionia  (Eistland),  i.  117, 
120,  285,  31 1,  312,  322,  386;  ii. 
76-78,  148,  195,  366 
Ethiopia  (Blaland),  iv.  295 
Eui'ope  (Evropa  or  Euea),  Europeans, 

i.  4,  8,  9,  11,  13,  1 7,  19,  20,  35,  48- 
54,  63,  76,  79,  82,  87,  1 14,  1 17,  136, 
138,  149,  I51,  x53,  lC5,  i82,  183,  185, 
190,  198,  199,  218,  233,  237,  244,  245, 
270;  iii.  317  ;  iv.  350 

Eyiiord  (EyjafjorSr),  in  Iceland,  ii.  118  ; 

iii.  76 

Eygotaland,  i.  219 

Eyland,  Oland  in  the  Baltic,  belongs 
to  Sweden,  ii.  329,  358 
Eyna  (Eynafylki),  Inderoenin  Norway, 
i-  335,  349;..ii-  i6,294;  iii.  31 
Eyi'arsund,  Oresund,  the  Sound  be¬ 
tween  Denmark  and  Sweden,  ii.  107  ; 

iv.  155,  37° 

Eyrathing  (Eyrajiing),  near  Thrond¬ 
hjem  in  Norway,  iii.  298;  iv.  146, 
236,  3IQ,  320 

Eysyssel  (Eys^sla),  Osel  Island,  ii.  195, 

225 

Eyvindvik,  i.  148 

Falster  (Falstr),  one  of  the  Danish 
islands,  iii.  341 

Farewell,  Cape,  i.  176,  181,  185,  187 
Farey  Islands  (Fsereyjar),  i.  73,  76,  108, 
i83,  195,  197,  236,  365  ;  ii.  139,  316  ; 
iii.  74,  79,  80,  82,  100,  103,  104,  134, 
135,  I4°  5  iv.  91 

Feey  Sound  (Feeyjarsund),  on  the  coast 
of  Norway,  ii.  32 

Fetlafiord  (FetlafjorSr),  in  Bretagne  (?), 

ii.  264,  265 

Fez,  in  Africa,  iv.  120 
Fialar  (Fjalir),  in  Norway,  i.  356  ;  ii. 
201,  277 


4o8 


GEOGEAPHICAL  INDEX. 


Fiadrundaland  (FjaSrundaland),  Fjerd- 
hundra  in  Sweden,  i.  312,  315 
Fife  (Fill),  in  Scotland,  iii.  87 
Filey  Bay,  iv.  245 

Finland  (Filmland),  i.  117,  118,  183, 
286,  287,  293,  340,  373  ;  ii.  176,  22i, 
255,  256-  266  ;  iii.  24 
Finmark  (Finnmork),  i.  309,  382  ;  ii. 
323 

Finey,  Finno,  in  Norway,  iii.  220,  262 
Firda  District  or  Fiord  District  (Fir- 
Safylki),  in  Norway,  i.  355,  356,  381; 
11.  10,  54,  89,  93,  124,  156,  201.  227  ; 
ni.  40,  252  ;  iv.  214,  262,  304,  306 
Fitjar,  in  Norway,  i.  391  ;  ii.  36,  40  ; 
iii.  313,  315 

Flanders  (Fliemingjaland),  ii.  109,  171, 
258,  326,  327;  iv.  27,  29,  33,  39, 
i°7,  367 

Flatey,  in  Iceland,  i.  30 
Flekkefiord,  in  Norway,  ii.  28 
Flensborg,  in  Slesvik-Holstein,  iv.  370 
Flornvagar  (Floruvagar),  near  BergeD, 
in  Norway,  iv.  191,  258 
Fogd  Isle,  i.  321 

Fold, Folden  (Foldin), Christiania  fjord, 
in  Norway,  i.  358  ;  ii.  61,  281,  309  ; 

iii.  179  ;  iv.  322 
Forland,  in  Norway,  iv.  304 
Forminterra,  in  the  Mediterranean, 

iv.  121 

Fors,  in  Sweden,  iv.  185,  263 
Fossum,  in  Norway,  i.  348 
Foxerne  (Foxerni),  in  Sweden,  iv. 
99-101 

France  (Frakkland),  French  (Frakkar), 

i.  6,  12,  17,  32,  38,  70,  74,  88,  137, 
x49>  iS5,  163,  164,  372,  382  ;  ii.  103, 
no,  248,  264,  267  ;  iii.  413  ;  iv.  117 

Fredarberg  (Frseftarberg),  in  Norway, 
h.  32,  35 

Fredrikstad,  in  Norway,  iv.  148 
Frekeysund  (Frekeyarsund),  Freko- 
sund,  in  Norway,  iii.  193,  289 
Frede  (FrseSi),  Fraedo,  ii.  30 
Friesland  (Frisland),  i.  382;  ii.  69,  103, 
109,  150,  257  ;  iv.  29 
Frosta,  Frosten,  111  the  Throndhjem 
district,  i.  148  ;  ii.  166,  296  ;  iv.  204 
Frosta-Thing  (Frosta Jhng),  ii.  15,  21-23  i 

ii.  167 

Fulford,  iv.  37 

Fyen  (Fjon),  in  Denmark,  i.  274  ;  iii. 

33°,  331)  336,  337-  341,  368,  408 ;  iv.  3 
Fyrileif,  Ferlbf,  in  Sweden,  iv.  185,  194 
Fyrisvols  (Fyrisvellir),  Fyrisvall  in 
Sweden,  i.  290,  296-299  ;  ii.  196 

Gainsborough,  ii.  258 
Gairsay,  Isle  of,  i.  123 
Gallicia  (Galizuland),  in  Spain,  iv.  118 
Gardarike.  See  Russia. 

Garonne  River,  ii.  265,  266 
Gata,  a  farm  on  one  of  the  Farey 
Islands,  iii.  no,  105,  136-141 
Gaular,  in  Norway,  i.  334,  356 


Gaularas  (Gaularass),  Byaas,  near 
Throndhjem,  in  Norway,  i.  319;  iii. 
no 

Gaulardal  (Gaulardalr),  Guldal  in 
Norway,  i.  347,  348  ;  ii.  22,  141,  142, 
I44>  146,  165,  293,  294,  296,  300,  319 
Gautdal  (Gautdalr)  Gutdal,  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iv.  225 

Gaut  River  (Gautelfr),  Gota  River  in 
Sweden,  i.  328,  357,  361,  381,  385  ; 
11.  12,  158,  227,  322-324,  330,  331, 
368,  401  ;  iii.  45,  99,  105,  143,  301, 
321-323,  386-388,  417;  iv.  3,  17,  67, 
76,  82,  83,  96,  101,  102,  197,  222,  269, 
302,  320,  323,  367 

Gautland,  Gotaland,  Gautlanders, 
(Gautar),  in  Sweden,  i.  31,  240,  301, 

3°5,  313,  3*4,  3I9?  32o,  357,  360-363, 
377  5  u.  12,  36,  103,  107,  108,  182,  195, 
204,  206,  253,  269,  323,  325, 326,  330, 
338,  340,  343,  344,  348,  358,  363,  368, 
383-400,  408 ;  iii.  1,  99,  107,  160,  162, 
i65,  169,  176, 183,  325,  330,  336,  339, 
341  ;  iv.  1 7,  20,  21,  90,  97,  99,  101, 
102.  169,  218,  219,  265,  268 
Geirstad  (GeirstaSir),  Gjerstad  in  Nor¬ 
way,  i.  330 

Geirsver,  Gjesvaer  in  Finmark,  iii.  96 
Gelmin,  Gjolme  in  Norway,  ii.  295 
Gerde  (GerSi),  Gjerde  in  Norway,  iii. 
220,  262  ;  iv.  239 

Germany,  Germans,  i.  6,  10,  12-15,  32, 
38,  43,  45,  4G  51,  88,  93,  123,  124, 
I33,  i34.  137,  138,  140,  i54,  155,  202, 
210,  259,  267,  274;  iii.  318  ;  iv.  370 
Gibraltar,  Straits  of  (Norvasund),  i. 

^  269  ;  ii.  266  ;  iv.  107.  See  Norvasund. 
Gimsar,  Gimse  in  Guldal,  in  Norway, 
ii.  126,  166,  211  ;  iv.  217,  218 
Gimsey,  Gimso  in  Norway,  iv.  287 
Giske  (Giski),  Gisko  in  South  More,  in 
Norway,  iii.  in,  289;  iv.  77,  96 
Glamba,  ii.  247 
Glambajarland,  ii.  247 
Gljufrafiord  (GljufrafjorSr),  iv.  225 
G  lorn  men  River  (Raumelfr),  in  Norway, 
h  I48,  344,  36i>  385  1  h.  311.  See  also 
Raum 

Godey  (Goftey),  in  Bodo  parish,  in  Nor¬ 
way,  ii.  176,  179,  180 
Godheim  (GoSheimr),  i.  280,  281,  285 
Godnarfiord  (GoSnarfjbrSi'),  Randers- 
fiord  in  Norway,  iii.  384 
Gold  Tower  (Gullvarta),  in  Constanti¬ 
nople,  iv.  128 

Gotland,  an  island  in  the  Baltic  belong¬ 
ing  to  Sweden,  Gotlanders  (Gotar), 
i.  51,  82,  291,  292  ;  ii.  40,  192,  193, 
254,  328;  iii.  203,  216;  iv.  354 
Graeningasund  (Graeningasund),  in  the 
Bergen  district  in  Norway,  iv.  261 
Grafdal  (Grafdalr),  Gravdai,  near  Ber¬ 
gen,  in  Norway,  iv.  322 
Greece  (Grikkland),  Greeks  (Grikkir).  i. 
367 ;  iii.  181,  349,  351-353,  361-366, 
375;  iv.  127,  129,  181,  203,  295-297 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


409 


Greek  Sea  (Grikklandshaf),  the  Aegean 
Sea,  iii.  347  ;  iv.  125 
Gregorius  Church  (Gregoriuskirkja), 

iii.  394 

Greenland  (Greenland),  i.  176-210,  214, 
223-225,  237  ;  ii.  189,  202,  230-239, 
241,  244-246,  379,  380,  381  ;  iii.  75, 
141 

Greenland  Ocean  (Groenlandshaf),  the 
sea  between  Greenland  and  Iceland, 

ii.  381 

Grenland,  Thelemark  in  Norway,  ii.  62 
Grenmar  (Grenmarr),  Langesundsfjord 
in  Norway,  i.  357  ;  ii.  302 
Grimsby  (Grimsbaer),  in  England,  ii.  6 
Grimsey  (Grimsey),  near  Iceland,  iii. 
A  77 

Griotar  (Grjotar),  Grote  in  Norway,  ii. 

293 

Grislupollar  in  France,  ii.  264,  265 
Groningar  (Groeningar),  in  Norway,  iii. 
197 

Gudbrandsdal  (Dalir  or  Gudbransdalir), 
in  Norway,  i.  103,  332,  334,  347,  372, 
385i  396  ;  ii.  288,  292,  301,  349  ;  iii. 
34,  35,  81,  198,  348;  iv.  58 
Gula-Tlnng  (Gulajhng),  ii.  15,  152,  154; 

iv.  75,  144 

Gunbjorn  skerry,  i.  179,  186,  187 
Gunvaldsborg  (Gunnvaldsborg),  in 
France,  ii.  264,  266 

Gylling,  an  island  in  Halogaland,  ii.  180 

Had  Isle  (Hod),  Hareidland  in  Nor¬ 
way,  ii.  125,  126 

Hadaland  (HaSaland),  Hadeland  in 
Norway,  i.  325,  329,  333,  336,  339, 
34G  344,  375,  385-387  5  ii-  288,  292, 
35°,  355  iii-  43,  81  ;  iv.  24,  347 
Hafersfiord  (HafrsfjorSr),  Hafsfjord, 
nearStavanger.in  Norway,  i.  70,  363, 
364>  396 ;  ii.  263. 

Hakadale  (Hakadalr),  Hakedal  in  Nor¬ 
way,  i.  343 

Hakon’sHill  (Hakonarhella),  near  Ber¬ 
gen,  in  Norway,  ii.  43 
Halkelsvik  (Hallkelsvik),  in  Yolden 
parish  in  Norway,  ii.  126 
Halvard’s  church  (HallvarSskirkja)  in 
Oslo,  in  Norway,  iv.  181,  221,  236,  292 
Halland,  in  Sweden,  ii.  10,  14  ;  iii.  156, 
330,  410;  iv.  3,  6,  13,  18,  76,  77,  187, 
336 

Halogaland  (Halogaland),  Helgeland, 
north  of  Throndhjem,  in  Norway, 
Halogalanders  (Haleygir),  i.  121, 148, 
166,  171,  183,  300,  309,  325,  382,  385  ; 
ii.  29,  69,  123,  126,  132,  171,  175,  176, 
190,  198,  200,  227,  203  ;  iii.  23-27,  30- 
53,  70,  7G  90,  1 18,  1 19,  123,  164,  178, 
227,  249,  259,  308  ;  iv.  54,  79,  94,  133, 
145,  I49,  225,  344 

Hamarsfiord  (HamarsfjorSr),  Hammer- 
fjord  in  Norway,  iv.  227 
Hardanger  (HarSangr),  near  Bergen,  in 
Norway,  ii.  58,  59,  66,  85  ;  iv.  259 


Haring  (Haering)  Stromo,  in  Helgeland, 
in  Norway,  ii.  180 

Harm  (Harmr)  Bronofjord,  in  Helge¬ 
land,  in  Norway,  iv.  79 
Hastings  (Helsingjaport),  in  England, 
i.  53  ;  iv.  51,  358 

Haug  (Haugr),  in  Yserdal,  Norway,  iii. 

30,  310,  31 1,  347;  iv.  63 
Haugasund,  in  Boliuslen,  in  Sweden,  i. 
396 

Haugasund,  Haugesuud  in  Norway,  ii. 
328 

Hauge  (Haugar),  near  Haugesund,  i.  396 
Haukadal  (Haukadalr).  in  Iceland,  i. 
266,  267 

Haukby  (Haukboe),  iv.  72 
Haukfliot  (Haukfljot),  in  England,  ii.  6 
Hebrides  (SuSreyjar),  near  Scotland, 
i-  76,  158,  366,  368,  371,  394  ;  ii.  7, 
no,  139,  230;  iii.  23,  311  ;  iv.  91, 
93,  95,  166,  240,  290 
Hedal  (Hedalr),  in  Gudbrandsdal,  in 
Norway,  iii.  34 

Hedemark  (Hei^mork),  in  Norway,  i. 

324,  325,  329,  332,  333-  34B  343,  *344. 
385  ;  ii.  60,  227,  288,  301,  349-352, 
355 ;  iii-  43,  81,  170,  172,  175,  198  5 
iv.  24 

Hefring  (Hefringr),  Hovring,  near 
Throndhjem,  in  Norway,  iv.  75,  78 
Hegravik  (Hegravik),  near  Bergen,  in 
Norway,  iv.  192 

H  eidaby  (HeiSafjT),  the  town  Slesvik, 

iii.  326,  388  ;  iv.  132,  369 

Helga  river  (ain  Helga),  in  Eastern 
Scania,  in  Sweden,  iii.  150,  151,  154, 
156,  158  ;  iv.  369,  370 
Helganes,  Helgenes  in  Denmark,  iii. 

337.  338,  367,  369 
Helgafel,  in  Iceland,  i.  199 
Hellornes,  Holdernes  near  the  Hum¬ 
ber,  in  England,  iv.  36 
Helluland,  i.  202,  204,  212,  213  ;  ii.  233 
Helsingjaland,  Helsingland,  i.  365;  ii. 
1 7,  l8,  64,  65,  312,  313  ;  iii.  108,244, 
292,  297,  305,  347 

Herdaler  (Herdalir),  in  Finland,  ii.  256 
Herdla  (HerSla),  Herlo  in  Norway,  iv. 
227,  239 

Herey  Isles  (Hereyjar),  in  Norway,  ii. 

.  124  ;  iii.  133,  192 
Herinlfsnes,  i.  201  ;  ii.  230,  232 
Herna  in  Norway,  iii.  102 
Heines,  near  Throndhjem  in  Norway, 

iv.  204 

Hertfordshire,  i.  131,  157 
Hesjutun  (Hesjutun),  Ostun  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iv.  79 

Hiardarholt  (Hjarftarholt),  in  Iceland, 
hi-  393 

Hillar,  in  Norway,  iii.  303 
Hillarsund,  Hillosund,  in  Norway,  iii. 
303.  3°4 

Himinbiorg  (Himinbjorg),  i.  275 
Hin  (Hinn),  Hino  in  Norway,  iv.  225 
Hind  Island,  ii.  178 


4io 


GEOGEAPHICAL  INDEX. 


Hiorring,  in  Denmark,  iv.  370 
Hiorungavag  (Hjorungavagr),  in  Nor¬ 
way,  ii.  126,  135 

Hising  (Hising),  in  Sweden,  ii.  323, 
328  ;  iii.  1  ;  iv.  197,  242,  269,  273, 
3i8,  319,  322,  323 

Hjartapol  (Hjartapollr),  Hartlepool  in 
England,  iv.  244 

Hjorundarfiord  (H  jorundarf  j orSr), 
Hjorendfiord  in  Norway,  ii.  125 
Hlaupandanes,  on  mainland  in  tlie 
Orkneys,  iii.  7 

Hlesey  (Hlesey),  Lseso  in  the  Cattegat, 
ii.  402  ;  iii.  389,  390  ;  iv.  205 
Hlyrskog’s  Heath  ( Htyrskogslieiftr), 
in  Denmark,  iii.  326,  329 
Hoby,  i.  81 

Hof  in  Gautland,  in  Sweden,  ii.  390 
Hof  in  Gudbrandsdal,  in  Norway,  iii. 
36 

Hofde,  ii.  241 

Hofund  (Hofund),  Gjerpen,  parish  in 
Norway,  iv.  258,  259,  287 
Hofud  Isle  (HdfutSey),  Hovedo,  near 
Oslo,  in  Norway,  iv.  220,  289 
Holar  (Holar),  in  Iceland,  i.  30,  39,  78, 
178,  198 

Holar  in  France,  ii.  263 

Holar  in  Norway,  iii.  163 

Holdernes,  iv.  53 

Holland,  i.  131  ;  ii.  257 

Holmgard  (Holmgar'Sr),  Novgorod,  ii. 

77.  See  Novgorod. 

Holrnland,  ii.  257 

Holm,  the  grey  (Holmrinn  grai),  near 
Stromstad  in  Sweden),  iv.  230 
Holstein  (Holsetaland),  ii.  12,  104  ;  iii. 

348  ;  iv.  367,  368,  370 
Holtar,  Holtan  in  Norway,  i.  327 
Honduras,  i.  21 1 

Hongrum  (Hongrum),  in  Sweden,  iii. 
295,  296 

Hope,  i.  205,  206 

Hordaland  (HorSaland),  in  Norway,  i. 
345,  246,  363,  385,  386,  391,  395  ;  ii. 
i°,  36,  44,  58,  89,  93,  95,  152,  156,  227, 
368  ;  iii.  44,  45,  65,  100,  102,  142,  191, 
219,  252,  259,  290,  291,  298,  312  ;  iv. 
214,  227,  239,  321,  366,  367,  368 
Hornborusund,  Homborgsund  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iv.  221 
Hornpoint,  i.  186 

Hrafnista,  Eamstad  in  Norway,  iv. 
T45 

Hrafnseyr  (Hrafnseyrr),  in  England, 
iv.  53 

Hrmgmara  Heath  (Hringmaraheiftr), 
in  England,  ii.  262 

Hringsfiord  (Hringsfjorftr),  in  France, 
iv.  302 

Hrossanes,  in  Norway,  iv.  302 
Hrossey,  one  of  the  Orkneys,  iii.  7 
Hudson’s  Bay,  i.  213 
Hull,  i.  198 

Humber  (Humbra)  River,  in  England, 
i-  55 ;  ii-  275  ;  iv.  37,  53 


Hundsver,  some  islands  on  the  coast 
of  Norway,  iii.  193 

Hundthorp  (HundJ>orp),  in  Norway,  iii. 
35 

Hungary  (Ungarariki),  iv.  26,  131 
Husaby  (Husaboer),  Husstad  (?)  in 
Norway,  ii.  25,  293 

Hustadir  (HustaSir),  in  Norway,  iv. 
154 

Hvaler  (Hvalir),  in  Norway,  iv.  230 
Hvarf,  Cape,  i.  179,  187 
Hvarfsnes,  Kvarven  near  Bergen,  in 
Norway,  iv.  322 

Hvedn  Isle  (Hvethi),  Hveen,  in  Ore- 
sund,  iv.  205 

Hvin,  Kvinesdal  in  Norway,  i.  263, 
387 ;  ii.  200 

Iceland  (Island),  Icelanders  (Islen- 
dingar),  i.  14,  19,  30,  31-40,  49,  50,  59, 
66-79,  83,  104,  106-108, 128,  149,  150, 
176,  178-187,  190,  193-201,  204,  214- 
216,  223,  231-246,  255,  265,  266,  277, 
342,  365;  ii-  9,  24,  57,  58,  69,  1 16, 
1I7>  J39.  I7°J  180-187,  202,  230,  234, 
239,  241,  247,  298-300,  315,  316,  32c, 
332,  338,  339,  341,  377-382,  392 ;  iii. 
I2>  J3,  74,  75,  78,  79,  82,  106,  107, 
109,  125,  165,  181,  238,  259,  278,  329, 
346,  357,  387,  392,  393;  iv-  100,  117, 
*35,  136,  157,  158,  170,  171,  205,  2c8, 
210,  222,  23 1,  267,  268,  324,  356,  362 
Igalikko,  i.  188,  189 
Igigeitum,  i.,  189 

lluvellir  (Iluvellir),  Ilevold,  near 
Throndhjem,  in  Norway,  iv.  147. 
Indal,  i.  249 
India,  i.  17,  58 

Indriey  (Inney(?)),  in  Norway,  i.  348, 
349 ;  ii-  16,  25,  296 
Iona,  iv.  92 
Ipswich,  ii.  1 13 

Ireland  (Irland),  Irish  people  (Irar),  i. 
5°,  205,  231,  232,  236,  278,  382,  386  ; 
ii-  7,  9,  12,  13,  no,  113,  114,  115, 138, 
382;  111.  5,  9,  10,  23,  311,  410;  iv. 
91-93,  109,  1 13,  J66,  168 
Irish  Ocean,  i.  207 

Isafiord  (Isafjorftr),  in  Denmark,  i.  274  ; 
ii.  119 

Islay  (II.),  one  of  the  Hebrides,  iv.  91,  92 
Italy,  i.  7,  30,  137,  138,  165,  219 

Ivist  (Ivist),  one  of  the  Hebrides,  iv. 
91,  92 

Iviza  (Iviza),  an  island  in  the  Mediter¬ 
ranean,  iv.  123 

Jadak  (JaSarr),  Jsederen  in  Norway, 
i-  363-365,  387;  hi.  54,  88,  100,  115, 
II6,  185,  187,  211,  220,  395  ;  iv.  170 
Jamtaland,  J emteland,  Jamtalanders 
(Jamtr),  in  Norway,  i.  365;  ii.  17, 
65,  io3,  200,  312,  313,  327  ;  iii.  108, 
109,  125-128,  131,  223,  244,  245,  265, 
292,  297,  305,  347;  iv.  133,  134 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


411 


Jarnberaland  (Jarnberaland),  Dalarne  ' 
in  Sweden,  iii.  221 

Jerusalem  (Jorsalaborg  or  Jdrsalir),  i. 
269;  ii.  266;  iii.  211,  307,  360-362; 
iv.  115,  Il6>  I25>  I26,  l86>  239 
Jomsborg  (Jomsborg)  and  Jomsborg 
Vikings,  i.  117,  197  ;  ii.  119-135,  x4°, 
209,  210,  272,  289  ;  iii.  276,  324,  325 
Jon’s  Church  (Jonskirkja),  in  Nidaros, 
iv.  341 

Jon’s  field  (Jonsvellir),  near  Bergen,  in 
Norway,  iv.  191 

Jordan  (Jordan)  River,  in  Palestine,  iii. 

361, 362 ;  iv.  125, 126, 153, 164  207,  241 
Jorvik  (Jorvik),  York  in  England,  iv. 
37.  See  York. 

Jotunheim  (Jotunheimr),  i.  274 
Judith  Point,  i.  214 
Julianahope,  i.  188 

Jungufurda  (Jungufur'cSa),  in  England, 
ii.  275 

Jutland  (Jotland),  in  Denmark,  i.  55, 
76,  171,  291,  300,  306,  310,  31 1,  337, 
366 ;  ii.  10,  12,  28,  29,  85,  86,  106, 
257  ;  iii.  145,  148,  151,  154,  182,  319, 
320,  325,  326,  330,  33B  337,  38°,  3Sl, 
383,  387,  39°,  4i5,  4i6  ;  iv.  8,  132, 
334,  34°,  355,  35G  366-370 

Kalfskin  (Kalfskinn),  in  Iceland,  ii. 

^  3Sl 

Karkortok,  i.  188 

Karlsar  (Karlsar),  Garonue  in  France, 

ii.  265.  266 

Ivarmt  (Kormt),  Karmoen  in  Norway, 
i.  391 ;  ii.  27,  161 ;  iii.  49,  55,  61. 
Karmtsund,  Karmsund  in  Norway,  i. 

„  396 ;  ii.  28,  321  ;  iii.  49,  52,  55 
Kastalarbryggja,  Cambridge  (?)  in  Eng¬ 
land,  iv.  52 

Kent,  ii.  262,  264  ;  iv.  368 
Kialarnes,  i.  203-205  ;  ii.  237 
Kiev,  iii.  365 
Kiel,  iv.  370 
Kingiktorsoak,  i.  189 
King’s  Sound  (Konungssund),  Soder- 
strom  in  Stockholm,  ii.  254 
Kiulima  (KinnlimasiSa),  in  North  Hol¬ 
land,  ii.  257,  258 
Kipr.  See  Cyprus. 

Kirjalaland  (kirjalaland),  Karel  in  Fin¬ 
land,  ii.  366 
Klare  River,  i.  322 

Klifland  (Kliflond),  Cleveland  in  Eng¬ 
land,  iv.  36 

Konungahella,  Kongelf,  ii.  159,  383 ; 

iii.  1,  99 ;  iv.  54,  67,  148,  180,  188, 
194-197,  204,  222,  265,  266,  284,  285, 

3l8,  3X9,  322>  323 
Ivorpeklinte,  i.  81 

Krokaskog  (Krokaskogr),  in  Bohuslen, 
in  Sweden,  iv.  219,  342 
Krosbrekka  (Krossbrekka),  in  Norway, 
iii.  195 

Kurland  (Kurland),  in  Russia,  i.  322 ; 
iii.  322,  405.  See  Courland. 


Kvaldinsey,  Ivdllandso  in  Sweden,  iv. 
97,  106 

Kvam,  in  Iceland,  i.  233 
Kvilda  (Ivvildir),  Ivville  in  Sweden,  iv. 
228 

Kviststad  (KviststaSir),  in  Norway,  iii. 
255,  258,  311 

Labrador,  i.  21 1,  213 

Lade  (HlaSir),  in  Norway,  i.  no,  152, 

i56.  35°.  39°.  39 1  ;  ii-  3-  IO,  J9,  2°, 
24,  26,  65,  145,  146,  156,  157,  165, 
190,  297 

Ladeliamrar  (HlaShamrar),  Ladeham- 
ren,  near  Throndhjem,  in  Norway,  ii. 
190 

Ladoga,  iii.  292,  294 
Lancashire,  i.  87,  131 
Langatun  (Langatun),  in  England,  iv. 
245 

Langey,  Lango  in  Norway,  iii.  71,  98 
Langtown,  iv.  245 

Lapland  (Finnmork),  i.  58,  117,  118, 
382-384  ;  id-  24,  179,  21 7,  250;  iv. 
7,  84,  141,  142,  146,  225,  226,  353- 

356 

Laugen,  River,  iii.  85 
Ledreborg,  i.  274 
Leikberg,  in  Sweden,  iv.  243 
Leire  (HleiSra),  in  Denmark,  i.  274, 
284,  3°7,  3°9,  312  ;  iv.  6 
Lena,  i.  281 

Lengjuvik  (Lengjuvik),  Lenviken  in 
Norway,  iii.  98,  119 
Lerdal  (Leiradalr),  in  Norway,  ii.  116 
Lesjar,  Lesje  in  Norway,  iii.  33,  34,  38, 
194,  198,  348 

Lewis  Isle,  in  the  Hebrides,  iv.  91 
Lidandisnes  (LiSandisnes),  Lindesnes 
the  south  point  of  Norway,  ii.  156  ; 
iv-  334 

Lidsstad  (LiSsstacSir),  Listad  in  Norway, 
iii.  38 

Limerick,  i,  236 

Limfiord  (LimafjorSr),  in  Denmark,  i. 
200,  201  ;  ii.  29,  86-88,  105,  ic6,  123; 
iii.  147,  148,  178,  182,  331,  415  ;  iv. 
.37° 

Limgard  (Limgarftssifta),  in  Norway,  iv. 
223 

Lincolnshire,  iv.  245 
Linustadir  (LinustaSir),  Linstad  in 
Norway,  iv.  231 

Lisbon  (Lizibon),  in  Portugal,  iv.  119, 
120 

Lister  (Listi),  in  Norway,  iv.  224,  321 
Ljoxa,  Lexdal  in  Norway,  ii.  25,  166 
Loar  (Loar),  Lorn  in  Norway,  iii.  34-38 
Lofoden,  in  Norway,  i.  171,  172 
Lofund,  Lofo  in  Sweden,  i.  310 
Lofufiord  (LofufiorSr),  Laholmsfjord  in 
Sweden,  iv.  4 

Loire  (Leira)  River,  in  France,  ii.  no, 
267 

London  (Lundunir),  in  England,  i.  393; 
ii.  259,  273  ;  iii.  413,  414;  iv.  28,  51 


412 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


Lorodal  (Lorodalr),  Lordal  in  Norway, 
iii.  34  ^ 

Lubeck,  ii.  103  ;  iii.  348 
Lund  (Lundr),  Lund  in  Sweden,  iv. 
156,  196,  370 

Lundar  (Lundar),  Lunde  in  Guldal  in 
Norway,  ii.  141 

Lusbreid  (LusbreiS),  Logstorbredning 
in  Denmark,  iii.  415 
Lygra,  Lygren  in  Norway,  iii.  102,  104 
Lyngar,  in  Iceland,  iii.  329 
Lyseiiord,  i.  204 ;  ii.  239 

jVLelar  Lake  (Logrinn),  in  Sweden,  i. 
XI4,  274,  293,  299,  310,  320,  321;  ii. 
253,  345,  4 ?7,  408  ;  iii.  217 
Maerin  (Maerinn),  Muri  in  Norway,  ii. 

165,  166,  167 ;  iii.  28,  29 
Man,  Isle  of  (Mon),  in  England,  i.  76, 
368 ;  ii.  no ;  iv.  91,  92,  93,  290 
Manheim  (Manheimar),  i.  280 
Manork,  Minorca,  one  of  the  Balearian 
Islands,  iv.  123 

Markland,  i.  202,  204,  206,  212,  213; 
ii-  233 

Marsey,  Mars  in  Jutland,  ii.  106 
Masarvik  (Masarvik),  Mosvigen  in 
Throndhjem  fiord,  in  Norway,  ii.  296 
Massachusetts,  i.  199,  209,  214,  217,  220 
Mecklenburg,  ii.  12,  103;  iii.  348 
Medaldal  (MeSaldalr),  Meldal  in  Nor¬ 
way,  ii.  60,  293 

Medalhus  (MeSalhus),  in  Guldal,  in 
Norway,  ii.  141,  142,  166 
Mediterranean,  i.  79,  165,  199 
Melbridge  tooth,  i.  369 
Mercia,  i.  79,  86,  93,  131 ;  iv.  366 
Mexico,  i.  18,  51 
Middlesex,  i.  131 

Mjosen(Mjors),  Mjosen  lake  in  Norway, 
i-  333  ;  ii-  3IX  ;  352,  353  ;  iii.  67 
Modruveller  (MoSruvellir)  in  Iceland, 
ii.  181,  381  ;  iii.  76 

Monkholm  (Holmr),  near  Throndhjem 
in  Norway,  i.  15  ;  iv.  217 
More  (Moeri),  More  in  Norway,  i.  103, 
109,  no,  156,  342,  353,  355,  369,  370, 
375,  378,  385,  388 ;  ii.  19,  25,  26,  30, 
53,  55,  56,  64-66,  89,  92,  96,  97,  123, 
I25,  142,  156,  171,  201,  268,  319;  iii. 
33,  75,  iii,  133,  194,  203,  254,289; 
iv.  78,  96,  166,  216,  217,  226,  268,  305, 
320 

Morea,  iv.  127 

Moster  (Mostr),  in  Norway,  i.  391 ;  ii. 
140;  iv.  261 

Mula  Thing  (Mulajnng),  iii.  367 
Mull,  iv.  91,  92 

Mynne  (Mynni),  Minne  in  Norway,  iv. 
217 

Myrkva  Fiord  (MyrkvafjorSr),  Morko- 
fjord  in  Sweden,  i.  317 
Mon  (Mon),  Moen  in  Denmark,  iv.  222 

NAMSEN  River,  i.  71,  309  ;  ii.  93 
Naumudal  (Naumudalr),  Namdal  in 


Norway,  i.  349,  350;  ii.  93,  123,  227  ; 
iii-  24,  25,  108  ;  iv.  145 
Naustdal  (Naustdalr),  in  Norway,  i. 
355 

Nerike  (Naeriki),  in  Sweden,  i.  319,  322, 
323 ;  iii.  200 

Nes  in  Gudbrandsdal  in  Norway,  iii.  34 
Nesiar,  Brunlanes  in  Norway,  ii.  302, 
3°5,  326 

New  England,  i.  70 

New  Foundland,  i.  210,  211,  213,  217  ; 

ii-  233 

New  Port,  i.  226,  228,  229,  230 ;  ii.  264 
New  Romney,  ii.  265 
New  Zealand,  i.  225 
Niardvik,  i.  31 

Nid  (NiS)  River,  in  the  Throndhjem 
district,  ii.  165,  168,  170,  297,  298  ; 

iii-  298,  398;  iv.  1,  2,  33,  74,  216 
Nidarholm  (NiSarholmr),  Munkholm 

near  Throndhjem,  i.  15  ;  ii.  146,  182 
Nidarnes(NiSarnes),  where  Throndhjem 
is  now  situated,  i.  3 
Nidaros  (Ni<5aross),  Throndhjem,  i.  152, 
266;  ii.  16,  104,  168,  173,  174,  180- 
182,  198,  201,  203-205,  295,  297,  301, 
311,  3T4,  317;  iii-  23,  24,  27,  32,  68, 
90,  107,  115,  125,  133,  179,  205,  281, 
29i,  298,  328,  377,  382,  393,  416 ;  iv. 
33,  35,  54,  55,  59,  61,  62,  64,  65,  72, 
74,  78,  96, 104,  107,  132,  145-147,  i54, 
173,  184,  204,  226,  228,  248,  259,  268, 
281,  301,  310,  344,  347 
Nis  River  (Nizi),  in  Halland,  in  Swe¬ 
den,  iv.  14-16,  25 

Nitja,  Nit  River  in  Norway,  iii.  43 
Njardarlog  (NjarSarlog),  Tysne  Lake, 
near  Bergen,  ii.  201 
Njardey  (Njarftey),  Naeroen  in  the 
Throndhjem  district,  i.  310 
Noatun  (Noatun),  the  god  Njord’s 
dwelling,  i.  275,  281 
Nordal  (NorSdalr),  Norddal  in  Sweden, 
iv.  96 

Nordland,  i.  309 

Nordnes  (Norftnes),  near  Bergen,  iv. 

132,  191-194,  211,  341 
Norfolk,  i.  131 

Normandy  (Norftmandi),  Normans,  in 
France,  i.  4,  10,  31.  36,  49,  57,  59, 
62,  66,  67,  70,  74-76,  129-131,  137, 
138,  150,  151,  307,  333,  372 ;  ii.  248, 
258,  268,  274;  iii.  165,  229;  iv.  25, 
26,  50 

North  Cape,  i.  117,  172 
North  Sea,  ii.  276  ;  iii.  416;  iv.  370 
Northumberland  (NorSimbraland),  in 
England,  i.  4,  10,  66,  67,  74-76,  87, 
93,  130-132,  137,  15°;  ii-  6-8,  no, 
274,  275 ;  iv.  26,  29,  44,  52,  354,  365, 

367,  368 

Norvasund  (Norvasund),  Straits  of  Gib¬ 
raltar,  i.  266,  269 ;  iv.  120,  121,  240 
Norway  (Noregr),  Northmen  or  Nor¬ 
wegians  (NorSmenn),  i.  vi.,  vii.,  2,  4- 
21,  30-36,  40-46,  50,  55-76,  79,  82, 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


413 


83,  86,  87,  92,  102,  104,  106,  108-110, 

1 13,  1 19,  120,  129-134,  140,  142,  143, 
146-159,  161,  162,  164-175,  177,  i78- 
18 r,  184-186,  190  -192,  195-199.  201, 
207,  208,  210,  218,  225,  228,  231,  235- 
245,  248,  249,  262-267,  277,  291,  298, 
307-309,  312,  322,  324,  325,  330,  335, 
338,  340,  342,  345,  355,  365,  366,  368- 
372,  376,  377,  379,  3Sl,  382,  384,  386, 
392,  394,  396 ;  n-  3,  6-10,  I2"29,  33, 
36,  41-53,  56,  68,  76,  77,  80,  83-87, 
89-95,  98,  101-108,  1x2,  114, 1x6,  120- 
122,  127,  132,  134,  136-140,  147,  149, 
150,  156,  159,  163,  170,  171,  1 77,  l8o- 

183,  188,  189,  192,  193,  197,  199,  208, 
213,  216,  227-230,  241,  244,  246-248, 
252,  259-283,  288-299,  303,  304,  312, 
313,  3l8,  320-323,  329,  330,  332,  336, 
338,  341-347,  354,  355,  361-368,  37i, 
381,  382,  384,  386,  387,  392,  393,  396, 
398,  399,  400,  405,  406,  410  ;  in.  1-13, 
22-26,  33,  65,  77-79,  83-88,  94,  100, 
105-108,  125-127,  140,  144,  145,  148, 
152,  155-158,  161,  162,  165-167,  177- 

184,  189,  190,  197-201,  206,  207,  209- 
213,  216-229,  234,  241,  245,  259,  276, 
278,  279,  281,  286-307,  316-322,  324, 
328,  330,  33T>  334,  337-339,  343,  346, 
349,  361-370,  374-396,  407-413;  IV. 
1-22,  30-49,  53-74,  82,  83,  86,  92-103, 
107-123,  126,  129,  131-138,  144,  145, 
148,  153-156,  i59-i63,  166-168,  181- 
184,  187,  194,  195,  198,  204,  207,  209- 
21 1,  219,  220,  222,  229,  230,  234-236, 
240,  241,  244,  245,  248,  249,  254,  267, 
268,  275,  286,  290,  291,  294-296,  299, 
301,  310,  312,  327-329,  333-337,  342, 
349,  354,  356,  357,  362,  363,  367-369- 

Nova  Scotia,  i.  213 ;  li.  233 
Novgorod  (Holmgar'Sr),  i.  51,  120 ;  ii. 
78,  79,  329,  397  I  iii-  292,  294,  305, 
354,  366,  367  ;  iv.  141 
Nyjamoda  (N^jamoSa),  Newport,  on 
the  Isle  of  Wight,  in  England,  ii. 
264 

Nyrfe  Island  (Nyrfi),  Norvo,  near  Aale- 
sund,  iii.  193 

Oddasund,  in  Denmark,  i.  300 
Odde,  in  Iceland,  i.  38 
Odinse  (0‘Sinsey),  in  Denmark,  i.  274, 
312  ;  iv.  370 

Ofrustad  (OfrustaSir),  Offigstad  (?)  in 
Norway,  ii.  72-74 

Oglo  (Oglo),  a  district  in  Norway,  ii. 
55,  56 

Olfus  (Olfus),  in  Iceland,  ii.  118 
Olvishaug  (Olvishaugr),  Alstahaug,  in 
Skogns  parish,  in  Norway,  ii.  25 
Omd  (Ornd),  in  Norway,  i.  309  ;  ii.  178  ; 
iii.  48 

Ongrum  (Ongrum),  near  Tlirondhjem, 

ii-  295 

Ongul  (Ongull),  Engelo  in  Norway,  iv. 
344 


Opdal  (Uppdalr),  in  Norway,  i.  351  ; 
ii.  292 

Oprustad  (OprustaSir),  in  Norway,  ii. 
201 

Ordost  (Oxftost),  Oroust  in  Sweden,  ii. 

328  ..  .  . 

Orebi'o,  Orebro  in  Sweden,  1.  vi. 

Orkadal  (Orkadalr),  Orkedal  in  Nor¬ 
way,  i.  347,  351  ;  ii-  142,  165,  200, 
269,  293-295,  300,  319  ;  in.  34,  402  ; 
iv-  347 

Orkneys  (Orkneyjar),  i.  56,  73,  76,  78, 
123,  125,  156,  158,  163,  188,  195,  342, 
346,  366,  368,  369,  375-  381,  394  ;  11. 
5,  7,  9,  x3,  36,  76,  90.  92,  139,  231, 
316,  382  ;  iii.  3-10,  15-23,  27,  33,  54, 
74,  1 10,  277,  343,  407  ;  iv.  36,  41,  53, 
91,  109,  1 13,  1 16,  208,  239,  240 
Orland,  i.  348 

Oslo  (Oslo),  in  Norway,  iii.  414  ;  iv.  13, 
14,  17,  54,  168,  182,  220,  236,  258, 
284,  287,  288, ,  338 

Osmundwall  (Asmundarvagr),  on  one 
of  the  Orkneys,  ii.  139  ;  iii.  10 
Osterdal,  i.  332 ;  iii.  70 
Ostrarfiord  (OstrarfjbrSr),  Osterfjord 
in  Norway,  iii.  65 

Otta  (Otta)  River,  in  Norway,  iii.  34 
Oyeren  Lake,  i.  335 
Oxford,  i.  85 

PANNONIA,  a  part  of  Hungary,  iv.  13  r 
Palestine  (Jorsalaheimr  Jorsalaland), 
iv.  125,  127,  207,  241 
Paris,  i.  50 

Peituland,  Poitou  in  France,  ii.  267 
Pentland  Firth  (PetlandsfjorSr),  be¬ 
tween  Scotland  and  the  Orkneys,  ii. 
139  ;  iii.  207,  343 
Perth,  iv.  245 
Peru,  i.  1851 

Pesina  Plains  (Pezinavellir),  in  Val- 
lachia,  iv.  296 

Pilavik  (Pilavik),  Filey  Bay  in  England, 
iv.  245 

Plymouth  Sound,  i.  209 
Poland,  iii.  346 

Pomerania,  ii.  12,  103  ;  iii.  348 
Ponthieu,  iv.  26 
Portugal,  iv.  nq 

Portyrja,  Porter  or  Portbr  in  Norway, 
iv.  223 

Prussia,  i.  13,  325;  ii.  12 

Rafnnes,  Ramnes  in  Norway,  iv.  314, 
348 

Randaberg,  Ranneberg  in  Norway,  iv. 

337  .  r, 

Randaros  (Randaross),  Randers  in  Den¬ 
mark,  iv.  334,  335  ,  .  ,  T 

Rand  Lake  (Rond),  Randsfjord  in  Nor¬ 
way,  i.  341  ;  iv. .250 
Railing  (Rseningr),  in  Sweden,  1.  321 
Ranrike  (Ranriki),  in  Sweden,  i.  361  ; 
ii.  5,  227,  323  ;  iv.  72,  185 


414 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


Rastarkalf  (Rastarkalf  r),  in  Norway, 

ii.  32 

Rasvol  (Rasvollr),  Rasvold  in  Norway, 

iii-  393 

Rau  mar  ike  (Raumariki),  Ronierike  in 
Norway,  i.  148,  324,  325,  329,  341, 
344,  357,  358,  360,  385  ;  ii.  89,  122, 
227,  288,  301,  349,  350,  352,  353,  355 ; 
43,.  44  ;  iv.  17,  24,  221,  290 
Raum  River,  Glonimen  River  in  Nor- 
way,  i.  328  344  ;  ii.  31 1,  325 
Rnumsdal  (Raumsdalr),  Romsdal  in 
Norway,  i.  352,  355,  385  ;  ii.  19,  56, 
64,  89,  93,  123,  156,  227  ;  iii.  33,  133  ; 
iv.  78,  217,  305,  310 
Ravensere,  iv.  53 

Re  (Re),  Ramnes  in  Norway,  iii.  330  ; 
i.v-  3’4,  3r7 

Reidgotaland  (BeiSgotaland),  Jutland 
in  Denmark,  i.  291 

Reikiaholar  (Reykjaliolar),  in  Icelaud, 
iv.  225 

Rein  (Rein),  in  Norway,  iv.  54,  55,  242 
Reinulain  (Reinsletta),  in  Norway  i. 

389 

Reykholt,  in  Iceland,  i.  239.  241,  242 
Reykjanes,  in  Iceland,  ii.  118,  230 
Reyr,  Ror  in  Norway,  iv.  265,  266,  273, 
274,  281,  301 

Rhine  River  (Rin),  i.  10,  13,  48.  49  ;  iv 

367 


Rhodes,  i.  117 

Rhode  Island,  i.  199,  221,  226,  229 
Ribe,  in  Denmark,  iv.  370 
Rimul,  Romul  in  Norway,  ii.  145 
Rinansey  (Riuansey),  one  of  the  Ork- 
»eys,  i.  378,  380  ;  iii.  3,  4 
Ringarike  (Hringariki),  Ringerike  in 

Norway,  i.  335,  34G  343,  344,  375, 
385  ;  11.  158,  281,  355  ;  in.  43,  81  ;  iv. 
24,  347 


Ringkiobingfiord  in  Denmark,  ii.  257 
Ringsaker  (Ringisakr  or  Hringisakr), 
in  Norway,  i.  344,  367;  ii.  350,  352, 
354 


Ringsted  (HringstaSir),  in  Denmark 

iv.  184 

llingunes  (Hringunes),  Ringnes  in  Nor 
way,  ii  301,  311,  353  ;  iii.  81,  410 
Rockcastle  Creek,  i.  226 
Roeskilde  (Hroiskelda),  Roskilde  ii 
Denmark,  i.  274  ;  iii.  157^  321  •  iv 
^  369,  370 

Rogaland,  Stavanger  district  in  Nor¬ 
way,  i.-  363,  387,  395,  396  ;  ii.  IO,  58. 
89,  93,  123,  I52,  156,  l6l,  201,  206, 
227,  270,  302 ;  iii.  44,  50,  191,  219, 
252,  259,  290 

Roman  Empire,  i.  6-8,  15,  53,  58,  138, 
164,  314 

Rome  (Rum  orRumaborg),i.  6,  8,  10  11 
16,  34,  4.1,  63,  85,  88,  138,  208,  340  ; 
n.  273  ;  iii.  68,  142,  303,  304  ;  iv.  107, 
I25,  159,  248,  249,  324,  361 
Ronaldsa,  South  (Rongvaldsey),  one  of 
the  Orkneys,  ii.  139  ;  iii.  4 


Rouen  (RuSa  or  Ruciuborg),  in  France, 
i-  75,  l6r  ;  ii-  268,  274,  275  ;  iii.  144, 
145,  317 ;  iy.  25,  26,  29,  50 
Rugen,  Isle  of,  ii.  209 
Russia  (GarSariki),  i.  8,  177,  186,  274 ; 
ii.  76-80,  98,  102,  109,  iii,  135,  137, 

’94,  23°,  312,  328,  392,  397,  39s ;  iii- 
200,  205,  210,  211,  213,  219,  245.  261, 
265,  28i,  292,  294,  301,  305,  306,  348, 
349,  366-368 

Rydiokul  (Ryftjokull),  in  Norway,  iv. 

338,  339  . 

Rygiarbit,  in  Norway,  iii.  179  ;  iv.  301, 
328 

Rykinsvik  (Rykinsvik),  Rbkensviken 

in  Norway,  i.  341 


S^EHEIMRUD  (Saiheimrui5),  iv.  252 
Saet  (Ssett),  Sidon  in  Syria,  iv.  126 
Saint  Albaus,  i.  15,  157 
Saint  Angelo,  Cape,  iv.  127 
Saint  Michel,  Mount,  ii.  265 
Saint  Lawrence,  Gulf  of,  i.  210,  21 1, 
217 

Saltnes,  near  Throndhjem,  iv.  346 
Salten  fiord  (Salpti),'  in  Norway,  ii. 

Saltvik  (Saltvlk),  in  Norway,  ii.  200 
Sand  (Sandr),  in  Norway,  iv.  225 
Saudbridge  (Sandbru),  in  Bergen,  iv. 
257 

Sandey,  one  of  the  Hebrides,  iv.  92 
Sandver,  in  Norway,  iii.  91 
Sandvik  (Saudvik),  Sandwich,  on  one 
of  the  Orkneys,  ii.  113  ;  ii.  7,  12 
Sandwich  Isles,  i.  225 
Sarp  (Sarpr),  waterfall  in  the  Glom- 
men,  in  Norway,  ii.  325 
Sarpsborg,  town  in  Norway,  i.  148  ;  ii. 
348,  389,  393,  396  ;  iii.  45-  9°,  99, 
i65,  183  ;  iv.  54,  148,  188,  189,  216, 
329 


Saudungsund  (SauSungssund),  Saude- 
sund,  in  Norway,  ii.  277 
Saurby  (Saurboer),  in  Iceland,  iv.  208 
Saurby  (Saurbceir),  in  Bohuslen,  in 
Sweden,  iv.  284 

Saurhlid  (SaurliliS),  a  part  of  the 
present  Throndhjem,  iii.  275 
Saurhaug  (Saursliaugr),  Saxhaug  in 
Norway,  ii.  16 

Saxland,  the  north-west  of  Germanv, 

i.  13,  131,  274,  307,  322,  382,  388  ; 
11.  12,  101,  103,  108,  109,  150,  247, 
327,  372  ;  iii.  326  ;  iv.  131 

Scandinavia  (Norftrlond),  i.  viii.,  46-48, 
51,  53,  54-  57,  58,  76,  ior,  108,  114, 
.I34,  I57,  j65,  244,  270,  340;  ii.  25; 

’v-  356,  363. 

Scania  (Skani),  Skaane,  i.  177,  320, 
321,  325;  ii-  9,  11,  12,  103,  107,  119- 
121,  253  ;  iii.  143,  150,  156,  157,  163, 

326,  33°,  336,  337,  339-34R 
368  378,  380,  383;  iv.  3,  196,  370 
Scilly  Isles  (Syllmgar),  near  England, 

ii.  no,  iii,  113 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


4i5 


Scotland  (Skotland),  .i.  78,  105,  108, 
114,  132,  180,  196,  237,  245,  264, 
285,  289,  340,  368,  382,  386  ;  ii.  5,  7, 
9,  12,  2i,  no,  335,  403;  iii.  3,  4,  9, 
22,  23,  86,  87,  2 77,  298,  311  ;  iv.  36, 
91,  92,  95,  208,  236,  243,  354.  356 
Seaheim  (Saeheimr),  near  Tonsberg,  in 
Norway,  i.  388,  389 
Seaheim,  in  Nordhordland  in  Norway, 

i.  391  ;  ii.  44 

Seeland  (Sjaland,  Selund  or  Silund), 
Sjaelland  in  Denmark,  i.  274,  275, 
284,  303,  306;  ii.  11,  12,  14,  107,  1 19; 
iii.  143.  144,  157,  330,  331,  334,  335, 
336,  338,  37°,  387;  iv.  3,  11,  14,  55, 
187,  370 

Seine  River  (Signa),  ii.  no,  265,  268 
Sek  Island  (Sekkr),  Sekken  in  Roins- 
dalsfjord,  in  Norway,  iv.  308 
Selardal  (Selardalr),  in  Iceland,  iii. 

329 

Seley  Islands  (Seleyjar),  Sel  Isles  in 
Norway,  iii.  184  ;  iv.  260 
Seliuhverfe(Seljuhverfi),  Jbsunds  parish 
in  Norway,  iv.  79 

Seliupollar,  a  place  in  France  (?),  ii.  264, 
265 

Serkland,  in  Africa,  i.  269 ;  iii.  353, 
360;  iv.  121,  153 
Seville,  iv.  120 

Shetland  (Hjaltland),  i.  76,  78,  125, 
366,  368,  369,  394;  ii.  9,  316;  iii.  19, 
21-23,  277  ;  iv.  36,  91 
Shropshire,  iv.  93 

Sicily  (Sikiley),  i.  6,  165  ;  iii.  353,  354, 
360;  iv.  107,  124,  125 
Sidon  (Saett),  iv.  115,  126 
Sida  (Siffa),  in  Iceland,  i.  266 ;  ii.  170 
Signihlsberg,  i.  275 

Sigtuna  (Sigtuuir),  nearUpsala  in  Swe¬ 
den,  i.  114,  275,  310;  ii.  253;  iii. 
.295,  297,  367 

Sil,  Sel  in  Gudbrandsdal,  iu  Norway, 

iii.  36 

Sile  (Sili),  in  Sweden,  i.  320 
Sil  Plains  (Silvellir),  iii.  36 
Sinholm  Sound  (Siuholmssund),  near 
Bergen,  iv.  153 
Sintre,  in  Portugal,  iv.  119 
Sjaland  (Sjaland),  in  Sweden,  ii.  258 
SjavidSound(Sjaviffarsund),  Bosphorus, 
Hi-  365 

Skagafiord,  ii.  247 
Skager  Rack,  i.  55,  167 
Skalholt  (Skalaliolt),  in  Iceland,  i.  78, 
178,  196,  198  ;  iv.  206 
Skarar  (Skarar),  Skara  in  Sweden,  ii. 
340,  399 

Skardaborg  (Skarffaborg),  Scarborough 
in  England,  iv.  36 

Skareid  (Skaereiff),  in  Norway,  i.  325 
Skarusund,  in  Norway,  ii.  296 
Skarpa,  Skorpa,  an  island  near  Bergen, 

iv.  321 

Skarpasker,  in  Norway,  iv.  244,  245 
Skat  void,  ii.  55 


Skaun,  Stange  parish,  in  Norway,  i. 

348,  349  5  ii-  74,  3*7  ;  iii-  31 
Skaun,  Bbrgseskogu,  iu  Norway,  ii. 

293 

Skegge  Mound  (Skeggjahaugr),  in  Os- 
teraad,  in  Norway,  ii.  170 
Skerdingsstedja  (Skerffingssteffja), 
Skerdingstad  in  Norway,  ii.  142,  166 
Skerfsurd  (Skerfsurff),  Skjaers-Urdeu 
in  Norway,  iii.  194,  196 
Skiotan’s  Ford  (Skjotansvaff),  in  Jut¬ 
land,  i.  292 

Skiptisand  (Skiptisandr),  the  station 
Sand,  in  Norway,  iv.  251 
Skiringsal  (Skiringssalr),  near  Larvik, 
in  Norway,  i.  325 

Skog  (Skogr),  in  Norway,  iv.  311,  318 
Skot,  Skottet,  in  Romsdal,  in  Norway, 
iii.  193 

Skotborg  River  (Skotborgara),  Skod- 
borg  River  iu  Denmark,  iii.  326 
Skrattasker,  Fladeskjer,  in  Agvaldsnes 
in  Norway,  ii.  162 

Skurbagar  (Skurbagar),  near  Ivoug- 
helle,  iv.  199,  200 

Skut  River  (Skuta),  a  river  in  Norway, 

i.  287 

Skye  (Skiff),  one  of  the  Hebrides,  iv. 
9T»  92,  94 

Slesvik  (Slesvik),  i.  171,  382  ;  ii.  106  ; 

iii.  326 ;  iv.  132,  366-370 
Slidre  Lake,  iii.  67 

Slien  fiord  (Sle),  in  Slesvik,  ii.  102, 
106  ;  iii.  326  ;  iv.  369 
Smaland  (Smalbnd),  Smfiland,  in 
Sweden,  iii.  165  ;  iv.  155,  156 
Smalsar  Horn,  Hornelen  iu  Norway, 

ii.  188 

Snasen  Vand,  ii.  295 
Snos  (Snos),  Snaasen  in  Norway,  iv. 
346,  349 

Snowfieldnes,  in  Iceland,  i.  186 
Snowfieldsjokul,  in  Iceland,  i.  179 
Sogn,  in  Norway,  i.  333,  334,  356,  385  ; 

ii.  10,  89,  93-95,  n6,  156,  20 r,  227, 
269,  277  ;  iii.  45,  46,  65,  252,  312,  313, 
3I5 ;  iv.  33,  J09,  214,  262 

Soknarsund,  near  Stavanger  in  Norway, 

iii.  290 

Solbjorg  (Solbjorg),  in  Raurike  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iv.  199,  204 

Sole  (Soli),  in  Norway,  ii.  206  ;  iii.  50, 
5r»  I9°,  395  i  iv-  224 
Soley  Islands  (Soleyjar),  Solor  in  Nor¬ 
way,  i.  323,  324 ;  iii.  44 
Solskel  (Solskel),  an  island  in  Norway, 
i-  352,  354 

Solunds  (Solundir),  Sulen  Islands  in 
Norway,  ii.  116;  iv.  33,  34 
Solve  (Sblvi),  Selven  iu  Norway,  i.  389 
Sondfiord,  in  Norway,  i.  356 
Sotanes  (Sotanes),  iu  Bohuslen  in 
Sweden,  ii.  27 

Sotasker  (Sotasker),  in  Sweden,  ii.  352 
Spain  (Spann),  i.  12,  17,  269;  iv.  118, 

1 19,  120,  240 


416 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


Sparby  (Sparabu),  Sparbuenin  Norway, 

ii.  1 7 ;  iii.  31,  107 

Sparbyggja  (Sparbyggjafylki),  Spar- 
buen,  Stod,  and  Snaasen  in  Norway, 
i-  348,  349 ;  ii-  16 

Stad  (StaSr),  Statland  in  Norway,  i. 

186,  355,  363  ;  ii-  27,  3°,  31,  64,  65. 
92-94,  124,  126,  156,  205 ;  iii.  44,  141, 
179,  182,  192  ;  iv.  216 
Stad  (Sta<5r),  in  the  district  Fosen  in 
Norway,  i.  389 

Staf  (Stafr),  in  Norway,  ii.  25  ;  iii.  228, 
273 

Stafabrekka,  iii.  34 

Stanford  Bridge  (StanforSa  bryggjur), 
in  England,  iv.  39,  358 
Stangar  (Stangir),  Stange  in  Norway, 
iv.  340 

Staurrin  (Staurrinn),  ii.  193,  194 
Stavanger  (Stafangr),  in  Norway,  i.  127, 

356,  3 63,  364;  iii-  3X9;  iv.  199. 
T94 

Steig,  in  Gudbrandsdal,  in  Norway, 

iii.  81,  376;  iv.  82,  344 

Stein  (Steinn),  in  Esthouia,  i.  285,  286, 
311,  341  ;  ii.  319  ;  iii.  182 
Steinavag  (Steinavagr),  Steinavaag,  in 
Norway,  iii.  192;  iv.  307 
Steinbjorg  (Steinbjorg),  Steinbjerg, 
near  Throndhjem,  iv.  76 
Steinker,  Steinkjser  in  Norway,  ii.  295- 
297  ;  iii.  33 

Stiflusund,  in  Norway,  i.  328,  329 
Stiklestad  (StiklastaSir),  in  Verdal  in 
Norway,  i.  102,  109,  152,  250,  254'; 
ii.  248  ;  iii.  238,  239,  243,  253,  256, 
261,  267,  270,  273-276,  281,  303,  309, 
3IQ,  312,  346,  348;  iv.  56,  293,  294, 
358,  359 

Stim  (Stimr),  Stemhesten  in  Norway, 

iv.  154 

Stjoradal  (Stjoradalr),  Stjordal  in  the 
Throndhjem  district,  i.  249,  348  ;  ii. 
55,  297,  3r7 

Stjornvelta  (Stjornvelta),  near  Bergen, 
iv.  269 

Stockholm,  i.  1,  114,  293,  325 
Stodreim  (StoSreimr),  Storeim  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iv.  239 

Stoksund  (Stokksund),  Norrstrom  in 
Stockholm,  i.  293,  294  ;  ii.  253,  254 
Stord  (StorS),  Stordoen  in  Hordaland 
in  Norway,  ii.  36,  44,  45 
Straumsey,  Stronsay,  one  of  the  Ork¬ 
neys,  i.  205,  209  ;  iii.  136 
Straumeynes  (Straumeyjarues?),.  i.  298 
Straumfiord,  i.  205,  206 
S triad,  near  Throndhjem,  i.  348  :  ii. 
165,  294,  319 

Studla  (StuSla),  Stole  in  Norway,  ii. 

200  ;  iv.  239,  259 
Suabia,  iv.  131 

Sudathorp  (Su'SaJjorp),  Suderup  in 
Slesvik,  iii.  380 

Sudermannaland  (SuSmannaland),  Sd- 
dermanland  in  Sweden,  ii.  358 


Sudervik  (SuSrvik),  Syndervig  in  Den¬ 
mark,  ii.  257 

Sudervirke  (SuSrvirki),  Southwark,  a 
part  of  London,  ii.  259,  261 
Suffolk,  i.  131 

Sula  (Sula),  in  Yerdal  in  Norway,  iii. 
226 

Suit;,  Sylte,  in  Valdai,  in  Norway,  iii. 
194 

Sundal  (Sunndalr),  in  Sweden,  iv.  96 
Surnadal  (Surnadalr),  Surendalin  Nor¬ 
way,  iii.  iii 

Sutherland  (SutMand),  in  Scotland,  i. 
78,  369  ;  iii.  5,  6 

Svimraros  (Svimraross),  where  Cim- 
brisliamn  is  now  situated,  in  Scania, 
iv.  156 

Svinasund  (Svinasund),  Svinesund,  be¬ 
tween  Smaalenene  in  Norway  and 
Bohuslen  in  Sweden,  i.  357  ;  ii.  227, 
322>  323 

Svithoid  (SviJ>jo$  or  Sviaveldi),  Sweden, 
Swedes  (Sviar),  i.  vii.,  2,  44,  50,  51, 
53,  74,  75,  84,  no,  112,  120,  129,  131, 
145,  147,  157,  217,  240,  245,  248,  262- 
264,  269,  270,  273-275,  280-289,  292, 

295,  297-317,  320-324,  343,  35s,  367, 
382;  ii.  16-18,  74-76,  107,  133,  134, 
148,  192-196,  204,  208,  216,  217,  219, 
251-254,  288,  313,  316,  319,  323,  329, 
334,  338,  345,  346,  357-36o,  364,  382, 
384,  392,  397-400,  406,  408-410 ;  in. 
44,  88,  89,  109,  126,  127,  143,  150, 
152,  155,  x56>  i58,  159,  x99,  2°o,  2j6, 
217,  219-222,  223,  230,  242,  245,  292, 
294-297,  301,  305,  325,  337,  347,  367- 
370,  383 ;  iv.  16,  65,  76,  96,  99, 103, 

x33,  293,  34i,  35°,  356,  361 
Svold  (Svoldr),  a  small  island  near 
Rugen,  ii.  116,  209,  210,  217 
Syria  (S^rlaud),  iv.  126  . 


Tagus  River,  i.  49 

Tanais  River,  Don  in  Russia,  i.  47,  270  ; 
ii.  25 

Tanaquisl  (Tanakvisl),  i.  270 
Taunton  River,  i.  214,  217,  220 
Taurrin  (Taurr  and  Taurrinn),  Soder 
Torn,  near  Stockholm,  i.  294 
Thames  (Temps),  i.  49;  ii.  259,  261; 
iv.  368 

Thanet,  Isle  of,  i.  5,  9 
Theksdal  (peksdalr),  Texdal  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iv.  79 

Thelemark  (J^elamork),  in  Norway,  i. 
55,  363,  385  5  ii-  62,  200  ;  iv.  259,  341, 
350 

Thing-nes  (pinganes),  Dingenes  in 
Norway,  ii.  95 

Thing  field  (pingvdllr),  in  Iceland,  iii. 
74 

Thioda  (pjofta),  Thy  in  Denmark,  iii. 
387,  388 

Thiotande  (pjofcandi),  in  Norway,  iii. 
*93 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


417 


Thiotta  (J?jotta),  Tjoto  in  Norway,  ii 
174  ;  iii.  24,  25,  33,  70,  123, 162,  164 
1 78,  179,  211,  217,  248,  251,  262 
Thoptar  (J^optar),  Tofte  in  Norway  i, 
372 

Thorsberg  (porsbjorg),  in  Norway,  i. 
389 

Thorshavn  (J>orshofn),  on  one  of  the 
Fareys,  iii.  136 

Tlioteu  (j>otn),  in  Norway,  i.  325,  329, 
333,  344,  38S  5  iii-  43-  67 ;  iv.  347 
Thraelaberg,  near  Oslo,  Norway,  iv.  292 
Thrandarnes  (prandarnes),  iii."  48,  72 
Throndhjem  (prandheimr),  in  Nor¬ 
way,  i.  15,  7 1,  74,  no,  129,  148,  152, 
T°3»  I7I»  r77,  236,  242,  249,  310, 
348-357,  362,  385,  389,  39°,  395,  397  ; 

3  5,  9,  IO,  i5_27,  48,  49,  52-58, 
63,  65,  66,  68,  80,  88-93,  108,  122, 
I23,  146-148,  156,  164-168,  173,  174, 
180,  190,  199-201,  217,  227,  269,  289, 
294_301,  3I°-3I9-  327 ;  iii.  2,  23,  24, 
27o  28,  3°’  3i,  33,  45,  68,  75,  107, 
IQ8,  11 5,  1 18,  226,  227,  230,  245,  246, 
249,  251,  258,  276,  278-281,  284,  287, 
288,  291,  292,  297,  298,  303,  308,  315, 
332,  336,  342,  381,  382,  393,  395,  396, 
400,  402,  403,  412 ;  iv.  2,  5,  16,  35, 
61,  62,  73,  74,  78,  79,  81,  103,  113, 
*39,  I45,  I57,  I9I,  215,  216,  226,  228, 
231,  236-238,  248,  253,  258-260,  268, 
273,  281,  282,  301,  303,  304,  310,  319, 
3g°’  323>  325,  33°,  332,  343,  346,  349, 

Thrudvang  (J^ruftvangr),  the  god  Thor’s 
abode,  i.  275 
Thule,  i.  39 
Thursa,  iv.  243 

Tialdasund  (Tjaldasund),  Tjelesund  in 
Norway,  iv.  225 
Tiber,  i.  49 

Tiundaland  (Tiundaland),  in  Sweden 
i.  3I3  ;  ii-  200,  358,  359 
Todar  fiord  (ToSarfjdrSr),  Tafjord  in 
Norway,  in.  194,  203 
Tornea,  i.  172 
Tours,  ii.  267 
Troy,  i.  272 

Tumathorp  (Tumathorp),  Tumarp  in 
Scania,  iv.  156 

Tungur,  near  Stavanger,  in  Norway,  iii. 

loo 

1  unsberg  (Tunsberg),  Tdnsberg  in  Nor- 
way  1.  236,  357,  360,  3 77,  387,  397  ; 

301,  372,  375 ;  iii-  2, 44, 46,  82, 

85,  176,  179,  183,  184;  iv.  54,  189, 
220,  223,  236,  301-304,  31 1,  313,  318, 
n,  383,  35° 

Turkey  (Tyrkland),  i.  8,  273,  285 

Tuskaland  (Tuskaland),  in  France,  ii. 
267 


UlST.  See  Ivist. 

Ulfasund  (TJlfasund),  Ulvesund 
Norway,  ii.  30,  277;  hi.  3x4 

VOL.  IV. 


Ulfkel’s  Land  (Ulkelsland),  in  Eng¬ 
land  (?),  ii.  262, 

Ulfreks  Fiord  (UlfreksfjorSr),  in  Ire¬ 
land,  ii.  382  ;  iii.  10 
Ullaraker  (Ullarakr),  Ullerfikr  in 
Sweden,  ii.  360,  361,  408 
Ulster  (Ula0stir),  in  Ireland,  iv.  109, 
no 

Unarheim  (Unarlieimr),  Onereim  in 
Norway,  iv.  330 

United  States  of  America,  i.  13,  44, 
165,  229 

Uphaug  (Upphaugr),  Ophaug  in  Nor¬ 
way,  ii.  126 

Uplands  (Upplond),  Upland  people 
(Upplendingar),  in  Norway,  i.  146, 
285,  308,  324,  329,  333,  344,  346,  362, 
368,  372,  374,  384,  385,  39 7  ;  ii.  4,  5, 
J5,  59,  60,  62,  63,  73,  122,  126,  132, 
i36,  138,  147,  287,  288,  292,  310,  348, 
371-  377-  4°4>  4°8,  409  ;  iii.  27,  33, 
34,  44,  67,  68,  80,  90,  169,  198,  230, 
239,  247,  280,  281,  286,  377,  394,395, 
400;  iv.  6,  15,  i7>  20,  25,  73,  74,  7 8, 

1 12,  149,  153,  1:84,  217,  250,  254,  310, 
311  320,  330,  337,  340,  347 
Upsala  (Uppsalir  or  Uppsalr),  in  Swe¬ 
den,  i.  84,  110-112,  145,  146,  264,  275, 
282,  284,  286,  289,  290,  296,  299,  301, 

3°2,  3°5*  3°9.  312,  313,  315,  316,  319, 
322,  345  ;  111.  63,  196,  253,  344,  346, 

357  359-  363,  366,  384,  400,  403-406  ; 
iv.  361 

Usa  (Usa),  in  Northumberland,  in 
England,  iv.  37 

Utstein  (Utsteinn),  Utsteno  in  Nor¬ 
way,  i.  391 ;  ih.  189,  192 

Vadla  (Vatila),  in  Norway,  i.  326,  327 
Vagar  (Vagar),  Vaagen  in  Lofoden,  ii. 

J57,  230;  iii.  71,  72,  119;  iv.  133,  226 
Vagar  (Vagi),  Vaage  in  Gudbraudsdal, 
m  Norway,  iii.  34,  36,  38 
Vagarost  (Vagarost),  in  Gudbrandsdal 
in  Norway,  iii.  36 

Vagnvik,  strand  at  ( Vagnvikastrond), 
in  Norway,  iv.  79 
Val  (Vollr),  in  Icelantl,  iii.  367 
V aide  (Valdi),  Wall  in  England,  ii.  275 
Valdai  (V alldalr),  Valdalen  in  Norway, 
iii.  194,  203 

Valders  (Valdres),  in  Norway,  i.  345  ; 
ii.  131  ,  iii.  65,  66 

Valhal  (Valholl),  i.  3,  109,  115,  279, 
290 ;  ii.  1,  2,  44,  46 

Valland,  the  north-western  part  of 
France,  i.  372,  382;  ii.  no,  258,  264, 
267,  268,  274,  275 ;  iii.  144,  413  ;  iv. 
28,  107,  1 17,  240 
Valsnes,  in  Norway,  iv.  226 
Vambarholm  (Vambarholm),  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iv.  80 

Vanaheim  (Vanaheimr),  i.  270,  272,  285 
Vanaland,  i.  270,  285 
Vang  (Vangr),  Vossevangen  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iii.  65 


2  D 


4 1 8 


GEOGRAPHICAL  INDEX. 


Vapnafiord  (VapnafjorSr),  in  Iceland, 

ii.  117,  118 

Yardyniar  ( VarSynjar),  in  Dalsland, 
Sweden,  iv.  96 

Varna,  Vei’no  cloister  in  Norway,  i. 

326 

Varnes,  Vernes  in  Norway,  ii.  25,  166 
Varrande  (Varrandi),  in  Peituland  in 
France,  ii.  267 

Vatnsby  (Vatnsbu),  Vasbo  in  Sweden, 

iii.  200 

Vatnsdal  (Vatnsdalr),  in  Iceland,  iii. 
203 

Vear,  Vedbo  in  Dalsland,  Sweden,  iv.  96 
Vedrey  (Vefirey),  Vaderoerne  in 
Sweden,  iii.  164 

Veey  (Veey),  Veo  in  Romsdal  in  Nor¬ 
way,  iv.  305,  308 

Veggen  (Veggin),  in  Ranrike  in  Nor¬ 
way,  ii.  61 

Vegsund,  in  Norway,  iii.  193 
Vendel  (Vendill),  Vendsyssel  in  Den¬ 
mark,  i.  306,  307,  326  ;  iii.  29 
Vendilskage  (Vendilskagi),  the  Scaw 
in  Denmark,  iii.  387,  389  ;  iv.  301 
Vener  Lake  (Vsenir),  Vaenern  in 
Sweden,  i.  308,  322,  323,  362;  ii. 
^  323  ;  iv.  20,  96,  97 
Veradal  (Veradalr),  Verdal  in  the 
Throndhjem  district,  i.  249,  348  ;  ii. 
25,  316  ;  iii.  30,  31,  226,  228,  235,  238, 
245,  264,  273,  309,  310,  317 
Vermaland,  Vermeland  in  Sweden,  i. 
322,  323,  325,  329,.  337,  358,  360,  362; 
ii.  18,  358,  400;  iii.  200,  220;  iv.  17, 
96 

Vestfold  in  Norway,  i.  32^-332,  341, 

343,  357,  385,  388,  395 ;  ii.  5,  48,  89, 
133,  281 _ 

Vestland,  in  Norway,  iii.  330 
Vestmare  (Vestmarar),  in  Norway,  i. 

327 

Vestribygd,  i.  176,  186,  204 
Vettaland  in  Bohuslen  in  Sweden,  ii. 
326 ;  iv.  285 

Viborg  (Vebjarg),  in  Denmark,  iii.  320, 
381  ;  iv.  370 

Vidar  (ViSir),  Vie  in  Norway,  ii.  74 
Viggia  (Vigg  or  Viggja),  Viggen  in  the 
Throndhjem  district,  ii.  295 ;  iii.  238, 
31 1  ;  iv.  78 

Vikar  (Vikar),  Vik  in  Brono  parish  in 
Norway,  iv.  226 

Vikarskeid  (Vikarsskei'S),  in  Iceland, 
ii.  118 

Vikeu  (Vik  or  Vikin),  the  country 
around  Christiania  fjord  in  Norway, 
i*  55,  357,  368,  371,  3 77,  381,  385, 
387,  388,  395,  397 ;  ii.  3-5,  10,  12,  14, 
27.  49,  52,  61-63,  73,  86,  89,  90,  1 16, 
126,  147-151,  157,  156-161,  189,  190, 


227,  280,  301-303,  31 1,  322,  324-327, 
330-332,  368,  372,  388  ;  iii.  2,  44,  45, 
80,  81,  88,  99,  107,  165,  176,  183,  184, 
187,  276,  290,  382,  414;  iv.  2,  16,  20, 
3i.  73,  75,  76,  82,  83,  86,  90,  97,  98, 
102,  103,  181,  185,  187,  188,  190,  207, 
2x5,  219,  220,  222,  223,  228,  230,  241, 
242,  254,  257,  258,  260,  262,  263,  265, 
266,  269,  281-284,  301,  304,  311-313, 
3l8,  321,  323,  324,  328,  329,  332-334, 
337,  340,  342,  343 

Vindland,  the  shores  of  the  Baltic  in¬ 
habited  by  the  Vinds,  ii.  11,  12,  94, 
100,  102,  103,  109,  iii,  1 19,  120,  12 1, 
I92,  i93>  j96,  19 7>  j98,  207-210,  225, 
383,  384,  405,  409 ;  iii.  276,  322,  324- 
329,  342,  348,  405  ;  iv.  174,  176,  196- 
202,  204,  222,  249 

Vingulmark  (Vingulmork),  in  Norway, 
i.  328,  329,  331,  334,  335,  341,  344, 
357,  360,  384 ;  ii.  5,  89,  98,  348 
Vinland,  i.  180,  192-233 ;  ii.  202,  203, 
207,  236,  237,  241,  242,  244,  247 
Viskardal  (Viskardalr),  Viskedal  in 
Sweden,  iv.  76,  77 

Vist,  in  Romsdal,  in  Norway,  iv.  225 
Vistula,  i.  49,  53  ;  ii.  195 
Volga  River,  iii.  21 1 
Vors  (Vors),  Voss  in  Norway,  ii.  66, 
336  ;  iii.  65 

Vorve  (Vorvi),  in  Jutland,  in  Denmark, 

i.  291,  292 

Vulgaria,  Bulgaria,  iii.  21 1.  See  Bul¬ 
garia. 

Wales  (Bretland),  i.  132,  278,  372,  382; 

ii.  7,  1 10  ;  iv.  93,  94,  354.  See  Bret¬ 
land. 

Wallis  Island,  iii.  10 
Wei  wick,  iv.  245 

Westfiord  (VestfjorSr),  in  Lofoden,  in 
Norway,  i.  309;  iii.  iii,  122 
Westman  Isles,  in  Iceland,  i.  50;  iii. 
75 

Westmanland  (Vestmannaland),  in 
Sweden,  ii.  358 

White  Sea  (Gandvik),  in  Russia,  i.  6, 17, 
T99,  382  ;  ii-  65  ;  iii.  90,  95 
Whitings  Isle  (Hvitingsey),  in  Norway, 

ii.  321  ;  iii.  100 
Wight,  Isle  of,  ii.  264 

William  shy  (Vilhjalmsbcer),  in  France, 

.  ii.  265 

Winchelsea,  iv.  52 

Winchester  (Vincestr),  in  England, 

iii.  317 

York  (Jorvik),  in  England,  i.  130,  163  ; 
ii.  6 ;  iv.  39,  358 

Yrjar,  Orland  in  the  Throndhjem  dis¬ 
trict,  i.  348  ;  ii.  66,  165,  170 ;  iii.  399 


//,7ir  '''W1'  ' 

V/fM'  r 


V\K  autland 


idhus 


villi//.  '//l\ 


y"  •*Mw'  ;£  J' 


h, i>'  »im\v 


^nv''- 


Waf/l^V 


^/rtum 


\  CT7blo^  \ 

/  ^  \ 

a\\»uw.  Mu/*  :aV.Iiw^  ’ 


Meczin 


t.pi 

Palermo 


Brig'"'"Msport-i 

S.  Jo  cow 


pt*  s'*  %' 

■£."■  '  L-f 


OF  THE  WORLD 


Leskobon* 


AS  KNOWN  TO  THE  NORTHMEN 


GetsiS} 


Nocd'°r 


Scale  of  En^Usli  Miles 


+oo 


Meridian O. of  Ferro 


Cojiyri^it 


John.  Barth.olojn.ewr  &  Co,  Bdiar 


/Langur.; 


gardnpdj. 


*1  >far. 


11  "Xi  m-Vs 

l<,0rfa>wi£ 


Sto"! 

(Stod 


I l.Veti *\ 


I/at't'x 
flat's  i 


jiljiVrJr 


5  /in  <71 


Bising* 


'(Oland) 


l  jit  of  May, 


fn.*si/n 

wiatv 


t  ;ki  'E 

mmniM  0s1 

ILLUSTRATING  THE 

SETTLED  ENTS  ©f  the  N(G 

IN'  THE 

X™  CENTURY. 


MflOB! 


English  Miles 
100 


Jolm  Bartholomew  <$.  Co.,  EcLiif 


z1 


I 


9 


< 


